ELECTRIC & GAS

SERVICE
REQUIREMENTS
(TD-7001M)

2017–2018
Visit us at
www.pge.com/greenbook
 Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E)
Electric and Gas Service Requirements
(TD-7100M)

Architects and Engineers

Electrical Contractors
Plumbing Contractors
City and County Building Inspectors
Manufacturers of Electrical Equipment
Pacific Gas and Electric Company Employees

2017–2018 Edition
(Supersedes All Previous Editions and Revisions)
The Electric and Gas Service Requirements is a guide to Pacific Gas and Electric
Company (PG&E) requirements and policies for establishing electric and gas service to
new or remodeled applicant installations.
In addition to the utility requirements, local or state officials may stipulate additional
provisions for the installation of equipment and materials that are in their authorized
areas of responsibility and jurisdiction.
Should you have any questions regarding this manual, please call your local PG&E
representative (see Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” starting on
Page iv.).
Applicant gas and electric service and meter installation arrangements are subject to
PG&E’s review and approval. Applicants should contact their local PG&E representatives
as soon in the planning process as possible.
NOTE: The acronym PG&E is used throughout this manual to designate Pacific
Gas and Electric Company.

i 2017
The PG&E Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) is updated and published
yearly. The 2017−2018 Greenbook supersedes all previous editions and revisions and the
requirements, here in, are effective until a new revision is released the following year.

Notice: This Manual Is Subject to Change

Information and requirements in this manual are subject to change over

time.
PG&E may revise its design and construction documents relating to applicant service
requirements between updates to this manual. Except when required by law, the version
of the design and construction document in effect on the date the applicant’s service
design is approved and signed-off by the PG&E supervisor determines the requirements
that the design must meet. These requirements apply as long as applicants complete
approved projects within 12 months. If the applicant has not initiated construction within
12 months of PG&E’s initial approval, PG&E may initiate the review of the design and,
if warranted, refresh the cost estimate. If the applicant does not fulfill obligations under
the extension agreement, PG&E may, at its discretion, cancel the agreement (see
Provisions Form 62−0982, Section 20). PG&E can then request another review of the
design before approving construction activities.

The online versions of the Electric & Gas Service Requirements, located at
www.pge.com/greenbook, are updated as quickly as possible when changes occur. The
bound manual is not reprinted until the next scheduled print date regardless of changes in
processes or requirements. Therefore, it is imperative that applicants for all gas and
electric service projects consult the online version of this book
(www.pge.com/greenbook) before finalizing project plans.

2017 ii
 Del
Norte
Siskiyou
Modoc

PG&E:
Trinity Shasta
Lassen
More than
Humboldt
just a utility . . .
Tehama Plumas a full-service company!
Butte
Mendocino Glenn Sierra
6 For more information, please
Nevada contact your local PG&E project
Sutter
Lake Colusa Yuba Placer coordinator.

Yolo El Dorado
Alpine
7 Sonoma Napa Sacra­
mento Amador
5
Solano Calaveras
Marin
San Tuolumne
Contra Mono
Joaquin
2 Costa
San Francisco
Alameda Stanislaus Mariposa
1
San Mateo
Santa
Clara Merced 4
Santa Cruz Madera

Fresno
3 San Inyo
Benito

Tulare
Monterey
Kings

San Luis Obispo Kern

San Bernardino
Santa Barbara

Ventura
Los Angeles

# Denotes PG&E area. Orange Riverside

See the “Service
Planning Office Contact
Information” starting on
Page iv. Imperial
San Diego

iii 2017
Table FM-1 Service Planning Office Contact Information

Service Planning Office Contact Information

External Inspection Desk

PG&E Local
Address Zip Code Phone
Area Headquarters
Number Phone Email Address

1108 Murphys (209) 942-1495

5 Angels Camp 95222 (209) 942−1495 [email protected]
Grade Rd (209) 942-1408
(925) 779-7757
2 Antioch 2111 Hillcrest Ave 94509 (925) 779−7757 [email protected]
(925) 779-7750
(530) 889-3271
333 Sacramento
6 Auburn 95603 (530) 889−3270 (530) 889-5165 [email protected]
St
(530) 889-5183
(661) 398-3989
4 Bakersfield 4101 Wible Rd 93313 (661) 398−5931 [email protected]
(661)398-5864
(530) 894-4734
6 Chico 460 Rio Lindo Ave 95926 (530) 894−4749 [email protected]
(530) 894-4414
(925) 779-7757
2 Concord 1030 Detroit Ave 94518 (925) 674−6457 [email protected]
(925) 779-7750
(408) 725-2202
3 Cupertino 10900 N. Blaney 95014 (408) 725−3325 [email protected]
(408) 725-7773
(559) 263-7400
4 Dinuba 8058 Union St 93618 (559) 591−2314 [email protected]
(559) 263-5488
(707) 445-5533
7 Eureka 2555 Myrtle Ave 95501 (707) 445−5533 [email protected]
(707) 445-5528
(510) 784-3317
2 Fremont 41800 Boscell Rd 94538 (510) 784-3210 [email protected]
NA

705 P St, 2nd (559) 263-7400

4 Fresno 93760 (559) 263−7400 [email protected]
Floor (559) 263-5488
(916) 201-0168
6 Grass Valley 788 Taylorville Rd 95949 (530) 477−3244 [email protected]
(530) 477-3269
(510) 784-3317
2 Hayward 24300 Clawiter Rd 94545 (510) 784−3210 [email protected]
NA

12626 Jackson (209) 942-1495

5 Jackson 95642 (209) 942−1495 [email protected]
Gate Rd (209) 942-1408
(510) 784-3317
2 Liverrmore 998 Murietta Blvd 94550 (925) 373−2620 [email protected]
NA
(209) 726-6373
5 Madera 2871 Airport Dr 93637 (559) 675−2220 [email protected]
(209) 726-6446

226 E. Yosemite (209) 942-1495

5 Manteca 95336 (209) 942−1495 [email protected]
St (209) 942-1408
(800) 564-5080
5 Mariposa 5166 Jones St 95338 (209) 966−3446 [email protected]
(209) 726-7641

2017 iv
 Service Planning Office Contact Information, continued

External Inspection Desk

PG&E Local
Address Zip Code Phone
Area Headquarters
Number Phone Email Address
(530) 634-6442
6 Marysville 29 4th St 95901 (530) 634−6442 [email protected]
(530) 634-6475
(209) 726-6373
5 Merced 3185 M St 95348 (800) 564−5080 [email protected]
(209) 726-6446

1524 N. Carpenter (209) 726-6373

5 Modesto 93637 (800) 564−5080 [email protected]
Rd (209) 726-6446
(831) 784-3614
3 Monterey 2311 Garden Rd 93940 (831) 648-3224 [email protected]
(831) 648-3252

1850 Soscol Ave, (707) 257-5918

7 Napa 94559 (707) 257−5918 NA
Suite 105 (707) 257-5938
(209) 726-6373
5 Oakhurst 50150 Rd 426 93644 (800) 564−5080 [email protected]
(209) 726-6446
(510) 437-2616
2 Oakland 4801 Oakport St 94601 (510) 437−2233 [email protected]
(510) 437-2144

4636 Missouri Flat (530) 621-7265

6 Placerville 95667 (530) 621−7265 [email protected]
Rd (530) 621-7258

3600 Meadow (530) 246-6546

6 Redding 96002 (530) 246−6537 [email protected]
View Dr (530) 246-6541
(510) 231-2939
2 Richmond 1100 S. 27th St 94804 (510) 231−2852 [email protected]
(510) 231-2872

5555 Florin (916) 386-5112

6 Sacramento 95826 (916) 386−5112 [email protected]
Perkins Rd (916) 386-5288
(831) 784-3614
3 Salinas 401 Work St 93901 (831) 784−3614 [email protected]
(831) 784-3634
(650) 598-7271
1 San Carlos 275 Industrial Rd 94070 (650) 598−7204 [email protected]
(650) 598-7297
(415) 695-3500
1 San Francisco 2180 Harrison St 94110 (415) 695−3500 NA
(415) 695-3525
(408) 299-1024
3 San Jose 308 Stockton Ave 95126 (408) 299−9500 [email protected]
(408) 299-1087
(805) 546-5247
4 San Luis Obispo 4325 Higuera 93401 (805) 546−5247 NA
NA
(415) 257-3130
7 San Rafael 1220 Andersen Dr 94901 (415) 257−3431 NA
(415) 257-3429
(831) 784-3614
3 Santa Cruz 615 7th Ave 95062 (831) 479−3114 [email protected]
(831) 479-3115
(805) 546-5247
4 Santa Maria 2445 Skyway Dr 93455 (805) 346−2241 NA
NA

v 2017
 Service Planning Office Contact Information, continued

External Inspection Desk

PG&E Local
Address Zip Code Phone
Area Headquarters
Number Phone Email Address
(707) 579-6418
3965 Occidental
7 Santa Rosa 95401 (707) 579−6476 (707) 579-6418 [email protected]
Rd

(559) 263-7400
4 Selma 2139 Sylvia St 93662 (559) 891−2143 [email protected]
(559) 263-5488
(209) 942-1495
5 Stockton 4040 West Ln 95204 (209) 942−1495 [email protected]
(209) 942-1408
160 Cow Meadow (805) 546-5247
4 Templeton 93446 (805) 434−4460 NA
Pl NA
(707) 468-3914
7 Ukiah 2641 N. State St 95482 (707) 468−3914 [email protected]
(707) 468-3967
(707) 449-5720
6 Vacaville 158 Peabody Rd 95688 (707) 449−5720 [email protected]
(707) 449-5774
(530) 661-5609
6 Woodland 242 N. West St 95695 (530) 661−5609 [email protected]
(530) 661-5652

2017 vi
 Customer Quick Reference Notes

Greenbook Section Number, Title, and/or Topic Page #

vii 2017
 Customer Quick Reference Notes, continued

Greenbook Section Number, Title, and/or Topic Page #

2017 viii
 Table of Contents

Contents Page

Notice: This Manual Is Subject to Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Service Planning Office Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Section 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2. Permits and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.3. Applying for Building and Renovation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.4. Changes in Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.5. Additional Commercial and Industrial Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.6. Design and Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.6.1. PG&E’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6.2. Applicant’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6.3. Providing Access to PG&E Electric Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.4. Installing Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.7. Connecting and Sealing Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.8. Access to an Applicant’s Residence, Building, or Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.9. Overhead Electric Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.10. Underground Electric Lines and Gas Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.11. PG&E Safety Training Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.12. SmartMetert Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.13. PG&E Online (Website) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.13.1. Electric and Gas Service Requirements
Manual (aka Greenbook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.13.2. Rates and Tariffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

ix 2017
Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 1 General, continued

1.14. Determining the Service Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.15. Changing an Applicant’s Approved Project or Existing Service Loads . . . . . 1-12

1.15.1. Upgrading, Replacing, Relocating Electric Facilities,
or Adding Power Generation Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.16. Standard Residential Service Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.16.1. Single-Phase Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.16.2. Three-Phase Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.16.3. Mixed-Use Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Section 2 Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2. Procedures for Establishing Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2.1. Establishing New Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2.2. Relocating or Adding Load to an Existing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3. Gas Service Lateral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.2. Branch Service Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.3. Curb Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.4. Joint Utility Service Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.5. Multiple Buildings Located on One Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.6. Mobile Home Parks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2.4. Set Requirements for Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.4.1. Gas Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.4.2. Gas Meter-Set Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2017 x
 Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 2 Gas Service, continued

2.5. Applicant-Owned and Installed Gas Service Piping (e.g., Houseline),

Valves, and Automatic Shut-Off Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.5.1. Service Delivery Point For the Gas Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.5.2. Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.3. Electrically Bonding and Grounding Gas Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.5.4. Applicant-Owned Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Section 3 Electric Service: Underground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2.1. Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2. Establishing Underground Electric Service Responsibilities . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3. Installing Ground Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.4. Installing Equipment Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.5. Installing Overhead and Underground Service for Two or More
Buildings on One Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.6. Inspecting and Approving Overhead and Underground Services . . . 3-5

3.3. Underground Service Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.3.1. Installing Services From Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . 3-5
3.3.2. Installing Services From Overhead Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.3. Installing Conduit for Underground Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.4. Installing PG&E-Only Service Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.5. Installing Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3.6. Selecting Backfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.7. Providing Drainage From the Conduit System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.8. Installing Joint Utility Service Trenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.3.9. Providing a Service-Termination Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.10. Bioswales and Large Wet Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

xi 2017
Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 3 Electric Service: Underground, continued

3.4. Electric Underground Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.4.1. Mandrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2.1. Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.3. Locating Overhead Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.3.1. Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3.2. Two or More Buildings on One Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4. Service Drop Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4.1. Vertical Clearance for Residential, Overhead Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4.2. Clearance Above Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.4.3. Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.4.4. Vertical Clearance on Nonresidential Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4.5. Clearances for a Nonresidential Building Service Drop Using
Cable or Equally Insulated, Open-Wire Service Conductors . . . . . . 4-11
4.4.6. Clearances Around Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.7. Clearance Between Service Drop Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4.8. Clearance From Applicant-Owned Service Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4.5. Service Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4.5.1. Attaching Low-Voltage, Residential, Overhead Service Drops . . . . 4-15
4.5.2. Attaching Low-Voltage, Nonresidential,
Overhead Service Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.5.3. Special Service Attachment Requirements: Areas Subject to Heavy
Snow Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

2017 xii
 Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead, continued

4.6. Attachment Structures (Periscopes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4.6.1. Periscope Clearances and Bracing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.7. Service Weatherheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.8. Service-Entrance Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4.9. Applicant-Owned, Installed, or Furnished Wood Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4.10. Required Vegetation Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

4.10.1. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.10.2. Planning Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.10.3. Existing Overhead Lines Adjacent to Developments . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.10.4. Line Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.10.5. Primary Overhead Distribution Poles in Commercial Orchard
Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.10.6. Removing Vegetation Near Existing, High-Voltage,
Energized Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Section 5 Electric Metering: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2. General Conditions and Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2.1. Approved Metering and Service Termination Equipment . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.2. Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service Termination
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.3. Applicant Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.4. Requirements for Installing Secondary Terminations (0−600 Volt) in
Metering Equipment Requiring CTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

xiii 2017
Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 5 Electric Metering: General, continued

5.3. Electric Meters: General Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3.1. Basic Meter Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2. Prohibited Meter and Service Equipment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.3. Locating and Grouping Multiple Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.4. Electric Meter Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

5.4. Meter Heights, Clearances, Enclosures, and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.4.1. Meter Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.2. Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.3. Meter Set Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.4. Working Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.4.5. Barricades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.4.6. Meter Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5.5. Meter Identification and Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5.5.1. Properly Identifying and Marking Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.5.2. Sealing Meters and Metering Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.5.3. Locking Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

2017 xiv
 Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 5 Electric Metering: General, continued

5.6. Meter Types and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5.6.1. Using a Meter Socket Adapter for Overhead-to-Underground
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.6.2. Installing Non-Allowed and Unauthorized
Customer Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.6.3. Fire-Pump Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5.7. Main Service Disconnects and Switching Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.7.1. Main Service Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.7.2. Main Service Disconnect Switch Rated for Amperes Interrupting
Capacity (AIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.7.3. Arc Flash Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.7.4. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.7.5. Meter and Main Service Switch Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5.8. Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5.9. Temporary Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

5.9.1. Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.9.2. Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.9.3. Temporary Plug-In Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

xv 2017
Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 5 Electric Metering: General, continued

5.10. Connecting Non-Utility Power Sources to Utility Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.10.1. Specific Interconnection Requirements
for Services Up to 600 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.10.2. Warning Statements and Labels for Interconnected Services . . . . . 5-35
5.10.3. Violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

5.11. Plug-In Electric Vehicle Interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Section 6 Electric Metering: Residential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2. Residential Electric Service: Specifications and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2.1. Service Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2.2. Test-Bypass Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.3. Residential Electric Metering Pedestals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.4. Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.4.1. Installing Utility Services to Mobile Homes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6.5. Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.5.1. Single Meter: Underground Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.5.2. Single Meter: Overhead Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.5.3. Multiple Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

2017 xvi
 Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 7 Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial, and Agricultural . . . . . 7-1

7.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2. Service Specifications and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2.1. Permitted Types of Electric Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2.2. Required Test-Bypass Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2.3. Required Approvals for Meter Equipment Without
Test-Bypass Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.4. Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.5. Services, 0 Amps Through 200 Amps, Single Applicant,
Overhead and Underground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.6. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Underground . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.7. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.2.8. Multi-Applicant Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Section 8 Electric Metering: Direct Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.2. Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps . . . . . . 9-1

9.3. Test Switch Mounting Base Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.4. Separate CT Cabinet, 201 Amps and Above, Single Phase

and Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9.5. CT Mounting Base, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.6. Alternate CT Mounting Base, 3-Wire, One Phase or Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

9.7. Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 201 Amps Through 800 Amps . . . . . . . . . 9-6

xvii 2017
Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components, continued

9.8. Bused CT Cabinet, 4-Wire Service, 201 Amps−800 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

9.9. Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9.10. Underground Service Cable-Termination Section or Pull Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9.11. Approved Service-Terminal Conductor Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9.12. Underground-Service Auxiliary Pull Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

9.13. Nonresidential Service Pedestals 0 - 200 Amps (EUSERC 308) . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.3. Switchboard Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.3.1. Standard Switchboard Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3.2. Specifically Engineered Switchboard Service Sections . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3.3. Requirements for All Switchboard Service Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3.4. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through
1,200 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . 10-6
10.3.5. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through
1,200 Amps, Three-Phase, 3-Wire and 4-Wire Services . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.3.6. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through
3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . 10-9
10.3.7. Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through
3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.3.8. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,
Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.3.9. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,
Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.3.10. Removable Link Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

2017 xviii
 Table of Contents

Contents Page

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts, continued

10.3.11. Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps Through
225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.3.12. Service Terminations for Underground Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.3.13. Underground, Service-Termination Pull Section
(Located Below Ground Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10.3.14. Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in Pull
Boxes or Pull Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

10.4. Meter and Switch Sequence Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

10.5. Metering Transformer Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

10.6. Meter Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

10.7. Transformer-Rated and Self-Contained Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

10.8. Adding New Metering Equipment to Existing Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Through 25,000 Volts and Primary

Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.3. Specific Requirements for High-Voltage Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.4. Interconnection Requirements and Primary Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Appendix A Acronyms and Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B Electric and Gas Service Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Appendix C Electric and Gas Engineering Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

xix 2017
Table of Contents

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 xx
 List of Tables

Contents Page

Section 1 General

Table 1-1 USA Color Coding1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Table 1-2 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment, Tools,

Structures, and People) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Table 1-3 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting

Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Section 2 Gas Service

Table 2-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches1 . . . . 2-12

Table 2-2 Dimensions to Figure 2-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Section 3 Electric Service: Underground

Table 3-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches1 . . . . 3-13

Table 3-2 Electric Underground Numbered Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Table 3-3 Mandrel Dimensions, Part Numbers, and Order Codes1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Table 3-4 Businesses That Sell or Rent Mandrels1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead

Table 4-1 Minimum Clearances Over Swimming Pools1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Table 4-2 Minimum Allowable Clearance of Insulated Service Drops From

Buildings − 0 Volts Through 750 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Table 4-3 Vertical Clearance From the Ground on Nonresidential Property1 . . . . 4-10

Table 4-4 Maximum Distance “L” (Inches From the Service Attachment to the Top
Periscope Support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

xxi 2017
List of Tables

Contents Page

Section 5 Electric Metering: General

Table 5-1 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Table 5-2 Working Space Dimensional Requirements1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Table 5-3 Meter Socket Requirements (Number of Jaws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Table 5-4 Requirements For AC Disconnect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Section 6 Electric Metering: Residential

Table 6-1 Residential (0 Amps−225 Amps) Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Table 6-2 Dimension Specifications for Multimeter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components

Table 9-1 CT Cabinet Minimum Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Table 9-2 Hinged Meter Panel

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Table 9-3 Minimum Wall-Mounted Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and

Nonresidential, Single-Phase 1 or Three-Phase 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Table 9-5 Approved, Compression-Type, Service-Terminal Connectors . . . . . . . 9-15

Table 9-6 Minimum Connection Cabinet Sizes 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Table 9-7 Minimum Dimensions (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Table 10-1 Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Table 10-2 Pull-Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level . . . . . . . 10-28

2017 xxii
 List of Tables

Contents Page

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts, continued

Table 10-3 Dual-Socket, Hinged, Meter-Panel Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Table 10-4 Adding Up Meter Section Ampacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

Table 11-1 Bill of Materials for Concrete Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Table 11-2 Dimensions for High-Voltage Meter Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Appendix B Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-1 Plant Matrix for Stockton, Yosemite, Fresno, and Kern Divisions . . . . B-2

Table B-2 Plant Matrix for San Francisco, Peninsula, and DeAnza Divisions . . . . B-3

Table B-3 Plant Matrix for San Jose, Central Coast, and Los Padres Divisions . . B-4

Table B-4 Plant Matrix for North Valley, Sierra, and Sacramento Divisions . . . . . B-5

Table B-5 Plant Matrix for Diablo, Mission, and East Bay Divisions . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Table B-6 Plant Matrix for North Coast and North Bay Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

Table B-7 Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of Overhead
Power Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Appendix C Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Table C-1 Gas Design Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Table C-2 Electric Engineering Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

xxiii 2017
List of Tables

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 xxiv
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 2 Gas Service

Figure 2-1 Typical Gas Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 2-2 Gas-Only Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-3 Typical Gas Bell Hole−Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-4 Typical Bell Hole Depth−Profile View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Figure 2-5 Typical Joint-Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Figure 2-6 Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Single Lot . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Figure 2-7 Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Corner Lot . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Figure 2-8 Apartments With Grouped Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Figure 2-9 Individually Metered Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Figure 2-10 Property Line Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Figure 2-11 Acceptable Locations for Gas Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Figure 2-12 Acceptable Meter Locations for Mobile Home Parks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Figure 2-13 Flex-Hose Meter Set–Residential and Small Commercial . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Figure 2-14 Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Figure 2-15 Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1,000 Class Meters . . . . . . 2-27

Figure 2-16 Gas Meter Connection Using a 1.5M or 3M Rotary Gas Meter . . . . . 2-28

Figure 2-17 Gas Meter Connection Using a 5M or 7M Rotary Gas Meter . . . . . . . 2-29

Figure 2-18 Gas Meter Connection Using an 11M or 16M Rotary Gas Meter . . . . 2-30

Figure 2-19 Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation

Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

xxv 2017
List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 2 Gas Service, continued

Figure 2-20 Gas Meter Set Clearance From Building Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Figure 2-21 Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from

Sources of Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Figure 2-22 Dimensions for Typical, Residential, Multimeter Installations . . . . . . 2-34

Figure 2-23 Recessed, Individual Meter Cabinet for Gas and Electric Meter
Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Figure 2-24 Cabinet Dimensions for Multiple, Residential Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Figure 2-25 Typical Detached Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Figure 2-26 Typical Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Figure 2-27 Typical Residential, Multimeter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Figure 2-28 Recommended, Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Section 3 Electric Service: Underground

Figure 3-1 Locations of Underground Electric Service-Termination and Meter

Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Figure 3-2 Underground-to-Underground Service Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-3 Overhead-to-Underground Service Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Figure 3-4 Typical Joint Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-5 PG&E Electric and Gas Service Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-6 Flexible Steel Mandrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

2017 xxvi
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead

Figure 4-1 Preferred and Alternate Locations for the Overhead Service Drop
Attachment (see Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Figure 4-2 Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts,
Residential Installations
(Required by the CPUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Figure 4-3 Minimum Clearance for All Drops Above or Adjacent

To Swimming Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Figure 4-4 Nonmetallic Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Figure 4-5 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-6 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-7 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-8 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-9 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-10 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-11 Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-12 Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through
750 Volts, Industrial and Commercial Installations (Required by the
CPUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Figure 4-13 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-14 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-15 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

xxvii 2017
List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead, continued

Figure 4-16 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-17 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-18 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-19 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-20 Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors

(0 Volts−750 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Figure 4-21 Clearance Around Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Figure 4-22 Clearance Around Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Figure 4-23 Service Attachment Structure or Service Pole Secured to a

Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-24 Service Pole Detached From a Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Figure 4-25 Open Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-26 Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-27 Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-28 Cable (Using Triplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-29 Cable (Single Spool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-30 Open Wire or Cable (Cable Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

2017 xxviii
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 4 Electric Service: Overhead, continued

Figure 4-31 Service Drop Cable, 4/0 and Smaller, Triplex or Quadruplex . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-32 New Wall, 1/0 kcmil to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-33 New or Existing Wall, 1/0 kcmil to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-34 Open Wire Service, #4 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-35 Service Drop Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-36 Building Attachment–Service Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-37 Self-Supported Periscope Attachment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-38 Braced Periscope Attachment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-39 Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential) . . . . . 4-23

Figure 4-40 Illustration of 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Figure 4-41 Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Service Wires . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Figure 4-42 Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Transmission Wires . . . . . . . 4-27

Figure 4-43 Alternative Routes to a House Showing High-Voltage Lines and

Tree-Clearance Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Figure 4-44 Development Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Figure 4-45 High-Voltage Marker on Poles and Crossarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Section 5 Electric Metering: General

Figure 5-1 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-2 Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances . . 5-11

xxix 2017
List of Figures

Section 5 Electric Metering: General, continued

Figure 5-3 Semi-Flush Meter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Figure 5-4 Enclosed Meter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Figure 5-5 Preferred Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels
and Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Figure 5-6 Connection Diagrams for Self-Contained Meter Sockets . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Figure 5-7 Connection Diagrams for Transformer-Rated Meter Sockets . . . . . . . 5-19

Figure 5-8 Fire-Pump Equipment Location and Service Connection Options . . . 5-22

Figure 5-9 Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Figure 5-10 Single Meter With Main Service Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Figure 5-11 Single Meter With Multiple Service Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Figure 5-12 Multimeter Installation Without Main Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Figure 5-13 Multimeter Installation With Main Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Figure 5-14 Multiple Remote Switchboard or Meter Panel Locations . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Figure 5-15 Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section−Self Contained Meter . . . . 5-28

Figure 5-16 Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section−Transformer Rated Meter . 5-28

Figure 5-17 Plug-In Temporary Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Figure 5-18 Typical Plug-In Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Figure 5-19 Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Figure 5-20 Transfer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

2017 xxx
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 6 Electric Metering: Residential

Figure 6-1 Residential Electric Metering Pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Figure 6-2 Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination

Meter-Socket Panel (Residential, 0 Amps−225 Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Figure 6-3 Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel

for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through
320-Amp Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Figure 6-4 Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet

(201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Figure 6-5 Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and

Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201
Amps−800 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Figure 6-6 Individual Meter Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Figure 6-7 Combination Meter Socket Load Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Figure 6-8 Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket Panel

for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through
320-Amp Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Figure 6-9 Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet,

(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . 6-11

Figure 6-10 Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter

Box
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . 6-12

Figure 6-1 1Meter Sockets With Wiring Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Figure 6-12 Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation:

Seven Meters or More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Figure 6-13 Clearances for a Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

xxxi 2017
List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 6 Electric Metering: Residential, continued

Figure 6-14 Horizontal Meter Trough Installation: Six Meters or Less . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Figure 6-15 Vertical Meter Trough Installation: Five Meters or Less . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Section 7 Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial, and Agricultural

Figure 7-1 Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (0

Amps−100 Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Figure 7-2 Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (101
Amps−200 Amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Figure 7-3 Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet

(201 Amps−400 Amps, 1∅ or 3∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Figure 7-4 Separate-Bused Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box

With Underground Service-Termination Pull Box
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . 7-8

Figure 7-5 Switchboard Pull Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Figure 7-6 Separate Pull Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Figure 7-7 Bottom-Fed Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Figure 7-8 Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet,

(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . 7-11

Figure 7-9 Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and

Safety-Socket Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅, and 201 Amps−600
Amps, 1∅) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Figure 7-10 Overhead, Service-Termination, Standard Switchboard Service Section

(0 Volts−600 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Figure 7-11 Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

2017 xxxii
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 7 Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial, and Agricultural,

continued

Figure 7-12 Underground Service, Grouped-Meter Installation Without a Main

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Figure 7-13 Grouped-Meter Installation With a Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components

Figure 9-1 Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps−225 Amps . . . . . . . 9-2

Figure 9-2 Removable Test Switch Mounting-Base Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Figure 9-3 Cabinet Showing Stud-Mounted Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Figure 9-4 Cabinet Showing Flanged Cover Fastened by Sealable Rivet Latches . 9-3

Figure 9-5 Cabinet Showing Hinged Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Figure 9-6 3-Wire, Single-Phase Service,

Mounting Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 9-7 4-Wire, Three-Phase Service, Mounting Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Figure 9-8 CT Mounting Base (Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire,

201 Amps−600 Amps, 0 Volts−600 Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Figure 9-9 Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 201 Amps−800 Amps . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Figure 9-10 Bused CT Cabinet (4-Wire Service, 201 Amps−800 Amps) . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Figure 9-11 Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering

(Single-Phase or Three-Phase Installations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Figure 9-12 Remote Metering Cabinet (Three-Phase Installations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Figure 9-13 Typical Underground Service Termination Section and Pull Box,
Wall-Mounted or Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

xxxiii 2017
List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 9 Electric Metering: Components, continued

Figure 9-14 Detail of Clearance Requirements for Adjacent Termination

Bus Stubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Figure 9-15 Detail of Aluminum, Termination Bus Stubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Figure 9-16 Service-Terminal Conductor Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Figure 9-17 Cabinet Showing Stud-Mounted Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Figure 9-18 Cabinet Showing Flanged Cover Fastened by Sealable

Rivet Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Figure 9-19 Cabinet Showing Hinged, Flanged Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Figure 9-20 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Figure 9-21 Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Figure 9-22 Wireway Pull Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Figure 9-23 Hinged Demand Reset Cover With Polycarbonate Viewing Window . 9-19

Figure 9-24 Utility Pull Section - Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Figure 10-1 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0 Amps−1,200 Amps,

Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Figure 10-2 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0 Amps−1,200 Amps,

Three-Phase, 3-Wire and 4-Wire Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Figure 10-3 Bus Drilling Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Figure 10-4 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps,

Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

2017 xxxiv
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts, continued

Figure 10-5 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps,

Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Figure 10-6 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,

Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Figure 10-7 Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,

Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Figure 10-8 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000

Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (One-Bolt Configuration) 10-18

Figure 10-9 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000

Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (Four-Bolt Configuration) 10-19

Figure 10-10 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and

Larger,
Removable Link and CT Support (Two-Bolt Configuration) . . . . . . 10-20

Figure 10-11 Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment,

3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Six-Bolt
Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Figure 10-12 Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps−225 Amps,
Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Figure 10-13 Pull Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Figure 10-14 Separate Pull Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Figure 10-15 Bottom-Fed Service Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Figure 10-16 Switchboard Pull Section, High Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Figure 10-17 Switchboard Pull Section, Low Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

xxxv 2017
List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 10 Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts, continued

Figure 10-18 Extended Top on Switchboard Pull Section Front View (Side Entry) or
Side View (Back Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Figure 10-19 Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section, High Entry . . . . 10-29

Figure 10-20 Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section, Low Entry . . . . 10-30

Figure 10-21 Landing Terminal Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Figure 10-22 Spacing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Figure 10-23 Buses Accessible From Only One Side (Bolts Must Be Secured
in Place) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Figure 10-24 Buses Accessible From Either Side (Mounting Surfaces on Both
Sides of Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Figure 10-25 Standard Switchboard Service Section With CT Compartment and

Filler Panel, 0 Volts−600 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Figure 10-26 Low-Profile Switchboard Service Section With CT Compartment for

Underground, Outdoor Application, 0 Volts−600 Volts . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Figure 10-27 Standard Switchboard Service Section, 15-Inch Hinged Panel for Socket
Meter and Test Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Figure 10-28 Standard Switchboard Service Section, 30-Inch Panel for Socket Meters
and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Figure 10-29 Outdoor or Rain Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Figure 10-30 Outdoor or Rain Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Figure 10-31 Outdoor or Rain Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Figure 10-32 Outdoor or Rain Tight Enclosures for Switchboards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Figure 10-33 Existing Switchboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

2017 xxxvi
 List of Figures

Contents Page

Section 11 Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary
Services

Figure 11-1 Primary Switchboard Termination Section Pad Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Figure 11-2 Hinged Meter Panel with Multiple Sockets for 2,400 to 27,000 Volt
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Figure 11-3 Hinged Meter Panel with Dual Socket for 2,400 to 27,000 Volt
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Figure 11-4 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure: 2,400-Volt Through

17,000-Volt Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Figure 11-5 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure, 17,001-Volt Through

25,000-Volt Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Figure 11-6 Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure, 17,001-Volt Through

25,000-Volt Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

xxxvii 2017
List of Figures

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 xxxviii
SECTION 1 GENERAL
SECTION 1
GENERAL
SECTION 1 GENERAL
 Section 1
General

Safety Alert
Contacting overhead or underground electric lines or equipment and
natural gas pipelines can cause serious injury or death. Any part of a crane,
scaffold, construction material, antenna, cable, rope, guy wire, or tool that
touches an overhead electric line or penetrates an underground cable can
become energized. Penetrating an underground natural gas line with a
backhoe or other tool can cause a violent explosion.

WARNING
To avoid potential accidents, do not begin to excavate
before identifying underground facilities.
State law requires applicants to contact Underground Service Alert
(USA) by dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation
(weekends and holidays excluded). Ensure that you call USA when
planning underground work, before digging begins, to allow
adequate time for USA to determine the location of underground USA
gas and electric lines or equipment. The potential for an accident
exists if applicants fail to request USA to identify underground
utility facilities before excavation begins.
First, the applicant must mark the excavation area with white
paint. Then, USA arranges for participating companies to mark the
locations of their underground facilities at the jobsite. This is a
free service. See the USA color-code identifiers below and on the
back of this manual.
Additional information is available at www.pge.com/digsafely.
Also, see USA services at the USA North website at
http://www.usanorth.org. USA is a locating service for excavation
only. Do not use USA for design purposes.

Table 1-1 USA Color Coding1 Dig Safely

Excavation Sites & Underground Facilities Marking Color
Proposed Excavation White
Temporary Survey Markings Pink
Electric Red
Gas−Oil−Steam Chemical Yellow
Communication CATV Orange
Water Blue
Reclaimed Water Irrigation Slurry Purple
Sewer Green
1 Call 2 working days before you dig.

1-1 2017
Section 1, General

Arc-Flash Hazard Warning

All applicants or persons working on, working near, or observing others

working on any PG&E facility will be exposed to potential arc-flash
hazards and are required to wear flame-resistant (FR) clothing. The
requirement to wear FR clothing applies to everyone. Applicants and their
personnel must wear FR clothing before being allowed access to perform
work in and around PG&E facilities. Also, applicants and their personnel
must ensure that they wear the appropriate level of FR clothing for the job
being performed. Please see Appendix A, “Acronyms and Glossary,” for
a definition of facilities. Also refer to the FR requirement letter in
Appendix B, “Electric and Gas Service Documents.”

1.1. Purpose

NOTE: For the purpose of this manual, the word “applicant” is used generically to
refer to the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) customer, or to the
person or persons representing the PG&E customer in the
application/construction process, including a contractor, design consultant,
or installer. The word “customer” is used only when the word “applicant”
is not applicable. Also, PG&E is sometimes referred to as the “Company”
throughout this manual.
This manual is designed to help applicants establish gas and electric service. By
reading the mandates published in this manual, applicants will understand not only
the steps required to apply for service, but also the legal and safety requirements
driving those steps. PG&E provides this manual to all gas and electric applicants,
both in hard copy and online, in an effort to ensure that the Company can continue
to deliver safe, uniform service.
The 2016 Greenbook supersedes all previous editions and revisions. This manual is
a collection of requirements and policies for establishing electric and gas service to
new or remodeled installations. The Greenbook is updated yearly; however,
PG&E’s building requirements, as well as gas and electric design standards, are
subject to change throughout the year. It is important that all applicants consult the
online version of the Greenbook before finalizing project plans.
In addition to the requirements provided in this manual, applicants for gas or
electric service also must comply with federal regulations and with all applicable
tariffs , as well as the rules and general orders set forth by the California Public
Utilities Commission (CPUC). These regulations and orders include, but are not
limited to, the following documents:
• General Order (G.O.) 95, “Rules for Overhead Electric Line Construction”
• G.O. 112-E, “Rules Governing Design, Construction, Testing, Operation, and
Maintenance of Gas Gathering, Transmission, and Distribution Piping Systems”
• G.O. 128, “Rules for Construction of Underground Electric Supply and
Communication Systems”
• 49 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 192, “Transportation of Natural
and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards”

2017 1-2
 Section 1, General

Finally, applicants must comply with all other federal, state, and local regulations.
These regulations may include a Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) review
for structures that impinge on navigable airspace. In such cases, the FAA requires
filing notice of proposed construction a minimum of 45 days before starting the
proposed construction. The FAA may issue a determination of hazard to air
navigation and recommend actions to mitigate or eliminate that hazard. For
additional information, please contact your PG&E project coordinator.

1.2. Permits and Inspections

Builders who are constructing new buildings or remodeling existing buildings

must conform to the following guidance documents.
A. The current provisions of city and county ordinances.
B. Rules on file with, or issued by, the CPUC.
C. Applicable rules and laws of the state of California, including the following
three codes.
• Plumbing codes
• Mechanical codes
• Electric codes
Local and state ordinances require applicants to obtain the appropriate
permits and final inspections before PG&E establishes services to any
building or structure.
In areas where local ordinances governing gas or electrical installations do not
exist, or where inspections provided by local jurisdictions for such installations are
not available, the applicant must obtain written confirmation from a qualified
person that the facilities meet the requirements specified in this manual.
PG&E will not establish gas or electric service until the gas piping or electric
service facilities are installed satisfactorily.
NOTE: Gas meter release forms obtained from a permitting agency must include
the specific, requested pressure (e.g., 7” w.c., 2 psig, 5 psig).
PG&E’s inspection process includes service requirements that are not governed by
local or state codes. Parts of the applicant’s installation may require approval by
state, local, and PG&E inspectors.

1.3. Applying for Building and Renovation Services

An “Application for Service” is required for all new gas or electric services, as
well as for relocating or rearranging existing services. Whether you are building
or renovating your home, expanding your business facility, or opening a facility
at a new location, you can apply on the Internet at “Customer Connections Online” Customer
(www.pge.com/customerconnections) and track your project with our new online Connect
tools.

1-3 2017
 Section 1, General

Also, at the PG&E Internet websites below, you will find guides for getting
started, process overviews, project cost ranges, online applications, and more. This
information is provided to help you plan your project and get started. For more
information, visit the following web pages.

Residential Services: http://www.pge.com/building

Business and Agricultural Services: http://www.pge.com/newconstruction
Customer
Connect Applicants without Internet access may contact the Building and Renovation
Service Center 1-877-743-7782. PG&E representatives will provide you with
details about the process and assist you with applying for service.
The process for installing or changing gas and electric services takes time and
planning. PG&E recommends you contact us early in the process with accurate
load information and the date that the services are required to allow for adequate
time to complete your service request.
Large-capacity gas meters, electric transformers, or other special equipment often
require several months lead time to ensure a timely delivery from the
Residential manufacturer.
Applicants must contact their local PG&E project coordinators when approved
construction plans change, or when situations that affect PG&E’s service
arrangements occur during construction, so that mutually satisfactory, alternate
arrangements can be made.
To assist PG&E in its goal to deliver safe, uniform service, applicants should use
the following guidelines when transmitting electronic drawing files for
architectural, mechanical, and civil site plans.
1. PG&E’s electronic drawing tool is AutoCAD 2012, .DWG format. Ensure
that submitted electronic drawings are either readable using, or compatible
Commercial with, AutoCAD, 2012 (or older).
NOTE: PG&E accepts the version of AutoCAD with the “Pack & Go”
feature.
2. Applicants can uploaded documents at PG&E’s “Customer Connections
Online” (www.pge.com/customerconnections) Internet website. Drawings also
may be sent as an email-attached file.
3. Applicants who do not use the online option described in Number 2. above
should send drawings for large projects in a zipped format.
4. Use layering, if possible, and preserve the layering when transferring files to
PG&E.
5. Save all drawings in model space instead of paper space.
6. Make drawing plans two dimensional, with the “Z” elevation at zero.
7. Ensure that any External Reference Files (Xref) or drawing updates maintain a
consistent insertion point.
8. Include all related drawing files (e.g., elevations, landscape plans, other
proposed underground facilities).
Please contact your local PG&E project coordinator if you have any questions.

2017 1-4
 Section 1, General

PG&E is committed to complying with all federal, state, and local environmental laws,
regulations, and rules. Applicants must provide PG&E with copies of permits showing
that they have met all environmental compliance requirements when submitting
applications for service. See the “Applicant Responsibilities for Environmental
Reviews for Service Requests” letter for more information. Applicants can obtain
copies of this letter from their local PG&E project coordinators.
Project permits or approvals may contain conditions that require or restrict certain
service designs or construction activities by PG&E, applicants, agents, consultants,
or contractors. The applicant must bring these conditions to PG&E’s attention to
ensure that the requirements or restrictions are included in the project design
during the planning and construction phases. When submitting the service
application, the applicant must provide PG&E with a written copy of any special
conditions, identifying the requirements or restrictions that affect the project
design and/or PG&E installation activities.

1.4. Changes in Requirements

PG&E may revise its design and construction documents relating to applicant
service requirements between updates to this manual. Except when required
by law, the version of the design and construction document in effect on the
date the applicant’s service design is approved and signed-off by the PG&E
supervisor determines the requirements that the design must meet. These
requirements apply as long as applicants complete approved projects within
12 months. If the applicant has not initiated construction within 12 months of
PG&E’s initial approval, PG&E may initiate the review of the design and, if
warranted, refresh the cost estimate. If the applicant does not fulfill obligations
under the extension agreement, PG&E may, at it discretion, cancel the
agreement (see Provisions Form 62-0982, Section 20). PG&E can then request
another review of the design before approving construction activities.
For applicant design jobs, refer to the Applicant Design Guide. On applicant design
jobs, the version of the design and construction document that is in effect on the
date PG&E approves and signs-off on the final Globals package determines the
requirements that the design must meet. The Globals package is valid for 90 days.
Applicants are encouraged to contact PG&E early in the planning stages of their
projects. By consulting with their local project coordinators, applicants are made
aware of the current construction requirements before they initiate any design work.
Do not perform construction using an unauthorized or preliminary drawing.
The applicant assumes full responsibility for errors, omissions, or changes if the
project is constructed using either preliminary drawings or drawings that are not
approved by PG&E.
PG&E will not accept or assume ownership of facilities installed by the applicant
before the construction design is completed and approved by PG&E. Additional
facilities, even if provided at no cost to PG&E, represent increased plant in the
rate base. This includes associated, long-term increases in taxes and maintenance
expenses. Applicants are responsible for any additional design changes or
reconstruction costs that may be required if PG&E does not accept unapproved
facilities. PG&E will not energize or pressurize a system that has not received
final design approval and passed all inspections.

1-5 2017
Section 1, General

Engineering and construction documents or requirements are incorporated into

new editions of this manual; however, revisions are made periodically. Applicants
can obtain revised engineering documents or requirements in two ways:
• These documents are available on PG&E’s Internet site
(www.pge.com/greenbook).
• These documents are available through your local PG&E project coordinators.
Some of the information contained in this manual is based on government codes
and ordinances that are subject to change as determined by the governmental
authorities. PG&E does not assume responsibility for keeping information in this
manual current with these government codes, ordinances, or other requirements.
Applicants should consult the responsible governmental agency with questions
about the applicability of any construction procedures or requirements.

1.5. Additional Commercial and Industrial Service Information

For electric installations of more than 600 volts (V), refer to Greenbook
Section 11, “Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary
Services.” Generally, this manual does not include information about large
commercial or industrial gas loads; however, PG&E provides applicants with
individual job-design specifications after they request service.

1.6. Design and Construction

1.6.1. PG&E’s Responsibilities

PG&E is responsible for planning, designing, and engineering its service
facilities and service laterals using PG&E’s standards for design, materials,
and construction.

1.6.2. Applicant’s Responsibilities

Residential and nonresidential industrial applicants for gas and/or electric
extensions and services may select a contractor to design their facilities.
PG&E requires a clear path from existing distribution facilities to the
location on the applicant’s jobsite where the services will be connected.
Depending on the project, the applicant may need permits or approvals for
these supply lines in order to comply with federal, state, and local
requirements, regulations, and rules (including environmental laws).
Local PG&E project coordinators can provide applicants with information
about available options for clearing supply lines, as well as any associated
design and contract requirements for their projects.
Before designing their projects, applicants and/or their contractors must
complete PG&E’s “Application for Service” form, provide applicable
construction plans, and submit any required project deposits to PG&E.

2017 1-6
 Section 1, General

1.6.3. Providing Access to PG&E Electric Facilities

Applicants are required to provide access roads on their properties to PG&E
pad-mounted or subsurface (i.e., transformer or switch) facilities. The roads
must be accessible to PG&E at all times and constructed with either a
Class 2 or an AB road base that is a minimum of 10 feet wide, with 18 feet
of vertical clearance above. Also, there must be a 30-foot radial,
hammerhead-style, turn-around area at the end of the roads.
Do not place facilities more than 15 feet away from an accessible road.

1.6.4. Installing Transformers

PG&E will specify the type of transformer installations to be constructed on
applicants’ premises.
Applicants may contact their local PG&E project coordinators to obtain
specific transformer requirements for their projects.
NOTE: For reasons of safety and reliability, PG&E does not allow
applicants to install water sprinklers to cool off transformers.
PG&E’s standard transformer installations for residential, commercial, and
industrial services are described below:
A. A pole-bolted transformer in overhead areas when the applicant’s load
does not require a 75 kilovolt ampere (kVA) or larger transformer.
B. A pad-mounted transformer in underground areas or in an area with
overhead facilities when PG&E determines that the applicant’s load
requires a 75 kVA or larger transformer.

1.7. Connecting and Sealing Services

A. PG&E provides standard service to applicants as described below.

1. Establish service at one service delivery point, through one meter, and at
one voltage class or pressure.
2. Design service to extend from the connection to the distribution facilities
along the shortest, most practical, and most available route to the service
termination facility or service delivery point, as determined by PG&E.
B. The requirements for standard service are described below.
1. Only authorized PG&E employees can connect or disconnect PG&E’s gas
or electric service to the building or structure.
2. Unauthorized persons must not tamper with or break PG&E seals placed
on meters and associated service equipment.
3. Only authorized PG&E employees can remove, replace, or interfere with
PG&E’s meters, seals, connections, padlocks, or other locking devices.
4. Applicants must call PG&E if it is necessary to have either the service
disconnected or the meter removed because of remodeling, alterations, or
other activities.

1-7 2017
Section 1, General

5. Applicants must not connect house gas pipes or other applicant facilities to
the plugged side of the gas service-tee fitting. That fitting is for PG&E’s
use only.
6. Applicants must place service termination enclosures in PG&E-approved
locations within buildings, such as meter and service rooms or similar
areas.
7. Applicants must not locate service termination enclosures in the interior,
inhabitable area of residences.
8. Applicants must ensure that all service and metering facilities are readily
accessible.
9. PG&E must review and approve of all service and meter locations and
arrangements before installing any metering facilities, service-termination
enclosures, or other utility service facilities.
10. The applicant assumes the risk for any work performed without requesting
PG&E’s advanced approval. PG&E can charge the applicant if it is
necessary to make changes to unapproved work.
11. An unauthorized connection to PG&E’s gas or electric facilities, or to
facilities used to provide utility services, may be a violation of the
California Penal Code, Section 498 and Section 593c, and subject the
person to damages pursuant to California Civil Code, Section 1882,
et. Sequitur. These sections address connecting to utility meters and
facilities and diverting utility services. They specifically prohibit any
person from tampering with, making, or causing to be made any
connection or reconnection with property owned or used by the utility to
provide utility service, without the utility’s authorization or consent.
12. PG&E may require a service location to be closer to the distribution
facilities in the following instances:
• In areas where the nearest building is a considerable distance
(i.e., 200 feet or more) from the property line.
• If, in PG&E’s judgment, there is a potential hazard between the
property line and service location.

1.8. Access to an Applicant’s Residence, Building, or Property

PG&E has the right to access Company facilities located on an applicant’s

premises at any time, for any purpose connected with furnishing gas and/or
electric service. These purposes include the following activities:
• Reading meters.
• Inspecting utility facilities.
• Making routine repairs.
• Performing maintenance and emergency work.
• Exercising any and all rights secured to PG&E either by law or under PG&E’s
tariff schedules, including Electric Rule 16, “Service Extensions,” and Gas
Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions.”

2017 1-8
 Section 1, General

1.9. Overhead Electric Lines

The California Division of Occupational Safety and Health (Cal/OSHA)

regulations, Title 8, Division 1, “Department of Industrial Relations,” Chapter 4,
“Division of Industrial Safety,” Subchapter 4, “Construction Safety Orders,”
Article 15, “Cranes and Derricks in Construction,” Section 1612, “Power Line
Safety,” and the associated sub-articles, require that minimum safe working and
traveling distances be maintained from cranes and derricks to overhead electric
lines.
In support of these regulations, PG&E provides the voltage for overhead lines
within two business days of receiving a customer inquiry. Call the PG&E Building
and Renovation Service Center (BRSC) at 877-743-7782 or Customer Service at
1-800-743-5000.
Cal/OSHA regulations, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, “Electrical Safety
Orders,” Group 2, “High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders,” Article 37,
“Provisions for Preventing Accidents Due to Proximity to Overhead Lines
(Formerly Article 86),” Section 2946, “Provisions for Preventing Accidents Due
to Proximity to Overhead Lines,” requires that minimum safe working distances
be maintained from overhead electric lines. Specific requirements taken from the
regulation are shown in Table 1-2, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds,
Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People),” and Table 1-3, “Minimum Safe
Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment),” both below.

Table 1-2 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds, Equipment,

Tools, Structures, and People)
Minimum Required Clearance
Nominal Voltage (Phase-to-Phase)
(Feet)
600 — 50,000 6
over 50,000 — 345,000 10
over 345,000 — 750,000 16
over 750,000 — 1,000,000 20

Table 1-3 Minimum Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or

Hoisting Equipment)
Minimum Required Clearance
Nominal Voltage (Phase-to-Phase)
(Feet)
600 — 50,000 10
over 50,000 — 75,000 11
over 75,000 — 125,000 13
over 125,000 — 175,000 15
over 175,000 — 250,000 17
over 250,000 — 370,000 21
over 370,000 — 550,000 27
over 550,000 — 1,000,000 42

Contact a local PG&E project coordinator with any questions about working near
overhead electric lines or about nominal voltage.

1-9 2017
 Section 1, General

1.10. Underground Electric Lines and Gas Pipelines

As mentioned on Page 1-1, state law requires applicants to contact USA by dialing
811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and holidays excluded).
Applicants must call USA when planning underground work (before digging
begins) to allow adequate time for USA to determine the locations of underground
gas and electric lines and/or equipment.
Safety USA arranges for participating companies to mark the locations of their
underground facilities at the jobsite. There is no charge for this service. The
applicant must mark each end of the excavation area with white paint as well as
the total length in feet. Applicants should also use arrows to indicate the direction
of the trench. For more information, go to www.pge.com/digsafely. Also, learn
more about USA services at the USA North website (http://www.usanorth.org).
When any new vegetation is planted, ensure that a minimum of 5 feet is
USA maintained from underground gas utilities. Please refer to PG&E’s Guide to Safe
Landscaping Near Gas Pipelines for helpful information about the types of trees
and plants that are safe for areas near gas pipelines.

1.11. PG&E Safety Training Resources

PG&E wants to ensure that contractors and construction workers avoid electric
Dig Safely and natural gas hazards by practicing basic safety rules. Please visit
www.pge.com/contractorsafety, “Contractor Safety Program Contract
Requirements,” for materials to assist you in providing your employees with
safety training.

1.12. SmartMetert Program

PG&E’s SmartMetert Program is part of a statewide effort driven by the CPUC

to upgrade California’s energy infrastructure with automated metering technology.
The SmartMetert Advanced Meter Reading system includes a programmable,
solid-state electric meter and a gas module, installed on a traditional gas meter at
each service delivery point to measure and record energy use.
SmartMeter TM For more information on SmartMeterst, including instructions on tracking your
energy use online or information on the opt-out program, please visit
www.pge.com/smartmeter.

2017 1-10
 Section 1, General

1.13. PG&E Online (Website)

The PG&E website at www.pge.com has many tools for building or renovating your
home, expanding or renovating your business facility, or opening a new location.
Building and Renovation Services tools are available for residential services at
www.pge.com/building/, and for business services at www.pge.com/newconstruction.
These websites include:
• “Getting Started” guides.
• Glossary of terms.
• Building and renovation services process flow.
• A tool to locate city/county building and planning departments.
• A project cost range tool. Commercial
• Answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).
• A link to energy-efficiency rebate information.
These tools can help you plan your project and get started. For more information,
visit the following web pages.
• Apply online and track your project: www.pge.com/customerconnections
• Residential services: www.pge.com/building/
• Business and agricultural services: www.pge.com/newconstruction
1.13.1. Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (aka Greenbook)
Residential
The Greenbook is available on the Internet at www.pge.com/greenbook.
Perform the following steps to access the Greenbook from the PG&E
homepage (http://www.pge.com/).
A. Select either the “For My Home” or the “For My Business” link on
the PG&E homepage.
B. Find the “Customer Service” drop-down at the top of the page and
click on “More Services.”
C. Click on the “Building and Renovation Services” link in the middle
of the page.
D. On the right side, under “Additional Resources,” find the Electric
and Gas Service Requirements link.
NOTE: Communicate and coordinate all gas and electric service Customer
arrangements through your assigned PG&E project coordinator. Connect
As mentioned earlier in this section, PG&E documents may be
updated independently of this manual; however, the project
coordinators provide applicants with the latest updated or revised
information on request. Applicants must contact their assigned
project coordinators to ensure that they are correctly interpreting
and using the information found in this manual and in other
governing documents.

1-11 2017
 Section 1, General

1.13.2. Rates and Tariffs

Rate and tariff information is available on the “Rates and Tariffs Library”
at http://www.pge.com/about/rates/ . This information also is available under the
“Additional Resources” heading on the “Building and Renovation Services”
homepage. The online “Tariffs” provide current gas and electric rate schedules,
Rates & Tariffs
preliminary statements, rules, forms, advice letters, and more.

1.14. Determining the Service Rating

A. For installations supplying a single main-disconnecting means (i.e., single main

disconnect), the rating of the PG&E service to be supplied is the rating
of the electrical enclosure, service-termination section, pull can, service section,
main service-switch continuous current rating, or other service-termination enclosure
where PG&E terminates and connects its supply facilities and conductors
(whichever is greater).
For switchboards, this is typically listed as the supply rating. For panelboards,
the rating is the maximum ampacity or the greatest rating for any individual
component (main bus, meter socket, main disconnect, etc.) in the panelboard.
See exceptions for select agricultural customers in Subsection 1.14.D. below.
B. For installations supplying a premises without a single disconnecting means
(e.g., a service with multiple disconnects), the rating of the PG&E service to be
supplied is the rating of the electrical enclosure, service-termination section,
pull can, service section, or other service-termination enclosure where PG&E
terminates and connects its supply facilities and conductors (whichever is
greater). For switchboards, this is typically listed as the supply rating. For
panelboards, the rating is the maximum ampacity or the greatest rating for
any individual component (main bus, meter socket, etc.) in the panelboard.
See exceptions for select agricultural customers in Subsection 1.14.D. below.
C. If the termination section, enclosure, or facility is not rated, the rating of the
service is the maximum rating of the single, main-disconnecting means or the
aggregated maximum ratings of all the service disconnects. See exceptions for
select agricultural customers in Subsection 1.14.D. below.
D. For agricultural services with a pump motor as the largest load, the ampacity
rating of either single or multiple main-service disconnects is no longer used to
determine the PG&E service rating for metering equipment that requires
transformer-rated meter(s) and current transformers (CTs). The rating of the
service supplied will be the ampacity rating of the metering equipment or
enclosure (typically whichever is greater) where the service conductors
terminate. This exception applies only to the following equipment.
• Wall-mounted (includes panelboard construction) metering equipment or
termination enclosure, without a breaker or fused disconnects, located inside of
the enclosure. The breaker or disconnects must be located in a separate
enclosure.
• Pad-mounted (i.e., floor-standing) equipment, with or without a breaker or
fused disconnects, located inside of the enclosure.
This exception is not applicable when self-contained metering equipment is installed.

2017 1-12
 Section 1, General

1.15. Changing an Applicant’s Approved Project or Existing Service Loads

An applicant must provide written notice to PG&E of any changes or plans to

make material changes either in the amount or in the character of the gas and/or
electrical load, equipment, or other facilities installed to supply gas and/or
electricity to the applicant’s premises, structure, building, or other facilities. For
more information, applicants can review Electric Rule 2 and Gas Rule 2, both
called “Description of Service,” as well as Electric Rule 3 and Gas Rule 3, both
called “Application for Service.” PG&E requires this written information to
determine the following factors.
1. The adequacy of the existing utility service and supply facilities.
2. The need to modify those facilities to meet and supply the changed load or
equipment requirements. This includes changes in the character or nature of
the applicant’s previously approved gas and/or electric service.
Applicants must notify PG&E of any planned or intended changes in the load,
character, or nature of the service required to supply the premises, structure,
building, or other facilities.
If an applicant fails to notify PG&E, and the changes exceed the capabilities of the
installed utility service, metering, or other equipment and damage those facilities,
the applicant is liable for all damages and resultant costs to PG&E.
Applicants must provide PG&E with written notice immediately when they make
any material change either in the amount or character of the gas and electric
lamps, appliances, or apparatus installed on the premises to be supplied with
electric energy.

1.15.1. Upgrading, Replacing, Relocating Electric Facilities, or Adding

Power Generation Sources
When PG&E determines that its existing service facilities require
replacement, those facilities are replaced as a new service extension under
the provisions of the tariff rules.
Upgrade: An increase in the ampacity rating (e.g., 100 amps to 125 amps)
of the equipment where PG&E terminates its service is typically defined as
an upgrade. The ampacity rating also may be known as the service-entrance
capacity. For example, when an applicant replaces an existing electric meter
panel, switchboard, or termination enclosure with one that has a greater
ampacity rating (i.e., upgrade), all Greenbook requirements must be met.
Typically, this also includes installing new conduit and service conductors.
See the sections titled “Upgraded Panel” in the numbered documents below
for conditions when the conduit or cable may not require upgrading, as
determined by PG&E.
• Numbered Document 063927, “Methods and Requirements for
Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 V to
Customer-Owned Facilities”
• Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and Requirements for
Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to
Customer-Owned Facilities”

1-13 2017
Section 1, General

Like-for-Like: Replacing service equipment with equipment of the exact

same ampacity (e.g., 100 amps to 100 amps) is considered a “like-for-like”
replacement and typically is not considered an upgrade.
The service equipment must be positioned so the existing PG&E service
conductors can be reconnected properly. If PG&E needs to install additional
service conductors or cables to perform the reconnect, the work and
material is the applicant’s responsibility. (See the paragraph on
“Relocating” below.) A like-for-like does not have to meet the current
Greenbook requirements if the safety or accessibility of the panel location is
not compromised. For example, structures (e.g., decks, remodeled
buildings) built over or around existing panels may not be energized if they
do not meet PG&E requirements for safe working conditions.
Relocating: When existing electric facilities are relocated, applicant’s must
meet all of the current Greenbook requirements. If PG&E’s existing service
conductor can be used, as determined by PG&E, the panel must be
positioned so the service conductor can be reconnected properly. The
existing service conductor must be able to be reconnected either to the
underground electric panel termination lugs or, for overhead services, to the
external service-entrance conductors coming out of the weatherhead. If
PG&E needs to install additional service conductors or cables to perform
the reconnect, the work and material is the applicant’s responsibility. PG&E
does not accept cable-termination techniques using pin adaptors, cable
ringing, or splicing on additional cable.
For additional information, see Subsection 5.3., “Electric Meters: General
Location Requirements,” on Page 5-5.
Adding Power Generation: All customer-generating equipment connected
either to the Company’s equipment or to customer equipment must conform
to Company standards. This includes any applicable municipal, local, city,
or federal rules and regulations, unless otherwise specified. Any distributed
generation (DG) facilities must meet the clearance requirements detailed in
the Greenbook. This includes all clearance requirements from gas facilities.
Examples of DG facilities include, but are not limited to, renewable sources
such as solar, wind, water power, and farm waste, as well as nonrenewable
energy sources such as natural gas or other fossil fuels for conventional
engines, turbines, and fuel cells.

1.16. Standard Residential Service Voltage

This subsection clarifies PG&E’s voltage requirements when applicants design

residential services.

1.16.1. Single-Phase Service

Unless the applicant qualifies for a three-phase service, the service voltage
for single-family residential homes, duplex homes, town homes,
condominiums, or apartment buildings is 120/240 V, single phase.

2017 1-14
 Section 1, General

PG&E will not supply 120/208 V, single-phase service to residential structures

or buildings unless both of the following conditions are met.
A. A 120/208 V secondary system is established near the location where
the requested service would be supplied.
B. The rating of the disconnecting means (i.e., the main switch or main
disconnect) or of the service entrance does not exceed 225 amperes.

1.16.2. Three-Phase Service

If PG&E determines that a single residential building or structure justifies a 75
kVA transformer at 120/208 V, or a 5 horsepower or larger motor at 120/240 V
for an overhead service, then installing three-phase service is an option for the
applicant. This option also is available for underground services with a 75 kVA
transformer at 120/208 V, or a 10 horsepower or larger motor at 120/240 V.
This applies whether the applicant plans to wire the individual residential
units in a single-phase or a three-phase configuration. Applicants requesting
the three-phase option must provide space on the property for PG&E to
install a dedicated transformer. For more information, see Electric Rule 2.
If, based solely on PG&E’s estimation, the electric service demand is greater
than that which can be supplied by a single-phase, 100 kVA transformer, then
PG&E must supply three-phase service.
Other load limitations and requirements used to determine qualification for
three-phase service are contained in PG&E’s Electric Rule 2.
Three-phase service is available in 208Y/120, 240/120, or 480Y/277 voltages.
The appropriate voltage depends on the minimum load requirements and the
maximum demand load permitted by PG&E’s Electric Rule 2.

1.16.3. Mixed-Use Projects

Mixed-use projects include both commercial and residential loads. When
designing a mixed-use project where the use occurs in separate buildings,
ensure that each facility is supplied by a separate transformer. This means that a
three-phase transformer could supply the commercial unit(s) and a single-phase
transformer could supply the residential units(s).
If the mixed-use occurs in the same building, a single transformer typically is
installed to supply the building. The size and selection of the transformer is
based solely on PG&E’s estimated demand load. The applicant must provide
space on the property for PG&E to install a dedicated transformer.
In some cases, PG&E may determine that the commercial and residential loads
must be supplied by separate transformers and service facilities, including
meters and metering facilities. PG&E makes this determination based on the
nature or anticipated operation of the nonresidential loads and how they may
affect the services. The applicant must provide space for those service facilities
on the property.
Again, when developing mixed-use projects, the applicant must
communicate and work closely with PG&E early in the design phase.

1-15 2017
Section 1, General

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 1-16
SECTION 2 GAS SERVICE
GAS SERVICE
SECTION 2
SECTION 2 GAS SERVICE
 Section 2
Gas Service

2.1. Scope

This section of the manual covers general gas service and gas meter-set
requirements for residential and nonresidential installations.
USA
WARNING
To avoid potential accidents, do NOT begin to
excavate before identifying underground facilities.

State law requires applicants to contact Underground Service Alert (USA) by

dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and holidays
excluded). Ensure that you call USA when planning underground work, before
digging begins, to allow adequate time for USA to determine the location of
underground gas and electric lines or equipment. The potential for an accident
exists if applicants fail to request USA to identify underground utility
facilities before they begin excavating.
First, the applicant must mark the excavation area with white paint. Then, USA
arranges for participating companies to mark the locations of their underground
facilities at the jobsite. This is a free service. See the USA color-code identifiers
in Table 1-1, “USA Color Coding,” on Page 1-1, and on the back of this manual.
Additional information is available at http://www.pge.com/digsafely. Find
USA services at the USA North website (http://www.usanorth.org). USA is a
locating service for excavation only. Do not use USA for design purposes.

2.2. Procedures for Establishing Gas Service Dig Safely

2.2.1. Establishing New Gas Service

Applicants must follow the steps described below to establish new gas service.
A. Applicant’s Planning Stage
When planning to establish new gas service, applicants must:
1. Fill out and submit the appropriate PG&E application. Refer to
Subsection 1.3., “Applying for Building and Renovation Services,”
on Page 1-3, for more information about the application
requirements.
2. Contact their local PG&E project coordinators as early in the
planning stage as possible.
NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact
Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv,
for specific contact numbers listed by area.

2-1 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

B. Working With PG&E

After initially contacting PG&E about installing new gas service,
applicants must:
1. Provide detailed site improvement plans indicating roads, sidewalks,
and driveways, as well as the locations of other site infrastructure
elements. For individual parcels/single buildings, include the
proposed locations of gas and electric meters, building elevations,
and proposed future improvements. Ensure that the written details
for required clearances in meter set assemblies are also included in
the drawing. (Meter locations are subject to PG&E approval.)
2. Submit details about the type(s) of gas appliances being installed
per meter. Include the connected load breakdown in thousand
British Thermal Units (MBTU) per hour for each appliance and its
intended use.
3. Applicants requesting more than the standard delivery pressure of
7 inches of water column (WC) must submit a written justification
for PG&E’s review and approval. Standard delivery pressure is
approximately 1/4 pounds per square inch gauge (psig). See
Subsection 2.4.1., “Gas Pressure,” on Page 2-19, for more
requirements.
4. Applicants can choose either PG&E or an outside company to
design and/or install their services. PG&E provides the applicant
with a bid for service design and installation costs. Specific
conditions must be met whether the applicant chooses PG&E or an
outside company to work on the project. PG&E Standard S5453,
“Joint Trench,” located in Appendix B, “Electric and Gas Service
Documents.” PG&E Standard S5453, Exhibit A, “Joint Trench
Drawing,” and Exhibit E, “Authorization for Joint Trench
Construction, Form B,” both are required when PG&E facilities are
in a trench with other utilities. Contact your local project
coordinator for copies of these documents. (See Table FM-1,
“Service Planning Office Contact Information,” starting on
Page iv.)
Do not perform construction using an unauthorized or preliminary
drawing. The applicant assumes full responsibility for errors,
omissions, or changes if the project is constructed using either
preliminary drawings or drawings that are not approved by PG&E.

PG&E will not accept or assume ownership of additional facilities

installed where the applicant begins construction before the design
is completed and approved by PG&E. Additional facilities, even if
provided at no cost to PG&E, represent increased plant in the rate
base. This includes associated, long-term increases in taxes and
maintenance expenses.

2017 2-2
 Section 2, Gas Service

Applicants are responsible for any additional design changes or

reconstruction costs that may be required if PG&E does not accept
unapproved facilities. PG&E will not pressurize a system that has
not received final design approval and passed all inspections.

Information about service design and installation options is

available either on Form 79-716, “General Terms and Conditions
for Gas and Electric Extension and Service Construction by
Applicant,” or by calling PG&E’s Building and Renovation Service
Center (BRSC) at 877-743-7782.
5. Obtain approval from PG&E’s project coordinators for the gas
service lateral and meter-set location. If the new gas service request
is complex, PG&E may require that estimators and/or engineers
become involved before approving the gas service lateral and
meter-set location.
6. Select a trenching agent to perform the required trenching and
paving services. The trenching agent also must obtain all of the
permits required for installing the gas service pipe from the point of
connection at the main to the approved meter location. Applicants
can select either PG&E or an outside contractor to perform this
work.
If an applicant selects an outside trenching agent for the project, the
applicant must obtain a copy of PG&E’s approved trench route or
construction sketch. PG&E must inspect and approve any trenching
and paving work performed by outside agents.
7. Pay PG&E for all of the installation costs. This includes the costs
for facilities and appurtenant fittings, valves, service pipe, service
regulators, metering equipment, etc., in excess of the allowances.
For more information, see PG&E’s Gas Rule 15, “Gas Main
Extensions,” Section B, “Installation Responsibilities,” and
Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions,” Section E, “Allowances
and Payments by Applicant.”
8. Install, own, and maintain physical protection such as bollards or
barrier posts and/or enclosures, as may be required.
C. Complying with Local Building Laws and Regulations
Applicants must contact local city and county deputies and inspectors to
ensure compliance with all local laws and regulations. Applicants must:
1. Allow only qualified professionals to install applicant-owned
facilities. Also, applicants must ensure that equipment required by
local building codes are inspected by local building inspectors.
2. Complete the required inspections on applicant-installed gas piping
(e.g., houselines) and equipment (e.g., valves, appliances) before
scheduling meter-set work with PG&E.

2-3 2017
 Section 2, Gas Service

2.2.2. Relocating or Adding Load to an Existing Service

An applicant should contact PG&E as early as possible when he or she
plans either to build an addition on an existing premises or to relocate
an existing service to a different, acceptable location. Applicants are
required to fill out and submit PG&E Form 62-0687, “Application
for Service–Existing Service Relocate/Change Service.” This form is
located on pge.com at
http://www.pge.com/tariffs/tm2/pdf/GAS_FORMS_62−0687.pdf.
This form, along with additional information about building and
renovation services, also is found at http://www.pge.com/building/.
Gas App.
The form requires applicants to provide the following information.
• Project Type: Asks the reason for the relocation/rearrangement.
• Project Information: Asks specific information about the project
location and applicant.
• Contract Information: Asks for the applicant’s legal name, mailing
address, etc.
• Representative Information: If the applicant has a legal
representative to relay project information and updates to the PG&E
representative, the legal representative’s name goes here.
• Construction Information: Describes the applicant’s choices for
trenching and backfill work.
• Load Information: Asks for the number of existing meters at each
service location. Provide details about the types of existing gas
appliances, as well as those being installed. Include the connected load
breakdown in thousand British Thermal Units (MBTU) per hour for
each appliance. Also include a description of each appliance’s intended
use.
• Self-Generation and Net Metering Options: Describes the
requirements to apply for PG&E’s net metering program.
• Attachments: Lists the documents required for the application
including site improvement plans, drawings, and maps.
• Agreement to Pay and Signature: Applicants must sign the
agreement and pay any fees associated with the work.
NOTE: Adding load may cause the existing service to become inadequate
and may require the service to be upgraded and or replaced at the
applicant’s expense. (See Gas Rule 16.)
Applicants can choose to provide trenching for gas services relocations.
PG&E Form 62-0687 describes these options in greater detail.
2.3. Gas Service Lateral
All plastic gas distribution service pipes and stub completions must be a minimum
diameter of 1 inch for all new business installations and customer-requested
service relocations.

2017 2-4
 Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.1. General
A gas service lateral is the section of plastic tubing or steel pipe that
connects the service riser and gas meter to PG&E’s gas distribution main.
The gas distribution main usually is located in the street or in an easement
located adjacent to the applicant being served. For an example, see
Figure 2-1, “Typical Gas Service Installation,” on Page 2-6.
Applicants should install the gas distribution mains in joint trenches, when
it is feasible to do so. Locate distribution mains 10 feet from the face or
foundation of any building as described in Gas Design Standard A-90
“Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design,” located in Appendix C,
“Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.” On private property, ensure
that easements are at least 10 feet wide for mains. Services that cross
third-party property also require a 10-foot wide easement.
A financial allowance for the installed service cost is based on the
applicable, connected gas appliances installed within a specific time period.
The allowance is applied toward the cost of a new service, as outlined in
PG&E Gas Rule 16, Section E.
A. When installing a gas service lateral service, PG&E performs the
following actions.
NOTE: While it is PG&E’s responsibility to install and design the gas
service lateral, the applicant has the option to perform both.
1. PG&E installs a service-lateral extension and applies the gas rule
allowances, based on applicant load, to the applicant under the
following conditions:
a. PG&E determines that the loads to be served are bona fide.
b. The loads are connected and the extension placed into service
subject to compliance with Gas Rule 15 and Gas Rule 16.
2. Design the PG&E-approved gas service to the shortest and most
practical route, preferably in a straight line at a right angle from the
gas main to an approved meter location. Avoid offsets, diagonal runs,
bends, and services installed under driveways or customer-paved
areas. Exceptions require PG&E’s advanced approval. When the
building or structure is on a corner lot, PG&E determines the gas
main for connection.
3. Install and connect the gas service lateral to the gas main in the
adjoining street, highway, alley, lane, road, or easement.

2-5 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

Lot Line

Gas Service Riser Bldg.

Gas Meter
Gas Service Pipe

Installation Costs Are

Subject to Allowance

Gas Distribution Main

Street or Roadway

Figure 2-1
Typical Gas Service Installation

4. Install a utility excess flow valve (EFV), as required, when

installing a new service lateral. See Subsection 2.3.1.D. on
Page 2-8 for more information on installing EFVs. For specific
requirements, refer to Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Excess Flow
Valves,” located in Appendix C.
5. Own and maintain the gas service lateral (and EFV, if required)
from its point of connection with the gas main to the service
delivery point.
6. If possible, do not install gas service laterals under or through
retaining structures (e.g., retaining walls) greater than 3 feet tall.
PG&E will consider plans that include service laterals running
under or through retaining structures and determine approval on a
case-by-case basis.
NOTE: A retaining wall is a structure that retains (i.e., holds back)
material (usually earth) and prevents it from sliding or
eroding away. Retaining walls are designed to resist the
pressure of the material being held back.
B. PG&E does not permit the following types of installations.
1. Installing gas service laterals under or through structures, buildings,
foundations, or decks. On an exception basis, PG&E may approve a
gas service riser in a gas meter room that meets the requirements in
Gas Design Standard J-16, “Gas Meter Room,” located in
Appendix C.
2. Installing gas service laterals and gas service risers directly into
concrete or asphalt pavement materials.

2017 2-6
 Section 2, Gas Service

3. Installing gas service risers that are not approved by PG&E.

4. Installing gas service risers without an approved sun shield.
NOTE: If PG&E determines that an applicant’s uninspected trench
excavation requires repair, or if the uninspected trench is
backfilled and/or paved over, the applicant must provide
and pay for all of the paving services and permits that are
required to get an inspection and repair the trench
excavation completely. This includes trenches dug on both
public and private property.
C. When installing a gas service lateral, the applicant is responsible for
ensuring the following conditions are met.
NOTE: Applicants must refer to PG&E Form 79-716, “General Terms
and Conditions for Gas and Electric Extension and Service
Construction by Applicant,” when they propose installing new
gas services for new business utility services. This form is
located on the Tariffs website on pge.com at
http://www.pge.com/tariffs/tm2/pdf/GAS_FORMS_79-716.pdf.
1. Provide and maintain a clear route, free of any obstructions, for
installing the gas service facilities.
2. Trench, backfill, and perform any other digging as described in
PG&E’s specification and inspection instructions, as required.
3. Pay any required permit fees.
4. Install and maintain all of the gas piping downstream of the service
delivery point. See Subsection 2.5., “Applicant-Owned and
Installed Gas-Service Piping (e.g., Houseline), Valves, and
Automatic Shut-Off Devices,” on Page 2-43, for more information.
5. Ensure that all requirements are met in the following PG&E Gas
Design Standards, located in Appendix C.
• A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing”
• A-81, “Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines”
• A-90, “Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design”
• A-93.1, “Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas
Distribution System”
• A-93.3, “Excess Flow Valves”
6. Notify PG&E as soon as any paving activity is planned and provide
PG&E with the scheduled completion date. Applicants should
remember that PG&E can meet their schedules when the Company
is notified early in the process.

2-7 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

7. PG&E must approve all requests for gas service in a casing before
installation. Provide and install an approved casing (i.e., sleeve)
under the paving material when the paving will extend over the gas
service lateral. Applicants must ensure that:
a. The casing is made of a PG&E-approved material. Refer to
Gas Design Standard A-75, located in Appendix C.
b. PG&E employees and equipment have sufficient, safe, and
unobstructed access to the casing location with sufficient space
to perform any required work when installing in a joint trench.
c. Before paving, a minimum 3-inch casing (i.e., sleeve) is placed
around the gas service riser.
8. PG&E Procedure TD-4632P-01, “Cross Bore Prevention and
Mitigation,” provides the steps that must be taken to prevent,
inspect, identify, report, and address cross bores that are created
when PG&E, its contractors, and contracting agencies perform
trenchless construction. All gas construction work performed by
or for PG&E is subject to this procedure, including PG&E
gas-for-electric work (PG&E gas construction installs electric
conduit), deep well anode installation, and applicant-installed work.
NOTE: Find additional information about cross bores at the Sewer
Cleaning Safety website
(http://www.pge.com/en/safety/gaselectricsafety/sewerclea
ningsafety/index.page).
D. Install EFVs according to Gas Design Standard A-93.3, located in
Appendix C.
E. For more information and illustrations, see PG&E Standard S5453,
“Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy
Guide, located in Appendix B.
F. Underground warning tape is required for all gas service and main
pipeline installations as described in Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas
Pipeline Underground Warning Tape,” located in Appendix C.
G. Figure 2-2, “Gas-Only Service Trench;” Figure 2-3, “Typical Gas Bell
Hole−Plan View;” and Figure 2-4, “Typical Bell Hole Depth−Profile
View,” show the typical, PG&E-required excavation for a gas-only
service trench and gas bell hole. All three figures are located on
Page 2-9.

2017 2-8
 Section 2, Gas Service

ÏÏÏÏ
Finished Grade
ÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏ 12”
ÎÎÎ
12”
24”
(30” in Franchise Area)

Warning Tape Installation

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Zone (See Document L-16)
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Existing ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Length

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Pipe

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
12”

Width
4” Approved
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Backfill

Gas Pipe G
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄ (4’ Length x 4’ Width, Plastic Pipe)

ÄÄÄÄÄÄ
2” Bedding
Material (5’ Length x 4’ Width, Steel Pipe)

Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3

Gas-Only Service Trench Typical Gas Bell Hole−Plan View

ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Finish Grade
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Existing
Pipe

12” Below Plastic Pipe

18” Below Steel Pipe

Figure 2-4
Typical Bell Hole Depth−Profile View

Notes in reference to Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, and Figure 2-4.

1. All dimensions are the minimum required amounts.
2. For Figure 2-2, “Gas-Only Service Trench,” soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable
federal, state, county, and local requirements.
3. Some jobs may require bell holes with larger dimensions and trench shoring.

2-9 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.2. Branch Service Pipe

Branching may be used to provide service to no more than two buildings.
The meter installations must be located on adjacent sides of the two buildings
being served. Where a branch-service installation is justified, a separate
location for the gas meter and electric meter is permissible, if necessary.
Design and install all branch services as described in Gas Design
Standard A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation,” and Gas Design
Standard A-90, both located in Appendix C.

2.3.3. Curb Valves

A. A curb shutoff valve is required to be installed when one or all of the
following conditions exist:
1. The total meter capacity exceeds 1,000 standard cubic feet
per hour, and an EFV is not required and not installed. Refer to
Gas Design Standard A-93.3, located in Appendix C, for EFV
requirements.
2. The shutoff valve is not readily accessible or is inside a building
and the service shutoff valve is enclosed (e.g., basement, garage, or
similar obstructed location).
3. An EFV is not required and not installed, and the service line cannot
be quickly squeezed off because of wall-to-wall paving, concrete,
depth of cover, or other surface conditions. This includes known,
planned depth of cover or other surface conditions. Typically, a service
line that is installed in a lawn area with normal soil conditions (i.e., no
wall-to-wall paving, concrete, or other obstruction over the service
line) may be quickly squeezed off.
Typically, a service line installed in a lawn area with normal soil
conditions (i.e., no wall-to-wall paving, concrete, or other
obstruction over the service line) also may be squeezed off quickly.
NOTE: The best location for installing a service line is more than
5 feet from any building, as close to the property line as
practical. Protect the service line in a covered, durable curb
box or valve box that allows the curb valve to be operated
easily.
B. PG&E requires curb valves on services that supply buildings used for
public assembly. Such buildings include, but are not limited to:
• Theaters
• Churches
• Auditoriums
• Arenas
• Schools
• Hospitals

2017 2-10
 Section 2, Gas Service

C. PG&E may require curb valves on small, gas-distribution systems.

These systems include, but are not limited to:
• Mobile home parks (not individual mobile homes)
• Condominiums and apartments
• Multiple buildings
• Shopping centers
• Commercial/industrial parks

2.3.4. Joint Utility Service Trenches

When installing underground electric service, PG&E’s gas service lateral

usually is installed in a common joint trench with the electric service
lateral. The joint trench typically includes telephone and cable television
facilities. No other utilities or wiring (i.e., water, sewer, private wires)
are allowed in a joint trench. See the definition for “Non-Utility” in
Appendix A, “Acronyms and Glossary.”
When planning to install a joint-trench installation, allow for additional lead
time to design and engineer the joint trench. Applicants must be aware of
the following requirements.
1. A joint trench composite drawing and an “Authorization for Joint
Trench Construction, Form B” both are required when PG&E
facilities are located in a trench with other utilities.
2. Applicants either must submit joint trench drawings to PG&E for
review, or PG&E can prepare joint trench drawings for applicants
at their expense.
3. PG&E must approve the trench’s design details before trenching
begins and facilities are installed.
4. Figure 2-5 below shows the layout of a “Typical Joint-Service Trench.”
Separation and clearance details for joint utility service trenches are located
in Table 2-1, “Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for
Trenches,” on Page 2-13.

2-11 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

12”
Minimum

* Increase depth to 30”

18” *
in the Franchise area.

39” Minimum
T C

3”
12”
6”

4”
S G
Minimum
Bedding Material

2”
Figure 2-5
Typical Joint-Service Trench

Notes in reference to Figure 2-5 on Page 2-12.

1. Trench depth varies depending on the occupant’s facility allotment.
2. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s, and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements.
3. A joint service trench must meet all separation and clearance dimensions shown in Table 2-1, below.
4. For more information on Figure 2-5, see PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide,
located in Appendix B.

2017 2-12
 Section 2, Gas Service

Table 2-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches1

Duct DB
G C S P SL
T T
(In Inches)
G Gas2 – 12 12 12 6 12 6
T Telephone (Duct) 12 – 1 1 12 12 12
T Telephone (Direct Bury) 12 1 – 1 12 12 12
C CATV 12 1 1 – 12 12 12
S Electric Secondary 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
P Electric Primary 12 12 12 12 3 3 3
SL Streetlight3 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
Foreign Electric Sources,
NE 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Non-PG&E4
1 All separation clearance distances are in inches.
2 For more information about this table, see PG&E Bulletin TD-5453B-002, “Updated Separation Requirements For
Conduit in Joint Trench,” located in Appendix B.
3 Streetlight circuits not owned by PG&E must be installed to meet the requirements in PG&E’s Joint Trench
Configurations & Occupancy Guide. Specifically, applicants must review the requirements for working with a
second utility company.
4 Considered a “utility” as defined in PG&E Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.”

PG&E does not differentiate between the clearances for casing/conduit and
pipe. The clearances and installation requirements are the same for both.
For more information on the minimum separation and clearance requirements
for service trenches, see Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123,
“Backfill Sand,” located in Appendix B.
When different service facilities (e.g., gas, electric, telecommunications) are
installed in close proximity (e.g., in a joint trench), applicants must ensure
that the facilities maintain a minimum horizontal separation of 36 inches
from the gas riser where they transition from below ground to above ground.
Clearances between other facilities can be reduced only when the parties
supplying those services or facilities reach a mutual agreement.
NOTE: Applicants must ensure that sufficient space is provided between
facilities at all times to allow for safe maintenance and operation.
A. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment
including wires, cables, metering and telecommunication enclosures,
bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within 36 inches of the gas service
riser.
This distance can be reduced to 18 inches for electrical devices or
equipment certified for National Electric Code (NEC) Class I,
Division 2 locations. See Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set
Separation Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-32, and Figure 2-21,
“Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Sources of Ignition,” on
Page 2-34.

2-13 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

B. Applicants must keep the area immediately behind gas meters, service
facilities, and risers free and clear of all other facilities or equipment
(i.e., pipes, building vents, or conduits). This requirement also applies
to the area between those facilities and the premises or structure being
served.
Before installing utility conduits or gas service piping, applicants must
discuss the service arrangements and coordinate the meter locations and
joint trench requirements with a PG&E project coordinator.
The joint trench composite drawing must include details of the sizes and
quantities of all the equipment sharing the trench. PG&E inspectors must
approve the trench after installation is complete.
Applicants must ensure that the gas and electric meters are installed
according to Figure 2-19 on Page 2-32, providing the minimum separation
clearances. Refer to the following sections of this manual for acceptable
electric meter utility locations.
• Section 5, “Electric Metering: General”
• Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential”
• Section 7, “Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial, and
Agricultural”
• Subsection 2.4., “Set Requirements for Gas Meters” (on Page 2-19)
Wet-utility piping or facilities are not permitted in a joint trench. Examples
of wet utilities that are not allowed in a joint trench include the following:
• Propane lines
• Pressurized water lines
• Sewer, sanitary, or storm drains
Both PG&E Standard S5453, Exhibit B, and the Joint Trench
Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in Appendix B, describe the
requirements for separating a wet utility from a joint trench.
When applicants want to install facilities in a joint trench other than those
listed in this section, PG&E requires a written request that includes a
justification for the exception. Applicants must submit their requests to
PG&E for review and approval before beginning work on a joint trench.

2017 2-14
 Section 2, Gas Service

2.3.5. Multiple Buildings Located on One Lot

A. Two Buildings Located on One Lot
1. PG&E may furnish a separate gas service to each building if it does
not require an additional gas distribution main extension.
Figure 2-6, “Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Single
Lot,” on Page 2-13, and Figure 2-7, “Separate Gas Services for
Two Buildings on a Corner Lot,” on Page 2-16, show examples of
two premises on one lot with separate gas services.

One or More Meters

Grouped at This Location
Rear
Building

PG&E-Owned
Gas Service Pipe

One or More Meters

Front Grouped at This Location
Building

Property Line
Gas Distribution Main

Street or Roadway

Figure 2-6
Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Single Lot

2-15 2017
 Section 2, Gas Service

Lot Line
Gas Service Pipe
Gas Meter

Street or
Right-of-Way Building

Possible Subdivision of Property

Gas Meter
Building Gas Service Pipe Riser
Gas-
Distribution
Main
Property Line

Gas Service Pipe

Gas Distribution Main

Property Line

Figure 2-7
Separate Gas Services for Two Buildings on a Corner Lot

2. When more than one gas meter is required to serve a single

building, the meters for that building must be grouped at a common
location that has been approved by PG&E. See Subsection 2.4.2.E.,
“Multiple Gas Meter Connection Requirements for Single and
Double (Banked) Manifold Connections,” on Page 2-34, for
grouping requirements when locations have multiple meters.
B. Three or More Buildings Located on One Lot
When two buildings, either single family or multifamily, are on the same
lot and located in close proximity to each other, PG&E may install a gas
distribution main on the applicants’ properties. For specific requirements,
see PG&E’s main-extension rule, Gas Rule 15, and service-pipe extension
rule, Gas Rule 16. Before a gas distribution main can be installed,
applicants must ensure that the following conditions are met.
1. There must be a protected and accessible location on the property.
2. A satisfactory right-of-way, easement, or permit must be available
at no cost to PG&E.
Typically, PG&E installs a single, gas-service pipe to each building, as
described in Gas Rule 16.

2017 2-16
 Section 2, Gas Service

Gas
Meters Service
12 Unit Pipe Lot Line
Gas 6 Unit Bldg.
Gas
Service
Main
Pipe Meters
Meter
Gas Bldg.
6 8 Unit Service
6 Unit Meters
Unit Pipe Meter
Meters Gas Main
Bldg.
Right-of-Way on
Private Roadway
Gas Main Gas Service Pipe Property Line Meter
Property Line
Gas Main Gas Service Pipe Riser
Gas
Distribution Gas Distribution Main
Main
Street or Roadway Street or Roadway

Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9

Apartments With Grouped Meter Locations Individually Metered Buildings

Typical Gas Distribution Main and Service Pipe Installation

for Property With Three or More Buildings

Multifamily residential complexes are subject to a California Public

Utilities Commission (CPUC) mandate specifying that each unit is
metered individually. Specifically, see Public Utilities Code Division 1,
“Regulation of Public Utilities,” Part 1, “Public Utilities Act,” Chapter
4, “Regulation of Public Utilities,” Article 3, “Equipment, Practices,
and Facilities,” Section 780.5 (on the Internet at
http://leginfo.legislature.ca.gov/faces/codes_displaySection.xhtml?secti
onNum=780.5.&lawCode=PUC).
EXCEPTION: A single gas meter may serve an entire complex when the
gas is used only for central heating systems (i.e., space, water) that
supply all tenants in common, and when each individual unit does not
use gas appliances that require combustion venting. Refer to Gas Rule 18,
“Supply to Separate Premises and Submetering of Gas.”
When each dwelling unit includes ground-floor space, each unit may
have an individual service pipe and separate meter location if:
1. Sufficient meter space is provided.
2. Local ordinances do not prohibit such arrangements.
When it is practical, install the gas service pipe in a joint trench with the
electric service.

2-17 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

A multifamily apartment building with individually metered spaces may

have more than one service connection under the standard provisions of
Gas Rule 16 if all of the following conditions exist.
1. An unreasonable burden, in PG&E’s opinion, will be placed on the
customer restricted to one service connection.
2. Service connections are a minimum of 150 feet apart.
3. Each service connection provides service to a minimum group of
four meters.
4. Local code or ordinance allows the multi-service arrangement.
NOTE: For more information, see PG&E’s Gas Rule 16,
Section C.2, “Number of Extensions.”
5. Local code or ordinance allows for the multi-service arrangement.
See Subsection 2.4.2.E. on Page 2-34 for specific requirements when
locations have multiple meters.

2.3.6. Mobile Home Parks

Gas mains and services in mobile home parks must meet essentially the
same standards for gas installations that are required for residential and
nonresidential applications.
In addition, applicants must not install gas mains, services, and meters in
the following areas.
• On steep slopes.
• In areas where landscaping restricts access.
• Under existing or proposed structures including mobile homes,
porches, and stairs leading to porches.
Applicants should install the gas distribution mains in the roadway, when it
is practical to do so, and in joint trenches, when it is feasible. Locate
distribution mains 10 feet from the face or foundation of any building as
described in Gas Design Standard A-90 located in Appendix C. On private
property, ensure that rights-of-way are at least 10 feet wide for mains and at
least 5 feet wide for service piping. Only use easements for utility
installations. Table 2-1 on Page 2-13 shows the minimum separation and
clearance requirements for service trenches.
NOTE: Curb valves are not recommended for individual mobile
homes; however, a curb valve may be installed on a park’s
community building.
NOTE: Refer to Gas Design Standard J-12.4, “Mobile Home/Manufactured
Home Meter Set Installation.” Contact your local project
coordinator for this document.
Also see the gas meter set requirements in Subsection 2.4.2.A.3., “Mobile
Home Parks,” on Page 2-23.

2017 2-18
 Section 2, Gas Service

2.4. Set Requirements for Gas Meters

The following information describes the meter set requirements for gas services.

2.4.1. Gas Pressure

The following information describes the types of delivery pressures
available with gas service.
A. Standard Delivery Pressure
PG&E typically will provide gas service pressure to the service delivery
point at 7 inches of water column (WC). This is approximately 1/4 psig,
as measured at the gas meter outlet.
B. Elevated Delivery Pressure
PG&E may be able to provide gas service at higher gas-delivery
pressures, depending on the location of the applicant’s facility and on
the requirements of the gas system serving that location. PG&E
maintains sole authority to determine if the elevated delivery-pressure
service is available at a specified location.
In all elevated delivery-pressure service situations, PG&E reserves the
right to reduce the gas service pressure to standard delivery pressure, as
outlined in Gas Rule 2, “Description of Service,” when:
• PG&E determines that the elevated gas pressure is no longer
available.
• The current delivery pressure is detrimental to PG&E’s gas
distribution system.
NOTE: When providing elevated gas-pressure service, PG&E can
incur additional costs. In these cases, special facilities
charges will apply as described in Gas Rule 2. Applicants
must pay these charges before PG&E can provide the
services.
The following two numbered items describe cases where special
facilities charges can apply.
1. For 2-psig Services: In many PG&E service territories with
sufficient distribution operating pressure, 2-psig delivery pressure
may be available. When completing PG&E’s “Application for
Service” form, applicants must request 2-psig gas-service delivery
pressure in the “Load Information” section. In most cases, special
facilities charges will not apply for a 2-psig delivery request. As
mentioned previously, PG&E will determine if special facilities
charges apply.
2. For Services Higher Than 2 psig: Elevated gas-metering
pressures higher than 2 psig may be available from the local gas
distribution system. PG&E must ensure that tapping into this
existing service will not be detrimental to the operation of that gas
system.

2-19 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

When requesting elevated gas-service delivery pressure higher than

2 psig, applicants must follow these steps.
a. Contact the local PG&E project coordinator as soon as possible
(preferably in the planning stage for a new or remodeled
building).
b. Fill out the appropriate PG&E “Application for Service” form
and note the gas-service delivery pressure being requested in
the “Load Information” portion of the form.
c. Submit a formal, written request and justification for elevated
gas-service delivery pressure (e.g., the hypothetical houseline
diameter size at standard delivery pressure, the appliances’
specification requirements).
d. Submit a houseline piping schematic.
e. Submit the manufacturer’s appliance specifications to ensure
that the appliances will operate as designed.
f. Provide detailed load information for all appliances and their
intended use.
C. Back-Pressure Protection
PG&E may require the applicant to install a check valve after the
PG&E gas meter’s set point of connection. This check valve prevents
backflow. PG&E determines the need for check valves on a
case-by-case basis. The applicant is required to have a maintenance plan
and to maintain the check valve.
For all higher-than-standard delivery pressure, PG&E recommends that
applicants hire a qualified person, such as plumber or contractor, to
review all of the applicant-owned gas piping, venting, and appliance
installations for the gas pressure service being requested. The qualified
person can ensure that the installations comply with all local, state, and
federal codes, standards, and regulations. Specifically, the qualified
person helps to ensure that the Uniform Plumbing Code is enforced
based on the installation requirements of the local governing agency in
the applicant’s location.
2.4.2. Gas Meter-Set Locations
Typically, PG&E provides only one meter set (in an outside location) for
each dwelling unit and one service lateral to each building. PG&E may
require that the meter be set at the property line if either of the following
two conditions are met:
1. The building is back more than 200 feet from the property line.
2. A potential hazard or unusual site condition threatens the service lateral
between the property line and the building. Some examples of unusual
site condition are plowed land, ditches, bridges, ponds, waterways, leach
fields, bioswales, inaccessible security areas, or other deterrent, obstacle,
or hazard.

2017 2-20
 Section 2, Gas Service

PG&E prefers that rotary meter sets be located outside of and away from
the building.
PG&E must have unrestricted, drive-up access for service trucks and
adequate space to install and maintain the meter.
Any deviations require advanced approval from PG&E.
For specific information, see Gas Rule 16, Section C, Number 5, “Unusual
Site Conditions.” Figure 2-10, “Property Line Installation,” below, shows a
property-line meter set installation.

Building

Potential Hazard

Gas Meter Location and Meter Protection Provided

By the Applicant
Property Line
Gas Service Pipe

Street or Roadway Gas Distribution Main

Figure 2-10
Property Line Installation

A. Descriptions of Acceptable Meter Locations

For descriptions of, and specific requirements for, acceptable gas meter
locations, see Gas Design Standard J-15, “Gas Meter Locations,”
located in Appendix C.
Figure 2-11, “Acceptable Locations for Gas Meter Installations,” on
Page 2-23, and Figure 2-12, “Acceptable Meter Locations for Mobile
Home Parks,” on Page 2-24, illustrate locations that are acceptable for
installing typical meter sets.

2-21 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

1. Approved Meter Set Locations (In Order of Preference)

NOTE: For specific requirements and definitions, see Gas
Design Standard J-15, located in Appendix C.
a. Meter set located outside a building.
b. Meter set located outside in an alcove or enclosure. *
*An alcove is an exterior space that is recessed into a building or wall.
The alcove’s width can vary depending on the meter set. PG&E provides
final dimensions after confirming the meter size. Please consult your local
Service Planning office for guidance.
For single-diaphragm meters, applicants must use the area dimensions
shaded in Figure 2-14 on Page 2-27 and Figure 2-15 on Page 2-28 (depth
not to exceed 36 inches).
For single-rotary meters, use the area dimensions shaded in Figure 2-16 on
Page 2-29, Figure 2-17 on Page 2-30, and Figure 2-18 on Page 2-31 (depth
not to exceed 36 inches and height at 8 feet).
A manifold located in an alcove may require a custom design depending
on the configuration.
Gates are not a preferred option and will be approved only on a
case-by-case basis. If a gate is proposed in front of the alcove, it must have
a minimum 50% open area. Lighting, wiring, foreign pipes, or other
facilities are not allowed in the alcove.
Contact your local PG&E project coordinator for more information.
c. Meter set located in a breezeway.
d. Meter set located in a cabinet.
NOTE: PG&E will consider approving Numbers e. and f.,
below, only after Numbers a. through d. on Page 2-22
are ruled out as options.
e. Meter set located in a buried vault, pit, or box.
f. Meter set (excluding service shutoff valve) located inside a
building in a gas meter room.

2017 2-22
 Section 2, Gas Service

2. Single Residential, Apartment, or Nonresidential

Building
Rear Alley

Property Line
Gas Distribution Main

ÍÍ ÍÍ
ÍÍ Gate
ÍÍÍ
ÍÍ ÍÍÍÍ ÍÍ
ÍÍ ÍÍÍ ÍÍBuilding
ÍÍ
ÍÍ
Building Gate
Building

ÍÍ
Building
Gate

Gate
Gate

Driveway Driveway Driveway Driveway

Gas Distribution Main

ÍÍÍÍÍÍ Street or Roadway
Preferred Meter Locations
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ Non-Preferred Meter Locations

Figure 2-11
Acceptable Locations for Gas Meter Installations

NOTE: When the meter set from the gas distribution line is
located in a rear alley, applicants should locate the meter
set outside of any gated or fenced area. This allows easy
access for PG&E employees when maintenance is
required.

3. Mobile Home Parks

For new mobile home parks, the mobile home park owner or
operator must provide a separate and independent meter for each
lot. New mobile home parks are not allowed to have submetering
facilities.

Typically, meters are located on flat surfaces that are not obstructed
by landscaping. Meter locations cannot be obstructed by porches
and stairs leading to porches. Figure 2-12, on Page 2-24, represents
several acceptable meter locations within a typical mobile home
park.

2-23 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

Parking

Canopy
Over Parking Canopy Over
Patio Porch
Deck Gate Parking
Porch
Coach

Porch
Gate
Gas
Distribution
Street or Garage Main
Parking Site-Built Garage
Roadway
Canopy Over Garage
Porch
Patio
Meter Location Deck
Property Line

Acceptable Meter Locations

Porch
Figure 2-12
Acceptable Meter Locations for Mobile Home Parks

PG&E does not provide metering facilities if they will be attached

directly to a “movable” mobile home unit that is installed or set up
in any location, including a mobile home park. Before PG&E
provides metering facilities, the mobile home must meet both of
the following conditions.
a. Fixed in Place: The mobile home typically does not have
either running gear or wheels and is not capable of being
moved to another location.
b. Installed on a Foundation System: The mobile home must
have a foundation system, as described in State of California
Title 25, “Housing and Community Development Programs,”
Division 1, “Housing and Community Development,”
Chapter 2, “Mobilehome Parks and Installations,” Article 7,
“MH-Unit and Commercial Modular Installations and
Facilities,” § 1333, “Foundation Systems.”
“If a mobile home park contains lots or site spaces that
are set up to accommodate “movable” mobile home
units, PG&E will install and supply the park using
utility-approved service and metering facilities at a
fixed location other than the mobile home. In these
cases, applicants are responsible for connecting their
mobile home units to those fixed metering facilities.”

2017 2-24
 Section 2, Gas Service

4. Subsidence Areas
In subsidence areas, the acceptable location requirements are the
same as the requirements outlined in Subsection 2.4.2.A.,
“Descriptions of Acceptable Meter Locations,” on Page 2-21.
PG&E may require a flexible connector to be installed between the
gas meter outlet and the houseline. These connectors may require
additional clearance space. See Figure 2-13, “Flex-Hose Meter
Set−Residential and Small Commercial,” located below, for a
sample installation. Contact your local project coordinator for Gas
Design Standard J-58, “Flex Hose Meter Set Installation,” which
provides information about diaphragm and rotary meters in
subsidence areas.

Service Tee Owned and Installed by PG&E

SmartMeter
Regulator Module Applicant’s
Houseline
PG&E Plugged
SmartMeter Fitting
Plugged
See Note 1 Fitting

Insulated R R
Service Valve

Service Riser 1”

Front View Side View

Grade
Precast Concrete Pad
12” x 12” x 3”
Figure 2-13
Flex-Hose Meter Set–Residential and Small Commercial

Notes in reference to Figure 2-13.

1. Hoses have a minimum bending radius (R) based on the projected settlement of the ground and on
the size of the hose.
B. Descriptions of Unacceptable Meter Locations
For new or remodeled buildings, do not locate gas meter sets in the
following areas.
1. In curb meter boxes or vaults.
2. In living quarters, closets, toilet rooms, or bathrooms.
3. In garages without properly vented meter cabinets.
4. Behind fences that applicants can lock.
5. On steep slopes.
6. In areas where landscaping restricts access.

2-25 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

7. Within engine, boiler, heater, or electrical-equipment rooms.

8. Under display platforms or show windows in commercial
buildings. (This includes any permanent, elevated display floors or
platforms associated with the window where the purpose of the
window is to present a display to the public.)
9. In contact with the soil, in a depression below general ground level,
or where potentially corrosive materials are likely to contact the
meter set.
10. In poorly ventilated tradesman alleys (i.e., passageway in a building
with a door at one end).
11. In crawl spaces under buildings or decks.
12. Near a driveway, drive-thru, or other traveled area. Gas meters
located in traveled ways must be adequately protected from passing
vehicles as described in Gas Design Standard J-95, “Meter Guard
Design and Installation Arrangement,” located in Appendix C.
13. In a metallic cabinet, room, or location that blocks or interferes
with the radio frequency signal transmissions that are necessary for
PG&E to operate its SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter Reading
system.
14. In any location that does not provide the required working space.
The height dimension is 6 feet, 6 inches of clearance above ground
and the depth dimension is 3 feet of clearance in front of the gas
meter. See the figures in Subsection 2.4.2.C., “Single Gas Meter
Connection Requirements,” below, for the different width
dimensions.
NOTE: All meter locations are subject to PG&E approval.
C. Single Gas Meter Connection Requirements
The figures beginning on Page 2-27 illustrate typical meter-set
dimensions and working clearance requirements based on the total
diversified loads and stated delivery pressure.
NOTE: The actual meter-set configuration, including the
dimensions, may be different depending on field
conditions and restrictions.
Consult with your local project coordinator for the exact meter location
and houseline placement and orientation. Customer-installed equipment
(e.g., earthquake valves) must be installed on customer houseline and
cannot reduce the minimum riser-to-houseline dimension.
A commercial meter set may require the riser to be located farther away
from the face of the building to accommodate the meter’s installation.
Your local project coordinator can verify th at risers and houselines are
installed and meet all minimum clearance requirements before
scheduling the meter set installation.

2017 2-26
 Section 2, Gas Service

1. Figure 2-14 represents a typical gas meter kit with 0 through

350 scfh at 7 inches WC or 0 through 600 scfh at 2 psig. Reverse
sets are not allowed. The houseline must be to the right of the gas
service riser.
Building Finished Wall

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Riser
Location 6” − 9”
4” Minimum
Houseline Stub Out
(From Finished Wall)

Riser 11” Houseline

Clear and Level

Work Space
(Width − 48” 36”
Depth − 36”
Height − 78”)

12” 24” 12”

Top View

Figure 2-14
Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection

2-27 2017
 Section 2, Gas Service

2. Figure 2-15 represents a typical gas meter kit with 351 through
1,400 scfh at 7 inches WC or 601 through 2,400 scfh at 2 psig.
Do not use reverse sets for 400 through 600 class meters
(i.e., 400, 425, 630). The houseline must be to the right of the gas
service riser.

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Building Finished Wall

ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ Riser
Location 6” − 9”
6” Minimum
Houseline Stub Out
(From Finished Wall)

Riser Houseline
14” 400−600 Class
17” 800 Class
19” 1000 Class

36”
Clear and Level
Work Space
(Width − 54”
Depth − 36”
Height − 78”)

12” 30” 12”

Top View

Figure 2-15
Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1,000 Class Meters

2017 2-28
 Section 2, Gas Service

3. Figure 2-16 represents a rotary gas meter with 1,401 through

3,000 scfh at an approved delivery pressure.

52” Min.
See Note 6
12”
10’ See
Detail A

36”

Meter Set

32”

15”
6”
6” Finished
Grade
4”
1”

6”
Double
Provided and Installed Provided and Installed
Gate or
By PG&E By Customer
8’ 0” Minimum Removable
Headroom Sections
Required
9’ 0”
Customer to Supply 2” Flat 6’ 0”
Detail A Face Flange ANSI 150
Enclosure Requirements
Figure 2-16
Gas Meter Connection Using a 1.5M or 3M Rotary Gas Meter
Notes in reference to Figure 2-16.
1. Customers must provide a 40 inches x 36 inches x 4 inches concrete pad with minimum #4 rebar.
2. Customers must provide a 2 inch ANSI 150 Flat Face flange to connect to PG&E facilities.
3. If the meter set is built next to a building wall, place the vertical leg of the riser and the houseline
20 inches from the wall. This ensures that the meter set components are built in a straight line.
4. The finished grade must be below the bury-line marking on the service riser.
5. PG&E’s weld elbow is optional.
6. The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The
riser must be a minimum of 36 inches from sources of ignition and from any openings into the
building. This clearance area extends 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, 36 inches below the
lowest regulator vent, and 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E meter-set equipment.

2-29 2017
 Section 2, Gas Service

4. Figure 2-17 represents a rotary gas meter with 3,001 through

7,000 scfh at an approved delivery pressure.

90” Min.

10’ See Note 6

12”
See
Detail A

36”

Meter Set

32”

Bolt Down Support 6”

to Pad (Typ.) Finished
Grade
4” 1”
6” Double Gate or
Removable Sections

Provided and Installed Provided and Installed

By PG&E By Customer
8’ 0” Minimum
Headroom
Required
12’ 0”
Customer to Supply 3” Flat
Detail A 6’ 0”
Face Flange ANSI 150 Enclosure Requirements
Figure 2-17
Gas Meter Connection Using a 5M or 7M Rotary Gas Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 2-17.

1. Customers must provide a 78 inches x 36 inches x 4 inches concrete pad with minimum #4 rebar.
2. Customers must provide a 3 inch ANSI 150 Flat Face flange to connect to PG&E facilities.
3. If the meter set is built next to a building wall, place the vertical leg of the riser and the houseline
20 inches away from the wall. This is to ensure the meter set components are built in a straight line.
4. The finished grade must be below the bury-line marking on the service riser.
5. PG&E’s weld elbow is optional.
6. The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The
riser must be a minimum distance of 36 inches from sources of ignition and openings into the
building. This clearance area extends 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, 36 inches below the
lowest regulator vent, and 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E meter-set equipment.

2017 2-30
 Section 2, Gas Service

5. Figure 2-18 represents a rotary gas meter with 7,001 through

16,000 scfh at an approved delivery pressure.

106” Min.

12”
See
10’ See Note 6
Detail A

Meter
Set

32”

36”
Bolt Down Support
to Pad (Typ.) 6”

4”
Finished 1”
Double Gate or Grade
6”
Removable Sections

Provided and Installed Provided and Installed

By PG&E By Customer
8’ 0” Minimum
Headroom
Required
14’ 0”
Customer to Supply 4” Flat 6’ 0”
Detail A Face Flange ANSI 150 Enclosure Requirements

Figure 2-18
Gas Meter Connection Using an 11M or 16M Rotary Gas Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 2-18.

1. Customers must provide a 96 inch x 36 inch x 4 inch concrete pad with minimum #4 rebar.
2. Customers must provide a 4 inch ANSI 150 Flat Face flange to connect to PG&E facilities.
3. If the meter set is built next to a building wall, place the vertical leg of the riser and the houseline
20 inches away from the wall. This ensures the meter set components are built in a straight line.
4. The finished grade must be below the bury-line marking on the service riser.
5. PG&E’s weld elbow is optional.
6. The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The
riser must be a minimum distance of 36 inches from sources of ignition and openings into the
building. This clearance area extends 10 feet above the highest regulator vent, 36 inches below the
lowest regulator vent, and 12 inches beyond the farthest PG&E meter-set equipment. Contact your
local project coordinator about possible locations for regulator vents. (The regulations for large,
industrial meter sets can vary.)

2-31 2017
 Section 2, Gas Service

D. Minimum Meter Set Clearance Requirements

Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and
Clearances,” below; Figure 2-20, “Gas Meter Set Clearance From
Building Openings,” on Page 2-33; and Figure 2-21, “Gas Regulator Set
Clearance Requirement From Sources of Ignition,” on Page 2-34, all
represent various metering facilities’ clearance requirements. If
applicants install enclosures on their premises, the enclosures must meet
the specifications provided in these illustrations.

30” Min. To 12” Min. To

Building Outside Building
Openable Corner Corner Electric Meter −
Window Alternate Location
6” Min. (See Notes 1 and 2)
to Inside
Electric Meter Building Corner
10’
(See Notes 1 and 2) No Wires In This Shaded Area Min
(See Note 2)

36” Minimum 36” Minimum CL

75” Max. From Center of From Center of 12” Minimum
66” Preferred Riser to Edge of Riser to Edge From Electric
48” Min. Panels of Panels Service Conduit
12” Minimum Service Tee (See Note 3)
From Electric CL Communications
Service Conduit PG&E Enclosure
(See Note 2)
SmartMeter

Communications
Enclosure -
Alternate Location 26”
(See Note 2) Gas Riser
Gas Meter Finished Grade
(See Note 3)
(See Note 4)

See Figure 2-20 and Note 3 on Page 2-33

Figure 2-19
Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances

Notes in reference to Figure 2-19.

1. Electric meter panel locations are subject to utility approval and must comply with the applicable code
requirements. PG&E does not have specific requirements for the distance from the electric panel to the
outside building corner. See Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” for properly locating the electric
meters. See Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-12, for electric meter working space.
2. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering
enclosures, telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within the shaded
area around the gas meter. The 36-inch distance can be reduced to 18 inches for electrical devices or
equipment certified for NEC Class I, Division 2 locations.
3. Place the gas service riser 6 inches to 9 inches from the finished wall. The completed customer
houseline at the service delivery point must extend a minimum of 4 to 6 inches from the finished
wall where the meter is to be set, and must be 26 inches above the finished grade. See Figure 2-14 on
Page 2-27, Figure 2-15 on Page 2-28, and Subsection 2.5. on Page 2-43.
4. The minimum dimensions and clearances in Figure 2-19 are good for gas meters up to the
1,000 class. See Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 on Pages 2-27 and 2-28 for illustrations of clear and
level working space in front of the gas meter.

2017 2-32
 Section 2, Gas Service

Openable
Window The minimum clearances do not
apply to fixed windows that are not
designed to open.

No Wires in Shaded Areas

10’
Min.
Minimum
Clearance
36” Min. 36” Min.

Building Vent CUBIC

FEET
Building Vent

Figure 2-20
Gas Meter Set Clearance From Building Openings

Notes in reference to Figure 2-20.

1. Do not place gas regulator vents under display platforms or show windows in commercial buildings.
This includes any permanent, elevated display floors or platforms associated with the window, where
the purpose of the window is to present a display to the public.
2. Do not place gas regulator vents under building overhangs where the overhang is likely to direct
venting gas to a building opening.
3. The building vent openings, sources of ignition, and above-ground water sources must be a minimum
of 36 inches away from the riser.
4. Applicants must not install water spigots, lines, gutter systems, or other above-ground sources within
36 inches of the gas or electric facilities.
5. For a large meter or multi-meter manifold, the minimum separation requirement for sources of ignition,
opening to buildings or sources of above-ground water, extend 12 inches beyond the farthest connection
to the applicant houseline, and 10 feet above the highest regulator vent.

2-33 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

Pad-Mounted
Transformers,.
Air-Intake Vents Exhaust Fan All Electric Equip. and
(See Notes 1 & 2) Wiring (e.g., Central Air,
Exhaust Fan)

3’ Min.

Air-Intake
3’ Min. Vents (See
Notes 1 & 2)

8’ Min. 8’ Min.
Figure 2-21
Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Sources of Ignition

Note in reference to Figure 2-21.

1. An 8-foot minimum horizontal and 10-foot minimum vertical clearance is required from the gas
service riser to combustion air-intake vents and forced air-intake vents.
2. For a large meter set or multimeter manifold, this clearance requirement will extend 8 feet beyond
the farthest PG&E meter equipment.

E. Multimeter Manifolds
Specific requirements in this subsection apply to particular types of
premises (e.g., multifamily, apartment, and commercial buildings)
where multiple meters are installed at a single location using the
manifold configuration. These manifold connection requirements are
additions to the meter-set requirements for single gas meter sets.
PG&E limits gas meter manifold configurations to one-tier or two-tier
meter manifolds not exceeding 60 inches high. These manifolds are
measured from the final, level, standing surface to the top of the
manifold.
NOTE: Applicants must provide their PG&E project coordinator
with a written justification for approval when requesting a
three-tiered manifold or a manifold greater than 60 inches
high.
PG&E will assess the applicant’s site and conditions for gas service
lateral and metering installations before approving an installation site.
Refer to Gas Design Standard J-15, located in Appendix C, for
additional information.

2017 2-34
 Section 2, Gas Service

No Wires in Service Tee and Applicant

Shaded Areas Service Tee and See Note 3 Houseline
Applicant Houseline
F A A
10’
F A A A
D PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter

10’
PG&E PG&E PG&E PG&E
SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter

C
B
F A A A
E Shut-Off Valve D
PG&E PG&E PG&E PG&E
SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter

Finished Grade
B
Single Manifold
E Shut-Off Valve
Finished Grade
Two-Tier Manifolds
Figure 2-22
Dimensions for Typical, Residential, Multimeter Installations

Table 2-2 Dimensions to Figure 2-22

Dimension Installation Comments
12” for residential only
PG&E provides custom-design dimensions
15” for cabinet installations only
A for mixed meter sizes and for larger than
20” for all commercial up to 1,000 class
1,000 class meters.
meters
26” (typ.) for unenclosed
B −
32” (typ.) for cabinet installations
24” residential (unenclosed and cabinet) Contact your local project coordinator for
C
36” commercial two-tier commercial manifolds.
6” min. to inside building corner
D 12” min. to outside building corner From farthest edge of PG&E equipment.
36” minimum to electrical wires (see Note 3)
PG&E may approve Dimension E to be
30” minimum to inside or outside corner
reduced on a case-by-case basis. For
E of building
example, in non-pedestrian traffic areas
36” minimum to electrical wires (see Note 3)
and on select PG&E equipment.
24” (typ.) for residential PG&E provides custom-design dimensions
F 36” (typ.) for 400 to 1,000 class meter, for mixed meter sizes and for larger than
commercial 1,000 class meters.
Notes in reference to Figure 2-22
1. The applicant’s houselines must be stubbed out 4 inches to 6 inches from the finished wall at the
locations shown.
2. The applicant must clearly mark each houseline. See Subsection 2.4.2.G.9., “Meter-Set
Requirements for Marking Houselines,” on Page 2-41.
3. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering
enclosures, telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within 36 inches
horizontally from the farthest edge of PG&E facilities and 10 feet above the regulator vent.
4. Applicants may need to install the riser farther away from the building to accommodate the manifold
installation. Consult your local project coordinator for site-specific details.

2-35 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

F. Requirements for Gas Meter Cabinets Gas Meter Rooms,

Enclosures, and Closets
1. General Requirements for Meter Cabinets
Gas cabinets are not preferred and require PG&E’s approval in
advance of construction as described in Gas Design Standard J-15,
located in Appendix C. Applicants must ensure that all related vent
openings, louvers, and/or viewing windows are installed correctly.
Also, applicants must ensure that the cabinets open to the outside
and are readily accessible to PG&E at all times. Refer to Gas
Design Standard K-51, “Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas
Meters,” located in Appendix C, for more information.

Typically, the gas meter size represented in Figure 2-14, “Typical

Residential Gas Meter Connection,” located on Page 2-27, can be
installed in a cabinet. On a case-by-case basis, PG&E may allow an
applicant to install a gas meter the size of the one illustrated in
Figure 2-15, “Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1,000 Class
Meter,” located on Page 2-28, in a cabinet; however, this exception
requires PG&E’s approval before construction.

A gas estimator must provide the cabinet spacing and size

requirements, which then must be approved by a Field Service
Manager. Based on working space requirements, the meters may
require installation in a meter room.
2. Specific Requirements for a Single Gas Meter Cabinet
PG&E determines the minimum cabinet size allowed for an
applicant’s specific type of meter and provide the applicant with
those dimensions. PG&E bases cabinet requirements not only on
the size of the meter currently required, but also on the location and
accessibility of the meter. See Gas Design Standard K-51, located
in Appendix C, when determining the specifications for single gas
meter cabinets.

2017 2-36
 Section 2, Gas Service

3. Specifications for a Recessed, Individual Meter Cabinet

zt

See Figure 5-1 on Page 5-10 Electrical Panel

For Electric Cabinet Dimensions

Window
Doors
Shown Open CL

18”−36” Max.
36”
Gas Meter C
L Gas Service 4” Min.−6” Max.
Tee See Note 5
PG&E
75” Max.
SmartMeter
66” Preferred 32”
26” 36” Min.
2” x 6” 50”

ÏÏÏÏÏÏ Wood Max.

Offset Insert
Louvers 22”
Min.

Shut-Off Valve 2” x 6” Wood Insert

Shut-Off Valve
Front View Side View

Figure 2-23
Recessed, Individual Meter Cabinet for Gas and Electric Meter Installations

Notes in reference to Figure 2-23.

1. Meter cabinets are not a preferred method of installation. Meter cabinets, with the exception of
Class 200 meter installations, require approval from the local Field Services Manager before
construction begins. When approved, they must comply with the requirements in this section.
2. Regulators should be installed on the outside of the cabinet. Additional space is required for larger
regulators and dual-head regulators. The local Field Services Manager may approve the regulators to
be installed in a cabinet. Regulators installed in a cabinet require the vents to be piped out as
described in Gas Design Standard H-93, “Regulator Vent Lines−Above Ground.”
3. The cabinets shown are for typical meter installations. PG&E determines the minimum size of the
required enclosure when the meter’s location is established.
4. See Subsection 2.5.1., “Service Delivery Point For the Gas Supply,” on Page 2-44. The houseline at
the service delivery point also must be reinforced so that it can provide support for the meter set
piping. The pipe must be rigid, a minimum of 3/4 inches, and have tapered pipe threads.
5. The houseline must extend a minimum of 4 inches and a maximum of 6 inches into the gas meter
cabinet measured from the finished wall. The houseline must be 32 inches above the bottom of the
meter cabinet.
6. Applicants must provide fully louvered, non-metallic doors . Each door must open at least 90°. This
supersedes the requirements of Gas Design Standard K-51.
7. Applicants must install the gas service riser before any concrete or paving work occurs. After the gas
service riser is installed, the applicant must ensure that there is a sleeve in the concrete or paving at
least 3 inches in diameter, unless otherwise specified, for the gas service riser.
8. The gas meter cabinet must have a gas-tight seal and be vapor proof from the building. Construction
material and sealing requirements for the cabinet are described in Gas Design Standard K-51, located
in Appendix C, and also apply to Figure 2-23.

2-37 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

Notes in reference to Figure 2-23. (continued)

9. Applicants must ensure that gas meters installed in cabinets comply with the requirements of the
inspection authority having jurisdiction.
10. Do not place electric meter panels, equipment or devices, conduit or wiring, enclosures, or
connections within 36 inches of the gas riser. Including for services such as cable television or
telecommunications.
11. Refer to the requirements in Greenbook Section 5, Section 6, and Section 7 for wall-mounted electric
meter panels and cabinets.

4. Specific Requirements for a Multiple Gas Meter Cabinet

Requirements for multiple, residential, gas meter cabinets are
essentially the same as those for single gas meter cabinets, as
outlined in Subsection 2.4.2.F.2., “Specific Requirements for a
Single Gas Meter Cabinet,” on Page 2-36.

Figure 2-24, “Cabinet Dimensions for Multiple, Residential Gas

Meters,” shows the dimensions and details for a multiple gas meter
cabinet.

18” Min. 30” 15” 15” 15”

To
Note: 36” Max.
All numbers
represent inside
dimensions.
32”

Gas Meter Meter Meter Meter

and Regulator 2 3 4
Figure 2-24
Cabinet Dimensions for Multiple, Residential Gas Meters

5. Gas-Meter Closets
Gas meter closets will be furnished and installed by the applicant
and have a depth of 18 inches minimum and 36 inches maximum
without exception. Doors must be non-metallic and fully louvered.
Doors must open at least 90° and have a clear opening height of
6 feet, 8 inches tall.
The inside of the closet must be made of non-flammable material
and have a minimum 1-hour fire rating. All joints and penetrations
must be sealed to prevent gas from migrating into the structure.
Foreign pipes are not allowed inside the closet with the exception
of fire sprinkler heads. Lighting, wiring, conduits, junction boxes,
or inspection panels of any kind are not allowed inside the closet.
Bonding or grounding wires on the customer’s houselines are not
allowed inside the closet.

2017 2-38
 Section 2, Gas Service

The ceiling must have a 1:12 slope. The ceiling must slope up
toward the door frame with a maximum of 6 inches measured from
the door opening to the finished ceiling. The inside width of the
closet cannot exceed 8 inches beyond either side of the door frame.
Refer to Figure 2-22 on Page 2-35 for manifold spacing to
determine the size of closet required for the desired number of
meters. The meters and manifold must fit within the opening of the
closet doors with the exception of the tie-in piece from the outside
riser. The riser and regulator will be installed outside of the closet.
The applicant provides a penetration through the wall into the
closet. Contact your local project coordinator for the exact size and
location of the required penetration.
The doors must have sign identifying “Gas Meters.” If the doors
have locks, the applicant must install a lock box near the closet
that is acceptable to PG&E and contains a key.
The closet cannot be used for storage of any kind. Only PG&E gas
meters and metering appurtenances are allowed inside the closet.

6. Specific Requirements for Gas Meter Rooms

Refer to Gas Design Standard J-16, located in Appendix C, for
specific requirements about gas meter rooms.
7. Gas Meter Set Enclosures
a. Typical Enclosure Details

Figure 2-25
Typical Detached Enclosure

2-39 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

Double Gate or
Removable Sections
See Note 1

See 2’ 2’
Note * Gas Meter Set
8’ 0”
Minimum See Note 1
Headroom
Required

See Note 1
See See Note 1
Note 1
Figure 2-26
Typical Enclosure Dimensions

Notes in reference to Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26.

1. The enclosure’s length will vary depending on the meter set. Contact your local PG&E project
coordinators for more information.
2. PG&E determines if the enclosure requires a wire mesh cover. If a mesh cover is required, it must
have a minimum 50% open area.
3. Approved enclosure materials include, but are not limited to, concrete block, wood, perforated or
expanded metal, or metal chain-link fencing.
4. For enclosures with a cover and alcoves with a gate, the material used must have a minimum 50%
open area. For example, perforated metal sheets have specific percentages of open area.
5. All distances provided in Figure 2-26 are minimums. After PG&E confirms the meter size, final
dimensions will be provided.
6. Trucks must be able to access large meter installations. Please contact your local PG&E project
coordinator before designing locations for gas meters.
7. Additional meter protection may be required. Protection posts can be incorporated into an enclosure
design.
b. Special Requirements for Gas Meters Serving Schools or
Other Buildings Where Children Congregate
The following requirements apply to schools or other buildings
where children congregate.
• Locate the gas meter enclosure adjacent to the property line
or away from buildings in a wire cage enclosure or other
suitable protective enclosure.
• PG&E requires an overhead wire cover to prevent any
debris or other material from falling inside the enclosure.
• The applicant must ensure that PG&E is able to secure the
enclosure with a PG&E lock.
• It is the applicant’s responsibility to provide the enclosure
and concrete pad for the gas meter set. PG&E must
approve the final design and size of the enclosure.

2017 2-40
 Section 2, Gas Service

8. Meter Protection Requirements

Applicants must protect meter sets in locations that are subject to
damage from vehicular traffic. PG&E determines when such
protection is required. Refer to Gas Design Standard J-95, located
in Appendix C.

Applicants must protect all gas meter sets located in the following areas.
a. Within 3 feet of:
• Single-family, residential driveways or parking areas
(including garage areas)
• Commercial refuse container locations
• Thoroughfares
• Paved areas with curbs
b. Within 8 feet of:
• Multifamily, commercial, or industrial driveways or
parking areas (see the “Exception” below)
• Loading docks
• Freight-handling areas
• Thoroughfares
• Paved areas without curbs
EXCEPTION: Physical protection is not required for meter sets
located within 8 feet of multifamily, commercial, or industrial
driveways or parking areas if the meter set is located 3 feet
behind a barrier that is adjacent to the area and if PG&E finds
the barrier to be acceptable.
c. Within an area that has, in PG&E’s judgement, an unusually
high risk of vehicular damage, the applicant must install a
system of barrier posts that meet PG&E’s specifications.
Consult your local project coordinator for specific
requirements.
9. Meter-Set Requirements For Marking Houselines
Applicants must ensure that the following rules for marking
houselines are followed.
a. PG&E requires that lines are marked by attaching an
embossed, durable, metal or plastic tag to each houseline.
PG&E must approve of the tag.
b. Markings must be legible and specific.
c. Marking information must include an authorized apartment or
street number and a use or location designation.

2-41 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

d. The houseline must be permanently, clearly, and prominently

marked at the point of the service connection (i.e., service
delivery point).
NOTE: PG&E will not install meters unless the
permanent address, the location, or, when
applicable, the area being served is marked at
each meter location.
e. When gas meters are installed in interior locations or rooms,
the words “Gas Meters” must be placed on the room or
location access doors to allow PG&E employees to find the
meters easily.
10. Meter Sets Requiring Telephone Service
Applicants with an estimated average use of 10,000 therms per
month or more are required to install, own, and maintain a nominal,
1-inch diameter conduit and a telephone cable. This requirement
also may apply to applicants with select rate schedules, Automated
Meter Reading (AMR), and noncore accounts. PG&E’s
requirements for the conduit are described below.
a. Applicants must extend the conduit and telephone cable from
the closest telephone service location to a location specified by
PG&E at or near the gas metering facilities. Applicants must
install an approved ground rod at a PG&E-specified location.
b. Applicants are responsible for all charges and costs associated
with installing the telephone facilities necessary to provide
telephone service for PG&E’s gas metering purposes.
c. PG&E is responsible for establishing telephone service and for
the ongoing telephone service charges for gas metering
purposes.
d. When in a meter room, install the conduit and associated
equipment as shown in Gas Design Standard J-16, Figure 1,
“Gas Meter Room Electric Enclosure and Conduit
Arrangement,” located in Appendix C.
11. Gas Pulse Metering
Refer to Gas Standard J-65.1, “Volume Pulse Output Connection
for Gas Meters,” located in Appendix C, for specific requirements
about gas pulse metering.

2017 2-42
 Section 2, Gas Service

12. Additional Meter-Set Requirements–SmartMetert

Module Location Requirements
PG&E’s SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter Reading system uses radio
frequency (RF) technology to transmit gas meter reads automatically.
This allows PG&E’s customers to monitor their daily energy use.

SmartMeter™ customers have additional location requirements

specific to the meters necessary for PG&E to operate its
SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter Reading system. Applicants must be
aware of the following requirements to ensure that the SmartMeter™
Advanced Meter Reading system can operate properly.
a. Do not locate the meters in any room, cabinet, enclosure, or
configuration that blocks or interferes with the radio frequency
signal transmissions. An example of such a prohibited
enclosure is a metallic cabinet.
b. Do not locate the meters in close proximity to (i.e., 6 inches or
less) any metallic object that could block or interfere with the
radio frequency signal transmission.
c. Do not install gas meters within 5 feet of building walls and
ceilings if they are made from a significant amount of metal or
metal reinforcements.
d. Most SmartMeter™ gas modules are installed directly on a gas
meter. If a gas meter is installed in a cabinet, meter room,
below grade, basement garage, or other location where
communication problems may exist, PG&E may install a
module in a remote location away from the gas meter to ensure
proper radio frequency transmissions. The equipment may be
installed on nearby gas piping, a customer-owned building
wall/ceiling, or an outside location. The equipment may need
to be attached to the structure or wall to route the wiring.

2.5. Applicant-Owned and Installed Gas Service Piping (e.g., Houseline),

Valves, and Automatic Shut-Off Devices

The applicant is responsible for maintaining the applicant-installed and owned gas
service piping, valves, automatic shut-off devices (e.g., earthquake valves), or
other piping components on any premises or in any building. These
applicant-owned components must be installed downstream of (i.e., after) the gas
supply service delivery point. PG&E reserves the right to suspend service until
applicant-owned equipment is removed from PG&E meter-set assemblies.
Applicants must ensure that after their equipment is installed, the equipment does
not obstruct the operation or serviceability of PG&E’s piping, metering, and
pressure-regulating equipment.
The houseline at the service delivery point typically is located after the PG&E
service tee for residential services. Reinforce the houseline so that it provides
support for the meter-set piping. The pipe must be rigid, must be a minimum of
3/4 inches, and must have tapered pipe threads.

2-43 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

2.5.1. Service Delivery Point For the Gas Supply

The service delivery point for the gas supply is the point where PG&E’s
facilities connect to the applicant’s house pipe (i.e., houseline). Figure 2-1
on Page 2-6 illustrates a typical service delivery point.
For residential and small commercial meter sets, the service delivery point
is the point where the male threads of the applicant’s houseline connect to
the female threads of PG&E’s gas service tee fitting.
Some commercial installations and industrial installations do not have
service tees installed. For these installations, the gas supply service delivery
point is located after the gas meter, gas pressure regulator, or regulation
equipment. Specifically, it is the point where the gas service bypass
reconnects with the gas service outlet piping.
Typically, the gas supply service delivery point is either the first weld or
fitting after the PG&E-installed bypass valve downstream of (i.e., after)
the gas meter. See Subsection A in Figure 2-16 through Figure 2-18 on
Page 2-29 through Page 2-31.
PG&E does not allow applicants to access the pipe fitting’s plug. Only
PG&E employees are authorized to access the plug when they perform
service and maintenance.
Applicants must not connect or install non-PG&E components to any
portion of the PG&E gas meter set upstream of (i.e., before) the service
delivery point.
Applicants must provide a securely supported gas houseline connection to
PG&E piping either by bracing or by reinforcing the houselines that extend
from finished walls. Do not connect flexible houseline directly to PG&E
piping. (Exceptions include subsidence areas, mobile home parks, and
manufactured homes as described in Gas Design Standard J-12.4 and Gas
Design Standard J-58.)
When applicants require a gas supply for multiple gas meter installations
that are supplied by a manifold, PG&E will install gas service tees
downstream of (i.e., after) each gas meter. PG&E will install these service
tees to each location where the utility gas service pipe connects to the
applicant’s houseline at the service tee.

2017 2-44
 Section 2, Gas Service

CUBIC
FEET

Gas
Regulator

Gas Meter
Gas
Shut-Off
Valve

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ Gas Flow
Front View

Utility Facilities Applicant Facilities

Gas Service
Tee Fitting
Gas Flow
Threaded
Pipe Plug Service
(For PG&E Use Only) Delivery Point

SM Module

Side View

Figure 2-27
Typical Residential, Multimeter Installations

2.5.2. Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe

PG&E recommends that applicants use the gas-riser configuration shown in
Figure 2-28, “Recommended, Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe,” found on
Page 2-46, when they install above-ground gas pipe that transitions to
underground gas pipe. The preferred riser for most applications is a
noncorroding, prefabricated riser.
Also, PG&E recommends that applicants contact the local authority having
jurisdiction before installing ferrous gas pipe and ask for the requirements
to protect the underground pipe from corrosion.

2-45 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

A. Applicants are encouraged to have all buried gas pipe inspected yearly.
Applicants should contact locally licensed plumbing contractors if they
need assistance in locating, inspecting, or repairing their buried gas
service pipe or other piping equipment.
B. Applicants must ensure that all required cathodic protection is in place
and documented as illustrated in Figure 2-28 below.
C. Applicants must ensure that their facilities are designed and installed to
the requirements of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
PG&E recommends using the Uniform Plumbing Code, which requires
the following protective measures.
1. Apply a coating and cathodic protection to steel pipelines.
2. Repair any coating that is damaged during installation.
3. Install copper tracer wire with nonmetallic gas pipe.
4. Provide a minimum cover of 18 inches for plastic yard pipe used to
carry gas.

Downstream From PG&E’s Meter and Service Delivery Point

Use Isolation Fitting

Coated Steel Riser
6”
Sleeve Through Pavement (See Note 2)

Well-Compacted Soil Minimum Cover Required

Thermite Weld or
Pipe Clamp
(Grounding Clamp)

24” Plastic Yard Piping

36” (Applicant Owned)
Fabricated Riser Transition Fitting
(Approximate 6” Radius)
1-Pound Zinc Anode
Figure 2-28
Recommended, Applicant-Owned Riser and Pipe

Notes in reference to Figure 2-28.

1. Always maintain a minimum distance of 36 inches between the vertical centerline of the riser and the
transition fitting.
2. If the area around the gas riser is going to be paved, install a minimum 3-inch sleeve around the riser.
3. Comply with city regulations when installing a plastic-to-steel riser (as shown) or a noncorroding,
prefabricated riser on the applicant’s houseline.

2017 2-46
 Section 2, Gas Service

2.5.3. Electrically Bonding and Grounding Gas Pipe

A. Do not install electrical devices or equipment, wires, cables, bonding or
grounding wires, clamps, or ground rods around the gas meter set as
shown in Figure 2-19 on Page 2-32 and Figure 2-22 on Page 2-35.
B. Do not use PG&E’s gas service piping, gas risers, or meter facilities for
electric bonding or grounding that allows the gas meter, piping, or other
gas facilities to become current-carrying conductors.
C. Do not allow gas pipe to be electrically bonded within meter
enclosures, cabinets, or meter rooms.

2.5.4. Applicant-Owned Protective Equipment

PG&E’s gas metering equipment can be affected adversely when an
applicant’s equipment causes:
• Pulsations in the gas flow
• Sudden changes in flow rate
• A backflow condition
Applicants must install, at their expense, any equipment necessary to
mitigate or eliminate these detrimental effects. PG&E must review and
approve these installations before initiating gas service.
Applicants must add any necessary protective equipment when their
operations change and those changes could create any of the three adverse
conditions described in the previous bulleted list.
PG&E may terminate service and refuse to restore that service to any
applicant who continues to operate without the proper protective equipment
after receiving notification from PG&E.
Applicants are responsible for damages made to PG&E equipment because
they did not install the proper protective equipment.

2-47 2017
Section 2, Gas Service

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 2-48
SECTION 3 ELECTRIC SERVICE: UNDERGROUND
ELECTRIC SERVICE:
UNDERGROUND
SECTION 3
SECTION 3 ELECTRIC SERVICE: UNDERGROUND
 Section 3
Electric Service: Underground

3.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides information to help applicants, as well as their
engineers and contractors, select acceptable locations and types of terminations for
underground services when connecting to Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s
(PG&E’s/Company’s) overhead or underground electric distribution system.
NOTE: For technical information on primary services, refer to PG&E Bulletin
TD-2999B-030, “Technical Requirements for Electric Service
Interconnection at Primary Distribution Voltages,” in Appendix B,
“Electric and Gas Service Documents.” For temporary or permanent
service to a post or pedestal, refer to the applicable documents in
Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

3.2. General Information

PG&E has the right to access Company facilities located on an applicant’s

premises at any time, for any purpose connected with furnishing gas and/or
electric service. Applicants must not access PG&E facilities or enclosures. Only
qualified PG&E employees will connect service lateral conductors to (or disconnect
them from) PG&E’s energized distribution system. This includes installing or
removing metering facilities or any other work related to PG&E’s facilities or systems.

3.2.1. Safety Reminder

WARNING
To avoid potential accidents, do not begin to excavate before
identifying underground facilities.

CAUTION
Flame resistant (FR) clothing is required while working on, working
near, or observing others working on any PG&E facility.

State law requires applicants to contact Underground Service Alert (USA) USA
by dialing 811 at least 2 working days before excavation (weekends and
holidays excluded). Ensure that you call USA when planning underground
work, before digging begins, to allow adequate time for USA to determine
the location of underground gas and electric lines or equipment. The
potential for an accident exists if applicants fail to request USA to
identify underground utility facilities before they begin excavating.

3-1 2017
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

First, the applicant must mark the excavation area with white paint. Then,
USA will arrange for participating companies to mark the locations of their
underground facilities at the jobsite. This is a free service. See the USA
color-code identifiers on Page 1-1 and on the back of this manual.
Additional information is available at www.pge.com/digsafely and about
USA services at the USA North website http://www.usanorth.org. USA is a
locating service for excavation only. Do not use USA for design purposes.
Dig Safely
3.2.2. Establishing Underground Electric Service Responsibilities
Applicants are responsible for constructing, maintaining, and protecting
specific portions of underground electric services during construction of
their project. The following subsections describe those responsibilities and
explain PG&E’s responsibilities during the construction process.
A. Applicants are responsible for obtaining all required permits. This
includes local building permits, environmental permits, encroachment
permits, and any other permits that may be required based on the
specific location of the trenching/excavation activities.
B. Applicants must ensure that the following construction activities, which
may be required to establish underground service, are performed
according to PG&E’s standards and specifications, PG&E-approved
construction drawings and inspection requirements, and any other
permit-specified requirements. This includes construction activities
conducted on private property, in the franchise area, or in other
right-of-way areas. Construction activities include:
• Trenching
• Excavation
• Backfill
• Compaction
• Conduit
• Substructures (boxes and pads)
• Paving (cut, patch, and final repair)
C. Applicants must provide satisfactory termination facilities on or within
the structures being served. (In this manual, see Sections 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, and 11, as applicable, based on your project type, amperage, and
voltage.) The locations for all transformers and meters, as well as the
sizes, types, and quantities of conduit, are subject to PG&E’s
specifications and approval.
D. Applicants are responsible for owning and maintaining conduit and
substructures on private property; however, they must convey
ownership of any portion in a public (i.e., franchise) area or
right-of-way, if applicable, to PG&E.
E. Applicants are responsible for providing, installing, and maintaining
any structures that are required to protect service facilities from
damage.

2017 3-2
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

F. PG&E is responsible for and required to perform any and all tie-in
work to existing distribution and/or energized facilities.
G. PG&E is responsible for furnishing, installing, owning, and maintaining the
following service facilities, as applicable. For additional details and options
for performing this work, refer to Electric Rule 15 , “Distribution Line
Extensions,” and Electric Rule 16, “Service Extensions,” found online at
http://www.pge.com/tariffs/ER.SHTML#ER.
• Cable/conductors to supply power
• Transformer
• Meter(s) and metering transformers, if required
• Other equipment (e.g., switches)
• Riser materials (to connect underground service to overhead facilities)

Splice Box, Transformer, Splice Box, Transformer,

or Pole (See Note 4) or Pole (See Note 5)

A PG&E’s Overhead or Underground Lines in Street, Alley, or Easement B

See (Note 5)

(See Note 4)

Alternate Locations,
See (Note 2)

Residence or Building

Walls on which underground electric service-termination and meter

facilities are permitted.
Outside building walls.
Figure 3-1
Locations of Underground Electric Service-Termination and Meter Facilities

Notes in reference to Figure 3-1.

1. If practical, attach the underground electric service-termination facility and the meter to the wall at a
preferred location. Locate the facilities as close to PG&E’s service facilities as possible to avoid
future operation and maintenance restrictions.
2. PG&E must approve all service locations before they are constructed.
3. Applicants must locate the service so that the meter can be read and serviced without entering a
fenced or enclosed location, when possible.
4. Permitted locations for electric service-termination and meter facilities are from Point A.
5. Permitted locations for electric service-termination and meter facilities are from Point B.

3-3 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.3. Installing Ground Rods

Applicants or their contractors are required to install ground rods when
PG&E specifically requires them as part of a substructure installation
(e.g., when constructing a transformer pad). Find PG&E-approved ground
rods and clamps in Numbered Document 013109, “Corrosion Resistant
Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps,” included in Appendix C.
3.2.4. Installing Equipment Pads
Applicants or their contractors must construct and install equipment pads,
as required, for electric equipment that is providing underground electric
service. When constructing a concrete pad for a transformer, use Numbered
Document 045292, “Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers.” If installing a box pad for a transformer, use
Numbered Document 064309, “Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers.”
Both engineering documents are listed Appendix C.
For projects that require equipment pads other than for transformers
(e.g., PMH switches), these drawings are provided by your project
coordinator or PG&E inspector at the pre-construction meeting if the
installation is included in the PG&E-approved design.
Install customer-owned switchboard pads according to their applications.
Refer to the ground rod and conduit requirements for primary switchboards
in Section 11, “Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and
Primary Services,” Subsection 11.3.S., on Page 11-3, and Figure 11-1,
“Primary Switchboard Termination Section Pad Detail,” on Page 11-4.
For additional references to the underground electric documents provided in
Appendix C, see Table 3-2, “Electric Underground Documents,” on
Page 3-14.
3.2.5. Installing Overhead and Underground Service for Two or More
Buildings on One Lot
If more than two dwellings or buildings are located on the same lot,
applicants must consult their local PG&E project coordinators to determine
the acceptable service-termination locations and meter locations before
wiring the buildings.
NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” at
the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact
numbers listed by area.
Typically, PG&E only installs one service lateral to a single building on one
premise, or to a single enterprise (with either one or multiple buildings) on
one premise. However, PG&E may provide more than one service lateral
under the following circumstances.
A. Where it is allowed or required by PG&E’s tariff schedules.
B. For PG&E’s convenience.
C. Where it is required by ordinance.
D. When it is installed as special facilities.

2017 3-4
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.2.6. Inspecting and Approving Overhead and Underground Services

An applicant must contact the local PG&E project coordinator to arrange
for a field representative to inspect and approve the applicant-furnished and
installed service equipment, as well as any other mandatory components
required for an underground service installation.

3.3. Underground Service Installation Requirements

3.3.1. Installing Services From Underground Distribution Systems

PG&E serves applicants from an underground service if the site or lot is
located in an area that is supplied from an existing underground distribution
system. PG&E owns, maintains, and installs the underground service lateral
conductors. PG&E provides underground-to-underground service along the
shortest, most practical, and most available route to the applicant’s
service-termination facility.
Typically, the termination facility is on or within the building or structure,
as shown in Figure 3-2, “Underground-to-Underground Service
Connection,” below. PG&E will install the conductors in conduit.
Substructures include conduit, boxes, and transformer pads. Applicants
must follow PG&E’s guidelines and specifications, including those
specified in Electric Rule 16.
PG&E installs the transformer, if required, and connects the service lateral
conductors to the applicant’s termination facilities.
Building Wall
Applicant’s Termination Facilities

See Note 2
Street Property Line

Primary Pull or Splice Box See Note 3

May Be Required
(Consult PG&E)

PG&E’s Distribution Box Manhole or Switch Enclosure

Figure 3-2
Underground-to-Underground Service Connection
Notes in reference to Figure 3-2.
1. When the service delivery voltage is the same as the available, primary distribution voltage
(i.e., over 2,000 volts), typically the applicant provides a primary splice box according to PG&E’s
requirements.
2. PG&E supplies a transformer, if required. (The applicant must provide the trench, backfill, and
required conduit, pad, and substructures.)
3. PG&E­owned primary and/or secondary conductors. (The applicant must furnish the substructures.)

3-5 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.2. Installing Services From Overhead Distribution Systems

PG&E will provide service from an underground riser that is installed on an
existing pole, as shown in Figure 3-3, “Overhead-to-Underground Service
Connection,” below, if any of the following requirements are met.
A. The applicant is located in an area served from an overhead system and
the applicant prefers to have the service installed underground.
B. The applicant’s load requires a transformer that is 75 kilovolt
amperes (kVA) or larger.
C. A local city or county ordinance requires underground service.
In these cases, in addition to the requirements described in
Subsection 3.3.1., “Installing Services From Underground Distribution
Systems,” on Page 3-5, the applicant must pay the material costs of both
the pole riser facility and any conduit that is required in the public
right-of-way.

Street Property Line

Applicant’s
Termination
Facilities

Building
Wall

Public Right-of-Way

See Note 2

See Note 3
Primary Pull or Splice Box May
Be Required (Consult PG&E)
Figure 3-3
Overhead-to-Underground Service Connection

Notes in reference to Figure 3-3.

1. When the service delivery voltage is the same as the available, primary distribution voltage
(i.e., over 2,000 volts), typically the applicant will provide a primary splice box according to
PG&E’s requirements.
2. PG&E’s pole and secondary riser. (The applicant must pay the installed cost of the pole riser and
conduit within the right­of­way.)
3. PG&E­owned service lateral conductors. (The applicant must furnish the conduit, as required.)

2017 3-6
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.3. Installing Conduit for Underground Service

NOTE: PG&E will not install its supply cables in conduits that run beneath
any building or structure when those conduits do not terminate on
or within that building or structure, but are intended to supply
another building or structure on the same or another premise.
PG&E requires applicants to install a conduit system for underground
service laterals. It is the applicant’s responsibility to provide service conduit
as described in the following PG&E documents. Refer to the following
numbered documents, located in Appendix C.
• Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and Requirements for
Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to
Customer-Owned Facilities”
• Numbered Document 063927, “Methods and Requirements for
Installing Residential Underground Electric Services 0−600 V to
Customer-Owned Facilities”
• Numbered Document 062288, “Underground Conduits”
• Numbered Document 038193, “Minimum Requirements for the Design
and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable”
NOTE: It is recommended that applicants consider installing conduit one
size larger than the required minimum in case larger cable is
required or needed for future upgrades. Refer to Subsection 1.14.,
“Determining the Service Rating,” on Page 1-12, for information
on how PG&E determines the ampacity (i.e., capacity) rating of
customer equipment.
Also, applicants must ensure that conduit runs have a polyester pull-tape
(Code 560154) to initiate the cable pulling. The pull-tape must be attached
securely either to conduit plugs or caps.
Applicants must prove that the entire conduit system is free of dirt, rocks,
or other obstructions that could prevent, hinder, or harm the installation of
the electric conductors. Applicants must use a PG&E-approved mandrel to
prove the conduit system. See Subsection 3.4.1., “Mandrels,” on Page 3-15,
for details. A PG&E inspector must approve the equipment and the method,
and observe the work being performed to prove the service conduit system’s
readiness.
Applicants must furnish and install either conduit caps or plugs on the ends
of all conduits. In addition, at locations where the cable insulation may be
damaged (e.g., transformer pads or switchboard pull sections), applicants
are required to install cable protection at all of the conduit ends. Applicants
should contact their local PG&E project coordinator for specific
requirements.

3-7 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.4. Installing PG&E-Only Service Trenches

Applicants must ensure that trenches containing only PG&E electric service
facilities or PG&E electric and gas service facilities are covered, as
required, when those trenches are located on:
• Private property
• Designated sidewalks
• Parkways
• Driveways
The electric service conduit and gas pipe must be covered on private
property or in the franchise as described in the following text. The
required minimum clearances must be maintained as listed in Table 3-1,
“Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Service Trenches,”
on Page 3-13.
A. Provide a 24-inch minimum cover for secondary (i.e., 0−750 volts)
electric service conduit and gas pipe.
B. Provide a 36-inch minimum cover for primary (i.e., over 750 volts)
electric service conduit.
The term “cover” refers to the standard distance between the outer surface
of an underground facility and the final grade level. The actual trench
depth must be greater than the cover depth.
All electric service and secondary conduit must enter PG&E splice boxes or
enclosures from the bottom for new construction and not through the boxes’
conduit knockouts. If the top of the conduit is not at or below the required
minimum conduit depths, the applicant needs to increase the installed depth
of the conduit at those locations. See notes in Numbered Document 028028,
“Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures,” located in Appendix C.
PG&E may require the applicant to provide other means of protecting the
service conduit in the following circumstances.
• Increased traffic loading
• Soil erosion
• Open ditches
• Where digging machinery or equipment may be used
This increased protection also may be required in areas where similar
situations either are anticipated or exist already.
Applicants must ensure that the trench depth is sufficient to meet the
minimum depth requirements when taking into consideration the following
conditions.
A. The required depth of cover (as described previously).
B. The size of the conduit that is being installed (e.g., 3 inch, 4 inch).
C. The necessary bedding materials.
D. The size of the electric conduit bends (e.g., 24-inch or 36-inch bends).

2017 3-8
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

Therefore, for service trenches (e.g., secondary voltage and 3-inch conduit)
on private property or in the franchise, the required minimum depth of
trenches below grade is 30 inches.
Applicants must receive pre-approval from the PG&E inspector when
requesting an exception to the minimum-depth requirements. Applicants
should contact their local PG&E project coordinator with questions about
trench depth.
Applicants should be aware that wet utilities must always be separated from
the electric and gas service trench, meters, and risers. For more information,
see PG&E Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, Joint Trench
Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in Appendix B.
Also, when applicants plan to install electric service facilities with other
services, such as telephone or cable television, they must refer to:
• Subsection 3.3.8., “Installing Joint Utility Service Trenches,” on
Page 3-11.
• Figure 3-4, “Typical Joint Service Trench,” on Page 3-12.
• Table 3-1, “Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for
Service Trenches,” on Page 3-13.
Applicants should contact their local PG&E project coordinator in the
development stages of their projects for additional details and requirements
about using joint trenches.

3.3.5. Installing Offsets

In situations where more than two 90° bends are needed, applicants should
consult their local PG&E project coordinators to determine whether
additional raceway pull-boxes will be required to avoid excessive pulling
tension on the service cables.
A. PG&E does not approve short-radius conduit fittings, commonly known
as LBs or service elbows, for use in underground service conduits that
are intended to hold PG&E service conductors. Applicants must ensure
that offsets are not installed in the following situations.
1. Do not make an offset in the service lateral conduit entering the
electric service panel or enclosure.
2. Avoid making an offset in the conduit system because it may
prohibit the use of a mandrel to prove the acceptability of the
conduit system.
3. Avoid making an offset in the service conduit because it will
increase the pull tension required to install the service conductors.
B. In some situations, applicants may be required to perform both of the
following numbered actions.
1. Install larger conduits and/or additional splice boxes or pull boxes
to accommodate the installation of the conductors.
2. Transition to cables appropriately sized for the service capacity.

3-9 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

C. The following scenarios represent situations where B.1. and B.2., on

Page 3-9, could be required.
1. Construction sites where PG&E determines that
larger-than-standard cables or conductors are required to maintain
voltage and flicker drop.
2. Construction sites where normal pulling tensions may be exceeded.
NOTE: Applicants must be aware that pin adaptors, cable ringing, or
splicing on additional cable will not be used to terminate
cables. PG&E does not accept these termination techniques.

3.3.6. Selecting Backfill

Applicants must use backfill (i.e., sand or native soil) to provide a smooth
bedding area when installing utility facilities. The backfill must fill all of
the voids around the facilities and provide at least 12 inches of cover for the
conduit or pipe. PG&E considers soil that contains occasional, rounded
rocks that are 1/2 inch in diameter or less to be acceptable backfill.
Crushed rock or sharp-edged materials of any kind, or backfill containing
easily breakable dirt clods larger than 6 inches in diameter, are not
acceptable.
Additionally, PG&E prohibits applicants to use backfill with rocks greater
than 3 inches in any dimension within 6 inches of the top of the pipe or
conduit or less than 12 inches below the pavement subgrade.
In sections where a shallow trench is needed and allowed, place a
cement-slurry cap above the conduit. The cap must be a minimum of
3 inches thick and made from a cement-slurry mix. The mix must consist of
two parts sand to one part cement, with red die mixed in. The cap must rest
on rock-free sand and not the conduit. Position the cap at least 6 inches
above the conduit. The top of the cap must be a minimum of 8 inches below
grade level. The width of the cap must be the same width as the trench.
When backfilling trenches on slopes or grades, bags of concrete and red die
may be required on top of the conduit to prevent the backfill from moving
down the slope or running out of the trench.
Soil compaction must be 95% and meet PG&E’s and any applicable
Federal, State, County and local requirements. A copy of the test results
may be required by PG&E.
All of these requirements are at the discretion of the PG&E inspector.
See Exhibit B, Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in
Appendix B. This guide contains additional backfill and trenching
requirements. For PG&E-approved import material, see Appendix B, for the
Engineering Material Specification Number EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand.”

3.3.7. Providing Drainage From the Conduit System

In some conditions, water can enter into the wire and conduit system and
migrate into the meter panel and/or building. The applicant or applicant’s
contractor must provide a means to discharge any excess water or water
pressure from the conduit system.

2017 3-10
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

The most common method required for discharging water from the conduit
is installing a box outside near the base of the riser to the meter panel.
Alternate locations may be required by the PG&E inspector or PG&E
project coordinator. Any other methods of discharging water will require
PG&E’s approval before construction begins. For indoor electric meter
rooms below grade or at grade level, additional methods of water drainage
should be incorporated into the design of the meter room(s) to prevent the
accumulation of water.

3.3.8. Installing Joint Utility Service Trenches

When installing electric services underground, the PG&E gas service pipe and
the electric service lateral typically are installed in a common, joint trench. A
joint trench also may include telephone and cable television facilities.
The following wet facilities are not permitted in a joint trench.
• Propane lines
• Sewer pipes
• Sanitary drains
• Storm drains
• Other wet-utility piping or facilities
There are additional requirements for separating a wet utility from a joint
trench along with the electric and gas meters and service risers.
Applicants must submit a written request to PG&E when they want to
include other facilities in a joint trench. The request must include a
justification and be submitted to PG&E for review and approval before
excavation or work begins.
PG&E must coordinate joint trench installations with telephone, cable
television, or other facilities. This coordination requires lead time, so
applicants should submit their requests and justifications as early in the
planning process as possible. Applicants must ensure that PG&E has
reviewed and approved their trenching plans before digging begins.
Figure 3-4, on Page 3-12, illustrates a “Typical Joint Service Trench.”
Separation and clearance details for the trenches are found in Table 3-1 on
Page 3-13. Also, see PG&E Standard S5453, Exhibit B, Joint Trench
Configurations & Occupancy Guide, located in Appendix B of this manual.
This guide contains additional information and joint trench requirements.
For PG&E-approved import material, see Appendix B for Engineering
Material Specification Number EMS-4123.
When applicants plan to use joint service trenches, they must ensure that the
gas and electric meters are installed either adjacent to, or in close proximity
to, each other. Section 5, “Electric Metering: General;” Section 6, “Electric
Metering: Residential;” and Section 7, “Electric Metering: Commercial,
Industrial, and Agricultural” provide information about determining
acceptable locations for utility electric meters. Section 2, “Gas Service,”
Subsection 2.4.2., “Gas Meter-Set Locations,” on Page 2-20, provides
information about determining acceptable locations for utility gas meters.

3-11 2017
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

Applicants must discuss the service arrangements and coordinate the meter
locations and joint trench requirements with a PG&E project coordinator
before installing utility conduits or gas service piping.
Applicants must ensure that when multiple service facilities (i.e., gas,
electric, and telecommunications) are installed in close proximity
(e.g., in a joint trench), a 12-inch minimum, radial separation is maintained
where those facilities transition from below ground to above ground. PG&E
allows an exception to that rule when the separation is between PG&E
secondary, electric-service conduit and gas-service piping. In this instance,
the minimum separation distance may be reduced to 6 inches. Clearances
between other facilities can be reduced only when the facility owners reach
a mutual agreement.

12” 12”
Minimum Minimum

* Increase * Increase
18” *

Depth to 30” in Depth to 30” in

the Franchise the Franchise
Area. Area.

24” Minimum*
36” Minimum
39” Minimum

T C
3”

12” 6”
12”

S G
Minimum Minimum
3”
Min. 12”
Minimum
S 6” G P
4”

Minimum
Bedding Material Bedding Material
2”

2”

Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5

Typical Joint Service Trench PG&E Electric and Gas
Service Trench

Notes in reference to Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5.

1. Trench depth will vary depending on conduit size.
2. Soil compaction must meet PG&E’s and any applicable federal, state, county, and local requirements.
3. All separation and clearance dimensions must be met in Table 3-1 on Page 3-13.
4. For more information on Figure 3-4, see PG&E’s Joint Trench Configurations & Occupancy Guide,
located in Appendix B.

2017 3-12
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

Table 3-1 Minimum Separation and Clearance Requirements for Trenches1

Duct DB
G C S P SL
T T
G Gas2 - 12 12 12 6 12 6
T Telephone (Duct) 12 - 1 1 12 12 12
T Telephone (Direct Bury) 12 1 - 1 12 12 12
C CATV 12 1 1 - 12 12 12
S Electric Secondary 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
P Electric Primary 12 12 12 12 3 3 3
SL Streetlight3 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5
Foreign Electric Sourced
NE 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
(Non-PG&E)4
1 All separation clearance distances are in inches.
2 For more information about this table, see PG&E Bulletin TD-5453B-002, “Updated Separation Requirements For
Conduit in Joint Trench, in Appendix B of this manual.
3 Streetlight circuits not owned by PG&E must be installed to meet the requirements in PG&E’s Joint Trench
Configurations & Occupancy Guide. Specifically, applicants must review the requirements for working with a
second utility company.
4 Must be considered a “utility” as defined in PG&E Standard S5453.

Applicants must ensure that adequate amounts of space exist to maintain

and operate the facilities. Applicants must ensure that the area immediately
behind the gas meter, service facilities, and risers and between those
facilities and the premises or structures being served is kept free and clear
of all other facilities or equipment such as pipes, wires, cables, or conduits.
See Section 2, Figure 2-19, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation
Dimensions and Clearances,” on Page 2-32.
NOTE: Applicants should consider installing conduit one size larger than
the required minimum in case larger cable is required or needed for
future upgrades. Refer to Subsection 1.14., “Determining the
Service Rating,” on Page 1-12, for a description of the methods
PG&E uses to determine the ampacity (capacity) rating of customer
equipment.

3.3.9. Providing a Service-Termination Facility

In addition to the requirements in Table 3-1, above, applicants must provide
and maintain a satisfactory termination facility on or within the building or
structure to be served.
PG&E will not install services supplied from different electrical sources in
the same termination facility unless the services are separated using suitable
barriers. When two or more services are in one termination facility, the
minimum dimensions of each compartment created by the barriers must be
the same as if each compartment were a separate termination facility.
NOTE: See new service and current transformer (CT) installation
requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,”
Subsection 5.2.4., “Requirements for Installing Secondary
Terminations (0−600 Volt) in Metering Equipment Requiring CTs,”
on Page 5-4.

3-13 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.3.10. Bioswales and Large Wet Locations

A bioswale is a long, channeled depression or trench that receives rainwater
runoff and uses vegetation and organic matter to slow water infiltration and
filter-out pollutants. A bioswale is considered a wet location and applicants
must not install PG&E facilities that go through or close to a bioswale.
Bioswale areas should be avoided and PG&E facilities should be designed
to go around them. If applicants cannot avoid a bioswale area, they must
apply additionally protective methods when designing PG&E facilities.
Also see Numbered Document 038193, “Minimum Requirements for the
Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable,” located in
Appendix C.

3.4. Electric Underground Documents

Table 3-2 below lists “Electric Underground Numbered Documents” that are
provided at the back of this manual in Appendix C. Also, Appendix C provides
electric underground documents that are not listed in the table below. See PG&E’s
Internet website at www.pge.com/greenbook to access the most recent versions of
these documents or contact your local PG&E project coordinator. Most of these
documents also are available in PG&E’s Electric Underground Construction
Manual, Volume 1.

Table 3-2 Electric Underground Numbered Documents

Document
Section 1 Title
Number
Connectors 013109 Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps
Enclosures 028028 Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures
Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase,
Services 036670
120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted
Transformers 045292
Transformers
Clearances and Location Requirements for
General 051122
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in
Services 058817
Customer-Owned Facilities
Transformers 2 063422 Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers
Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential
Services 063927 Underground Electric Services 0−600 V to Customer-Owned
Facilities
Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial
Services 063928 Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned
Facilities
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use
Services 063929
With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Transformers 064309 Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers
General 2 066211 PG&E Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers
1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the sections in PG&E’s Electric Underground Construction
Manual, Volume 1, which contains these documents.
2 This document is not in the Electric Underground Construction Manual.

2017 3-14
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

3.4.1. Mandrels
The following section includes both an overview of, and a procedure for
using, PG&E-approved, flexible-steel mandrels to prove conduit systems.
A. Using Mandrels to Prove Conduit Systems
Applicants must ensure that the conduit systems required for PG&E
cables and/or conductors are installed in a trench that meets all of
PG&E’s requirements and specifications for the particular job or project.
The conduit systems must meet PG&E’s requirements for each specific
installations, as well.
NOTE: The term “conduit system” includes conduits, conduit bends,
conduit fittings, and all related components (e.g., bell ends and
cable protectors) that are needed to install PG&E cables and
conductors.
Applicants must ensure that conduit systems are not covered or hidden
from view before the facilities are inspected visually by a PG&E field
inspector. The inspector must determine if the conduit system and its
installation comply with all of PG&E’s specifications (e.g., type, size,
schedule, radius of bends) and installation requirements before the
customer backfills the trench.
After the conduit system passes PG&E’s visual inspection, including
visual verification of the conduit system’s materials and the radius of the
bends, the applicant must backfill the trench and compact the soil. Then,
the applicant must provide PG&E with proof that the conduit system is
in compliance by successfully inserting and pulling an approved,
flexible-steel mandrel through the entire conduit system.
The PG&E inspector remains onsite to ensure that the appropriately
sized and approved, flexible-steel mandrel is inserted and pulled through
the length of the conduit system without encountering blockages or
obstructions.
The applicant must provide the mandrel and appropriate pulling tape, as
well as follow the procedures in Subsection B, below, for using the
mandrel.
B. Procedure for Using Mandrels
Applicants must follow the procedural steps below when using a
mandrel to prove a conduit system.
Step 1. Select the mandrel that is sized properly for the type of conduit
that will be proven. See Figure 3-6, “Flexible Steel Mandrel,”
on Page 3-17, and Table 3-3, “Mandrel Dimensions, Part
Numbers, and Order Codes,” on Page 3-17, for mandrel
specifications.
NOTE: For high-density polyethylene (HDPE) continuous
conduit only (i.e., 3 inch, 4 inch, 5 inch, and 6 inch
sizes), use the next smaller-size mandrel shown in
Table 3-3 on Page 3-17.

3-15 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

Step 2. To pull the mandrel through the conduit, securely tie one end
of the 2,500-pound pulling tape to the pulling eye of the
mandrel. (The pulling tape was installed in the conduit
previously.)
Step 3. Securely tie a second section of 2,500-pound pulling tape to
the pulling eye located on the other end of the mandrel. This
section of tape must be long enough to replace the pre-installed
pulling tape completely.
Step 3. ensures that a run of pulling tape remains in the conduit
after the mandrelling process is completed. Also, if the mandrel
becomes blocked or stuck in the conduit, the second run of
pulling tape allows the mandrel to be pulled back out of conduit
and provides a means of measuring the distance to the point of
blockage.
Step 4. After both pulling tapes are attached securely to the mandrel,
insert the mandrel into one end of the conduit. Slowly start to
pull the pulling tape at the opposite end of the conduit. This
removes any slack in the pulling tape.
Step 5. Slowly pull the mandrel through the conduit by hand or
non-mechanically. The rate of the pull should not exceed
100 feet per minute. Both the person pulling the tape and the
PG&E inspector must check the pulling tape for signs of stress
(i.e., molten plastic) as the tape comes out of the conduit.
NOTE: The PG&E inspector may not approve a section of the
conduit if any portion of the pulling tape shows damage
in the form of molten plastic. If the inspector decides to
reject the conduit section, he or she will secure the
melted section of pulling tape as evidence.
If the mandrel passes through the conduit without encountering any
blockage or obstructions, the PG&E inspector approves the conduit
section for use.

2017 3-16
 Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

A B Note 5

Note 1
C

Figure 3-6
Flexible Steel Mandrel
Notes in reference to Figure 3-6.
1. The length must be adequate for the mandrel to pass through a 24­inch radius bend (all sizes).
2. The disks must be fabricated from 1/2­inch, flat, steel plate (average weight: 490 pounds per cubic
foot) with a 7/16­inch hole for the 3/8­inch cable.
3. The spacers must be fabricated from 1/2­inch iron pipe size (IPS) pipe with a minimum inside
diameter of 0.6 inches.
4. Cable size: 3/8­inch, 6 x 19 mild, plow­steel hoisting rope.
5. The outside diameter of the eye must not exceed Dimension A.
6. The size must be stamped permanently into one end of the plates.

Table 3-3 Mandrel Dimensions, Part Numbers, and Order Codes1

Dimensions (In Inches)
Size PG&E Manufacturer
Code Spacer
(In Inches) Part Numbers3 A B C D2
Length
2 202567 08400−200 1.69 1.69 6.5 15 0.25
3 202570 08400−300 2.65 1.65
4 202571 08400−400 3.57 2.57
10.5 23 0.75
5 200911 08400−500 4.56 3.56
6 202572 08400−600 5.51 4.51
1 For HDPE continuous conduit only (sizes 3 inches, 4 inches, 5 inches, and 6 inches), use the next-smaller-size
mandrel.
2 “D” dimensions are approximate.
3 PG&E’s approved mandrel manufacturers, DCD Design & Manufacturing.

3-17 2017
Section 3, Electric Service: Underground

Table 3-4 Businesses That Sell or Rent Mandrels1

Company Street Address City Zip Phone Number
Utility Division Locations 5275 Central Ave. Fremont 94536 (510) 656-9680
(UDL)
WESCO 1544 N. Maple Ave. Fresno 93703 (559) 255-4423
WESCO/Herning 4925 E. Annadale Ave. Fresno 93725 (559) 443-5600
WESCO/Herning 567 Exchange Ct. Livermore 94550 (925) 449-2550
Pacific Utilities Supply 2475 Estand Way Pleasant Hill 94523 (925) 674-1600
Co.
WESCO 1045 W. National Dr. Sacramento 95834 (916) 928-1001
Suite 19
Independent Electric 1370 Bayport Ave. San Carlos 94070 (650) 594-9440
Supply (IES)
WESCO 2800 Mead Ave. Santa Clara 95051 (408) 562-0400
Independent Electric 2801 Research Park Dr. Soquel 95073 (831) 464-3232
Supply (IES)
Utility Division Locations 200 East Larch Rd. Tracy 95304 (209) 832-2038
(UDL)
Utility Division Locations 4076 Channel Dr. West 95691 (916) 376-8400
(UDL) Sacramento
1 Mandrels must be from the approved manufacturer listed in Table 3-3 on Page 3-17.

2017 3-18
SECTION 4 ELECTRIC SERVICE: OVERHEAD
ELECTRIC SERVICE:
OVERHEAD
SECTION 4
SECTION 4 ELECTRIC SERVICE: OVERHEAD
 Section 4
Electric Service: Overhead

4.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides instructions and minimum clearance

requirements for attaching permanent, overhead services to residential and
nonresidential properties. The term “residential” includes mobile homes installed
on foundations in locations other than mobile home parks.
NOTE: Requirements for installing and attaching PG&E overhead services may be
different than local city or county ordinances, as well as national or
California electric codes. Contact your local PG&E project coordinator if
you have questions. See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact
Information,” at the front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific
contact numbers listed by area.

4.2. General

Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) will not supply new overhead services
to applicants when either of the following conditions exist:
A. When buildings or premises are located in areas designated either by local
jurisdictions or by PG&E as underground districts.
B. When buildings or premises are located in areas zoned for commercial or
residential use and the installed service equipment and/or load requires PG&E
to use a 75-kilovolt ampere (kVA) or larger transformer.
4.2.1. Safety Reminder

CAUTION
Flame resistant (FR) clothing is required while working on, working
near, or observing others working on any PG&E facility.

4.3. Locating Overhead Services

4.3.1. Point of Attachment

In areas served from overhead lines, PG&E will install an overhead service
drop from the Company’s distribution line to a point of attachment on the
applicant’s residence, building, or structure. PG&E follows the guidelines
listed below to ensure the service is installed safely and efficiently.
A. The point of attachment must be located so it can be reached with a
single span from PG&E’s facilities.
B. The span should not cross over adjacent property, if possible.
C. The span must maintain the required, vertical, clearance-to-ground.

4-1 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

The point of attachment may be either on the building wall near the PG&E
line or on a periscope fixed to the building’s roof, usually not more than
18 inches in back of that wall. Figure 4-1, “Preferred and Alternate
Locations for the Overhead Service Drop Attachment,” below, provides
more information about the point of attachment.
Applicants must consult PG&E before installing the building’s wiring.
PG&E must approve of the location selected for the utility service
attachment.

PG&E’s Pole Line

Street, Alley,
Easement, etc.
Preferred Locations
for Service Attachment,
Alternate Locations See Note 1

18” (See Note 3)

18”
(See
Note 3)
Residence or Building

Walls on which service-drop attachments are permitted.

Roof areas in which periscope-type services are preferred.
Roof areas in which periscope-type services are permitted.
Figure 4-1
Preferred and Alternate Locations for the Overhead Service Drop Attachment (see Note 2)

Notes in reference to Figure 4-1.

1. Applicants may attach service drops to sidewalls. Applicants must ensure that the service-drop
conductors do not exceed 75 feet and do not cross over either the buildings being served or the
adjacent property. Finally, applicants must ensure that the required conductor clearances and accesses
to the electric meters are maintained.
2. For more information on meter location requirements, see Section 5, “Electric Metering: General;”
Section 6, “Electric Metering: Residential;” and Section 7, “Electric Metering: Commercial,
Industrial, and Agricultural” (as applicable). For available short-circuit current information and
requirements, see Subsection 5.7.2., “Main Service Disconnect Switch Rated for Amperes
Interrupting Capacity (AIC),” found on Page 5-23.
3. The required maximum setback affects nonresidential customers only. The preferred maximum
setback is for residential installations, but is not required.

2017 4-2
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.3.2. Two or More Buildings on One Lot

If more than two dwellings or buildings are located on the same lot,
applicants must consult PG&E to determine acceptable service attachments
and meter locations before wiring the buildings.
Typically, PG&E installs only one service lateral to a single building on one
premise, or to one enterprise (with either one building or multiple
buildings) on a single premise. However, PG&E may provide more than
one service lateral under the following circumstances.
• Where it is allowed or required by PG&E’s tariff schedules.
• For PG&E’s convenience.
• Where it is required by ordinance.
• When it is installed as a special facility.

4.4. Service Drop Clearances

NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” starting
on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.
Applicants can request a PG&E project coordinator to specify a location for
service drop attachments. When PG&E selects the location, applicants are assured
that the service conductors will maintain the required clearances above
thoroughfares and structures, as well as the required clearances away from
windows, doors, and building exits.
The minimum clearances from the ground, structures, and other objects for
overhead service drops are specified in the California Public Utilities
Commission’s (CPUC’s) General Order (G.O.) 95, “Rules for Overhead Electric
Line Construction.” Figure 4-2 through Figure 4-20 list and illustrate these
minimum clearances.
Applicants must ensure that the elevation at the point of attachment is high enough
to maintain all of the required vertical clearances. Applicants should allow for
normal conductor sag when determining these vertical clearances.
G.O. 95 allows the vertical clearance restrictions for service drops to be reduced in
certain instances. PG&E’s review and approval is required before any reductions
in vertical clearances are allowed. Applicants should contact PG&E as soon as
possible in the planning phases of their projects to ensure that any potential
problems or exceptions are addressed before construction begins.
Requirements for installing and attaching PG&E overhead services may be
different than local electrical codes.

4-3 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Communication Service Drop

See Item D. on Page 4-5

Supply Service Drop

12” Min.
18’
18’ Min.
16’ Min.
12’ Min.
Min.
12’ Min.

Private
12’ Driveway

Curb

Area Accessible
Only to
Pedestrians

Curb or Outer
Limits of Possible Centerline of Street
Vehicular Traffic or Roadway
(See 4.4.1.B.2. on
Page 4-5)

Figure 4-2
Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts, Residential Installations
(Required by the CPUC)

4.4.1. Vertical Clearance for Residential, Overhead Service

A. Clearance Above Rails
Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained
when requesting electric service be placed over train or trolley tracks.
1. Crossing above railroad tracks without overhead trolley wire: 25 feet
2. Crossing above railroad tracks with overhead trolley wire:
• Above rails where freight cars are transported: 26 feet
• Above rails where freight cars are not transported: 23 feet

2017 4-4
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

B. Clearance Above Thoroughfares in Public Areas and in

Private Communities of 10 or More Residences
Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained
when requesting electric service be placed above thoroughfares in public
and private communities with more than 10 residences.
1. Crossing above the center portion between points 12 feet horizontal
from curbs: 18 feet
2. Crossing at the curb line (from the level of the street, not the
sidewalk): 16 feet
3. Crossing where there are no curbs: applicants must consider the
curb line as the outer limit of possible vehicular traffic: 16 feet
C. Clearance Over Residential Property
Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained
when requesting electric service be placed over residential property.
1. Crossing over private roads and other areas accessible to
agricultural equipment: 15 feet
2. Crossing over agricultural equipment: maintain 16 feet, if possible
3. Crossing over private driveways or other areas accessible to
vehicles: 12 feet
4. Crossing over areas accessible to pedestrians only: 12 feet.
D. Clearance From Communication Service Drops
Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained
when requesting electric service be placed over communication service
drops.
1. Normal radial clearance: a minimum of 24 inches.
2. Within 15 feet of the point of attachment on a building or structure:
the normal radial clearance may be reduced to a minimum of
12 inches.
E. Clearance From Swimming Pools
Avoid installing utility service drops above public and private swimming
pools, when practical.
The CPUC, not local agencies or codes, regulates, by its adoption of
G.O. 95, the installation and clearances of utility-owned, operated, and
maintained supply lines and service drops. G.O. 95 contains specific
requirements for installing and maintaining utility supply-line and
service-drop clearances above swimming pools. Figure 4-3, “Minimum
Clearance for All Drops Above or Adjacent To Swimming Pools,” on
Page 4-6, illustrates the minimum-permitted clearances mandated by
G.O. 95 where utility service drops are installed above swimming pools.
NOTE: Table 4-1, “Minimum Clearances Over Swimming Pools,” on
Page 4-6, also provides clearance information for drops above
or adjacent to swimming pools.

4-5 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

B
A A
A A

Edge of Pool B B
B B

Highest Diving Board Not Over

Water Level B Over Water Water B
Surface Surface
Side View
B B B
B

Top View B

Figure 4-3
Minimum Clearance for All Drops Above or Adjacent To Swimming Pools

Table 4-1 Minimum Clearances Over Swimming Pools1

A B
Minimum Vertical and Radial Clearances Vertical Radial
(In Feet)
Unprotected Line Conductors-Vertical Over the Highest Water Level
and Radial From the Top Edge of the Pool Walls:
1. 0 through 750 volts 20 20
2. Above 750 volts through 22,500 volts 25 25
3. Above 22,500 volts through 300 kilovolts (kV) 30 30
Service Drops-Vertical Over the Highest Water Level and Radial
From the Top Edge of the Pool Walls:
4. Pools: public and commercial 16 16
5. Pools: residential 12 12
Service Drops (Over Diving Boards or Platforms):
6. Portion of the board or platform that is over the water’s surface 16 8
7. Portion of the board or platform that is not over the water’s surface 12 3
Guys−Ungrounded Portions:
8. Over the highest water level and from the top edge of the pool walls 18 18
9. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that is over the water’s
18 8
surface)
10. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that is not over the
12 6
water’s surface)
Guys−Grounded Portions:
11. Over the highest water level 16 —
12. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that is over the
16 8
water’s surface)
13. Over the diving board or platform (the portion that is not over the
8 3
water’s surface)
1 Clearance requirements may be different than local electrical codes.

2017 4-6
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.2. Clearance Above Buildings

Table 4-2, “Minimum Allowable Clearance of Service Drops From
Buildings − 0 Volts Through 750 Volts,” below, lists the required clearances
for buildings that are receiving electric service.

Table 4-2 Minimum Allowable Clearance of Insulated Service Drops From

Buildings − 0 Volts Through 750 Volts
Minimum Clearance From Buildings
Insulated Conductors (See Note 1)
0 Volts Through 750 Volts
Vertical Clearances Above:
1. All portions of buildings including metallic or
nonmetallic cornices, decorative
See Notes 2, 3, and 4
appendages, eaves, roofs, or parapet walls
of the building being served.
2. Metallic or nonmetallic, “nonwalkable”
See Notes 2 and 3
overhang, patio cover, or other structure.
3. Other buildings on the same premises. 2 Feet
8 Feet
4. Buildings on other premises.
(See Note 5)
Horizontal and Radial Clearances:
1. From fire escapes, exits, windows, and
3 Feet
doors.
1 Weather-resistant, covered conductors are not used in new installations. See G.O. 95 Rule 54.8, “Service Drops,
0−750 Volts,” Table 10, “Minimum Allowable Clearance of Service Drops 0−750 Volts from Buildings,” on Page V-72,
for insulated conductor clearances.
2 Not less than 1/2 inch for residential services. Not less than 12 inches for nonresidential services as shown in
Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20 on Page 4-13.
3 An applicant must ensure that the service drop’s point of attachment for industrial and commercial premises is no
more than 18 inches. Take this measurement from behind the front face of the building wall facing the pole line from
which the service drop originates.
4 Clearance requirements may be different than local electrical codes.
5 Reduce to 2 feet for nonmetallic roofs when the roof slope exceeds 9 inches of rise per 12 inches of run.
(See Figure 4-4, “Nonmetallic Roof,” below.)

Run = 12“

Rise = 9“

Figure 4-4
Nonmetallic Roof

4-7 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.3. Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment

PG&E recommends that applicants do not locate electric supply and
communication services in the same vertical plane. Figure 4-11, one of the
“Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment” illustrations, found on
Page 4-9, shows the recommended arrangement for the communication
service drop.
Typically, the service drop is attached below the level of the service
weatherhead; however, it may be attached above the service weatherhead,
as shown in Figure 4-7 and Figure 4-9, both located on Page 4-9, if the
two following situations exist.
A. It is impractical to attach the service drop below the level of the service
weatherhead.
B. The service-drop conductor’s attachment point is located 24 inches or
less from the service weatherhead.
Applicants must ensure that the line length of the open wiring (i.e., drip
loop) between the point of service attachment and service weatherhead does
not exceed 3 feet.
Applicants must ensure that the clearance requirements for the PG&E
overhead service are met. These clearances may be greater than local
electrical codes.
PG&E will not attach services to periscope structures made of plastic.
Figure 4-5 through Figure 4-11, all representing “Clearance at the
Residential Point of Attachment,” provide examples of clearances for
overhead service-drop installations and terminations. These seven figures
are located on Page 4-9.
NOTE: For overhead, temporary services, refer to Numbered Document 025055,
“Requirements For Customer-Owned Poles,” in Appendix C, “Electric and
Gas Engineering Documents.”
NOTE: Refer to PG&E Bulletin TD-2999B-030, “Technical Requirements for
Electric Service Interconnection at Primary Distribution Voltages,” in
Appendix B, “Electric and Gas Service Documents,” for technical
information on primary services.

2017 4-8
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Nonmetallic Roof
Nonmetallic Roof

Wood Block 1-1/2” Drip Loop

Service Min. Thickness 3’ Max.
Head
See Figure 4-2
See Figure 4-2 Wood Block on Page 4-4
See Figure 4-2 on Page 4-4 1-1/2” Min.
on Page 4-4 Thickness

Figure 4-5 Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7

Nonmetallic Roof
Service Drop
Drip Loop
3’ Max.

See Figure 4-2

on Page 4-4
See Figure 4-2
on Page 4-4

Figure 4-8 Figure 4-9

Communication
PG&E Service Drop Service Drop
Applicant
Service-Entrance
12” Min.
Conductors

Service Delivery See Figure 4-2

Point at Point of on Page 4-4
See Figure 4-2
Attachment on Page 4-4

Figure 4-10 Figure 4-11

Clearance at the Residential Point of Attachment

4-9 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.4. Vertical Clearance on Nonresidential Property

Table 4-3, “Vertical Clearance From the Ground on Nonresidential
Property,” located below, provides the minimum vertical distance (in feet)
from the ground on nonresidential property.
Applicants must ensure that periscope attachment structures are constructed
with one of the following, approved materials.
• 1-1/4-inch minimum, galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or intermediate
metal conduit (IMC) rigid steel.
• 2-inch minimum rigid aluminum conduit measured in iron pipe
size (IPS) dimensions.
PG&E will not attach a span to plastic periscope structures.
Periscope extensions projecting above the roof may require bracing against
the pull of the service-drop conductors, as shown in Figure 4-39, “Unbraced
Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential),” found on Page 4-23.
Typically, the service drop is attached below the level of the service
weatherhead; however, it may be attached above the service weatherhead if
both of the following situations exist.
• It is impractical to attach the service drop below the level of the service
weatherhead.
• The attachment point on the service-drop conductors is located less
than 24 inches from the service weatherhead.
Ensure the length of the open-wire drip loop does not exceed 3 feet.
PG&E connects the Company’s service conductor and an applicant’s
service-entrance conductor below the service weatherhead.

Table 4-3 Vertical Clearance From the Ground on Nonresidential Property1

Minimum Vertical Distance
Description
(In Feet)
Over private driveways, lanes, and other areas
16
(e.g., alleys and parking lots) accessible to vehicles.
Over areas accessible to pedestrians only. 12
Over buildings and bridges, or over structures (attached or
unattached) that do not ordinarily support conductors and on 8
which people can walk.
1 Clearance requirements may be different than local electrical codes.

A. Clearance From Communication Service Drops

Applicants must ensure that the following clearances are maintained when
requesting electric service to be placed over communication service drops.
1. Normal radial clearance: a minimum of 24 inches.
2. Within 15 feet of the point of attachment on a building or structure: the
normal radial clearances may be reduced to a minimum of 12 inches.

2017 4-10
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Private Property Open

to Vehicular Traffic

Area Accessible Supply

Only to Pedestrians Service Drop

12” Min.
Radius
Communication
Service Drop
See Item A. on
Page 4-10
12’ 16’ 8’
Min
Min. Min.
. 16’ 18’ 18’
Min. Min. Min.
Loading
Platform Other Building
on Property Served

Structure or 12’
Fence on Which Sidewalk
People Can Walk
Centerline Curb Sidewalk
of Street or
Roadway
Curb or Outer Limits
of Possible Vehicular Traffic

Figure 4-12
Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts Through 750 Volts,
Industrial and Commercial Installations (Required by the CPUC)

Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20, all representing “Clearances for

Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors” and all located on
Page 4-13, show overhead service drops and vertical-clearances, as
measured from the ground, for commercial and industrial installations and
large residential buildings.

4.4.5. Clearances for a Nonresidential Building Service Drop Using

Cable or Equally Insulated, Open-Wire Service Conductors
Applicants can use the clearances shown in Figure 4-13 through
Figure 4-20 only when they use Type N-SD service-drop cable, or equally
insulated cable, open-wire service conductors. Applicants must not use
weatherproof-rated conductors.
Figure 4-12, “Ground Clearances for Supply Service Drops, 0 Volts
Through 750 Volts, Industrial and Commercial Installations (Required by
the CPUC),” located above, provides the required clearances from a service
drop to the ground.

4-11 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Figure 4-21, “Clearance Around Windows,” and Figure 4-22, “Clearance

Around Doors,” both located on Page 4-14, provide applicants with the
required clearances from fire escapes, exits, windows, doors, and other
locations where people could be present.
Applicants must use a 1-1/4-inch minimum GRS or IMC rigid steel, or
2-inch minimum rigid aluminum conduit (IPS dimensions) for all periscope
attachment structures. See Figure 4-13, Figure 4-14, Figure 4-15,
Figure 4-19, and Figure 4-20, all representing “Clearances for
Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors,” found on Page 4-13,
for examples.
The clearances shown in Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-20 only apply to
insulated services, up to a 750-volt maximum, over nonmetallic roofs or
decorative appendages. Applicants also should refer to the service-entrance,
conductor-clearance requirements found in the State Building Standards
Electrical Code.
The special 24-inch minimum clearance, illustrated in Figure 4-20, is
applicable only to service-drop cable.
Either brace the periscope attachment structures as shown, or ensure that
the structures are supported using similar, acceptable methods. For more
information on bracing periscope attachment structures, see Figure 4-34 and
Figure 4-35, both representing “Service to Nonresidential Premises,” and
both found on Page 4-18. Also, see Figure 4-38, “Braced Periscope
Attachment Structure,” found on Page 4-20, and Table 4-5, “Maximum
Mast Height Above the Roof Without Bracing,” found on Page 4-22.

2017 4-12
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Service Drop
12” Min.−24” Max.
Service Drop Service Drop

12” Min. 12” Min. 12” Min.

12” Min.
18” From the Edge
of the Eaves
18”
Building Wall More Than 18” From the Max.
Facing Pole Line Edge of the Eaves (but
Building Wall Not More Than 18” From Building
Facing Pole Line the Face of the Wall) Wall Facing
Pole Line
Figure 4-13 Figure 4-14 Figure 4-15

Service Drop
Service Drop Service Drop
Open Wire 3’ Max.
Open Wire
Decorative 3’ Max. 24”
12” Min. Appendage Max.
12” Min.
12” Min. 12” Min.
Service Head 18”
Cornice, Parapet Not Max. From the Edge
Wall, and Roof Specified of the Eaves
18” Building
Building Wall
Max. Building Covered Protection of Wall
Facing Pole Line
Wall Facing Building Facing
Pole Line Pole
Figure 4-16 Figure 4-17 Figure 4-18 Line

Service Drop
Service-Drop Cable (Only),
Not Open Wire
12” Min.
8’ 0” Min. 18”
Max.
12” Min.
24”
Walkable Roof Min.
Main 18” Max. From the Edge
Section of Carport, Building of the Building Wall
Building Wall Breezeway, etc. Wall Facing
Facing Pole “Nonwalkable” Overhead
Column or Support Pole Line
Line or Patio Cover
(Not a Building Wall)

Figure 4-19 Figure 4-20

Clearances for Nonresidential Buildings Using Insulated Conductors (0 Volts−750 Volts)

4-13 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.6. Clearances Around Doors and Windows

Service drops are not required to clear buildings by any specified
horizontal distance; however, applicants must ensure that the service
weatherhead, the service drop, and the open wires between the service
weatherhead and the service drop maintain the following clearances from
fire escapes, balconies, stairways, exits, doors, windows, and other
locations where people could be present.
A. Wires that are either at or below the level of the top of exits, doors,
windows, and other openings must have a radial clearance from the
boundaries of such openings of not less than 3 feet, as shown in
Figure 4-21 below.
B. Wires less than 8 feet above, or 3 feet below, the surface levels of fire
escapes, balconies, porches, stairways, and walkways must have a
minimum horizontal clearance of at least 3 feet from such surfaces, as
shown in Figure 4-22 below.

ÔÔ 36”
Ô
ÔÔ Min.
Ô
ÔÔ36” 36” 36”
36” 8’0” Min.
Min.
36”
Min.
Min. Min. Min.
ÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔ
ÔÔ 36”
ÔÔ
Min.
Figure 4-21 Figure 4-22
Clearance Around Windows Clearance Around Doors

4.4.7. Clearance Between Service Drop Wires

The minimum-allowable radial clearance between service drop sites
(i.e., 0 volts through 750 volts) in the span from the pole to the building,
and a point of attachment to the building, is 3 inches. Applicants must
ensure that wire supports at the building are spaced 8 inches apart, where
practical.

2017 4-14
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.4.8. Clearance From Applicant-Owned Service Poles

Building
Building
See Figure 4-2
on Page 4-4
and Figure 4-12 6” x 6”
on Page 4-11 A Service Pole Detached
Min. Size From the Building Must
Conform With PG&E Numbered
Document 025055, “Requirements
See Figure 4-2 Ground for Customer-Owned Poles”
on Page 4-4

Figure 4-23 Figure 4-24

Service Attachment Structure or Service Pole Detached
Service Pole Secured to a Building From a Building

4.5. Service Attachments

Applicants must ensure that utility service drops (i.e., 0 volts through 750 volts)
are not attached directly to metal roofs.

4.5.1. Attaching Low-Voltage, Residential, Overhead Service Drops

Applicants must ensure that the service drop’s point of attachment to the
building is high enough to provide the minimum legal clearances shown in
Figure 4-2 on Page 4-4.
Subsection 4.6., “Attachment Structures (Periscopes),” found on Page 4-21,
provides information on installing and using periscopes as attachment
structures.
Whenever practical, attach the service drops below the level of the service
weatherhead, as shown in Figure 4-29, “Cable (Single Spool),” and
Figure 4-30, “Open Wire or Cable (Cable Shown),” both of which are
found on Page 4-16, and Figure 4-39, “Unbraced Periscope Structure
(Residential and Nonresidential),” found on Page 4-23.
In all installations, PG&E connects to the applicant’s service-entrance
conductor below the level of the service weatherhead. Drip loops are
included at the entrance of each conductor to the service weatherhead.
These drip loops prevent moisture from penetrating the installations.
The standard service attachments shown in Figure 4-25 through
Figure 4-30, all representing “0-Volt Through 300-Volt Service at
Residential Premises” and found on Page 4-16, are designed according to
the CPUC’s State Building Standards Electrical Regulations, to California
electrical code, and to PG&E requirements. Local authorities may have
additional requirements.

4-15 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

NOTE: PG&E will attach a service knob to a stud (e.g., 2 inch x 4 inch)
or rafter, if possible. PG&E will not mount the service knob
directly to the roof or attach it to corner trim or roof trim without a
2 inch x 4 inch-sized stud or larger. Figure 4-36, “Building
Attachment–Service Knob,” Detail A, found on Page 4-20,
provides the requirements for attaching service knobs.

Service Knob. Screw

8” Min. Through Roofing Into 2” x 4”
Rafter Above Overhang

Nonmetallic Service
2” x 4” Between Roof Knob
Rafters and Against Roof
Overhang To Be Installed Figure 4-26
by Builder Open Wire or Cable
(Open Wire Shown)
Figure 4-25
Open Wire

Service Knob. Screw Through

Roofing Into Rafter Above
8” Min. 2” x 4” Backing, Overhang
Where Required Triplex

Nonmetallic Roof

Exposed Overhang.
Do Not Use This
Figure 4-27
Figure 4-28 Construction Where
Open Wire or Cable (Open Wire Shown)
Cable (Using Triplex) Overhang Is Boxed In

Flashing Cable Tie

Single-Spool
Periscope Fitting

1-1/4” Rigid Steel

Conduit or 2” IPS
Aluminum
Pipe Strap
Bore Through
Roof Plate Stud
(Conduit Against Figure 4-30
Stud) Figure 4-29 Open Wire or Cable
Cable (Single Spool) (Cable Shown)

0-Volt Through 300-Volt Service at Residential Premises

2017 4-16
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.2. Attaching Low-Voltage, Nonresidential, Overhead Service

Drops
When applicants plan to install service-entrance wiring larger than that
shown in Figure 4-31 through Figure 4-34, all representing “Service to
Nonresidential Premises” and found on Page 4-18, they must consult PG&E
before they begin construction to obtain instructions on attaching the
wiring properly.
Figure 4-31, “Service Drop Cable, 4/0 and Smaller, Triplex or
Quadruplex,” shows applicants how to attach the wiring using service
knobs in either concrete or masonry walls. Service knobs must be screwed
into wood-frame walls.
Figure 4-32, “New Wall, 1/0 kcmil to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum,” shows
applicants how to attach the wires using insulated clevises on concrete
walls. For wood-frame walls or masonry walls (e.g., brick, hollow tile,
cinder block), applicants must bolt the attachments through the wall. Where
service is attached to masonry walls, applicants must install bracing or
attachment structures.
When it is practical to do so, applicants must attach service drops below the
level of the service weatherhead.
PG&E will furnish the bolts and insulators needed to secure the service
drop to the building or attachment structures. Applicants can attach the
service drop to the walls or to periscope structures either horizontally or
vertically.
The wire sizes shown in Figure 4-31 through Figure 4-35 refer to service
drops, not to service-entrance wires.
Open wiring, or drip loop, installed between the service drop attachment
and the service weatherhead, must not exceed 3 feet.
Applicants must install periscope structures as illustrated in Figure 4-39 on
Page 4-23. See Subsection 4.6. on Page 4-21 for additional information on
installing periscopes and using periscopes as attachment structures.

4-17 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Service
Service Entrance
Entrance Conduit
Wiring 8”
Expansion
Shield
Cable Grip
5/8” Eye Bolt and
2-1/4” Square Washer

Figure 4-31
Figure 4-32
Service Drop Cable, 4/0 and Smaller,
New Wall, 1/0 kcmil 1 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum
Triplex or Quadruplex

8”

5/8” Flush Anchor

Figure 4-33
New or Existing Wall, 1/0 kcmil 1 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum

Dead-End 1/0 and 1-1/4” Rigid Steel Conduit or 2” IPS Aluminum Conduit Min.
Larger Conductors

Service Drop Cable

Braces
Braces

18” 18” Max.

Max.

Figure 4-34 Figure 4-35

Open Wire Service, #4 to 397.5 kcmil 1 Aluminum Service Drop Cable

Service to Nonresidential Premises

Notes in reference to Figure 4-32, Figure 4-33, and Figure 4-34.

1. kcmil: a thousand circular mils

2017 4-18
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.5.3. Special Service Attachment Requirements: Areas Subject to

Heavy Snow Loading
The following special requirements apply to service drops installed in
snow-loading areas. PG&E has designed these requirements to minimize
storm damage.
A. Applicants must ensure that the span length of triplex or quadruplex
service drop cable used in snow-loading areas is 125 feet or less.
B. Applicants should locate the service weatherhead as high as practical to
keep the weatherhead clear of deep snow.
C. Applicants should try to attach service drops to house gables, where
practical. This type of attachment protects the service and meter
equipment from being impacted by snow and ice as it slides off the roof.
D. PG&E will attach a service knob to a stud, if possible. PG&E will not
mount the service knob directly to the roof or attach it to corner trim or
roof trim. Figure 4-36, “Building Attachment − Service Knob,”
Detail A, found on Page 4-20, provides the requirements for attaching
service knobs.
E. Applicants should install a self-supported, periscope attachment
structure according to the requirements specified in Subsection 4.6. on
Page 4-21 and Table 4-4, “Maximum Distance ‘L’ (Inches From the
Service Attachment to the Top Periscope Support),” found on
Page 4-20.
Typically, periscope attachment structures that are installed as specified in
Subsection 4.6. and Table 4-5, “Maximum Mast Height Above the Roof
Without Bracing,” found on Page 4-22, will provide a sufficiently rigid
service-drop support to withstand the expected snow loading. In areas
above 3,000 feet, use the construction methods shown in Figure 4-36,
where practical.

4-19 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Locate the Service Knob

Attachment at the House
Gable, Where Practical.
Attach It to the Stud, if Wood Backing
Possible (See Detail A) (Installed by the
Builder if the Knob
Cannot Be Installed in
Do Not Attach the Stud)
to the Corner
or Roof Trim
Stud
Sheathing

Siding
Preferred
Position Alternate
Position Drill a 5/16” Diameter
Do Not Locate the Hole Through the
Service Attachment Siding to Prevent
in the Slide Area Splitting. Drill a 1/4”
Below the Roof Detail A Diameter Pilot Hole,
Figure 4-36 When Necessary
Building Attachment–Service Knob

Load Center Load Center

L See Table 4-4 Below

12” Min.
See the “L” Dimension
in Table 4-4 Below Top Periscope Support

Bore Through the Roof Plate

Top (Conduit Against Stud)
Periscope Pipe Strap
Support (Every 3 Feet)
Stud
Figure 4-37 Figure 4-38
Self-Supported Periscope Attachment Structure Braced Periscope Attachment Structure

Table 4-4 Maximum Distance “L” (Inches From the Service Attachment to the Top
Periscope Support)
Type of IPS Size of Service Periscope (In Inches)
Service
Periscope 1-1/4 3 1-1/2 3 23 2-1/2 3 4
GRS 1 or
5 7 11 22 36 57
IMC 2
Aluminum Not Permitted 4 93 14 26
1 GRS: galvanized rigid steel
2 IMC: intermediate metal conduit
3 Brace the periscope as shown in Figure 4-38 to maintain a sufficient clearance over the roof.

2017 4-20
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.6. Attachment Structures (Periscopes)

An attachment structure is a support that connects the service drop to the structure
while maintaining the clearances required for the service drop. Applicants must
ensure that the service drop maintains the required clearance at its point of
attachment to the periscope, mast, or other attachment structure. These clearances
are mandated by the CPUC’s G.O. 95.
Applicants can connect service drops to attachment structures in either one of two
ways.
A. Connect by using either spools or insulators that are installed on a building.
B. Connect by using a mast constructed of one of the following materials.
• Rigid, galvanized steel pipe or conduit
• Galvanized angle iron
• Wood
• Other suitable material
To provide structural support for periscopes, applicants should use a heavy-duty,
2-hole pipe strap every 3 feet, secured by 3/8-inch x 3-inch lag screws (minimum
size). Structural support is required at the location shown in Figure 4-39,
“Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential),” on Page 4-23.
When applicants must install attachment structures to maintain the required
clearances, they must contact PG&E for approval before constructing the
structures. PG&E must ensure that attachment structures meet all of the applicable
legal requirements.
Applicants must install and maintain these attachment structures at their expense.
The attachment structures must be strong enough to support the service drop wires
and service attachments. Applicants may use service-entrance conduit as
attachment structures. In this case, the periscope must be a minimum 1-1/4-inch
GRS conduit or IMC, or 2-inch IPS rigid aluminum conduit. Applicants may not
use plastic conduit as an attachment structure. Subsection 4.5.3., “Special Service
Attachment Requirements: Areas Subject to Heavy Snow Loading,” on Page 4-19,
provides applicants with additional requirements when using attachment structures
in snow-loading areas.
When applicants use attachment structures, either on exterior walls or on roof
structures, they must ensure the attachment structures provide the required
clearances. Additionally, applicants must ensure that buildings are constructed or
reinforced to support the weight of the attachment structure and fitting. Buildings
must be able to withstand the pull of the service wires. Applicants must furnish all
of the materials required to install the attachment structures except the racks,
bolts, and insulators needed to secure the service wires. PG&E will supply those
parts.
Applicants may not attach communications conductors, such as those used for
telephone or cable television service, to the electric supply’s power-service mast or
attachment structure. Applicants can attach only electric-utility, power-supply,
service-drop conductors to the electric-supply, power-service masts or attachment
structures.

4-21 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.6.1. Periscope Clearances and Bracing Requirements

Applicants must ensure that periscopes and raceway-type service masts
extend at least 12 inches above any roof or eave they may penetrate.
Applicants may be required to raise periscopes and raceway-type service
masts when using them as attachment structures and/or to obtain the
appropriate clearances for service drop conductors. For more information,
see Figure 4-13 through Figure 4-16, all found on Page 4-13. Also, see
Figure 4-34, “Open Wire Service, #4 to 397.5 kcmil Aluminum,” and
Figure 4-35, “Service Drop Cable,” found on Page 4-18. Finally, see
Figure 4-36 through Figure 4-38, found on Page 4-20.
Applicants may have to brace periscopes that project above the roof lines,
as shown in Figure 4-39 and Table 4-5. An acceptable method of bracing is
illustrated in Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35. Table 4-5 lists the maximum
periscope heights that applicants can install without bracing for different
types of conduit.
The periscope (i.e., mast) height without bracing is limited to 30 inches
above the roof in either of the following two locations.
• Where the service drop is installed through trees.
• Where trees or tree branches may strike or cause unplanned loading on
the service drop.
Applicants must ensure that unbraced periscopes projecting above roofs or
eaves are continuous without couplings from the point where the utility
service drop is attached to the periscope to 30 inches below the roof or
eave. When the periscope structure requires support above the roof,
applicants must ensure that it is braced, not guyed, as shown in
Figure 4-38. The brace must be located as described in Table 4-4. When
applicants need to brace periscope structures, the bracing must consist of
two galvanized steel members installed at an approximate 90° spread.
Braces must consist of a minimum 3/4-inch galvanized steel pipe or
1-1/4-inch x 1-1/4-inch x 1/8-inch galvanized steel angles.

Table 4-5 Maximum Mast Height Above the Roof Without Bracing1
(IPS) Conduit Size Maximum Height
GRS 2 or IMC 3 Aluminum Without Bracing
All Measurements in Inches
1-1/4 2 42
1-1/2 2-1/2 42
2 3 54
Larger Larger 78
1 See Subsection 4.5.3. on Page 4-19 for snow-loading area requirements.
2 GRS: galvanized rigid steel
3 IMC: intermediate metal conduit

2017 4-22
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Service-Entrance
Conduit

Insulators and
See Table 4-5 Clamps Furnished
on Page 4-22 and Installed by
PG&E
12” Min. Above Roof
Wood Blocking
Flashing

Wood Frame
Pipe Strap. To provide periscope
support, a heavy-duty, 2-hole pipe
strap every 3 feet, secured by
3/8” x 3” lag screws (minimum size),
is required at this location.
Figure 4-39
Unbraced Periscope Structure (Residential and Nonresidential)

4.7. Service Weatherheads

Typically, applicants should not locate the service weatherhead on exterior walls
that are less than 2 feet from a common property line. The service weatherhead
should be higher than the point of service attachment.
Applicable California state laws require applicants to locate the service
weatherhead so that they maintain the minimum clearances specified in
Subsection 4.4., “Service Drop Clearances,” found on Page 4-3, through
Subsection 4.5., “Service Attachments,” found on Page 4-15. These minimum
clearances also apply to the service drop and the open sites between the service
weatherhead and the service drop’s point of attachment.
In some instances, applicants may need to install the service weatherhead and
related open wires at an elevation greater than the minimum required clearances.
Adding the extra height ensures that the installed service drops maintain the
required clearances above the ground and any affected structures. Also the
required clearances may be greater than local electrical codes.
A service weatherhead must be located above the service-drop conductor’s point
of attachment; however, the service-drop attachment may be located above the
service weatherhead if both of the following conditions are met.
A. If it is impractical to attach the service drop below the level of the service
weatherhead.
B. If the attachment point on the service-drop conductor is located less than
24 inches from the service weatherhead.
Ensure that the length of the open-wire drip loop does not exceed 3 feet.

4-23 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.8. Service-Entrance Conductors

Applicants must furnish, install, and maintain the service-entrance wiring and
service equipment beyond the point where it attaches to PG&E’s overhead service
drop.
The type and size of service-entrance wires must conform to applicable legal
requirements and must be approved service-entrance cable. If applicants use an
approved service-entrance cable, they must ensure that the service-entrance wires
are enclosed either in continuous metallic tubing or in rigid conduit of a type and
size to conform to applicable requirements, but preferably 1-1/4 inches or more.
NOTE: On periscope-type installations, use a minimum 1-1/4-inch GRS or IMC,
or 2-inch IPS, rigid aluminum conduit.
If applicants use SE-type service-entrance cables between the service weatherhead
and meters, they must ensure that the SE-type cables are not concealed. Also,
applicants must ensure that service entrances are rain tight by using approved
fittings.
In residential and small commercial installations, applicants may install
short-radius conduit fittings (i.e., LBs, service elbows) in the overhead,
service-entrance conduit system.
Because this conduit system penetrates the outer building wall, applicants must
install the short-radius conduit fittings with covers that prevent water from
penetrating the fittings. The covers also must be sealable by PG&E personnel.
NOTE: Short-radius conduit fittings should not contain splices or taps.
The drip loop is the length of exposed wire between the service weatherhead and
the service drop. Applicants must not use more than 3 feet of exposed, open
wiring to form the drip loop.
To create drip loops, an applicant should install a minimum 18 inches of
service-entrance wiring that extends out from the service weatherhead. In cases
where the service-entrance open conductors pass over a roof or firewall with a
minimum clearance of 12 inches, applicants must provide enough wire for PG&E
to connect to the service drop and to obtain the required 12-inch minimum
clearance above the building.
PG&E will connect the Company’s service conductors and the applicants’
service-entrance conductors below the weatherhead.
PG&E will furnish and install connectors for joining the service-entrance
conductors to the service drop. Drip loops must not extend around the corner of a
building; however, the service weatherhead may be located on the same face of the
building as the service-drop attachment. The service-entrance conduit or cable
may be extended around the corner of the building to the meter and service switch.
Do not install conductors other than service-entrance conductors in the conduit
leading to the meter.

2017 4-24
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.9. Applicant-Owned, Installed, or Furnished Wood Poles

PG&E project coordinators will explain the requirements of Electric T&D

Engineering & Technical Support Bulletin 2004-08, “Inspection of
Customer/Contractor Provided Poles,” (filed as “For Reference Only”) to ensure
that applicants are familiar with the requirements for installing and using the wood
poles.
For poles that will have a final height greater than 20 feet above ground level, the
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) may require the applicant to file a notice a
minimum of 45 days before installing the pole. The FAA may issue a determination
of hazard to air navigation and recommend actions to mitigate or eliminate the
hazard. Please contact your PG&E project coordinator for additional information.
After meeting with project coordinators and finalizing their installation plans,
applicants must notify their local PG&E project coordinators before setting
wood poles. It is critical that applicants who own, install, or furnish approved
wood poles to which PG&E can attach equipment or facilities, or to which PG&E
can furnish or supply permanent electric service, meet the requirements of
Numbered Document 025055, found in Appendix C. PG&E field inspectors will
approve the installation of poles that meet Company requirements.
PG&E field inspectors verify the following, specific requirements for
applicant-furnished poles before approving their installation.
A. The poles must be supplied and treated by a PG&E-approved supplier.
B. The applicant must obtain and provide PG&E with a copy of a “Certificate of
Treatment” from the pole supplier. That certificate must indicate that the pole
was treated according to the requirements of both the American Wood
Preserver’s Association and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
C. Applicants must ensure that new poles are branded or tagged. This
identification must be either 10 feet from the pole butt for poles less than
55 feet long or 14 feet from the pole butt for poles more than 55 feet long.
The brand must include the following four identifiers.
• The manufacturer’s name
• The month and year the pole was treated
• The wood species
• The preservative used to treat the pole
D. Poles greater than 40 feet long that will support PG&E primary facilities must
be through-bored at the ground line.
E. PG&E must inspect and approve used poles before they are reused
(i.e., PG&E facilities are reinstalled on the poles). PG&E-owned poles that
have been removed from service and will no longer be used by PG&E cannot
be reused as customer-owned poles. The PG&E field inspector must verify that
the poles meet the dimensional and test requirements for reused poles. These
requirements are described in PG&E Procedure TD-2325P-01, “Wood
Poles−Testing, Reinforcing, and Reusing.”
If installing overhead temporary services, refer to Numbered Document 025055,
found in Appendix C.

4-25 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10. Required Vegetation Clearances

The state of California requires electric utilities to keep electric lines

(i.e., high-voltage lines) cleared of vegetation. All newly constructed distribution lines
and existing lines must meet these requirements.
NOTE: PG&E may determine that the distribution line should be installed
underground, or that trees should be removed, if the planned line extension
does not meet the clearance requirements between existing trees and overhead
electric lines. See new options for commercial agricultural orchards in
Subsection 4.10.5. on Page 4-30.

4.10.1. General Requirements

When establishing new overhead services, and/or when building or remodeling
structures near high-voltage lines, poles, or towers, applicants must research
planting regulations and follow the rules established here.
NOTE: Applicants must consider safety and access for repairs when planting
near an overhead electric service.
A. Where required, applicants must establish clearances as described in
California Public Resource Code (PRC) Division 4, “Forests, Forestry and
Range and Forage Lands,” Part 2, Chapter 3, Section 4292. PG&E can
exempt applicants if the vegetation around power poles at the completed
construction site will be well irrigated, low growing, and not highly
flammable. In general, do not plant trees near power poles or towers.
B. For electric distribution, high-voltage lines rated up to 60,000 volts,
applicants must establish a 15-foot “low-growth” zone on both sides of all
new lines. Also applicants must not plant trees that exceed 25 feet in height
at maturity under or within 15 feet of distribution power poles. The zone
under the electric power lines should be a low-growth, tree-planting zone
and/or a shrub- and flower-planting zone. PG&E recommends planting
shrubs and flowers in low-growth zones to ensure compliance. Figure 4-40,
“Illustration of 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone,” and Figure 4-41,
“Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Service Wires,” both on Page
4-27, illustrate low-growth zones and show how the 15-foot clearance is
measured from the center of the pole.
C. For all electric transmission, high-voltage lines rated greater than
60,000 volts, applicants must not plant trees within the right-of-way
easement of the transmission poles or towers. Applicants must follow a
“no-growth” zone inside rights-of-way areas, including under the
electric power lines. The zone outside the rights-of-way areas is a
“low-growth” zone, tree-planting zone, and/or a shrub-and-flower
planting zone. Figure 4-42, “Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under
Transmission Wires,” on Page 4-27, illustrates a no-growth zone.
D. Applicants must ensure that a thorough inspection is made of proposed
construction areas. Dead, dying, diseased, or hazard trees tall enough to fall
into the proposed power lines must be removed. Hazard trees are defined as
any tree having a structural defect that may cause the tree, or a portion of
the tree, to fall either on someone or on something of value.

2017 4-26
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

Distribution High-Voltage Lines

No Trees Taller No Trees Taller

Than 25’ at Maturity Than 25’ at Maturity

Medium-Growth
Low-Growth Low-Growth Zone
Zone Zone

15’ 15’
Figure 4-40
Illustration of 15-Foot Clearance, Low-Growth Zone
F

Distribution High-Voltage Lines

15’
Min.
Service
Wires 25’
Grass and
shrubs are
recommended when
planting under service wires.

Centerline of Street
or Roadway
Figure 4-41
Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Service Wires

Transmission High-Voltage Lines

Small trees allowed. Small trees allowed.

Right-of-Way − Easement
(No trees allowed. Small shrubs and grass allowed.)
Figure 4-42
Grass and Shrubs Recommended Under Transmission Wires

4-27 2017
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

E. Applicants can contact PG&E’s vegetation management personnel to

obtain more information about codes or regulations and to schedule
field inspections for construction sites. Vegetation management
personnel perform field inspections to identify clearance requirements
or hazard trees.

4.10.2. Planning Requirements

When planning and routing high-voltage overhead electric lines, applicants
must avoid areas with heavy tree growth. See the tree-planting matrix tables
(Tables B-1 through B-7 starting on Page B-2) in Appendix B. Building
plans should indicate where overhead lines pass within the boundaries of
the construction and landscape areas, as shown Figure 4-43, “Alternative
Routes to a House Showing High-Voltage Lines and Tree-Clearance
Zones,” below, and Figure 4-44, “Development Area,” on Page 4-29.

Two Possible
Points for
Connection
to House

15’ 15’ 15’ 15’

Figure 4-43
Alternative Routes to a House Showing High-Voltage Lines and Tree-Clearance Zones
f

2017 4-28
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.3. Existing Overhead Lines Adjacent to Developments

Most new developments are designed to ensure that power lines are built
underground. However, one or more sides of the construction area may be
bordered by existing power lines. When planning landscape improvements,
applicants must plant only lower-growing tree species under and near
overhead electric lines.

Development
Area
Underground

Small Trees Only

15’ Low-Growth Zone
High-Voltage Lines

Small Trees Only

15’
Low-Growth Zone

Figure 4-44
Development Area
f

4.10.4. Line Extensions

Line extensions must be constructed with a 15-foot clearance on either side
of high-voltage power poles. Applicants must clear the area from one end
of the line extension to the final connection point before construction on the
line extension begins. Figure 4-43 on Page 4-28 illustrates an approved
method for clearing affected areas. Also, any hazard trees identified during
the PG&E inspection that are located outside of the 15-foot clearance zone
on either side of the power poles should be removed before construction
begins on the line extension. PG&E will not connect new lines to the
existing distribution system until the applicant provides adequate clearance
from the trees.

4-29 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

4.10.5. Primary Overhead Distribution Poles in Commercial Orchard

Installations
When planning and routing high-voltage, overhead electric lines within a
commercial orchard, agricultural customers may request the installation of
taller poles than normally would be installed to eliminate or minimize
PG&E’s need for future vegetation pruning. The applicant may be required
to make a nonrefundable, one-time payment for the additional cost of
installing taller poles. Contact the PG&E project coordinator for more
information. In addition, applicants should work with the PG&E project
coordinator to choose a route for the overhead distribution facilities that
does not conflict with the orchard trees and eliminates the need for future
vegetation pruning.
When planting near overhead electrical service drops, applicants also must
consider safety and access to the electric facilities when irrigation pumps
and other electrical loads require repair.

4.10.6. Removing Vegetation Near Existing, High-Voltage, Energized

Lines

CAUTION
Because safety is the Company’s highest priority, PG&E recommends
that all vehicles, equipment, tools, and people maintain a minimum
10-foot distance from all high-voltage power lines. Refer to Section 1,
“General,” Table 1-2, “Minimum Safe Working Distances (Scaffolds,
Equipment, Tools, Structures, and People),” and Table 1-3, “Minimum
Safe Working Distances (Boom-Type Lifting or Hoisting Equipment),”
both on Page 1-9, for the minimum safe working distances.
Applicants or unqualified tree-trimming contractors should never attempt
to trim or remove trees that are within 10 feet of high-voltage power lines
(i.e., conductors).
If it is necessary to trim or remove trees located within 10 feet of a
high-voltage power line, applicants must notify PG&E at 1-800-743-5000.
Generally, high-voltage power lines are any overhead lines that connect
from pole to pole. These lines typically are 600 volts and greater. Post a
“HIGH VOLTAGE” sign on the poles or crossarms, as shown in
Figure 4-45, “High-Voltage Marker on Poles and Crossarms,” on
Page 4-31. However, applicants should contact PG&E for assistance if a
line’s voltage is unknown, and should always assume that lines are high
voltage.
During PG&E’s normal tree-trimming schedule, contractors qualified to
perform high-voltage line clearances will prune or remove trees at no cost
to applicants to create a safe distance between the vegetation and
high-voltage power lines.

2017 4-30
 Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

If it is necessary to trim a tree that is closer than 10 feet from an overhead

power line before PG&E’s normal tree-trimming schedule, applicants may
hire a contractor qualified to perform high-voltage line clearances to prune
the tree to a safe distance away from the electric lines. Again, unqualified
persons should not perform this job. Applicants should contact PG&E to
obtain the tree-trimming schedules for their areas.
There are regulations and statutes that dictate the requirements for working
around high-voltage power lines. The California Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (Cal/OSHA) requires that persons working within
certain distances of overhead power lines be qualified and trained properly.
For details, see the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Division 1,
Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, Group 2, “High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders,”
Article 37, “Provisions for Preventing Accidents Due to Proximity to
Overhead Lines,” and Article 38, “Line Clearance Tree Trimming
Operations.”
In addition, the California Penal Code makes it a crime for any person to
work within 6 feet of a high-voltage power line. For details and
additional information about this misdemeanor, see the California Penal
Code, Part 1, Title 10, Section 385(b).

“HIGH VOLTAGE”
Marker

or

“HIGH VOLTAGE”
Marker

Figure 4-45
High-Voltage Marker on Poles and Crossarms
F

For PG&E-recommended and PG&E-prohibited trees, see the the

tree-planting matrix tables (Table B-1 through Table B-7 starting on
Page B-2) in Appendix B.

4-31 2017
Section 4, Electric Service: Overhead

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 4-32
SECTION 5 ELECTRIC METERING: GENERAL
ELECTRIC METERING:
SECTION 5

GENERAL
SECTION 5 ELECTRIC METERING: GENERAL
 Section 5
Electric Metering: General

5.1. Scope

This section of the manual is designed to help applicants, engineers, and contractors
plan acceptable electric metering installations for the electric service supplied by
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E/Company). The information and
requirements described are applicable to Section 6 through Section 11.
For help with determining the service rating of customer equipment see
Subsection 1.14. located on Page 1-12.
NOTE: See new service and current transformer (CT) installation requirements in
Subsection 5.2.4., “Requirements for the Installation of Secondary
Terminations (0−600 Volt) in Metering Equipment Requiring CTs,” on
Page 5-4.

5.2. General Conditions and Responsibilities

5.2.1. Approved Metering and Service Termination Equipment

All service termination and metering equipment must conform to nationally
recognized standards and meet all applicable certification requirements.
Nationally recognized standard organizations include, but are not limited to,
the following: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National
Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or Occupational Safety &
Health Administration’s (OSHA’s) Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) Program. The equipment also must meet the
requirements specified in the Electric Utility Service Equipment
Requirements Committee (EUSERC) manual and be approved by PG&E
for use in construction projects.
NOTE: Employees perform an onsite field inspection of the equipment and
installation and provide final approval only after ensuring that all of
the specified requirements have been met.

5.2.2. Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service

Termination Equipment
Applicants must meet the requirements in Item A. through Item D., below
and on Page 5-2, when installing electric metering and service termination
equipment. This applies to residential and nonresidential applications and
includes meter panels, pedestals, panelboards, and switchboards that are
wall-mounted, pad-mounted, pole-mounted, or on panel board construction.
A. Submit drawings for equipment with current ratings of 320 amperes (amps)
or above to PG&E in triplicate (i.e., either paper copies or electronically)
for review and pre-approval by the local meter shop personnel or meter
specialist.

5-1 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

B. Also, submit drawings for newly designed metering equipment or for

equipment that has been modified from existing designs as shown in the
Greenbook or EUSERC manuals. This applies to metering equipment of
any current rating. Drawings must be sent to the Meter Engineering
Department for review. The review process could take 6 months or
longer.
C. Ensure that submittals contain specific references from either the
EUSERC manual, this Electric and Gas Service Requirements
(Greenbook) manual, or both. When using Greenbook references,
include the applicable subsection(s), figure(s), and page number(s).
For EUSERC references, use the drawing and sheet numbers.
D. Ensure that submittals contain specific references for each component
or section included with the equipment. Provide a detailed summary of
the specification information in the beginning of the submittal, as well
as on all equipment figure drawings in the submittal.

5.2.3. Applicant Responsibilities

The applicant must provide, install, own, and maintain the following
equipment and structures listed in Item 5.2.3.A. through Item 5.2.3.G.,
starting below.
A. All meter sockets and enclosures, metering transformer cabinets, and
switchboard service sections intended for utility use, unless PG&E
permits a specific exception.
B. Use only ring-type meter sockets, enclosures, switchboards, and other
metering equipment approved both by PG&E and EUSERC.
C. For Overhead Service: Service entrance conductors, conduit, and a
weatherhead to the point of attachment to PG&E’s overhead service
conductors.
D. For Current-Transformer Panels and Switchboards: Lugs, an
underground service-termination pull box, and a separate
current-transformer cabinet and meter box.
E. All Indoor Meter Panels: Individual, residential, or nonresidential
applicants with a meter-panel rating of any size, installed inside a meter
room or inside a building or other type of structure, must follow all of
the requirements described below.
1. Install, own, and maintain a separate, nominal, 2-inch diameter
conduit with pull tape inside. The conduit and pull tape must extend
from the meter panel or switchboard and terminate in a NEMA 3R,
6-inch x 6-inch x 6-inch enclosure located 8 feet to 10 feet above
grade on the outside surface of the building.
2. Follow the applicable requirements in PG&E Bulletin
TD-7001B-005, “SmartMetert Electric Network Requirements for
Indoor Meter Rooms and High-Rise Building Construction,”
located in Appendix B.

2017 5-2
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

3. Do not use the conduit. The conduit is for PG&E’s metering

equipment only. See additional requirements in Item 5.2.3.G.
below.
F. All Indoor or Outdoor Meter Panels: Individual, nonresidential
applicants with a meter-panel rating of 500 kW or greater must install,
own, and maintain a separate, nominal, 1/2-inch diameter conduit with
pull tape inside. The conduit and pull tape must extend from the
telephone service location and terminate in the meter section of the
electric panel.
EXCEPTION: Approved meter−panel locations that have adequate
wireless radio frequency (RF) signal capabilities may be exempted from
installing the 1/2-inch phone line conduit. To request a variance,
customers must submit switchboard and meter-panel drawings with the
jobsite address to their local project coordinator early in the service
application process. The project coordinator submits this information to
the PG&E local meter shop, enabling PG&E employees to make a field
determination as to whether or not the conduit should be required.
Without an exemption from the meter shop, the 1/2-inch conduit is
required and must be installed.
NOTE: A 500 kW minimum, 3-phase (∅) meter panel is defined as one
of the following:
• 277/480 volts, 4-wire wye, and minimum 800 amps
• 120/208 volts, 4-wire wye, and minimum 1,600 amps
• 120/240 volts, 3-wire delta, and minimum 1,600 amps
• 120/240 volts, 4-wire delta, and minimum 1,600 amps
• 2,400–21,000 volts, primary service, any size
G. Conduit installed in the ground, floors, ceilings, walls, or concrete must
be made of rigid steel. In any other installation location, the conduit
type can be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or better. For underground
installations, the conduit must exit the pad on the outside of the
switchgear…not inside the switchgear. See Figure 5-5, “Preferred
Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels and
Switchboards,” on Page 5-14.
H. For recommendations on the best locations for equipment, ask your
project coordinator to contact PG&E’s electric metering department.
Questions may include the prime location for a phone interface box, the
required point for conduit to exit the meter room or building, or your
options in a remote location when a telephone line is unavailable.
I. Transformers rated at 120/240 volts, three-phase, 4-wire, with
delta-connected service installed, must have the “high leg” (e.g., power
leg, stinger leg) conductor located either in the center phase or on the
right phase position. This conductor usually is designated as the “C”
phase for metering purposes. Mark (i.e., identify) the conductor
(e.g., high leg, power leg, stinger leg) properly. The color orange is
typically used for this purpose.

5-3 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

On all self‐contained services, the power leg must be located in the

far‐right phase position, usually designated as the “C” phase. Mark
(i.e., identify) the conductor (e.g., high leg, power leg, stinger leg)
properly. The color orange is typically used for this purpose.
J. Applicant wiring that extends from the distribution section (i.e., branch
circuits) must not pass through any PG&E-sealed section.
K. Single-metered applicants with single-phase services above 400 amps
should consider installing a switchboard as described in Section 10,
“Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts.”

5.2.4. Requirements for Installing Secondary Terminations (0−600 Volts) in

Metering Equipment Requiring CTs
All non-PG&E personnel (e.g., applicant installers) who install, inspect, or
supervise the installation of PG&E services, and all PG&E personnel who
schedule, install, inspect, or supervise the installation of services and
metering work, must follow the new construction requirements for
installing secondary terminations at customer switchboards or meter panels
when 600 V metering CTs have not been installed.
Non-PG&E personnel installing approved PG&E service-entrance
conductors must contact the local PG&E project coordinator and request
that the CTs be installed before the service-entrance conductors are
installed (usually 1−2 weeks before).
To ensure the safety of field metering personnel, CTs must be installed on
new services before the service conductors are terminated in the utility pull
section. To prevent the secondary voltage from being energized
inadvertently before the CTs are installed, all personnel should know and
follow the instructions below:
A. Do not terminate/land secondary cable at the customer panel until
PG&E metering personnel install CTs.
B. Schedule the CT installation before constructing/installing secondary
terminations.
C. If secondary terminations are installed or terminated, and CTs are
not set, either establish a “Visible Open” to isolate the secondary
terminations for metering personnel, or install shunts/grounds.
DO NOT PERFORM either of the actions described above before
metering personnel install the CTs (as described in the Protective
Grounding Manual, Section 4B.4.2.A.2) on Page 4B-29.
1. A “Visible Open” (see Subsection 5.2.4.C. above) is defined in one
of the two following ways:
• Overhead Construction: Open cutouts, primary jumpers
not installed, OR secondary cable terminations isolated.
• Underground Construction: Fuses removed
(e.g., bayonet fuses at pad-mount or subsurface
transformer) OR secondary cable terminations isolated.

2017 5-4
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

NOTE: An open secondary breaker is not considered a “Visible Open.”

Refer to the following PG&E documents for detailed instructions about
installing secondary terminations (0−600 volt) in metering equipment
requiring CTs:
• TD-2424B-002, “New Construction Requirements for Installation of
Secondary Terminations in Customer Panels Requiring Current
Transformer (CT) Installation”
• TD-2424P-01, “Distribution Transformer Operations”
• TD-6301B-001, “Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers”
• TD-6301P-01, “Electric Metering–Safe Work Procedures”
Attachment 1, “Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers”
Non-PG&E personnel can contact their local PG&E project coordinators to
request copies of the PG&E documentation listed above.
EXCEPTION: The requirement that PG&E service conductors be
installed before PG&E metering personnel install CTs does
not apply to the underground, wall-mounted meter panels shown in
Figure 6-4, “Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer
Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1Ø or 3Ø,” and Figure 7-3,
“Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 1Ø or 3Ø).” For this specific type of meter panel,
the CTs must be installed before the service because the meter wiring and
test switch block the service termination area. In this case, validate or create
a controllable open point on the source and load side of the metering
section.

5.2.4.1. PG&E’s Responsibilities

PG&E provides, installs, owns, and maintains all meters and metering
transformers for full-service applicants. For direct access applicants,
refer to Direct Access Standards for Metering and Meter Data
(DASMMD) in California (March 1999).
5.3. Electric Meters: General Location Requirements
To determine the most satisfactory meter location and to ensure that adequate
space is provided for the meter, consult a PG&E project coordinator in the
project’s preliminary planning stage. All equipment clearance and working space
requirements must be met.
When an electric panel is being relocated or replaced, and PG&E’s existing service
conductor will be used, as determined by PG&E, the panel must be positioned so
the service conductor can be reconnected properly. The existing service conductor
must be able to be reconnected to the underground electric panel termination lugs
or the external service-entrance conductors coming out of the weatherhead for
overhead services. If PG&E needs to install additional service conductors or
cables to perform the reconnect, the work and material would be at the applicant’s
expense. PG&E does not accept cable-termination techniques using pin adaptors,
cable ringing, or splicing on additional cable.

5-5 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

The local PG&E meter shop must approve remote meter locations before
applicants locate meters away from (i.e., remote from) termination
enclosures. Applicants must submit a drawing that shows the distance (in feet)
and the accessible path to the remote meter location. Also, describe the size and
type of conduit used to attach to the remote meter.
See Figure 6-5, “Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer
Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly, 201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and
201 Amps−800 Amps, 1∅,” on Page 6-8, as an example of remote metering.
Applicants can avoid the time and expense of installing additional facilities or
relocating existing facilities by consulting with PG&E early in the process.

5.3.1. Basic Meter Location Requirements

The following five lettered items explain PG&E’s basic meter location
requirements and are subject to PG&E’s review and approval to ensure
compliance. Applicants must ensure that:
A. Locations have at least one clear and unobstructed path or entrance
providing access to the working space.
B. Nonportable illumination is provided for the working spaces around
meters, metering-related equipment, and associated facilities when
meters are located indoors. Also, applicants must provide a hallway or
aisle leading to the meter(s) and metering equipment.
C. Locations in elevated areas (e.g., balconies or mezzanines) or in
depressed areas (e.g., basements, cellars, or underground rooms) must
be accessible by either a ramp or clear stairway that conforms to
building-code requirements.
D. PG&E has provided advanced approval when potential locations are not
in conflict with prohibited meter locations and are on walkways, alleys,
or driveways that provide access to commercial or industrial property.
PG&E may grant exceptions if other suitable locations are not available.
E. PG&E personnel have full access to inspect, read, or test metering
facilities, whether the facilities are located indoors or outdoors.
Applicants must ensure that all metering and service facilities are
accessible and free of obstacles at all times when the metering
equipment is energized. Applicants must maintain these accesses both
during and after landscaping activities, fence installations, building
construction, building renovation, remodeling activities, etc.

2017 5-6
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3.2. Prohibited Meter and Service Equipment Locations

The following locations are not acceptable for electric meters and service
termination equipment.
A. Locations deemed hazardous to either personnel or equipment, or
locations found to be unsuitable for entry. These locations include:
1. Inside any residence.
2. Directly over any stairway, ramp, or steps.
3. Any area where personnel may contact either exposed, high-voltage
conductors or equipment in motion.
4. Any area that is accessible only through a trapdoor.
5. Any elevator shaft.
6. Any doorway, hatchway, or drive-through pathway designed for
picking up goods through a window, where opening the meter panel
blocks the through-area.
7. Areas where entry may be restricted or controlled because of
medical, health, environmental, or other safety-related issues.
8. Any area in close proximity to a lake or water area. These locations
are unsuitable when the meter faces the water.
B. Underground vaults or enclosures.
C. Areas where vibration, moisture, excessive temperature, fumes, or dust
may damage the meter or interfere with its operation.
D. Areas within or requiring access through any restroom, bathroom,
shower, powder room, toilet, or private-type room.
E. Portions of buildings where landscaping, fencing, or other construction
activities will make the meter inaccessible.
F. Inside garages for single-family residences.
G. In a metallic cabinet (including doors), room, enclosure, or location that
blocks or interferes with the radio frequency signal transmissions that
are necessary for PG&E to operate its SmartMeter™ Advanced Meter
Reading system. This applies only to meter panels that meet all of the
following criteria.
• Single metered
• Less than 400 amps continuous rating
• Wall mounted
H. In a room, utility closet, or area where metering facilities or termination
enclosures are less than 3 feet away from any water source such as
pipes, valves, fire sprinklers or equipment, or other wet facility.

5-7 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.3.3. Locating and Grouping Multiple Meters

When it is practical, PG&E will supply two or more meters from one
service and will group the meters at one location Also, see Section 2,
“Gas Service,” Subsection 2.3.5., “Multiple Buildings Located on One
Lot,” on Page 2-15, and Section 3, “Electric Service: Underground,”
Subsection 3.2.5., “Installing Overhead and Underground Service for
Two or More Buildings on One Lot,” on Page 3-4.

5.3.4. Electric Meter Rooms

Applicants must ensure that meter rooms meet the following requirements.
NOTE: Meter rooms may be used for communications equipment.
A. Meter room specifications must be approved during the initial stages of
construction. Submit drawings to your local project coordinator for the
planner’s review and for review by the local meter shop.
B. Designs must include a designated room for electric service, meters, and
metering equipment.
C. Meter rooms must be clear of obstructions and located inside of
buildings on the ground floor or below the ground floor. High-rise
buildings can have meter rooms above the ground floor.
D. Meter rooms must have a doorway that opens 90 degrees or more to the
outside of the building or into an area that is available to the public.
E. Meter rooms must have a clear and safe working space as described in
Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-12, and
Subsection 5.4.5., “Barricades,” on Page 5-15.
F. Meter rooms must not include gas meters.
G. Meter rooms may be locked if the applicant provides PG&E with
independent access to the room. Consequently, the meter room must be
locked in one of the following ways.
1. Using a double-lock arrangement, provided by the applicant, with
one lock for the applicant and one lock for PG&E.
2. Using an acceptably located key box, provided and installed by
PG&E, to hold the applicant’s key.
H. Meter rooms must be identified by appropriately marking the doors or
doorways as described in Subsection 5.5.1., “Properly Identifying and
Marking Meters,” on Page 5-15.
I. Meter rooms must have conduit(s) and pull tape installed as described in
Subsection 5.2.1, “Applicant Responsibilities,” on Page 5-1 through
Page 5-3.
J. Designed and constructed with a means to adequately discharge any
excess water that may enter the room from the conduit system.

2017 5-8
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4. Meter Heights, Clearances, Enclosures, and Protection

5.4.1. Meter Heights

A. Pole-, Pad-, and Wall-Mounted Meters
When installing meter enclosures on a pole, on a wall, or on a
pad-mounted structure, applicants must ensure that the meters meet the
following requirements, except when installing metering equipment on
poles for communication services. In that situation, follow the
requirements in 5.4.1.B. on Page 5-9. All metering and
service-termination facility installations are subject to PG&E review
and approval. The meter height must be measured to the horizontal
centerline of the meter axis.
1. PG&E’s preferred meter height is 66 inches for all individual
service-termination and meter-panel installations. All electric
meters must be located 75 inches maximum above the ground or
standing surface. The minimum meter heights are listed below.
• Meters installed in self-contained panels rated up to 320 amps
must be a minimum of 48 inches.
• Meters installed in outdoor transformer-rated panels 400 amps
and above must be a minimum of 60 inches. This applies to
wall-mounted and panel board construction.
2. When meters either are enclosed in a cabinet or installed indoors in
a meter room, the maximum meter height is the same as for
outdoor installations, or 75 inches. The minimum meter height
must be 36 inches as measured from the ground or standing surface
to the centerline of the meter.
3. For switchboard service with a current transformer (CT)
compartment, the maximum meter height is 72-1/2 inches, as
illustrated in Section 10, Figure 10-25, “Standard Switchboard
Service Section With CT Compartment and Filler Panel, 0 Volts
Through 600 Volts,” on Page 10-34. This applies both to indoor and
outdoor installations.
4. In locations where snow accumulates, PG&E may require the
minimum installed meter height to be increased. Specific
meter-height requirements depend on the meter’s location. Ask
your local PG&E project coordinator to consult the electric meter
department for specific meter-height requirements in
snow-accumulation areas.
B. Pole-Mounted Communication Service and Meter Equipment
Applicants must ensure that communication service and meter
equipment installed on PG&E or joint poles is placed so the bottom of
the enclosure is a minimum of 7 feet to a maximum of 8 feet from the
finished grade. If it is not possible to meet the height requirements,
install a meter pedestal. Ask your PG&E project coordinator for
Numbered Document 027911,“Installation Details for Service to
Pole-Mounted Communication Equipment,” for specific requirements.

5-9 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.2. Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances

Applicants must ensure that meter cabinet enclosures are large enough to
provide easy access to the meter and have an adequate working space for
maintaining the meter. The cabinet requires a side-hinged door that can be
latched open at 90° or more. Also, the enclosure and service equipment
must comply with local code requirements. Detailed dimensional
requirements are shown in Figure 5-1, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure
Clearances,” and Table 5-1, “Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance
Dimensions,” both below.
Applicants also must ensure that meter cabinet enclosures are maintained
and work properly. In corrosive areas a fiberglass enclosure is
recommended to help prevent deterioration of the metallic equipment.
Finally, applicants must ensure that when a cabinet enclosure is
pad-mounted, a 3-foot clearance is maintained between the edge of the pad
and the base of the pole.

B B
A C C Optional Plastic
CL Window in Door
Meter Used for Meter
Reading
D Socket D

Door
Door

Side View Front View

Figure 5-1
Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearances

Table 5-1 Meter Cabinet Enclosure Clearance Dimensions

Dimension A 11-inch minimum / 15-inch maximum. See Note 1 below.
Dimension B 9-inch minimum to the edge of the access opening.
Dimension C 10-inch minimum to the edge of the access opening.
8-inch minimum from the meter centerline to the top of any protrusion below
Dimension D
the meter or to the bottom of the enclosing cabinet.
1. The 11-inch minimum for Dimension A may be reduced to 8 inches only for residential, wall-mounted, meter cabinet
enclosures.

2017 5-10
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.3. Meter Set Clearance Requirements

Figure 5-2, “Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and
Clearances,” found below, represent various metering facilities’ clearance
requirements. If applicants install enclosures on their premises, the
enclosures must meet the specifications provided in these illustrations.

Openable
Window

30” Min. to 12” Min. to Electric Meter -

Building Outside Building Alternate Location
Corner Corner (See Notes 1 and 2)

Electric Meter
(See Notes 1 and 2) 6” Min.
No Wire in Shaded Area to Inside
(See Note 2) Building Corner 10’
Min
M

36” Minimum 36” Minimum CL

75” Max.
66” Preferred From Center of From Center of 12” Minimum
48” Min. Riser to Edge of Riser to Edge from Electric
Panels of Panels Service Conduit
12” Minimum Service Tee (See Note 3) Communications
CL
from Electric Enclosure
Service Conduit PG&E
SmartMeter (See Note 2)
Communications
Enclosure −
Alternate Location 26”
(See Note 2) Gas Riser
Gas Meter Finished Grade
(See Note 3)
(See Note 3)

See Figure 2-20 and Note 3 on Page 2-33

Figure 5-2
Electric and Gas Meter Set Separation Dimensions and Clearances

Notes in reference to Figure 5-2.

1. Electric meter-panel locations are subject to utility approval and must comply with the applicable code
requirements. PG&E does not have specific requirements for the distance from the electric panel to the
outside building corner. See Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,” for properly locating the electric
meters. See Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-12, for electric meter working space.
2. Applicants must not install any electrical devices or equipment, including wires, cables, metering
enclosures, and telecommunication enclosures, bond wires, clamps, or ground rods within the shaded
area around the gas meter. The 36-inch distance can be reduced to 18 inches for electrical devices or
equipment certified for NEC Class I, Division 2 locations.
3. See Figure 2-19, Notes 3 and 4, on Page 2-32, regarding gas facilities.
4. Applicants must not install water spigots, lines, gutter systems, or other sources of above-ground water to
within 36 inches of the gas or electric facilities.

5-11 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.4. Working Space

Working space is defined as the whole area in front of the meter panel,
the meter enclosure, the CT section, the service-conductor pulling or
termination enclosure, or associated equipment. A working space
permits access to the equipment and provides a safe working environment
for personnel.
A working space must be located entirely on the applicant’s property.
Ask your local project coordinator to contact the PG&E electric meter
department to review and approve of any exceptions to the Company’s
requirements for metering work spaces and locations.
The working space must be clear, level, and unobstructed at all times.
See the descriptions below and the minimum required dimensions in
Table 5-2 below.
In flood plains or other areas where elevated platforms are required in front
of the meter, install permanent safety rails. The platform must be approved
by the local metering department and meet specific PG&E requirements.
Wall-Mounted: For meter panels and service equipment the working space
is 30 x 36 x 75 inches. See Figure 5-3, “Semi-Flush Meter Installation,”
and Figure 5-4, “Enclosed Meter Installation,” both on Page 5-13.
Floor-Standing (Pad-Mounted): For 600 volt switchboards, metering
enclosures, and service termination equipment rated over 225 amps, the
working space is 48 inches deep by 102 inches high. For switchgear
601–25,000 volts, the working space depth is 96 inches. The width is the
same dimensional width as the section. Measure the depth from the outside
of the equipment’s outer door. Concrete floors, housekeeping pads, and
elevated platforms must extend out in front of the whole area to the
minimum depth. See Figure 5-5 on Page 5-14 for additional requirements.

Table 5-2 Working Space Dimensional Requirements1

Voltage Meter/Service Dimensions (Inches)
Figure(s)
(Volts) Equipment Type Width Depth Height
Wall-Mounted 30 36 75 5-3 & 5-4
Wall-Mounted
See Note 2 36 75 NA
Inside Closet
0−600
Same as
Floor Standing
enclosure 48 102 5-5
(Pad-Mounted)
section
Same as
Floor Standing
601−25,000 enclosure 96 102 5-5
(Pad-Mounted)
section
1 Pad-mounted meter pedestals up to 200 amps require a 30 x 36 x 75-inch work space.
2 Thewidth of the working space is the width of all metering equipment (connected or
stacked) plus a minimum of 10 inches on the right and left sides. Closet doors must
open a minimum 90 degrees and not reduce the working space in front of the metering
equipment.

2017 5-12
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Nearest Inside 10” Obstruction

Nearest Inside 10” Corner or Other Min. Above Meter
Corner or Other Min. Obstruction Obstruction
Obstruction Above Meter
9” Min.
9” Min.
See
75”* Min. Figure 5-1
Semi-Flush Working Door and
75”* Min. Space (Open) Table 5-1
Working Meter
Installation Height Enclosed for Meter
Space Cabinet
Height Meter
Installation Enclosure
Clearances
Clear and Level Clear and Level
Workspace Workspace
30” Min. 36” Min.
30” Min. 36” Min.
Property Line
Property Line or Obstruction
or Obstruction Note: To allow the cabinet door to open fully
* 78” minimum for installations other (90° or more), increase the 30” minimum-width
than individual, field-installed meter dimension of the meter working space, as
panels. Increase the working-space necessary.
height for installations greater than Figure 5-4
66”. Enclosed Meter Installation
Figure 5-3
Semi-Flush Meter Installation

5-13 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

2” Conduit Route To Outside

of Building (See Note 2.)

Terminate 2” SmartMeter
Conduit on Top

Terminate 1/2” Conduit On The

Inside Between Meter-Panel
Minimum See Doors.
Working Space Detail A
Height Is 75”
Or 12” Above
Top Of
Switchboard.
Whichever Is
Greater
(See Detail B and Note 3.) 1/2” Conduit To Telephone Service
Table 5-2 Table 5-2 Location (See Note 2)
(See Note 1 & 4) (See Note 1 & 4)

Figure 5-5
Preferred Location of Conduits for Indoor and Outdoor Meter Panels and Switchboards

(See Notes 3 & 4)

Switchboard

Bottom
Frame
If > 2” Extend
Pad Out To 48” If > 2” Extend Pad Out To 48”

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Detail A ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Detail B
Finished
Grade

Notes in reference to Figure 5-5.

1. A level, concrete structure (e.g., floor, pad) must extend out the minimum required distance in front
of all sections to which PG&E requires access. This structure is used for floor-standing equipment
(e.g., switchboard, termination enclosure). See Subsection 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-12.
2. A 1/2-inch phone-line conduit may be required for all indoor and outdoor meter panels rated 500 kW
or greater. See Item E. and Item F. in Subsection 5.2.3., “Applicant Responsibilities,” on Page 5-2.
A 2-inch SmartMeter™ conduit is required only for indoor, wall-mounted or pad-mounted meter-panel
enclosures of any size.
3. The switchboard’s bottom horizontal support frame must not protrude more than 3 inches above the
floor or pad. This is in front of all PG&E sections (see Detail B).
4. The front edge of the switchboard must not be set back more that 2 inches either from the edge of a pad
raised above ground or above the floor. This is for all PG&E sections.

2017 5-14
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.4.5. Barricades
In some instances, a meter may be located in an area where the meter or
working space is exposed to vehicles or hazardous conditions. In these
cases, a permanent barricade outside of the working space is required. For
vehicular traffic, applicants must ensure that a suitable barricade is erected.
A suitable barricade for vehicular traffic is concrete-filled steel pipes,
3 inches or greater in diameter, securely set in an adequate concrete pad for
support. Also suitable for these conditions is a sleeve-mounted vehicle
barricade where the sleeves are set in concrete.
Applicants also must ensure that suitable barricades are erected to protect
personnel. A suitable barricade for this purpose is a heavy, wire-mesh
fencing that is securely supported and is capable of protecting people from
the hazards created by the moving parts of stationary machinery.
Contact your local PG&E inspector and project coordinator to determine if
a barricade is required.

5.4.6. Meter Protection

Applicants must ensure that meters and metering equipment are enclosed
in a protective cabinet in the following situations. Meter heights less than
36 inches are not allowed.
A. For all installations, when the meter is less than 48 inches high, as
measured from the horizontal centerline of the meter to the standing
surface. Meter heights less than 36 inches are not allowed.
B. When the meter is mounted on, or recessed in, any wall at a school or
similar establishment and public safety is an issue.
C. When environmental problems are anticipated.
D. When corrosion problems are anticipated or present.
E. When vandalism is anticipated.
Any protective structure surrounding meters and metering equipment must
be pre-approved by the local meter shop and provide safe working
conditions as determined by PG&E. Approval from the local authority
having jurisdiction may also be required.

5.5. Meter Identification and Seals

5.5.1. Properly Identifying and Marking Meters

Where individual meters serve a remote location, or where meters are
grouped at a common location (both residential and nonresidential),
applicants must ensure that they mark sites and identify meters properly.
Applicants must ensure that each individual meter position, its service
disconnecting means, and the unit or dwelling being served is marked
clearly and permanently. Three of the examples on the following page
describe acceptable permanent markings and one describes unacceptable
markings.

5-15 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

A. Preferred: An identification plate attached by screws, rivets, or

weatherproof adhesive.
B. Non-preferred but acceptable: Paint that cannot be removed using
common solvents. Apply the paint using a stencil.
C. Non-preferred but acceptable: Manufactured decals that will not peel
or fade due to environmental (e.g., sun, weather) conditions.
D. Unacceptable: Tape-type and label-maker stick-on labels; hand-written
lettering (sharpie, paint stick, etc.).
The identification must be legible. It must include a specific apartment
number, a street number, use, or location. Ensure that the information is
verified. A store name or other generic description may be included, but
does not constitute acceptable identification when used alone. For meters
that serve pumps or other large equipment, the ampacity rating of the
service disconnecting means (i.e., breakers, fuses) along with the type of
equipment and the nameplate rating must also be marked. PG&E will
not install meters without a permanent address or location mark at each
meter location.
When it is appropriate, applicants should include the area being served by
the meter when permanently marking the site.
PG&E may make an exception to the rules for permanent marking when
the Company is requested to set a meter for a single-family home that is
under construction. In this case, PG&E will set the meter if the home’s
address is noted clearly and legibly either on the street side of the dwelling
or on the lot in front of the dwelling. PG&E understands that during
construction, the “permanent” address sometimes is not available when the
dwelling is ready for the meter to be set.

5.5.2. Sealing Meters and Metering Equipment

PG&E seals all meters and enclosures for utility meters, metering
equipment, and service-entrance equipment using PG&E’s seals.

Applicants cannot locate or install equipment within meter sections,

meter panels, switchboard sections, or equipment enclosures with
existing PG&E seals unless they receive authorization from the
PG&E electric meter group.

EXCEPTION: Equipment that provides access for replacing over-current

protection fuses is exempted.
Only an authorized PG&E representative can break the PG&E seal.
Certified meter service providers (MSPs) also will seal all meters and
enclosures for meters, metering equipment, and test-bypass switches owned
by their respective companies with their companies’ seals, as described in
the DASMMD in California (March 1999) document.

2017 5-16
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.5.3. Locking Provisions

All transformer-rated and all three-phase installations must have provisions
for sealing or locking all of the main service switches or breakers in a
permanent (off) position. When installing service equipment of any phase
or ampacity that contains multiple service (disconnect) switches, the
applicant must ensure that provisions for locking each individual service
(disconnect) switch are provided. The applicant must ensure that the
locking mechanism is a permanent installation and that the clip, with a hole
for the lock shaft, is made of a rigid metal. The breaker or switch covers can
be nonmetallic. Finally, the applicant must ensure that these provisions are
sealable and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16-inch lock shaft.

5.6. Meter Types and Connections

The following requirements refer specifically to meter types and connections.

Applicants must follow the guidelines listed below.
A. When installing a new service, ensure that the panel enclosures rated at
125 amps are Class 100 ampere services. Services and enclosures rated at
225 amps are Class 200 ampere services.
B. Ensure that transformer-rated meters have a current rating of less than
100 amps (e.g., CL5, CL10, or CL20).
C. Do not use K-based (i.e., bolt-in) meters when designing new installations.
Services that need 400 amps (continuous) require current-transformer facilities.
D. Ensure that sockets meet the requirements of UL Standard UL-414, “Standard
for Meter Sockets.”
E. Locate potential taps, including the neutral connection, behind a sealed panel.
F. Ensure that the meter manufacturer designs and fabricates transformer-rated
meter sockets that are installed on hinged panels for back connection.
Applicants should use Table 5-3, “Meter Socket Requirements (Number of Jaws),”
on Page 5-18, to find specific meter-socket requirements and to ensure they
provide the proper equipment.

5-17 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Table 5-3 Meter Socket Requirements (Number of Jaws)

400 Amperes
Service 0−225 Amperes 226−320 Amperes 1
and Above
No. of Transformer
Voltage Phase Self-Contained Self-Contained
Wires Rated
120/240 1 3 4 42 6
120/208 3 1 3 5 — —
120/208Y 3 4 7 — 13 or 15 4
240 5 3 3 5 5 8
120/240 3 4 7 — 13 or 15 4
277/480Y 3 4 7 — 13 or 15 4
1 A socket-based, Class 320-ampere (continuous) meter will be installed on a Class 400 meter panel,
rated at 80% continuous (i.e., 320 amps). Do not use Class 400, bolt-in meters on new installations.
Service rated at 400 amps continuous requires current transformers to be installed.
2 Only use a 4-jaw meter socket for a Class 320-ampere meter for single-phase residential applications.
3 In locations where PG&E maintains a 120/208-volt secondary system, 3-wire, single-phase service,
typically the service is limited to what can be supplied by a main switch or service entrance rating of
225 amps. Single-phase loads that exceed the capacity of a 225-ampere main switch or
service-entrance rating usually are supplied with a 120/208Y-volt, three-phase, 4-wire service.
4 The 15-jaw socket is acceptable, but not required.
5 Limited availability, at PG&E’s discretion. Not for new installations.

2017 5-18
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Figure 5-6, “Connection Diagrams for Self-Contained Meter Sockets,” and

Figure 5-7, “Connection Diagrams for Transformer-Rated Meter Sockets,” below,
show the required connections for self-contained and transformer-rated meters.

Neutral

Line Line Neutral Line

Neutral Top
Terminal

Alternate
6 o’clock Bottom
Position Terminal
Load Load Load
120 Volts−1Ø, 2 Wire 120/240 Volts−1Ø, 3 Wire 120/208 Volts 1Ø−3-Wire Wye

Power
Leg

Line Line Line Line

Neutral Neutral

Load Load Load Load

240 Volts−3Ø, 3-Wire D 480 Volts−3Ø, 3-Wire D 120/240 Volts− 120/208 Volts−3Ø, 4 Wire
(Limited availability, at (Closed to new applicants.) 3Ø, 4 Wire or
PG&E’s discretion. Not 277/480 Volts−3Ø, 4 Wire
for new installations.)
Front Views Shown

Figure 5-6
Connection Diagrams for Self-Contained Meter Sockets

6 Jaw 8 Jaw 13 Jaw 15 Jaw (Optional)

Figure 5-7
Connection Diagrams for Transformer-Rated Meter Sockets

NOTE: PG&E is responsible for wiring transformer-rated meter sockets.

5-19 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.6.1. Using a Meter Socket Adapter for Overhead-to-Underground

Conversion
Applicants may use approved meter socket adapters to convert existing
services. Do not use them to establish new service. For more information,
see PG&E’s Numbered Document 061032, “Residential and Small
Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion.”
Consult a PG&E project coordinator to determine which conversion method
to use. The applicant must ensure that the meter socket adapter’s grounding
strap is connected to the grounded wire within the meter panel.

5.6.2. Installing Non-Allowed and Unauthorized Customer Equipment

Applicants must not install any type of meter-adapter, surge suppressor or
protection device (e.g., TVSS), meter socket adapter, power usage or
recording device, security or monitoring equipment, or similar interface
device in, on, or between the electric revenue meter and meter sockets or
inside any PG&E sealed section, including the instrument transformer
(i.e., CT, PT) or service termination sections. These types of installations
are not allowed and compromises the applicant’s electric service. If safe to
do so, PG&E personnel will remove any customer-owned devices and leave
them on the applicant’s premises if they are discovered.
Only PG&E-approved meter socket adapters used for overhead-to-underground
conversions and residential solar (i.e., photo-voltaic) generation systems are
exempt.

5.6.3. Fire-Pump Connections

PG&E allows the following types of service connections to fire-pump meter
panels or switchboards. The requirements are described below.
A. All fire-pump service connections must be approved by the local city,
county, or state inspecting Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Site
plans and equipment drawings must be submitted to PG&E for
approval.
B. The service disconnect, meter panel, switchboard, or switchgear for
the fire pump must be located in the same electrical room as the
main service meter panel, switchboard or switchgear, and utility
termination section. They cannot be located in another room or
building. When installed outdoors, the equipment must be located next
to each other. They cannot be located in another room or building.
When installed outdoors, the equipment must be located next to each
other.
1. For main switchboard (i.e., secondary) service equipment rated up
to 600 volts, the following types of connections are allowed:
a. A fire-pump service tap installed from the utility termination
section of the main switchboard to the fire-pump meter panel
or switchboard. When fed from a PG&E underground service,
the fire-pump service must be installed in rigid steel conduit
and exit out of the top of the termination section or out of the
upper sides, at least 12 inches above the terminating bus.

2017 5-20
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Do not place a fire-pump service tap in the termination section

in either of the following two situations: (a) When the section
is less than 90 inches high (see Figure 10-24, “Standard
Switchboard Service Section With CT Compartment and Filler
Panel, 0 Volts−600 Volts,” on Page 10-34); or (b) When the
main switchboard is located below grade and has either a high
side or back. (see Figure 10-15, “Switchboard Pull Section,
High Entry,” on Page 10-26, for an illustration of the PG&E
service entry).
b. A fire-pump service connected in a dedicated tap section of the
main switchboard.
If allowed, the local AHJ may require the tap section to be
located away from the main breaker on the opposite side of the
termination section.
c. A fire-pump service connected to the load-side (i.e., after the
main breaker) of the main switchboard.
2. For main switchgear (i.e., primary) service equipment rated
between 601−25,000 volts, the following types of connections are
allowed:
NOTE: Do not place fire-pump service taps or connections in the
utility termination section of a primary switchgear.
a. A fire-pump service connected in a dedicated tap section of the
switchgear.
b. A fire-pump service connected to the load-side (i.e., after the
main breaker) of the main switchgear.
3. For main switchboard or switchgear service termination equipment
rated between 0−25,000 volts, the following type of connection is
allowed:
a. A separate and dedicated utility service that is connected
directly to the fire-pump meter panel, switchboard, or
switchgear. This is usually referred to as a second PG&E
service. (See Figure 5-8, “Fire-Pump Equipment Location and
Service Connection Options,” on Page 5-22.)
C. Proper access and signage is required for meter panels and switchboards
serving fire pumps.
D. Ensure that fire-pump wiring configurations, either 3-wire or 4-wire, are
the same as the wiring configurations for the main switch.

5-21 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Electric Service Termination and Meter Room

For Option #1 Rigid Steel Conduit Must Enter and Exit Out The Top Area Of Sections
For Minimum Separation or
Wall Barrier (Check with AHJ)

Fire-Pump Option #1 Option

Meter Panel or (0−600 Volts) #2 Main Switchboard
Switchboard
and Main
Disconnect
90” Utility
Must Be Located Termination
In Electric Room Section
With Utility
Section and Main Check with AHJ If Fire-Pump
Switchboard Tap Section Is Allowed To
Service Disconnecting Means

PG&E Underground Service

Option #3
PG&E Second
Underground
Service
Dedicated For
Fire Pump

Figure 5-8
Fire-Pump Equipment Location and Service Connection Options

5.7. Main Service Disconnects and Switching Sequences

5.7.1. Main Service Disconnects

For each installed meter, the applicant, in compliance with applicable codes,
must furnish and install a fusible switch, circuit breaker, or other approved
disconnecting means for controlling all of (and only) the energy registered
by that meter. When the governing code or ordinance permits, the
disconnect means may consist of a group of fusible or circuit-breaker
disconnects. PG&E requires access to these disconnects.
For transformer-rated metering equipment, applicants must place the main
service disconnect switch adjacent to the meter. For self-contained metering
equipment, the switch may be located inside or outside of the building
being served, as described in the applicable electrical codes. When the
switch is in another building or location, proper access, signage, and maps
are required.
PG&E prefers applicants to have provisions for individual disconnects
when they use switchboards with multimeter installations.
NOTE: See Paragraph B., in Subsection 1.14., “Determining the Service
Rating,” when more than one disconnecting means is installed.

2017 5-22
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.7.2. Main Service Disconnect Switch Rated for Amperes Interrupting

Capacity (AIC)
State and local codes require the service equipment’s main disconnect
switch and fuse, or the circuit breaker, to be rated at the available
short-circuit current value.
PG&E designs its facilities so that the short-circuit duty at the service
termination will not exceed 10,000-amps symmetrical for new,
single-family, residential applicants that are supplied by an individual
service drop or lateral that is rated at 225 amps or less. This service includes
mobile homes and duplexes.
Typically, it is not feasible for PG&E to design its facilities to limit the
short-circuit duty to 10,000 amps for other electrical services; for example,
a 400-ampere, multimeter, residential or nonresidential installation. For
these installations, on request, PG&E will provide the maximum available
short-circuit current based on the service equipment’s capacity. If the
applicant increases the service equipment’s capacity, the
maximum-available short-circuit current may be higher.

5.7.3. Arc Flash Assessment

PG&E’s electric system is dynamic and continually being reconfigured due
to system needs and general maintenance. Therefore due to its many
variables a range of impedance’s should be considered in an arc flash
assessment. To request an arc flash assessment contact your local project
coordinator.

5.7.4. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers

Electronic circuit breakers using a trip unit are programmable devices that
measure the current flowing through the circuit breaker and initiate a trip
signal, when appropriate. An electronic trip unit has multiple dials that can
be adjusted to various settings. The IR setting is the continuous current
value and must not exceed the ampacity rating of the enclosure. It is similar
to the capacity or ampacity rating on thermal or thermal magnetic circuit
breakers. The IR settings must be indicated on the trip unit. The IR settings
typically are lettered and identified on a chart with the corresponding
ampacity values. Electronic trip units are available with multiple ratings for
each standard frame size.
The circuit breaker frame is the housing that contains the current-carrying and
current-sensing components, along with the tripping and operating mechanism.
The frame size (e.g., 800, 1,200, 1,600 amps) is the largest ampere rating
available in a group of circuit breakers of similar physical configuration. Other
types of breakers may have different frame sizes.

5-23 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Circuit Breaker Frame

Size (may be greater
than switchboard rating)

1200 Amps

Breaker Trip Setting Ampacity Setting

Should Not Exceed Chart for IR Dial
Switchboard Rating

Figure 5-9
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit
Notes in reference to Figure 5-9.
1. Match the letter on the IR dial to which the arrow head is pointing with the letter on the IR setting chart to
determine the ampacity setting for the breaker.

5.7.5. Meter and Main Service Switch Sequence

PG&E places its meters and metering equipment ahead of (i.e., on the supply
side of) the applicant’s main service disconnecting means. Figure 5-10,
“Single Meter With Main Service Switch,” Figure 5-11, “Single Meter With
Multiple Service Switches,” and Figure 5-12, “Multimeter Disconnect
Without Main Switch,” below, all provide examples of this type of
installation. Figure 5-14, “Multiple Remote Switchboard or Meter Panel
Locations,” on Page 5-26, also provides an example of meter and main service
switch sequences for large projects with multiple meter rooms or buildings.

2017 5-24
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

PG&E permits exceptions to this sequence only in circumstances where

applying the electrical code requirements result in the applicant’s main
service disconnect means being installed ahead of PG&E’s metering and
metering equipment. Figure 5-13, “Multimeter Installation With Main
Disconnect Switch,” below, provides an example of this type of installation.
In these instances, an individual disconnect switch also must be installed on
the load side of each meter.
The local jurisdiction having authority for enforcing the electrical code
requirements determines most of the requirements that applicants must
follow when installing their means to disconnect. PG&E requires a main
service disconnect for multimeter installations with more than six meters or
individual service disconnects.
1
Line Line
Service Meter Service Limit of 6 Service
Entrance Meter Entrance Breakers or
Branch Circuit Fuses Switches With
or Circuit Breakers Fuses Permitted
Main Service
Disconnect
Switch or Load
Circuit (Branch Load
Breaker Circuits)
Figure 5-10 Figure 5-11
Single Meter With Main Single Meter With Multiple
Service Switch Service Switches
Service Entrance
Conductor Main Disconnect Possible
Line
Switch or Future
Service Circuit Breaker Meter
Disconnects

Meter
Meter

Load
Service Switches or
Load Circuit Breakers
Load
Figure 5-12 Figure 5-13
Multimeter Installation Without Multimeter Installation With
Main Disconnect Switch Main Disconnect Switch

5-25 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Service Entrance Main Switchboard

Line
PG&E Service
Entrance 6 or Less Service Disconnects or Meters

To Additional or
Future Remote
Switchboards

Main Service
Disconnect
Switch or
Circuit Breaker
Required

7 or More Meters or Individual Service 6 or Less Meters or Individual Service

Disconnects Disconnects
Remote Switchboard or Meter Panels
With Main Disconnect Switch (See Note 1) Remote Switchboard or Meter Panels Without
Main Disconnect Switch (See Note 1)

Figure 5-14
Multiple Remote Switchboard or Meter-Panel Locations

Notes in reference to Figure 5-14.

1. When a switchboard or meter panel is located in a different room, floor, or building from the main switchboard, it
is considered remote.

5.8. Grounding

Applicants must bond and ground their electric services and metering equipment
as required by applicable electrical codes, local ordinances, and PG&E
requirements.
A. Applicants must not use PG&E’s gas facilities as part of the electrical
grounding system.
1. Do not install electrical devices or equipment, wires, cables, bonding or
grounding wires, clamps, or ground rods around the gas meter set as shown
in Figure 2-19 on Page 2-32 and Figure 2-22 on Page 2-35.
2. Do not use PG&E’s gas service piping, gas risers, or meter facilities for
electric bonding or grounding that allows the gas meter, piping, or other
gas facilities to become current-carrying conductors.

2017 5-26
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

3. Do not allow gas pipe to be electrically bonded within meter enclosures,

cabinets, or meter rooms.
B. PG&E supplies single-phase, 120/240-volt and 120/208-volt services and
three-phase, 4-wire wye and delta services with a grounded service neutral
conductor. When PG&E permits a three-phase, 3-wire, 240-volt service, one
phase conductor must be grounded.
C. Applicants must locate the terminations (e.g., ground bus) for their
grounding electrode conductors outside of any section that PG&E seals.
Applicants must ensure that their terminations are designed to permit their
grounding systems to be isolated, when necessary, from PG&E-supplied
services. See “Notes in reference to Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16.,” on
Page 5-28, specifically Note 2, which requires a continuous bond wire when
grounding outside of the PG&E sealed section.
D. As mandated in the applicable sections of the electrical code, applicants may
be required to physically protect their grounding electrode conductor against
mechanical damage. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding
electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel
conduit or armored cladding. Metal conduit must be bonded to an effective,
grounded, fault-current path as described in the electrical code requirements.
E. Applicants must ensure that a grounded neutral connection, which is required
for safety and metering purposes, exists in the PG&E-sealed section and is
terminated in the same enclosure as the grounding electrode conductor.
F. When installing ground rods, applicants must only use approved ground rods
and clamps as described in Numbered Document 013109, “Corrosion Resistant
Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps,” located in Appendix C. For homes
and buildings, an Ufer grounding system using rebar is an acceptable substitute
to the ground-rod method. When ground rods are installed for concrete pads,
refer to Numbered Document 045292, “Concrete Pad for Three-Phase,
Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted Transformers.” When ground rods are installed for
equipment pads other than transformers (e.g., switchboards), install them
according to their application. Finally, when installing ground rods in box pads,
use Numbered Document 064309, “Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers,”
for installation information.
G. To ensure proper access to PG&E facilities during installation and
maintenance, do not attach the bonding and grounding attachments for
communication equipment on or near any PG&E sealed sections of the meter
panel that would restrict access to the panel doors and meter.

5-27 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

Metallic
Service
Conduit
Self Disconnect
and UL-
Contained Enclosure
Approved
Meter
Bonding
Hubs.
L L L L L L See
I O I O I O Notes
2 & 3.
N A N A N A Out to
E D E D E D Load

See the Grounded Neutral

Bonding Wire Conductor Requirements in
See Note 2. Note 1 (below Figure 5-16).

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Grounding Electrode Conductor
Sealed Meter
and Termination Ground Rod or Other Electrode

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
See the Grounded Enclosure
Neutral Conductor
Requirements in Note 1
(below Figure 5-16).

Figure 5-15
Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section−Self Contained Meter

See Service
Note 2. Disconnect
Enclosure
Transformer
Rated
Meter Metallic
Conduit Main
and UL Service
Approved Disconnect
N Bonding
E Hubs. Out to
Current Transformer See Load Load
U
T Mounting Base Furnished Notes
R and Installed by Applicant 2 & 3.
A
L See the Grounded
Bonding Neutral Conductor
Wire See Requirements in
Line Side If PG&E UG Service Note 1 below.
Note 2.
Load Side If PG&E OH Service
Grounding Electrode Conductor

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Sealed Meter
and Termination Enclosure Ground Rod or Other Electrode

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Figure 5-16
Grounding Outside of the Sealed Section−Transformer Rated Meter

Notes in reference to Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16 are required for the safety of workers and the proper operation
of PG&E facilities.
1. It is a requirement that the PG&E neutral conductor be grounded. This can be accomplished by terminating the
neutral conductor to a grounded (i.e., non-insulated) neutral bus or to a ground bus in the service disconnect
switch, as shown in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16. Or if provisions are available, terminate the neutral to a
dedicated ground-rod and electrode conductor used solely for a meter panel more than 6 feet away.
2. An Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC) is required between the PG&E service termination enclosure
(e.g., meter panel) and the service disconnect enclosure. This is accomplished by attaching a bonding wire to the
inside of the enclosures. A metallic conduit with Myers hub fittings that are U.L. certified for bonding also are
required. The conduit and fittings must be approved by PG&E and the local authority having jurisdiction.
3. The metallic conduit diameter size must be equal to, or larger than, the diameter of the maximum knockout
manufactured in the panel. The approved bonding hubs should not extend out past the edges of the meter panel.

2017 5-28
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.9. Temporary Service

5.9.1. Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels

To lessen the potential for damage by staples and nails during the
construction phase, applicants must use only rigid metal conduit (RMC)
in locations where permanent service facilities will be installed and/or
energized before completing the wall. The steel protects the conduit and/or
cables from damage. Applicants also must protect their grounding
conductors against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit or armor
cladding that runs from the main panel to a subterranean location and is
embedded in concrete (e.g., garage). The service facilities and the wall
must be a permanent and stable structure. If couplers are installed they
must be of the same type (RMC) as the conduit. If transitioning from steel
to rigid plastic the coupler must not reduce the internal diameter of the
conduit. Refer to the steel and steel to plastic couplers in Numbered
Document 062288, “Underground Conduits,” located in Appendix C.
The service panel and facilities must meet all PG&E and local jurisdiction
requirements. The service facilities must pass inspection by a PG&E
inspector before being energized.

Socket
Jaws

Meter
Socket

Permanent
Meter
Enclosure

Socket
Spades

Figure 5-18
Typical Plug-In Adapter

Note: Make a neutral connection by

attaching a pigtail directly to the
neutral with a #4 copper wire.

Ground Line

Figure 5-17
Plug-In Temporary Service
s:

5-29 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.9.2. Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal

Applicants must coordinate the connection of pedestal service conductors
with PG&E project coordinators. Before installing temporary-service
metering pedestals, applicants must obtain any inspections and permits that
are required from the local authority having jurisdiction.
Applicants must install temporary-service metering pedestals as shown in
Figure 5-19, “Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal,” below.

PG&E
Meter

75” Max.
66” Preferred
36” Min.

Ground
Line

Splice Box

Front View Side View

Figure 5-19
Temporary-Service Metering Pedestal
s:

2017 5-30
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.9.3. Temporary Plug-In Service

The local inspection authority having jurisdiction must approve all of the
permanent service connections to the main service disconnect before an
applicant installs a temporary service adapter. Additionally, the local
authority having jurisdiction must approve the applicant’s plan for installing
and using temporary service adapters.
Applicants must install temporary plug-in service as shown in Figure 5-17,
“Plug-In Temporary Service,” and Figure 5-18, “Typical Plug-In Adapter,”
both on Page 5-29.

5.10. Connecting Non-Utility Power Sources to Utility Services

By enacting California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, “Environmental

Health,” Part 15, “Miscellaneous Requirements,” Chapter 5, “Electrical Hazards,”
Sections 119075 through 119090, the legislature of the state of California intended
to prevent electricity generated by permanent or portable electric generators from
backfeeding into a utility’s electrical distribution system. In addition, California
Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8, Section 2320.9, “Backfeeding or
Interconnection,” says that electrical power sources, both permanent and
temporary, can not be connected to a premises’ wiring system, or parts of such a
system, unless positive means are used to prevent electricity from being
transmitted beyond the premises’ wiring system, or beyond any intentionally
segregated parts of such a system.
EXCEPTION: The service utility can authorize an interconnection.
A positive means is defined in this CCR subpart as a device that, when used or
operated, interrupts or prevents the flow of current to or from the electrical system.
Also, a positive means provides the device operator or user with a visual or
definite indication of the existing condition or state of the electrical system.
Before installing an applicant-owned and operated generator that may or may not
operate in parallel with PG&E’s system, the applicant must contact a local PG&E
project coordinator for the interconnection requirements specific to the location
where it will be used. PG&E’s Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI)
department may be reached by email at [email protected], or leave a message on their
hotline at 415-972-5676. Also, for interconnection requirements, applicants should
refer to PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook, which is available on
PG&E’s Internet website at
http://www.pge.com/mybusiness/customerservice/nonpgeutility/generateownpower
/distributedgeneration/interconnectionhandbook/index.shtml.
NOTE: See Numbered Document 060559, “Disconnect Switch Requirements
For Distributed Generation Customers,” located in Appendix C, when
customer generation systems are installed on their premises.

5-31 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

5.10.1. Specific Interconnection Requirements for Services Up to

600 Volts
Residential and small commercial applicants with generating facilities on
their premises who want to take advantage of PG&E’s standard net energy
metering (NEM) program must meet the following requirements.
A. Requirements for Small Power Generators (Qualifying
Facilities) and Co-Generation Interconnections Including
NEM Interconnection Installations
Table 5-4, “Requirements For AC Disconnect Switches,” on Page 5-32,
shows the requirements for an alternating current (ac) disconnect.

Table 5-4 Requirements For AC Disconnect Switches

AC
Inverter-Based Generators Phase(s) Disconnect
Required?
Self-Contained Meter Panel, Socket-Based,
Single No 2
320 Amps or Less (Continuous Current Rating) 1
All Other Self-Contained or Transformer-Rated
All Yes
Meter Panels
AC
Non-Inverter-Based Generators Phase(s) Disconnect
Required?
All Self-Contained and Transformer-Rated Meter
All Yes
Panels
1 An ac disconnect is required for all K-base meter panels of any ampacity rating.
2 If an ac disconnect switch is installed, it must be PG&E approved.

A fusible ac disconnect switch is required for generator interconnections

ahead of the main breaker (line/supply side connection) and after the
meter. A nonfusible ac disconnect switch may be installed if the
generation is connected to a dedicated, alternative generation breaker that
came manufactured (e.g., solar ready) with the meter panel. For specific
requirements, refer to PG&E Bulletin TD-6999B-048, “Requirements for
Line Side Interconnections for Distributed Generation,” located in
Appendix B.
As specified in Electric Rule 21, “Generating Facility Interconnections,”
and as required by PG&E, the generating facility must have an ac
disconnect switch that meets the requirements described in Numbered
Document 060559 and listed below.
• Easily accessible by PG&E, when requested.
• Manually and gang operated. Lockable in the “open” position.
• Allows visible verification that an air-gap of separation has occurred.
• Located 10 feet or less from PG&E’s electric meter at the point of
common coupling or interconnection and is seen easily, in line of
sight, from the panel.

2017 5-32
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

• Permanent, approved sign(s) attached at PG&E’s electric revenue

meter’s point of common coupling. A map showing the location of
the ac disconnect switch also may be required.
• Installed in a safe and acceptable location that meets the same
location, height, and working space requirements as a meter panel.
The height is measured from the ground to the top of the switch.
For additional information on disconnect switches and distributed
generation requirements, see the PG&E Distribution Interconnection
Handbook.
B. Virtual Net Energy Metering − VNEM (NEMV)
This program allows qualified participants to install a single solar
system to cover the electricity load of both common and tenant metered
areas connected at the same service delivery point.
This “Electric Schedules” table helps housing owners allocate a solar
system’s electricity to tenants enabling residents to receive the direct
benefits of the building’s solar system without requiring the generator to
be physically connected to each billing meters.
Refer to PG&E Bulletin TD-6999B-005, “Virtual Net Energy Metering
Installations,” included in Appendix B, which explains the requirements
for VNEM installations and illustrates the various metering and
connection options for VNEM projects. Check the PG&E Electric
Schedules website for the latest information on this program.
C. Requirements for Generators That Are Not Permanently
Connected (i.e., Temporary Connections)
Portable electric generators must be connected as described in the
California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5,
Section 119075(b). This code says that any portable electric generator
that can be connected temporarily to an applicant’s electrical system,
and that is supplied typically by an electrical corporation or state or
local public agency, can be connected only after separating the
applicant’s electrical system from that of the electrical corporation or
state or local agency.
This rule applies to any generator connected as a temporary
(i.e., nonroutine, nonscheduled) or emergency source of power.
Connect any portable electric generator that is used periodically as a
source of power, either on an as-needed or scheduled basis, as described
in Subsection 5.10.1.D., below. An example would be a generator used
to provide backup power for equipment maintenance.
D. Requirements for Generators That Are Connected Either
Permanently or Periodically to an Electrical Service and
Used on a Planned, Routine, or Scheduled Basis, but Do Not
Operate in Parallel with the PG&E System.
Generators falling under this category must have a disconnect switch
that is accessible to, and in a location approved by, the serving utility.

5-33 2017
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

These generators must be connected as described in PG&E’s Electric

Rule 2, “Description of Service,” Item E.6, and in the California Health
and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119075(c).
These rules state that any electrical generator that can be permanently
connected to an applicant’s electrical system must be connected only by
means of a double throw switch (see Figure 5-20 on Page 5-34). This
switch isolates the applicant’s electrical system from that of the
electrical corporation or state or local agency.
EXCEPTION: Generators that are designed to run in parallel with the
Generator servicing utility’s system, and that are approved by that utility, are
exempt from these rules.
The double throw switch may be either a manual or automatic transfer
switch meeting the requirements of UL Standard 1008, “Transfer
Switch Equipment.” The switch may be an integral part either of the
generator assembly or of the service facilities, and must be approved by
the authorities having jurisdiction.
Please visit “Electric Generator Safety” (http://www.pge.com/generator/)
for more information. (From PG&E’s home page, click “For My Home,”
then from the “Education & Safety” drop-down box, click on “Gas &
Electric Safety.” On the left side of the page, click “Electric Generator
Safety.”

To Meter

To Main
Fuse Box

To Generator

Figure 5-20
Transfer Switch

NOTE: Ensure that the transfer switch is installed after the meter panel
on the customer’s side, not before the meter panel on the PG&E
side.

2017 5-34
 Section 5, Electric Metering: General

E. Requirements for NEM Revenue Metering With a 4-Wire

System at the Point of Common Coupling
NEM revenue metering that has a 4-wire system at the point of common
coupling also must have a NEM meter panel configured for a 4-wire
system (three phases and a neutral).
When the normal source of voltage supplying PG&E co-generation
metering potentially can be interrupted, PG&E, at its option, may install
metering with an auxiliary source of power at the applicant’s expense.
F. Requirements for Generators Powering 10 kW (or Less),
Stand-Alone, Field-Installed Telecommunication Facilities
and Special Applications
Applicants can own 10 kW (or less) generators used for stand-alone,
field-installed, telecommunication facilities and special applications.
However, PG&E field personnel perform maintenance and routine
testing on electric supply and meter facilities, and must be able to
perform these functions even when applicants are unable to be present.
Therefore, applicants must provide a positive means to prevent their
generators from backfeeding into the utility system. This requires
installing special equipment, as described in the PG&E Distribution
Interconnection Handbook.
Usually, these equipment installations are performed in the field. The
generator or alternate power source either is integrated with or is made a
part of stand-alone equipment and metering facilities. For example, an
applicant could install a double throw switch to isolate his or her
equipment and power supply and prevent electricity from flowing into
the electric metering and supply system.

5.10.2. Warning Statements and Labels for Interconnected Services

California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5,
Section 119080(a), requires that every manufacturer of a portable or
permanent electrical generator that is capable of being connected either
permanently or temporarily to a commercial, industrial, or residential
structure’s electrical system include a warning statement.
The warning statement must be published in the generator’s instruction
manual and a legible warning label must be present on the generator. The
warning statement must contain the requirement of California Health and
Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5, Section 119075, and explain
potential electrical hazards that backfeed can create when it flows into a
utility’s distribution system.
The same warning information must be included in all advertisements
offering portable electrical generators.

5-35 2017
Section 5, Electric Metering: General

California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5,
Section 1190809(b), also requires that portable electrical generators display
a legible warning label on a visible surface of the generator. It goes on to
say that individuals or public agencies can not sell or rent to another person
or public agency, or offer for sale or rent to another person or public agency,
a portable generator that does not have a warning labeled displayed on the
equipment.

5.10.3. Violation
California Health and Safety Code, Division 104, Part 15, Chapter 5,
Section 119090, states that violating the requirements of Section 119075
through Section 119085 is a misdemeanor offense, subject to a fine of not
more than $500.00 or not more than 6 months imprisonment.

5.11. Plug-In Electric Vehicle Interconnections

Residential customers with Plug-In Electric Vehicles (PEVs) can connect the
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) to their residences under PG&E’s
existing “Electric Schedules,” PG&E Bulletin TD-7001B-002, “PG&E Standards
and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle Interconnections,” included in
Appendix B, explains the requirements for installing PEV supply equipment and
illustrates the various metering and connection options to serve PEVs.
Additional PEV information can be found in PG&E’s Plug-in Electric Vehicles
website at http://www.pge.com/electricvehicles/. For questions regarding PG&E’s
PEV requirements, please contact the Building and Renovation Service Center
(BRSC) at 877-743-7782.

2017 5-36
SECTION 6 ELECTRIC METERING: RESIDENTIAL
ELECTRIC METERING:
RESIDENTIAL
SECTION 6
SECTION 6 ELECTRIC METERING: RESIDENTIAL
 Section 6
Electric Metering: Residential

6.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides the Pacific Gas and Electric Company
(PG&E/the Company) service specifications and requirements for residential
electric metering. Also, it describes the required locations for those residential
meters. This section includes specific information that is not covered by the basic
requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General.”

6.2. Residential Electric Service: Specifications and Requirements

PG&E typically provides electricity for residential and commercial applicants

served on a domestic rate schedule with 3-wire, 120/240-volt, single-phase,
60-hertz (Hz), alternating current (ac) service. However, the Company is able to
supply 3-wire, 120/208-volt, single-phase, 60 Hz, ac service at some locations.
This service is limited to a service-entrance rating of 225 amperes (amps).
Applicants should contact their local PG&E project coordinators and ask about the
type of services that are available for their specific locations.
NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” at the
front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed
by area.

6.2.1. Service Classes

The 125-amp-rated panels are classified as Class 100. The 225-amp-rated
panels are classified as Class 200.

6.2.2. Test-Bypass Facilities

For single-phase residential installations, test-bypass facilities may be
provided, but are not required. However, test-bypass facilities are required
for the following installations.
• Single-family residential Service Class 320 meter, or residential meter
panels that are larger than 225 amp, 120/240 volt, single phase, 3-wire.
• Residential meter panels of any size or phase that supply power to
elevators.
• All common and tenant area meter panels of any size or phase, at
multi-residential and live-work buildings with 2 to 5 units, that supply
power to fire alarms or equipment, security alarms, laundry rooms, or
significant interior lighting. Significant interior lighting is for hallways,
storage rooms or areas, and garage areas.
• All common and tenant area meters at multi-residential and live-work
buildings with 6 or more units.

6-1 2017
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.3. Residential Electric Metering Pedestals

Residential electric meter pedestals, as shown in Figure 6-1, “Residential Electric
Metering Pedestal,” below, must have a minimum rating of 100 amps and a
maximum rating of 200 amps. The pedestal also must meet the requirements
specified in the Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements Committee
(EUSERC) manual, Drawing 307.
For authorization to attach telephone and cable television terminating facilities to
the post, contact your local PG&E project coordinators.

Meter Socket (or Meter Socket Base)

Neutral
Bus
Electrode

8” Min.

4” Min. See Subsections 5.4.1.,

5.4.2., and 5.4.5. on
Pages 5-10 and 5-15.
Section A-A
8” Min.
Note: The PG&E required
conduit cover and depth is
greater than EUSERC Drawing 307.
A A
See Numbered Document 063927
located in Appendix C. Grade 2” Min., 6” Max.

18” Min.
24” Min.
(See Note)
As Required

Figure 6-1
Residential Electric Metering Pedestal

6.4. Meter Locations

An applicant must consult a PG&E project coordinator during the initial

construction phase of his or her project to determine the appropriate meter panel
and current-transformer cabinet (if installed) location and to ensure that adequate
space is provided for the metering equipment. PG&E must review and approve all
meter installations before the meters are installed.

2017 6-2
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

When meters are installed in a confined or enclosed area, applicants must ensure
that they design a way for PG&E personnel to read the meters from the outside of
the enclosures (e.g., window, opening).
The following four, lettered paragraphs provide location requirements that are
applicable to residential metering.
A. Locate the meters and metering equipment either in outdoor, unfenced areas
or mount them on, or recess them in, an exterior building wall. Do not mount
metering equipment on, or recess metering equipment in, single family
residences or inside garages.
B. Locate the meters and metering equipment in a meter room that is accessible
through an outside doorway.
C. For a multifamily or residential building, locate the meters and metering
equipment in a meter room or other acceptable location. Typically, an
acceptable location will be on the ground floor or basement level of the
building. The installation must be accessible directly from a public area.
An applicant who is planning to install metering equipment on any floor above
the ground floor in a multistory building must contact a PG&E project
coordinator as early as possible during the initial stages of the project. PG&E
must approve of any equipment location that is above the building’s ground
level.
NOTE: In large, multifamily, multistory residential buildings (typically if the
highest occupied floor is over 75 feet high), PG&E may, at its option,
approve grouped meter locations on one or more upper floors.
D. When meters will be installed indoors see the PG&E Bulletin TD-7001B-005,
“SmartMeter Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and
High-Rise Building Construction,” located in Appendix B.
E. Locate electric meters in the same general area as gas meters when
designing single-family residences. For clearance specifications refer
to Subsection 5.4.3., “Meter Set Clearance Requirements,” on Page 5-11,
and Section 2, “Gas Service.”

6.4.1. Installing Utility Services to Mobile Homes

A. Typically, PG&E will not supply utility services and/or metering
facilities to mobile homes that are located or set up in any area,
including a mobile home park, where utility service facilities are
attached directly to the mobile home except under the following
circumstances.
1. The mobile home is fixed in place (i.e., no running gear or wheels).
The mobile home must not be capable of movement.
2. The mobile home is installed on a foundation system as described
in State of California, Title 25, Division 1, Chapter 2, Article 7,
Section 1333, “Foundation Systems.”

6-3 2017
Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

B. PG&E will make an exception and install utility services to a location

where mobile homes may be moved, including mobile home parks,
under certain, specific conditions.
1. The mobile homes must be served by meter pedestals or other
PG&E-approved services and the meter facilities must be installed
at a fixed location.
2. Applicants are responsible for connecting their mobile homes to
those fixed locations and to the meter pedestals or other utility
facilities.
See Numbered Document 052521, “Electrical Service Requirements for
Mobile Home Developments,” for more information and for specifications.
This PG&E document is included in Appendix C, “Electric and Gas
Engineering Documents,” and also in PG&E’s Electric Underground
Construction Manual, Volume 1.
6.5. Services

6.5.1. Single Meter: Underground Service

A. Services, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps, Single Phase
Figure 6-2, “Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure,
Combination Meter-Socket Panel (Residential, 0 Amps−225 Amps),”
on Page 6-5, illustrates a single, underground, residential, single-phase
meter panel (i.e., 4 terminal for a 120/240-volt service and 5 terminal
for a 120/208-volt service).
The numbered items below describe the applicant’s requirements when
designing these types of underground services.
1. Design the socket and enclosure for underground service
conductors.
2. Ensure that enclosures designed for either overhead or underground
service entry meet all of the requirements for both types of service.
3. Ensure that all cable-termination lugs are suitable to use with both
aluminum and copper conductors. The lugs must be compatible
with a range of conductor sizes.
The minimum conductor size for services up to 125 amps is
#6 American wire gauge (AWG) to 1/0 AWG. The minimum
conductor size for services rated from 126 amps to 225 amps is
#2 AWG to 250 thousand circular mils (kcmil).
4. Use separate, independently supported, service-termination lugs
that extend from the socket, and connect to it, using a bus bar.
Provide a minimum radial clearance of 1-1/2 inches between the
hot bus terminals and the ground or neutral surfaces. The
termination facilities cannot be side- or angle-mounted in relation
to the front of the panel.

2017 6-4
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

5. Ensure that the socket enclosure has a separate lug in the sealable
section. Use this lug exclusively for terminating PG&E’s neutral
conductor. If the neutral terminal is insulated from the enclosure,
PG&E will provide the applicant with a bonding screw or jumper.
6. Ensure that the applicant-owned wiring that extends from the
distribution section (i.e., branch circuits) does not pass through the
sealable section(s).
7. Locate the applicant’s service-grounding electrode conductor
outside of the sealable section and design it to permit the
applicant’s grounding system to be isolated easily from PG&E’s
neutral, when necessary.

Self-Contained
Meter Socket

Applicant
N N Distribution
Section
Underground (Optional)
Service N
Termination
X N
No Customer
Cables or
Equipment

PG&E Service Conduit

Y
(in the Center Position)
W
Figure 6-2
Typical Underground Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel
(Residential, 0 Amps−225 Amps)

Table 6-1 Residential (0 Amps−225 Amps) Enclosure

Rating in X Y N W Conduit
Amps Minimum Dimensions (In Inches)
Up to 125 8 4 6 7 2
126 to 225 11 5-1/2 8-1/2 7 3

6-5 2017
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

B. Services, 226 Amps Through 320 Amps, 120/240 Volts,

Single Phase, Residential
Figure 6-3, “Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination
Meter-Socket Panel for a Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt,
226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service),” on Page 6-6, illustrates a
single, underground, residential, single-phase, 120/240-volt,
Class 320-amp meter panel. Applicants must ensure that this panel:
1. Conforms to the requirements for underground-fed, 320-amp
metering equipment.
2. Is designed with test-bypass facilities and has provisions for using
manual bypass links.
3. Is marked with either a rating of “320 Amperes Continuous”
or “400 Amperes Maximum (320 Amperes Continuous).”
4. Is only used with residential services.

Meter
8-1/2” Min. Socket

1-1/2” Min. Manual Bypass

3-1/4” Min.
1-3/4” Min.
Cable
Terminating
Enclosure for Facilities
Underground Panel Not
Service Termination Allowed in 4” Min.
22” Min. 1”
Nonresidential Min.
No Customer Applications
Cables or Applicant
Equipment Section
Provisions for 3” Min., (Location
10-1/2” Min. 6” Min.
4” Max. Conduit in the Optional)
Center Position
Sealing Studs

Front View Side View

Figure 6-3
Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter-Socket Panel for a
Class 320 Meter (Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service)

2017 6-6
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

C. Services, 201 Amps Through 800 Amps, Single Phase or

400 Amps Three Phase with Current Transformers
Applicants must consult their local PG&E project coordinators when
single-phase services exceed 400 amps. Applicants may need to install
three-phase service to conform to PG&E’s Electric Rule 2, “Description
of Service,” requirements.
Figure 6-4, “Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer
Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps; 1∅ or 3∅),” on Page 6-8, illustrates a
single-metered, underground, residential meter panel.
Figure 6-5, “Typical Underground, Separate-Bused,
Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box Assembly,
201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−800 Amps, 1∅,” on
Page 6-8, illustrates how service and metering components can be
separated into individual enclosures.
NOTE: See Section 9, “Electric Metering: Components,” for details
about the components in Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5.
Applicants must ensure their conductors are installed before PG&E
installs the current transformers. Also, applicants must ensure that their
service-entrance conductors and equipment meet the following
requirements.
1. The current transformer mounting base must include termination
bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides
necessary to connect the PG&E current transformers and service
conductors to the line side.
2. The conductor must enter the current-transformer cabinet at or
within 2 inches of the top or bottom and leave the cabinet either at
or within 2 inches of the top or bottom of the opposite end of the
cabinet or enter and exit at or within 2 inches of the same end of
the current-transformer cabinet. Route the conductor carefully
when using this option.

6-7 2017
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

Sealable Studs Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed

(Four Places) by Applicant

10” ID
1/8”

2”
3”
Load Side
3”
CT
Test Switch Locations
52” Mounting
(For Mounting Base
Min. Base
Detail, See Figure 9-2
on Page 9-2.) 3”
Line Side
3”
22” Min. Underground 400 Amps Max. 22” Min.
Service- (1∅ or 3∅) 11” Min.
15” 15”
Termination
Section

PG&E Service Conduit 3-1/2” Max.

W (in the Center Position)
3-1/2” Max.
W Dimensions: Figure 6-4
3-Wire 1∅ = 24” Min. Underground Combination Meter and
4-Wire 3∅ = 36” Min. Current-Transformer Cabinet
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 1 or 3)

10” Min.
50’ Max.

Service- See Subsection 5.3.

Termination
Pad See Section 9,
Figure 9-11,
on Page 9-8
Underground
Service- Transformer
Termination Rated
Box Bused Current- Meter
Transformer Box
Cabinet
Conduit 1-1/4” Min.
PG&E Service Conduit
(in the Center Position) Conduit-to-Service Switch or Breaker

Figure 6-5
Typical Underground, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket
Meter Box Assembly, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3 and 201 Amps−800 Amps, 1)

2017 6-8
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

6.5.2. Single Meter: Overhead Service

A. Services, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps, Single Phase
Figure 6-6, “Individual Meter Socket,” and Figure 6-7, “Combination
Meter Socket Load Center,” both on Page 6-9, illustrate the 4-terminal,
120/240-volt and 5-terminal, 120/208-volt overhead service and meter
panel.
Enclosures designed for a combination of overhead and underground
conductors must meet all of the requirements for both types of
conductor entry.
B. Services, 226 Amps Through 320 Amps, 120/240 Volts,
Single Phase
Applicants must ensure that this panel:
1. Conforms to the requirements for overhead-fed, 320-amp metering
equipment.
2. Is designed with test-bypass facilities and has provisions for using
manual bypass links.
3. Is marked with either a rating of “320 Amperes Continuous” or
“400 Amperes Maximum (320 Amperes Continuous).”
4. Is only used with residential services.

Service-Entrance Conductors
(Conduit in the Center Position)

Neutral
(White Wire)

Conduit-to-Service Optional
Switch or Breaker Distribution
Figure 6-6 Section
Individual Meter Socket

Figure 6-7
Combination Meter Socket Load Center

6-9 2017
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

Provisions for 3” Min.,

4” Max. Conduit in the
Center Position

Meter
8-1/2” Min. Socket

1-1/2” Min.
3-1/4” Min. Manual Bypass
1-3/4” Min.
Cable 4” Min.
1”
Terminating Min.
Enclosure for Facilities
Overhead Service Panel Not
Termination Allowed in
22” Min. Nonresidential
No Customer Cables Applications. 6” Min.
or Equipment Other Applicant
Than Service Section
Entrance Cables (Location
10-1/2” Min. Optional)
Sealing Studs

Side View
Front View

Figure 6-8
Typical Service-Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket Panel for a Class 320 Meter
(Residential, 120/240-Volt, 226-Amp Through 320-Amp Service)

C. Services, 201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase, or

400 Amps, Three Phase, with Current Transformer
Applicants should consult with a PG&E project coordinator before
installing single-phase services that exceed 400 amps. Applicants
may need to install three-phase service to conform to PG&E’s Electric
Rule 2 requirements.
Figure 6-9, “Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer
Cabinet, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1∅),” on
Page 6-11, illustrates a single-metered, overhead, residential meter panel.
Figure 6-10, “Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet
and Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3∅ and 201 Amps−600 Amps,
1∅),” also on Page 6-12, illustrates a single, overhead, residential,
single-phase or three-phase service and meter panel with current
transformers.
NOTE: See Section 9, for details about the components in Figure 6-9
and Figure 6-10.

2017 6-10
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

Applicants must ensure their conductors are installed before PG&E

installs the current-transformers. Also applicants must connect the
service entrance conductors to the line and load sides of the
current-transformer mounting base.
1. The current transformer mounting base must include termination
bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides
necessary to connect the PG&E current transformers. See Section 9,
for details about these internal components.
2. The conductor must enter the current-transformer cabinet at or
within 2 inches of the top or bottom and leave the cabinet either at
or within 2 inches of the top or bottom of the opposite end of the
cabinet or enter and exit at or within 2 inches of the same end of
the cabinet. Applicants must ensure that the conductor is routed
carefully when using this option.

Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed

Service Conduit by Applicant
(in the Center Position)

42” Sealable Studs 10”

Min. (Four Places)
2”
3”
Line Side Handles 3”
CT
Mounting Test Switch Locations
Base (For Mounting Base 11” Min.
CL Detail, See Figure 9-2
on Page 9-2.)
Caution
18” Label
Load Side 3”

3” 400 Amps Max. 3 3-1/2” Max.

600 Amps Max. 1
5” 5”

W
Front View 3-1/2” Max.
W Dimensions: Side View
3-Wire 1∅ = 24” Min.
4-Wire 3∅ = 36” Min.
Figure 6-9
Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet,
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3 and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1)

6-11 2017
Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

Service-Entrance Conductors
(Conduit in the Center Position)

10” Min.
50” Max.
C See Subsection 5.3
L of
Lower Bolt
See Section 9,
Figure 9-11
on Page 9-8
Transformer
Bused Current- Rated Meter
75” Max. Transformer Box
Cabinet Conduit 1-1/4” Min.

Conduit-to-Service
Switch or Breaker
(Standing Surface or Finished Grade)

Figure 6-10
Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3 and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1)

6.5.3. Multiple Meters

PG&E requires grouped, single-meter installations for multifamily
residential buildings.
This requirement excludes row-type condominiums where each unit is
considered a single-family residence and is metered individually. Row-type
condominiums must meet the applicable metering requirements described in
the following subsections.
A. Grouped-Meter Installation Ampacity Ratings
The ampacity rating of a grouped-meter installation must be as
described below.
1. For installations without a main switch or breaker, the service
rating will be the rating of the electrical enclosure or service
termination section, pull can, or other service-termination enclosure
where PG&E terminates and connects its supply facilities and
conductors. Also, see Subsection 1.14.B. on Page 1-12.
2. For installations with a main switch or breaker, the rating of the
service to be supplied is the rating of the termination section, pull
can, service section, or main service switch continuous current
rating, typically whichever is greater. Also, see Subsection 1.14.A.
on Page 1-12.

2017 6-12
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

B. Grouped Meter-Socket Spacing and Socket Blank-Off Covers

PG&E requires a 7-1/2-inch horizontal and 8-1/2-inch minimum
vertical center spacing between meter sockets. The Company will
provide and install nonconductive, meter-socket, blank-off covers
before energizing the meter panels with vacant meter sockets. PG&E
will not energize meter panels and sockets unless blank-off meter
covers are installed.
C. Individual Meter Sockets With Wiring Gutters
PG&E will accept meter sockets with wiring gutters, as shown in
Figure 6-11, “Meter Sockets With Wiring Gutters,” on Page 6-13,
only when applicants either are updating and/or adding on to existing
installations.
PG&E will accept individual meter sockets in combination with a
wiring gutter only for an applicant’s service-entrance conductors and
only when unmetered service-entrance conductors and metered-load
conductors are not installed in the same conduit, raceway, or wiring
gutter.
To conserve space and lower equipment costs, applicants should
consider installing a combination multimeter, as described in
Subsection 6.5.3.D., “Combination Multimeter Installation,” on
Page 6-14. Only if applicants are reconstructing or adding to an
existing installation can they install a meter trough, as described in
Subsection 6.5.3.E., “Meter Trough Installations,” on Page 6-17.

Service-Entrance Conductors

Sealable Wiring Gutter Sealable Wiring Gutter Meter

Sockets

Point of
PG&E’s
Underground
Service Service-
Termination Termination
Pull Box
To Service Switch
Meter To Service Switch PG&E Service Conduit
Sockets (in the Center Position)
Overhead Service Underground Service

Figure 6-11
Meter Sockets With Wiring Gutters

6-13 2017
Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

D. Combination Multimeter Installation

A combination multimeter installation consists of the following
equipment.
• A main switch (if one is installed or required by local jurisdiction)
• Unmetered wiring gutter
• Multiple meter sockets
• An appropriate number of circuit breakers
See Section 5, Subsection 5.7., “Main Service Disconnects and
Switching Sequences,” on Page 5-22, for more information on
disconnects and switches.
Examples of PG&E-approved, combination, multimeter installations are
illustrated in Figure 6-12, “Typical, Manufactured, Combination,
Multimeter Installation: Seven Meters or More,” on Page 6-15, and
Figure 6-13, “Clearances for a Typical, Manufactured, Combination,
Multimeter Installation,” on Page 6-16.
Applicants must ensure that all multimeter installations meet the
following requirements.
1. Individually meter multiple apartments in one building. Separate
metered and unmetered conductors.
2. Use factory (or factory-equivalent), harness-style wiring or bus
between the unmetered wiring gutter and the line terminals of each
meter socket. Harness-style wiring or bus also must be used
between the load terminals of each meter socket and the line side of
the corresponding circuit breaker.
3. Ensure that the panels are designed to permit any individual meter
socket block or jaw assembly to be replaced. Applicants must not
mount more than two meters on a single, removable panel.
Removable meter-panel covers must not exceed 6 square feet in
area.
4. Ensure that the panel’s design and construction meets the clearance
requirements provided in Figure 6-13 and in Table 6-2, “Dimension
Specifications for Multimeter Installations,” on Page 6-16.
5. Increase Dimension B, shown in Figure 6-13 on Page 6-16, by the
amount that the main switch door, including the operating handle,
reduces the clearance when opened 90°.
6. Ensure that panels are removable so that PG&E personnel can
perform wiring inspections.

2017 6-14
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

Point of PG&E’s
Service-Entrance Service Termination
Conductors Typical House
Meter Socket

Main UG
Switch Service-
Main TBF Termination
Switch Pull Box

Test-Bypass
Facilities
Barriers PG&E Service
Circuit
Barriers Breaker Conduit (in the
Center Position)
Overhead Service Underground Service

Figure 6-12
Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation: Seven Meters or More

6-15 2017
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

8-1/2” Min. Main Switch

A

D See Underground
* Breaker * Note 1. Pull Box
(Alternate *
*
A Position)
C D
Meter 7-1/2”
Socket B Refer to Section 5.4.1. on
Min.
Page 5-9 for Meter-Socket
Height Requirements
Side-View Detail A

Figure 6-13
Clearances for a Typical, Manufactured, Combination, Multimeter Installation

Notes in reference to Figure 6-13.

1. Where an adjacent wall or other obstruction extends more than 11-inches perpendicular from
the face of the meter panel, a 10-inch minimum dimension to the meter socket axis is required.
For obstructions extending 11 inches or less from the meter panel, the side clearance must
conform to that of Dimension B.

Table 6-2 Dimension Specifications for Multimeter Installations

A–Protrusions B C D
(in Inches) All Measurements Are Minimum Dimension in Inches
0 (No Protrusion) 3-3/4 4 4-3/4
Greater Than 0 to 1-1/8 4-1/4 4 4-3/4
Greater Than 1-1/8 to 2 4-1/4 4-1/4 6-1/4
Greater Than 2 to 4 6-1/4 4-1/4 8
Greater Than 4 to 11 (Maximum) 6-1/4 10 8

2017 6-16
 Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

E. Meter Trough Installations

PG&E accepts meter trough installations using ring-type sockets only
for reconstructing and adding to existing installations. In addition to
meeting the general requirements for meter sockets, applicants must
ensure that meter troughs meet the following general requirements.
1. Where there are four, five, or six sockets in one trough, the
incoming service conductors must terminate on a main bus that is
supported independently of the socket jaw assembly.
2. The panel design must permit individual, meter-socket blocks or
jaw assemblies to be replaced individually. Applicants must not
mount more than two meters on a single, removable front panel.
3. Metered and unmetered conductors must be separated, clearly
showing that the entire load is being metered.
4. The panels must be removable so that wiring inspections can be
performed.
Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15, both located below, illustrate meter trough
installations served by underground or overhead service.

Service Entrance Conductors

Point of
Conduit
PG&E’s
Service
Termination

To Service Switch

PG&E Service Conduit

To Service Switch (in the Center Position)
Overhead Service Underground Service
Figure 6-14
Horizontal Meter Trough Installation: Six Meters or Less

Service Sealable Wiring Gutter

Entrance
Conduit Conductors
Point of
PG&E’s
Service
Termination To
To
Service
Service
Switch
Switch

PG&E Service Conduit

Overhead Service (in the Center Position)
Underground Service
Figure 6-15
Vertical Meter Trough Installation: Five Meters or Less

6-17 2017
Section 6, Electric Metering: Residential

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 6-18
SECTION 7 ELECTRIC METERING: COMMERCIAL, INDUSTRIAL AND
AGRICULTURAL
COMMERCIAL, INDUSTRIAL,
ELECTRIC METERING:

AND AGRICULTURAL
SECTION 7
SECTION 7 ELECTRIC METERING: COMMERCIAL, INDUSTRIAL AND
AGRICULTURAL
 Section 7
Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial, and Agricultural

7.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides the Pacific Gas and Electric Company
(PG&E/the Company) service specifications and requirements for commercial,
industrial, and agricultural electric metering. Also, it describes the required
locations for these nonresidential meters. This section includes specific
information that is not covered by the basic requirements in Section 5, “Electric
Metering: General.”
NOTE: Residential meter panels rated for 320 amperes (amps) shown in Section 6,
“Electric Metering: Residential,” are not allowed to be used for
nonresidential (e.g., commercial, industrial, and agricultural) applications.

7.2. Service Specifications and Requirements

The following three subsections describe service specifications and requirements

for commercial, industrial, and agricultural electric meters.

7.2.1. Permitted Types of Electric Service

PG&E does not permit overhead service connections in areas zoned for
underground service by local ordinance, or where underground service is
required by California Public Utility Commission- (CPUC-) approved
tariffs.

7.2.2. Required Test-Bypass Facilities

Test-bypass facilities are required, regardless of the panel ampacity, for both
single-phase and three-phase, nonresidential installations. Applicants must
furnish, install, and maintain a meter socket with PG&E-approved, manual,
test-bypass facilities. This equipment also is used for the following types of
services.
• All three-phase, nonresidential services without exception.
• All single-phase, nonresidential services. See the exceptions in
Subsection 7.2.3., “Required Approvals for Meter Equipment Without
Test-Bypass Facilities,” on Page 7-2.
Refer to Figure 7-1, “Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for
Self-Contained Metering (0 Amps−125 Amps),” on Page 7-4, and
Figure 7-2, “Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained
Metering (126 Amps−200 Amps),” on Page 7-5.

7-1 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

7.2.3. Required Approvals for Meter Equipment Without Test-Bypass

Facilities
PG&E requires an approval before installing meter equipment without
test-bypass facilities. If approved, the meter equipment may be exempt only
when all of the conditions are met in Item 7.2.3.A. or Item 7.2.3.B., both
below.
A. Single-phase, nonresidential service when all of the three following
conditions are met.
1. The main disconnect switch’s rating does not exceed 200 amps.
2. Service to another meter or service will not be interrupted when
de-energizing the meter socket without test-bypass facilities.
3. The metered service is used exclusively for temporary power or
nighttime lighting loads.
B. Single-phase, 120/240-volt residential customers who establish a new
agricultural service, or have an existing agricultural service, and that
service is connected to a residential, main-service electric panel may
be exempt from the test-bypass requirement only when all of the three
following conditions are met.
1. The residential main meter panel and main disconnect switch’s
rating does not exceed 225 amps.
2. The customer agrees to short interruptions of service required when
PG&E tests and maintains their meters.
3. The aggregated total size of pump motors attached to the
agricultural service do not exceed 7-1/2 horsepower (hp).

7.2.4. Meter Locations

Applicants must consult their local PG&E project coordinators during the
initial construction phase of their projects to determine the appropriate
meter and current-transformer cabinet locations and to ensure that adequate
space is provided for the metering equipment. PG&E must review and
approve all metering equipment installations before they are installed.
Additionally, the following specific location requirements apply to
nonresidential metering.
A. Applicants must locate meters on exterior, ground-floor walls or other
permanent structures nearest PG&E’s distribution facilities. When
outdoor meter locations are not practical, PG&E will approve interior
locations if they are accessible during PG&E’s typical working hours
and if the interior location meets PG&E’s access requirements, as
described in Subsection 5.3., “Electric Meters: General Location
Requirements,” on Page 5-5.

2017 7-2
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

B. Typically, applicants must group meters for multiple-occupancy

buildings at one common location; however, PG&E allows the
following exceptions to this requirement.
1. PG&E may permit applicants to have individual meters located on
their premises if the installations comply with all applicable codes.
When buildings contain unmetered wiring, applicants must place
that wiring in PG&E-approved conduit and/or in sealable wireways.
2. In high-rise buildings (e.g., typically if the highest-occupied floor is
over 75 feet high), PG&E has the option to approve grouped-meter
locations on one or more floors.
3. PG&E does not permit transformer-rated metering equipment to be
located at a point away from the service disconnect means,
allowing the applicants to separate the meter and metering
transformers. Any exceptions to this requirement must be
approved by the local PG&E meter shop. Meter shop employees
must approve remote meter locations before applicants locate
meters away from (i.e., remote from) the PG&E service termination
point. Also, applicants must provide clearances and working space,
as described in Subsection 5.4., “Meter Height Clearances,
Enclosures, and Protection,” on Page 5-9, for both the meter and
metering transformer installations.
Applicants must supply and install rigid steel conduit for the meter
wiring between the meter and the metering transformers. The conduit
must be 1-1/4-inch minimum diameter and must be limited to 50 circuit
feet with a maximum of three 90° bends, unless sealable, accessible,
exposed conduits are furnished.
When meters are separated by more than 50 circuit feet, PG&E requires
a special review and approval for the installation.

7.2.5. Services, 0 Amps Through 200 Amps, Single Applicant,

Overhead and Underground
Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing services.
A. PG&E’s service conductors must be pulled into the enclosure and
connected to the bypass-test facility’s line-termination lugs.
B. One set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of load conductors must be
routed and formed to allow PG&E to pull their service laterals without
encountering any obstructions.
C. For overhead service, applicants must provide and install
service-entrance conductors from the weatherhead to the enclosure.
Applicants must connect the conductors to the bypass-test facility’s
line-termination lugs.
D. The right side, test-bypass blocks (i.e., two poles) are identified as the
power leg (i.e., high leg or stinger leg) for metering three-phase, 4-wire,
delta service. The power leg is identified by using the color orange.
Orange tape is typically used.

7-3 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

E. All section covers can be removed independently; however, after the

meter is in place, the upper cover must not be removable. After the
meter is in place, the lower cover must be sealable.
F. For meter socket jaw requirements, see Section 5, Subsection 5.6., “Meter
Types and Connections,” on Page 5-17.
G. Install range-taking lugs from #6 American wire gauge (AWG) to
1/0 AWG for services up to 125 amps, and #2 AWG to 250 thousand
circular miles (kcmil) for services rated from 126 amps through 200 amps.
H. For all agricultural overhead services, install a cable protector around one
set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance conductors entering
the meter panel. Order using Material Code 382034 or 382045, found in
Numbered Document 062288, “Underground Conduits,” Table 14,
“Codes for Cable Protectors,” on Page 8 (in Appendix C).

Note F.
on Page
7-4
Barrier

Barriers 1-1/2” 3” Min. 24”

Min.
1-1/2” Min. Note D. on
Page 7-3
L L L L L L
I
N
O I O I O 8” Min. 2”−3”
A N A N A
E D E D E D 2” Max.
5” 2” Alternate
Max. Position for
3” Min. Neutral
PG&E Service Double Lugs 4-1/2”
Conduit Required Min.
(in the Center
Position)
11-1/2”
Figure 7-1
Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (0 Amps−100 Amps)

2017 7-4
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

Note F.
on Page
7-4
Barrier

Barriers 1-1/2” 30”

Min. 3” Min.
1-1/2” Min.
Note D. on
Page 7-3
L L L L L L
I O I O I O
N A N A N A 11” Min.
E D E D E D
2-1/2” Max.
2-1/2”
8” Alternate
Max.
Position for
Neutral
3” Min. Double Lugs 6” Min.
PG&E Service
Conduit Required
(in the Center
Position)
13-1/2”
Figure 7-2
Bused, Safety-Socket Meter Box for Self-Contained Metering (101 Amps−200 Amps)

7.2.6. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Underground

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing services
and equipment.
A. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Three Phase, and
201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase
1. When planning a single, underground, single-phase or three-phase
service, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain
combination meter and current-transformer cabinets, as illustrated
in Figure 7-3, “Underground Combination Meter and
Current-Transformer Cabinet (201 Amps−400 Amps, 1j or 3j),”
on Page 7-7.
NOTE: See Section 9, “Electric Metering: Components,” for details
about internal components.
2. The current transformer mounting base must include termination
bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides
necessary to connect the current transformers and the PG&E
service conductors to the line side.

7-5 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

3. Applicants must install one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of
load conductors before PG&E installs the current-transformers.
Also, the conductors must leave the cabinet by one of the following
two methods:
• Above the current-transformer mounting base.
• At or within 2 inches of the bottom of the underground
termination pull section.
One set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of load conductors must
exit (i.e., leave) the current-transformer cabinet either at or within
2 inches of the top or bottom of the opposite end of the cabinet or
exit at or within 2 inches of the same end of the cabinet.
Applicants must ensure that the conductors are routed
carefully when using this option.

Applicants must ensure that one set (i.e., one conductor per phase)
of load conductors are routed and formed to allow PG&E to pull
their service laterals without encountering any obstructions.
4. Applicants must ensure that provisions are made for the
underground service neutral when installing an insulated, bondable
termination in the current-transformer cabinet.
5. Applicants must mark the power leg (i.e., high leg or stinger leg) of a
240/120-volt, three-phase, 4-wire delta service by using the color
orange. This is for metering purposes. Orange tape is typically used.
6. Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.
• All panels and covers must be sealable and all securing screws
must be captive.
• Outdoor current transformer (CT) cabinets are weatherproof.
• A neutral is bonded to the enclosure.
• CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers and CTs are not
tapped off to supply other meters or used for other purposes.

2017 7-6
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

Sealable Studs Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed

(Four Places) by Applicant

10” ID
1/8”

2”
3”
Load Side
3”
CT
52” Mounting Test Switch Locations
Min. Base (For Mounting Base
Detail, See Figure 9-2
on Page 9-2.) 3”
Line Side
3”
22” Min. Underground 22” Min.
Service- 400 Amps Max. 11” Min.
15” 15”
Termination (1∅ or 3∅)
Section

PG&E Service Conduit

(in the Center Position) 3-1/2” Max.
W
W Dimensions: 3-1/2” Max.
3-Wire 1∅ = 24” Min.
4-Wire 3∅ = 36” Min.
Figure 7-3
Underground Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 1j or 3j)

B. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Three Phase, and

201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase,
Current-Transformer Metering in Bused, Current-Transformer
Cabinets
1. When applicants meter a single, underground service using current
transformers, they must furnish, install, own, and maintain
underground, service-termination pull boxes with separate,
current-transformer cabinets and meter box, as illustrated in
Figure 7-4, “Separate-Bused Current-Transformer Cabinet and
Meter Box With Underground Service-Termination Pull Box
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3j, and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1j),” on
Page 7-8.
NOTE: See Section 9, for details about internal components.
2. Applicants must furnish and connect one set (i.e., one conductor per
phase) of service-entrance conductors to the line and load sides of
the current-transformer mounting base and to the load side of the
termination facilities in the underground, service-termination pull
box. The applicants service-entrance conductors must be installed
before PG&E installs the current transformers.

7-7 2017
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

3. The current-transformer mounting base must include termination

bolts, Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides
necessary to connect the PG&E current transformers.
4. PG&E pulls and terminates its service-entrance conductor directly
to the applicant-furnished, service-termination facility in the
underground service-termination pull box.
5. One set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance
conductors must enter current-transformer cabinets either at or
within 2 inches of the top or bottom and leave the cabinet either at
or within 2 inches of the top or bottom of the opposite end of the
cabinet or enter and exit at or within 2 inches of the same end of
the cabinet. Applicants must ensure that the conductors are
routed carefully when using this option.

Service-
Termination
Pad 10” Min.
50’ Max.
See Subsection 5.3.

See Section 9,
Figure 9-11, on
Page 9-8
Underground
Service- Transformer
No Customer Termination Bused Current-
Cables or Rated Meter
Box Transformer Box
Equipment Cabinet
Conduit 1-1/4” Min.
PG&E Service Conduit
(in the Center Position) Conduit to Service Switch or Breaker

Figure 7-4
Separate-Bused Current-Transformer Cabinet and Meter Box
With Underground Service-Termination Pull Box
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3j and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1j)

C. Services, 201 Amps and Above, Current-Transformer

Metering in Switchboard Service Sections
1. When applicants meter a single underground service using current
transformers, they must furnish, install, own, and maintain a
switchboard service section and facilities for terminating
underground service conductors.
2. Figure 7-5, “Switchboard Pull Section,” Figure 7-6, “Separate Pull
Box,” and Figure 7-7, “Bottom-Fed Service Section,” all on
Page 7-9, illustrate typical arrangements of the switchboard
service sections that are used in conjunction with a pull section or
pull box for underground service-conductor termination.

2017 7-8
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

3. PG&E pulls and terminates its service conductors directly

to the applicant-furnished service-termination facilities in the
underground service-termination pull section, pull box, or service
section.
NOTE: See Section 10, “Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through
600 Volts,” for details.

Service Entrance
Bus/Cable Conductors
Termination Standard
Standard 90”
90” Service
Service Section
Section
Barrier
Barrier
Barrier
X Sealable
To
To Termination
Load
Standing Surface Load Enclosure

Standing Surface
Service W Service

Figure 7-5 Figure 7-6

Switchboard Pull Section Separate Pull Box

Standard 90”
Service Section
To
Load

Barrier
Standing Surface 40-1/4” Min.

Service W

Figure 7-7
Bottom-Fed Service Section

7.2.7. Services, Over 200 Amps, Single Applicant, Overhead

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing
single-applicant, overhead services that are over 200 amps.
NOTE: For all agricultural overhead services, install a cable protector
around one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance
conductors entering the meter panel. Order using Material
Code 382034 or 382045, found in Numbered Document 062288,
Table 14, on Page 8 (in Appendix C).

7-9 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

A. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Three Phase, and

201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase
1. When installing a single, overhead, single-phase or three-phase
service, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain
combination meter and current-transformer cabinets, as illustrated
in Figure 7-8, “Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and
Current-Transformer Cabinet, (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3j and
201 Amps−600 Amps, 1j),” shown on Page 7-11. See Section 9 for
details about internal components.
2. Applicants must install one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of
service-entrance conductors before PG&E installs the
current-transformers. Also applicants must connect the service
entrance conductors to the line and load sides of the
current-transformer mounting base.
3. The current-transformer mounting base must include termination
bolts, Bellevue washers, and nuts on the line and load sides
necessary to connect the current transformers. See Section 9 for
details about these internal components.
4. One set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance
conductors must enter the current-transformer cabinets either at or
within 2 inches of the top and leave the cabinet either at or within
2 inches of the top or bottom of the opposite end of the cabinet or
enter and exit at or within 2 inches of the same end of the cabinet.
Applicants must ensure that the conductors are routed
carefully when using this option.
5. Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following
requirements.
• All panels and covers must be sealable and all securing screws
must be captive.
• Outdoor CT cabinets are weatherproof.
• A neutral is bonded to the enclosure.
• CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers and CTs are not
tapped off to supply other meters or used for any other purposes.

2017 7-10
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

Service Conduit Transformer-Mounting Base Furnished and Installed

(in the Center Position) by Applicant

42” Sealable Studs 10”

Min. (Four Places)
2”
3”
Line Side Handles 3”
CT
Mounting Test Switch Locations
Base (For Mounting Base 11” Min.
CL Detail, See Figure 9-2
on Page 9-2.)
Caution
18” Label
Load Side 3”
400 Amps Max 3j
3” 600 Amps Max. 1j

5” 5” 3-1/2” Max.
W Dimensions:
3-Wire 1∅ = 24” Min.
W 4-Wire 3∅ = 36” Min. 3-1/2” Max.
Front View Side View
Figure 7-8
Overhead-Fed Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet,
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3j and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1j)

B. Services, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps, Three Phase, and

201 Amps Through 600 Amps, Single Phase,
Current-Transformer Metering
1. When installing a single, overhead, single-phase or three-phase
service using current transformers, applicants must furnish, install,
and maintain separate current-transformer cabinets and meter
boxes, as illustrated in Figure 7-9, “Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused,
Current-Transformer Cabinet and Safety-Socket Meter Box
(201 Amps−400 Amps, 3j, and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1j),” on
Page 7-12. Also required are service-entrance conductors, conduit,
and weatherhead to the point of attachment to PG&E’s overhead
service.
NOTE: See Section 9, for details about internal components.
2. Applicants must install one set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of
conductors before PG&E installs the current transformers. Also
applicants must connect the service-entrance conductors to the line
and load sides of the current-transformer mounting bus bars.
3. The current transformer bus bars must include termination bolts,
Belleville washers, and nuts on the line and load sides necessary to
connect the current transformers. See Section 9, for details about
these internal components.

7-11 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

4. One set (i.e., one conductor per phase) of service-entrance

conductors must enter current-transformer cabinets either at or
within 2 inches of the top or bottom and leave the cabinet either at
or within 2 inches of the top or bottom of the opposite end of the
cabinet or enter and exit at or within 2 inches of the same end of
the cabinet. Applicants must ensure that the conductors are
routed carefully when using this option.

Service-Entrance Conductors
(Conduit in the Center Position)

10” Min.
50’ Max
See Subsection 5.3.
C
L See Section 9,
of Lower Figure 9-11, on
Bolt Page 9-8

Transformer
Bused Current- Rated Meter
75” Max.
Transformer Box
Cabinet
Conduit 1-1/4” Min.
(Standing Surface or Conduit-to-Service Switch or Breaker
Finished Grade)

Figure 7-9
Overhead-Fed, Separate-Bused, Current-Transformer Cabinet and
Safety-Socket Meter Box (201 Amps−400 Amps, 3j, and 201 Amps−600 Amps, 1j)

C. Services, 201 Amps and Above, Current-Transformer

Metering in Switchboard Service Sections
1. When installing a single, overhead service using current
transformers, applicants must furnish, install, own, and maintain a
switchboard service section with provisions for the overhead
service termination.
2. Typical switchboard service-section arrangements are illustrated in
Figure 7-10, “Overhead, Service-Termination, Standard Switchboard
Service Section (0 Volts−600 Volts),” on Page 7-13.
NOTE: See Section 10 for details.

2017 7-12
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

3. Applicants must furnish and install service-entrance conductors and

either cable or bus bars, as described below.
• When switchboards are served through bus-bar conductors, the
conductors must enter through the top or at the side or back in
the upper 10-inch section.
• When switchboards are served through cable conductors, the
conductors must enter through the top of the switchboard.
Figure 7-10, on Page 7-13, illustrates an extension that allows
for horizontally incoming conduits from the side or rear of the
standard switchboard service section.
4. Applicants must ensure that the service-entrance conductors feed
from top to bottom. Load conductors must leave below the
metering compartment barrier. Applicants must ensure that service
entrance conductors are connected to the busing in the service
sections with lugs approved for the type of conductors used.

Service-Entrance
Conductors
Service-Supply
Switchboard Extension Conductors

Metering
Compartment
Standard 90”
Service Section

Main Service
Disconnecting
Means
To Load To Load

Figure 7-10
Overhead, Service-Termination, Standard Switchboard Service Section
(0 Volts−600 Volts)

7.2.8. Multi-Applicant Meter Installations

Applicants must meet the following requirements when installing
multi-applicant meters.
A. Applicants must install grouped meters for multi-applicant buildings
where each occupant is metered individually.
B. Each unit of a multi-applicant installation must be considered a
single applicant and must meet the metering requirements described
in Subsection 7.2.5., “Services, 0 Amps Through 200 Amps, Single
Applicant, Overhead and Underground,” on Page 7-3.

7-13 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

C. Applicants must ensure that service entrance conductors for

multi-applicant installations extend from PG&E’s service termination
point to the line side of the meter socket jaw of each socket.
D. Applicants must ensure that the minimum centerline spacings between
meter sockets are 7-1/2 inches horizontal and 8-1/2 inches vertical.
NOTE: PG&E provides and installs nonconductive, meter-socket,
blank-off covers before energizing meter panels with vacant
meter sockets. PG&E will not energize meter panels and sockets
unless blank-off meter covers are installed.
E. For multimeter installations, PG&E determines the ampacity rating of a
grouped multimeter installation using one of the following two
methods.
1. For installations without a main switch or breaker, the service rating
will be the rating of the electrical enclosure or service-termination
section, pull can, or other service-termination enclosure where PG&E
terminates and connects its supply facilities and conductors. Also,
see Subsection 1.14.B., on Page 1-12.
2. For installations with a main switch or breaker, the rating of the
service to be supplied is the rating of the termination section, pull
can, service section, or main service switch continuous current
rating (typically whichever is greater). Also, see Section 1,
“General,” Subsection 1.14.A., on Page 1-12.
F. When a sealable gutter protrudes beyond the meter-mounting surface by
more than 4 inches, applicants must maintain 10 inches of clearance
from the centerline of the meter face. Otherwise, applicants must have a
minimum 4-1/4 inches of vertical clearance.

2017 7-14
 Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

Service-
Entrance Location Optional
Conductors (Top or Bottom) Point of PG&E’s Location Optional
Service Termination (Top or Bottom)

Sealable Line Raceway Sealable Line Raceway

A* A*
C
L meter meter meter meter C
L

TBF TBF TBF TBF

Switch Switch Switch Switch
or or or or
Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker
TBF = Test-Bypass Facilities PG&E Service Conduit
*Clearance required for protruding gutter. (in the Center Position)

Figure 7-11 Figure 7-12

Overhead Service, Grouped-Meter Underground Service, Grouped-Meter
Installation Without a Main Switch Installation Without a Main Switch

Point of PG&E’s Service Termination

Sealable Gutter
A*
Main meter meter meter meter meter meter meter C
L
Switch
Or
Disconnect
Underground
Service-
Termination
Pull Box
TBF TBF TBF TBF TBF TBF TBF
Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
or or or or or or or
Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker Breaker

PG&E Service Conduit TBF = Test-Bypass Facilities

(in the Center Position) *Clearance required for protruding gutter.
Figure 7-13
Grouped-Meter Installation With a Main Switch

7-15 2017
Section 7, Electric Metering: Commercial, Industrial and Agricultural

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 7-16
SECTION 8 ELECTRIC METERING: DIRECT ACCESS
ELECTRIC METERING:
DIRECT ACCESS
SECTION 8
SECTION 8 ELECTRIC METERING: DIRECT ACCESS
 Section 8
Electric Metering: Direct Access

8.1. Scope

Requirements for Section 8, “Electric Metering: Direct Access,” are based on

California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) decisions, including Electric
Rule 22, “Direct Access,” and Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s (PG&E’s)
Direct Access Standards for Metering and Meter Data (DASMMD) in California,
filed with the CPUC on March 1, 1999, as described in Decision 98-12-080.

8-1 2017
Section 8, Electric Metering: Direct Access

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 8-2
SECTION 9 ELECTRIC METERING: COMPONENTS
ELECTRIC METERING:
COMPONENTS
SECTION 9
SECTION 9 ELECTRIC METERING: COMPONENTS
 Section 9
Electric Metering: Components

9.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides detailed information on individual electric

metering components and equipment that Pacific Gas and Electric Company
(PG&E) finds acceptable for use in electric metering construction projects.
The Electric Utilities Service Equipment Requirements Committee (EUSERC)
book, Section 300, contains service and meter-equipment details for
PG&E-approved components, as well.

9.2. Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps Through 225 Amps

A test block is a specific type of test-bypass device. A test block differs from a
test-bypass facility, which is any mechanism used to bypass meter sockets. Both
test blocks and test-bypass facilities are used for self-contained metering
exclusively.
Applicants must ensure that test blocks meet the following requirements.
A. The hex nut must measure 5/8-inch across flats with a copper washer attached.
The hex nut must de-energize the meter socket when backed off.
B. Stud A, located at each conductor terminal, is used to bypass the applicant’s
load current. Applicants must ensure that these studs are used as described in
the following three bullets.
• Stud A must be located in the clear area between the terminating lug and the
circuit-closing nut.
• Stud A may be positioned on the terminal body, on the terminal screw, or on
the bus member.
• Stud A may be incorporated as part of the wire stop.
C. Terminals must be aluminum-bodied and suitable for copper and aluminum
conductors. The terminal screw may be an Allen type, 3/16-inch across flats
for 100-ampere meters, or 5/16-inch across flats for 200-ampere meters.
D. If Stud A is a part of the terminal screw, the terminal screw must be a 5/8-inch hex.

9-1 2017
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

12-24 Stud and Hex

Barrier
Nut 1/2” Across Flats
1/2” Min.
1” Min. 1/2”
Barriers

3/4” Min.
1-1/4” Min. to 1” Max. Note 3

3/4” Min. Notes

1 and 2
1/4” Min.

7/8” Min.

1-1/2” 1/2” Min.

1-3/4” Stud A 12-24 1/2”

9” Max. Stud and Hex Nut
for Six 3” Max. 1/2” Across Flats
Poles (See Note 2)
Figure 9-1
Test Blocks for Self-Contained Metering, 0 Amps−225 Amps

Notes in reference to Figure 9-1.

1. A hex nut (i.e., 5/8-inch across flats with a copper washer attached) de-energizes the meter socket when
backed off.
2. Stud A, located at each conductor terminal, permits PG&E to bypass the applicant’s load current.
Locate Stud A in the clear area between the terminating lug and the circuit-closing nut. Stud A may be
positioned on the terminal body, on the terminal screw, on the bus member, or incorporated as part of
the wire stop.
3. Terminals must be aluminum-bodied and suitable for copper and aluminum conductors. The terminal screw
may be an Allen-type (i.e., 3/16-inch across flats for 100-amp meters or 5/16-inch across flats for 200-amp
meters). If Stud A is a part of the terminal screw, the terminal screw must be a 5/8-inch hex.
4. Do not use an automatic bypass or manual lever bypass. These types of test blocks are not allowed.

9.3. Test Switch Mounting Base Detail

Figure 9-2, below, shows the base dimensions for mounting a removable test switch.

10-32
TAP

1-5/8” 1-1/4” 3-1/4”

1-1/4”
3-1/4” 3-1/4”

4-1/4” 4-1/4”

Figure 9-2
Removable Test Switch Mounting-Base Detail

2017 9-2
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.4. Separate CT Cabinet, 201 Amps and Above, Single Phase and Three Phase
Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.
A. All covers are sealable.
B. Outdoor current transformer (CT) cabinets are weatherproof.
C. Grounding lugs are provided.
D. CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers.
E. CTs are not tapped off to supply other meters or used by applicants for any
other purposes.
F. PG&E’s underground service-lateral conductors do not terminate in CT cabinets.

Mounting Base, Furnished and Installed by Applicant

(Base for two CTs shown.)

Lift
Handles

3/8”
Hole

1
1

Sealable Studs Welded to Flange Figure 9-4

Cabinet Showing Flanged Cover
Figure 9-3 Fastened by Sealable Rivet Latches
Cabinet Showing Stud-Mounted Cover

Hinge
1 Caution Sign
DO NOT BREAK SEAL
Seal NO FUSES INSIDE

1
Figure 9-5
Cabinet Showing Hinged Front Cover

Table 9-1 CT Cabinet Minimum Dimensions

Cabinet Size
Type of Service CT Mounting Base CT Cabinet
(in Inches)
3-Wire, 1∅ 24w x 48h x 12d Figure 9-6 Figure 9-8
4-Wire, 3∅ 36w x 48h x 12d Figure 9-7 Figure 9-9

9-3 2017
Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.5. CT Mounting Base, 201 Amps Through 400 Amps

Applicants must ensure that all of the required lugs are furnished and that conductors are
connected to the line and load terminals on the CT mounting base. Also, applicants must
ensure that the power leg conductor for a 4-wire delta service is marked clearly. The
power leg is identified by using the color orange.

9/16”

3/4”
1-1/4”
3-1/2” 1-3/4”
Min. 1-3/4”

8-1/8”
10-32 Machine Screw and Washer
9/16” Hole Drilled and Tapped Into Bus
(Four Places) 1”

1-3/8” 1-3/4”
3/4”
Figure 9-6
2” 3-Wire, Single-Phase Service,
2” 7-1/8” Mounting Base
2-1/2” Min.
1/4”
Insulating 7/8”
Supports
5-3/4”
2”
1”
12-Gauge,
Corrosion-Treated Steel
9/16” 2” 2-1/2” Min.

1-1/4” 3/4”
3-1/2” 1-3/4”
Min.

8-1/8” 10-32 Machine Screw and

Washer Drilled and Tapped
9/16” Hole Into Bus
(Four Places) 1”

1-3/8” 1-3/4”

2” 3/4”
9” 9”
1/4” 7/8”
Insulating
Supports
Figure 9-7 5-3/4”
4-Wire, Three-Phase 1/4”
2”
Service, Mounting
Base 1”
12-Gauge, Corrosion-Treated Steel

2017 9-4
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.6. Alternate CT Mounting Base, 3-Wire, One Phase or Three Phase

Applicants must ensure that mounting bases meet the following requirements.
A. Insulated supports are rated for the serving voltage and have sufficient
mechanical strength for the application.
B. Mounting bases accept bar-type CTs only.
C. Two 1/2-inch steel, Grade 5 bolts are provided for each cable-terminating and
CT-mounting position. Each bolt must be furnished with a 2-1/4-inch diameter
Belleville washer and a nut. Bolts must be secured in place and spaced as
shown in Figure 9-6, “3-Wire, Single-Phase Service, Mounting Base,” on
Page 9-4. All parts must be plated to prevent corrosion.
3/4” CT Mounting Bolts,
5” Four Places Typ.
See Note 3
1-3/4”
1-3/8”

1-1/2” 7/8”
10−32 Machine
N
Screw and
Washer, Drilled 8-1/8”
and Tapped Into
1-1/2”
Bus

3/4” 1-3/8”
Cable Term. 1-3/4”
Bolts, Typ.
CT CT
Bus Marking, CT,
Cable Term. Bolts, Two Places Typ.
Four Places Typ. 8” Min.
See Note 3
Insulating Support
See Note 1

1/4”

ÌÌ ÌÌÌ ÌÌ
2” Min.,
2-1/2”
Max.

Insulating
ÌÌ ÌÌÌ ÌÌ 3-1/2”
Support
Figure 9-8
CT Mounting Base (Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire,
201 Amps−600 Amps, 0 Volts−600 Volts)
Notes in reference to Figure 9-8.
1. Insulated supports must be rated for the serving voltage and have sufficient mechanical strength for the application.
2. The mounting base accepts bar-type CTs only.
3. Two 1/2-inch steel, Grade 5 bolts must be provided for each cable-terminating and CT mounting position.
Each bolt must be furnished with a 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washer and a nut. Bolts must be secured in
place and spaced as shown. All parts must be plated to prevent corrosion.

9-5 2017
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.7. Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 201 Amps Through 800 Amps

Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.

A. All covers are sealable.
B. Outdoor CT cabinets are weatherproof.
C. Grounding lugs are provided.
D. Neutral or unmetered wiring, either cable or bus bar, is located on either side of
the cabinet.
E. CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers.
F. PG&E’s underground service lateral conductors do not terminate in CT cabinets.

24” Min. 12” Min.

2-1/2” Max.
Bus 2” Min.
Support

Handle
See Bus-Drilling
Detail, Figure 9-10
on Page 9-7 5” Min.

10-32 Screw
48” Min. and Washer 6-7/8” Neutral

75” Max.

1-3/4” Caution Sign

3/4”
1” Min.
4” 9” 4”
Min. Min. 5-1/4” 6” Min.

Standing Surface
Front View Side View

Figure 9-9
Bused CT Cabinet, 3-Wire Service, 201 Amps−800 Amps

2017 9-6
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.8. Bused CT Cabinet, 4-Wire Service, 201 Amps−800 Amps

Applicants must ensure that cabinets meet the following requirements.
A. All covers are sealable.
B. Outdoor CT cabinets are weatherproof.
C. Grounding lugs are provided.
D. Neutral or unmetered wiring, either cable or bus bar, is located on either side of
the cabinet.
E. CT cabinets are not used as splicing chambers.
F. PG&E’s underground service lateral conductors do not terminate in CT cabinets.

36” Min. 12” Min.

Bus
Support
2” Min.
2-1/2” Max.
Handle

See Bus Drilling

Detail
5” Min.
10-32 Screw
48” Min. and Washer 6-7/8” Neutral

75” Max.

1-3/4” 3/4” Caution Sign

4” 4”
9” 9” 1” Min.
Min. Min.
5-1/4” 6” Min.

Front View Standing Surface Side View

3/4”
1-3/8”

5/8”

9/16”
Bus Drilling Detail

Figure 9-10
Bused CT Cabinet (4-Wire Service, 201 Amps−800 Amps)

9-7 2017
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.9. Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering

Applicants must ensure that meter socket jaw requirements and connections
are made according to the rules in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,”
Subsection 5.6., on Page 5-17.

12” Min. Hub

4-1/2”
Horizontal Lay-In
9” Bonding Lug With
#8 Min. Wire
Capacity

3” 20”
Caution Sign
“DO NOT BREAK SEALS, 3/4” Wire
NO FUSES INSIDE” See Note 1 3” 11” Pulling Space
1”
1-3/4” Max. 1-3/4” Max.
5”

4-1/2”
Front Seal
2 K.O. (See Note 2)

2 K.O. Max. (See Note 2)

Figure 9-11
Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering
(Single-Phase or Three-Phase Installations)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-11.

1. Location of mounting bracket for test switch or reactive transformer.
2. K.O.−knock out

2017 9-8
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

37”

Meter Panel
See Note 2

40”

Front Side

Table 9-2 Hinged Meter Panel

Requirements

6” 2” 29” 6” Service Switch Hinged

Voltage Rating Panel
Required
277/480V 401 Amps Yes
3∅, 4-Wire and Above,
11”

120/240V 801 Amps Yes

3∅, 4-Wire and Above

120/208V 1,001 Amps Yes

3∅, 4-Wire and Above
Top View
Figure 9-12
Remote Metering Cabinet (Three-Phase Installations)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-12.

1. The enclosure must be:
a. Equipped with a device to secure the door in the open position at 90° or more.
b. Secured in the closed position with a handle-operated latching mechanism, and lockable with a
padlock having a 5/16” lockshaft.
2. For meter panel requirements, see Figure 10-28, “Standard Switchboard Service Section, 30-Inch Panel
for Socket Meters and Recorder,” on Page 10-37.
3. Written information must be provided and marked inside of the meter panel. This information must include:
a. Potential Transformer/Current Transformer (PT/CT) designation (Type)
b. Rating Factor (RF)
c. Burden
4. Remote metering must be approved by the the local meter shop before installation.
5. See Table 9-2, “Hinged Meter Panel Requirements,” above.

9-9 2017
Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.10. Underground Service Cable-Termination Section or Pull Box

Applicants must ensure that underground service-termination sections or pull

boxes meet the following requirements.
A. Pull box covers must be removable, sealable, provided with two lifting
handles, and limited to a maximum size of 9 square feet.
B. The panel can be sealed using two drilled stud-nut and wing-nut assemblies on
opposite sides of the panel.
C. The minimum dimensions specified in Table 9-3, “Minimum Wall-Mounted
Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase or
Three-Phase,” on Page 9-11, are used when the service conduit enters the
bottom of the termination compartment or pull box and all load conductors exit
above the terminals. When the service conduit enters from the side or back of
the pull box, use the X dimensions from the closest portion of the conduit to
the nearest termination bolt.
D. A PG&E project coordinator is contacted when developing nonresidential,
401-amps-and-above services. Applicants must ensure that they meet PG&E’s
requirements for underground service-termination pull boxes, which include
the following:
1. Installing multiple sets of utility service cables.
2. Provide stacking lug provisions to terminate cables in any three-phase
installation that is 1,200 amps or greater.
3. Providing additional space (i.e., depth, width, and termination height),
when required, in any section of switchboard, panel board, or other
enclosure intended as a termination point for PG&E’s service cables. This
additional space will provide the mandatory clearances between phases and
grounded surfaces, as well as accommodate the installed service cables.
See Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned
Facilities,” for the appropriate conduit and cable requirements to use when
designing nonresidential service installations. This document is included in
Appendix C, “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”
E. Applicants must not use wall-mounted cable-termination and pull
enclosures for three-phase, nonresidential installations rated 401 amps
through 2,500 amps. See Table 9-4, “Minimum Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing)
Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and Nonresidential,
Single-Phase and Three-Phase,” on Page 9-11, and Table 10-1, “Minimum
Bottom-Fed Pull Section Dimensions,” on Page 10-24, for bottom-entry
installation requirements. See Table 10-2, “Pull Section Dimensions
(Minimums) Below Ground Level,” on Page 10-27, for side-entry or
back-entry requirements.
F. See additional requirements for pad-mounted switchboards in Section 10.3.14.,
“Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes or Pull Sections,”
on Page 10-29. The information and figures describe additional requirements
for applicants who install these facilities.

2017 9-10
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

Table 9-3 Minimum Wall-Mounted Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and

Nonresidential, Single-Phase 1 or Three-Phase 1
Minimum Access
X Y
Opening “W”
Service Rating Bottom Side/Rear Bottom Rear
(Amps) 3-Wire 4-Wire
Entry Entry Entry Entry
All Measurements in Inches
0−225 2 10-1/2 14 11 36 6 15
226−400 10-1/2 14 22 42 6 24
401−600 3 16-1/2 — 26 48 11 24
See Table 9-4, below, for nonresidential, single-phase services over
Over 600
600 amperes and all three-phase services over 400 amperes.
601−800 3, 4 16-1/2 — 26 48 11 24
1 See “Notes” at the bottom of this page in reference to Table 9-3 and Table 9-4.
2 See Table 6-1 for minimum dimensions of residential (combination) meter panels.
3 Single phase only.
4 Residential only.

Table 9-4 Minimum Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing) Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions:

Residential and Nonresidential, Single-Phase and Three-Phase
Minimum Access
Opening “W” Termination Height “X”
Service Rating
(Amps) 3-Wire 4-Wire
All Measurements in Inches
321−400 24 24
401−800 24 24 42 Min.−72 Max.
801−1,200 24 30 (see Note 4 below)
1,201−2,000 30 35
2,001−2,500 — 42 60 Min.−72 Max.

Notes in reference to Table 9-3 and Table 9-4.

1. If termination bus-landing stubs are installed perpendicular to the back of the board, a wider enclosure
dimension will be required to accommodate the installation of PG&E’s cables.
2. Maintain a clear working space. When return flanges are necessary, ensure they do not intrude into
service-conductor space.
3. Dimension W is the minimum width of the pull section access opening.
4. The minimum termination height is 40-1/4 inches for Bottom-Fed Service Sections only as shown in
Figure 7-7 on Page 7-8 and Figure 10-15 on Page 10-24.

9-11 2017
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

3/4” Min. 3/4” Min.

W Y
Customer Service
Entrance Conductors
Exit Above Bus
Stubs

Bus Stubs Anchored

to Prevent Turning
As
Load 4” Min. Wall−Mounted
Req’d.
Side

1/2” Bolts

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Shaded Space is 1” Min.
for Service

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
See
Table 9-3 Supply

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇand Conductors Only Connectors Over 200 Amp

Table 9-4
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X Furnished by PG&E
for minimum

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
75” pull-box 1” Min.–Wall−Mounted
dimensions 2-1/2” Min.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Max. 4” Min.–Pad−Mounted

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
6”
Min.
See Note 2

Conduit Must Be
3” Max.

(See Note 3) Service Staggered to Facilitate

Lateral Conduits Service Cable
Grade Installation
Level

Figure 9-13
Typical Underground Service Termination Section and Pull Box,
Wall-Mounted or Pad-Mounted (Floor-Standing)

Notes in reference to Figure 9-13.

1. Ensure that pull-box covers are removable, sealable, provided with two lifting handles, and limited to a
maximum size of 9 square feet. Sealing provisions must consist of two drilled stud-and-wing nut
assemblies on opposite sides of the panel. Ensure that all security screws are captive.
2. Maintain a clear working space. When return flanges are necessary, ensure that they do not intrude into
service conductor space (designated by shading).
3. The 6-inch minimum height requirement from grade to panel does not apply for a floor-standing
switchboard.
4. A main service switch rated at 2,501 amps and above requires bus-duct configuration.

2017 9-12
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

Grounded Metal

Note: 400-Ampere
Bus Stub Is Illustrated. 1-3/4”

1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2” 1-1/2”

Min. Min. Min. Min.
Figure 9-14
Detail of Clearance Requirements for Adjacent Termination Bus Stubs

2”
4” 6”

1/2” Bolts

1-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4”

2” 2” 2”
201−400 Amps
401−800 Amps 801−1,200 Amps

8” 10”

1-3/4” 1-3/4”

2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2”

4 Landings, 1,600 Amps 5 Landings, 2,000 Amps

14”

1-3/4”

2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2”

7 Landings, 2,500 Amps

Figure 9-15
Detail of Aluminum, Termination Bus Stubs

9-13 2017
Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.11. Approved Service-Terminal Conductor Connectors

Applicants must observe the following requirements when they plan to install
approved, service-terminal conductor connectors.
A. Applicants must furnish and install PG&E-approved, range-taking connectors,
suitable for aluminum conductors, for enclosures rated at 0 through 225 amps.
B. PG&E must furnish and install approved, cable-to-flat-bar connectors on the
termination bus stub, as specified in Table 9-5, “Approved, Compression-Type
Service-Terminal Connectors,” on Page 9-15, for enclosures rated above
225 amps. For a Class 320-amp panel, cable-to-flat-bar connectors on the
termination bus stub are preferred; however, 320-amp-rated meter panels with
hex lug terminations are acceptable also. See Numbered Document 058817,
“Terminating Underground Electric Services 0-600 Volts in Customer-Owned
Facilities,” Figure 2 on Page 4.
C. Applicants may use one-bolt, bus attachment connectors for 0- through
225-amp services if the connectors are anchored to prevent the connector
assembly from twisting.
Applicants must not use pin termination connectors to install cables larger than
those intended for the range-taking connectors in their service panel or service
enclosure.
NOTE: Do not peel stranded cables to fit conductors into termination connectors.
See PG&E Numbered Document 015251, “Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems,” Table 28, “Specifications for Terminal
Connectors−Aluminum Cable-to-Flat-Bar,” Page 26 of 44, for more information.
This document is included in Appendix C.

1-3/4”

Two Holes for 1/2” Bolt

1-3/4”
Max.
Figure 9-16
Service-Terminal Conductor Connector

2017 9-14
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

Table 9-5 Approved, Compression-Type, Service-Terminal Connectors

Conductor Manufacturer and Catalog Number Tool
Size: AWG Electrical 3M Index
or kcmil Mac Homac Burndy Code Number
Specialty Company
AL-4/0- YAK28A-
NLRB4/0-8N — — 303759 4/0 AS
NTN 2G2
4/0
AHL-4/0-
MLB4/0-8N — YA28-A5 40145 — 4/0 A
BNTP
AL-350 YAK31A-
NLRB350-8N — — 303758 350 A
-NTN 2G2
350
AHL-350-
MLB350-8N — YA31-A3 40156 — 350 A
BNTP
AL-750 YAK39A-
NLRB750-8N — — 303833 700/750 A
-NTN 2G2
700/750
YA39-AM AHL-750-
MLB750-8N — 40172 — 700/750 A
2 BNTP
AL-1,00 YAK44A-
NLRB1,000-8N — — 303834 1,000 A
0-SSN 2NG7
1,000
YCAK44 AHL-1,00
MLB1,000-8N — 40178 — 1,000 A
A-2G2 0-BNTP

9.12. Underground-Service Auxiliary Pull Cabinet

Applicants must observe the following requirements when they plan to install an
underground-service auxiliary pull cabinet.
A. Applicants may use auxiliary pull cabinets when there is more than one 90°
turn in a service lateral run that will terminate in an underground
service-termination pull box. Applicants must furnish and install auxiliary
cabinets.
B. Applicants must ensure that underground-service auxiliary pull cabinets:
1. Have suitable grounding lugs and are provided with sealable covers.
2. Are constructed of sturdy metal.
3. Are weatherproof.
4. Have an 11-inch minimum depth. When the available space is not large
enough to provide the specified minimum dimensions, ask your local
project coordinator to consult with the PG&E electric meter department.

9-15 2017
Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

Lift
Handles

3/8”
Hole
1 1

Figure 9-18
Sealable Studs Welded to Flange Cabinet Showing Flanged Cover
Figure 9-17 Fastened by Sealable Rivet Latches
Cabinet Showing Stud-Mounted Cover

Hinge

Seal
1 Caution Sign
DO NOT BREAK SEAL
NO FUSES INSIDE

Figure 9-19
Cabinet Showing Hinged, Flanged Cover

Table 9-6 Minimum Connection Cabinet Sizes 1

Switch Service Capacity 3-Wire Service 4-Wire Service
(in Amps) All Measurements in Inches
225 24 x 24 24 x 24
400 24 x 30 24 x 30
600 24 x 30 30 x 36
800 30 x 36 36 x 36
1 When service is over 800 amps, consult your local PG&E project coordinator.

2017 9-16
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

9.13. Nonresidential Service Pedestals 0 - 200 Amps (EUSERC 308)

Applicants must ensure that nonresidential service pedestals meet the following
requirements.
A. The meter socket is mounted on a support, attached to the meter panel, and
provided with a sealing ring. Enclose the meter socket with an enclosing cover
that is:
1. Hinged to allow the top and front to be rotated back as one unit to expose
the metering compartment. The “A” dimension applies when the meter
compartment side panels are fixed in place and obstruct the meter socket
side clearance. Ensure that the lifting force required to open the cover does
not exceed 25 pounds.
2. Equipped with a lifting handle.
3. Sealable and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16-inch lock shaft.
4. Provided with a demand reset cover with a viewing window. Ensure that
the reset cover is sealable and lockable with a padlock having a 5/16-inch
lock shaft.
B. The test-bypass compartment cover:
1. Does not exceed a maximum weight of 25 pounds.
2. Has a fixed top and sides that allow access to the metering compartment
through a hinged door. The hinged door must be equipped with a device to
hold the door open at 90° or more.
3. Is sealable and fitted with a lifting handle.
4. Has two lifting handles if the cover is more than 16 inches wide.
C. Test-bypass blocks with rigid barriers are furnished, installed, and wired or
bused to the meter socket by the manufacturer. Connection sequences must be
line-loaded from left to right and clearly identified by block-letter labeling at
least 3/4-inch high.
Applicants must ensure that test-bypass facilities are installed with the
following clearances.
1. Facilities require 3 inches of vertical clearance from the upper test
connector stud to the upper compartment access opening.
2. Facilities require 3 inches from the center of the cable terminal screw to the
lower compartment access opening.
3. Facilities require 1-1/2 inches of side clearance from the rigid insulating
barriers to the compartment sides and 1 inch to the compartment access
openings.
D. Utility compartment covers (i.e., meter covers, demand reset covers, and pull
sections) are sealable and lockable using a padlock with a 5/16-inch lock shaft.
E. Internal equipment attached to the outer walls of the enclosure is secured in
place with devices that cannot be loosened from the outside. Do not use screws
or bolts requiring special tools to install or remove them.

9-17 2017
Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

F. The terminating pull-section of the pedestals:

1. Comply with the minimum dimensions illustrated in Table 9-7 on Page 9-19.
2. Accept a minimum 3-inch conduit.
3. Have covers equipped with lifting handles.
4. Are equipped with aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs, ranging from
#6 AWG through 250 kcmil, for terminating the service conductors.
5. Have insulated cables or busses installed between the termination lugs and
the test-bypass facilities.
6. Have protective metallic barriers, 16-gauge minimum, provided between
the pull sections and their (the applicants’) distribution sections.
7. Have a 1/4-inch minimum clearance between the applicants’ section walls
and the barriers to prevent screws and bolts from protruding into the pull
sections.
For information on structural-mounting requirements and pedestal support, consult
your local PG&E project coordinator.

2017 9-18
 Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

11” Min.
15” Max.
A A Enclosing Cover
Hinged Meter Socket
Demand
Reset Test-Bypass
Cover Test-Bypass
Cover
Support
6” Max.
Meter
Test-Bypass Section Landing Lugs
Facilities Barrier to and Factory
Extend to Conductors
36” Min. Edge of
75” Max. D Pull
Applicant Test Block Section
Section Barrier and Cover
17”
Min.

Protective Load Line

Metallic
Barrier
Figure 9-20 Figure 9-21
Front View Side View

4”
1-1/2” Typ.
3/4” Min.
Viewing
6” 2”
Window
3” Min.

6”
17” Min. Figure 9-23
Hinged Demand Reset Cover With
Polycarbonate Viewing Window
2” Min.
5” Max.
W
Table 9-7 Minimum Dimensions (Inches)
Figure 9-22
Wireway Pull Section Service W A D
Single Phase 10-1/2
10 4.5
Three Phase 12-1/2

Protective Metallic Barrier

Landing
ÁÁÁÁ NOTE: These figures represent generic design

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Lugs
configurations. To have other designs reviewed

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
3” and accepted, ask your local project coordinator
Conduit D

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
with Bell to consult with the PG&E electric metering

ÁÁ
End department.
W

Figure 9-24
Utility Pull Section - Top View

9-19 2017
Section 9, Electric Metering: Components

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 9-20
SECTION 10 ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS: 0 THROUGH 600 VOLTS
ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS:
0 THROUGH 600 VOLTS
SECTION 10
SECTION 10 ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS: 0 THROUGH 600 VOLTS
 Section 10
Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides specific dimensions and details for service and
meter equipment that is assembled by the manufacturer in freestanding,
self-supporting switchboards.

10.2. General Requirements

Applicants must meet the following requirements when they plan to install electric
switchboards.
A. Ensure that switchboard service and meter equipment is built to the
requirements of this section.
B. Ensure that metering switchboard and panelboard drawings, with current ratings
of 320 amperes (amps) or above, are submitted in triplicate to Pacific Gas and
Electric Company (PG&E) for review and approval. Drawings must contain
specific Electric Utility Service Requirements Committee (EUSERC) or Electric
and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) drawing and sheet numbers for
reference purposes. Refer to Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,”
Subsection 5.2.2., “Drawing Submittal Requirements for Metering and Service
Termination Equipment,” on Page 5-1, for detailed requirements.
C. Ensure that drawings submitted for PG&E’s review and approval include the
following information.
• The contractor’s name and address
• The applicant’s name
• The job location
D. Before authorizing the manufacture of a switchboard, an applicant must consult
his or her local PG&E project coordinator for specific general utility
requirements.
NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” at the
front of this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers
listed by area.
E. General utility requirements include the following:
• Horizontal bus-bar requirements
• Service voltage, phase, and wires
• Meter-panel requirements to determine the applicable rate schedule
• Service-termination location
• Switchboard and/or meter location(s)
• Size and number of service conductors

10-1 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

F. PG&E provides and installs meters, metering transformers, test switches, and
all secondary wiring from the metering transformers to the meter.
G. Applicants must ensure that separation exists between the meters and metering
transformers for the following reasons.
• To ensure meter accessibility.
• To prevent metering inaccuracies.
• To prevent unacceptable environmental conditions.
H. Applicants must ensure that rigid steel conduit is installed between the meter
and the metering transformers. The rigid steel conduit must be 1-1/4 inches
minimum diameter and must be limited to three 90° bends unless the applicant
provides sealable, accessible, exposed conduits.
I. Service-entrance conductors must enter the metering transformer compartment
from one end and leave from the opposite end. The direction of the feed may
be either from the top or from the bottom of the compartment.
Load conductors must not reenter or pass through a current transformer (CT)
compartment.
J. When transformer-rated meters are installed for multiple applicants, there must
be a separate service section for each installed meter and its associated service
switch.
K. When applicants are installing totalized metering, they are required to install,
own, and maintain nominal 1‐1/4-inch metal conduit between the switchboard
metering facilities.
L. Applicants should group self-contained meters and switches only when the
following conditions are met.
1. Unmetered service entrance conductors and metered load conductors are
not run in the same conduit raceway or wiring gutter.
2. Each meter position and each service switch or breaker is marked clearly
and permanently and is identified by the building owner, or a
representative of the building owner, to indicate the occupancy being
served.
M. See Subsection 10.8., “Adding New Metering Equipment to Existing
Switchboards,” on Page 10-39, before connecting a new meter panel or meter
section to an existing switchboard.

10.3. Switchboard Service Section

A switchboard service section is the section of an applicant’s switchboard

provided specifically for terminating the service conductors and for housing the
metering transformers (if required), revenue meters, test facilities, and service
switch or breaker.

2017 10-2
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.1. Standard Switchboard Service Section

Applicants must ensure that:
A. For all switchboard service sections with current ratings of 320 amps
or above, the manufacturer submits drawings, in triplicate, to PG&E for
approval. See Figure 10-13, “Pull Section,” on Page 10-24, for more
information.
B. Switchboard drawings for all co-generation and self-generation
installations are submitted to a local PG&E project coordinator for
review and approval by the PG&E electric metering department
before the switchboard is constructed or built. Ask your local project
coordinator to submit them.

10.3.2. Specifically Engineered Switchboard Service Sections

A switchboard design that does not conform to the EUSERC standards
is considered specially engineered. Typical examples are:
• Switchboards over 3,000 amps.
• Switchboards with service-breaker ratings too large for the standard
switchboard service section.
• Multimeter service sections.
The general arrangement of the specially engineered switchboard service
sections must follow, as nearly as possible, the requirements for standard
switchboard service sections, as described in Subsection 10.3.1., “Standard
Switchboard Service Section” (above), and the requirements described in
Subsection 10.3.3., “Requirements for All Switchboard Service Sections”
(below).

10.3.3. Requirements for All Switchboard Service Sections

This subsection describes the general requirements for all switchboard
service sections and applies to all applicants.
A. The general arrangement and spacing of CTs and the methods of
mounting CTs must conform as closely as possible to the illustrations in
Figure 10-1 through Figure 10-7 on Page 10-6 through Page 10-15.
B. Mount the socket meters that are used with metering transformers on
hinged panels. Mount the self-contained meters on nonhinged panels.
C. When a hinged meter panel is located behind an enclosure door, leave a
clear space of at least 11 inches between the meter panel and the door.
That is the minimum space required to mount the meter.
D. The meter panels must open at least 90° after the meters and test
facilities are in place. If needed, applicants must increase the width of
the section to meet these requirements.
E. Applicants must provide a clear space in the back of a meter panel for
the secondary wiring and associated equipment.

10-3 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

F. For hinged meter panel doors, applicants must provide at least the
minimum dimensions between the facility’s meter panel and the nearest
bus, as shown in Figure 10-1 through Figure 10-7 on Page 10-6 through
Page 10-15.
G. For nonhinged meter panel doors, applicants must provide a clear
space of at least 4 inches to any barrier or obstruction.
H. Applicants must ensure that the minimum clearance be maintained
between meters as shown in Figure 10-12, “Standard Section for
Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps−225 Amps, Installed in
Switchboards: Nonresidential,” on Page 10-22, and Figure 10-13,
“Pull Section,” on Page 10-24.
I. An applicant must maintain a minimum clear space of 4 inches directly
below the bottom slot of the meter test switch. This space permits test
leads to be connected safely.
J. Applicants must not mount more than two self-contained meters on any
removable meter panel.
K. Applicants must ensure that panels providing access to metering
transformers or a service-terminating pull section are no larger than
9 square feet in area. Removable panels must have two lifting handles.
L. Applicants must ensure that the front edge of the CT bus bars are
located in the same switchboard section, and in the same vertical plane.
M. Applicants must use either one-bolt or four-bolt connections for
switchboards that are rated 1,001 amps through 3,000 amps and have
4-inch buses installed. For switchboards with 5-inch buses, use either
two-bolt or six-bolt connections.
N. Applicants must ensure that buses are securely supported in the
metering transformer compartment to withstand the mechanical stresses
of a short circuit and to resist movement. The bus supports must not
interfere when CTs either are installed or are removed. Do not use CTs
to support the buses.
O. Applicants should ensure that the buses and CT mountings are designed
so that each of the CTs can be removed from its mounting position
directly through the access panel without disturbing any other CT.
When using multi-leaf buses, orient the buses so that they appear
“edgewise” when viewed from the access panel.
P. When using an aluminum bus, applicants must ensure that the
aluminum bus bar is plated to prevent corrosion.
Q. Applicants must ensure that all electric meter panels and all equipment
doors or panels that are intended to provide access to potential
transformers (PTs) and CTs are permanently marked or labeled to
indicate the service voltage being supplied.
R. In switchboards rated over 800 amps, applicants must ensure that
the bus bars extend from the termination section and service
landing lugs into the CT compartment. In switchboards with multiple
meters, the bus bars must extend from the termination section and
service landing lugs to the meter sockets in multimeter boards.

2017 10-4
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

S. Switchboard manufacturers must provide accessories, such as additional

Belleville washers, at the time of delivery and/or installation.
T. Switchboards must meet all of the design and test conditions of
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL891, “Standard for Switchboards.”
U. Applicants must ensure that bus arrangement and supports are provided.
An exception is the neutral bus, which may be located on either
sidewall.
V. Applicants must locate the CT compartment on the supply side of the
service-section main switch or breaker.
W. Applicants must ensure that only metering conductors pass through this
CT compartment.
X. Applicants must ensure that a neutral, bus-bar extension is provided in
the instrument transformer compartment above the lower CT bus
support when the service-section phase buses are supplied from the
horizontal cross busing.
Y. Applicants must ensure that the return flanges for the lower- and
upper-meter panel supports do not project more than 3/4 inch up or
down from the adjacent switchboard panels.
Z. Applicants must ensure that each bus has a connector that accepts a
stranded conductor with the amp capacity of the service-section main
switch or breaker.
AA. Applicants must ensure that the power-leg bus for a 4-wire delta service
is identified.
AB. Applicants must ensure that a removable link is installed in the
right-side phase bus when using the service section for three-phase,
3-wire service.
AC. Applicants must ensure that each switchboard service section is
completely barriered from other service sections, pull sections, service
switches, or disconnects. Barriers may have an opening to allow
unmetered conductors to pass between sections. The barrier between
sealed utility metering sections and the pull section must be 1/8 inch
minimum, either glastic or equivalent. The clearance between the bus
bar and glastic must be a maximum of 3 inches. No barrier is required
between individual phases and the neutral.

10-5 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.4. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through

1,200 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service
Applicants must ensure that the following requirements are met. These
requirements apply specifically to this type of CT compartment.
A. The bus dimensions are a minimum of 1/4 inch by 2 inches and a
maximum of 3/4 inch by 2 inches.
B. The barrier must be constructed of insulating, nontracking material.
Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do
not exceed 3/8 inch. Use non-conductive fasteners to attach the barrier.
C. The minimum clearance between the meter panel or socket and the bus
is 6.5 inches up to 1,000 amps, and 7.5 inches for 1,200-amp
compartments. If a clearance of 7.5 inches is not possible, use a 4-inch
bus as required in Subsection 10.3.6., “Standard Switchboard CT
Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through 3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or
Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service,” on Page 10-8.

Customer Cables or
Equipment Are Not
Allowed in Compartment

16-1/2”

Bus Support Bar

3”
3/4”
1-3/4” Min.
1”

2−3/4” See
See Bus 4-3/4” Instrument
30” Note
Drilling Transformer
C. for
Neutral Bus Detail On Compartment
Min.
Page 6-7/8”
18-3/8” 10−8 See
Note C.
for Min.
6-3/4”
4−3/4” Barrier

Test Transformer
Support Bar 8” Max.
Front View Side View

Figure 10-1
Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0 Amps−1,200 Amps,
Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

2017 10-6
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.5. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 0 Amps Through

1,200 Amps, Three-Phase, 3-Wire and 4-Wire Services
Applicants must ensure that the following requirements are met. These
requirements apply specifically to this type of CT compartment.
A. Ensure that the bus dimensions are a minimum of 1/4 inch by 2 inches
and a maximum of 3/4 inch by 2 inches.
B. Ensure that the barrier is made of an insulating, nontracking material.
Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do
not exceed 3/8 inch. Use non-conductive fasteners to attach the barrier.
C. The minimum clearance between the meter panel or socket and the bus
is 6.5 inches up to 1,000 amps and 7.5 inches for 1,200 amp
compartments. If a clearance of 7.5 inches is not possible, use a 4-inch
bus as required in Subsection 10.3.7. on Page 10-10.

Customer Cables or
Equipment Are Not
Allowed in Compartment
16-1/2”

Bus Support Bar 3”

3/4” Min.
1‐3/4”
1”

2−3/4” 4-3/4” Instrument

See Bus Transformer
30” Drilling See Compartment
Neutral Bus Link Detail On Note
18-3/8” Bus (3∅, 3-Wire Page C. for 6-7/8”
Only) 10-8 Min.

Metering Tap
Typ. 7 Locations 6-3/4”
4−3/4”
Barrier
See
Note C. 5”
for Min. Min.
Test Transformer
Support Bar 8” Max.

Front View Side View

Figure 10-2
Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 0 Amps−1,200 Amps,
Three-Phase, 3-Wire and 4-Wire Services

10-7 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

1-3/4”

3/4”

1-3/8”

5/8”

9/16” 1” Min
1−1/2” Max

Front View Side View

Figure 10-3
Bus Drilling Detail

10.3.6. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through

3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service
The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartment
shown in Figure 10-4, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment,
1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service,”
on Page 10-9. Applicants must:
A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position
when the removable section is out.
B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the
insulation.
C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull
section.
D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four
1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.
E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of
50 inches above the standing surface.
F. For a single-phase switchboard, ensure that the neutral bus is located at
the side of the compartment.
G. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus
link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch hex-head
(Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washer and nut.
H. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do
not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

2017 10-8
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

5” Min. 5” Min.
5” Min. 5” Min.

11-1/2”
4” 4”
Min. Min. Customer Cables or
Top View Equipment Are Not
Allowed in the
Compartment

Bus Support Bar

1” 2”
2-13/16”
Metering Taps
Five Locations
14-1/2”

30”
2-13/16”
1” Optional
2” Bus
Support
7”
Barrier
45” Min.
50” Max.
Above 7” Min.
Test Transformer Standing 11” Max.
Support Bar Surface 24” Max.
Front View Side View

Figure 10-4
Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps,
Single-Phase or Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

10-9 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.7. Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps Through

3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service
The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartment
shown in Figure 10-5, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment,
1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service,” on Page 10-11.
Applicants must:
A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position
when the removable section is out.
B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the
insulation.
C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull
section.
D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four
1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.
E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of
50 inches above the standing surface.
F. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus
link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch hex-head
(Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washers and
nuts.
G. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do
not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

2017 10-10
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Neutral Bus
Alternate Location of Neutral

5” Min. 5” Min. 5” Min.

5” Min. 5” Min.

11-1/2” 11-1/2”
Customer Cables or
4” Min. Top View 4” Min. Equipment Are Not
Allowed in the
Compartment
Bus Support Bar

1” 2”
2-13/16”
Metering Taps,
Five Locations B
14-1/2”

30”
2-13/16”
1” Optional
2” Bus
Support
7”
Barrier
Min. 45”
Max. 50”
Above 7” Min.
Standing 11” Max.
Test Transformer Support Bar Surface 24” Max.

Front View Side View

Figure 10-5
Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps,
Three-Phase, 4-Wire Service

10-11 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.8. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and

Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service
The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartment
shown in Figure 10-6, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment,
3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service,” on Page 10-13.
Applicants must:
A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position
when the removable section is out.
B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the
insulation.
C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull
section.
D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four
1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.
E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of
50 inches above the standing surface.
F. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus
link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch, hex-head
(Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washers and
nuts.
G. Ensure that openings in the barrier and clearances to the outer edges do
not exceed 3/8 inch. Use nonconductive fasteners to attach the barrier.

2017 10-12
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Top View

8”
8” Min.
Min.
Customer Cables or
Equipment Are Not
8” Min. to Any 7” to 11” Allowed in the
Obstruction Compartment

Bus Support

10-32 1”
Screw and
14-1/2”
Washer
Min.
1”

Optional
Bus
Support 10-32 7”
Tap
2”
Bus 8” 14-1/2” 8”
Support Min. Min. Min.
Test Transformer Support Bars
To Service Switch or Breaker
Front View

2”
2-13/16”
15”
B Removable Section

2-13/16”
15” Vented Barrier
10” Min. Min. 45” Above
Max. 50” Standing Surface

24” Max.
Test Transformer Support Bars
Side View

Figure 10-6
Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,
Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service

10-13 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.9. Standard Switchboard CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and

Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service
The following requirements specifically apply to the CT compartments
shown in Figure 10-7, “Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment,
3,001 Amps and Larger, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service,” on
Page 10-15. Applicants must:
A. Ensure that the buses are anchored so that they will remain in position
when the removable section is out.
B. Ensure that the bus corners are rounded to prevent damaging the
insulation.
C. For underground services, ensure that the buses extend into the pull
section.
D. Be aware that the maximum permissible bus unit consists of four
1/4-inch by 4-inch bars spaced 1/4 inch apart.
E. Ensure that the barrier is a minimum of 45 inches and a maximum of
50 inches above the standing surface.
F. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer secures the removable bus
link to the upper- and lower-CT bus units using 1/2-inch hex-head
(Grade 5) steel bolts with 2-1/4-inch diameter Belleville washers and
nuts.

2017 10-14
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Neutral Bus Alternate Location of Neutral Bus

8” Min. 8” Min.8” Min.

8” Min.

8” Min. 8” Min.
14-1/2” 14-1/2”

7” Min. 7” Min. Customer Cables or

Equipment Are Not
Top View
Allowed in the
Compartment

Bus Support Bar

1” 2”
2-13/16”
Metering Taps, B
Seven Locations
14-1/2”

30”
2-13/16”
1”
2”

7”
Barrier
Min. 45” 7” Min.
Max. 50” 11” Max.
Test Transformer Support Bar Above
Standing
Front View Surface Side View
Figure 10-7
Standard Switchboard, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,
Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service

10-15 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.10. Removable Link Assemblies

The removable link assemblies for 0-volt through 600-volt CT
compartments from 1,001 amps through 3,000 amps, and 3,001 amps
and larger, are shown in Figure 10-8 through Figure 10-11 on Page 10-17
through Page 10-20.
Applicants may use either a one-bolt connection, as shown in
Figure 10-8, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment,
1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (One-Bolt
Configuration),” on Page 10-17, or a four-bolt connection, as shown in
Figure 10-9, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment,
1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps, Removable Link and CT Support (Four-Bolt
Configuration),” on Page 10-18, for switchboards that are rated 1,001 amps
to 3,000 amps and have 4-inch buses installed.
For switchboards with 5-inch buses, use either two bolts, as shown in
Figure 10-10, “Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment,
3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Two-Bolt
Configuration),” on Page 10-19, or six bolts, as shown in Figure 10-11,
“Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and
Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Six-Bolt Configuration),” on
Page 10-20.

2017 10-16
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

C
L C 9/32” R
L

3/4”

9/16”

8-7/8” 11-5/8”
Link
(See Detail B)

1-3/8”

(2) 9/16” Slots

Detail A
Window-Type Drilling and Spacing of Bus (2) 9/16”
CT Holes
C
L

Insulated 1/4” x 20”

1/2” Capscrew
Transformer
Support Torque
(See Detail C) Label
Removable Link
(Furnished by Manufacturer) 14-1/2” 1-1/8” 11-5/8”

C 1-1/8”
L

5”
3-3/4” 3/8” 3/8”
1”
4”
3” 3-3/8”
Detail B
8-1/4” 1/4 x 4 Link
(Same Material as Bus)
(2) 5/16” Holes

1-5/8”
3/16” Minimum
1-1/8”
Detail C
1-1/8”
Insulated Support for CT
5/8” (Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

Figure 10-8
Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps,
Removable Link and CT Support (One-Bolt Configuration)

10-17 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

CL

Four 9/16” x 11/16” Slots

CL
No. of 9/32” R
Links, 1/8”
as required 1-3/4”
9/16”
1-1/8”
1-3/4”

Link (See Detail A) 10” 8-7/8”

1-3/4”
Window-Type 1-1/8”
CT
1-3/4”

Insulated
Transformer
Support 1/4” x 20” 4”
(See Detail C) Capscrew Detail A
Drilling and Spacing the Bus

Removable Link Assembly

(Furnished By Manufacturer)

1-1/8”
CL
1/2” Eight
CL 9/16”
9/16” Holes
3-3/4”
1” Two Holes
3/16” Min. Drilled
3” 3-3/8” 1-3/4” 1-3/4” and
8-1/4” 3/16” Min. Tapped for
1/4” x 20”
1-5/8” Capscrew
Four 5/16” Holes (Outside
Buses
1-1/8” Only)
5/8” 1-3/16” 1-3/16”
1-3/4”
Detail B
Insulated Support For CT
(Material: Insulating, Nontracking) 4”

Detail C
1/4” x 4” Link
(Same Material as Bus)
Figure 10-9
Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 1,001 Amps−3,000 Amps,
Removable Link and CT Support (Four-Bolt Configuration)

2017 10-18
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

9/32” R

3/4”

1-1/4” 1-1/4” 9/16”

2-1/2”
Number of 11-5/8” 5”
Links, as
Required 8-7/8” Four 9/16” x Four 9/16” Holes
11/16” Slots
1-7/16”

Link
(See Detail “B”) 1-3/8” 1-1/8” 14-1/2”
Utilities 11-5/8”
1-1/8”
Window-Type
CT Detail A
Drilling and Spacing of Bus
5”

1-1/4”

1-7/16”
2-1/2”
1/2” 1/4” x 20”
Capscrew 5” 1-1/4”
Insulated
Transformer Detail B
Support 1/4 x 5 Link
(See Detail “C”) CL (Same Material as Bus)

Torque
Label 3/8” 3/8”
Removable Link Assembly 4-1/2”
(Furnished by Manufacturer)
1” 1”

4-1/8” 4-1/2”
11”

1-5/8” 3/16”
Min.
5/8” 1-3/8” 1-3/8”
Two 5/16” Holes
Detail C
Insulated Support for CT
(Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

Figure 10-10
Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment, 3,001 Amps and Larger,
Removable Link and CT Support (Two-Bolt Configuration)

10-19 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

C
L
C
L Six 9/16” x 11/16” Slots
9/32” R

1/8”
No. of 1-3/4”
9/16”
Links,
as 3/4” 3/4”
Required 9/16” 1-3/4”
5”
8-7/8”
5”
Link (See 3/4”
Detail C) 9/16” 1-3/4” 3/4”
Utilities
Window-Type
CT 1-3/4”

Six 9/16” x 11/16”

Slots
Detail A
Drilling and Spacing the Bus
Insulated 1/4” x 20”
Transformer Support Capscrew
(See Detail B) Twelve C
L 1/2”
9/16” Holes
Removable Link Assembly
(Furnished By Manufacturer) 1-3/4”
C
L
1” 1” Three Holes,
9/16” 9/16”
4-1/2” Drilled and 14-1/2”
Tapped for
1/4” x 20”
Capscrew
3/4” 4-1/8” 4-1/4” 5/8” (Outside Buses
11” 5”
(Five) 5/16” Holes Only)
1-3/4”
5/8”
3/4”
3/4” 1/2”
1-3/4”
1-5/8” 3/16” Min. 1-3/4”

1-5/8” 5”
1-3/4” Detail C
Detail B 1/4” x 5” Link (Same Material as Bus)
Insulated Support for CT
(Material: Insulating, Nontracking)

Figure 10-11
Switchboards, 0 Volts−600 Volts, CT Compartment,
3,001 Amps and Larger, Removable Link and CT Support (Six-Bolt Configuration)

2017 10-20
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.11. Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps

Through 225 Amps, Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential
These requirements apply specifically to switchboard service sections for
nonresidential, 0-amp through 225-amp meter sockets. Applicants must:
A. Ensure that the manufacturer furnishes, installs, and wires or buses the
test-bypass blocks to the meter socket with four, rigid, insulating
barriers. Test blocks must conform to the requirements described in
Section 9, “Electric Metering: Components.”
B. Ensure that the metered conductors do not pass through the adjacent
metering compartments, except in enclosed wireways.
C. Ensure that the meter panels are removable with a maximum of two
meters per panel.
D. Ensure that the cover panels for the test-bypass block are sealable and
fitted with handles. Panels more than 16 inches wide must have two
handles.
E. Ensure that outdoor or rain-tight enclosures are used, as shown in
Figure 10-29 through Figure 10-32, “Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures
for Switchboards,” on Page 10-38.
F. When a neutral is required for metering or testing, ensure that an
insulated neutral terminal is provided behind each test-bypass cover
panel. The terminal must be readily accessible when the cover panel is
removed and must be individually connected to the neutral bus with a
minimum Size #8 American wire gauge (AWG) copper wire.
G. Ensure that factory-installed, full-width, insulating barriers are located
at the bottom of each test-bypass compartment. The insulating barrier
must deflect a 1/2-inch maximum from a 25-pound downward force.
H. For three-phase, 4-wire service, ensure that the seventh jaw is connected
to the body of the neutral lug with an AWG #12 copper wire.
I. For three-phase, 4-wire, delta-connected service, ensure that the
right-hand, test-bypass block (i.e., two poles) is identified as a power leg.
J. For three-phase, 3-wire service, ensure that the bus is installed to
connect the line and load poles together at the top of the center
test-bypass block and the fifth jaw is connected to this bus using an
AWG #12 copper wire.
K. For single-phase, 3-wire service, ensure that the center test-bypass block
is omitted.
L. For single-phase, 3-wire, 120/208-volt service, ensure that the center
test-bypass block is omitted and the fifth jaw is connected to the body of
the neutral lug with an AWG #12 copper wire.
M. Ensure that the meter panels are removable. However, they must not be
removable when the meter is in place. Ensure that the meter socket is
attached to the meter panel, and yet is supported independently from the
meter panel.

10-21 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

N. Ensure that each line and load position is identified clearly by using
3/4-inch (minimum) block-letter labeling.
O. Ensure that all of the meter panels are sealable and all of the securing
screws are captive.

6” Min. 6” Min.
12” Min. Socket
Support

8-1/2” Min.
Test-
Bypass
Support
3” Min.
10” Min.
1” Min. Opening
1” Min. 6” Max.
1-1/2”Min.
11” Min. Barrier
Opening 21-1/2” Min. Opening 3” Min.
Field-Installed Conductors
24” Min. May Require a Greater
Compartment
Dimension Between the
Barrier Test-Bypass Block With Four Test-Bypass Block and the
Rigid Insulating Barriers Barrier
14” Min. Compartment Barrier

Figure 10-12
Standard Section for Self-Contained Meter Sockets, 0 Amps−225 Amps,
Installed in Switchboards: Nonresidential

2017 10-22
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.12. Service Terminations for Underground Services

NOTE: For overhead services where conductors go into the bottom-fed
termination section, the applicant must connect the service-entrance
conductors to the line side of the bus stubs in the
metering-transformer compartment.
PG&E pulls and terminates its service conductors when terminating
facilities that are provided by the applicant as shown in Figure 10-13, “Pull
Section,” Figure 10-14, “Separate Pull Box,” and Figure 10-15,
“Bottom-Fed Service Section,” all on Page 10-24. The requirements for
pulling and terminating service are provided in the following paragraphs.
Applicants must:
A. When the service section is served from a pull section, ensure that the
bus or cable conductors enter in one of the following two ways:
1. Enter through the side or back in the sealable section above the
CT compartment, as shown in Figure 10-13 on Page 10-24.
2. Enter by means of horizontal cross-busing in back of the metering
compartment.
B. Ensure that all pull and terminating sections provide full-front access.
C. Ensure that all of the cover panels for the pull section have all of the
following attributes:
• Are removable and sealable.
• Have two lifting handles.
• Are limited to a maximum size of 9 square feet in area.
D. Ensure that the power leg for a 4-wire delta service is identified
effectively at the point of termination before making the service
connection.
E. Ensure that the minimum width of the pull section has the dimensions
specified in Table 10-1, “Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section
Dimensions,” on Page 10-24.

10-23 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Alternate Entry
W Service Entrance
Conductors
Bus/Cable
Standard 90”
Termination Standard 90”
Service Section
Service Section
Barrier
Barrier Sealable
Termination Barrier
X Enclosure
To To
(Also See
Standing Load Load
Section 9)
Surface
Service Standing Surface
Service
Figure 10-13 Figure 10-14
Pull Section Separate Pull Box
Standard 90” To
Service Section Load

Barrier
Cable Min.40-1/4”
Terminating
Facilities
Service
W* Standing Surface
Figure 10-15
Bottom-Fed Service Section

* The minimum width of the pull section must meet the requirements specified in
Table 10-1, below.

Table 10-1 Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions

Minimum Access Opening
Switchboard Dimension (W)2 Termination Height X
Rating (Amps)
3-Wire 4-Wire
Consult Serving Agency
Below 400
(All Measurements in Inches)
400−800 24 24
801−1,200 24 30 42 Min.1−72 Max.
1,201−2,000 30 35
2,001−2,500 — 42 60 Min.−72 Max.
2,501−4,000 Bus Duct
1 See Figure 10-15, “Bottom-Fed Service Section,” on Page 10-24, for the minimum termination
height of a bottom-fed service section.
2 If the landing stubs in the termination bus are installed perpendicular to the back of the board,
PG&E requires the enclosure dimensions to be wider to accommodate the cable installation.

2017 10-24
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.3.13. Underground, Service-Termination Pull Section (Located Below

Ground Level)
Applicants must follow the requirements in this subsection when underground,
service-termination pull sections are located below the ground level.
NOTE: To prevent the accumulation of water in meter rooms, refer to
Subsection 3.3.7., “Providing Drainage From the Conduit System,”
on Page 3-10.
A. Back Entry: When a service must enter the back of a switchboard pull
section, as shown in Figure 10-16, “Switchboard Pull Section, High
Entry,” located on Page 10-26, the pull space must have the required
X dimension above or below the cable-terminating facilities. The pull
sections must also have the required W dimension, as shown in
Table 10-2, “Pull Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground
Level,” located on Page 10-27.
B. Side Entry: When a service must enter the side of a switchboard pull
section, as shown in Figure 10-16 on Page 10-26, and in Figure 10-17,
“Switchboard Pull Section, Low Entry,” on Page 10-26, the pull-space
must have the required X dimension above or below the
cable-terminating facilities. The pull sections must also have the
required W dimension, as shown in Table 10-2.
C. Additional or Extended Section Entry: When it is not possible to
meet the requirements of dimension X because the service cannot enter
the upper or lower areas of the switchboard pull section, or because
additional space is needed, another enclosure can be attached to the
termination section enclosure. Figure 10-18, “Extended Top on
Switchboard Pull Section,” on Page 10-27, Figure 10-19, “Additional
Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section-High Entry,” on Page 10-28,
Figure 10-21, “Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section, Low
Entry,” on Page 10-32 show examples of how another enclosure
provides additional space for the cables to enter the termination section
either low or high enough to meet the X dimension and facilitate proper
cable termination. PG&E recommends that applicants submit drawings
for review before installing an additional enclosure and applicants to
attend a pre-inspection meeting.
D. Conduit: Service conduit installed in the franchise area (i.e., public
property) must not be at a depth greater than 60 inches. Conduit
entering the switchboard must be group together in a maximum of two
rows and centered horizontally in the pull-section wall.
E. X Dimension: The X dimension is the measured distance from the
horizontal center position of the termination bus to the closest service
conduit installed in the pull section for Figure 10-16 on Page 10-26
through Figure 10-18 on Page 10-27. When an additional pull section is
used, as shown in Figure 10-19 on Page 10-28 and Figure 10-20 on
Page 10-29, the X dimension is measured from the horizontal center
position of the termination bus to the closest position where the service
cable will enter into the termination section.

10-25 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

One Cable Hanger for

W Each Conductor With
Provisions to Tie the
Service
Cable to the Hanger
Entrance
Point
Service Min. 6” Rise, from
Load Entrance Point Highest Cable, for
Barrier Drip Loop
Standard
90” Pull X
X Barrier Section
Termination Moisture
of PG&E’s Standard 90” Barrier,
Service Service Section Open Top Load T
Cables and Bottom

W Cable Terminating Facilities

Front View (Back Entry) Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)
Figure 10-16
Switchboard Pull Section, High Entry

Cable-Terminating
Facilities

Standard 90”
Pull Section
X
72”
Max.
Service
Entrance
Point

Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-17
Switchboard Pull Section, Low Entry

2017 10-26
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Table 10-2 Pull-Section Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level

W 1, 2 X3 T
Switchboard Termination
1∅ 3-Wire 3∅ 4-Wire Side or Back Entry
Rating in Amps Height
Measurements in Inches
201−800 24 24 42 24
801−1,200 24 30 42 24
1,201−2,000 30 35 45 24
2,001−2,500 — 42 60 18
2,501−4,000 Bus Duct
1 Ensure that the dimension (i.e., width, depth, and height) of the additional pull section are exactly the same as the
terminating section.
2 If the landing stubs in the termination bus are installed perpendicular to the back of the board, PG&E requires the
enclosure dimensions to be wider to accommodate cable installation.
3 See Item E., “X Dimension,” on Page 10-25.

W One Cable Hanger for Each

Conductor With Provisions to Tie
Extended Enclosure Top the Cable to the Hanger
(Height 12” Min. − 36” Max.)

Service Min. 6” Rise, from

Entrance Point Highest Cable, for
Drip Loop

X
Standard
90” Pull
Section Moisture
Barrier, Open
Top and Load
Bottom T

Cable Terminating Facilities

Figure 10-18
Extended Top on Switchboard Pull Section
Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

10-27 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

W W
A Cable Hanger for Each
Conductor with Provisions to Tie the See Note 1 Cable Hangers Required
Cable to the Hanger are Required
in Both Enclosures

Min. 6” Rise, from Highest

Cable, for Drop Loop
Service Entrance Point
X
Moisture Barrier, Open Top
and Bottom
See Note 2
and Detail A

Cable-Terminating Facilities
Additional Pull Section (in Terminating Section)
Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-19
Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section, High Entry

Notes in reference to Figure 10-19.

1. Ensure that the dimensions (i.e., width, depth, and height) of the additional pull section are exactly the
same as the terminating section.
2. The height of the cable entrance window must be between 24 inches to 36 inches and the width must
be a minimum of 20 inches. The edges of the window opening must be insulated to prevent damaging
the cables. See Detail A, below.

Top

Cable Protective Insulation 24”

Material On All Inside Edges to
36”

20” Minimum

Enclosure Side Wall

Detail A - Cable Entrance Window

2017 10-28
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

W W
See Note 1
Additional Termination
Pull Section Section Cable-Terminating
Facilities
See Dimensions in
Table 10-2 on Page 10-27.
See Note 2
and Detail A

X 72”
Service Entrance Point Max.

See Note 3

Front View (Side Entry) or Side View (Back Entry)

Figure 10-20
Additional Side or Back Switchboard Pull Section, Low Entry

Notes in reference to Figure 10-20.

1. Ensure that the dimensions (i.e., width, depth, and height) of the additional pull section are exactly the
same as the terminating section.
2. The height of the cable entrance window must be between 24 inches to 36 inches and the width must
be a minimum of 20 inches. The edges of the window opening must be insulated to prevent damage to
the cables. See Detail A on Page 10-28.
3. Cables must not lie on the ground. The customer must provide a cable support system to keep the
cables off of the ground. Otherwise cable blocks must be supplied using PG&E Material Code 362118.

10.3.14. Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in Pull Boxes

or Pull Sections
Figure 10-21 through Figure 10-24, all on Page 10-32, provide diagrams
and required dimensions for cable-terminating facilities in the pull boxes or
pull sections. The following paragraphs describe the requirements for
applicants who install these facilities. Applicants must:
A. Ensure that one landing position per phase is available for each
400 amps of service capacity, as shown in Figure 10-21, “Landing
Terminal Detail,” on Page 10-32. Also, applicants must ensure that
provisions have been made for stacking lugs.
B. Ensure that bolts are provided with nuts, flat washers, and
pressure-maintaining spring washers.
C. Ensure that all parts are plated to prevent corrosion.
D. Ensure that bolts are secured in place unless working access is provided
on both sides of the mounting bus. If both sides of the bus are
accessible, one set of bolts may be used to provide two
terminal-mounting positions, one on either side of the bus.

10-29 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

NOTE: “Secured in place” means the stud will not turn, back out, or
loosen in any manner when subjected to normal, UL-approved
torques while tightening or loosening terminal nuts. This
includes cross-threaded situations.
E. In the terminal-mounting area, ensure that a radial clearance of
1-1/2 inches is provided between any bus (including bolts) and any
other bus (including horizontal cross-busing) or grounded surface, as
shown in Figure 10-22, “Spacing Requirements,” on Page 10-32.
EXCEPTIONS: The following are exceptions from these requirements.
1. The minimum clearance to the back of the pull section or to the
front of the pull-section cover may be 1 inch.
2. The neutral bus or termination may have a minimum clearance of
1 inch from any grounded surface.
3. Service cables passing over horizontal cross busing must have a
minimum 2-1/2-inch radial clearance. This distance may be reduced
to 1 inch if the horizontal bus is fully insulated.
F. Ensure that each cable-mounting position has at least 8 inches of
unobstructed space in front of the entire mounting surface when all of
the conductors are in place. This space must be accessible from the front
of the pull section.
G. Ensure that the bus stubs are firmly secured to prevent bus
misalignment and movement when the cables are installed. See
Figure 10-23, “Buses Accessible From Only One Side (Bolts Must Be
Secured in Place),” and Figure 10-24, “Buses Accessible From Either
Side (Mounting Surfaces on Both Sides of Bus),” both on Page 10-32,
for bus stub details through 2,500 amps.
H. For nonresidential services, either single or three phase, 600 amps and
above, PG&E requires applicants to install multiple sets of service
conduit. Additionally, PG&E will require applicants to supply stacking
lugs for terminating its cables in any installation that is rated
nonresidential, three phase, 1,200 amps or greater.
I. For nonresidential services, additional space (i.e., depth, width, and
termination height) may be required in any section of switchboard,
panelboard, or other enclosure used to terminate PG&E service cables.
This additional space may be necessary to provide proper clearances
between phases and grounded surfaces, as well as to accommodate the
installation of service cable.
J. Applicants should review Numbered Document 063928, “Methods and
Requirements for Installing Commercial Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities,” for the appropriate conduit
and cable requirements for nonresidential service installations. Find this
document in Appendix C. “Electric and Gas Engineering Documents.”

2017 10-30
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

K. PG&E does not allow applicants to install wall-mounted cable

termination and pull enclosures for nonresidential, three-phase
installations rated at 401 amps through 2,500 amps. For those
installations, PG&E requires a switchboard pull section or enclosure
meeting the requirements shown in Table 9-4, “Minimum Pad-Mounted
(Floor-Standing) Switchboard Pull-Section Dimensions: Residential and
Nonresidential, Single-Phase and Three-Phase,” on Page 9-11, and
Table 10-1, “Minimum Bottom-Fed Pull-Section Dimensions,” on
Page 10-24, for bottom entry. Also, see Table 10-2, “Pull Section
Dimensions (Minimums) Below Ground Level,” on Page 10-27, for side
or back entry.
L. See additional requirements in Section 9.10., “Underground Service
Cable-Termination Section or Pull Box,” on Page 9-10. The
information, tables, and figures provide additional requirements for
applicants who install wall-mounted and pad-mounted cable-termination
and pull-section equipment.
NOTE: The utility point of service (i.e., service point) is defined as the
approved enclosure and the terminated or spliced connections.

10-31 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Termination
1/2” Bolts or
Mounting 1-1/2” Min. Radial Clearance
1/2” Bolts Bolt Holes
Surface Multiple Position

1-3/4” 3-1/2”

3/4” 1” Min.

2” 1” 2” 1” Cover
1-1/2”
Min.
2”
Figure 10-21 Pull
Landing Terminal Detail Section 1” Min.
Side
Back
Figure 10-22
Spacing Requirements

(W = 2” for Single Position)

(W = 4” for Multiple Position) Bolts and Holes
for 1/2” Bolts

3-3/4” 3-3/4”

W W
8” 8” 8”
Required Unobstructed Space
Figure 10-24
Figure 10-23 Buses Accessible From Either Side
Buses Accessible From Only One Side (Mounting Surfaces on Both Sides of Bus)
(Bolts Must Be Secured in Place)

10.4. Meter and Switch Sequence Requirements

PG&E will locate meters and metering equipment ahead of (i.e., on the supply
side) the applicant’s main switch and fuse or circuit breaker. Exceptions to this
normal sequence are permitted only when required by electric codes and as
allowed by PG&E.

2017 10-32
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.5. Metering Transformer Compartments

The following requirements apply to applicants who are installing metering

transformer compartments.
A. Bus the CT compartments using a rectangular bus bar. See Figure 10-1 through
Figure 10-7 on Pages 10-6 through 10-15 for more information.
B. Ensure that the covers for metering transformer compartments are:
• Constructed of 12-gauge steel (minimum).
• Provided with lifting handles.
• Attached with sealable studs and wing nuts or using other approved means.
C. Use a copper or aluminum bus bar on both the line sides and load sides of all
CTs. When links and supports are required for through-type CTs, ensure that
the bus and removable links are constructed of a compatible material.
D. Do not use PG&E’s CTs for any purpose but metering.
E. Do not use the metering transformer compartment as a splicing or tap-making
chamber.
F. Do not use the bolts required for connecting a CT to attach other conductors.
10.6. Meter Panels
The following requirements apply to applicants who are installing meter panels.
A. Except for remote metering enclosures, use only hinged meter panels in front
of a metering transformer compartment. The meter panel must be hinged next
to the test facilities.
B. Ensure that the dual-socket metering panel is provided in switchboards
supplying a demand load of 400 kilovolt amperes (kVA) or more. See
Table 10-3, “Dual-Socket Hinged-Meter Panel Requirement,” below. Provide
two 15-inch panels, shown in Figure 10-27 on Page 10-36, or one 30-inch
panel, shown in Figure 10-28 on Page 10-37.
C. Ensure that meter panels are constructed of 12-gauge steel (minimum) and are
sealable, hinged, and reversible. Because the meter panels are reversible, the
hinges can be used on either the right side or the left side of the panels.
D. Note that the width of meter panels may sometimes require the service section
to be wider than the minimum-allowable width of the transformer
compartment.
E. Mount self-contained meters on nonhinged panels, as shown in Figure 10-12
on Page 10-22.

Table 10-3 Dual-Socket, Hinged, Meter-Panel Requirement

Switchboard Supply
Service Voltage Panel Required
Rating
277/480V 3∅, 4-Wire 401 Amps and Above Yes
120/240V 3∅, 4-Wire 801 Amps and Above Yes
120/208V 3∅, 4-Wire 1,001 Amps and Above Yes

10-33 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Blank Panel (Sealable)

Return Flange (3/4” Max.)
Hinge
Hinges
Secure Blank Panel
Filler (See Note 3) 15”
Filler Instrument
Panel to Panel Handle Transformer
Frame (See
Note 1) Compartment
with
Bolts 15”
PG&E Meter Socket
Hinge
Barrier
Return Flange
(3/4” Max.)
Max. 72-1/2”
4” Minimum Clearance
Required. (See Note 6)
50” Max.
Load Section 45” Min.

Front View Side View

Figure 10-25
Standard Switchboard Service Section With CT Compartment and Filler Panel,
0 Volts−600 Volts

Notes in reference to Figure 10-25.

1. Use filler panels where the switchboard width exceeds the allowable meter panel width. It is allowed to
hinge meter panels to hinged filler panels only if the filler panel is bolted to the switchboard in both
corners of the filler panel opposite the hinges.
2. Make the grounding connection in the main switch or breaker compartment.
3. In a split-panel arrangement, mount the kilowatt-hour (kWh) meter panel in the lower position.
4. Equip meter panels and filler panels with stops to prevent the panels from swinging inward beyond the
front surface of the switchboard.
5. Ensure that all panels and covers are sealable.
6. Ensure that the meter panels can open 90° with the meter and test facilities in place. Ensure there is at
least 4 inches of minimum clearance on the side where the meter panel door opens outward.

2017 10-34
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

PG&E Meter Socket

Only for Low Profile

Blank Panel (Sealable) 11” Min.

15” Max
Hinge

15”
Meter Panels Instrument
Bolts Transformer
30”
Hinge Compartment

Optional
Location of
10” Min. Clearance Terminating
to Obstruction Pull Section
Barrier (See Note 1)
36”
Min. 4” Min. Clearance Optional
28” Required. (See Note 1 Location of
Min. and Note 6) Terminating
Pull Section
(See Note 1)

Figure 10-26
Low-Profile Switchboard Service Section With CT Compartment for Underground,
Outdoor Application, 0 Volts−600 Volts

Notes in reference to Figure 10-26.

1. Locate the terminating pull section beside or behind the instrument compartment.
2. Use filler panels where the switchboard width exceeds the maximum-allowable meter panel width. It is
allowed to hinge meter panels to hinged filler panels only if the filler panel is bolted to the switchboard
in both corners of the filler panel opposite the hinges.
3. Make the grounding connection in the main switch or breaker compartment.
4. Equip meter panels and filler panels with stops to prevent the panels from swinging inward beyond the
front surface of the switchboard.
5. Ensure that all panels and covers are sealable.
6. Ensure that the meter panels can open 90° with the meter and test facilities in place. Ensure there is at
least 4 inches of minimum clearance on the side where the meter panel door opens outward.
7. Only for low-profile switchboards. Place the PG&E meter socket on the top panel.

10-35 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

L
L/3 L/3

10” Min.
Clearance to Four 5/16” Holes, Two Each,
Obstruction Upper and Lower Flanges
Handle Area 4-3/4” 5-3/4” 2”
9”
Min. Min.

See Note 7

3/4”

6-3/16” Dia. 1-1/4”

15” CL 4-1/8”
1-1/4” 2-1/6”

7-1/2”
3/4”
Drill and Tap Holes (When Required)
6-9/16” Center-to-Center
21-1/2” Min.
36” Max.
3/8”
3-1/4” 2-1/2”

1/4” Drill Two Holes 6-1/2” All Holes 10−32 Tap,

8-1/2” Except as Noted
10-1/2”
11”
Test Switch Mounting Plate

Figure 10-27
Standard Switchboard Service Section, 15-Inch Hinged Panel for Socket Meter and Test Switch
Notes in reference to Figure 10-27.
1. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer drills, taps, and slots the panel for the secondary test switch,
as shown. Also, ensure that the switchboard manufacturer furnishes and installs the socket with a
sealing ring.
2. Design the meter sockets to be installed on hinged panels for back (rear) connection.
3. Use the outdoor or rain-tight enclosures shown in Figure 10-29 through Figure 10-31 on Page 10-38.
4. Attach a handle at the unsupported end of the meter panel. Leave a minimum clearance of 1 inch from
the handle to the meter socket.
5. Ensure that hinges can support a 25-pound load applied at the unsupported end with a maximum
1/8-inch sag when the panel is open.
6. Secure removable plates to the rear of the panel using screws that do not protrude through the face of
panel.
7. Ensure that the meter panels can open 90° with the meter and test facilities in place.
8. Ensure that all securing screws and sealing screws on the panels are captive. Studs and wing nuts must
be sealable, when they are used.
9. Ensure that hinges are interchangeable and can be used on either the right side of the left side of the
meter panels. When using clevis-type or removable pin-type hinges, ensure that the pin can be removed
from the type of the meter panel.

2017 10-36
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

26” Min.
7” Min. 36” Max.

Drill and Tap Four

7” Holes, Each Socket
(When Required)
6-9/16” Center-to-Center

10” Min. Spare Meter Socket

Clearance to
Obstruction 6-3/16”
9”
Cutout
(Typ.)
30”
PG&E Meter Socket

7-7/16”
2-1/2”
Min.
1-1/4” Min. 10-1/2” 10-1/2” 1-1/4” Min.

4-1/8” 2-1/2” 2-1/2”

4”
2-7/16” 9” 9”
Min.
13/16” 1/4”
All Holes 10-32 Tap, Except as Noted 10-1/2”

3-1/4” 1/4” 2-1/2” 4-1/2”

Four Holes
1”
1/4” Drill
Two 6-1/2” 11”
Holes 8-1/2” Cover Plate
10-32 Tap 10-1/2”
Four Holes 11”
Test Switch Mounting Plate

Figure 10-28
Standard Switchboard Service Section, 30-Inch Panel for Socket Meters and Test Switches

Notes in reference to Figure 10-28.

1. Meter socket openings may be on either the right or the left side of the panel.
2. Ensure that the switchboard manufacturer drills, taps, and slots the panel for the secondary test switch,
as shown. Also, ensure that the switchboard manufacturer furnishes and installs the socket with a
sealing ring.
3. Paint the removable plates and attached them to the panel.
4. Construct meter panels of 12-gauge steel (minimum). Ensure they are hinged and sealable.
5. Ensure that hinges are interchangeable and can be used on either the right side or the left side of the
meter panels. When using clevis-type or removable pin-type hinges, ensure that the pin can be removed
from the top of the meter panel.
6. Ensure that hinges can support a 25-pound load applied at the unsupported end with a maximum
1/8-inch sag when the panel is open.
7. It is allowed to hinge meter panels to hinged filler panels only if the filler panel is bolted to the
switchboard in both corners of the filler panel opposite the hinges.

10-37 2017
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

Notes in reference to Figure 10-28, continued.

8. Ensure that a hinged meter panel can be opened 90° with the meter and test facilities in place. When
working with either recessed or enclosed meter panels, see Figure 10-29 below.
9. Ensure that the panel has a handle attached on both sides.
10. All securing screws and sealing screws on the panel must be captive. Stud and wing nuts must be
sealable, when they are used.
11. Design the meter sockets to be installed on hinged panels for back (i.e., rear) connection.
12. For panel widths of less than 26 inches, consult your local PG&E meter shop.

10.7. Transformer-Rated and Self-Contained Switchboards

Applicants may use switchboards consisting of a main disconnect (if required),

individual meter sockets, and associated circuit breakers or switches for
individually metered, multiple occupancies supplied from one service.
Figure 10-29, Figure 10-30, and Figure 10-31, below, show standard switchboard
service-section detail for transformer-rated meter sockets. Figure 10-32, below,
shows standard switchboard service-section detail for self-contained meter sockets
rated from 0 amps through 225 amps.

Top View Top View Top View Top View

CT
CT Section CT Section
Section
11” Min. 11” Min.
Pull
Section
Raceway

4” Min. 4”
Min
10” .
15”
Min. Min.

See
Note 1 10” Min.
10” 10”
Min. Min.
Front View Front View Front View Front View

Figure 10-29 Figure 10-30 Figure 10-31 Figure 10-32

Outdoor or Rain-Tight Enclosures for Switchboards

Notes in reference to Figure 10-29, Figure 10-30, Figure 10-31, and Figure 10-32.
1. Ensure that hinged meter panels and enclosure doors can be opened at least 90° with meter and test
facilities in place.
2. For hinged meter panel designs, see Figure 10-25 on Page 10-34 and Figure 10-26 on Page 10-35.
3. Ensure that enclosure doors can be secured in the 90° open position.
4. For approved enclosure-locking provisions, see Section 5, Subsection 5.3.4., “Electric Meter Rooms,”
on Page 5-8.
5. Ensure that outdoor or rain-tight enclosures are used.

2017 10-38
 Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

10.8. Adding New Metering Equipment to Existing Switchboards

When applicants want to install a new meter panel or meter section and connect to
the load side of an existing switchboard, the required method is to extend the
bussing from the last meter section of the existing switchboard into the new meter
section. Please contact the local project coordinator before interconnecting and
adding load. Project coordinators must ensure that the existing PG&E facilities are
upgraded, when necessary.
If the new meter panel or meter section cannot be connected to the end of the
switchboard, the interconnection may be allowed, at PG&E’s discretion, in the
utility termination section of the switchboard only if all of the following
conditions below are met.
A. The total aggregated ampacity of the new panel or new section plus the
existing switchboard metering sections is not greater than the existing
switchboard’s total (supply) ampacity rating. See Table 10-4, “Adding Up
Meter Section Ampacities,” and Figure 10-33, “Existing Switchboard,” both on
Page 10-40, to calculate the ampacities.
B. PG&E calculates the new total demand load and, if needed, installs the
additional service conductors required to meet that load. A larger transformer
may also be required because of the new total demand load.
C. PG&E identifies available spare landing positions on the terminating facilities.
The spare landing positions are in addition to the number of landing positions
required in Subsection 10.3.14., “Underground, Cable-Terminating Facilities in
Pull Boxes or Pull Sections,” on Page 10-29, that must be reserved for existing
and future installation of additional cables.
D. The utility service termination section (typically 90 inches high) does not
contain a main breaker compartment or a metering compartment. This
termination section is dedicated only for terminating PG&E service cables.
See Figure 10-33, “Existing Switchboard,” on Page 10-40.
If all of the conditions described above are met and PG&E approves the
installation of the new meter panel or meter section, applicants must follow the
applicable instructions provided in Item E. and Item F. below.
E. Overhead Service: Applicants must locate the taps in a sealable compartment
that is located above and separated from the CT and/or metering equipment
compartment.
F. Underground Service: Applicants must ensure that the taps are located in the
underground service-termination pull section or pull box. In this instance, the
applicant must ensure that the bus conductors terminate in a suitable, approved
manner. Also, the applicant must ensure that the bus conductors are positioned
so that the customer’s incoming, service-entrance conductors and the tap
connections do not encroach into PG&E’s pulling area or interfere with
PG&E’s pull and termination facilities for service-lateral conductors.

10-39 2017
Section 10, Electric Switchboards: 0 Volts Through 600 Volts

NOTE: Due to various types of configurations and arrangements of

switchboard compartments in some termination sections, the
interconnection may not meet all of the requirements listed above and
will be denied. One example is when the PG&E metering
compartment or the customer’s main breaker compartment is directly
above the utility termination section. See Figure 10-25 on Page 10-34.

Table 10-4 Adding Up Meter Section Ampacities1

Supply Meter Meter Aggregated
New Meter
Section Section #1 Section #2 Ampacity of
Example Equipment Tap
Ampacity Ampacity Ampacity All Metering
Allowed?
Rating Rating Rating Selections
No. Column 5 is not
1 2,000 1,200 800 1,200 + 800 = 2,000
less than Column 2.
Yes. Column 5 is less
than Column 2. A new
2 2,000 1,000 600 1,000 + 600 = 1,600 meter panel
< = 400 amps is
allowed.
1 Only two meter sections are shown as an example. Add up the ampacities for all meter sections and meter panels
connected to the switchboard.

Supply Meter Meter

Section Section #1 Section #2

PG&E
90” Service
Termination
Section
Disconnect Disconnect
or Circuit or Circuit
Breaker Breaker

Figure 10-33
Existing Switchboard

2017 10-40
SECTION 11 ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS: 601 THROUGH 25,000 VOLTS
AND PRIMARY SERVICES
601 THROUGH 25,000 VOLTS
ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS:
SECTION 11
SECTION 11 ELECTRIC SWITCHBOARDS: 601 THROUGH 25,000 VOLTS
AND PRIMARY SERVICES
 Section 11
Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and
Primary Services

11.1. Scope

This section of the manual provides application and installation details for
high-voltage switchboard metering equipment ranging from 601 volts through
25,000 volts.

11.2. General Requirements

The following general requirements apply when installing high-voltage electric

switchboards and primary services.
Find reference information for interconnections and primary services in
Subsection 11.4., “Interconnection Requirements and Primary Services,” on
Page 11-10.
A. The specific switchboards voltages represented in this section are:
• 2,400
• 4,160
• 12,000
• 17,200
• 20,780
B. Applicants must ensure that manufacturers contact PG&E before fabricating
the switchboards and request the specific information listed below.
• Service voltage, phase, and wiring.
• Meter panel requirements for the applicable rate schedule.
• Service-termination location.
• Switchboard and/or meter location.
• Size and number of service conductors.
• Other information and specifications necessary for fabricating switchboards
(e.g., Equipment Utility Service Requirements Committee [EUSERC]
manual, Section 400 requirements).
C. A manufacturer must submit three sets of drawings of the proposed equipment
to PG&E for pre-approval before manufacturing the equipment. The drawings
must include the contractor’s name and address, the applicant’s name, and the
job location. Field-design changes are not permitted without obtaining PG&E’s
approval before making the changes.
NOTE: Employees perform a field inspection of the switchboard at the jobsite.
The switchboard is approved only when it meets all of the specified
requirements.

11-1 2017
Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

D. PG&E must furnish and install fuses for voltage transformers (VTs), as well as
for the following equipment.
• Meters
• Metering transformers
• Test switches
• All secondary wiring from the metering transformers to the meters
When more than one switchboard is required, install a separate service section.
Ensure that it is separated completely (i.e., barriered) from other service
sections, pull sections, or service switches and disconnects.

11.3. Specific Requirements for High-Voltage Switchboards

The applicant must ensure that the equipment described below is provided and that
the included construction requirements are followed precisely when installing
high-voltage switchboards.
A. Provide and install the insulation barrier between the potential transformer
(PT) disconnect switches and the PT section. The voltage disconnect switch
handle must be visible when the outer door of the switchboard is opened.
B. Ensure that the insulated cables and conductors are made available to PG&E.
PG&E personnel will make the connections between the PT fuse holders and
metering PTs. Use only the “no-load” types of PT disconnect switches.
C. Provide individual pulling eyes above each of the current transformer (CT)
positions to aid CT lifting.
D. Ensure that all ground buses are solid bus bars with dimensions of at least
1/4 inch x 2 inches. Ground buses must be constructed from either copper or
aluminum.
E. Do not use flex braid on any section of ground buses.
F. Ensure that a ground bus bar is used for the PT disconnect.
G. Ensure that ground buses do not obstruct internal compartments, openings,
conduits, or accesses to utility facilities, equipment, or extended work areas.
H. Ensure that the ground bus is located in front of the panel to provide better
accessibility for any work to be performed. This includes the PT section.
I. Only use a gang-operated disconnect. The disconnect must have grounds in a
blade-and-jaw configuration when it is opened. Do not use fused-drawer
disconnect devices or fused, removable, section-type disconnect devices.
J. Ensure that workspaces and clearances meet the required state and local codes.
Ensure that there is an unobstructed, 8-foot area cleared in front of all
access doors. This area is required for installing and removing PG&E’s safety
grounds. Maintain this clearance area at all times.
K. Concrete floors or pads must extend out in front of the whole area a minimum
of 96 inches, as measured from the outside of the equipment’s outer doors. See
the requirements in Section 5.4.4., “Working Space,” on Page 5-12.

2017 11-2
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

L. Ensure that three neutral lugs are provided in the PT section. Use these lugs to
terminate the neutral circuit connected to the ground bus in the CT
compartment. The lugs should accept a wire range between #6 to #10.
M. Ensure the requirements in Section 5, “Electric Metering: General,”
Subsection 5-2, “Applicant Responsibilities,” are followed.
N. Ensure that permanent marking or labeling, indicating the service voltage being
supplied, is included on all electric meter panels and all equipment doors or
panels that provide access to the service terminations, PTs, and CTs.
O. Provide a bare bus that is 4 inches above and below the CTs. PG&E will use
this bare bus as a safety ground.
P. Ensure that the primary taps for the PTs are connected only to the line side of
the metering CTs.
Another alternative allows applicants to mount the meter panel in front of the
CT termination compartment if, when the meter panel is open, the compartment
is isolated fully by a removable or hinged barrier. This barrier must be sealable
using stud and wing assemblies.
Q. To attach the safety grounds, install ball studs (1/2-inch through 13-inch
threads with insulating covers) on the line and load side of the CT bus units.
Locate the studs less than 7 inches from the end of the bus unit and orient them
toward the compartment access opening. Also, install two ball studs on the
ground bus inside the CT compartment.
R. For the PT disconnect switch, apply a label stating “Meter & PT Disconnect
Switch. Does Not De-Energize Load.” Ensure that the maximum amount of
operating force required to open and close a PT disconnect switch is no more
than 50 foot-pounds.
S. Install 2 ground rods and conduits for the primary service as shown in
Figure 11-1, “Primary Switchboard Termination Section Pad Detail,” on
Page 11-4. These two ground rods are in addition to others already installed
for the switchboard.
T. Submit a termination section drawing detail on all of the switchboard drawings
submitted to PG&E. The drawing detail should show the position of the
conduit(s), ground rods, and additional internal components. Refer to
Figure 11-1 on Page 11-4.
U. Install a transparent, insulated, inner door as a safety barrier in front of the
termination section, and CT section (if separate), for all switchboards 601 volts
through 25,000 volts. Construct the safety door from a solid piece of clear
acrylic that is a minimum 6 millimeters (or 1/4 inch) thick and resistant to
damage by impact or puncture. Ensure the acrylic is rated for the voltage
served. The safety door must extend from the top to the bottom of the section.
Cover all energized parts on the switchboard and maintain all clearances. The
acrylic door must be operable with hinges on one side, and a handle and
provisions to secure the door in the open and closed positions on the opposite
side. Identify the door on all switchboard drawings submitted to PG&E.
V. An interlocking system is required to ensure the PT disconnect is locked open
fully before the PT compartment door can be opened and entered.

11-3 2017
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

To Outside Center Conduit Directly

Ground Rod Under the B Phase
Termination

2 A B C

Place Spare
Conduit in 2” Max.
To Ground Bus
Front Grout in Around
Primary Conduits
1 5 5 3 4
A A
3 4
Front of the
Termination Window 1”
1 Approx. To Ground Bus
6”

2” ± 1”

18”
Min.
6

4 2 Primary 3” Above Pad

Section A-A
3

Figure 11-1
Primary Switchboard Termination Section Pad Detail
Notes in Reference to Figure 11-1.
1. Primary conduits must be centered in the window, as shown.
2. Maintain a 6-foot minimum separation between ground rods.
3. The ground wire must be a continuous wire that connects to and runs from the outside ground rod,
under the pad, to the primary window. Then the wire must run above the pad, through the primary
window, to the inside ground rod. Finally, the wire must run from the inside ground rod to the
switchboard ground bus termination inside the termination section.

Table 11-1 Bill of Materials for Concrete Pad

Doc.
Item Quantity Description Code
No.
1 1 Pad, Concrete, Reinforced (size as required) − −
2 As required Wire, #2 AWG, Solid, Soft Drawn, Bare Copper − −
3 2 Ground Rod, 5/8” x 8’, Copperclad 187013
013109
4 2 Clamp, Ground Rod, for Item 3 187012
5 As required Conduit, Type and Size (as required) − 062288
6 As required Compacted Backfill − −

2017 11-4
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

3/4”
10” Min. 14” Min. 10” Min.

3/4”
Typical
Return
See Note 3 Flange
7”
75” Max 15 15 Clip
Height To Clip Socket
Grade Socket

7-7/16” 1-1/4”
Min.
10-1/2” 10-1/2”

4−1/8” 9” 4” 9” 2-1/2”
13/16” Min.

40”
7-7/16”

48” Min. 15 Clip ISO Meter

Height To 15 Clip PG&E Socket See Note 2
Grade Socket Meter

7-7/16” 1-1/4”
2-1/2”
Min.
10-1/2” Min. 10-1/2”

See 4-1/8” 9” 4” 9” 2-1/2”

Note 6 Min.
13/16”
2-7/16”
Note: May Be Mirror Imaged
All Holes 10-32 Tap, Except as Noted

1/4”

1/4”
3-1/4” 3/8”
2−1/2” 4−1/2”
Four Holes
1/4” Drill 6-1/2”
Two Holes 3/8”

10-32 Tap 8-1/2” 10-1/2”

Two Holes 10-1/2” 11”
11”

Test Switch Mounting Plate Cover Plate

Figure 11-2
Hinged Meter Panel with Multiple Sockets for 2,400 to 27,000 Volt Service

11-5 2017
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

3/4”
10” Min. 14” Min. 10”

3/4”
Typical
See Note 3 Return
2-7/16” Flange
4” 1−1/4”
7” 10-1/2” Min.
Min.
75” Max. 15
Height To Clip 4−1/8” 9” 2-1/2”
Grade Socket

9” 13/16”

48” Min.
15 Clip PG&E 15 Clip ISO Meter
Height To
Socket Meter Socket See Note 2
Grade

7-7/16” 1-1/4”
2-1/2”
Min.
10-1/2” Min. 10-1/2”
14”

See 4-1/8” 9” 4” 9” 2-1/2”

Note 6 13/16” Min.
2-7/16”

Note: May Be Mirror Imaged

All Holes 10-32 Tap, Except as Noted
1/4”

1/4”
3-1/4” 3/8”
2−1/2” 4−1/2”
Four Holes
1/4” Drill 6-1/2”
Two Holes 3/8”

10-32 Tap 8-1/2” 10-1/2”

Two Holes 10-1/2” 11”
11”

Test Switch Mounting Plate Cover Plate

Figure 11-3
Hinged Meter Panel with Dual Socket for 2,400 to 27,000 Volt Service
Notes in reference to Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3.
1. The panel must be constructed using 12 gauge (minimum) steel and furnished with meter sockets,
sealing rings, slotted openings, and a removable plate for installing a secondary test switch. The slotted
opening and removable plate edges must be smooth to prevent damaging the meter wiring.

2017 11-6
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

Notes in reference to Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3, continued.

2. Provide an ISO Meter Cast Ring Mounting Blank Cover. When a cast meter-mounting ring is provided,
the screws used to attach to the meter panel must provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between the
screw heads and the back of the ring.
3. Auxiliary power connections are not allowed.
4. The removable plates must be attached to the rear of the panel with screws that do not protrude through
the face of the pane.
5. Meter sockets must be designed to connect from the back. A maximum of 4 meter sockets are allowed.
6. The panel must be equipped with hinges. The hinges must permit the panel to open to 90 degrees and
be easily interchangeable, right or left, on the meter socket panel. Ensure that removable, pin-type
hinges can be removed from the top. Hinges must be located on the same side as the PG&E meter
socket.
7. When fully opened, the panel must support a 25-pound load applied at the unsupported end, with a
maximum sag of 1/8 inch.
8. The panel must have a handle attached to both sides.
9. Stud and wing nuts must be sealable when used.
10. Consult PG&E before using a panel with a width of more than 38 inches.
11. Consult PG&E for meter-socket requirements.

Table 11-2 Dimensions for High-Voltage Meter Enclosures

Switchboard Voltage Rating
Specifications 2,400 4,160/4,800 7,200/17,000 20,800/25,000
(In Inches)
Minimum, Bare-Bus Clearance
3-1/2 3-1/2 6
∅ to Ground
Minimum, Bare-Bus Clearance ∅ to ∅ 5 5 7-1/2
5 Min. 5 Min. 8 Min.
Dimension A
10 Max. 10 Max. 10 Max.
Dimension B 1 24 Min. 24 Min. 24 Min.
Dimension C 1 24 Min. 24 Min. 24 Min.
Dimension D
(Do not install neutral insulator) − − − Refer to the
Dimensions in
Dimension E 1 36 Min. 48 Min. 60 Min. Figure 11-5 on
42 Min. 42 Min. 42 Min. Page 11-9 and
Dimension F Figure 11-6 on
48 Max. 48 Max. 48 Max. Page 11-10.
Dimension G 36 Min. 36 Min. 36 Min.
Dimension H Fuse-Mounting Clip:
8-1/2 8-1/2 11-1/2
Center
Dimension H Fuse Ferrule Diameter 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8
Dimension I To Bottom of Fuse Clip or
18 18 18
Bus Extension (Whichever Is Lowest)
Maximum Dimension J to Top of Fuse
30 30 30
Clip or Bus Extension
1 Clearance to any part of the enclosure, including flanges and inner walls.

11-7 2017
Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

Top View

4” Min. Wiring Space

11”

90° Min.
Opening
Inner Insulated
Safety Barrier
90° Min. Door (See Note U.
Opening on Page 11-3.)
Pulling
Eye
Front View Side View

18” Not a 18”

Barrier
A
No-Load See 4” No-Load
Voltage Note 3 Voltage
Transformer Transformer
(VT) (VT)
36” 36” Disconnect
Disconnect
1” VT and CT A
See Note 2 Secondaries

H
J G
30” See F
30” J Notes
N I N
I H&Q
D
11”
6” Max 6” Max.
E C B
Figure 11-4
Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure: 2,400-Volt Through 17,000-Volt Service
Notes in reference to Figure 11-4.
1. Install the meter’s panel hinge on the opposite side from the enclosing door hinge on a weatherproof
unit. This allows the meter panel to be opened a full 90°.
2. Locate the 1-inch, non-metallic VT and CT secondary conduits on the same side as the meter’s panel
hinges.
3. Electrically insulated barrier.
4. Applicants must ask the local project coordinator to contact the PG&E electric meter department to
ensure that the types and models of instrument transformers they intend to install (i.e., VTs and CTs)
are approved for use in high-voltage switchgear.
5. For VT Mounting rail materials and installation details, refer to the EUSERC manual, Drawing 407.
6. Ensure that the grounding bus extends on either the left or right sides of the CT compartment’s access
area. Also, ensure that the ground terminals are two aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs accepting a
range of 6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) through 250 thousand circular mils (kcmil) conductors.
Finally, ensure that they are identified with a label reading, “Safety Grounding Point For Utility Use
Only.”

2017 11-8
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

No-Load
Voltage Arcing Horns Are Not
Transformer Permitted on No-Load
Disconnect Disconnects

15”

7”
Hinged Barrier
1” Grommet
( )

11”

16-1/8” Fuse Clip

4” Spacing (Clip Insulated
Center to Clip Barrier
36” Min. Center
75” Max.
to Standing 48-3/4” 1” Non-Metallic Conduit
11” for VT Secondaries
Surface Min.

32”
See Notes
VT
H&Q
6” Max.

4” Min. Wire Space Grounding

Lug/Bus

Side View
Figure 11-5
Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure, 17,001-Volt Through 25,000-Volt Service

Notes in reference to Figure 11-5 above and Figure 11-6 on Page 11-10.
1. For rear access to the door, refer to the EUSERC manual, Drawing 400, Sheet 2, Note 7.
2. Connect the primary taps for VTs to the line-side of metering CTs.
3. When switchgear is mounted on rails, include a permanent platform, level with the bottom of the
enclosure, in the switchgear installation to provide a clear and level working space in front of the
metering compartment.
4. Ensure that the ground bus extends on either the left or right side of the CT compartment’s access area.
Also, ensure that the grounding terminals are 2 aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs accepting a range of
6 American Wire Gauge (AWG) through 250 thousand circular mils (kcmil) conductors. Finally, ensure
that they are identified with a label reading “SAFETY GROUNDING POINT FOR UTILITY USE
ONLY.”
5. Clearance to any part of the enclosure, including flanges and inner walls.
6. For VT Mounting rail materials and installation details refer to the EUSERC manual, Drawing 407.

11-9 2017
 Section 11, Electric Switchboards: 601 Volts Through 25,000 Volts and Primary Services

Lifting Eye
1” VT (200 Lb. Min.
Conduit Strength)
Hinged
1” Grommet Barrier 90°
( )
4” Min. Min.
11” Min.
90°
Min.
90° 7−1/2” 9” 9” 7−1/2”
Min.
Exterior Door
Top View

CT Mounting Pan

75” Max.
Install Inner Insulated
to Standing
Safety Barrier Door
Surface (See Note U. on
48-3/4”
Min. Page 11-3.)

Full-Length
Ground Bussing

60” Min.
Front View
Figure 11-6
Typical, High-Voltage Metering Enclosure, 17,001-Volt Through 25,000-Volt Service

11.4. Interconnection Requirements and Primary Services

When new or existing applicants request services above 600 volts, refer to PG&E
Bulletin TD-2999B-030, “Technical Requirements for Electric Service
Interconnection at Primary Distribution Voltages,” for technical information about
primary services. This bulletin is located in Appendix B. If applicants intend to
interconnect their generation facilities to PG&E’s power system, they must refer to
the PG&E Distribution Interconnection Handbook
(http://www.pge.com/mybusiness/customerservice/nonpgeutility/generateownpow
er/distributedgeneration/interconnectionhandbook/index.shtml).

2017 11-10
APPENDIX A ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY
ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY
 Appendix A
Acronyms and Glossary

Acronyms

A ampere, amps
ac alternating current
AHJ authority having jurisdiction
AIC amperes interrupting capacity
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AWG American wire gauge
Btu British thermal unit
CCR Code of California Regulations
CDF California Department of Forestry and Fire Protection
CGT California Gas Transmission
CL centerline
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission
CT current transformer
DA direct access
DASMMD Direct Access Standards for Metering and Meter Data
DASR direct access service request
dc direct current
DOT U.S. Department of Transportation
EFV excess flow valve
ESP energy service provider
EUSERC Electric Utilities Service Equipment Requirements Committee
G.O. General Order
GRS galvanized rigid steel
GT&D Gas Transmission and Distribution
HDPE high-density polyethylene
Hz hertz
ID inside diameter

A−1 2017
Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Acronyms, continued

IMC intermediate metal conduit

IPS iron pipe size
k kilo (1,000)
kcmil thousand circular mils
K.O. knock out
kVA kilovolt ampere
MDMA meter data management agent
MSP meter service provider
NEC National Electric Code
NEM net energy metering
OH overhead
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCC point of common coupling
psig pounds per square inch gauge
PRC California Public Resource Code
PT potential transformer
PUE public utility easement
PVC polyvinyl chloride
scfh standard cubic feet per hour
SRA state responsibility areas
TBF test-bypass facility
TVSS transient voltage surge suppressor
UG underground
UL Underwriters Laboratories
U.S. United States
USA Underground Service Alert
V volts
VT voltage transformer
W watt
WC water column

2017 A−2
 Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Glossary

Applicant: This word is used generically throughout the manual to refer to the
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E) customer, or to the person or persons
representing the PG&E customer in the application/construction process, including
a contractor, design consultant, or installer. The word “customer” will be used only
when the word “applicant” is not appropriate. Also, PG&E will sometimes be
referred to as the “Company” throughout this manual.
Attachment Structure: A support that connects the service drop to the structure
while maintaining the clearances required for the service drop.
Back-Pressure Protection: A check valve between the downstream (i.e., after)
section of the meter and the upstream section of the applicant’s piping. This check
valve prevents back-flow.
Barricade (Pedestrian Traffic): A suitable barricade to help ensure the safety of
pedestrians is a heavy, wire-mesh fencing that is securely supported and is capable
of protecting people from the hazards created by the moving parts of stationary
machinery.
Barricade (Vehicular Traffic): A suitable barricade for vehicular traffic is
concrete-filled steel pipes, 3 inches or greater in diameter, securely set in an
adequate concrete pour for support. Also suitable for these conditions is a
sleeve-mounted vehicle barricade where the sleeves are set in concrete.
Branch Service Pipe: A pipe that branches off from a gas service pipe to serve
two or more applicants.
Conduit System: A system that includes conduits, conduit bends, conduit fittings,
and all related components (e.g., bell ends and cable protectors) that are needed to
install PG&E cables and conductors.
Cover: The standard distance between the outer surface of an underground facility
and the final grade level.
Double Throw Switch: A switch that isolates the applicant’s electrical system
from that of the electrical corporation or state or local agency.
Drip Loop: A minimum 18 inches of service-entrance wiring that extends out
from the service weatherhead.
Excess Flow Valve (EFV): A device installed in a gas service line at or near the
main. An EFV is used to stop the flow of gas if the velocity of the gas passing
through the valve creates a pressure difference across the valve that is greater than
a specified design limit.
High-Voltage Power Lines: Generally, high-voltage power lines are any overhead
lines that connect from pole to pole. These lines typically are 600 volts and
greater.
LB: Short-radius conduit fitting. Also known as a service elbow.

A−3 2017
Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Glossary, continued

Low-Growth Zone: Applicants must establish a 15-foot low-growth zone on both

sides of all new, electric, high-voltage lines. The zone under the electric power
lines should be a low-growth, tree-planting zone and/or a shrub- and
flower-planting zone.
Main Service Disconnect: A fusible switch, circuit breaker, or other approved
disconnect means for controlling all of (and only) the energy registered by that
meter. When the governing code or ordinance permits, the disconnect means may
consist of a group of fusible or circuit-breaker disconnects.
Mixed-Use Projects: Construction projects that include both commercial and
residential loads.
Non-Utility Facilities: Subsurface facilities not owned by any person,
corporation, partnership, business, trust, or public agency belonging to a regional,
one-call notification system.
Point of Attachment: In areas served from overhead lines, PG&E will install an
overhead service drop from the Company’s distribution line to a point of
attachment on the applicant’s residence, building, or structure. The point of
attachment may be either on the building wall near the PG&E line or on a
periscope fixed to the building’s roof, usually not more than 18 inches in back of
that wall.
Positive Means: A device that, when used or operated, interrupts or prevents the
flow of current to or from the electrical system. Also, a positive means provides
the device operator or user with a visual or definite indication of the existing
condition or state of the electrical system.
Residential: Class of customers commonly served at either 120/240 volts or
120/208 (network) with amperage ranging from 100 amperes to 320 amperes.
Mobile homes installed on foundations also are classified as residential customers.
Secured In Place: The stud will not turn, back out, or loosen in any manner when
subjected to normal, UL-approved torques while tightening or loosening terminal
nuts. This includes cross-threaded situations.
Service Delivery Point (Electric Supply): The point where PG&E’s service drop
wires/conductors connect to the applicant’s service-entrance conductors for an
overhead service. For an underground service, either the point where PG&E’s
service cables/conductors connect to the applicant’s electric meter panel,
switchboard, or service termination equipment; or the point where PG&E’s service
cables/conductors connect directly to applicant’s service-entrance conductors.

2017 A−4
 Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

Glossary, continued

Service Delivery Point (Gas Supply): The point where PG&E’s facilities connect
to the applicant’s house pipe (i.e., houseline). For residential and small
commercial meter sets, the service delivery point is the point where the male
threads of the applicant’s houseline connect to the female threads of PG&E’s gas
service tee fitting. Some commercial and industrial installations do not have
service tees installed; therefore, the gas supply service delivery point is the first
weld or fitting after the PG&E-installed bypass valve downstream of (i.e., after)
the meter.
Service Elbow: Short-radius conduit fitting. Also known as an LB.
SmartMeter] Advanced Meter Reading System: A meter using the latest radio
frequency technology to transmit meter reads automatically from the gas and
electric meters. This allows PG&E’s applicants to monitor their daily usage
information.
Standard Delivery Pressure: The gas service pressure provided to the service
delivery point at 7 inches of water column (WC). This is approximately
1/4 pounds per square inch gauge (psig), as measured at the gas meter outlet.
Switchboard Service Section: The section of an applicant’s switchboard provided
specifically for terminating the service conductors and for housing the metering
transformers (if required), revenue meters, test facilities, and service switch or
breaker.
Tariff: A schedule of rates or charges of a business or a public utility.
Test Block: A test block is a specific type of test-bypass device. A test block is
used for self-contained metering exclusively.
Test-Bypass Facility: Any mechanism used to bypass meter sockets. A
test-bypass facility is used for self-contained metering exclusively.
Utility Point of Service (i.e., Service Point): The approved enclosure and the
terminated or spliced connections.
Wet-Utility Piping or Facilities: Includes, but is not limited to, water, storm
sewer, sanitary sewer, steam, liquid fuels, oil, diesel, sprinkler, irrigation, spigots,
downspouts, drain or leach lines, propane, or lines for other liquids or volatile,
heavier-than-air gases.
Working Space: An area in front of the meter, the meter enclosure, and the
service-conductor termination and pulling facilities. A working space permits
access to the equipment and provides a safe working environment for personnel.

A−5 2017
Appendix A: Acronyms and Glossary

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 A−6
APPENDIX B ELECTRIC AND GAS SERVICE DOCUMENTS
SERVICE DOCUMENTS
ELECTRIC AND GAS
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX B ELECTRIC AND GAS SERVICE DOCUMENTS
 Appendix B
Electric and Gas Service Documents

Appendix B contains the following documents.

• Tree Planting Matrix Tables
• TD-7001B-002, “PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric
Vehicle Interconnections”
• TD-7001B-005, “SmartMetert Electric Network Requirements for Indoor
Meter Rooms and High-Rise Building Construction”
• TD-6999B-005, “Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations”
• TD-6999B-048, “Requirements for Line Side Interconnections for Distributed
Generation”
• TD-6301B-001, “Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers”
• TD-2424B-002, “New Construction Requirements for Installation of
Secondary Terminations in Customer Panels Requiring Current Transformer
(CT) Installation”
• Street Light Conduit Detail
• Flame Resistant (FR) Requirement Letter
• TD-5453B-002, “Updated Separation Requirements For Conduit in Joint
Trench”
• Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide
• Engineering Material Specification EMS-4123, “Backfill Sand”
• TD-2999B-030, “Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection
at Primary Distribution Voltages”
Applicants should access Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s (PG&E’s) Internet website
at www.pge.com/greenbook to find the latest versions of, and updates to, these
documents. Also, applicants may contact their local PG&E service planning office to
ensure their documents are current.
NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” at the front of
this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

Tree Planting Matrix Tables

Table B-1 through Table B-6 list trees that are suitable for planting near or under power
lines. The trees are listed by genus and species in each table. The list is limited and does
not include all suitable trees; however, applicants can use this information as a guideline
for choosing an appropriate tree for planting near power lines. The basic rule of thumb is
to choose plants that grow to be 25 feet or less at maturity. For additional suggestions
about appropriate trees, consult with nurseries, certified arborists, gardening books, and
websites like SelecTree at http://ecologycenter.org/directory/directory−entries/selectree/
(maintained by the Urban Forest Ecosystems Institute at Cal Poly State University).

B−1 2017
Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

PG&E urges applicants to consider planting shrubs, grasses, and flowers near and under
power lines. By selecting low-growing vegetation, applicants ensure that trimming back
intrusive growth will not be an issue.

Table B-1 Plant Matrix for Stockton, Yosemite, Fresno, and Kern Divisions 1
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Drought Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
Genus and Species Tolerant Zones 2
Deciduous (in feet)
Low spreading growth, red to yellow 4‐9, 14‐16,
Acer buergeranum Trident Maple D 25 s No
fall color. 20, 21
Green leaf varieties tolerate sun
Acer palmatum Japanese Maple D 25 h No 1‐9, 14‐24
best, fire resistance favorable.
Small rosy pink flowers in early
Cercis canadensis Eastern Redbud D 25‐40 h 3 No spring, is easily killed by 1‐3, 7‐20
over‐watering.
Branches droop but resist breakage,
Cotinus coggygria
Smoke Tree D 25 h — full sun, dramatic puffs of purple to 1‐24
`prupurea'
lavender from fading flowers.
Thorny branches, need pruning to
25 h
Crataegus laevigata English Hawthorn D — thin out excess twiggy growth, bright 1‐11, 14‐17
15 s
rose to red flowers.
Koelreuteria Branches susceptible to breakage,
paniculata Golden Rain Tree D 25 h No soil should be well drained, prune to 2‐21
`Kew' or `Fastigiata' shape.
Crape Myrtle(cultivar
Lagerstroemia x faueri Attracts birds, plant in full sun,
mentioned w/ Indian 25 h 7‐9, 12‐14,
cultivars with Indian D Yes various flower colors available, white,
names are resistant to 25 s 18‐21
names red, pink, purple.
powdery mildew)
Compact erect tree, takes pruning
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h — 5‐9, 12‐24
well, needs good drainage.
Small tree. Rarely grows to 30 feet,
favorable fire resistance, takes
15 h
Pittosporum tobira Tobira E Yes pruning well, full sun or partial shade, 8‐24
clusters of creamy white flowers in
spring.
Prunus cerasifera Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
`krauter vesuvious' 18 h spring, leaves purple/black, no or
Flowering Plum E — 2‐22
`thundercloud' and 12 s little fruit, several cultivars to choose
`newport' from.
Large shrub easily trained as
single‐stemmed tree, useful as small
Syringa reticulata Japanese Tree Lilac D 30 h 3 — 1‐12, 14‐16
shade and street tree, showy white
flowers in spring.
1 Plant Matrix for Stockton Division (Amador, Calaveras, San Joaquin, Alpine) (Zones 7, 8, 9, 14), Yosemite Division (Stanislaus, Merced,
Tuolumne, Mariposa, Madera) (Zones 1, 7, 8, 9), Fresno Division (Fresno, Kings) (Zones 1, 7, 8, 9) and Kern Division (Kern)( Zones 1, 2, 7,
8, 9).
2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.
3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing
conditions.

2017 B−2
 Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-2 Plant Matrix for San Francisco, Peninsula, and DeAnza Divisions 1
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Drought Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
Genus and Species Tolerant Zones 2
Deciduous (in feet)
Late to leaf out in spring, narrow
Acer griseum Paperbark Maple D 25 h No 1‐9, 14‐21
rounded crown, brilliant red fall color.
Rarely exceeds 15‐20 feet in coastal
areas, fire resistance favorable,
Arbutus unedo Strawberry Tree E 35 h 3 — 4‐24
hanging pink/red flowers, fruit looks
similar to strawberries.
California native, attractive changing
Cercis occidentalis Western Redbud D 25 h Yes flower and foliage color, is easily 2‐24
killed by over‐watering.
Dark green leaves, turn bronze red
25 h after sharp frost, white flowers in
Crateagus lavallei Carreiere Hawthorn D — 1‐11, 14‐17
15‐20 s spring, red and orange fruit can be
messy on walkways.
Shrubby, easily trained to a tree, new
Eriobotrya deflexa 25 h
Bronze Loquat E No growth is copper for long time before 8‐24
`coppertone' 25 s
turning green.
California native, fire resistance
favorable graceful yellowish/green
Garrya elliptica Coast Silktassel E 25 h Yes 5‐9, 14‐21
catkins 3‐inches to 8‐inches long on
males.
Koelreuteria Branches susceptible to breakage,
paniculata Golden Rain Tree D 25 h No soil should be well drained, prune to 2‐21
`Kew' or `Fastigiata' shape.
Grows best near the coast, flowers in
Leptospermum 30 h 3
Australian Tea Tree E Yes spring, needs full sun, it is quite frost 14‐24
laevigatum 30 s
sensitive.
Slow growing, takes high summer
25 h heat. Can be multi‐stemmed or
Rhus lancea African Sumac E Yes 8, 9, 12‐24
20 s trained to one stem tree. Good
screen.
Prunus cerasifera Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
`krauter vesuvious' 18 h spring, leaves purple/black, no or
Flowering Plum E — 2‐22
`thundercloud' and 12 s little fruit, several cultivars to choose
`newport' from.
Spectacular spring flowers, needs
Prunus serrulata
Flowering Cherry D 25 h — moist protected site, good soil 2‐7, 14‐20
`Kwanzan'
drainage and full sun.
1 Plant Matrix for San Francisco Division (San Francisco) (Zone 17), Peninsula Division (San Mateo) (Zones 14, 15, 16, 17) and De Anza
Division (Santa Clara) (Zones 15, 16, 17).
2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.
3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing
conditions.

B−3 2017
 Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-3 Plant Matrix for San Jose, Central Coast, and Los Padres Divisions 1
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Drought Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
Genus and Species Tolerant Zones 2
Deciduous (in feet)
Late to leaf out in spring, narrow
Acer griseum Paperbark Maple D 25 h No 1‐9, 14‐21
rounded crown, brilliant red fall color.
Orange red fall foliage, shiny red fruit,
Crateagus 25 h
Washington Thorn D — light open limb structure, least 1‐11, 14‐17
phaenopyrum 20 s
susceptible to fireblight.
Shrubby, easily trained to a tree, new
Eriobotrya deflexa
Bronze Loquat E 25 h No growth is copper for long time before 8‐24
`coppertone'
turning green.
Compact erect tree, takes pruning well,
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h — 5‐9, 12‐24
needs good drainage.
semi‐ Inexpensive hedge plant, takes pruning
Ligustrum ovalifolium California Privet 15 h — 4‐24
deciduous well.
Attracts birds and bees, good disease
Malus floribunda 25 h
Crabapple D — resistance, several cultivars to choose 1‐11, 14‐21
`adams' , `robinson' 30 s
from.
30 h 3 Fire resistant, takes full sun, it is quite 8, 9, 15‐17,
Myoporum insulare Myoporum E —
20 s frost sensitive. 19‐24
4, 5, 6,
California native, fire resistance
Myrica californica Pacific Wax‐myrtle E 25 h Yes 14‐17,
favorable.
20‐24
Does well in areas with hot dry
Olea europaea `Swan 30 h 3
Fruitless Olive E — summers, full sun, withstands heavy 8, 9, 11‐24
Hill' 25 s
pruning.
Small tree. Rarely grows to 30 feet,
favorable fire resistance, takes pruning
Pittosporum tobira Tobira E 25 h Yes 8‐17, 19‐24
well, full sun or partial shade, clusters
of creamy white flowers in spring.
Prunus cerasifera
Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
`krauter vesuvious' 18 h
Flowering Plum E — spring, leaves purple/black, no or little 2‐22
`thundercloud' and 12 s
fruit, several cultivars to choose from.
`newport'
Can be trained to be a single or
Tristania laurina 15‐18,
Elegant Brisbane Box E 25 h No multi‐stemmed trunk, excellent for
`Elegans' 19‐24
screen and boundary planting.
1 Plant Matrix for San Jose Division (Santa Clara) (Zones 15, 16, 17), Central Cost Division (Santa Cruz, San Benito, Monterey) (Zones 7, 14, 15,
16, 17) and Los Padres Division (San Luis Obispo, Santa Barbara) (Zones 2, 3, 7, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 23, 24).
2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.
3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing
conditions.

2017 B−4
 Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-4 Plant Matrix for North Valley, Sierra, and Sacramento Divisions 1
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Drought Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
Genus and Species Tolerant Zones 2
Deciduous (in feet)
Multi‐trunk large shrub or trained at
Acer ginnala Amur Maple D 25 h No nursery as one stem tree, striking red 1‐9, 14‐16
fall color.
Green leaf varieties tolerate sun
Acer palmatum Japanese Maple D 25 h No 1‐9, 14‐24
best, fire resistance favorable.
Native to dry mountain slopes,
Curly Leaf Mountain 1‐3, 7‐14,
Cercocarpus ledifolius E 20 h Yes attractive open branching pattern,
Mahogany 18, 19
OK in full sun.
Needs ample water, big multi‐stem
3‐9, 14, 15,
Cornus kousa Kousa Dogwood D 25 h No shrub can be trained to a tree, white
18, 19
flowers.
Orange red fall foliage, shiny red
Crateagus 25 h
Washington Thorn D — fruit, light open limb structure, least 1‐11, 14‐17
phaenopyrum 20 s
susceptible to fireblight.
California native, fire resistance
favorable, graceful yellowish/green
Garrya elliptica Coast Silktassel E 25 h Yes 5‐9, 14‐21
catkins 3‐inches to 8‐inches long on
males.
Crape Myrtle (cultivar
Lagerstroemia x faueri Attracts birds, plant in full sun,
mentioned w/ Indian 25 h 7‐9, 12‐14,
cultivars with Indian D Yes various flower colors available, white,
names are resistant to 25 s 18‐21
names red, pink, purple.
powdery mildew)
Compact erect tree, takes pruning
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h — 5‐9, 12‐24
well, needs good drainage.
Stands winter cold, strong winds, low
European Mountain 30 h 3 humidity and extreme heat, attractive
Sorbus aucuparia E — 1‐10, 14‐17
Ash 20 s to birds, bright fruit, clustered white
flowers.
Needs well drained soil, full sun or
Japanese Snowdrop
part shade, plenty of water. Prune to
Styrax japonica Tree, Japanese D 30 h 3 No 3‐10, 14‐21
control shape, tends to be shrubby if
Snowbell
lower branches left.
Large shrub easily trained as
single‐stemmed tree, useful as small
Syringa reticulata Japanese Tree Lilac D 30 h 3 — 1‐12, 14‐16
shade and street tree, white showy
flowers in spring.
1 Plant Matrix for North Valley Division (Shasta, Tehama, Glenn, Butte) (Zones 1, 7, 8 ,9), Sierra Division (Sutter, Yuba, Nevada, Sierra, Placer,
El Dorado) (Zones 1, 7, 8, 9) and Sacramento Division (Yolo, Colusa, Solano) (Zones 7, 8, 9, 14).
2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.
3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing
conditions.

B−5 2017
Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-5 Plant Matrix for Diablo, Mission, and East Bay Divisions 1
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Drought Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
Genus and Species Tolerant Zones 2
Deciduous (in feet)
25 h
needs room, California native, grows best in cool,
Aesculus californica California Buckeye D Yes 4‐7, 14‐19
very wide coastal foothills.
spreading
Adaptable tree, leaves are purplish
Acer truncatum “Truncatum” Maple D 20 h No red, summer green, dark purple in 1‐9, 14‐23
autumn.
Small rosy pink flowers in early
Cercis canadensis Eastern Redbud D 25‐35 h 3 No spring, is easily killed by 1‐3, 7‐20
over‐watering.
Orange red fall foliage, shiny red
Crateagus 25 h
Washington Thorn D — fruit, light open limb structure, least 1‐11, 14‐17
phaenopyrum 20 s
susceptible to fireblight.
Compact erect tree, takes pruning
Laurus saratoga Saratoga Laurel E 25 h — 5‐9, 12‐24
well, needs good drainage.
semi‐ Inexpensive hedge plant, takes
Ligustrum ovalifolium California Privet 15 h — 4‐24
deciduous pruning well.
10 h Profuse bloom in late winter, early
Magnolia stellata Star Magnolia D No 1‐9, 14‐24
20 s spring.
Attracts birds and bees, good
Malus floribunda 25 h
Crabapple D — disease resistance, several cultivars 1‐11, 14‐21
`adams' , `robinson' 30 s
to choose from.
Prunus cerasifera Profuse fragrant pink flowers early
`krauter vesuvious' 18 h spring, leaves purple/black, no or
Flowering Plum E — 2‐22
`thundercloud' and 12 s little fruit, several cultivars to choose
`newport' from.
Spectacular spring flowers, needs
Prunus serrulata
Flowering Cherry D 25 h — moist protected site, good soil 2‐7, 14‐20
`Kwanzan'
drainage and full sun.
Needs well‐drained soil, full sun or
Japanese Snowdrop
part shade, plenty of water, prune to
Styrax japonica Tree, Japanese D 30 h 3 No 3‐10, 14‐21
control shape, tends to be shrubby if
Snowbell
lower branches left.
1 Plant Matrix for Diablo Division (Alameda, Contra Costa) (Zones 15, 16, 17), Mission Division (Alameda) (Zones, 7, 14, 15) and East Bay
Division (Contra Costa) (Zones 7, 14, 15, 16, 17).
2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.
3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing
conditions.

2017 B−6
 Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B-6 Plant Matrix for North Coast and North Bay Divisions 1
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Drought Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
Genus and Species Tolerant Zones 2
Deciduous (in feet)
Adaptable tree, leaves are purplish
Acer truncatum “Truncatum” Maple D 20 h No red, summer green, dark purple in 1‐9, 14‐23
autumn.
25 h
needs room, California native, grows best in cool,
Aesculus californica California Buckeye D Yes 4‐7, 14‐19
very wide coastal foothills.
spreading
Mountain Suited to mountainous parts of the 1‐6, 15, 16,
Amelanchier alnifolia D 20 h —
Serviceberry west, attractive foliage changes color. 17
Favorable fire resistance, attracts
Callistemon citrinus Lemon Bottlebrush E 25 h Yes hummingbirds, shrub easily trained 8, 9, 12‐24
to a tree, it is quite frost sensitive.
California native, attractive changing
Cercis occidentalis Western Redbud D 25 h Yes flower and foliage color, is easily 2‐24
killed by over watering.
Branches droop but resist breakage,
Cotinus coggygria
Smoke Tree D 25 h — full sun, dramatic puffs of purple to 1‐24
`prupurea
lavender from fading flowers.
Thorny branches, need pruning to
25 h
Crataegus laevigata English Hawthorn D — thin out excess twiggy growth, bright 1‐11, 14‐17
15 s
rose to red flowers.
Shrubby, easily trained to a tree, new
Eriobotrya deflexa
Bronze Loquat E 25 h No growth is copper for long time before 8‐24
`coppertone'
turning green.
Grows best near the coast, flowers in
Leptospermum 30 h 3
Australian Tea Tree E Yes spring, needs full sun, it is quite frost 14‐24
laevigatum 30 s
sensitive.
30 h 3 Fire resistant, takes full sun, tough, 8, 9, 15‐17,
Myoporum insulare Myoporum E —
20 s fast growing, it is quite frost sensitive. 19‐24
Needs well‐drained soil, full sun or
Japanese Snowdrop
part shade, plenty of water, prune to
Styrax japonica Tree, Japanese D 30 h 3 No 3‐10, 14‐21
control shape, tends to be shrubby if
Snowbell
lower branches left.
1 Plant Matrix for North Coast (counties Humboldt, Mendocino, Lake, Sonoma) (Zones 1, 2, 14, 15, 17) and North Bay Division (counties Napa,
Marin) (Zones 7, 14, 15, 16, 17).
2 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.
3 Trees referenced as growing to 30 feet (or more) at maturity generally do not reach their maximum height except under optimum growing
conditions.

PG&E-Prohibited Trees
Applicants must not plant the trees listed in Table B-7, “Do Not Plant These Trees Under
or Within 15 Feet of Overhead Power Lines,” under or within 15 feet of overhead power
lines. When mature, these trees affect PG&E’s ability to provide and maintain safe and
reliable service. Many species of trees are not appropriate for confined spaces under
electric lines, although they may be appropriate for other locations within a development
or building site. The list is limited and does not include all varieties of unsuitable trees;
however, applicants can use this information as a guideline when choosing an
appropriate tree for planting near power lines. Applicants should plant trees that grow
higher than 25 feet at maturity at least 15 feet to the side of overhead power lines.

B−7 2017
Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Under the botanical names of the trees, occasionally only the genus is listed. Applicants
should not plant any types of trees within these genera under or within 15 feet of
overhead power lines.

Table B-7 Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of Overhead Power Lines
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Climate
Common Name vs Spread Special Considerations
(Genus and species) Zones 1
Deciduous (in feet)
Most commonly planted. Fast growing, short
Acacia baileyana Bailey Acacia — 30 h 7‐9, 13‐24
lived.
Fast dense upright growth. Roots aggressive, lifts
40 h
Acacia mellanoxylon Blackwood Acacia — sidewalks, splits easily and suckers (grows from 8, 9, 13‐24
20 s
the roots).
Native to California foothills, too big for small
Acer macrophyllum Bigleaf Maple D 30‐95 h 4‐17
gardens and streets.
Acer negundo Box Elder D 60 h Fast growing, seeds readily, subject to breakage. 1‐10, 12‐24
40+ h
Acer rubrum Red Maple D Fast growing, red twigs, branchlets and buds. 1‐9, 14‐17
20+ s
40‐100 h 1‐9, 12,
Acer saccharinum Silver Maple D Fast growth, weak wood.
equal spread 14‐24
Ailanthus altissima Tree of Heaven D 50 h Fast growing, suckers and self seeds. All zones
Relatively fast growing, invasive roots, several
Alnus spp. Alder Trees D 40‐90 h Various
native California species.
Eucalyptus Eucalyptus E 30‐200 h Fast growing, invasive roots, many species. 8‐24
Fraxinus Ash Trees D 35‐80 h Relatively fast growing.
70 h 8‐9, 12‐14,
Carya illinoensis Pecan Trees D Long tap root and leathery mature leaves.
70 s 18‐20
Some litter from fallen flowers in summer and
Catalpa spp. Catalpa D up to 70 h seed capsules in fall. Seldom develops dominate All zones
shoot without shaping.
Various species, check Sunset Western Garden
30‐100 h
Juglans spp. Walnut Trees D Book, English and Black Walnut notorious for Various
spreading
hosting aphids, honeydew is inevitable.
up to 80 h Fast growing, straight columnar trunk. Spreading
Liriodendron tulipifera Tulip Tree D 1‐12, 14‐23
40 s root system makes it hard to garden under.
Moderate growth rate, upright, somewhat cone
Liquidambar Sweetgum, 60 h shaped, fruits are spiny balls that need raking in
D 1‐12, 14‐24
styraciflua Liquidambar 25 s fall. Roots can be a nuisance in lawns or parking
strips.
Metasequoia
Dawn Redwood D up to 90 h Salt winds and hot sunlight cause foliage burn. 3‐9, 14‐24
glyptostroboides
Canary Island Date 60 h Grows slowly until it forms trunk, then speeds up
Phoenix Caneriensis Palm/E 9, 12‐ 24
Palm 50 s a little. Slow to develop new head after hard frost.
1 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

2017 B−8
 Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

Table B‐7 Do Not Plant These Trees Under or Within 15 Feet of Overhead Power Lines, continued
Evergreen Height and
Botanical Name Climate
Common Name vs. Spread Special Considerations
(Genus and species) Zones 1
Deciduous (in feet)
30‐100 h
Some faster growing than other species. Many
Pinus spp. Pine Trees D wide various
varieties.
spreading
London Plane, 40‐80 h Fast growing. Subject to anthracnose (causing
Platanus acerifolia. D 2‐24
Sycamore 30‐40 s early continuous leaf fall)
Fast growing, invasive roots systems, suckers
Populus nigra italica Lombardy Poplar D 40‐100 h All Zones
profusely.
150‐180 h Heavy limbed, wood is very brittle. Native along
Populus trichocarpa Black Cottonwood D wide mountain streams and wet lowlands west of 1‐7
spreading cascades, California to Alaska.
Can't be maintained at a reduced height without
Pseudotsuga
Douglas Fir E 70‐250 h butchering the tree. Native to Northwest America 1‐10, 14‐17
Menziesii
as far south as Fresno County.
70 h Native to California. Limbs often twisted, long 1‐3,6‐16,
Quercus lobata Valley Oak D
up to 70 s drooping outer branches can sweep ground. 18‐21
up to 80 h Various species, check Sunset Western Garden
Quercus spp. Oak Trees D Various
70 s Book.
Fast growth. Wood is brittle, roots aggressive,
Robinia pseudoacacia Black Locust D 75 h All zones
plants of spread by suckers.
50 h Fast growing. Invasive root systems and are
Salix babylonica Weeping Willow D All zones
50 s difficult to garden under.
90 h World's tallest tree! Optimum conditions to 350f.
Sequoia sempervirens Coast Redwood E 4‐9, 14‐24
30 s Fast growing. Can defeat lawns.
Various species, check Sunset Western Garden
Book. Root systems are aggressive. Branch
100 h
Ulmus spp. Elm Trees D crotches often narrow, easily split, Attracts leaf Various
70 s
beetles, bark beetles, leafhoppers, aphids and
scale. Care can be messy.
Washingtonia filifera California Fan Palm Palm/ E 60 h Fast growing, native to California. 8,9,11‐24
Washingtonia robusta Mexican Fan Palm Palm/E 100 h Very fast growing. 8,9,11‐24
60+ h
Zelkova serrata Sawleaf Zelkova D Moderate to fast growth. 3‐21
60 s
1 Refer to the climate zone map in Sunset Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

B−9 2017
Appendix B: Electric and Gas Service Documents

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 B−10
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Summary This bulletin describes the requirements for the various metering and
connection options to serve Plug-in Electric Vehicles (PEV) and Electric
Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE). These requirements apply only to
residential customers. Please refer to the 2010 Electric and Gas Service
Requirements (Greenbook) for additional service and metering information.

Affected 2010 Greenbook.

Document

Target Audience PG&E residential customers connecting Plug-In Electric Vehicles. PG&E
employees who perform customer contact or electric meter field work.

What you need

to know Plug-In Electric Vehicle (PEV)
Interconnection

PG&E Standards and Requirements

General Requirements:
Basic illustrations are provided to show the options that an existing PG&E
residential customer has to connect and meter plug-in Electric Vehicle Supply
Equipment (EVSE). Local or state officials may stipulate additional provisions for
installation of the EVSE system. All customer electric service and meter
installations must be reviewed and approved by Pacific Gas and Electric
Company. For questions regarding PG&E’s PEV requirements, please contact
the New Construction Service Center (NCSC) at 877-743-7782.

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Specific Requirements:
1. Customers must notify PG&E of the additional electrical load before
connecting a PEV. The increased load may require the electric service cables,
conduit, and meter panel to be upgraded. See note (1) below.
2. All installations must be approved by PG&E and the local (city/county)
inspection agency or the authority having jurisdiction.
3. The E-9A Time-of-Use (TOU) rate is optional for residential PEV customers
who elect to remain with a single meter. See note (2) below.
4. The E-9B TOU rate is mandatory for residential PEV customers who elect to
meter their PEV usage separately. See note (2) below.
5. This bulletin does not apply to commercial, industrial, and agricultural
customers. They are served under existing PG&E rates and rules.
6. E-9B Rate signage for multi-meter panel: PG&E will permanently attach
signage to the front of the panel and next to the dedicated electric vehicle
meter stating, “Dedicated to PEV charging equipment only; other loads must
not be connected.
7. E-9B Rate signage for two meters, one on each panel: PG&E will permanently
attach signage to the front of each meter panel as follows:
a. On the main panel stating, “Caution: This premise has a second meter for
PEV charging equipment.”
b. On the second panel stating, “Dedicated to PEV charging equipment only;
other loads must not be connected.
8. Dual meter socket adapters are not approved for use.
9. A customer owned generation system (e.g. solar, wind) is allowed to be
connected to the E-9B meter panel. The energy generated cannot serve both
(E-9B and house) meters. Customers that want to supply generation energy to
both meters will need to add a separate generation system and request a
second Net Energy Metering (NEM) account. See note (5) below.
Note:
(1) Refer to PG&E’s Electric Rule 16 for service upgrade information.
(2) Refer to PG&E’s Electric Rate Schedules for current information.
(3) Refer to the 2010 Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) for
additional information.
(4) Information for new business customers is on the New Construction
Service Center (NCSC) website.
(5) PG&E’s Generation Interconnection Services (GIS) may be reached at
[email protected] or leave a message on their hotline: 415-972-5676.

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Residential: E-9A Time Of Use (TOU) rate - Optional

Single-Meter Panel option for House and Electric Vehicle Load.

Electric Meter Panel

With Overhead or
Underground Service

EVSE

PEV All Equipment is Customer Owned and Installed

Except the PG&E Service Cable and Meter

Pros: Cons:
• No second meter panel installation • Easier to exceed lower tiered baselines
• Low off peak TOU rate • Panel upgrade may be required due to
added EV load
• High peak TOU rate

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Residential: E-9B Time Of Use (TOU) rate

Multi-Meter Panel option for House and Electric Vehicle Load.

Electric Multi-Meter Panel

With Overhead or
Underground Service

M
Signage See Specific
Requirement #6

EVSE

PEV All Equipment is Customer Owned and Installed

Except the PG&E Service Cable, Signage, and Meters

Pros: Cons:
• Maintain existing rate schedule for • Additional expense for multi-meter panel
house load installation
• Separate baseline allotment for EV • Service upgrade may be required due to
load added EV load

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Residential: E-9B Time Of Use (TOU) rate

Second-Meter Panel Option Connected to Existing Meter Panel; Overhead Service

Second Meter Panel

(With Overcurrent Protection), Electric
Sealable Gutter, Conduit, Meter
Gutter Panel
and Wiring

Customer
Sealed Utility Sections M M Distribution
See Specific Signage Section
Requirement #7 z
Signage See Specific
PEV Load Requirement #7
EVSE Sealed
Utility
Sections

PEV All Equipment is Customer Owned and Installed

Except the PG&E Service Cable, Signage, and Meters

Pros: Cons:
• Existing panel upgrade may not be • Additional expense to accommodate
required second-meter panel installation
• Maintain existing rate schedule for • Not allowed by all local (city/county)
house load inspection agencies or the authority
having jurisdiction
• Separate baseline allotment for EV
load

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Residential: E-9B Time Of Use (TOU) rate

Second-Meter Panel Option Connected to Existing Meter Panel; Underground Service

Group Panels Together

(Do Not Exceed 6 feet)

Second Meter Panel Electric

(With Overcurrent Protection), Meter
Conduit, and Wiring Panel
Sealed Customer
Utility Distribution
M Sections
M Section
See Specific Signage N
Requirement #7
See Specific
Signage
Requirement #7
PEV Load
EVSE
Customer Wire
Termination Section
Sealable Termination Enclosure and
Service Termination Point with PG&E
PG&E Service Cable

PEV All Equipment is Customer Owned and Installed

Except the PG&E Service Cable, Signage, and Meters

Pros: Cons:
• Existing panel upgrade may not be • Additional expense to accommodate
required second-meter panel installation
• Maintain existing rate schedule for • Service upgrade may be required due
house load to added EV load
• Separate baseline allotment for EV • Not allowed by all local (city/county)
load inspection agencies or the authority
having jurisdiction

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-002
Publication Date: 01/21/2011 Rev: 2

PG&E Standards and Requirements for Plug-In Electric Vehicle

Interconnections

Approved By Roozbeh (Rudy) Movafagh - Manager, Electric Distribution Standards and

Strategy

Document Daniel Jantz – Senior Distribution Specialist, 8-223-6664, 415-973-6664

Contact

Inclusion Plan This bulletin will be Incorporated into Appendix B of the 2011 Greenbook.

PG&E Information, SL2 ©2011 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

Summary This Bulletin provides SmartMeter(TM) infrastructure installation and construction

requirements for customers designing indoor electric meter rooms and high-
rise buildings. This will address below-grade and multiple above-grade meter
room situations such as those that may exist in an urban, high-rise
environment to ensure PG&E’s SmartMeter™ mesh network is established for
these customers. These provisions are required for commercial and/or
residential, single or multiple, indoor meter rooms to ensure SmartMeter™
electric network communication access and performance.

Affected Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), specifically Section 5.2
Document

Target Audience All PG&E customers including contractors, developers, builders, architects,
electricians, and plumbers. PG&E employees including electric metering,
inspectors, SmartMeter™ Operations Center (SM OC), and service planning.

What you need to To make sure customers’ SmartMeters™ are connected to the SmartMeter™
know mesh network, provisions must be made for access to mount equipment and
pathways for radio frequency communications. It is important to make the
necessary provisions for SmartMeter™ equipment early in the planning stage
for high-rise or below-grade meter room situations to prevent additional costs
from being incurred by customers and/or by PG&E. Special provisions to
facilitate the installation of SmartMeter™ technology meters and equipment
include:
• Access by PG&E personnel for placement of radio frequency equipment
• Path for radio frequency (RF) signal propagation (i.e., conduit)
• Placement of ancillary RF equipment (in-room relay or access point)
• Conduit and cable routing. Placement and mounting of antennas (MPACK or
Salt-shaker antennas)
Please review the drawings on pages 3 through 7 which illustrate these required
provisions. The minimum requirements in this bulletin should not preclude
applicable building, fire, or electrical code requirements.
Because many of the buildings and situations where these provisions will be
required are custom in nature, design plans must be submitted to your local
service planner for review by the local meter shop supervisor and any other
appropriate department. Communicating early in the design process will allow
for additional site-specific review by the SM OC Tier 4 Analyst(s).

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

Requirements for Details A, B, and C:

Conduit Size: 3-inch in diameter. The 3-inch conduit is not required to be
installed in the floor for meter rooms at grade level. Only in the ceiling.
Conduit Type: Non-metallic Schedule 40 or better.
Conduit Caps: Non-metallic permanent caps, of the same conduit type and size,
must be placed on both ends of the conduit. The cap ends should be flush with
the ceiling or floor surface.
Firestop System: Install as required by local building, fire, or electrical code.
Conduit Placement: Inside the meter room. Preferably in front of the meter
panel. The conduit must not be blocked by any equipment or objects.
Requirements for Details C, D, and E:
Firestop System: Not required. Do not install.
Conduit Size: 2-inch in diameter.
Conduit Type: Conduits installed, in walls, ceilings, floors, or concrete must be
made of rigid steel. For all other locations the conduit type can be electrical
metallic tubing (EMT) or better.
Conduit Cap: A temporary cap, of the same type and size as the conduit, must
be placed on the end of the conduit next to the meter panel.
Conduit Termination Inside: The conduit must be terminated in a horizontal
position on top of the meter panel section and 6 to 12 inches from the front of it.
The conduit must not enter or pass through the switchgear or enclosure.
Conduit Termination Outside: The conduit must terminate in a horizontal
position, inside a termination enclosure, on the outside building wall. The
conduit must be 8 to 10 feet above grade level and protrude 1-inch outward
from the wall.
Termination Enclosure: A minimum 6” x 6” x 6”, NEMA 3R rated, with an
accessible front cover. It must be permanently installed to the outside wall with
the conduit terminated inside.
Conduit Bends: Any bend must have a minimum 12-inch radius.
Junction box: A minimum size of 12” x 12” x 4” is required for pulling when the
total number of degrees of conduit bends exceeds 270 between end points or
junction boxes. A junction box is also required when the conduit run length
exceeds 100 feet. The total length of all conduits must not exceed 475 feet.
Pulling Tape: Rated for a minimum of 500 lbs and placed inside the conduit for
its entire length from end to end to facilitate cable pulling.
Transformer Rooms: Conduit must not be installed inside of a transformer
room. Conduits can be installed in the floors, ceilings, or walls of the room.
Working Space: The open area that must be maintained around all

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

switchboards, metering enclosures, and the outdoor conduit.

1 Above the entire top of switchboard or enclosure a minimum of 12 inches
of vertical clearance.
2 In front of the switchboard a minimum of 48 inches of horizontal clearance
and extending to a height 12” above the switchboard or enclosure.
3 In front of the location where the outdoor conduit terminates a minimum
area of 36 inches deep, as measured from the outside building wall, by 30
inches wide and extending upward to 12 inches above the conduit.

Figure 1 - High Rise Building with Indoor Electric Meter Rooms

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

Figure 2 - Detail A: Above Grade Meter Rooms

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

Figure 3 - Detail B: Vertically Offset Meter Rooms

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

Figure 4 - Detail C – Indoor Electric Meter Room at Ground Floor

Figure 5 - Detail D – Indoor Electric Meter Room Below Grade (Subsurface)

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-7001B-005
Publication Date: 06/22/2012 Rev: 1

SmartMeter(TM) Electric Network Requirements for Indoor Meter Rooms and

High-Rise Building Construction

Figure 6 - Detail E – Multiple Electric Meter Rooms at or Below Ground Floor

Approved By James L Meadows, Director, Smart Meter Project

Document Eric Schoenman, Senior IT Operations Analyst, SmartMeter™ Operations

Contact Center

Daniel Jantz, Senior Distribution Specialist, 8-223-6664, 415-973-6664

Inclusion Plan This Bulletin will reside on PG&E’s Technical Information Library and will be in
effect until cancelled or incorporated by another document.

The information in this Bulletin will be included into the Electric and Gas
Service Requirements (Greenbook)Manual and the Electric Meter Work
Practices Manual.

PG&E Public Information ©2012 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

SUMMARY

This bulletin describes requirements for metering and interconnecting customer generation for
all Virtual Net Energy Metering (NEMV) programs. NEMV installations will require a generation
output meter (NGOM) that only measures the generation produced and must not be tied into
any of the individual residential or common use meters at the premise. The totalized amount of
generation registered on the NGOM will be shared, through the PG&E billing process, by all
residents at the site.

Level of Use: Informational Use

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

None

TARGET AUDIENCE

PG&E customers that qualify under the NEMV program and PG&E employees who perform
customer contact and electric meter field work.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

General Requirements

1. Developers must contact PG&E’s Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) department and
submitting all applicable documents for approval before starting any installations.

2. Submit single line and elevation drawings and detailed pictures, to EGI, showing the point of
interconnection. The NEMV point of interconnection will require prior review and approval
from all appropriate PG&E departments before any connections can be made.

3. All installations and equipment must be approved by PG&E and approved by the local
(city/county) inspection agency or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) before any NGOM
meter is set by PG&E.

4. For any NEMV installation that requires a service disconnect/reconnect, developers must
coordinate with the EGI department to request for a local PG&E inspector and metering
department to inspect and approve all line side connections before reconnecting the service.

5. Developers must install UL approved service equipment with provisions for making solar
interconnections that are not in any PG&E sealed sections and ahead of all tenant / house
meters.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Specific Requirements

1. Applicants will provide, own, and install all equipment except for the PG&E NGOM and
metering equipment (i.e. current transformers, test switch).

2. NGOM panels must have test bypass facilities and meet the requirements in Section 7 of the
latest Greenbook. NGOM panels greater than 200 A must meet Greenbook requirements in
Section 9 and 10.

3. Meter height, working space and gas clearances must be met as specified in Section 5.4. of
the Greenbook.

4. Applicants will pull and connect generation conductors into the panel. Generation conductors
in the panel must be clearly labeled “NGOM PV” at the point of interconnection for PG&E field
personnel to identify.

5. NGOM meter panels must have the generation connected to the LOAD side of the NGOM
socket and the utility grid on the LINE side of the socket.

6. Point of connection

a. Underground Service Multi-meter Panels:

 Inside the main switch section, as shown in Figure 1 with approval from the
local AHJ, or

 Install a sealable wiring gutter, as shown in Figure 2

Figure 1: Point of Connection inside Main Switch for Underground Service

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Figure 2: Point of Connection with Termination Enclosure for Underground Service

b. Overhead Service Multi-meter Panels:

 Inside the main switch section, as shown in Figure 3 with approval from the
local AHJ, or

 Install a sealable wiring gutter, as shown in Figure 4

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

Figure 3: Point of Connection for Overhead Service

Figure 4: Point of Connection for Overhead Service

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

c. Multi-Meter Switchboards

 Single metered switchboards with the service termination below the

metering section cannot be used for any NEMV programs.

 Because of various types of configurations and arrangements of

switchboard compartments, the items below must be satisfied in
order to interconnect into an existing switchboard. All other
switchboard configurations will be denied interconnection.

(1) The service termination is a separate section from the utility metering
CT section.

(2) The customer has an overhead service where PGE’s service conductors
end at the weather head, see Figure 5.

To Overhead Service

New Sealable
To NGOM Termination Section
(Customer Installed)

Figure 5: Point of Connection for Overhead Service Switchboard

(3) The service termination section is bus duct.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

(4) The service termination must have clear separation from utility service
conductors and customer owned conductors to the CT section. See
Figures 6, 7 and 8.

Customer Owned
Conductors to CT
Section

Clear Separation
between Utility and
Customer Conductors

PGE Service
Conductors

Figure 6: Switchboard Pull Section with Clear Separation

Customer Conductors
Not Allowed and No
Clear Separation

PGE Service
Conductors

Figure 7: Switchboard Pull Section with No Clear Separation

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

New Sealable Raceway

To NGOM (Customer Installed)

Generation Conductors
(Customer Installed)

Figure 8: Point of Connection for Underground Service Switchboard

7. A fused AC disconnect switch must be installed within 10 feet and line of sight to the PGE
meter. The fused AC disconnect switch must all meet all of the PG&E requirements as
described in Numbered Document 060559, Disconnect Switch Requirements For Distributed
Generation Customers.

8. Final inspection requirements:

 All equipment has been approved by PG&E and the local (city/county) inspection
agency or the authority having jurisdiction.

 VNEM point of connection has been reviewed and approved by all of the appropriate
PG&E departments.

 The appropriate signage and maps are displayed to easily locate the VNEM meter
panel and AC disconnects.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-005
Publication Date: 05/15/17 Rev: 3

Virtual Net Energy Metering Installations

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Alex Yan, Meter Engineering Supervisor

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Albert Pham, Senior Meter Engineer, 415-973-6412

INCLUSION PLAN

This Bulletin will reside on PG&E’s Technical Information Library and will be in effect until
cancelled or incorporated by another document.

The information in the Bulletin will be included into the Electric and Gas Service Requirements
(Greenbook) Manual.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 8
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-048
Publication Date: 05/15/2017 Rev: 1

Requirements for Line Side Interconnections for Distributed Generation

SUMMARY

This bulletin describes requirements for any line side interconnections performed on 0-600
Volt meter panels and switchboards for Distributed Generation (DG) customers. Any type of
modification made to metering equipment that interconnects a customer generation source
ahead of the main service disconnect is considered a line side or supply side interconnection.

Level of Use: Informational Use

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

N/A

TARGET AUDIENCE

PG&E customers that are interconnecting an approved generation system under the Rule 21
tariff and PG&E employees who perform customer contact and electric field work.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

General Requirements

PG&E’s preferred interconnection for distributed generation interconnections is on the load

side of the panel, after the service main disconnect. This interconnection is described in
National Electrical Code (NEC) 705.

For line side interconnections the following requirements apply.

1. A variance request must be submitted to the PG&E Electric Generation

Interconnection department for review by Electric Metering Engineering and Electric
Distribution Standards departments.

2. The interconnection must be between the PGE meter and main breaker in the
customer section of the equipment and not in the PG&E, termination, metering, or
other sealed compartment or section.

3. Generation conduit and conductors must not be routed through any PGE sealed
sections for the purpose of interconnection.

4. A fused AC disconnect switch must be installed within 10 feet and line of sight to the
PGE meter. The fused AC disconnect switch must all meet all of the PG&E
requirements as described in Numbered Document 060559, Disconnect Switch
Requirements For Distributed Generation Customers.

5. The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) must sign off and approve the line (supply)
side interconnection and fused AC disconnect before PG&E will re-energize. PG&E
also recommends the interconnection proposal and single line diagrams are pre-
approved by their AHJ.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-048
Publication Date: 05/15/2017 Rev: 1

Requirements for Line Side Interconnections for Distributed Generation

6. The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) must sign off the building permit for the
generation system before PG&E will give the final approval to operate.

7. Residential “solar ready” service panels designed with an alternative energy (customer
generation) interconnection circuit breaker on the line side of the main breaker is
allowable. “Solar ready” panels must be EUSERC approved and have factory installed
labels showing location and ratings of the generation source

8. New pad-mounted (floor-standing) switchboards must have a separate compartment /

section for line side connections.

Specific Requirements

1. For line side interconnection requests, developers must submit the following to EGI for
review:

a. Single line diagram

b. Detailed drawings and pictures showing the point of interconnection

i. Drawings must provide specific details on where in the compartment

section and how the interconnection will be made.

ii. Pictures must show the whole service panel and marked-up where the
interconnection will be.

2. Figures 1-3 below distinguishes separation between PG&E’s and the customer’s
section and also the designated line side interconnection locations.

Main Breaker
or Disconnect

Figure 1. Typical Wall-Mounted Meter Panel

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 4
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-048
Publication Date: 05/15/2017 Rev: 1

Requirements for Line Side Interconnections for Distributed Generation

Barrier
Between
Sections

Figure 2. Switchboard with Metering Section Above the Main Breaker Section

Figure 3. Switchboard with Metering Section Above the Termination Section

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 4
 Utility Bulletin: TD-6999B-048
Publication Date: 05/15/2017 Rev: 1

Requirements for Line Side Interconnections for Distributed Generation

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Alex Yan, Meter Engineering Supervisor

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Albert Pham, Senior Meter Engineer, 415-973-6412

INCLUSION PLAN

This Bulletin will reside on PG&E’s Technical Information Library and will be in effect until
cancelled or incorporated by another document.

The information in the Bulletin will be included into the Electric and Gas Service Requirements
(Greenbook) Manual.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 4
 Utility Procedure: TD-6301B-001
Publication Date: 02/15/2017 Rev: 0

Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers

SUMMARY

This bulletin provides information on changes to existing requirements when installing 600 V
metering current transformers (CT’s) for new service. Changes for CT installations will be
addressed on new CT installs for underground service switchboards rated at 600 V or less.

Informational Use

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

Utility Procedure: TD-6301P-01, “Electric Metering – Safe Work Procedures”, Attachment 1

Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers

2017 Electric & Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)

TARGET AUDIENCE

All field personnel and customer service representatives.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

To ensure the safety of field metering personnel, CTs will be installed on new services before
the service conductors are terminated in the utility pull section. If service conductors have
already been installed, validate or create an open point that is controllable on the source and
load side of the metering section.

Review Utility Procedure: TD-6301P-01, “Electric Metering – Safe Work Procedures”,

Attachment 1 Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers, for detailed instructions.

Wall-mounted transformer-rated panels are an exception where the applicant’s service-

entrance conductors must be installed before CTs are installed. In this case, validate or
create a controllable open point on the source and load side of the metering section.

In addition, the 2017 Greenbook will communicate to developers and service planning
representatives requiring CTs to be installed before service conductors are terminated with the
requirement below:

“When applicants furnish and install approved service-entrance conductors on services

requiring current transformers for metering, the service-entrance conductors must be installed
after PG&E installs the current transformers. At the time of delivery or installation of the
service panel equipment, applicants must contact the local PG&E project coordinator to
request a current transformer metering installation prior to the applicant installing the service-
entrance conductors.

Exception: An applicant’s service-entrance conductors must be installed before PG&E installs

current-transformers for wall-mounted transformer-rated panels.”

The Greenbook Committee will determine which section(s) this requirement will reside in.

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2
 Utility Procedure: TD-6301B-001
Publication Date: 02/15/2017 Rev: 0

Installing 600 Volt Current Transformers

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Young Nguyen, Sr. Manager, Meter Engineering Programs & Technology

Craig Kurtz, Sr. Manager, Field Meter Operations

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Albert Pham, Sr. Meter Engineer, 415-973-6412

INCLUSION PLAN

This information will be included in the Technical Information Library.

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 2
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2424B-002
Publication Date: 02/15/2017 Rev: 0

New Construction Requirements for Installation of Secondary Terminations in

Customer Panels Requiring Current Transformer (CT) Installation

SUMMARY

This bulletin provides new construction requirements for installation of secondary terminations
at customer panels when current transformers (CTs) have not been installed.

Level of Use: Informational Use

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

TD-2424P-01, “Distribution Transformer Operations”

TD-7001M, “Electric & Gas Service Requirements”

TARGET AUDIENCE

All personnel who schedule, install, inspect, or supervise installation of secondary terminations
at customer electric panels.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

To prevent inadvertent energizing of secondary voltage before installation of current

transformers (CTs), the following procedures will apply:

 Secondary cable should not be terminated/landed at customer panel until CTs have
been installed by meter tech personnel.

 Best practice is to schedule CT installation prior to construction/installation of

secondary terminations.

IF secondary terminations are installed, terminated, and CTs are not set:

THEN before the work is performed by meter personnel (i.e., installation of CTs), per
the Protective Grounding Manual, Section 4B.4.2.A.2, DO one of the following:

 ESTABLISH a “Visible Open” to isolate the secondary terminations for meter

personnel, OR

 INSTALL shunts/grounds.

 A “Visible Open” is defined as follows:

 Overhead Construction: Open cutouts, primary jumpers not installed, OR

secondary cable terminations isolated.

 Underground Construction: Fuses removed, i.e., bayonet fuses at padmount

or subsurface transformer, OR secondary cable terminations isolated.

NOTE: An open secondary breaker is not considered a “Visible Open.”

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2424B-002
Publication Date: 02/15/2017 Rev: 0

New Construction Requirements for Installation of Secondary Terminations in

Customer Panels Requiring Current Transformer (CT) Installation

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Jerry Meleski, Manager

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Al Valenzuela, Distribution Specialist

INCLUSION PLAN

The content of this bulletin will be incorporated into the following documents at the time of their
next revision:

 Utility procedure TD-2424P-01, “Distribution Transformer Operations.”

 TD-7001M, “Electric & Gas Service Requirements” (Green Book).

PG&E Internal ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 2
 Street Light Conduit Detail

Notes: 1. PG&E inspector to make all final decision about trench and duct installation.
2. Do not exceed 300 degrees in any primary or secondary conduit run.
3. PG&E to inspect all work performed by applicant.
Applicant to call PG&E inspector 48 hours in advance.
4. Trench work buried without being approved by inspector will be re-opened by applicant.
5. All conduits to be proven free by means of mandrel with PG&E inspector present.
6. 2” conduit horizontal bends to be 3’ radius minimum and 2’ radius minimum vertical bends.
7. All ducts to be temporarily capped by applicant with temporary caps or rigid unglued to prevent debris
from entering duct.
8. Polyester pull tape (code: 560154) shall be used for all primary and secondary ducts.
9. All conduits to be terminated with belled ends.
10. Use approved conduit for underground installations.

Light Pole
Bus Connectors
Final Grade
Splice Box

Stubbed 1.5” min. to 2.5” max.

3/4” Minus Compacted Gravel Pole Access Hole Allows
Only 1.5” Duct.
PG&E Allowed Bends 2” Conduit

Trench Bottom
1.5” Flex Duct
Mandrel 2” Duct and Pull Cable to Here Code: 360776
Before Installing Flex Coupling. 2” to 1.5 “ Reducer
Coupling
Code: 360080

LS1
SL

ROAD

Splice Box Street Light Trench

LS1
2 SL SL SL 12”
Min.
As Required
Supply Cable

PAVED

4” Sand

SL 1−2” Duct

2” Sand
LS1 = PG&E Owned and Maintained Light

June 2014
   

  Flame Resistant (FR) Requirement Letter 
 
 
 
Dear Customers and Contractors, 
 
As you may be aware, PG&E has been in the process of implementing new work procedures for 
employees who may be exposed to Arc Flash Hazards. As of January 1, 2009 all impacted PG&E 
departments are now required to wear Flame Resistant (FR) clothing. This same FR requirement 
will also apply to,  
1) Contractors working for PG&E. 
2) Personnel or anyone working on or around PG&E facilities or equipment as of  
March 1, 2009. 

The FR clothing requirement is a significant change for everyone performing work on or around 
PG&E facilities and equipment. On March 1st PG&E began posting signage on substations, switch 
yards, power plants as well as other facilities that have been designated as areas with an FR 
requirement. This means that access to such facilities will require everyone to be in FR clothing. 
PG&E facilities such as vaults, primary and secondary enclosures, pad‐mounted and subsurface 
equipment may not have posted signage but still require everyone working in or around these 
facilities to be in FR clothing. Work will not be able to be performed in and around such facilities 
without all personnel, including non PG&E personnel, wearing the appropriate level of FR 
clothing.   

The technical requirements listed in the “Arc Flash Summary Table” on page 2, will help you 
determine who needs to be in FR clothing, what level is required, and when. 

Four pre‐screened suppliers that sell FR clothing are identified on page 3 for your convenience.  

To ensure that we address all your questions and concerns regarding this important change, 
please feel free to email us at [email protected]. A member of our 
implementation committee will get right back to you.   

PG&E’s commitment to safety is at the heart of this important change. We appreciate your 
support in ensuring the highest levels of safety for all that work on or around PG&E’s facilities.      
 

Page 1 of 4 
   

  Flame Resistant (FR) Requirement Letter 
 
Arc Flash Assessment Summary 
 
PG&E has completed arc flash hazard assessments on its electrical systems. A summary of the 
maximum identified hazards are shown in the table below. Every person shall ensure that they 
wear Flame Resistant (FR) clothing that has an arc rating greater than or equal to the available 
heat energy whenever they are within the Arc Flash Boundary. In addition, everyone shall 
ensure that they wear clothing that cannot melt or ignite and continue to burn in the presence 
of electric arcs to which personnel could be exposed, whenever they are working on or around 
PG&E electrical facilities. All garments shall have tags visible from the outside that clearly 
identifies the garment as Flame Resistant (FR) and clearly indicates the arc rating (HRC category) 
of the garment. All garments shall have a minimum rating of HRC 2. 

Arc Flash Summary Table 

Maximum Arc Flash  Maximum Arc Flash 
Work Area Description 
Hazard (cal/cm2)  Boundary (feet) 

500kV at 135”  6 20 
230kV at 63”  13 15 
115kV at 40”  24 12 
60kV‐70kV at 36”  16 9 
4kV‐12kV at 25”  25 9 
12kV ‐34kV at 28”  25 9 
4kV‐21kV at 15” (Rubber Glove) 25 9 
4kV‐21kV Switchgear  100 85 
120V‐480V Line Equipment  8 5.5 
120V‐240V Meters   8 5.5 
480V Self‐contained Meters  25 15 
480V CT Meters  8 5.5 
 

Additionally, everyone shall be required to wear FR clothing when climbing electrical towers or 
when entering posted PG&E facilities. The table above shows the maximum hazards for all of 
PG&E equipment. Electrical equipment located in powerhouses, power plants, gas compressor 
stations, office buildings and warehouses have widely varying arc flash hazards. In these 
locations, individual equipment will be labeled with the arc flash hazard information. 

Page 2 of 4 
   

  Flame Resistant (FR) Requirement Letter 
Flame Resistant Clothing Suppliers 
The names of some Flame Resistant (FR) clothing suppliers listed below are in case you wish to 
contact them (the suppliers are listed in alphabetical order.)  Each of these suppliers should be 
able to provide the necessary FR clothing required by PG&E.  
 
Aramark Uniform Services www.aramark‐uniform.com 
Jerry Hunt, Regional Account Executive 
Office:  925‐672‐2641 
Cell:  925‐389‐1853 
Fax:  925‐672‐2741 
Email:   [email protected] 
Cintas www.cintas.com
Michael Burns, Catalog Specialist 
777 139th Avenue, San Leandro, CA 94578 
Office:  510‐352‐6330 
Cell:  925‐980‐2434 
Fax:  510‐352‐0348 
Email:  [email protected]
Program Management International (PMI) www.pmionline.us
Renee Ramos‐Hitzel, President 
27 Spectrum Pointe, Suite 309, Lake Forest, CA 92630;  
Office:  949‐215‐5750 
Cell:  949‐302‐5550 
Toll Free  800‐984‐3201 
Fax:  714‐464‐4186 
Email:  [email protected]
Tyndale www.tyndaleusa.com 
Brian Degerness, Regional Sales Representative 
32716 Viewcrest Drive, Warren, OR 97053 
Office:  503‐366‐3507 
Cell:  503‐396‐1703 
Toll Free  888‐366‐3507 
Fax:  503‐961‐0668 
Email:  [email protected] 
 

Page 3 of 4 
   

  Flame Resistant (FR) Requirement Letter 
 

It is the responsibility of each customer to check with the suppliers to determine their pricing, 
ability to meet the minimum PG&E specifications [i.e., Hazard/Risk Category (HRC) of 2 ‐ 
minimum arc rating required for the protective garment], and availability. The contact 
information listed for each of these suppliers is provided for your information only and is not an 
endorsement of one supplier over another. 

Sincerely, 

PG&E Arc Flash Hazard Program Committee 

Page 4 of 4 
 Utility Bulletin: TD-5453B-002
Publication Date: 07/10/2015 Effective Date: 07/31/2015 Rev:
1

Updated Separation Requirements For Conduit in Joint Trench

SUMMARY

This utility bulletin updates Electric Standard 062288, "Underground Conduits" and Utility
Standard S5453, “Joint Trench” with the requirements listed below:

The minimum separation requirement must be 1.5 inch (in.) between:

 Secondary to: Secondary, service, and streetlight conduit

 Service to: Service and streetlight conduit

The minimum separation requirement must be 3 in. between:

 Primary-to-primary conduit

 Primary to: Secondary, service, and streetlight conduit

This increase in separation is required to improve access to the conduits during future
maintenance, re-routing and replacement of the facilities.

Note that the 3 in. requirement above is already included in Electric Standard 062288 but not
in Utility Standard S5453.

Additionally, separation requirements between Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or
Company) Joint Trench utilities and Non-PG&E owned Foreign Electric duct (e.g., non-PG&E
Streetlight) have been added to the updated Table, "Minimum Separation and Clearance
Requirements (Inches)", in this utility bulletin. These are not new requirements, but they were
not previously located in the Exhibit B table.

The requirements of this bulletin apply to any PG&E job estimate and any PG&E design jobs
for New Business and Work Request by Others (NB/WRO), and on any Applicant Design jobs
where Globals are issued after the effective date of this bulletin (7/31/2015).

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench”

Utility Standard S5453, Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide”

Electric Standard 062288, "Underground Conduits"

TARGET AUDIENCE

Personnel in: electric construction, electric distribution engineering, electric estimating, gas
distribution estimating, gas distribution engineering, customer service delivery estimating, and
gas construction management.

PG&E Internal ©2016 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3
 Utility Bulletin: TD-5453B-002
Publication Date: 07/10/2015 Effective Date: 07/31/2015 Rev:
1

Updated Separation Requirements For Conduit in Joint Trench

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, currently shows:

Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B, is updated per this bulletin as follows:

MINIMUM SEPARATION AND CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS (Inches)

G DUCT DB C S P SL
T T
G (GAS) - 12 12 12 6 12 6
SEE NOTES 4,7, & 13
T (TELEPHONE) DUCT 12 - 1 1 12 12 12

T (TELEPHONE) DIRECT BURY 12 1 - 1 12 12 12

C (CATV) 12 1 1 - 12 12 12

S (ELECTRIC SECONDARY) 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5

P (ELECTRIC PRIMARY) 12 12 12 12 3 3 3

SL (STREETLIGHT) 6 12 12 12 1.5 3 1.5

SEE NOTE 5
FE* (FOREIGN ELECTRIC 12 12** 12** 12** 12 12 12
SOURCES, NON-PG&E*)
SEE NOTE 5
*Must be considered a ‘Utility’ as defined in Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.”
Notes 4, 5, 7, and 13 are located in Utility Standard S5453, Exhibit B, “Joint Trench Configurations
and Occupancy Guide.”
**For exceptions, refer to G.O. 128 rule, Section B, Items (1) and (2).
PG&E Internal ©2016 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 3
 Utility Bulletin: TD-5453B-002
Publication Date: 07/10/2015 Effective Date: 07/31/2015 Rev:
1

Updated Separation Requirements For Conduit in Joint Trench

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Jim Herren, Manager, Gas Distribution Engineering and Design

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Lisseth Villareal, Electric Standards Engineer, Sr

David Krause, Gas Engineer, Codes and Standards - Design and Construction

John Pickering, Expert Business Process Analyst, Distribution Engineering and Design
Support

Daniel Jantz, Expert Engineering Standards Technical Specialist, EAM Distribution Standards

INCLUSION PLAN

This update will be included in the next revision of Electric Standard 0662288 “Underground
Conduits” and Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench,” Exhibit B.

PG&E Internal ©2016 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 3
 TYPICAL TYPICAL
DISTRIBUTION TRENCH SERVICE TRENCH
Joint Trench − Franchise Area or P.U.E. 18 INCHES
18 INCHES MINIMUM
MINIMUM
STREET
SIDE

18" *
24" MIN.*

39" MINIMUM
(NON PG&E) (SEE NOTE 7)
T C

3"
(PREFERRED)
**

54" Minimum

12"
T C SL

5"
6"
6"
S G

2" 4"
Min.
BEDDING MATERIAL
G
5"

FIG. 2
See Note 5 (View facing Distribution Trench)
7"

3" MIN
MINIMUM SEPARATION AND
7"

P SL S
CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
DUCT DB
FIG. 1 G T T C S P
G (GAS) SEE NOTES 4, 7 & 13  12" 12" 12" 6" 12"
Placement of the Distribution Trench within a P.U.E. is the preferred method. Trenching in the

Franchise Area should only be used when a P.U.E. is unobtainable or otherwise infeasible. T (TELEPHONE) DUCT 12"  1" 1" 12" 12"
* Increase cover to 30" in the street area (see Note 3). DIRECT
T (TELEPHONE) 12" 1"  1" 12" 12"
** Separation must be 12" unless a reduction (6") is mutually agreed upon by affected utilities. BURY
C (CATV) 12" 1" 1"  12" 12"
STANDARD TRENCH LOCATIONS S (ELECTRIC SECONDARY) 6" 12" 12" 12"  3"
P (ELECTRIC PRIMARY) 12" 12" 12" 12" 3" 
TO CUSTOMER

SEE
SL (STREETLIGHT) 6" 12" 12" 12" 1" 3"
LONG SIDE

NOTE 5
SERVICE
TRENCH

SEPARATION AND CLEARANCE DEFINITIONS

Cover:
TYPICAL RECONSTRUCTION The term cover" means the radial distance between the sur-
FRANCHISE AREA

TRENCH LOCATION face of an underground cable, conduit, pipe, or other substruc-

ture and the surface elevation (grade).
Backfill:
STREET The term backfill" refers to the materials used to refill a cut or
GUTTER
CURB other excavation, or the act of such refilling after any needed
SIDEWALK
shading is performed.
R/W Shading:
The term shading" refers to the materials used to provide a
measure of separation between facilities installed at different
P.U.E.

JT JT JT JT JT JT JT levels within an excavation or cut.

TYPICAL NEW (J/T) LOCATION Lift:
SHORT SIDE

The term lift" is a layer of fill as spread or as compacted or a

TO CUSTOMER

SERVICE
TRENCH

measurement of material depth that is the rated effective soil

depth a compactor can achieve.
Bedding:
The term bedding" refers to the materials installed beneath
facilities at the bottom of a cut or other excavation and in-
tended to provide support and/or protection for those facilities.

JOINT TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS 09−27−06

& OCCUPANCY GUIDE
S5453, Exhibit B PACIFIC GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY Page 1 of 4
 OTHER TYPICAL PG&E DISTRIBUTION JOINT TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS

STREET STREET STREET

(30" in franchise area)

(30" in franchise area)

(30" in franchise area)

SIDE 36" SIDE 24" SIDE 30"

24"

24"

24"
CATV CATV CATV
& PHONE & PHONE & PHONE

T C C T C 5" T C 5"

T T 6" 6"

12”
6" G 5" G 5"

G 5" 6" 6"

6" P 7" S SL 5"

S
PG&E ELECT.
& STREETLIGHT 6"
P P S S
7"
FIG. 4 (PG&E Owned)
E2 5"
24” Wide Joint Trench 2ND
FIG. 3 ELECT. 6"
36” Wide Joint Trench
P 7"
PG&E 2ND
ELECT. ELECT. 6"

E2 7"

FIG. 5
Joint Trench With Second
Electric Utility

Trench Configuration Notes

The trench configurations shown in this guide are to be considered typical" only and that other trench widths, depths,
as well as utility configurations (placement) may be used, provided all minimum requirements for separation,
clearances, and cover are observed. In no case shall electric primary or secondary (excluding street lighting) be
placed at a level higher than that of the gas and communications level. Gas shall be placed at the same level
or below communications when gas is placed above the electric facilities.

Special Notes for Joint Trench With Second Electric Utility

A. Refer to Sheet 3 for General Notes.
B. A red 3-inch wide PG&E Electric Line in Conduit" plastic marking tape, Code 375054, shall be installed, spiral wound in a
manner that allows for the tape to be readily visible every 3 feet, with each conduit intended to be used for PG&E electric
facilities. An equivalent red tape marked to identify the owner shall be installed with the conduit intended to be used for the
second electric facility.
C. Each utility shall ensure adequate grounding between electric facilities is provided (See UO Standard S5453, Joint Trench").
D. Provide a minimum of 2 inches of compacted PG&E approved bedding material as a trench leveling concourse, where required.
See General Notes Items 11 and 12 (on Page 3), in order to obtain proper compaction.

JOINT TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS 09−27−06

& OCCUPANCY GUIDE
S5453, Exhibit B PACIFIC GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY Page 2 of 4
 General Notes
1. The preferred trench location is in a Public Utility easement (P.U.E.).
2. All depths and resulting cover requirements are measured from final grade.
3. Cover, clearances, and separation shall be as great as practicable under the circumstances, but under no circumstances shall be
less than the minimum cover, clearance, and separation requirements set forth in General Order 128 and 49CFR 192.321,
49CFR 192.325, and 49CFR 192.327. All facilities shall be anchored in place prior to compaction, or other means shall be taken to
ensure no motion of the facilities. Dimensional requirements for shading, leveling, and backfilling shall be determined subsequent to
compaction.
4. Trench dimensions shown are typical. Trench sizes and configurations may vary depending upon occupancy and/or field conditions.
Trench size and configuration must at all times be constructed in a manner that ensures proper clearances and cover requirements
are met. Any change" to the trench width and configurations as shown in this exhibit must be designed to ensure this requirement.
5. It is preferred to have non-PG&E owned streetlights at a level other than the gas or electric level. Non-PG&E owned streetlights may
be at the electric level of the trench as long as minimum clearances are provided and comply with all special notes for a joint trench
with a second electric utility.
6. Non-Utility facilities are not allowed in any Joint Utility trench, e.g., irrigation control lines, building fire alarm systems, private
telephone systems, outdoor electrical cable, etc.
7. When communication ducts are installed, a minimum of 12" radial separation shall be maintained from gas facilities. Exception: With
mutual agreement, when 4-inch diameter or smaller gas pipe is installed, the separation may be reduced to not less than 6 inches.
8. Provide separation from trench wall and other facilities sufficient to ensure proper compaction.
9. Maintain proper separation between PG&E facilities and wet" utility lines as described in UO Standard S5453. The minimum
allowable horizontal separation between Company facilities and wet" facilities is 3’ with a minimum 1’ of undisturbed earth or the
installation of a suitable barrier between the facilities.
If a 3’ horizontal separation cannot be attained between wet" utilities and Company dry facilities, a variance may be approved by the
local Inspection Supervisor and submitted to the Service Planning Support Program Manager for approval. Separations of 1’ or less are
not permissible and will not be allowed. The Company may agree to waive the minimum 3’ separation requirement at the request of an
applicant if warranted and the need is justified. The request for a waiver must:
S Be made in writing and submitted to the Company ADE during the planning and design phase of the project,
S Clearly describe the conditions necessitating the waiver,
S Include a proposed design,
S And, include a design for a barrier between the wet" utilities and Company dry facilities in the event 1’ of undisturbed earth
cannot be maintained.
Note: Drain lines connected to downspouts on buildings are considered a wet" utility for the purposes of this standard.
10. Separations shall be maintained at aboveground termination points.
11. Procedures for approving native backfill for shading of PG&E gas facilities:
S Random soil samples shall be taken from a minimum of 3 locations per 1,000’ of trench. 100% of the sample must pass through
a 1/2" sieve and 75% must pass through a #4 screen. Additional samples must be taken if existing soil conditions change and
are to be taken at the discretion of the PG&E representative on site.
S The soils must not contain any rocks that have sharp edges or that may otherwise be abrasive.
S The soils must not contain clods larger than 1/2" if to be used as shading, bedding, or leveling materials.
S Compaction requirements must meet any applicable PG&E, Federal, State, County, or local requirements.
S At no time shall the over saturation of native soils be used to achieve these requirements.
The sieves and screens shall be:
S 1/2" Sieve: 8" diameter by 2" deep, stainless steel mesh screen.
S #4 Screen: 8" diameter by 2" deep, stainless steel mesh screen.
Notes continued on the next page

JOINT TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS 09−27−06

& OCCUPANCY GUIDE
S5453, Exhibit B PACIFIC GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY Page 3 of 4
 General Notes, continued
12. Procedures for approving native backfill for shading at PG&E electric facilities:
S Random soil samples shall be taken from a minimum of 3 locations per 1,000’ of trench. Additional samples must be taken if
existing soil conditions change and are to be taken at the discretion of the PG&E representative on site.
S Shading material containing large rock, paving material, cinders, sharply angular substances, or corrosive material shall not be
placed in the trench where such material may damage the conduits and/or prevent proper compaction over or around the
conduits.
S Native soils containing clods not to exceed 6" in diameter may be included in the shading material provided the clods are readily
breakable by hand.
Note: Soils consisting primarily of adobe, hard compact (dense) clay, and bay muds shall not be used as shading material.
S At no time shall the over saturation of native soils be used to achieve these requirements.
S Refer to Engineering Document 062288, Item 13 on Page 2.
13. Competent native soils are preferred to be used for shading, bedding, and backfilling throughout the trench.
S Where native soils exceed 1/2" minus and/or where gas is to be placed at the bottom of a trench in areas that exceed 1/2"
minus soil conditions, or where the bottom of a trench is considered to consist of hard pan, PG&E approved 1/2" minus import
material shall be used for shading and/or bedding of gas facilities.
S PG&E approved import material is per CGT Engineering Guideline 4123.
S If a leveling course is required for gas facilities, the use of native soils is preferred, but if 1/2" minus conditions are not attainable
with the native soils, then the use of PG&E approved import materials is required. Bedding under gas facilities will be a
minimum of 2" of compacted 1/2" minus native soils or PG&E approved import material.
S For electric facilities, refer to Note 12. This applies to leveling courses as well as shading.
S The minimum PG&E approved bedding material may be increased at the discretion of PG&E when warranted by existing field
conditions (e.g., rocky soils, hard pan, etc.).
S The use of any imported material for backfilling purposes shall be limited to those situations when native soils do not allow for
required compaction.
14. The applicant is responsible for the removal of excess spoil and associated costs.
15. Separation between gas facilities and electric facilities may be reduced to 6" when crossing.
16. Service saddles are the preferred service fittings for use throughout the joint trench project. All projects will be designed and
estimated using service saddles. However, service tees may be used if all clearances, separation, and coverage requirements are
maintained.

Revision Notes
1. Revised Note 9 to clarify the minimum allowable horizontal separations requirements.
2. This document was revised on 09−27−2006.

JOINT TRENCH CONFIGURATIONS 09−27−06

& OCCUPANCY GUIDE
S5453, Exhibit B PACIFIC GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY Page 4 of 4
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

Document Type Engineering material specification (EMS)

Workflow Major Revision

1. Why is the guidance document being written / revised?

This specification is being revised to align content with engineering and industry specifications,
requirements, and best practices.

2. Is the guidance document new or revised? If it is revised, what will change? If new, what is the
topic?
Updated changes are based on a review of the Rev. 0 specification, historical specifications, industry
benchmarking, American Society of Materials Testing (ASTM) specifications, Caltrans and other industry
specifications, research and review of civil and geotechnical references, and discussions with engineering,
construction, inspection, sourcing and external suppliers. See Table 1, “Revision Changes.”

Table 1. Revision Changes

Section Revision 0 Revision 1
Organic Impurities Equal to or less than 3 NA
Sand Equivalent >20 NA
pH 4.5-9 4.5-9
Resistivity >5000 >3000
Gradation Requirements % Passing % Passing
1/2" 100 NA
3/8" NA 100
No. 4 75-100 90-100
No. 50 0-70 NA
No. 100 0-30 NA
No. 200 0-15 0-15
Cu > 2.5 NA
“Compaction” will be changed to 95% Relative Compaction Provide Optimum
“Maximum Dry Unit Weight and Moisture and Lab Dry Unit
Optimum Moisture Content” Weight

 Organic Impurities, as determined by ASTM C-40 requirements, is removed from the updated
specification. This test is used to determine if there are “injurious organic compounds in natural
sands, which are to be used in cement mortar or concrete.” Organic compounds can affect the
strength properties of cement. Corrosive properties of sand that can affect steel pipe are evaluated
by the pH and resistivity. Plastic pipe has a high resistance to chemicals in sand.

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 7
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

Question 2 (continued)

 Sand Equivalent, as determined by ASTM D-2419-14, is removed from the updated specification.
This test determines “relative proportions of detrimental fine dust or clay-like material in soil or fine
aggregates.” As with organic impurities, excessive clay or silt in a concrete aggregate can affect
the strength properties of cement. Clay or silt is not a concern when used around steel or plastic
pipe. In addition, excessive fines will be minimal due to the proposed gradation requirements.

 pH value, as determined by ASTM G51-95 (2012) and ASTM D4972-13, will remain the same.

 Resistivity, as determined by ASTM G-57-06 (2012) and ASTM G187-12a, is changed to greater
than or equal to 3,000 Ohm-cm.

In addition, if resistivity is less than 3,000 Ohms-cm, the following chemical content limits must
apply:

o Total chloride content must be equal to or less than 500 parts per million as determined by
EPA Method 300.0 prepared by Parr O2 bomb combustion.

o Total sulfate content must be equal to or less than 150 parts per million as determined by
EPA Method 300.0 prepared by Parr O2 bomb combustion.

 Compaction ASTM D-1557 is updated to require the supplier to provide the optimum moisture
content and lab dry unit weight.

 Gradation Requirements updated as determined by ASTM C-136 and ASTM C-117.

See Table 2, “Grain Size Distribution Requirements.”

Table 2. Grain Size Distribution Requirements

Sieve Sieve Size % Passing

3/8" 0.375 in. 9.5 mm 100
No. 4 0.187 in. 4.75 mm 90-100
No. 200 0.00298 in. 75 µm 0-15

This update was developed using Caltrans 2015 Standard Specification section 19-3.02F(2) “Sand
Beddings,” as a reference. The revised specification will provide for a backfill sand that meets the
criteria for sand under ASTM D2487-14 and Class I, II and III coarse grained soils under the
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) “Soil Classification
System.” A review of a benchmarking survey by the American Gas Association (AGA) revealed
that participating utilities had no specific gradation requirements or had similar gradation
requirements to the Rev. 1 requirements.

o 100% must pass the 1/2" and 3/8" sieve.

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 7
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

Question 2 (continued)

o The percent passing allowed for the No. 4 sieve (0.187 in.) is changed from 75-100 to
90-100. This change will limit the amount of larger particles that could potentially damage
the pipe during backfilling and compaction.

o The requirements for the No. 50 (0.117 in.) and No. 100 (0.0059 in.) are removed. This will
provide engineering, construction and applicant installers more flexibility in specifying
and/or locating acceptable sand.

o The percent passing for the No. 200 (0.00298 in.) will remain the same.

 Coefficient of Uniformity (Cu) is removed, because the gradation requirements ensure that the
sand is suitable to be used as bedding and shading fill around plastic and steel pipe. Neither
Caltrans nor other available utility specifications require a specific Cu.

 Testing updated to detail rights reserved by PG&E. This will assist inspection with reviewing and
enforcing the specification with applicant and contractor installation.

3. Does this project introduce any major new risks or change existing mitigated risks, such as
Process Safety risks?

No.

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 7
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

4. Stakeholder Identification

The following individuals provided developmental assistance and were primary reviewers for the content in
this EMS:

Department / Work Center Role Name Date Reviewed

Pipeline Engineering and Design Engineering Joshua Hampton 05/16/2016
Distribution Integrity Management
Engineering Mike Kerans 05/16/2016
Program (DIMP) Engineering
Safety and Environmental Environmental Tuesdai Powers 05/16/2016
Distribution Inspection Inspection Jose Fletes 05/16/2016
Distribution Inspection Inspection Ramen Spears 05/16/2016
General Construction (GC) Gas
Primary Reviewer Adam Linney 05/16/2016
Transmission Engineering
Corrosion Services SME Bruce Wiskel 05/16/2016
Plant Engineering and Design SME John Burniston 05/16/2016
DIMP SME Matteo Rossi 05/16/2016
Gas Methods and Procedures SME Michael Lane 05/16/2016
Gas Methods and Procedures SME Patrick Symons 05/16/2016
Hanson Aggregates Supplier Chris Stromberg 05/16/2016
Far West Supplier Darren Fry 05/16/2016
Teichert Supplier John Dooley 05/16/2016
Lind Marine Supplier Ron Peterson 05/16/2016

A final draft of the EMS was shared with the following individuals.

Department / Work Center Role Name Date Sent

TIR North Area Construction Brad Spainhower 05/16/2016
Maintenance and Construction (M&C)
Construction Bryan McCallum 05/16/2016
South - San Jose/De Anza
TIR Bay Area South Construction Cathlene Bennett 05/16/2016
TIR Central North Region Construction Curtis Tonetti 05/16/2016
M&C North - Sacramento Construction Erik Kurtz 05/16/2016
M&C South - San Francisco Construction James Randolph 05/16/2016
TIR Central South Region Construction Jason Klemm 05/16/2016
Gas Transmission and Distribution (T&D)
Construction Jerry Rice 05/16/2016
Inspection & Contract Management
M&C North - North Valley and Sierra Construction Joe Carlstrom 05/16/2016
M&C South - Fresno and Kern Construction Joe Cummins 05/16/2016

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 7
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

Department / Work Center Role Name Date Sent

M&C North - Humbolt and Sonoma Construction Joe Ojeda 05/16/2016
Gas Transmission Construction
Construction Joey Lynn Covey 05/16/2016
Management - C Coast
M&C Gas - GC - Northern Region Construction John Costanza 05/16/2016
Central Operations Support Construction John Fiske 05/16/2016
M&C South - Stockton and Yosemite Construction John W Martin 05/16/2016
M&C North - Diablo and North Bay Construction Kevin F Souza 05/16/2016
M&C North - East Bay and Mission Construction Kevin P. Souza 05/16/2016
TIR Bay Area North Construction Lance Johnson 05/16/2016
M&C Gas - GC - Central Valley Region Construction Larry Hartsell 05/16/2016
M&C Central Coast Construction Mario Martini 05/16/2016
E2 SOW Contractor Construction Matt Hewitt 05/16/2016
TIR Operations & Process Construction Meghan Murphy 05/16/2016
GC Gas Distribution Engineering Construction Michael Coakley 05/16/2016
M&C Gas - GC - Bay Area Region - East Construction Michael Seitz 05/16/2016
GC Gas Transmission - South Construction Mitch Freese 05/16/2016
Gas Transmission Construction
Construction Norman Soares 05/16/2016
Management - C Valley
M&C - GC - Central Coast Region Construction Omar Macay 05/16/2016
Gas Transmission GC M&C/Supervisory
Construction Peter Demartini 05/16/2016
Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
Gas For Electric Construction Rhonda De Rosa 05/16/2016
M&C Gas - GC - Bay Area Region - West Construction Richard Salaz Jr. 05/16/2016
TIR South Area Construction Rick A Bezanson 05/16/2016
Gas Transmission Construction
Construction Ronald Whyte 05/16/2016
Management - Northern
Gas Transmission Construction
Construction Steven Delledera 05/16/2016
Management - Operations
M&C South - Peninsula only Construction Tim Bellinghausen 05/16/2016
Gas Transmission Construction
Construction William Czabaranek Jr. 05/16/2016
Management - Bay Area
Transmission Integrity Management
Corrosion David Aguiar 05/16/2016
Program (TIMP)
Pipeline Engineering and Design Engineering Joshua Hampton 05/16/2016
Pipeline Engineering and Design Engineering Ben Tai 05/16/2016
Pipeline Engineering and Design Engineering Brad Carr 05/16/2016

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 7
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

Department / Work Center Role Name Date Sent

DIMP Engineering Engineering Mike Kerans 05/16/2016
Plant Engineering & Design Engineering Donald Yorke 05/16/2016
Hydrotesting Engineering Edward Stracke 05/16/2016
Pipeline Engineering & Design 02 Engineering Francisco Castro 05/16/2016
Instrument, Controls, and Electric Engineering Geoffrey Jarpe 05/16/2016
Plant Engineering Engineering Hien Tran 05/16/2016
TIMP Engineering Engineering Jeff Janvier 05/16/2016
Local Engineer and Design Engineering Jim Rechtin 05/16/2016
Local Engineer and Design Engineering John D Hunter 05/16/2016
Engineering Services Engineering Roberto Morales 05/16/2016
Pipeline Field Services Engineering Roy A Surges 05/16/2016
Pipeline Services Engineering Ryan Weber 05/16/2016
Facilities Integrity Management Program
Engineering Scott Fanin 05/16/2016
(FIMP)
FIMP Engineering Timothy Scheele 05/16/2016
Pipeline Engineering & Design Engineering Todd Hogenson 05/16/2016
Safety and Environmental Environmental Tuesdai Powers 05/16/2016
Distribution Inspection Inspection Jose Fletes 05/16/2016
Distribution Inspection Inspection Ramen Spears 05/16/2016
GC Gas Transmission Engineering Primary Reviewer Adam Linney 05/16/2016
Pipe Replacement Workstream Project Management Alex Vayntrub 05/16/2016
Pipe Replacement Workstream Project Management Evan Stark 05/16/2016
Subject Matter
Geosciences Emily Steen 05/16/2016
Expert (SME)
Gas Methods and Procedures SME Jeanette Lindemann 05/16/2016
Corrosion Services SME Bruce Wiskel 05/16/2016
Plant Engineering and Design SME John Burniston 05/16/2016
Gas Methods and Procedures SME Lucas Huezo 05/16/2016
DIMP SME Matteo Rossi 05/16/2016
Gas Methods and Procedures SME Michael Lane 05/16/2016
Gas Methods and Procedures SME Patrick Symons 05/16/2016
Hanson Aggregates Supplier Chris Stromberg 05/16/2016
Far West Supplier Darren Fry 05/16/2016
Teichert Supplier John Dooley 05/16/2016
Lind Marine Supplier Ron Peterson 05/16/2016

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 7
 Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)
For Backfill Sand
EMS-4123, Rev. 1

6. Electronic Document Routing System (EDRS) Reviewers and Approvers

 Reviewers: Mariela Castellanos, Ben Tai, Joshua Hampton

 Approvers: Sean Mann, Brad Carr, Adam Linney, Lily Gharib, Jerrod Meier

7. Detail any needed cost or schedule information

Effective date: 09/07/2016

8. How often will the guidance document be reviewed?

At least once every 5 calendar years, not to exceed 63 months, to the date.

PG&E Internal Information © 2016 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 7
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

SUMMARY

This bulletin specifies the technical requirements for all customers requesting electric service at one of
Pacific Gas and Electric Company’s (PG&E) primary distribution voltages as defined in Rule 2. It is
intended to give the customer a clear understanding of what their responsibilities are to receive
Primary Service (PS) and those of PG&E. PG&E has developed these technical requirements in order
to provide safe and reliable service to all the customers the Company serves.

If the PS customer also intends to install generation, then also refer to the information and
requirements described in the Distribution Interconnection Handbook.

AFFECTED DOCUMENT

None

TARGET AUDIENCE

All utility employees working with primary service design and installation.

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

1 General Requirements

Customers meeting the Rule 2 requirements for PS shall install, own and operate their
distribution system beyond their Point of Service (POS). While there are a number of technical
requirements associated with a PS, two requirements are particularly important:

• PG&E must approve the POS.

• PG&E must approve the protection scheme that the customer installs, owns and
operates at the POS.

Satisfying these requirements assists PG&E in providing safe and reliable service to other
customers connected to the Company’s system. Customers considering a PS should contact
PG&E early in the design process.

2 Primary Service Arrangements

PG&E prefers that the POS, protective device and revenue meter for a PS be at or near the
property line nearest to PG&E’s primary distribution. The PG&E-approved and customer
installed primary protection must be at the POS to protect other PG&E customers from
outages due to faults on customer facilities. The revenue-metering should also be at this point
because the PS customer is responsible for the line losses on their primary conductor and
transformer(s) as well as their load. However, unlike the requirement for the protective device,
it is not an absolute requirement.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

The sections below explain the primary protection requirements and revenue-metering location
requirements for PG&E’s preferred PS arrangements. Please note that non-preferred service
arrangement proposals may take longer to approve and involve additional cost for the
customer.

2.1 Preferred PS Arrangements

PG&E’s preferred PS arrangements are either: a) when the PS customer’s primary distribution
line is underground (UG) and the POS is less than 500 feet from the property line, or b) when
the PS customer’s primary distribution line is overhead (OH) and the protective device pole (if
separate from the POS pole) is less than 50 feet from the property line.

1. UG Conductor and POS < 500 Feet

If the PS customer’s primary line is underground and the POS is 500 feet or less from
the property line, refer to Figure A3-1 and Figure A3-2. The following requirements
apply:

a. The PS customer must provide a PG&E approved enclosure for PG&E’s

revenue-metering equipment. See Section 9 (Page 10) for detailed revenue-
metering requirements.

b. The PS customer must install primary protection at the POS. This protection
may consist of a circuit breaker with phase and ground relays or, depending on
the customer’s load, fuses may suffice. If PG&E determines that fuses will not
coordinate with PG&E’s source-side protection, then the customer must use a
circuit breaker. See Section 4 (Page 4) for circuit breaker and fuse
requirements.

c. The PS customer must install conduit from the POS to PG&E’s box (if UG) or
pole (if OH).

d. PG&E will pull one continuous run of cable and connect to the customer’s POS
termination facility, not to exceed 500 feet (subject to an acceptable number of
bends in the conduit).

2. OH Conductor

If the PS customer’s primary line is overhead, then the first pole at the customer’s
property line is the POS. Refer to Figure A3-3. The following requirements apply:

a. PG&E will install pole-top revenue-metering on the first pole on the PS

customer’s property. See Engineering Standard 058779 for pole-top revenue-
metering requirements.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

b. The PS customer must install primary protection on the second pole on their
property, not to exceed 50 feet from the revenue metering pole. This protection
may consist of a recloser or, depending on the customer’s load, fuses may
suffice. If PG&E determines that fuses will not coordinate with PG&E’s source-
side protection, then the customer must use a recloser. See Section 4 (Page 4)
for recloser requirements.

c. PG&E will interconnect its system with the customer’s system at the revenue-
metering pole.

2.2 Non-Preferred PS Arrangement Proposals

PS customers may propose a non-preferred PS arrangement. This typically occurs when the
PS customer’s primary distribution line is UG and the proposed location for the primary
switchgear is greater than 500 feet from the property line. PG&E will consider such proposals,
however, non-preferred service arrangement proposals may take longer to design, approve
and can involve additional customer expense. Customers should contact PG&E early in the
design process if they are considering a non-preferred PS arrangement.

A non-preferred PS arrangement may consist of: a) a splice box with an underground

interrupter or subsurface fuse within 500 feet of the property line, or b) padmounted switchgear
within 500 feet of the property line that includes a protective device such as a breaker or fuses.
In these cases, the substructures and equipment are installed and owned by the customer. As
with preferred arrangements, PG&E must approve the location, substructure/equipment
arrangement and protective devices. In addition, note that the following requirements still
apply:

1. The PS customer must provide space for PG&E’s revenue-metering in their

switchgear. See Section 10 (Page 12) for detailed metering requirements.

2. The PS customer must install conduit from the POS to PG&E’s box (if UG) or pole (if
OH).

3. PG&E will pull one continuous run of cable, not to exceed 500 feet, to the POS (subject
to an acceptable number of bends in the conduit).

2.3 Location of Revenue-Metering

The preferred revenue meter location is at the POS. High-side metering is PG&E’s preferred
metering configuration. If PG&E approves low-side metering, a 2% adjustment factor will be
applied at each stage of the transformation before the meter. See Section 9 (Page 10) for
additional revenue-metering requirements.

2.4 Service Wire Configuration

If the PG&E point of service is at a protective device and not at the customer owned
switchgear the wiring configuration, 3-wire or 4-wire, of the customer’s service from the
protective device to the switchgear must be the same as PG&E’s.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

3 General Protection Requirements

It is important to minimize the potential hazard to life and property when interconnecting
facilities to the PG&E distribution system. This requires the automatic detection of abnormal
conditions and trouble related to a PS customer’s equipment and the isolation of the condition
and/or equipment within a reasonable time.

As a general rule, neither party should depend on the other for system protection. As such,
PG&E’s minimum protection requirements are designed and intended to protect the PG&E
power system only. Moreover, the interconnection of a PS customer to the PG&E distribution
system must not degrade existing PG&E protection and control schemes or interfere with the
service of other customers (see Rule 2).

The PS customer’s facilities must isolate any fault or abnormality that could adversely affect
the PG&E electric system or the electric systems of other entities connected to the PG&E
electric system.

PG&E assumes no liability for damage to the PS customer-owned facilities resulting from a
lack of adequate coordination between the PS customer’s protective device(s) and PG&E’s
protective devices, or negligence due to the PS customer’s failure to maintain protective
and/or isolation equipment.

PG&E recommends that the PS customer acquire the services of a qualified and licensed
electrical engineer to review its plans. The PS customer must, at its expense, install, operate,
and maintain system protection facilities in accordance with all applicable regulatory rules and
requirements, and in accordance with this bulletin.

3.1 Data the PS Customer Provides to PG&E

1. The PS customer must provide the information necessary for PG&E to determine the
interconnection requirements before PG&E approves the specific PS installation. This
information includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Single-Line diagrams.

b. Meter and Relay diagrams.

c. Three-Line diagrams of required protective device.

d. Control diagrams including direct current (dc) tripping circuit.

e. Proposed relay specifications and settings.

f. Relay manufacturer, model, style, type, ranges, settings, and a copy of the
relay instruction manual.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

g. Projected electrical demand (i.e., kilowatt [kW]), including the following

information:

(1) Power factor

(2) Load factor

(3) Large motor sizes

(4) Motor starting currents

(5) Customer’s transformer size

(6) Estimated breakdown of the electric energy use (i.e., kilowatt hours
[kwh]) by month

h. Full-size phase and ground coordination curves showing full coordination with
PG&E’s system.

i. A registered electrical engineer must prepare and stamp the fault–study results.

j. Maintenance program documentation for PG&E-required switches, interrupting

devices, and protective equipment.

2. PG&E strongly recommends that the PS customer, or their representative, provide the
above information before ordering equipment and finalizing the design.

3. Also, before energizing the new PS facility, the PS customer must also provide a copy
of the on-site test reports for the switches, devices, and relays at least 30 working days
before energizing the service. This allows sufficient time for review, modification, and
final PG&E approval. Qualified personnel must prepare these on-site test reports.
Refer to Section “Equipment Test Requirements,” and Section “Pre-Energizing Test”
for further details.

3.2 Data that PG&E Provides to the Applicant

PG&E provides the following engineering data to the PS customer:

1. System fault-duty at the property line.

2. Settings for PG&E source-side protective devices and the required clearance time to
comply with PG&E protection standards.

3. Relay curves for PG&E source-side protective devices, if requested by the PS

customer.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

4 Specific Protection Requirements

PG&E must review and approve the fault-interrupting devices that the PS customer selects.
There are four basic types of fault-interrupting devices available for distribution systems:

• Circuit breakers

• Reclosers and Interrupters

• Fuses

The following sections provide specific requirements for each of these devices.

4.1 Circuit Breaker Requirements

The interconnecting circuit breaker must have sufficient capacity to interrupt the maximum
available fault current at its location. Phase and ground relays approved by PG&E (see
Table 1, PG&E Approved Relays, on Page 7) must be used to trip the circuit breaker for phase
and ground faults. These relays must coordinate with PG&E’s source-side protection. It must
also include the following features:

1. Shunt-trip via a trip signal supplied through a battery external to the circuit breaker.

2. Lock out if operated by protective relays required for interconnection.

3. Capacitive tripping is unacceptable.

4. Relay Requirements

a. PG&E requires PS customers to install phase and ground over-current relays

that trip the interrupting device at the POS. These relays must detect all phase
and ground faults, and coordinate with PG&E’s source side protection. All
required relays must include relay targets, and have “manual reset” capability.

b. The PS customer must either: a) select phase and ground relays approved by
PG&E or, b) have an International Electric Testing Association certified testing
company test the relay as outlined in Attachment and provide the test results to
PG&E for approval.

c. PG&E strongly recommends that PS customers submit all relay specification

and setting proposals for PG&E approval before finalizing the design and
ordering equipment. PS customers not submitting this information risk delaying
their projects.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

Table 1 PG&E Approved Relays

See Tables G2-4 and G2-5 located in the Transmission Interconnection Handbook,
Section G2, “Protection and Control Requirements.” These tables list all of the types
of relays approved for the PG&E distribution and transmission systems.

NOTE
PG&E’s approval of the relays does not indicate the quality or reliability of a product or
service. No endorsements or warranties are implied.

5. Relay Redundancy Requirement

The PS customer’s protection system must contain redundancy such that the failure
of any one component will still allow the customer’s system to isolate the PS facility
from the PG&E system under a fault condition. Three single-phase over-current relays
and a ground over-current relay, or two three-phase over-current relays and a ground
over-current relay satisfy the redundancy requirement. PS facilities, using
microprocessor-based relays as a multifunctional protective device, must have backup
relays.

6. Power Supply Requirements

Power supplies for PG&E-required relays and the tripping circuitry for the
fault-interrupting device must be supplied from a battery and charger system. The
system must include a dc under-voltage detection and alarm feature. Fuses are not
allowed in the dc trip circuitry (dc breakers are acceptable).

The preferred battery type is flooded lead-acid (calcium, antimony) or nickel-cadmium

(NiCd). Sealed batteries (Valve Regulated Lead Acid [VRLA]) are allowed if they meet
PG&E requirements. An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is unacceptable. See
Section 11,“Battery Requirements for Interconnecting to the PG&E System,” on Page
18, for more details on PG&E’s battery requirements.

4.2 Reclosers and Interrupters

Contact PG&E for approved reclosers and interrupters.

4.3 Fuse Requirements

1. Fuses are single-phase, direct-acting, sacrificial links that melt to interrupt fault current
and protect the equipment.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

2. PG&E may approve the use of fuses as the fault interrupting device at the POS for
load-only facilities (i.e., no generation is interconnected), if the fuses coordinate with
the PG&E source-side devices for both phase and ground faults. Large primary fuses
that do not coordinate with PG&E’s source-side protective phase and ground relays are
not allowed. These fuses may cause other customers on the circuit to lose power due
to a fault inside the PS customer’s facility.

3. The PS customer must replace the blown fuses manually after each fault before the
facility can return to service. Only trained, qualified personnel should replace the
primary fuses.

4. If PG&E approves the fuses, the PS customer should consider installing a negative-
sequence relay and/or other devices to protect its facility against single-phase
conditions (however, this is not a requirement). The PS customer is responsible for
protecting their equipment against single phase conditions, if they determine or feel
that it is needed.

5. Customers must keep a full set of replacement fuses (PG&E must approve the size
and type) onsite.

5 Equipment Test Requirements

The tests in this section apply only to the PG&E-required equipment at the POS; specifically,
the breaker, the relays, and the tripping circuitry.

The customer must complete the following requirements:

• The equipment must pass all the tests described below.

• The customer must submit two copies of the test reports to PG&E a minimum of
30 working days before energizing the PS facilities.

• Each test report must identify the equipment tested and that identification must match
that in the single-line or three-line diagrams.

The customer must meet the above requirements and obtain PG&E approval of the test
reports at least ten working days before PG&E energizes the PS. PG&E strongly recommends
that the PS customer coordinate the test program with PG&E.

5.1 Circuit Breaker Tests

The PS customer must perform the following circuit breaker tests:

1. Minimum-to-trip test at 70% or less of the nominal control voltage on all circuit breakers
operated by PG&E-required relays.

2. Micro-ohm test on the main circuit breaker(s) at the POS.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

3. Timing test showing the time from the trip initiation to the opening of the main poles.
Proving insulation tests, as described below.

4. Proving Insulation

A 1,000 or 2,500 volt (V) dc megger test, or a 1,000 V high-pot test is acceptable for
the insulation tests described below.

a. Megger circuit breaker(s) at the POS operated by PG&E require relays (see
Table 2 below).

Table 2. Circuit Breaker Positions and Connections

Circuit Breaker Position Connection

Each pole to ground, pole 1 to 2, pole 3 to 4,

Circuit breaker open.
pole 5 to 6

Circuit breaker closed. Pole 1–ground, pole 3–ground, pole 5–ground

If the poles are in a common tank or cell. Pole 1 to 3, pole 3 to 5, pole 5 to 1

b. Megger (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) all buses from the POS to the
main breaker or fuses.

c. The main circuit breaker(s) must have a dielectric test performed on the
insulating medium (gas or oil). This test is not required for factory-sealed,
circuit-switcher interrupters.

5.2 Tests for Current Transformers and Current Circuits

PS customers must perform the following tests for current transformers (CTs) and current
circuits associated with PG&E-required relays:

1. Check the saturation on all CTs. If this is not possible, a manufacturer’s curve is
acceptable.

2. Prove the ratio of all CTs by using current (primary to secondary) or voltage (secondary
to primary).

3. Check the CTs for the proper polarity.

4. Check the CT circuits for the proper connections.

5. Check the continuity of the CTs by:

a. Applying primary or secondary current at the CT block.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

b. Verifying that the proper current exists in each phase relay and the ground
relay.

Customers must perform each test (primary or secondary) in all combinations prove that all
phase relays and ground relays have proper connections.

PS customers must also ensure that no loose wiring or parallel current paths exist, by applying
or injecting the current to achieve a secondary reading of 5 amperes (A) in each relay.

Check each phase of each current circuit feeding PG&E–required relays. Megger the total
circuit with the ground wire lifted (to prove that only one ground exists).

5.3 Relay and Fuse Tests

The testing requirements for relays/fuses include:

1. PS customers must field test the settings of PG&E-required relays to verify the
following items:

a. The minimum operating point at which the relay picks up (minimum pickup).

b. Time delays at three different current-test points, in integral multiples of the

minimum pickup that closely characterize the relay time-current curve.

c. Test results must be within the tolerances listed below:

(1) Current/Voltage/Time ± 10 %

(2) Impedance/Phase Angle ± 0.05 %

(3) Frequency ± 0.05 Hz

2. Check all fuses for continuity before energizing.

5.4 Tests Recommended (But Not Required by PG&E) for the PS Customers

1. Transformer

It is recommend (but not required by PG&E) that the customer perform the following
tests to prove the insulation and turns ratio on their primary service transformers.

a. Proving Insulation

A 1,000 or 2,500 volt (V) dc megger test or a 1,000 V, high-pot test is

recommended for any of the insulation tests below.

(1) Megger the main transformer(s) winding-to-winding and each

winding-to-ground.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

(2) Megger the buses (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground) from the POS
to the main transformer.

(3) Perform a dielectric test on the main transformer(s) insulating medium

(gas or oil).

b. Proving Ratios

Prove the main transformer(s) ratio(s) using one of the following methods:

(1) Turns-ratio tester.

(2) Voltage-ratio test on the final operating tap. Consult with PG&E to best
match the present distribution-system voltage.

6 Pre-Energizing Test

6.1 Customers must meet the following requirements before PG&E will energize the PS:

1. Ensure that any inspections required by local governmental and regulatory agencies
are complete and any applicable permits are obtained before PG&E energizes the PS.

2. A PG&E technical representative must witness trip checks of all PG&E-required relays.
This may require injecting a signal to trigger the relay. This proves that the relay will
handle the trip current of the circuit breaker. It also proves relay targeting. Jumpering
the studs on the back of the relay is not acceptable.

a. The Primary Service Entity shall provide all test equipment and qualified 3rd
party personnel to perform the required tests. PG&E recommends third party
testers to be National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) certified. PG&E
shall be there strictly as an observer. Form PS-1 shall be completed by the
PG&E representative on site at the time of the pre- energizing test.

3. A PG&E technical representative must verify grounds are bonded per standard
(switching platforms, fences, buildings, etc.) and verify signage is correct per the below
requirement. All signs shall be constructed to be weather proof.

a. Disconnect -- The disconnect sign shall have 1 inch wide by 2 inch high, with
colors venetian red (#3) lettering on a buff (#1) background (or similar). It shall
be attached as shown on Engineering Design Standard 454092 (see Appendix
D). If the facility has multiple feeds with multiple separate disconnect switches,
then each disconnect requires a separate sign.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

b. Location -- The location sign shall have 1 inch high venetian red (#3) lettering
on a buff (#1) background. PG&E’s standard location sign size is 14 inches
wide by 7 inches high overall. It shall be posted at each entrance to the facility.
If there are other gates or doors to go through, then each one of those shall
have a sign as well. For example: One posted at the entrance to the primary
service facility and one posted on the entrance to the substation within the
primary service facility.

4. After energizing the PS and adding load, a PG&E technical representative must witness
the reading of the load current in each phase relay and the absence of load current in
the ground relay. The PG&E technical representative will then seal the relays.

5. The PS customer is responsible for providing all test equipment, and qualified
personnel to conduct the tests in the presence of a PG&E technical representative.

7 General Notes

• The PG&E system has an A-C-B counterclockwise rotation.

• Before making changes to PG&E-required protection equipment, the customer must

submit the proposed changes to PG&E for review and approval.

• The customer is responsible for maintaining PG&E-required protection equipment in

accordance with PG&E maintenance and test practices. After completing such tests,
the customer must submit maintenance and test report documentation to PG&E for
review and approval. A PG&E technical representative will reseal PG&E-required
relays following setting changes and routine maintenance.

• Contact the local PG&E representative with any questions.

8 Alternate Source

8.1 A PS customer may request an alternate primary voltage source installed at customer
expense. Requests for an alternate source are handled on a case-by-case basis. This section
describes some of the technical requirements associated with installing and operating a PS
with an alternate source. Technical requirements may change depending on location and a
variety of other factors. PG&E strongly recommends that customers contact the Company
early in the design phase to ensure a successful project. The PS customer and PG&E must
work together to ensure that an alternate source system fulfills the customer’s needs while not
degrading PG&E protection schemes, operating flexibility or cause interference with another
customer’s service.

8.2 When a PS load is transferred from the primary source to the alternate source or vice versa, a
momentary outage (“drop-and-pickup” operation) occurs.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

8.3 When the PS is fed from the alternate source and the PS customer wants to transfer back to
the primary source with a parallel operation (“make-before-break” method), the PS customer
must meet the following requirements:

1. The ratios and electrical connections of the transformers on both sources must be well
matched to minimize circulating currents.

2. The impedance of the transformers and the relative phase angles of the sources must
be such that any “through load” (i.e., flowing of power through the PS customer’s
electrical system to other customers) does not cause overloads.

3. The parallel transfer operation must not degrade protection, inhibit PG&E’s operating
flexibility, or overstress equipment (customer or PG&E equipment).

4. The transfer switches, one on each side of the PS load, require an automatic interlock
control scheme to minimize the time the two systems are paralleled. The transfer
switches must be circuit breakers or other suitably rated, automatically controlled
switches.

NOTE
The parallel period must be less than one second because the presence
of two parallel circuits will increase the fault duty and may overstress the
PS customer’s equipment.

5. In some cases, PG&E may require additional protective devices and/or special
operating procedures to ensure safe and reliable service for the PS customer and other
PG&E customers.

6. Each parallel transfer operation can only proceed after PG&E’s specific approval. The
PS customer must obtain PG&E’s approval before performing the parallel transfer
operation. PG&E may withhold approval if, in its sole judgment, the above
requirements have not been met, or if a previously unforeseen factor or change in
conditions is deemed to jeopardize the operator, public safety, or reliability to
customers.

7. The PS customer must assume all liability for any problems or damage resulting from
any parallel transfer operation.

9 Revenue-metering Requirements

This section addresses direct access (DA) and bundled–service PS customers connected at
distribution voltages (34.5 kV and below), as described in Rule 2. Customers must satisfy
PG&E’s revenue–metering requirements and those of other applicable governing authorities
(i.e., California Public Utilities Commission [CPUC], California Independent System Operator
[CAISO], etc.).

For customers exporting power, loads connected at distribution voltages must satisfy the
metering protocols established by PG&E and CAISO. Exceptions are handled on a case-by–
PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

case basis with approval from PG&E’s Customer Metering Services in close coordination with
Field Metering Services.

Other arrangements that affect the required metering installation may also require a
“Generation Special Facilities Agreement.”

There are two types of distribution services:

• Wholesale

• Retail (i.e., end–users)

9.1 Wholesale Service

1. For wholesale-service interconnections, the PS customers must provide, install, own,

and maintain all revenue-metering-related equipment, including all the items provided
and maintained by PG&E or a Meter Service Provider (MSP) listed under “Retail
Service” below.

2. PS customers requesting wholesale service must meet the following criteria:

a. CAISO metering standards

b. CPUC-approved metering standards

c. PG&E’s requirements

d. Enter into a Meter Service Agreement (MSA) with the CAISO and, in certain
cases, with PG&E. The MSA specifies requirements regarding the retrieval of
load data and accessibility by CAISO.

3. The wholesale PS customer is responsible for ensuring that the meters comply with
CAISO’s meter standards and accuracy requirements.

4. All PS customers must contact PG&E’s local account services representative for
PG&E’s revenue–metering requirements.

9.2 Retail Service (End Users)

Electric Rule 22 “Direct Access” governs the interconnection and operating requirements for
DA customers. Please use the following link to access the document,
http://www.pge.com/tariffs/tm2/pdf/ELEC_RULES_22.pdf.

1. Customer Service Elections

According to Rule 22, customers have the opportunity to acquire their electric power
needs under the following two options:

a. Bundled Utility Services – traditional service from PG&E

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

(1) Bundled Services

For bundled (full-service) utility services, PG&E, in most cases,

continues to provide the following services:

• Own, provide, and maintain metering equipment, including the

meter

• Meter reading

Customers returning to bundled service may own the meter, if the meter
is supported by PG&E. In the event that the customer’s meter becomes
nonfunctional, PG&E will replace the meter with an equivalent meter
and return the former meter to the customer (end-user).

b. DA – customers purchase energy from various suppliers and related services

from Energy Service Providers (ESPs)

2. Customer Meter Options

Customer metering options include:

a. DA customers, PG&E, or the ESP may own the hourly meter.

b. The ESP may act as its own MSP or hire an MSP to maintain metering
equipment compliance.

c. The ESP may also act as its own Meter Data Management Agent (MDMA) or
hire an MDMA to read the meter and maintain the meter data.

d. Contracting with PG&E to perform metering services or meter-data

management.

e. PG&E retains the right to physically access any hourly or monthly meter data.

f. PG&E continues to read, test, and inspect the meters on PG&E’s system.

3. PG&E Is The MSP

PG&E, as the MSP, continues to provide, install, maintain, and test the following:

a. Revenue-metering instrument transformers (voltage transformers and current

transformers), which are considered part of the distribution system per
CPUC decision D.97-10-087, dated October 30, 1997. PG&E Engineering
Document 058779, “Pole Top Primary Metering Installation, Cluster Mounted
(12 or 21 kV Line),” shows a typical, distribution, pole-type metering.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

b. Secondary wiring from the base of the metering transformers to the revenue
meter in a customer-supplied dedicated raceway (conduits) used solely for
revenue-metering.

c. Meters and associated metering devices such as isolation relays, test switches,
etc.

4. PG&E Is the MDMA

PG&E, as the MDMA, continues to provide the following services:

a. Reading raw meter data from the interval meter.

b. Validating, editing, and estimating the data of a settlement-quality form.

c. Placing the settlement-quality data on the MDMA server and, if necessary,

performing a usage adjustment.

5. Customer Responsibilities

The customer (end-user) maintains the following:

a. The Meter Enclosure

To maintain the required metering accuracy, the distance between the meter
enclosure and the revenue-metering transformers must not exceed 50 feet.

PG&E must approve any variance from this general rule. The enclosure must
be grounded and located within the substation ground grid. Access must be
readily available for PG&E employees to read and maintain the metering
equipment.

The enclosure must be equipped with the following items:

(1) Auxiliary 120 V duplex plug

(2) Overhead light

(3) Light switch adjacent to the door

(4) Ground bus connected to the ground and mounted near the bottom of
the wall where the meters are located

Please refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Services Requirements (Greenbook)

and Engineering Document 058779, “Pole Top Primary Metering Installation,
Cluster Mounted (12 or 21 kV Line).”

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

b. PG&E-Approved Meter Panels

Please refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Services Requirements

(http://www.pge.com/greenbook)

c. The Pull Lines

The customer must install a pull line in the conduit between the metering
enclosure and the junction box at the base of the metering-unit support
structure to facilitate the MSP’s installation of the metering-unit secondary
wires.

Only install the MSP’s secondary revenue metering wires in the conduit
between the meter enclosure and the PT/CT units. Conduits may be metallic or
nonmetallic.

d. Telephone Lines into the Metering Enclosure

If a telephone line is required to read the meter, the customer may be

responsible for installing the line into the metering enclosure and establishing
telephone service. If a land-line is unavailable and cellular signal levels are
acceptable, the use of a cellular telephone is acceptable.

If the meter’s telephone line is not dedicated to the meter, the customer,
with prior approval from PG&E’s local metering group, may arrange to use a
line-sharing switch.

The customer must ensure that the telephone line terminations in switchboards,
panels, pole-mounted meters, and pedestals meet the following requirements:

(1) Located within five circuit-feet of the centerline of the meter.

(2) Located between a minimum of 18 inches and a maximum of 72 inches

above the finished grade.

When cellular telephones are used, the same location requirements apply to
the power supply, as measured from the load side of the meter. Locate the
power supply outside PG&E’s sealable section.

10 Communication Circuits

PG&E may require communications circuits between PG&E and the customer’s PS facilities
for the following purposes:

• Protection

• Revenue Metering

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

• Energy Management System (EMS)

• Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)

• Generation

• Voice communications

When external communication circuits are installed, the responsible party must ensure that the
high-voltage protection (HVP) equipment on these circuits meets all applicable standards.

11 Battery Requirements for Interconnecting to the PG&E System

11.1 This section describes PG&E’s process for ensuring safety and reliability of for customers who
connect to Company systems. The recommendations made here will ensure that the system
operates as designed.

11.2 Because of serious reliability, safety and reduced life concerns with sealed (also called Valve
Regulated Lead Acid [VRLA]) batteries industry wide, PG&E has decided to completely stop
the use of sealed batteries in our Substation or any switchgear installations or interconnection
using these batteries. Flooded lead acid (calcium, antimony) and Nickel-Cadmium (NiCd) are
the only batteries acceptable in these installations. Switchgear compartments typically see
very high temperatures, and if sealed batteries are used they will dry out in less than a few
years causing safety and reliability concerns along with not having the capability to trip
breakers.

Refer to the side by side comparison of IEEE Standard 450-2002 Section 5.2.3 (IEEE
Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing and Replacement of Vented lead acid
batteries for Stationary applications –also referred as Flooded batteries) and IEEE Standard
1188-1996 Section 5.2.2 Subsections a, b & c.

11.3 IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing and Replacement of Valve-regulated
batteries for Stationary application. Also referred as VRLA) clearly demonstrates that VRLA
requires Quarterly ohmic resistance testing compare to yearly ohmic testing for flooded
batteries. Experience industry wide indicates problem with doing ohmic tests on VRLA
because of the design of battery and trying to make connections to the terminals and
interconnecting hardware. Even if ohmic resistance reading is not done on flooded battery, the
failure modes can be detected by other means whereas with VRLA eliminating this test could
cause dryout condition and ultimately catastrophic failure. In hot environment VRLA would
require charger compensation as well as monitoring which is expensive and still not proven to
be adequate. In the telecommunication industry there are presently trials under way for system
wide replacements of VRLA with Flooded or NiCd batteries. PG&E recommends use of NiCd
batteries in switchgear cubicle because of better performance under extreme temperatures.
Flooded batteries can also be used in switchgear.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

11.4 Additional reasoning for not using VRLA in substation as pointed out by IEEE Battery working
group Chairman in the recent paper published in IEEE. “Summarizing the issue for VRLA
batteries, there is a considerable risk involved in installing a single VRLA string in a substation.
If parallel strings are installed, to operate reliably, they must be redundant, either by design or
by a sufficient degree of conservatism in the sizing calculation. In building in redundancy,
however, the main aim of reducing battery costs is compromised. Despite the early claims of
maintenance-free operation, VRLA batteries require considerable surveillance and testing to
maintain a high degree of reliability, IEEE 1188-1996 [2] recommends quarterly internal ohmic
measurements and annual discharge testing of VRLA. These measures are largely ignored by
the telephone operating companies because of their low loads and use of parallel strings, as
detailed above. In substation operation, however, these practices are doubly important
because of the higher currents involved”.

11.5 It is required for the third party customer to provide the following documentation to PG&E for
review and acceptance by the Substation Engineering Department:

1. Type of Battery (Vented Lead Acid-VLA or NiCd). Monoblock (multiples cells in a jar)
batteries from C & D, EnerSys or other vendors will be acceptable. Battery rack must
be designed to withstand loading based on zone 4 or IEEE 693 (High Seismic).

2. Detail information of load including continuous and momentary. No minimum load

requirement- Smallest flooded acid may be the limitation

3. Battery sizing calculation based on IEEE Standard 485-2010 (IEEE recommended

Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and
Substations) or IEEE Standard 1115-2014 (IEEE recommended Practice for Sizing
Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary application) and minimum 8 hours discharge
rate using manufacturer software (to ensure proper discharge curve is used) using
aging factor of 1.25 and design margin of 1.1 to be clearly shown on the calculation.
Charger sizing calculation based on battery size with recharge time of 12 hours
assuming charger will support the continuous load as well as recharges the battery at
the same time.

4. When battery is installed proof of three (3) hour discharge testing to ensure battery has
the capacity to support the load and trip; per IEEE Standard 450-2010 (Voltage
measurements should be taken every 15 minutes throughout the testing).

5. Documentation showing what kind of maintenance will be done (Monthly, Quarterly,

and Yearly etc).

6. Monitoring of minimum battery low voltage by separate voltage relay or through

charger and provide critical alarm to scada or monitoring system.

7. Along with documentation of items 1-5; See Attachment 1, Third Party Interconnection
Battery Information Sheet And Acceptance Document, located on pages 23 and 24.
This information must be completed and submitted by the customer to Substation
Project Engineering Department for approval.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

12 Preferred Service Arrangement Figures

The following pages provide figures showing the preferred service arrangements for overhead
and underground primary services.

Point of Service (POS)

Distribution

Protection and Metering

• Customer provides protective device
• PG&E approves settings
PG&E Splice Box
with Switch
Customer’s Conduit
and Conductor
Street

• Conduit owned and maintained by customer

Underground

• Conductor by PG&E
• PG&E provides one continuous pull of cable to
POS, not to exceed 500 feet.
Notes:
1. PG&E will install a protective device under a special
facilities agreement if there are extenuating
circumstances that prevent the customer from installing
one. This is an exception and will be handled on a
case-by-case basis
2. If PG&E’s primary facilities are across the street, PG&E
will own and maintain substructures in the franchise area
and the customer will own and maintain substructures on
private property. PG&E will still provide one continuous
pull of cable to POS, not to exceed 500 feet.

Figure A3-1
Underground Primary Service from Underground Distribution
Preferred Service Arrangement
POS 3 500 Feet From PG&E Splice Box

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

PG&E Distribution
Pole and Riser

Disconnects on pole by PG&E

Point of Service (POS)

Customer’s Meter Enclosure
Metering and Protection
• Customer provides protective device
• PG&E approves settings

Street

• Conduit owned and maintained by customer

• Conductor by PG&E
• PG&E will provide one continuous pull of cable to
POS, not to exceed 500 feet.
Notes:
1. PG&E will install a protective device under a special facilities agreement if there
are extenuating circumstances that prevent the customer from installing one.
This is an exception and will be handled on a case-by-case basis
2. If PG&E’s primary facilities are across the street, PG&E will own and maintain
substructures in the franchise area and the customer will own and maintain
substructures on private property. PG&E will still provide one continuous pull of
cable to POS, not to exceed 500 feet.

Figure A3-2
Underground Primary Service from Overhead Distribution
Preferred Service Arrangement
POS 3 500 Feet From PG&E Pole

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

PG&E Distribution Pole

Disconnects on pole by PG&E

Point of Service
Customer’s Pole Customer’s Conductor

Street

Customer’s
Riser
Meter
Enclosure
• Customer provides protective device.
• PG&E approves settings.
• Protective device pole must be as close as
possible to metering pole, not to exceed 50 feet.

Note:

PG&E will install a protective device under a special facilities

agreement if there are extenuating circumstances that prevent
the customer from installing one. This is an exception and will be
handled on a case-by-case basis.

Figure A3-3
Overhead Primary Service from Overhead Distribution
Preferred Service Arrangement

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

Attachment 1, Third Party Interconnection Battery Information Sheet And Acceptance

Document
Section 1: To be completed by Customer while providing all pertinent information and documentation for
review based on Appendix T of the TIH or PG&E document TD-2999B.
Project Name: __________________________ Site: _____________________
Type of Interconnection/project: ___________________________________ Date: ________
(Transmission, Distribution, Primary Service, Relay Replacement, etc.)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1A) - Battery
Is Battery Flooded type or Sealed Type
Battery Manufacturer
Battery Size.
Battery Model No.
1B) Charger
Charger Size
Charger Model No.

1C) Rack
Is Rack Certified for IEEE 693, High
Seismic Zone (UBC Certification is not
accepted) –
Rack Manufacturer and Model No.
2- List of DC Loads
Is list and quantity of DC Loads included with the Submittal?
3-Battery Sizing Calculation
Is Battery sizing sheet based on IEEE 485-1997 or IEEE 1115-2000
included with the Submittal.
4 –Proof of Discharge Testing
Is proof of Discharge Testing included with this Submittal
5 –Maintenance
Are maintenance schedule and procedure included with this Submittal
6 – Battery Low Voltage Monitoring
Are details included with this submittal for 24/7 monitoring of Low DC
Voltage. – Please specify Yes or No
Remote monitoring is required for unmanned Sites

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

Section 2: To be completed by PG&E Substation Engineering Department

Third Party Interconnection Battery Acceptance Document

Date: __/__/____

Name of Customer:
JO#:
Distribution engineer or PM:
Reviewed by:

Item 1: Type of Utility Grade Battery –

Battery Type:
Rack Type:
Charger Type:

Item 2. Detailed Load Information –

Item 3. Battery & Charger Sizing Calculations –

Item 4. Proof of 3hr-Discharge Testing –

Item 5. Maintenance Procedures –

Item 6. Monitoring of Minimum Battery Voltage –

(Ensure battery DC low voltage is monitored as this will be verified during the Pre-Parallel inspection).

Thank you,

(Engineer who reviewed Info)

Substation Project Engineering

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 25
 Utility Bulletin: TD-2999B-030
Publication Date: 08/15/2017 Rev: 2

Technical Requirements for Electric Service Interconnection at Primary

Distribution Voltages

DOCUMENT APPROVER

Connie Pascua Taylor, Supervising Standards Engineer, Electric Distribution Standards

Roozbeh Movafagh, Senior Manager, Distribution Standards Engineering

DOCUMENT CONTACT

Daniel Jantz, Engineering Standards Technical Specialist Expert, Electric Distribution

Standards

INCLUSION PLAN

There is no set inclusion plan at this time for this bulletin.

REVISION NOTES

Where? What Changed?

What you need to know • Added new note 7 in section 11.5 requiring customers to
complete and submit the battery information in Attachment 1.
• Added Attachment 1.

PG&E Public ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 25
APPENDIX C ELECTRIC AND GAS ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
ELECTRIC AND GAS
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX C ELECTRIC AND GAS ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
 Appendix C
Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Appendix C contains the electric numbered engineering documents and gas design
standards listed in Table C-1 and Table C-2, below. Applicants should access Pacific Gas
and Electric Company’s (PG&E’s) Internet website at www.pge.com/greenbook to find
the latest versions of and updates to these documents. Also, applicants may contact their
local PG&E service planning office to ensure their documents are current.
NOTE: See Table FM-1, “Service Planning Office Contact Information,” at the front of
this manual starting on Page iv, for specific contact numbers listed by area.

Table C-1 Gas Design Standards

Document
Section 1 Title
Number
A-42 Standard Branch Service Installation
A-75 Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing
A-81 Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines
A: Pipes, Mains,
and Services (1) A-90 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design
Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution
A-93.1
System
A-93.3 Excess Flow Valves
J-15 Gas Meter Locations
J: Meters, Gauges J-16 Gas Meter Room
and Instruments (1) J-65.1 Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters
J-95 Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement
K: Pits, Vaults,
Boxes, and K-51 Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters
Shelters (1)
L: Marker Tags,
Signs, Barricades, L−16 Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape
and Fences
Greenbook (2) N-01 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers
1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E’s Gas Standards and Specifications Manual,
which contain these documents.
2 This document is not in the Gas Standards and Specifications Manual.

C−1 2017
Appendix C: Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Table C-2 Electric Engineering Documents

Document
Section 1 Title
Number
Underground (1)
Connectors 013109 Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps

Underground (1) Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground Distribution

015251
Connectors Systems
Overhead (1)
Services 025055 Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
Underground (1)
Enclosures 028028 Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures
Underground (1) Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase,
Services 036670
120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum
Underground (1) Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit
Cable 038193
and Insulated Cable
Underground (1)
Transformers 041352 Service Entrance From Underground Vault Using Bus Bars

Underground (1) Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style, Pad-Mounted

045292
Transformers Transformers
Underground (1) Clearances and Location Requirements for
051122
General Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
Greenbook (2) 052521 Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments
Underground (1)
Services 054619 Agricultural Underground Service 500 HP or Less
Underground (1)
Services 054712 Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service
Engineering Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From
Standards (2) 055103
Transmission Lines
Underground (1)
Transformers 057521 Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
Overhead (1)
Services 058087 Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less

Underground (1) Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts in

058817
Services Customer-Owned Facilities
Disconnect Switch Requirements For Distributed Generation
Greenbook (2) 060559
Customers
Underground (1) Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground
Services 061032
Electric Service Conversion
Underground (1)
Services 062000 Primary Electric Underground Enclosures
Underground (1)
Transformers 062111 Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
Underground (1)
Conduits 062288 Underground Conduits

Greenbook (2) 063422 Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Underground (1) Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential Underground
063927
Services Electric Services 0−600 V to Customer-Owned Facilities
1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E’s Electric Overhead Construction Manual or
Electric Underground Construction Manual, Volumes 1 and 2, which contain these documents.
2 This document is not in the Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual.

2017 C−2
 Appendix C: Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

Table C-2 Electric Engineering Documents, continued

Document
Section 1 Title
Number
Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial
Underground (1)
Services 063928 Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned
Facilities
Underground (1) Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit for Use
063929
Services With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Underground (1)
Transformers 064309 Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers
Overhead (1)
Services 065374 Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction

Greenbook (2) 066211 PG&E−Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Greenbook (2) 068179 Service to Cellular on Transmission Tower
Underground (1) Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface
072149
General Transformers
Underground (1) Painting of PG&E Electric Distribution Pad-Mounted and
076268
General Subsurface Equipment
1 For PG&E reference only: “Section” refers to the section in PG&E’s Electric Overhead Construction Manual or
Electric Underground Construction Manual, Volumes 1 and 2, which contain these documents.
2 This document is not in the Electric Overhead Construction Manual or Electric Underground Construction Manual.

C−3 2017
Appendix C: Electric and Gas Engineering Documents

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

2017 C−4
 GAS DESIGN STANDARD A-42
STANDARD BRANCH SERVICE INSTALLATION

Publication Date: 10-09-13 Rev. #03

This document also appears in the following manual:

S Gas Applicant Design Manual

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard illustrates approved methods of standard branch service installation and shows the approved
branch service marker.

Methods of Installation

Distribution Riser With a Branch Service

Main Marker (See Detail A)
Connect the branch to
the side of the primary
Approx. 45 (typ.)
Service Tee service.

Locate the primary service Riser With a Branch

pipe on one property and Service Marker
away from the property line. (See Detail A)

Method A

Riser With a Branch

Service Marker
(See Detail A)

Riser With a Branch

Service Marker
(See Detail A)
Service Tee

Method B

Distribution Branch is located on one

Main property, but within a Riser With a Branch
PUE that parallels the PL. Service Marker
(See Detail A)

Riser With a Branch

Service Marker
Service (See Detail A)
Tee
PUE Method C

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 4
 Standard Branch Service Installation A-42

Rev. #03 10-09-13

Distribution Branch is located on one Riser With a Branch

Main property, but within a Service Marker
side-yard PUE. (See Detail A)

Riser With a Branch

Service Marker
Side-yard (See Detail A)
Service
Tee PUE

PUE
Method D

General Information
1. Branching is at PG&E’s discretion.
2. Install plastic services in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation.”
3. For stub services, install EMS markers in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire
Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services” and Gas Design Standard M-60, “Approved “Mark and
Locate” Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products.”

Notes on Methods of Installations A-D:

1. Replacement of Existing Branch Services
a. Method A is the preferred approach for the replacement of an existing branch service for configurations that
are similar to Method A. The reasons include:
S Permission has been previously obtained at this location, based on the presence of the existing
branch service.
S Use of existing branch service locations generally helps reduce costs and minimizes impact to
customer.
b. If the customer disagrees with the location of the branch across their property line, then use Method B.
2. Installation of New Branch Services
a. Method B, C, and D are acceptable options for the design and installation of a new branch service. Branches
shown in Method C and D will require a public utility easement (PUE). A PUE is required for any new branch
originating inside a property line to serve an adjacent property.
3. Residential Subdivisions:
a. For new business, if the applicant chooses Method D, then a side-yard PUE will be required. Currently,
Method C is most commonly used in subdivisions.
4. Exceptions to branching across property lines:
a. If the property owner disagrees with the branch location or if an easement cannot be secured from the
property owner, then the branch service will need to be installed outside the property line or new services must
be installed.

Page 2 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Standard Branch Service Installation A-42

Rev. #03 10-09-13

Branch Service Marker

Option 1. A marker made of 3/16” bronze rod, Airco #27 or similar (Code 159064) is formed into an elliptical ring and
brazed closed. Do not heat the valve body. Use wet rags to keep the valve body cool when making the
marker.
Option 2. A marker made of #8, #10, or #14 copper wire is formed around the cock and secured with a Burndy Hylink
connector, or twisted and forged to a solid connection.

Branch Service Marker.

To be installed on each
branch service over the
service cock as shown.
Use Option 1 or 2 as
preferred.
Detail A
Branch Service Marker

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 4
 Standard Branch Service Installation A-42

Rev. #03 10-09-13

Target Audience
Gas estimating, gas distribution engineering and design, gas construction, land department

Definitions
NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

PL: Property Line
PUE: Public Utility Easement
Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment
NA
References
Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.2
Approved “Mark and Locate” Instruments, Equipment, Accessories, and Products . . . . . . . . . M-60
Gas Applicant Design Manual
Appendices
NA

Attachments
NA

Revision Notes
Revision 03 has the following changes:
1. Added Notes for Replacement of Existing Branch Services and for Installation of New Branch Services.
2. Added Notes for Subdivisions.
3. Added Exceptions.
4. Added Method C and D. Reversed order of A and B.
5. This document is part of Change 66.
Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution
Function: Design
Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 4 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A: Pipe, Mains, and Services

Prepared by: JZB1

GAS SERVICE AND MAINS IN PLASTIC CASING A-75

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution Function: Construction

Issued by: M. G. Rossi Date: 05-04-09

Rev. #02a: This document replaces Revision #01. For a description of the changes, see Page 7.

This document also appears in the following manuals:

• Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Gas Applicant Design Manual

Purpose and Scope

This numbered document describes the use and design of PE 2406 and PVC casing material for use in PG&E’s gas
distribution system. PG&E uses PE 2406 and PVC plastic casing material to facilitate the installation of gas mains and
services in residential and commercial subdivisions and for select gas main replacement projects. See the
manufacturer’s product manuals and catalogs and the numbered documents listed in the “References” section below
for more information.

Acronyms
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
EFV: excess flow valve
EMS: electronic marker system
ETS: electrolysis test station
F: Fahrenheit
HDD: horizontal directional drilling
ID: inside diameter
IPS: iron pipe size
MDPE: medium-density polyethylene
NA: not applicable
OD: outside diameter
PE: polyethylene
PG&E: Pacific Gas and Electric Company
PVC: polyvinyl chloride
QC/S: Qualified Contractor/Subcontractor
SDR: standard dimensional ratio
USA: Underground Service Alert
UV: ultraviolet
References Document
Plastic Gas Lines on Bridge Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33.1
Design and Construction Requirements – Gas Lines and Related Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.2
Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.3
Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.1
Excess Flow Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.3
Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90

Rev. #02a: 05-04-09 A-75 Page 1 of 7

A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing

References, continued Document

Plastic System Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.2
Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
Gas Services – Residential Branch Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Standard D-S0455
Gas Mapping Standard – 1” = 100’ Plat Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Standard D-S0457
Joint Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Standard S5453
Polyethylene Heat Iron Socket Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Work Procedure WP4170-04
Polyethylene Heat Iron Saddle Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Work Procedure WP4170-05
Polyethylene Heat Iron Butt Fusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Work Procedure WP4170-06
Polyethylene Electrofusion Coupling and Saddle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Work Procedure WP4170-07
Repairing Plastic Conduit and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058548
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduits and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *EMS 64
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . *EMS 2503
Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual
Gas Main Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Rule 15
Gas Service Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Rule 16
Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASTM D638
Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120 ASTM D1785-89
Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings . . . . . . . . . ASTM D2513
Standard Specification for Smooth Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit and
Fittings for Underground Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASTM F512
Definition
Casing: For the purposes of this numbered document, a casing is also referred to as a sleeve or conduit. Casings
are not pressurized and shall only be used to insert a natural gas carrier pipe.
General Information
1. PE 2406 (MDPE) plastic casing material (sleeves and conduit) shall conform to Engineering Material Specification
2503 except as noted in Items 3 and 4.
2. PE 2406 casing material having SDRs not listed in Engineering Material Specification 2503 shall be tested and
certified in accordance with ASTM D2513.
3. PE 2406 casing material shall be yellow in color and marked with four orange stripes running the length of the
casing. The width of the four orange stripes shall be 1/8” minimum for 2” IPS casing, and shall increase
proportionally with increases in the casing size. The orange stripes shall be equally spaced around the
circumference of the casing.
4. PE 2406 casing material shall have a printline stating “Natural Gas Sleeve” (instead of “Gas”) running the length of
the casing. All other marking information, to include the spacing of printline marks, shall be provided in accordance
with the requirements listed in Engineering Material Specification 2503.
5. PVC plastic casing material (conduit) shall conform to Engineering Material Specification 64.
6. PVC plastic casing material shall conform to Numbered Document 062288.
7. PE 2406 casing material is preferred for service conduits and gas main casings. Use ASTM F512 PVC DB-120 for
casing material when PE 2406 casing material is not available.
8. The sizes and wall thickness of PE 2406 and PVC casing material, as shown in Table 1 on Page 3, are approved
for use in the PG&E system. The use of other sizes, SDRs, and grades of PE 2406 and PVC casing material must
have the prior approval of gas transmission and distribution technical services personnel. Contact the plastic
hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for assistance.

*EMS here refers to Engineering Material Specification.

A-75 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #02a: 05-04-09

 A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing

Table 1 Approved PE 2406 and PVC Casings

Typical Wall
Size OD ID Length 2
Material 1 SDR Construction Code Thickness
(IPS) (Inches) (Inches) (Feet)
Methods (Inches)
Direct Bury
2 PVC 3, 4 NA 2.375 2.161 20 016468 0.077
(Stick)
HDD (Stick)
2 PE 2406 11 Direct Bury or 2.375 1.917 20 021419 0.216
Insert
2 PE 2406 11 HDD (Coil) 2.375 1.917 500 021420 0.216
Direct Bury
4 PVC 3, 4 NA 4.500 4.132 20 016472 0.154
(Stick)
HDD (Stick)
4 PE 2406 13.5 Direct Bury or 4.500 3.830 021421 0.333
Insert 40

4 PE 2406 13.5 HDD (Coil) 4.500 3.830 400 021422 0.333

Direct Bury
6 PVC 3, 4 NA 6.625 6.111 20 016474 0.227
(Stick)
HDD (Stick)
6 PE 2406 13.5 Direct Bury or 6.625 5.643 021423 0.491
Insert 40

6 PE 2406 13.5 HDD (Coil) 6.625 5.643 400 021424 0.491

Direct Bury or
8 PE 2406 13.5 8.625 7.347 40 021425 0.639
Insert (Stick)
HDD (Stick)
12 PE 2406 5, 6 13.5 Direct Bury or 12.750 10.862 021426 0.945
Insert 40
1 Minimum order quantities apply. Contact the plastic hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for
assistance.
2 Lengths are for sticks or coils. Smaller lengths are for sticks and larger numbers are for coils.
3 Refer to Numbered Document 062288 for material information and codes for couplings and PVC cement.
4 Do not use HDD to install PVC casings.
5 Size and dimensions not referenced in Engineering Material Specification 2503. Dimensions shall conform to
ASTM D2513.
6 Contact the plastic hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for procedures and equipment for fusing
12” IPS casing material.
Application
9. The installation of plastic casing material should not to be used as a substitute for proper job scheduling for new
business work.
10. The installation of PE 2406 or PVC gas main casings shall not be used to circumvent main line extension rules
specified in Gas Rule 15. PE 2406 or PVC main casings shall not be installed in any distribution trench, except
under limited circumstances as stated in items 11B and 11C.
11. PE 2406 and PVC casing material may be used to facilitate construction under limited circumstances.
A. PE 2406 or PVC service casings may be installed on new business work under any of the following
circumstances:
(1) Paving of the property between the service stub and proposed meter site occurs before service
completion.
(2) Completion of the gas service is impractical owing to the likelihood of damage to the service as a result of
construction activities.
(3) The Company or applicant installer cannot meet the developer’s construction scheduling requirements to
construct the service completion.

Rev. #02a: 05-04-09 A-75 Page 3 of 7

A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing

Note: The applicant owns the empty service casing until a gas facility has been inserted and
pressurized in accordance with Gas Rule 16. The applicant should be informed of the ownership
requirements before construction. This includes the obligation to locate and surface mark the facility
pursuant to a USA request and the responsibility to maintain serviceability of the casing and EMS
devices. Note that the service casings may only be installed on private property. Do not install them in
the public right of way.
B. PE 2406 or PVC gas main casing material may be installed on new business work under either of the following
circumstances:
(1) Paving of the street between an existing gas main and proposed gas main extension would occur before
the distribution trench is constructed.
(2) Installation of the gas main is impractical owing to the likelihood of damage to the main as a result of
construction activities.
The installation of PE 2406 and PVC casings is limited to street crossings that do not traverse state highways
or railroads. Refer to Numbered Document A-70 for highway and railroad casing requirements.
Note: The applicant owns the empty casing until a gas facility has been inserted and pressurized in
accordance with Gas Rule 15. The applicant should be informed of the ownership requirements
before construction. This includes the obligation to locate and surface mark the facility pursuant to a
USA request and the responsibility to maintain serviceability of the casing and associated
appurtenances.
C. PE 2406 gas main casing material may be installed on reconstruction work under any of the following
circumstances:
(1) The replacement method specified involves cast iron bursting or steel pipe splitting.
(2) The replacement method specifies using HDD to cross streets or thoroughfares other than state highways
or railroads. Refer to Numbered Document A-70 for highway and railroad casing requirements.
(3) Paving of the street between an existing gas main and proposed gas main extension occurs before the
distribution trench is constructed.
(4) Installation of the gas main is impractical owing to the likelihood of damage to the main as a result of
construction activities.
D. PVC gas main casing material may be installed on reconstruction work on a case by case basis. Contact the
plastic hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for assistance.
E. PE 2406 and PVC gas main casing material may not be installed as a casing for PE pipe on bridges. Refer to
Numbered Document A-33.1 for PE casing requirements on bridge structures.
F. PE 2406 and PVC gas main casing material may not be installed as a casing for steel mains or services.
G. Gas mains and services shall not be inserted into existing service casings or gas main sleeves that do not
meet the requirements of this numbered document unless approved by gas engineering personnel. Contact
the plastic hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for assistance.
H. Service casings and gas main sleeves installed on new business work are non-refundable items.
I. If another utility or entity encroaches upon a service casing or gas main sleeve on a new business job, the
applicant is responsible for providing an alternative trench or removing the other utility’s or entity’s facility
before installing the gas main or service. Contact the rates and tariffs personnel for assistance in resolving
these matters.
J. If another utility or entity encroaches upon a gas main casing on a reconstruction job, contact the encroaching
party and have them remove their facility. Contact Company legal personnel for assistance in these matters.
The approval to install service and gas main casings shall be made before construction by gas engineering
personnel.

Limitations
12. Do not install PE 2406 or PVC casing materials where operating temperatures exceed 140°F. Do not install PE
2406 or PVC casing materials within 10’ of steam lines or other sources of heat, or at a distance such that the
temperature on the PE 2406 or PVC casing materials could exceed 100°F, unless an insulating barrier is provided
to ensure that the temperature of the PE 2406 or PVC casing materials is always below 100°F. Crossings of

A-75 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #02a: 05-04-09

 A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing

PE 2406 or PVC casing materials and steam lines are allowed if a thermal insulating barrier is provided and the
100°F temperature limit is maintained. Note: PVC casing material is rated at 194°F. However, the gas carrier pipe
is limited to 100°F.
13. Do not install PE 2406 or PVC casing materials in aboveground locations, or where the material could be exposed
to UV radiation. PE 2406 or PVC casing materials do not provide sufficient mechanical protection for aboveground
installations.
14. Do not install PE 2406 or PVC casing materials in subsurface locations that are contaminated with hydrocarbons
or other volatile organic compounds. Contact gas engineering personnel to assess chemical compatibility with
PE 2406 or PVC.
15. PE 2406 or PVC service casings shall only be installed on private property. Refer to Gas Rule 16 for ownership
requirements and responsibility to furnish materials. PE 2406 or PVC service casings shall be installed at or within
the property line and terminate past the paved area with sufficient clearance to insert the gas service (carrier pipe),
tie into the existing stub, and set the riser. Follow the requirements of Numbered Document A-90 for the
installation of stub services, plastic service completions, and riser installation details.
16. EFVs, couplings, fittings, curb valves, or other appurtenances shall not be installed within a PE 2406 or PVC
service conduit. Install EFVs in accordance with the requirements of Numbered Documents A-90 and A-93.3.
17. The maximum permissible length of the service casing is 200’. Service casing shall run in a straight line. Ensure
that any sag or over bends are gradual.
18. Refer to Table 2 on Page 5 for recommended casing sizes by gas carrier pipe size.
19. The maximum permissible length of a gas main casing is determined by the safe pulling loads. Refer to Chapter 6
of the Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual and Numbered Document A-93.1 for specific guidance in determining
allowable loads.
20. PE 2406 and PVC gas main sleeves and service conduits shall not branch or have elbows, reducers, or other
inline fittings (except for electrofusion couplings) connected to it.
21. Gas main and service casings shall not contain any other facility other than the natural gas carrier pipe and
associated locating wire.
22. When economically feasible, PE 2406 and PVC service casings may be accessed for branch installations. Refer to
Utility Standard D-S0455 and Numbered Document A-93.1 for branch requirements. Follow the requirements of
Item 45 on Page 7 for accessing service casings.

Table 2 Casing Selection Guide

Gas Carrier Size (IPS) Recommended Casing Size
(Inches) (Inches)
4
2
6
3 6
4 8
6 12
8 12

Installation Requirements

23. When installing the main or service, ensure that proper alignment and adequate support are provided where the
pipe enters and leaves so that no strain will be placed on the carrier pipe.
24. Link seals and split end seals are not required on PE 2406 or PVC casings.
25. Follow the requirements of Numbered Document A-93.1 for PE 2406 installation in a casing or bore hole.
26. PE 2406 and PVC casing materials shall be installed in backfill meeting the requirements specified in Exhibit B of
Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide”.

Rev. #02a: 05-04-09 A-75 Page 5 of 7

A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing

27. All empty PE 2406 and PVC service conduits and gas main sleeves shall be capped before backfilling. Install
plastic caps or redwood plugs in accordance with Numbered Document A-81. Install EMS markers on both ends of
the gas main sleeve or service conduit in accordance with Numbered Document A-93.1.
28. A mandrel shall be used to prove that all service conduits and gas main sleeves are free and clear of dirt, rocks,
and other debris before inserting a gas carrier pipe.
29. Where several service conduits have been installed in a joint trench, contact the other utilities involved to request
that they seal the ends of their conduits adjacent to the building. A request should be made to each of the other
utilities involved for their cooperation. Explain the reason for the seal, and the potential hazard of migrating gas.
30. Provide slack for the carrier pipe so that thermal contraction will not produce tension on the pipe or any fittings or
connections.
31. PE 2406 service conduits and gas main sleeves shall be joined by the heat fusion methods prescribed in Table 7
of Numbered Document A-93.1 or by electrofusion. All PE 2406 heat fusions and electrofusion connections shall
be made in accordance with WP4170-04, WP4170-05, WP4170-06, and WP4170-07. A current Numbered
Document D-34 qualification is not required to connect (join) casing materials.
32. Install all PVC service casings in accordance with PG&E Numbered Document 062288.
33. PE 2406 and PVC gas main casings shall be installed to the greatest extent practical at an approximate 90° angle
between the existing distribution main and the street or proposed paved area at the point of crossing.
34. PE 2406 and PVC gas main sleeves shall be installed with a minimum cover as specified in Numbered Document
A-93.1, unless it is installed in a joint trench crossing a street (paved) area where the cover requirement is
determined by Exhibit B of Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide”. If a gas
main sleeve is installed in a joint distribution trench, the gas main sleeve shall be in the same relative location in
the distribution trench and shall have the same clearance from other structures that would be required for a direct
burial installation.
35. PE 2406 and PVC service conduit shall be installed with a minimum cover as specified in Numbered Document
A-93.1, unless it is installed in a joint service trench where the cover requirement is determined by Exhibit B of
Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench Configurations and Occupancy Guide”. If a service conduit is installed in a
joint service trench, the conduit shall be in the same relative location in the service trench and shall have the same
clearance from other structures that would be required for a direct burial installation.
36. PE 2406 and PVC casings shall not be installed at a depth greater than the depths specified in Table 3 of
Numbered Document A-81.
37. All service conduits and gas main sleeves shall have a locating wire attached per the requirements of Numbered
Documents A-90.2 or A-90.3, as applicable. The locating wire may terminate either at the casing ends in an ETS
or be connected to the locating wires on both ends of the casing.
38. PE 2406 and PVC service and PE 2406 gas main casings do not need to be leak tested.
39. PE 2406 and PVC service and PE 2406 gas main casings do not need to have vents installed except as noted in
Item 40A below.
40. After the carrier (service) pipe is installed in the casing, the end of the casing nearest the house or structure being
supplied shall be sealed so that any leaking gas cannot migrate through the casing to the building.
A. If the properly sized casing plug is available for PE 2406 casings, as listed in Numbered Document B-90.2,
use it for this purpose. Wrap the casing plug with Tac-Tape (Code 507036) or equivalent tape wrap. If a
suitable plug is not available, a plug of duct seal at least 1” long should be used, followed by the Tac-Tape or
equivalent. If the other end of the service conduit for the gas line terminates near another building or structure
into which gas could migrate, take special precautions to vent the casing to a safe location.
B. PVC service conduit shall be sealed in accordance with Item 40A above.
41. A 3” wide plastic marking tape with the words “Gas Line in Conduit” (Code 373371) shall be installed on PVC
service conduit. The marking tape shall be spiral wrapped around the casing for its entire length and held in place
with adhesive tape at 10’ intervals. The marking tape shall be wrapped such that the horizontal distance between
spirals does not exceed 36”.
42. The owner of an empty casing shall furnish to PG&E, prior to acceptance of the casing, an as-built drawing (or
service record) and a PG&E inspection record indicating that the casing was installed pursuant to this document.

A-75 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #02a: 05-04-09

 A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing

43. Where a gas service or main is installed in a sleeve or conduit, document the information on the plat sheet and
service order, as applicable. Refer to Numbered Document A-93.1 and Utility Standard D-S0457 for mapping and
records management requirements.

Maintenance and Operations

44. Gas crews and other employees who could respond to a gas emergency should be made aware that some
services and mains have been installed through plastic sleeves and conduits. They should be trained on how to
recognize and to squeeze off pipe that has been so installed.
45. PE 2406 and PVC service conduits and gas main sleeves may be accessed by window cutting using
Company-approved tools. Precautions shall be taken to avoid damaging the carrier pipe. Contact the plastic
hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for Company-approved materials for cutting and accessing
PE 2406 and PVC service conduits and gas main sleeves.
46. A gas service or main that is installed in a service conduit or gas main sleeve that has been squeezed off must be
replaced. Numbered Document A-93.1 provides specific replacement instructions.
47. Repair all damaged PVC service conduit in accordance with Numbered Document 058548.
48. Contact the plastic hotline at Company phone 223-9161 (415-973-9161) for assistance in repairing damaged
PE 2406 casings.
49. If a broken service conduit or any other problems brought about by using a casing delays Company work, bill the
applicant for lost time and associated repair or replacement costs before service completion.
Records
1. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Revision Notes
Revision 02a has the following changes:
1. Added section Records.
Revision 02 has the following changes:
1. Updated the “Acronyms” and “References” sections.
2. Added new Footnote 1 and rearranged the sequence of all footnotes in Table 1 on Page 3.
3. Expanded note following Item 11A(3) on Page 4.
4. This document is part of Change 61.

Rev. #02a: 05-04-09 A-75 Page 7 of 7

 A: Pipe, Mains, and Services

Prepared by: JZB1

PLUGS AND CAPS FOR NON-PRESSURIZED GAS PIPELINES A-81

Department: Gas Distribution and Technical Services Section: Gas Engineering and Planning

Approved by: G. M. Vollbrecht Date: 04-14-03

Rev. #01: This document replaces Revision #00. For a description of the changes, see Page 4.

Purpose and Scope

This gas standard illustrates, specifies dimensions, and provides code numbers for redwood plugs and plastic caps for
use on non-pressurized gas pipelines, as described in UO Standard S4129, “Deactivation of Gas Facilities,”
Attachment 1, Table 1. It also provides the manufacturer’s part numbers for plastic caps.

Acronyms
PE: polyethylene
UO: Utility Operations
UV: ultraviolet
General Information
1. For steel and PE pipe, use plastic end caps for deactivation, where possible. For cast iron pipe, use redwood
plugs or other suitable means of sealing for deactivation, as described in UO Standard S4129, “Deactivation of
Gas Facilities,” Attachment 1, Table 1.
2. For cap sizes without code numbers and for pipe sizes not shown, contact the Gas Distribution and Technical
Services department.
3. Contact the Gas Distribution and Technical Services department when the use of plastic caps at depths greater
than those listed in Table 3 on Page 4 is desired.
4. Do not use plastic caps in aboveground locations, or where the cap could be exposed to UV radiation.
5. Do not store plastic caps uncovered, outside where they could be exposed to UV radiation for extended periods of
time.
6. If a plastic cap is cracked or cut, discard it (do not use).
7. When using plastic caps, backfill the first 12” above the plastic cap with sand or other suitable material. See Gas
Standard A-93.1, “Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance” and Engineering Guideline
4123, “Backfill Sand Specification.”
8. To ensure that a plastic cap is installed properly (full depth of the cap is on the pipe), cut the pipe end squarely,
and place a mark on the pipe, at each of the four quadrants, a distance back from the end of the pipe equal to the
depth of the cap (Table 2 on Page 3, Column B). When the cap is fully installed, the cap should reach all four of
those marks.
9. Do not use any plastic caps other than the caps listed in this standard.

Rev. #01: 04-14-03 A-81 Page 1 of 4

A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines

Figure 1
Redwood Plug

Table 1 Dimensions and Code Numbers for Redwood Plugs

Nominal Pipe Size A B C
Code
(Inches) (Inches) (Inches) (Inches)
3/4 1/4 1 4-3/8 204839
3/4 - 1-1/4 3/8 1-1/2 5-1/2 209036
1-1/4 - 1-1/2 1/2 2 5-1/2 209037
2 1-3/4 2-1/2 4 209038
3 2-1/2 3-1/2 4-3/4 209039
4 3-1/2 4-1/2 6 209040
6 5-1/2 6-3/4 8-1/4 209041
8 7-1/2 8-7/8 10-1/2 209042
10 9 11 12 200312
12 11-1/2 13 12 200315

A-81 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #01: 04-14-03

 A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines

Figure 2
Plastic End Cap

Table 2 Dimensions, Part Numbers, and Code Numbers for Plastic End
Caps
Nominal
A B
Pipe Size Part Number Code
(Inches) (Inches)
(Inches)
2 2.378 1.096 RRC-2 021124
3 3.490 1.700 RRC-3 021125
4 4.500 1.725 RRC-4 021126
6 6.640 2.150 RRC-6 021127
8 8.670 2.310 RRC-8 021128
10 10.705 2.768 RRC-10 021130
12 12.679 2.820 RRC-12 021131
16 16.000 2.837 RRC-16 021132
18 18.000 2.845 RRC-18 021133
20 20.000 2.955 RRC-20 021144
22 22.000 2.986 RRC-22 NA
24 24.000 2.995 RRC-24 021139
26 26.000 2.750 RRC-26 021140

Rev. #01: 04-14-03 A-81 Page 3 of 4

A: Pipe, Mains, and Services
Plugs and Caps for Non-Pressurized Gas Pipelines

Table 3 Approved PE Cap Usage by Pipe Size and Depth of Cover

Nominal Maximum Depth of Cover (to Top of Pipe)
Pipe Size (Feet)
(Inches) Horizontal Placement 1 10° to 45° Placement 2 45° to 90° Placement 3
2 10 10 10
3 10 10 10
4 10 10 8
6 10 8 6
8 10 6 5
10 10 5 4
12 9 4 3
16 6 2 –
18 5 – –
20 5 – –
22 4 – –
24 3 – –
26 2 – –
1 The axis of the pipeline is horizontal, angled up not more than 10°, or angled downward.
2 The axis of the pipeline is angled up more than 10°, but less than 45°.
3 The axis of the pipeline is angled up more than 45°.

Revision Notes
Revision 01 has the following changes:
1. Revised entire Table 3 to provide specific maximum depth of cover depending on the nominal pipe size and the
pipe placement.
2. This document is part of Change 52.

A-81 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #01: 04-14-03

 GAS DESIGN STANDARD A-90
POLYETHYLENE GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DESIGN See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Publication Date: 02-26-14 Rev. #06a
This document also appears in the following manuals:
S Electric & Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
S Gas Applicant Design Manual

Purpose and Scope

This Gas Design Standard (GDS) provides design requirements for the Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company)
polyethylene (PE) gas distribution system. Company PE installations meet the Code of Federal Regulations 49 (CFR)
192.321, “Installation of plastic pipe.”
Areas covered in this GDS include:
S General Information
S Materials: pipe, fittings, risers, valves and locating wire
S Polyethylene Pipe Placement
S Construction Methods: preferred PE joining methods, direct-burial plastic main and service
installation, mechanical insertion of polyethylene main and service and plastic service renewal.
S Records

General Information
1. Connections within the PE system may be made with the following:
S Heat iron socket and butt fusion (reference Gas Design Standard B-90, “Plastic System Socket and
Butt Fusion Fittings”)
S Heat iron saddle fusion (reference Gas Design Standard B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”)
S Electrofusion (reference Gas Design Standard B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”)
S Mechanical fittings (reference Gas Design Standard B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”
and Gas Design Standard, B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”).
NOTE: Any connection to Aldyl-A pipe requires mechanical or electrofusion fittings ONLY. Heat iron fusion is
NOT allowed on Aldyl-A pipe.
S IF the SDR (wall thickness) of an Aldyl-A pipe is unknown,
THEN electrofusion must be used.
2. Evaluate cathodic protection impacts of the design: Utility Standard S0470, “Design and Construction of Gas
Distribution Facilities” requires a corrosion mechanic or gas operating supervisor to evaluate the cathodic
protection impacts and needs associated with a project during the design stage of the project.
a. All isolated steel pipe, risers, valves, and/or fittings within a PE pipe system must be cathodically protected.
Prefabricated risers, metallic components on plastic valves, tapping tees, and/or metallic bolts on plastic
fittings do NOT need to be protected. Refer to Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual - Corrosion Control
Volume.
3. Ensure plastic mains or services are not subjected to temperatures greater than 140ºF as described in
Gas Design Standard A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations.”
4. To deactivate a plastic service see Gas Design Standard A-93.2, “Deactivation of Plastic Services.”

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 13
 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Materials
Only pipeline components listed in the Company’s Gas Standards and Specifications, Gas Information Bulletins and
Flash emails are allowed in construction of the gas system.
1. Pipe
a. Pipe sizing:
S 2”, 4”, 6” or 8” PE main is preferred.
S New services and fully replaced services are to be 1” CTS or larger.
Exceptions: Existing 3/4” steel services may be replaced with inserted 1/2” CTS polyethylene, if the 1/2”
CTS polyethylene has the capacity to support current customer loads and is consistent with Gas Design
Standard A-93.3, “Plastic Excess Flow Valves,” when an excess flow valve (EFV) is required.
Existing 1/2” CTS PE service may be replaced by pipe splitting with 1/2” CTS as described in
Utility Procedure TD-4634P-01, “Polyethylene Service Splitting.”
Note: 1/2” CTS may ONLY be used for inserting, 1/2” CTS pipe splitting, partial service alterations, and leak
repairs to existing 1/2” CTS services.
S On applicant installed jobs, the Company may accept previously installed 1/2” CTS services
and 1/2” CTS service stubs installed prior to May 1, 2010, if those services and stubs have the
capacity to support the current customer loads, as approved by the local area engineer. See
Appendix 1 for the requirements that must be met to approve previously installed applicant
installations.
2. Fittings
a. Heat Iron Fusion Fittings are listed in Gas Design Standard B-90 and Gas Design Standard B-90.1.
b. Electrofusion Fittings are listed in Gas Design Standard B-90.3.
c. Approved PE-to-PE mechanical connections are listed in Gas Design Standard B-90.1, Gas Design Standard
B-91, and Gas Design Standard B-91.1.
d. Make PE-to-steel, PE-to-copper, or PE-to-cast-iron transition joints using the approved transition fittings
shown in:
S Gas Design Standard B-54, “Compression Couplings”
S Gas Design Standard B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”
S Gas Design Standard, B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”
S Gas Design Standard B-91.4, “Cast Iron to Steel Insulated Transition Couplings”
S Gas Design Standard B-91.5, “Cast Iron to Polyethylene Transition Fittings”
3. Risers
a. Pre-fabricated risers are listed in Gas Design Standard A-91, “Prefabricated Risers.”
4. Valves
a. Excess Flow Valves (EFVs) are listed in Gas Design Standard A-93.3.
b. PE valves are listed in Gas Design Standard F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves.”
c. Contact the local area engineer to determine requirements when using steel valves within a PE system. For
example: when installing fire/emergency valves upstream and downstream of regulator stations.
When steel valves are installed in a PE system, vertical or horizontal steel legs must be welded to the steel
pipe or transition fittings to prevent the valve body from rotating (see examples in A-90 Attachment 1,
“Illustration of a Direct Burial Main and Service Installation”). Gas Design Standards and Specifications,
Section F provides information on steel valves.
5. PE Pipe Locating
a. For locating wire requirements see Gas Design Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial
Plastic Mains and Services” and Gas Design Standard A-90.3, “Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic
Mains and Services.”

Page 2 of 13 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A-90
Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Polyethylene Pipe System Design

1. Polyethylene Pipe Placement:
Horizontal distance:
a. Polyethylene distribution gas main must be installed a minimum horizontal distance of 10’ from the face or
foundation of any building.
S IF the main must be installed closer than 10’ to a foundation or building,
THEN contact the local area gas engineer to determine if additional protection for the gas main is required.
Burial depth:
a. Place gas only facilities in the distribution trench per GS Interim Standard 463-4, “Cover and Clearance
Requirements for Transmission Lines, Mains and Service Lines.”
b. Place joint trench gas facilities in the distribution trench per Utility Standard S5453, “Joint Trench.” Placement
in a Public Utility Easement (PUE) is preferred.
c. Plastic pipe is susceptible to buckling and crushing at specified depths due to the effects of soil stresses.
Plastic pipe may NOT be installed at a depth greater than 10’ unless the installation is evaluated for fill-stress
effects and is approved by the area senior gas distribution engineer.
Gas service placement:
a. Gas service is normally installed in a straight line at a right angle to the main, traversing from the main to the
meter.
S Offsets, diagonal runs, and bends should be avoided wherever possible.
S Where avoidable, service should NOT be installed under driveways or customer-paved areas.
b. When an applicant changes the service-point location (flop lots), take one of the following actions:
i. For short-side service stubs, cut off the service stub at the main per Gas Design Standard A-93.2. Install a
new service.
ii. For long-side service stubs:
S IF the street is not yet paved,
THEN cut off the service stub at the main per Gas Design Standard A-93.2. Install a new service.
S IF the street is paved and the walls of the new building are still opened,
THEN use the existing service-point location and have the applicant re-plumb the houseline to the
original service-point location.
S IF the street is paved and the walls of the new building are closed,
THEN consult the local area engineer to determine the change in service lay-out.
c. The final grade level for a pre-fabricated riser must be at or below the red burial line indicated on the riser as
described in Gas Design Standard A-91.
2. Typical Subdivision Design for PE Pipe
Figure 1 shows a “Typical Subdivision Design - Infill” and Figure 2 shows a “Typical Subdivision Design - End of
System Growth”
a. The local gas distribution engineer must specify main-line rib sizes and tie-in locations.
b. Do NOT terminate gas distribution facilities at the end of a development to clear paving or other improvements
unless the applicant requests an extension to serve adjacent future development. Terminate these facilities
approximately 5’ past the last service or to the next property line within the project area, unless approved by
the area senior gas distribution engineer.
c. To make sharp turns or offsets (smaller than the minimum bend radius in Table 2), install full-opening heat
fusion fittings per Gas Design Standard B-90 or electrofusion fittings per Gas Design Standard B-90.3.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 13
 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Proposed Development Existing Development

Take-Off From Existing Tie-In to Existing

Existing Main (To be sized by gas engineer)
Line Rib

Existing
2” IPS Main
2” IPS Rib
Main
Existing Road With Main

(Typical)

Tie-In to
Existing

Proposed
Main-Line Rib Place distribution main
(To be sized by gas engineer) in accordance with
Utility Standard S5453
(PUE Preferred).
Future Development Terminate main-line rib
at end of last service.
Figure 1
Typical Subdivision Design − Infill

d. Place the gas facilities in the distribution trench per Utility Standard S5453. Placement in a PUE is preferred.

Existing Main-Line Rib

Extend main 2” IPS (Typical)

to provide
back-tie. To
be sized by
PG&E gas Proposed Development
distribution
engineer.

To be sized by Gas
Proposed Road Engineer

Terminate Main line rib

Future Development
Figure 2
Typical Subdivision Design − End of System Growth

e. A subdivision design for end of system growth is shown in Figure 2. Extend the distribution main along the
proposed road to provide a back-tie to the proposed development.

Page 4 of 13 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A-90
Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Rev. #06a 02-26-14

3. Branch Services
a. Branch services must be designed and installed as outlined in Gas Design Standard A-42, “Standard Branch
Service Installation.”
b. Branching may be used to provide service to NO more than two buildings. The meter installations must be
located on the adjacent sides of the two buildings served. Where a branch-service installation is justified, a
separate location for the gas meter and electric meter is permissible, if necessary.

Construction Methods
1. PE Joining Methods
a. The preferred joining methods for each size pipe are shown in Table 1.

Table 1 PE Pipe Joining Methods

Pipe/Tubing Size (Inches) Joining Method
1/2 CTS, 1 CTS, and 1-1/4 IPS Electrofusion, Heat Iron Socket Fusion or Mechanical Fittings
2 IPS Electrofusion, Heat Iron Socket Fusion, Heat Iron Butt Fusion or
Mechanical Fittings
3 IPS and Larger Heat Iron Butt Fusion and Electrofusion

2. Typical Direct-Burial Plastic Main and Service Installation

a. Do NOT install direct-buried plastic pipe beneath retaining structures, walls or footings, or adjacent to pile or
other structures subject to settlement.
b. Do NOT install direct-buried plastic pipe in unpaved areas where substantial wheel or equipment loading may
damage the pipe, unless approved by the local area gas engineer.
c. A warning tape is to be installed in direct-burial installations per Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline
Underground Warning Tape.”
Directional Changes
d. Changes in pipe direction must be made with elbows or tee fittings at street intersections (as illustrated in
A-90 Attachment 1). Roping may be used for directional changes at other locations, when necessary.
e. Bends in roped PE pipe must be installed in the trench with a radius greater than the minimum recommended
radius (Table 2). All bends must have a radius greater than: 20 times the pipe diameter for SDR 7 and 9 and
25 times the pipe diameter for SDR 10, 11, 11.5 and 13.5.
f. There must be NO fusion or mechanical joints within 3’ of any bend.

Table 2 PE Pipe Minimum Bend Radius

Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) Minimum Bend Radius for PE Pipe Unsupported by Casing
1/2 CTS 1-1/4’
1 CTS 2-1/4’
1-1/4 IPS 3-1/2’
2 IPS 5’
3 IPS 7’
4 IPS 9-1/2’
6 IPS 14’
8 IPS 18’

g. Ensure that plastic pipe containing fusions or mechanical joints is installed in a straight alignment. Plastic pipe
installations are in a straight alignment if the bend radius of the pipe is greater than 150 times the pipe
diameter.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 13
 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Locating Wire Service Valve, Tamper Proof, Insulated,

(See Gas Design Standard A-90.2) Per Gas Design Standard F-80

Prefabricated Service Riser

Coupling Shown for Stub or Riser Kit
Service Extension Only (See Gas Design Standard A-91)

Connect a locating wire according to

Gas Design Standard A-90.3
Plastic

Plastic Main

EFV
Figure 3
Plastic Service Installation

Figure 3 represents a typical lateral connection. See Gas Design Standard B-90.1 and Gas Design Standard B-90.3
for saddle fittings.
h. For future lateral lines, install a minimum 3’ stub with locating wire attached to an anode as described in
Gas Design Standard A-90.2
3. Mechanical Insertion of Polyethylene Main and Service
a. Refer to the documents below for information on specific casing applications and installations:
S Refer to Gas Design Standard A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing” for the specific
installation requirements for plastic pipe in a plastic casing.
S Refer to Gas Design Standard A-33.1, “Plastic Gas Lines on Bridge Structures” for the specific
installation requirements for plastic lines on bridge structures.
S Casing size and other requirements for highway crossings are provided in Gas Design Standard
A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings.”
b. Do not transfer copper services to a new main or alter copper services (see Utility Standard TD-4801S,
“Service Replacement Criteria”). Replace copper services with 1” CTS or larger PE tubing. Install an excess
flow valve (EFV) per Gas Design Standard A-93.3. (see illustration in A-90 Attachment 1)
c. Plastic pipe is approved for double inserting into existing mains and services. This application is approved
provided the following conditions are met:
S Removing the previously inserted pipe is not practical or economical.
S Installation is made in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-75 or Gas Design Standard
A-93.1, “Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance,” as applicable,
particularly with respect to protecting and supporting the entry and exit points.
S Installation is mapped with both the casing size and casing material identified. An example is
shown in the mechanical insertion section of Gas Design Standard A-93.1.
d. Ensure that the minimum bend radius of PE pipe listed in Table 2 is not exceeded during insertion into a
casing.
e. Provide for future laterals by installing stubs or opening up the casing at appropriate locations (see Figure 4,
“Laterals Off Plastic Main Insert” and Figure 6, “Service Connections Off Plastic Main Insert”).
f. Plug the space between the plastic and the casing pipe (see Figure 5, “Tie-In to Steel”) with casing plugs or
cable protectors (see Gas Design Standard A-70, “Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings” and Gas
Design Standard A-73, “Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart”), duct seal, or other suitable means
not detrimental to PE pipe. See Gas Design Standard A-75 for the plastic casing/sleeve sealing requirements.

Page 6 of 13 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A-90
Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Min. 12”
Min.
12”
Old Main Old Main

Branching Saddle or Tee Future Extension

Coupling 36” to 48” Nipple
Plastic Branching Nipple Plastic Cap

Figure 4
Laterals Off Plastic Main Insert

Protect Plastic From Sharp Casing

Edges With Cable Protectors or
Casing Plugs (See Gas Design
3’ + Standard B-90.2)
Lateral
Steel Plastic Old Main Connection

Control Transition Fitting

Fitting (See Gas Design Standard B-91)
Steel
Existing Steel Figure 5
Tie-In to Steel

Service Saddle Service Saddle

Tapping Tee Tapping Tee

Old Main Old Main

8”−12” Typical Plastic Steel

Service Service
Transfer Transfer
Service Insert in Excess Steel-to-Plastic Adapter
Conjunction With Flow Coupling (Compression
Main Insert Valve Type)
Steel Service
Plastic
Service Casing Coupling
Sleeve and Service Casing
Casing Plug (Steel or Plastic)
Figure 6
Service Connections Off Plastic Main Insert

4. Riser Insertion
a. Details for service head adapter installation are provided in Gas Design Standard B-91.
b. Whenever possible, the service riser must be relocated outside of the building (see Gas Design Standard
A-91). This section of Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation,” Figure 7, “Typical
Insert into Basement or Meter Box,” is intended for use on service renewals where a new service riser cannot
be relocated outside of the building.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 7 of 13
 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Curb Box per Gas Design Standard K-40

Sleeve Fusion or
Mechanical Vent
Service Tee Coupling

Steel
Plastic Pipe
Casing

Casing Plastic Casing Casing Plug

Plug Pipe Plug
Curb Valve and Support Base Fusion or Mechanical Coupling
(See Gas Design Standard F-90)
Detail A
Insulated Service Valve
Insulated Service Valve (See Gas Design Standard F-80)
(See Gas Design
Standard F-80)
Plastic
Pipe
Service Head Adapter
(See Gas Design Standard B-91)

Steel
Casing r
See Table 3 on Page 9
Service Head Adapter
(See Gas Design Standard B-91)
Detail B Detail C
Typical Plastic Insert Inside Building

Figure 7
Typical Plastic Insert Into Basement or Meter Box

c. Where possible, the sleeve should bridge the gap between the service tee and the casing pipe. The plastic
pipe must be supported by well-compacted sand or fine soil.
d. Use 1/2” CTS copper or stainless steel tubing as a vent pipe.
S The vent pipe must be inserted approximately 6” into the annulus between the casing pipe and
plastic pipe (see vent in Figure 7).
S The tubing may be slightly oval to fit into the annulus.
S Use care to avoid restricting the carrying capacity of the tubing.
S Insulate the tubing from the steel casing by wrapping the tubing with tape.
S Drill a 3/8” hole into the plastic extension of the curb valve box and insert the tubing with a slight
gooseneck to prevent dirt from clogging the vent.
e. Do NOT insert plastic pipe into a casing if the casing pipe radius is less than that shown in Table 3.
S IF the radius is less than Table 3,
THEN install a new riser with the proper bend radius.
f. Install the curb box so that external loads are not transmitted to the service. The valve box must NOT rest on
the service pipe or casing.

Page 8 of 13 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A-90
Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Table 3 Minimum Bend Radius in a Riser Casing for Specified Pipe Sizes
Pipe Size (Inches) Minimum Radius (Inches)
1/2 CTS 18
1 CTS 28
1-1/4 IPS 41-1/2

g. See Gas Design Standard A-44, “Service Connections to Cast Iron Main” for information on connecting plastic
to cast iron.
5. Records
a. The brand name of all plastic pipe lots installed at each location and the date it was manufactured must be
recorded in the permanent records. This may require multiple plastic stamps for construction drawings.
Figure 8 depicts a sample plastic stamp for construction drawings.
S Note the pipe’s brand and manufacturing date (MM/DD/YY format) on the foreman’s copy of the
completed estimate.
S Transcribe this information to the file copy.
S Record the brand and manufacturing date (MM/DD/YY format) of pipe used for service
installations in the “Remarks” section of the Form F5458-1, “Gas Service Record,” or the
Form TD-4110P-03-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas Quarterly Incident Report,” as
appropriate.
S See A-93 Attachment B, “Approved PE Pipe/Tubing Manufacturers and Plants” for a description
of print line information.
b. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 9 of 13
 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #06a 02-26-14

TEST AT 100−110 PSI FOR MINIMUM OF 5 MIN

Pressure Duration Initials Date of Test

Plastic Pipe Data

Footage and Size ____________/____________
SDR / Wall Thickness _________________________
Pipe Manufacture _________________________
Date Manufactured _________________________
□ PE 2406/2708 □ Other PE:
Footage and Size ____________/____________
SDR / Wall Thickness _________________________
Pipe Manufacture _________________________
Date Manufactured _________________________
□ PE 2406/2708 □ Other PE:

Foreman LAN ID: ____________ Date: _______/______/______

Foreman Signature: _______________________________________
List all plastic pipe by footage, size, manufacture and date
manufactured per Gas Design Standard A-93.1

Figure 8
Plastic Pipe Stamp

Page 10 of 13 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A-90
Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Target Audience
Gas planners, estimators, new business inspectors, gas distribution engineers, maintenance and construction,
general construction, materials inspectors, and personnel involved in PE pipe connection training and qualification.

Definitions
NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

NA
Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment
Installation of plastic pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.321
References
Code Numbers for Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Plastic Gas Lines on Bridge Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33.1
Piping Design and Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Standard Branch Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Service Connections to Cast Iron Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Copper Pipeline Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
Casings for Highway and Railroad Crossings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
Casing Insulator and End Seals Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.2
Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.3
Prefabricated Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.1
Deactivation of Plastic Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.2
Plastic Excess Flow Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.3
Compression Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
Plastic System Saddle Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.1
Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.2
Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.3
Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91
Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91.1
Cast Iron to Steel Insulated Transition Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91.4
Meter Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-80
Polyethylene (PE) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-90
Gas Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-15
Gas Meter Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-16
Plastic Valve Box for 3/4” - 4” Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-40
Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-16
Gas Service Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F5458-1
Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Mains and Service Lines . . . . . . GS I.S. 463-4
Design and Construction of Gas Distribution Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S0470
Joint Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5453
Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas Quarterly Incident Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4110P-03-F01
Polyethylene Service Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4634P-01
Service Replacement Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4801S
Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP4170-02
Gas Design Standards and Specifications, Section F
Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual - Corrosion Control Volume
Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) Handbook, Chapter 7, Underground Installation of PE Piping
ASTM F1973-08, Standard Specification for Factory Assembled Anodeless Risers and Transition Fittings in
Polyethylene (PE) and Polyamide 11 (PA11) and Polyamide 12 (PA12) Fuel Gas Distribution Systems

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 11 of 13
 Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design A-90
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Appendices
Appendix 1 − Application of New Installation and Design Requirements to Qualified Delayed
Applicant-Installed Work

Attachments
Illustration of a Direct Burial Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90 Attachment 1

Revision Notes
Revision 06a has the following changes:
1. In Section 5, “Records,” added guidance about record retention.
Revision 06 has the following changes:
1. Gas Design Standard A-93.1 and Gas Design Standard A-90 have been revised to organize all design information
for the plastic pipe system in Gas Design Standard A-90 and construction information into Gas Design Standard
A-93.1. Several items were moved from Gas Design Standard A-93.1 into the Gas Design Standard A-90 design
document including preferred joining methods and the minimum bend radius for pipe.
2. The title of the document has been changed from “Plastic Main and Service Installation” to “Polyethylene Gas
Distribution System Design”.
3. The document formatting has changed to clarify wording and group subjects. References have been updated and
some new references added to direct document users to additional information.
4. Incorporated 1” service requirements and installation information from TD-A-90B-001 to Appendix 1.
5. The instruction for inserting 1/4” CTS PE tubing for service replacement has been removed. 1/4” CTS PE pipe and
fittings are no longer approved for installation.
6. Removed detail for locating wire requirements. These requirements are now detailed in Gas Design Standard
A-90.2 and Gas Design Standard A-90.3.
7. Removed branch service installation information covered in Gas Design Standard A-42 and added
Gas Design Standard A-42 as a reference.
8. Added the requirement that any new gas main must be installed at the minimum horizontal distance of 10’ from
the nearest structure.
9. The preferred joining methods in Table 1 have been revised.
10. Added requirement for warning tape in direct burial installations per Gas Design Standard L-16.
11. Revised the bending radius for installed PE pipe in a typical direct-burial plastic main and service installation.
12. Revised Plastic Pipe Stamp in Figure 8 to add SDR/wall thickness.
Asset Type: Distribution
Function: Design, Construction and Maintenance
Gas Design Standard Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 12 of 13 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 A-90
Polyethylene Gas Distribution System Design See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001
Rev. #06a 02-26-14

Appendix 1 − Application of New Installation and Design Requirements to Qualified

Delayed Applicant Installed Work
This appendix clarifies how to apply various new installation and design requirements to qualified delayed
applicant-installed gas projects, where the gas distribution main backbone and service stubs were installed and
inspected, but the service completions have not been completed for many months or years.
NOTE: This does NOT apply to any “At-risk” projects.
The Company has encountered “delayed” applicant-installed projects (e.g. subdivisions) where the gas distribution
main backbone and service stubs were installed and inspected, but the service completions have not been completed
for many months or years and the system has not been pressurized, energized and accepted by the Company. These
projects must meet the criteria:
S Job designs were previously approved by Company.
S Contracts were executed by the applicant with Company for the project.
S Company has inspected the work to date on the project.
Current installation and design requirements must be applied when a delayed project is actually pressurized and
placed in service.
This appendix addresses the following new requirements:
S Pipe locating requirements
S One-inch diameter services
S 1000-foot maximum spacing between Electrolysis Test Stations (ETS)
S Locating wire gauge requirements for plastic pipe installations
S Pressure testing
1. Locating Requirements
Applicant Installers are required to mark dead end gas mains and gas service stubs as described in Gas Design
Standard A-90.2 and Gas Design Standard A-90.3.
2. One inch services
The Company will accept previously-installed 1/2” services and 1/2” service stubs installed prior to May 1, 2010, if
those services and stubs have the capacity to support the current customer loads.
The gas service stub must be at least 1” in diameter if any of the following conditions exists:
S Customer gas load conditions require a larger size gas service. For example, 1” Excess Flow
Valves (EFVs) and services are required for service lengths of 122 feet or longer, per Gas Design
Standard A-93.3. Please note that Gas Design Standard A-93.3. also directs that EFVs are not to
be installed on stub completions.
S Branch services
S Changed or new customer gas loads that exceed the capacity of the previously designed service.
3. 1,000-ft. maximum spacing between ETS boxes
Applicant Installers are required to install ETS boxes every 1,000 feet (or closer) in accordance with Gas Design
Standard A-90.2.
4. Locating wire gauge requirements for plastic pipe installations
The Company will accept 14-gauge locating wire on existing plastic pipe service installations, installed prior to
August 1, 2009, as long as the wire passes continuity tests. Applicant installers are not required to replace existing
14-gauge wire (that pass continuity tests) with 10-gauge on plastic services and service stubs that have already
been installed. However, all new plastic services and service stubs must be installed with 10-gauge wire in
accordance with Gas Design Standard A-90.2 and Gas Design Standard A-90.3.
5. Pressure Test
Main and stubs are required to be tested per Gas Design Standard A-34.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 13 of 13
 GAS DESIGN STANDARD A-93.1
INSTALLING AND MAINTAINING A POLYETHYLENE GAS See Utility Bulletin
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM TD-A-93.1B-001
Publication Date: 02-26-14 Rev. #09a
This document also appears in the following manuals:
S Electric & Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
S Gas Applicant Design Manual

Purpose and Scope

This Gas Design Standard provides requirements for installing and maintaining the Pacific Gas and Electric Company
(Company) polyethylene (PE) gas distribution system as required by Code of Federal Regulations 49 (CFR) 192.321,
“Installation of plastic pipe.”
The subject areas covered include:
S General Information
S Construction Materials
S Construction Methods
S Direct Burial
S Mechanical Insertion of Polyethylene Pipe
S Repairs
S Testing
S Recordkeeping

General Information
1. Joining Polyethylene
a. Only personnel qualified under Gas Design Standard D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe” may make
connections to plastic gas distribution facilities.
b. Connections within the PE system may be made with the following:
S Heat socket fusion and butt fusion (Gas Design Standard B-90, “Plastic System Socket and
Butt Fusion Fittings”)
S Heat saddle fusion (Gas Design Standard B-90.1, “Plastic System Saddle Fittings”)
S Electrofusion (Gas Design Standard B-90.3, “Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees”)
S Mechanical connection (Gas Design Standard B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”
and Gas Design Standard B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”)
c. Qualified personnel may join PE pipe and fittings using approved heat-iron or electrofusion joining procedures:
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-31, “Heat Iron Socket Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-32, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Manual)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-33, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical
Assist Tool)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-34, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-35, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-40, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Coupling)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-41, “Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Saddle)”
Or using approved mechanical fitting installation procedures:

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-50, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Stab
Outlet)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-52, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe
(Threaded Compression Transitions)”
S Utility Procedure TD-4170P-53, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Bolt-On
Saddle)”
d. Standard heat iron fusions are NOT allowed on Aldyl-A material. Use ONLY electrofusion or mechanical
fittings with Aldyl-A material.
2. Transitions from PE to Steel, Copper or Cast Iron
a. Make PE-to-steel, PE-to-copper or PE-to-cast-iron transition joints using the approved transition fittings:
S Gas Design Standard B-54, “Compression Couplings”
S Gas Design Standard B-90, “Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings”
S Gas Design Standard B-91, “Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe”
S Gas Design Standard B-91.5, “Cast Iron to Polyethylene Transition Fittings.”
Note: PE-to-copper transitions are for temporary repairs ONLY. All copper services must be replaced per
Utility Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria.”
i. Take precautions to protect the PE pipe at the point of transition when welding the steel end.

CAUTION
Protect the transition joint from excessive heat.

S Never shorten the steel portion of a transition fitting. Heat from welding may damage the
PE pipe if the steel is cut.
S Protect the transition joint from excessive heat. Do NOT weld, thermite weld, or heat the
body of the fitting; ONLY butt welding of the steel end is permitted.
During this welding, protect the PE part of the heat-fusion transition fitting from overheating by wrapping
the midpoint of the steel part of the fitting with wet cloth to remove heat. Keep the cloth wet. After
completing the weld, leave the wet cloth on the fitting until the steel pipe is cool enough to touch.
ii. Adequately support the plastic pipe adjacent to the transition fitting. Support the exposed PE pipe with
well-compacted sand or fine soil.
3. Riser Installation
a. Prefabricated riser installation is described in Gas Design Standard A-91, “Prefabricated Risers.” The final
grade level at the riser must be at or below the red burial line indicated on the riser.
i. IF the ground slopes away from the gas service riser,
THEN straighten the 90º riser bend to match the slope. Straighten so that the vertical leg of the riser is
NOT bent when installed.
ii. IF the ground slopes upward from the gas service riser,
THEN use a short, prefabricated riser and dig a deeper trench. Taper-up the slope with service tubing. Do
NOT bend the riser to match the slope.
iii. Repair any coating damage on risers as described in Gas Design Standard E-25, “Field Wrapping With
Cold-Applied Tape.”
iv. Install sun shields on all prefabricated risers and riser kits. Shields must extend from 1” below the top of
the riser or below the bypass to ground level or below.
v. Do NOT paint a sun shield.
vi. When installing prefabricated risers, use a locating wire (see Gas Design Standard A-90.3, “Locating Wire
Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services”).

Page 2 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
Rev. #09a 02-26-14 TD-A-93.1B-001

4. Thermal Expansion
a. When installing PE pipe, ensure that all plastic lines are slack before completing final tie-ins to allow for
thermal expansion and contraction.
5. Leak Testing
a. Pipe must be pressure leak tested after installation. Follow the test requirements outlined in Gas Design
Standard A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements.”
i. IF a new PE main or service has been installed and tested as described in Gas Design Standard A-34, but
will not be immediately tied in to an existing system,
THEN the new main or service must remain pressurized with air at 60 psig or less.
Note: The system must be retested prior to tie-in as required in Gas Design Standard A-34.
6. Marking New Service Installations
a. All new or replaced services need to have the curb (or street) marked indicating the location of the new or
replaced service. Approved markings include a yellow slash mark on the curb or other as noted in
Utility Procedure TD-5811P-104, “Proper Markings.” This marking provides identification/location of the gas
service pending the update of the service installation by mapping.
S IF the local Municipalities or agencies have requirements that restrict marking the services,
THEN the restriction must be noted on the GSR.

Construction Materials
1. Pipe:
a. Check the production date on the pipe:
i. Yellow medium density polyethylene (MDPE) pipe more than 3 years old must be scrapped.
ii. Pipe and tubing that is shipped directly from the manufacturer to the job site must NOT be older than 6
months, as outlined in the following:
S Engineering Material Specification (EMS) 2502, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery
of Polyethylene Plastic Tubing”
S EMS 2503, “Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene Plastic Piping.”
b. Ensure that the pipe or tubing was manufactured at a Company approved plant listed in Gas Design Standard
A-93 − Attachment B, “Approved PE Pipe/Tubing Manufacturers and Plants.”
2. Fittings:
a. Heat Fusion Fittings are described in Gas Design Standard B-90 and Gas Design Standard B-90.1
b. Electrofusion Fittings are described in Gas Design Standard B-90.3.
c. For PE-to-PE mechanical connections, use the approved mechanical fittings shown in the following:
S Gas Design Standard B-90.1
S Gas Design Standard B-91
S Gas Design Standard B-91.1
d. Approved transition fittings are shown in the following:
S Gas Design Standard B-54
S Gas Design Standard B-91
S Gas Design Standard B-91.1
S Gas Design Standard B-91.5
e. IF a protective sleeve is supplied with a fitting,
THEN the sleeve must be installed. Information on ordering additional protection sleeves, when needed, is
available in Gas Design Standard B-90.2, “Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories.”

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

3. Valves:
a. Refer to Gas Design Standard F-90, “Polyethylene (PE) Valves” and Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main
and Service Installation” for isolation valve descriptions.
b. Excess Flow Valve (EFV) descriptions are provided in Gas Design Standard A-93.3, “Plastic Excess Flow
Valves.”
4. Risers:
a. Specifications for prefabricated risers are detailed in Gas Design Standard A-91.
5. Locating Wire and Electronic Marking (EMS):
a. Locating wire, anode, bonding requirements and electronic marking requirements are described in Gas Design
Standard A-90.2, “Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services” and Gas Design
Standard A-90.3.

Construction Methods:
1. Polyethylene Pipe Handling
a. Verify the print line on the pipe or tubing and document the date of manufacture, the manufacturer’s name,
and the SDR on the Plastic Pipe Inspection Data Stamp shown in Figure 3, before installation.
b. Handle PE pipe carefully to eliminate the possibility of damage during loading, unloading, and storage
operations.
i. During transport, the pipe must be supported to minimize movement and must be located away from any
source of heat, such as equipment or vehicle exhaust.
ii. Protect pipe against ropes or other securing devices.
iii. Chains must not be used to secure the pipe.
iv. Supplies or other equipment must not be placed on top of the pipe.
c. String coils of plastic pipe by hand or from a reel.
i. Coils of 4” diameter pipe and larger must be strung from an approved trailer designed for large-diameter,
coiled PE pipe as described in Gas Design Standard M-17.2, “Large Diameter PE Coil Pipe Trailers and
Accessories.”
ii. Coils must NOT be rolled over sharp objects OR pulled over rough surfaces.
iii. String straight lengths by lifting the pipe from the truck to the ground.
iv. The pipe must be protected from rocks or other abrasive material during this operation and must NOT be
dropped from a height.

WARNING
Observe proper safety precautions during field bending of pipe.
Considerable force may be required to field bend pipe.
IF the pipe is released during bending,
THEN the pipe may spring back forcibly.

v. Coiled PE pipe is confined with bands at intervals within the coils. As the pipe is uncoiled, take precautions
to avoid kinking the pipe. Do NOT uncoil the pipe faster than the bands can be cut.
d. Carefully inspect PE pipe for kinks, gouges, scratches, punctures, and other imperfections after each of the
handling operations.
e. PE pipe must be rejected if defects or damages exceed 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe. Pipe wall
thicknesses are listed in Gas Design Standard A-93, “Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design
Considerations.”

Page 4 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
Rev. #09a 02-26-14 TD-A-93.1B-001

CAUTION
NEVER weld or thermite weld close to PE pipe without
protecting the pipe with a heat-resisting baffle or wet rags.

f. Do NOT perform welding on pipe immediately adjacent to plastic pipe in order to minimize the possibility of
sparks or hot material coming into contact with the plastic pipe.
2. Control Static Charge Build-up in Polyethylene

WARNING
Provide static grounding, in all situations where gas is present or anticipated,
The discharge of static electricity can cause shocks or ignite a gas-air mixture.
a. Static-electric charges may build up on both the inside and outside surfaces of PE pipe. Localized,
static-electric buildup occurs because PE pipe does not readily conduct electricity.
See Utility Work Procedure WP4170-01, “Grounding Polyethylene (PE) Pipe to Control Static Electricity” for
static-grounding procedures and requirements.
3. Depth of Cover for Main and Service:
S For Gas Only trench refer to GS Interim Standard 463-4, “Cover and Clearance Requirements for
Transmission Lines, Mains and Service Lines.”
S For Joint trench refer to Utility Operations S5453, “Joint Trench.”
4. Polyethylene Pipe Pressure Control (Squeeze-off):
a. Squeeze-off PE pipe to extend or repair it. PE pipe is flexible and can be squeezed shut without damaging the
pipe or reducing its pressure rating, provided the proper tools and procedures are used. See Utility Work
Procedure WP4170-02, “Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) Pipe” for squeeze-off procedures. Personnel are
required to have the proper operator qualification (OQ) before controlling pressure using the PE pipe squeeze
method.
5. Purging Plastic Mains and Services:
a. Remove static-electric charges by grounding the pipe whenever the pipe is purged. Refer to Utility Work
Procedure WP4170-01.
b. Purge plastic mains and services according to the provisions specified in Gas Design Standard A-38,
“Procedures for Purging Gas Facilities” as applicable. Personnel are required to have the proper OQ before
purging pipe purging pipe.
IF the service has an excess flow valve
THEN follow the purging instruction in Gas Design Standard A-93.3.
6. Gauging Requirements/Continuity of Service
a. It is Company policy to maintain uninterrupted service to customers during the construction, reconstruction, or
maintenance of facilities as described in Distribution & Customer Service (DCS) Standard D-S0454, “Gas
Mains, Maintaining Continuity of Service During Construction.”

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

7. Backfill Requirements:
a. Bedding must provide firm, continuous support under and around the PE pipe, and provide support for spans
across gaps and holes. The backfill must be free of sharp objects, rocks, and large clods. The bedding
materials used for support must be well-compacted. To prevent differential settlement, take extra care to
provide proper compaction under pipes and fittings at branch and transition locations. Provide imported
bedding for the pipe if the trench bottom is not smooth (refer to EMS 4123, “Backfill Sand”).
i. Compact the backfill at the sides of the PE pipe. Do not compact the backfill directly over the pipe until
there is at least 12” of cover. Take care when dumping backfill material on top of PE pipe service
connections or transition fittings.

CAUTION
DO NOT allow cement additives such as calcium oxide (quick lime)
to come into contact with PE pipe, tubing or fittings.

ii. When using a flow-able fill, such as controlled density fill or slurry, provide a minimum of 6” of sand
shading above and between the pipe and fittings.
8. Branch Service Installation:
a. Install branch services as described in Gas Design Standard A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation.”
b. The branch service must be marked at the service valve as shown in Gas Design Standard A-42.
c. Branch services must be identified on all map records.
d. Service orders must be issued for all services that are installed or altered.
e. When a branch connection is made as a result of an oral consent, the record of consent must be marked on
the appropriate service order for permanent filing.
9. Change in Service Point Location (Flop Lots):
When a change in service point location is required, contact the local area engineer for design changes as
described in Gas Design Standard A-90.
10. Direct Burial
a. Place joint trench gas facilities in the distribution trench per Utility Operations S5453. Placement in a Public
Utility Easement (PUE) is preferred.
b. A warning tape is to be installed in direct-burial installations per Gas Design Standard L-16, “Gas Pipeline
Underground Warning Tape.”
11. Insertion of Polyethylene Main and Service in Casing
Note: When inserting pipe, provide enough slack in all plastic lines before completing the final tie-in to avoid stress
due to thermal expansion and contraction.
Casing Insertion
a. Insert plastic pipe into an existing casing by performing the following steps:
i. Clean the casing pipe.
ii. Ream the steel casings to protect the plastic main insert from the sharp edges of the casing. Where
necessary, the entire length of the casing pipe must be reamed.
iii. The leading edge of the plastic pipe or tubing must be sealed during insertion.
iv. Push the plastic pipe through the casing.
v. Evaluate the first 5’ of the plastic pipe for damage as it leaves the casing pipe.
IF there is damage that is caused by the casing pipe,
THEN remove the plastic pipe and repair the pipe as described in the section on PE pipe repair in this Gas
Design Standard.

Page 6 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
Rev. #09a 02-26-14 TD-A-93.1B-001

b. Support exposed plastic at entry and exit points.

i. Plug the space between the plastic and the casing pipe (see Gas Design Standard A-90) with casing plugs
or cable protectors, duct seal, or other suitable means not detrimental to PE pipe.
ii. Any Non-cased plastic pipe must be well supported with backfill.
c. Plastic pipe is approved for double insertion into existing mains and services. This application is approved
provided the following conditions are met:
i. It is not practical or economical to remove the previously inserted pipe.
ii. The installation is made in accordance with Gas Design Standard A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic
Casing” or Gas Design Standard A-90, as applicable, particularly with respect to protecting and supporting
the entry and exit points.
iii. The installation is mapped with both the casing size and casing material identified. For example, a 1/2”
plastic service inserted into a 1” copper pipe that is inserted into a 2” steel line is mapped as shown in
Figure 1.

250
4PL (6CI)-8’

1/2PL-96
(1CU-2)

Figure 1
Mapping of a Double Insert
d. Squeezing of the outer casing is ONLY allowed in the case of an emergency. If the outer casing pipe is
squeezed, the casing must be grounded. The PE gas-carrier pipe must be replaced after flow control is no
longer needed.
i. IF the outer casing is metallic (i.e., steel or copper),
THEN ground the casing using a ground cable that is grounded to wet earth.
ii. IF the outer casing is PE,
THEN ground the squeezer and casing as if the casing were the carrier pipe in accordance with the
provisions of Utility Work Procedure WP4170-01.
iii. IF the casing is PVC or cast iron,
THEN remove the casing before squeezing the carrier pipe or tubing, and ground the carrier pipe in
accordance with the provisions of Utility Work Procedure WP4170-01.
e. Take special precautions when accessing the carrier pipe (window cutting) to avoid damaging it.
IF the pipe is damaged,
THEN the carrier pipe must be repaired by replacing the damage section of the carrier pipe.
12. Boring or Splitting of Polyethylene Main and Service
Note: When boring or splitting PE pipe, provide enough slack in all plastic lines before completing the final tie-in to
avoid stress due to thermal expansion and contraction.
a. Ensure that the bore hole meets the 24” depth requirement for the main or service.
b. PE pipe may be pushed or pulled through a bore hole as described in the following:
S Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual
S Gas Design Standard M-70.7, “Pneumatic Piercing Tools”
S Gas Design Standard M-70.8, “Pneumatic Guided Piercing Tool”
S Utility Procedure TD-4412P-05, “Excavation Procedures for Damage Prevention”

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 7 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

c. During pipe pulling, constantly monitor the pulling force on the pipe and use a pulling head containing a
weak-link or mechanical break-way as described in Gas Design Standard M-16.2, “Weak-link and Mechanical
Breakaway Connectors.”
d. During horizontal directional drilling (HDD) operations, the equipment gauge pressure must NOT be used to
determine pulling forces on the pipe.

CAUTION
A weak-link or a mechanical break-away is critical to ensuring that PE pipe is installed
without exceeding its design load.

e. Examine the pipe as it leaves the hole to determine if the speed of the pipe is smooth and continuous. Any
delay in the pipe pulling may indicate that the pipe has “hung up” and has possible damage.
f. When installing PE using HDD, minimize variations in the bore to avoid adding drag when pulling back the
pipe. Proper back-reaming and mudflow will help reduce the drag on PE when pulling back the pipe.
g. PE services may be replaced using Utility Procedure TD-4634P-01, “Polyethylene Service Splitting.”
h. IF pipelines are installed using technologies where a casing may be required, including the following:
S HDD
S Steel pipe splitting (Gas Design Standard A-36.1, “Splitting Steel Pipe”)
S Cast-iron pipe bursting
THEN it is acceptable to insert plastic pipe and tubing into a new plastic casing if the installation of the new
plastic casing meets the following requirements:
i. All the current design requirements as specified in Gas Design Standard A-75 are satisfied.
ii. The newly installed products are mapped correctly. For example, the bursting of a 4” cast-iron main for the
placement of a 4” plastic main into a 6” plastic casing is mapped as follows: 4 - PL (6PL).
13. Riser Insert
a. Before installing a service head adapter kit, inspect the PE tubing for damage.
b. Instructions for service head adapters shown in Figure 2 are detailed in Utility Procedure TD-4170P-52.
c. The plastic pipe must be supported by well-compacted sand or fine soil.
d. Refer to Gas Design Standard A-90.3 for the locating wire requirements.
e. The air gap between the outside diameter of the service casing and the inside diameter of the sun shield must
be between 1/2” and 3/4”.

Page 8 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
Rev. #09a 02-26-14 TD-A-93.1B-001

Insulated Service Valve

See Utility Procedure
Riser Service Service Head Adapter TD-4170P-52 Figure 17
Head Adapter “Service Head Adapter”
(See Gas Design Sun Shield 1”
Standard B-91) (Opaque Plastic Sleeve)
Internal Plastic Spacer Sleeve
12” Max.
3/8” ± 1/8” Air Gap

Sunshield Placement
Steel Casing Designed to Prevent
Sleeve r Water Accumulation
Service Tee
Plastic Tubing
Plastic Tubing
Existing Service
Main Casing Plug Casing
Figure 2
Typical Plastic Service Renewal

Polyethylene Pipe Repairs

Note: Permanent repairs must be completed within 30 days.
1. Temporary Repairs with a Stainless Steel Clamp: A temporary repair can be made if it is replaced with a
permanent repair within 30 days. A full-encirclement, stainless-steel clamp may be used temporarily to repair
punctures or longitudinal-type damage. These clamps do not have an internal stiffener. Follow the grounding
procedure Utility Work Procedure WP4170-01 when installing stainless-steel clamps.
2. Permanent Repairs
a. Make permanent repairs by replacing the damaged segment of plastic pipe.
i. Test segments of plastic pipe that are installed to replace damaged sections of mains and services
according to the provisions in Gas Design Standard A-34.
(1) Soap test mechanical fittings and couplings during leak testing.
(2) Soap test the repair and squeeze areas after the repair is complete.
(3) Thoroughly rinse any areas exposed to detergents with clear water.
ii. Clamp the exposed squeeze points on all 1-1/4” and larger Aldyl-A pipe with full-encirclement support
clamps. The support clamps only provide support and are not intended for leak repair.
Table 1 below provides information on support clamps (Aldyl-A pipe squeeze point only).

Table 1 Support Clamps for Aldyl-A

Size (Inches) 4” Wide Code 6” Wide Code
1-1/4 Continental (PVC) 024124 −
2 Continental (PVC) 033924 020588
2 Perfection (PA) 022831 −
3 Continental (PVC) 033925 020627
3 Perfection (PA) 022832 −
4 Continental (PVC) 033926 020628
4 Perfection (PA) 022840 −
6 Continental (PVC) − 020631

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 9 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

iii. Make permanent repairs to an Aldyl-A tapping tee, with black caps, that are leaking at the cap by installing
an Aldyl-A electrofusion repair kit in accordance with Utility Procedure TD-4170P-57, “Polyethylene
Tapping Tee Repair Kits.”
S Aldyl-A tapping tees with black caps encountered during routine work, whether leaking or
not, must be repaired by removing the existing cap and installing an Aldyl-A electrofusion
repair kit.
iv. Make permanent repairs to Plexco, Nipak, and Continental tapping tees with damaged caps by replacing
the cap with the approved replacement caps listed in Gas Design Standard B-90.2.
v. A Performance Pipe 980 Quad Ring can be used to repair the Phillips Driscopipe old style orange resin
tee (see Gas Design Standard B-90.2). The tee can be identified by the presence of a Quad Ring located
at the top of the tapping tower.
3. Repair and Test Requirements for PE Pipe Damaged by Dig-In or Other Causes
a. Visually inspect the plastic pipe upstream and downstream from the area of contact. Replace only enough
pipe to make a permanent repair. Pressure leak test plastic pipe to be used for repair on site. Leak test the
replaced section according to the instructions in Gas Design Standard A-34.
b. IF the casing is damaged (broken, bent, or crushed),
THEN replace the plastic carrier pipe 2’ upstream and downstream of the dig-in location.
c. Repairing a service:
S Refer to Utility Standard TD-4801S to determine if a service is to be repaired or replaced.
S Service lines must be pressure tested from the point of disconnection to the riser.
S In a dig-in situation:
IF it appears that the pipe or casing was pulled or moved between the point of impact and the main,
THEN pressure leak test the entire service at 100 psig for a minimum of 5 minutes per the instructions in
Gas Design Standard A-34.
4. Repair Requirements for Plastic-Service Inserted Risers or Prefabricated Risers for Meter Sets Exposed to
or Damaged by a Fire or Excessive Heat:
IF a PE service inserted riser or prefabricated riser may have been subjected to unusually high temperatures
(such as being exposed to a house fire or meter fire),
THEN replace either the plastic insert or the entire riser.

CAUTION
Pressure testing the service is NOT sufficient when a riser has been exposed to high temperatures.
The plastic piping inside the riser could be damaged even though the pipe may hold during a leak test.
When the service is used on a long-term basis, it could eventually rupture.

Leak Testing
1. Only those individuals trained and qualified pursuant to the Company’s Operator Qualification (OQ) program may
perform leak tests.

CAUTION
Do not use the squeeze-off technique to separate gas and air during an air test.

2. Pipe must be leak tested after installation. Follow the test requirements in Gas Design Standard A-34. The
minimum test duration at 100 psig is 5 minutes and the maximum test time cannot exceed 8 hours at 100 psig.
IF a new PE main or service has been installed and tested as described in Gas Design Standard A-34. but will not
be immediately tied in to an existing system,
THEN the new main or service must remain pressurized with air at 60 psig or less. This system must be re-tested
prior to tie-in.

Page 10 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
Rev. #09a 02-26-14 TD-A-93.1B-001

Records
1. The brand name of all plastic pipe lots, footage, size and the date it was manufactured must be recorded in the
permanent records. This may require multiple plastic stamps for construction drawings. Figure 3 depicts a plastic
stamp for construction drawings.
a. Note the pipe’s brand and manufacturing date (MM/DD/YY format) on the foreman’s copy of the completed
estimate.
b. This information will be transcribed to the file copy.
c. Record the brand, footage, size and manufacturing date (MM/DD/YY format) of pipe used for service
installations in the “Remarks” section of the Gas Utility Form F5458-1, “Gas Service Record,” or the Gas Utility
Form TD-4110P-03-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas Quarterly Incident Report,” as appropriate.
d. See A-93 Attachment B, “Approved PE Pipe/Tubing Manufacturers and Plants” for a description of print line
information.

Plastic Pipe Data

TEST AT 100-110 PSI FOR MINIMUM OF 5 MIN
Pressure Duration Initials Date of Test

Plastic Pipe Data

Footage and Size ____________/____________
SDR / Wall Thickness _________________________
Pipe Manufacture _________________________
Date Manufactured _________________________
□ PE 2406/2708 □ Other PE:
Footage and Size ____________/____________
SDR / Wall Thickness _________________________
Pipe Manufacture _________________________
Date Manufactured _________________________
□ PE 2406/2708 □ Other PE:

Foreman LAN ID: ____________ Date: _______/______/______

Foreman Signature: _______________________________________
List all plastic pipe by footage, size, manufacture and date
manufactured per Gas Design Standard A-93.1

Figure 3
Plastic Pipe Stamp

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 11 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

2. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Target Audience
Gas distribution engineers, gas planners, estimators, new business inspectors, maintenance and construction
crews, materials inspectors, and personnel involved in PE pipe connection training and qualification

Definitions
Imported Backfill: Soils or man-made materials not native to the specific trench location for use in backfill. These
materials will ensure that required compaction is achieved. See EMS 4123, for specific bedding and backfill
requirements.
Leak Test: Field testing of a piping system using air and applying pressure to determine if leaks exist in the
system. This test is used to verify that plastic systems can hold 1.5 times the maximum allowable operating
pressure of 60 psig.
Stub Service: Service tubing and conduit extended from distribution facilities to provide for a future service
completion.
2406: Pipe designation for medium density polyethylene pipe (MDPE) equivalent in our system to 2708.
2708: Pipe designation for medium density polyethylene pipe (MDPE) equivalent in our system to 2406.

Acronyms and Abbreviations

NA
Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment
Installation of plastic pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.321
References
Piping Design and Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Splitting Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36.1
Procedures for Purging Gas Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Standard Branch Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Locating Wire Installation for Direct Burial Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.2
Locating Wire Installation for Inserted Plastic Mains and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90.3
Prefabricated Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Approved PE Pipe/Tubing Manufacturers and Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93 − Attachment B
Plastic Excess Flow Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.3
Compression Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
Plastic System Saddle Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.1
Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.2
Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.3
Transition Fittings for Polyethylene Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91
Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91.1
Cast Iron to Polyethylene Transition Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91.5
Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34
Field Wrapping With Cold-Applied Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
Meter Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-80
Polyethylene (PE) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-90
Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-16
Weak-link and Mechanical Breakaway Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-16.2
Large Diameter PE Coil Pipe Trailers and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-17.2
Pneumatic Piercing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-70.7
Pneumatic Guided Piercing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-70.8

Page 12 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
Rev. #09a 02-26-14 TD-A-93.1B-001

References, continued
Gas Mains, Maintaining Continuity of Service During Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-S0454
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene Plastic Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 2502
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene Plastic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 2503
Backfill Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 4123
Gas Service Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F5458-1
Cover and Clearance Requirements for Transmission Lines, Mains and Service Lines . . . . . . GS I.S. 463-4
Joint Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5453
Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas Quarterly Incident Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4110P-03-F01
Heat Iron Socket Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-31
Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-32
Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical Assist Tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-33
Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-34
Heat Iron Butt Fusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-35
Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Coupling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-40
Electrofusion for Polyethylene Pipe (Saddle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-41
Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Stab Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-50
Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Threaded Compression Transitions) . TD-4170P-52
Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Bolt-On Saddle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-53
Polyethylene Tapping Tee Repair Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4170P-57
Excavation Procedures for Damage Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4412P-05
Polyethylene Service Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4634P-01
Service Replacement Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-4801S
Proper Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-5811P-104
Grounding Polyethylene (PE) Pipe to Control Static Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP4170-01
Squeezing Polyethylene (PE) Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP4170-02
Electric & Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
Gas Applicant Design Manual
Horizontal Directional Drilling Manual
Appendices
NA

Attachments
NA

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 13 of 14
 Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System A-93.1
See Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.1B-001 Rev. #09a 02-26-14

Revision Notes
Revision 09a has the following changes:
1. In section “Records,” added guidance about record retention.
Revision 09 has the following changes:
1. Revised Gas Design Standard A-90 and Gas Design Standard A-93.1 to organize all design information for plastic
pipe system in Gas Design Standard A-90 and construction information into Gas Design Standard A-93.1. Pipe
sizing, installation depth, location from structures and other design information was removed from Gas Design
Standard A-93.1 and placed into Gas Design Standard A-90 revision 6.
2. The title of A-93.1 has been changed from “Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance” to
“Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System”.
3. Added reference to 49 CFR 192.321 in scope.
4. Updated reference documents where required.
5. Added requirement in the General Information Section that new service locations be marked after installation to
identify the new service location until maps are updated.
6. Added marking requirements for service construction as referenced in Utility Procedure TD-5811P-104.
7. Removed language for locating wire and EMS requirements and added reference to Gas Design Standard A-90.2
and Gas Design Standard A-90.3.
8. Removed information about controlling static charge build up already covered in the required Utility Work
Procedure WP4170-01.
9. Removed information about PE pipe squeeze-off currently covered in the required Utility Work Procedure
WP4170-02.
10. Instructions were added to the purging section to refer to Gas Design Standard A-93.3 when purging an excess
flow valve.
11. Removed the static grounding procedure from “Purging” section and referred to Utility Work Procedure
WP4170-01.
12. Added gauging/continuity of service reference for DCS Standard D-S0454.
13. Revised Standard Branch Service Installation to refer to Gas Design Standard A-42. When a branch connection is
made as a result of an oral consent, the record of consent must be marked on the appropriate service order for
permanent filing.
14. Added reference to warning tape requirements in direct bury installations, Gas Design Standard L-16.
15. Detail of weak-link and mechanical break-away instructions were removed from Gas Design Standard A-93.1 and
placed into Gas Design Standard M-16.2.
16. Removed repair method for 10% gouge on pipe using a service saddle.
17. Added new permanent repair requirements for tapping tees.
18. Revised Plastic Pipe Stamp (Figure 3) to add pipe SDR/wall thickness.
19. Added reference information to Utility Standard TD-4801S to determine if a service is to be repaired or replaced.
Asset Type: Distribution
Function: Distribution Construction and Maintenance
Gas Design Standard Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 14 of 14 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2014 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 GAS DESIGN STANDARD A-93.3
EXCESS FLOW VALVES

Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Purpose and Scope

This Gas Design Standard (GDS) provides use and design information for selecting, installing,
and documenting polyethylene (PE) and steel Excess Flow Valves (EFV). Supplements to this
GDS may be found in the manufacturer’s product manuals and catalogs, and in the documents
listed in the “References” section.

General Information

1. Only personnel qualified as described in GDS D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe”
may install a polyethylene (PE) excess flow valve (EFV).

2. Only personnel qualified as described in GDS D-22 “Arc Welding Procedure Requirement”
may install a steel EFV.

3. The size of the EFV and service piping must be the same size unless an exception is
granted by the document owner.

4. Steel EFVs are contained within a stick of ¾" steel pipe or 1" steel pipe with ¾" x 1" welded
reducer (1800 series), and will carry cathodic protection current normally once welded in
place.

5. DO NOT squeeze an EFV.

6. DO NOT cut a steel EFV to reduce to its length.

7. Steel EFVs are constructed with Grade B ¾" nominal pipe size (NPS) Schedule 40 steel
pipe (ASTM A53) and the ends are beveled for welding.

Applications for EFVs

1. EFVs must be installed on all new, replaced, repaired, altered, and transferred services in
any of the following situations:

 A single service line to one single family residence (SFR)

 A branched service line to a SFR installed concurrently with the primary SFR service
line (i.e., a single EFV may be installed to protect both service lines)

 A branched service line to a SFR installed off a previously installed SFR service line
that does not contain an EFV

 Multifamily residences with known customer loads not exceeding 1,400 scfh per service

PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation. ©2017 Page 1 of 12
Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Applications for EFVs (continued)

 A single, small commercial customer served by a single service line with a known
customer load not exceeding 1,400 scfh

2. IF a service is outside the scope in Step 1, above and an EFV is not installed,

THEN a curb valve may be required. See GDS A-43.2, “Curb Valve Installations, Distribution
Systems.”

3. DO NOT install an EFV if:

 The EFV is not required by Table 1, “EFV and Curb Valve Requirements – System
Maximum Allowable Operation Pressure (MAOP).”

Table 1. EFV Requirements – System Maximum Allowable Operation Pressure (MAOP)

System MAOP EFV Required
<10psig No
≥10 psig and ≤60 psig Yes
≥60 psig No

 The repair or alteration occurs more than 3 feet from the main, except for service stub
completions.
 The repair or alteration does not require the service to be disconnected from the main
(e.g., tee cap replacement).

EFV Selection Instructions

1. Determine if the proposed new or replaced service requires the installation of an EFV as
described in Section “Applications for EFVs.”

2. Size the EFV based on the load equal to the maximum continuous capacity of the meter
listed in GDS J-10.1, “Diaphragm Meter Capacities” and GDS J-20, “Rotary Meter Capacity
– At Standard and Elevated Delivery Pressure.” Take delivery pressure into account when
determining the maximum continuous capacity.

3. IF needed,

THEN use total connected load per Utility Procedure TD-9500P-10, “Customer Load Study,”
and service length. Use the total connected load to select the proper size and flow model
EFV using Table 2, “Polyethylene EFV Selection by Total Connected Load and Service
Length,” or Table 3, “3/4" Steel EFV Selection by Total Connected Load and Service
Length.” Anticipate future increases in load to be considered when sizing an EFV for a new
service.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

4. Steel services requiring an EFV should be replaced with plastic, if practical per Utility
Standard TD-4801S, “Service Replacement Criteria.” If a replacement with plastic is not
practical, a steel EFV may be installed per Table 3.

5. Steel EFVs are currently available in ¾" NPS size, and must only be used on ¾" steel
services. Steel services of other sizes that require an EFV must be replaced with plastic.

Table 2. Polyethylene EFV Selection by Total Connected Load and Service Length 1

Total Connected Load (scfh)

Length
0–385 386–595 596–700 701–990 991–1620 1621–2340 2341–5000
(ft) 2

½″ – 400 ½″ – 600 ½″ – 800

0–28 1″ – 1100 1″ – 1800 1¼″ – 2600 2″ – 5500
1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1″ – 800

½″ – 400 ½″ – 600
29–45 1″ – 800 1″ – 1100 1″ – 1800 1¼″ – 2600 2″ – 5500
1″ – 800 1″ – 800

½″ – 400
46–122 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1″ – 1100 1″ – 1800 1¼″ – 2600 2″ – 5500
1″ – 800

123–261 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1″ – 1100 1¼″ – 2600 1¼″ – 2600 2″ – 5500

262–960 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1¼″ – 2600 1¼″ – 2600 1¼″ – 2600 2″ – 5500

961–1000 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 1″ – 800 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500

1001–2560 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500 2″ – 5500

1 Contact document owner for guidance on services beyond the scope of this table. Table based on 10 psig main pressure (APD minimum
design pressure).
2 The length for a branch service is equal to the distance from the main to the farthest meter.

Table 3. ¾" Steel EFV Selection by Total Connected Load and Service Length 1
Total Connected Load (scfh)

Length (ft) 2 0 − 700 701 − 990 991 – 1620 1621 and higher

0 – 51 Steel 800 Series Steel 1100 Series Steel 1800 Series

52 – 92 Steel 800 Series Steel 1100 Series

93 – 329 Steel 800 Series Install new plastic service

329 and longer

1 Contact document owner for guidance on services beyond the scope of this table. Table based on 10 psig main pressure (APD minimum
design pressure).
2 The length for a branch service is equal to the distance from the main to the furthest meter.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

6. For new or fully replaced service lines, the maximum service length for each size pipe and
EFV is shown in Table 4, “EFV Capacities and Maximum Service Lengths.” For
reconstruction work on a system whose MAOP is greater than 25 psig and minimum normal
operating pressure (NOP) of 24 psig see Attachment 1 “EFV Capacities and Maximum
Service Lengths for Systems with MAOP greater than 25 psig.”

7. When sizing an EFV for an existing service that will not be replaced, choose an EFV with
adequate capacity for the customers load. If the service length is too long for the available
EFVs, choose the EFV which provides the greatest length of protection. (This will provide
partial protection of the service line). Note that service is “partially protected” in the notes
section of the GSR.

Table 4. EFV Capacities and Maximum Service Lengths 1

Size EFV Brand and Series Maximum Total Maximum Service
Connected Load 2 Length (ft)
(scfh)

Perfection 400 385 122

½″ CTS Perfection 600 595 45

Perfection 800 700 28

Perfection 800 700 1000

1″ CTS Perfection 1100 990 261

Perfection 1800 1620 122

1¼″ IPS Perfection 2600 2340 960

2″ IPS Perfection 5500 5000 2560

1 Based on 10 psig main pressure (APD minimum design pressure).

2 Combined load of all connected customer equipment that could operate simultaneously.

8. Fill out the EFV section of the Gas Service Record (GSR), per Utility Procedure
TD-9500P-14 “Gas Service Records.”

9. EFV model descriptions and material code numbers are listed in Table 5, “Model
Descriptions and Material Code Numbers.”

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Table 5. Model Descriptions and Material Code Numbers

Size (Inches) Flow Series Maximum Pressure Type of Valve Ends Material
Drop (psig) 1 Code

Plain Pipe Ends 022896

Perfection 400 0.75
Socket Fusion 020947

½ CTS Perfection 600 1.90 Plain Pipe Ends 022929

Plain Pipe Ends 022916

Perfection 800 1.40
Socket Fusion 020949

Steel Perfection Medium Flow 032155

1.40 Weld Ends
Series 800

Steel Perfection Medium Flow 032168

¾ NPS 3.00 Weld Ends
Series 1100

Steel Perfection Medium Flow 032169

3.20 Weld Ends
Series 1800

Plain Pipe Ends 022917

Perfection 800 1.40
Socket Fusion 020951

1 CTS Perfection 1100 3.00 Plain Pipe Ends 022918

Plain Pipe Ends 022921

Perfection 1800 3.20
Socket Fusion 020954

1¼ IPS Perfection 2600 4.90 Plain Pipe Ends 022923

2 IPS Perfection 5500 0.50 Plain Pipe Ends 022928

Extra Metal Tags for EFVs 020957

1 This is pressure drop at maximum capacity, contact document owner for pressure drop at lower flow rates. Do not include EFV pressure drop for
service sizing calculation under Utility Procedure TD-9500P-11, “Gas Service Sizing.”

10. Refer to Table 6, “EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix” for installation scenarios.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Table 6. EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix

EFV
Scenario Action Charge To
Installed

Customer requests new gas service,

No
and a new single service is installed
Engineered job. Install a new EFV with New
Yes the appropriate capacity Business
Customer adds load to a single service,
and the service is completely replaced
No

Check the EFV’s capacity and replace it

Yes WRO
Customer adds load to a single service, if the capacity is inadequate
and the service is altered to
accommodate load Install a new EFV if the alteration is
No WRO
within 3 feet of the service tee/saddle

Check the EFV’s capacity and replace it New

Yes
Customer adds load, no service if the capacity is inadequate 1 Business
reinforcement work is performed
No No EFV installation is required NA

Check the EFV’s capacity and replace it New

Yes
if the capacity is inadequate Business
Customer requests service to serve
new or existing load and PG&E
Engineered job. Install a new EFV with
branches off an existing service New
No the appropriate capacity on the mother
Business
service

Customer requests service to serve the Check the EFV’s capacity and replace it New
Yes
new or existing load, and PG&E installs if the capacity is inadequate 2 Business
a multi-meter manifold with one or more
additional meters No Install a new EFV 2 NA

Developer does a lot flop, and PG&E Yes

Engineered job. Install a new EFV with
deactivates the old stub and installs WRO 3
the appropriate capacity
new service at the new service point No

Customer requests an EFV on an Engineered job (service alteration).

No WRO 3
existing service Install a new EFV 1

The EFV is leaking or has failed Yes Replace the EFV Maintenance

Yes Capital Job

GPRP, reliability, or capacity job where Engineered job. Install a new EFV with
service is replaced as part of the job the appropriate capacity
No Capital Job

Install a new EFV or leave in place the

Yes Capital Job
existing EFV
GPRP, reliability, or capacity job where
service is transferred as part of the job
Engineered job. Install a new EFV with
No Capital Job
the appropriate capacity

1 If the service size is increased to meet the EFV maximum protected service line limitation, bill the applicant under New Business or work at the
request of others (WRO), as appropriate.
2 An EFV is required if the total connected load is less than 1,400 scfh.
3 Reimbursable WRO.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Table 6. EFV Installation and Replacement Matrix (continued)

EFV
Scenario Action Charge To
Installed

Same load: leave current EFV NA

Existing service cut off at property line Yes
Added load: check EFV capacity and
by PG&E to facilitate work by customer, WRO 3
replace it if the capacity is inadequate
and reconnected later
No No EFV installation is required NA

Commercial customer requests service

Engineered job. Install a new EFV with New
to serve new or existing load at or less Yes
the appropriate capacity Business
than 1,400 SCFH

Check the EFV’s capacity and remove it

Commercial customer increases load Yes WRO 3
if the capacity is inadequate
from at or less than 1,400 SCFH to
more than 1,400 SCFH
No No EFV installation is required NA

1 If the service size is increased to meet the EFV maximum protected service line limitation, bill the applicant under New Business or work at the
request of others (WRO), as appropriate.
2 An EFV is required if the total connected load is less than 1,400 scfh.
3 Reimbursable WRO.

EFV Field Installation Instructions

1. Install the EFV on the service line as follows:

 Install the EFV as near as practical to the service tee. In most cases, an EFV with plain
pipe ends may be connected directly to the service tee, but a short piece of pipe may be
installed between the service tee and EFV as needed.

 For a branch service, the EFV must be installed on the mother service and be of
sufficient capacity to serve the combined total connected load of both residences.

 For service lines fed by farm tap regulator sets, install the plastic EFV approximately
3 feet from the steel-to-plastic transition fitting downstream of the farm tap regulator set.
Include an EMS marker with the EFV to allow for future locating in the event the EFV
must be replaced or removed. See GDS H-10, “High-Pressure Regulator-Type Stations
and Farm Tap Regulator Sets.”

2. Remove debris from the service line before installing an EFV.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

CAUTION

An EFV installed with the flow direction going the wrong way,
will flow normally, but will not activate.

3. Install the EFV in a horizontal position and ensure the directional arrow is in line with the
flow of the gas and pointing toward the gas meter.

Note: The EFV can be installed at an angle or in a vertical position when necessary if
there is no debris that will interfere with the EFV.

4. Use an appropriate welding procedure when installing a steel EFV. When welding a steel
EFV, place a wet rag over the center of the steel EFV stick while it is being welded in place.
Keep welding heat away from the center of the EFV stick.

5. The EFV is supplied with a small metal identification tag and an adhesive sticker.

A. Use the nylon tie supplied to install the metal tag.

B. Install the metal tag on the gas service riser at the gas service valve location.

C. Install the adhesive sticker on the gas riser sun shield or pressure regulator.

D. For branch services, place the metal tag and adhesive sticker on the mother service.
Follow GDS A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation,” for additional branch marking
requirements.

6. EFVs on new stub services are to be installed as close as possible to the gas main.

A. Leave the metal tag and adhesive sticker in the EFV plastic bag.

B. Wrap the bag around the buried stub.

C. Attach the tag and sticker at the riser when the service is completed.

D. Ensure a properly sized EFV is present when performing a stub completion, if required.

7. When completing an existing stub that is missing an EFV, or a customer requested EFV,
install an EFV at the nearest non-paved point to the main, or at the property line. Place a
note in the notes section of the GSR saying “EFV installed on stub completion”.

8. Complete the EFV section on the GSR, per Utility Procedure TD-9500P-14.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Leak Testing

1. Leak test EFVs as required in GDS A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements.”

2. Increase the air pressure slowly when testing a service line with an EFV. A high flow may
cause the EFV to trip.

 For example: Take 15 seconds to pressurize a typical 50 foot − 100 foot service
of ½" copper tubing size (CTS) or 1" CTS.

3. Depressurize the service at a slow flow rate to avoid tripping the EFV.

Purging Gas Services that have an EFV

1. Gas services with an EFV require a slower purge velocity than the normal gas purge
procedure described in GDS A-38, “Procedures for Purging Gas Facilities.”

2. Do not attempt to purge a main through a service with an EFV.

3. Confirm there is an EFV identification tag on the gas service valve, riser, the riser sun shield,
or pressure regulator. If the tag is present, an EFV is installed on the service.

4. Open the gas service valve very slowly and only partially.

 If the valve is fully opened, the resulting rapid flow of gas will activate the EFV.
 The EFV may activate when purging to atmosphere even if the gas valve is opened
slowly.

 IF the EFV activates during purging,

THEN shut off the gas service valve and wait until the pressure equalizes before
attempting to re-purge.

5. When performing service work downstream of the regulator at the meter set, removing a
plug or associated piping too quickly can activate the EFV.

 IF the EFV activates,

THEN shut off the service valve and wait for the pressure to equalize. A typical EFV
takes approximately 5 minutes to equalize.

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Target Audience

Gas planning, estimating, new business inspectors, gas distribution engineering and estimating,
maintenance and construction, general construction, contracting, applicant design, materials
inspect personnel. Personnel involved in PE and steel pipe connection training and qualification.

Definitions

Branch service A service line that is not connected to a gas main, and has another
service line as its source of supply.

Farm Tap Regulator Set A pressure regulator set, including both single and multiple stages of
pressure regulation, which controls pressure to a service line.

Maximum Continuous The maximum flow rates at which the diaphragm meters should be
Capacity operated on a frequent or continuous basis in standard cubic feet per
hour (scfh). At standard delivery metering pressure of 7" WC, the
maximum continuous capacity established by PG&E is based on the
meter capacity with a 1.0" WC differential across the meter. At
elevated gas metering delivery pressure of 1.0 psig and greater, the
maximum continuous capacity at higher metering pressures is based
on the meter capacity with a 2.0" WC differential pressure across the
meter.

Total Connected Load Total demand of all gas appliances operating simultaneously and at
full capacity.

Acronyms and Abbreviations

APD: Abnormal peak day

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
CTS: copper tubing size
EFV: Excess flow valve
EMS: Engineering material specifications
GDS: Gas Design Standard
GSR: Gas service record
IPS: Iron pipe size
NPS: Nominal pipe size
PE: Polyethylene
psig: Pounds per square inch gauge
scfh: Standard cubic feet per hour
WC: Water column
WRO: Work at the request of others

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192-Transportation of Natural
and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.381, “Service lines:
Excess flow valve performance standards.”

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192-Transportation of Natural
and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.383, “Excess flow
valve installation.”

References

Gas Design Standard A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”

Gas Design Standard A-38, “Procedures for Purging Gas Facilities”

Gas Design Standard A-42, “Standard Branch Service Installation”

Gas Design Standard A-43.2, “Curb Valve Installations, Distribution Systems”

Gas Design Standard A-90 − Attachment 1, “Typical Direct-Burial Plastic Main and Service
Installation”

Gas Design Standard B-91.1, “Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings”

Gas Design Standard D-22, “Arc Welding Procedure Requirement – All Stress Levels

Gas Design Standard D-34, “Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe”

Gas Design Standard H-10, “High-Pressure Regulator-Type Stations and Farm Tap Regulator
Sets”

Gas Design Standard J-10.1, “Diaphragm Meter Capacities”

Gas Design Standard J-20, “Rotary Meter Capacity – At Standard and Elevated Delivery
Pressures”

Utility Procedure TD-4170P-50, “Mechanical Fitting Connections for Polyethylene Pipe (Stab
Outlet)”

Utility Procedure TD-9500P-10, “Customer Load Study”

Utility Procedure TD-9500P-14, “Gas Service Records”

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) F-1802, “Standard Test Method for
Performance Testing of Excess Flow Valves”

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) F-2138, “Standard Specification for Excess
Flow Valves for Natural Gas Service”

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 Excess Flow Valves A-93.3
Publication Date: 03/15/17 Effective Date: 04/14/17 Rev. 8

Appendices

NA

Attachments

Attachment 1, “EFV Capacities and Maximum Service Lengths for Systems with MAOP greater
than 25 psig”

Revision Notes

Revision 8 has the following changes:

1. Integrated all information from Gas Design Standard A-45 “Steel Excess Flow Valves
(EFV).”

2. Removed Table 6 EFV color identification information located in the EFV Field Installation
Instructions.

3. Removed the Perfection EFVs with Permasert Ends as described in Utility Bulletin
TD-4170B-013, “Discontinuation of Elster-Perfection Permasert Fittings.”

4. Added new code requirement that curb valves are required to be installed in accordance
with GDS A-43.2, “Curb Valve Installations, Distribution Systems,” on any new service line
or replace service line where an EFV is not installed.

5. Revised Attachment 1 removing field sizing information and incorporated Utility Bulletin
TD-A-93.3B-002, “Excess Flow Valve Sizing Guidance for High-Pressure Systems,” which
allows the use of 20 psig design pressure when sizing EFVs for specific scenarios.

6. Removed requirement that stated do not install an EFV if service is 3" or larger.

7. EFV installation locations updated for new and existing stub services.

8. Added Perfection EFVs with socket ends.

9. Added that on existing services, EFVs with adequate capacity may be installed with partial
protection of the service line.

Asset Type: Distribution Services

Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance and Operation

Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

PG&E Internal Information ©2017 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 12
TD-4001P-01-F01, Gas Design Standard (GDS) Template
 GAS DESIGN STANDARD J-15
GAS METER LOCATIONS

Publication Date: 09-18-13 Rev. #08

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard outlines the requirements to comply with applicable federal and state codes when installing
gas meter sets for residential and commercial premises.

This document includes definitions, references, and standard designs to comply with the regulations and codes for gas
meter set locations. Local jurisdictions may have adopted codes and ordinances relating to customer facilities that
could require consideration when designing gas meter sets. Compliance with applicable federal and state codes is
mandatory for PG&E (“Company”) facilities. Compliance with local codes is mandatory for customer facilities.

General Information

Applicability
Per Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions,” all gas meter set equipment must be located at some protected
location on Applicant’s premises as approved by the Company. PG&E is responsible for the design and final
approval of the location for metering facilities. The preferred meter set location is outside and adjacent to
the building being served. Customers need to submit the requested meter set location with the application early
in the planning stage to avoid delays.

New or customer requested relocated meter sets must be installed in compliance with current regulations,
standards, and codes.

Existing meter sets may be repaired, altered, or rebuilt in their existing location provided the clearance
requirements meet or are brought up to current standards.

These requirements do not mandate retroactive compliance of existing meter sets unless unsafe conditions exist
as determined by the Company.
1. Applicable Regulations and Codes
Listed below are the pertinent excerpted Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations (49 CFR) that apply to gas meter
set locations:
Title 49 CFR 192.353 - Customer Meters and Regulators: Location
Title 49 CFR 192.355 - Customer Meters and Regulators: Protection From Damage
Title 49 CFR 192.357 - Customer Meters and Regulators: Installation
Title 49 CFR 192.363 - Service Lines: Valve Requirements
Title 49 CFR 192.365 - Service Lines: Location of Valves

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

2. Definitions
Breezeway − A passage or walkway that may or may not have a roof covering and is adequately ventilated to
the outside atmosphere.
Cabinet – A structure, not deeper than 36”, with a solid or closed top that is freestanding, attached or
recessed into a building exterior wall, vapor proof from the building, with access doors for the purpose of
containing/protecting a gas meter set or meter set components.
Enclosure – A structure with an open top that is freestanding or attached to a building exterior wall with access
doors; a cage; or walls and gate for the purpose of containing/protecting a gas meter set or meter set
components.
Gas Meter Room − A space within a building that is solely used to house natural gas metering equipment in
accordance with Gas Design Standard J-16, “Gas Meter Room.”
Meter Set − The gas meter, service regulator, overpressure protection devices, and all associated Company
piping and fittings between the service riser valve and the customer houseline.
Readily Accessible Location −
S For a gas meter set: The preferred location can be accessed immediately and does not require contact
with the owner or occupant. If the preferred location is unavailable, the Company may approve a lock box
with key for access.
S For a service shut-off valve: The preferred location is outside and aboveground. If the preferred location is
unavailable, the Company may approve a curb valve in which no permanent structure prevents immediate
valve access or operation.
Show Window − A ground floor window in the wall of a commercial building, including any permanent elevated
display floors or platforms associated with the window, where the purpose of the window is to present a
display to the public.
Source of Ignition − As defined by the National Fuel Gas Code Handbook, sources of ignition are defined as
“devices or equipment that, because of their intended modes of use or operation, are capable of providing
sufficient thermal energy to ignite flammable gas-air mixtures.” This includes electric wiring, switches, and
circuit breakers that do not meet the requirements of the National Electric Code for installation in Class 1,
Division 2 areas.
3. Requirements
The following requirements comply with the regulations and codes:
A. General Meter Set Requirements
(1) Meter Set Locations - General
Listed in order of preference, as follows:
(a) Meter set located outside a building: See Item 3B for specific requirements.
(b) Meter set located outside in an alcove or enclosure: See Item 3B for specific requirements.
(c) Meter set located in a breezeway: See Item 3C for specific requirements.
(d) Meter set located in a cabinet: See Item 3D for specific requirements.
[(e) and (f) will only be considered by the Company when (a) – (d) are not available]
(e) Meter set located in a buried vault, pit, or box: See Item 3E for specific limitations and requirements.
(f) Meter set (excluding service shutoff valve) located inside a building in a gas meter room: See
Item 3F for specific requirements.

Page 2 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

(2) Prohibited Meter Locations

Gas meter sets must not be located in inaccessible areas, such as:
(a) rooftops,
(b) garages,
(c) crawl spaces,
(d) inside buildings without a dedicated gas meter room designed in accordance with
Gas Design Standard J-16; or
(e) under display platforms or show windows (with or without enclosures or cabinets).
(3) SmartMeter TM Requirements
The SmartMeterTM Advanced Meter Reading system uses a wireless radio frequency (RF) communication
network to transmit gas meter reads automatically. To minimize the potential of RF signal transmission
interference, gas meters should not be located:
(a) In a cabinet or enclosure made of metal or with a metal door.
(b) In close proximity (6-inches or less) of any metallic pipe, conduit, communications wire, TV cable,
electric wire or box.
(c) Within 5 feet of a large metal object such as HVAC duct, steel cabinet, refuse container or metal
ceiling.
(d) With less than a 6 inch clearance between the meter and the established, finished grade.
(4) Gas Meter Working Space
Gas meter locations must be selected to allow for a minimum clear and level working space of 3 feet in
front of the meter, with 2% or less grade, 78 inches high and 48 – 54 inches wide, depending on the meter
size. (Figure 1 and Figure 2) For a large meter set or multi-meter manifold this working space will extend
12 inches beyond the farthest Company meter set equipment.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Building Finished Wall

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Riser
Location 6” − 9”
4” Minimum
Houseline
Stub Out

Clear and Level

Work Space
(Width − 48” 36”
Depth − 36”
Height − 78”)

12” 24” 12”

Top View

Figure 1
Typical Residential Gas Meter Connection

Page 4 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Building Finished Wall

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Riser
Location 6” − 9”
6” Minimum
Houseline
Stub Out

Clear and Level

Work Space
(Width − 54” 36”
Depth − 36”
Height − 78”)

12” 30” 12”

Top View

Figure 2
Typical Gas Meter Connection for 400 to 1000 Class Meter

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

(5) Meter Set Location Relative to Service Line

The meter set is typically located so that the service line is the minimum possible length, measured in a
straight line perpendicular to the main. The Company may consider an alternate route if it results in
significantly lower construction costs or facilitates construction.
(6) Meter and Regulator Accessibility
Each meter set must be in a “readily accessible location” for reading, maintenance, and replacement.
Large meter sets or multi-meter manifolds will require adequate space for installation and maintenance
and require drive-up access for the Company’s service trucks.
(7) Service Shut-Off Valve Locations
(a) Each service line must have a shut-off valve in a “readily accessible location” when:
S services or risers are newly installed, relocated, or completely replaced; or,
S work is performed under the Meter Protection Program.
(b) The location for the service shut-off valve is above ground on an outside riser in a “readily accessible
location”.
Service risers must not be installed inside buildings or meter rooms, except where special
circumstances prevent outside installation as determined by the Company in accordance with
Gas Design Standard J-16. If the riser is located inside a building or an outside riser valve is not
readily accessible, then a curb valve must be installed in a location that is readily accessible.
(8) Meter Set Separated From Service Shut-Off Valve
If the meter set (or meter and regulator assembly) is located remotely from the service shut-off valve, then
install an additional service shut-off valve at the meter set when performing new installations, replacing the
meter, or altering or replacing the service. The additional valve will facilitate maintenance and operation
procedures.
(9) Meter Set Clearance Requirements
The meter set and service regulator vents must terminate in a safe outside location that complies with the
following criteria:
(a) The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The
riser must be a minimum distance of 36 inches from sources of ignition and openings into the building,
and this clearance area will extend 10 feet above and 36 inches below the regulator vent termination.
(Figure 3) For a large meter set or multi-meter manifold this clearance requirement will extend 12
inches beyond the farthest Company meter set equipment, 10 feet above the highest regulator vent,
and 36 inches below the lowest regulator vent.
(b) The regulator vent will not be within any location under building overhangs, where the overhang is
likely to direct gas into a building opening.
(c) The riser must be a minimum lateral distance of 8 feet from a forced air intake. (Figure 4) For a large
meter set or multi-meter manifold this clearance requirement will extend 8 feet beyond the farthest
Company meter set equipment.
(d) The meter set will not be within any location that is under display platforms or show windows in
non-residential buildings, including any permanent, elevated, display floors or platforms associated
with the window.

Page 6 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

30” Min. to 12” Min. to

Window Building Outside Building 10’
Corner Corner Min
Electric Meter 6” Min.
to Inside Electric Meter
Building Corner

36” Minimum 36” Minimum

From Center of From Center of
75” Max. Riser to Edge of Riser to Edge
66” Preferred Panels of Panels
48” Min.
PG&E
Downstream Communications
Bypass Tee Enclosure
PG&E
SmartMeter

Communications
Enclosure
26”
Gas Riser Finished Grade
Gas Meter

Building Vent Building Vent

Figure 3
Gas Meter Set Separations

Pad-Mounted
Transformers,.
Combustion Combustion All Electric Equip. and
Air-Intake Vents Exhaust Fan Wiring (e.g., Central Air,
Exhaust Fan)

3’ Min.

Combustion
3’ Min. Air-Intake
Vents

8’ Min. 8’ Min.
Figure 4
Gas Regulator Set Clearance Requirement from Sources of Ignition

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 7 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

(10) Corrosion Protection

Each meter set and service line must be installed and maintained in a manner to provide protection from
corrosion.
(11) Meter Sets in Contact with Soil
Meter sets must not be installed in contact with the soil, in a depression below general ground level (curb
meters are an exception), or where potentially corrosive materials are likely to contact the meter set. The
potential for accidental electrical shunting of the insulating fitting must be minimized.
(12) Buried Service Lines Downstream of the Shut-Off Valve
On an exception basis, as approved by the Company, if it is necessary to bury any segment of the service
line downstream of the service shut-off valve, see Gas Design Standard O-16, “Corrosion Control of Gas
Facilities” for specific corrosion control requirements. Any metallic, Company-owned service line in such
locations must have adequate corrosion protection.
(13) Service Risers
Company approved prefabricated, non-corrodible risers must be used and must be installed with the
appropriate protective sleeve or “sunshield.” A minimum 3 inch casing will be required for the placement of
the gas riser in areas that will be paved with concrete or asphalt. Gas service risers will not be directly
embedded in concrete or asphalt pavements.
If it is necessary to pave (concrete or asphalt) before installing the gas service, refer to Gas Design
Standard A-75, “Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing.”
(14) Overpressure Protection
When any overpressure protection devices are required in addition to the final service regulator, refer to
Gas Design Standard H-15, “Design Requirements for Company-Owned Gas Regulating Systems Serving
Customers.”
(15) Potential for Damage from Vehicles
Meter sets should be installed in locations where they are not exposed to damage from vehicular traffic. If
there is a potential for damage to the meter set from vehicular traffic, refer to Gas Design Standard J-95,
“Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement.”
(16) Working Space around Electric Meter Sets
To provide required working space around an electric meter, the gas service riser may not be located less
than 36 inches laterally from the closest edge of the electric meter panel, extending from a point 9 inches
above the center of the electric meter to the finish grade. (Figure 3) For a large gas meter set or
multi-meter manifold this clearance requirement will extend 12 inches laterally beyond the farthest
Company gas meter set equipment.
(17) Other Hazards
When selecting the meter set location, it is necessary to be alert to any potential hazards not specifically
indicated in this document, including potential risk to others caused by the meter set, and exercise
reasonable care to avoid any hazards. Electric grounding or bonding wires must not be attached to any
part of the gas meter set.
(18) Service Delivery Point
All customer-installed equipment must be installed downstream of the Company point of connection as
shown in Figure 5. Customer-installed equipment may include: earthquake valves, seismic shutoffs,
remote monitoring equipment, or flex hoses. Any customer-installed equipment on Company facilities will
be removed at the customer’s expense.

Page 8 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Utility Facilities Applicant Facilities

Service
Threaded Pipe Plug Delivery
(For Company Use Only) Point
Gas Flow

Gas Service Tee Fitting

(Shown sideways for
illustrative purposes only.)

CUBIC
FEET

Gas
Regulator

Gas Meter
Gas
Shut-Off
Valve

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Gas Flow

Figure 5
Typical Residential/Small Commercial Meter

B. Specific Requirements for Outside, Aboveground Meter Sets

(1) Location
Meter sets should be located at the building and as near as practical to the point where the gas service
pipe enters the property. The meter set location typically should be near the side of the building from
which the customer will be served. The order of preference for locating the outside, aboveground meter
set is:
(a) In a protected location adjacent to the building served (Figure 6). An exception to this requirement is
for schools, where it is required to protect the meter set from vandalism by installing it in a location
that is separated from buildings and playground areas. It will be necessary to install a wire cage or
other suitable protective enclosure, with a cover, around the meter set in these cases. (Figure 8)
(b) At the customer’s property line if a location exists where the meter set can be properly protected from
vandalism and/or damage by vehicles. (Figure 9)
(2) Meter Set Accessibility
For ease of access, avoid locations behind fences or other barriers that may be kept locked by the
customer.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 9 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Gas Meter
Building Gas Service Pipe Riser

Property Line

Gas Service Pipe

Gas Distribution Main

Property Line

Figure 6
Gas Service

Figure 7
Typical Detached Enclosure

Double Gate or
Removable Sections
See Note *

See 2’ 2’
Note * Gas Meter Set

8’ 0” Minimum
Headroom See Note *
Required

See Note *
See
Note * See Note *

* − The enclosure’s width and length will vary depending on the meter set. Contact your
local PG&E project coordinators (formerly service planners) for more information.
Figure 8
Typical Enclosure Dimensions

Page 10 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Building

Potential Hazard

Gas Meter Location and Meter Protection Provided

by the Applicant
Property Line
Gas Service Pipe

Street or Roadway Gas Distribution Main

Figure 9
Property Line Installation

C. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located in Breezeways

(1) Isolation from Living Spaces
Meter sets installed in breezeways must be located so that gas cannot migrate into building openings.
(2) Ventilation
Meter sets may be installed in breezeways that are adequately ventilated to the outside atmosphere. At
least one end of the breezeway is to be open and the other end should have at least two vents, one
located at the top and the other at the bottom. Vents must be fixed, and be a minimum of 12 inches by 12
inches or equivalent.
(3) Separation from Sources of Ignition
No sources of ignition will be allowed in the breezeway. Any electric wiring, switches, light fixtures, and
circuit breakers must meet the requirements of the National Electric Code for installation in Class 1,
Division 2 areas.
D. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located in Cabinets
(1) Meter cabinets are not a preferred method of installation. Meter cabinet installations require prior approval
from the local Field Services Manager. When approved they must comply with the requirements in this
section.
(2) It is preferred to have regulators installed on the outside of the cabinet. Additional space will be required
for larger regulators and dual-head regulators. The local Field Services Manager may approve to install
the regulators in a cabinet. Regulators in a cabinet require the vents to be piped out of the cabinet per
Gas Design Standard H-93, “Regulator Vent Lines - Above Ground.”
(3) Meter sets and meter set components located in a cabinet must have adequate working space, no source
of ignition and be properly ventilated. See Gas Design Standard K-51, “Single Meter Enclosure for
Domestic Gas Meters” for single meter cabinet requirements and details. Final dimensions must be
approved by Company prior to construction.
(4) Cabinets must be designed to be vapor proof and prevent migration of gas into the interior of a building or
other location where gas may create a hazard. The cabinet must be constructed of non-metallic and
non-combustible material with non-metallic doors.
(5) Meter cabinets that have been constructed prior to acceptance by Company may not be approved.
Customers should submit these requests with the application early in the planning stage to avoid delays.
(6) Modifications to meter sets in cabinets will require compliance with current codes and standards.
(7) Cabinets are limited to a minimum depth of 18 inches and a maximum depth of 36 inches. A cabinet
deeper than 36 inches will require conforming to the requirements of Gas Design Standard J-16.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 11 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Solid Door
(Shown Open) 30”

From the Bottom of 32”

the Cabinet to the Top

Shut-Off 2” x 6” Wood Insert,

Valve Full Width of the Enclosure
Horizontal
Doors
(Shown Open) 30”
Electrical Panel

30”
Windows
4” 18”−36” Max.
Gas Service 2”
Gas Meter C
L Tee 3” Min.−6” Max.
(See Note *)
PG&E 75”
SmartMeter

Max. 32”
26” Electric Conduit Must

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ 50” Be Continuous and

2” x 6” Behind the Inner

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Offset Wood Max.
Cabinet Wall
Louvers Insert
22” (See Note *)
Min.

Shut-Off Valve 2” x 6” Wood Insert

Shut-Off Valve
Front View Side View
Vertical
* − The gas meter cabinet may be enlarged and the electric conduit may pass between the inner cabinet wall and the
interior back of the gas meter section either if the conduit is continuous (i.e., without joints or fittings), or if the wiring
meets the requirements of the National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1 areas. A gas-tight seal also must be
provided where the conduit passes through the enclosure partition. When the electrical conduit passes through the
gas section, the houseline must extend a minimum of 4 inches and a maximum of 6 inches past the electrical conduit
toward the cabinet door. Applicants must ensure that when installing the service disconnect and distribution section
in the cabinet, the installation complies with the requirements of the inspection authority having jurisdiction.
Figure 10
Recessed Individual Meter Cabinet, Horizontal or Vertical

Page 12 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

E. Specific Limitations for Curb Meter Sets

(1) The Company considers curb meter installations undesirable because they are costly and difficult to
maintain. See Gas Design Standard J-14.1, “Curb Meter Installations” for a description of the policy and
design considerations for curb meter installations.
(2) Large Meter Installations for Commercial or Industrial Loads
(a) On an exception basis a vault or meter box may be located on the customer’s property, either
adjacent to the building served or near the property line.
F. Specific Requirements for Meter Sets Located Inside Buildings
(1) Meter sets and all meter set components located inside buildings must be contained within a dedicated
gas meter room as specified in Gas Design Standard J-16.
G. Multi-Meter Manifolds
Multiple meters will be at one approved location for each property or location. Number of meters, tiers and size
of piping will be designed by Company. (see Gas Design Standard J-52.1, “Gas Meter Manifolds (1-1/4” and 2”
Sizes),” Gas Design Standard J-52.2, “Brackets for Gas Meter Manifolds,” Gas Design Standard J-52.3, “Gas
Meter Manifolding”). Company limits gas meter manifold configurations to one-tier or two-tier meter manifolds
not exceeding 60 inches high. These manifolds are measured from the final, level, standing surface to the top
of the manifold.

Service Tee and Applicant

Service Tee and Applicant Houseline
Houseline
F A A
F A A A
D PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter
PG&E
SmartMeter

PG&E PG&E PG&E PG&E

SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter

Shut-Off C
B
Valve F A A A
E D
PG&E PG&E PG&E PG&E
SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter SmartMeter

Finished Ground Line

Shut-Off
Valve B
Single Manifold
E
Finished Ground Line
Two-Tier Manifolds
Figure 11
Dimensions for Typical Multimeter Installations

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 13 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Table 1 Dimensions to Figure 11

Dimension Installation Comments
12” for residential Custom design dimensions will be provided by
A 15” for cabinet installations the Company for mixed meter sizes and larger
20” for all commercial up to 1000 class meters than 1000 class meters.
26” (typ.) for unenclosed
B −
32” (typ.) for cabinet installations
C 24” (ALL) −
6” min. to inside building corner,
D −
12” min. to outside building corner
30” minimum to inside or outside corner
E −
of building
24” (typ.) for residential Custom design dimensions will be provided by
F 36” (typ.) for 400 to 1,000 class meter the Company for mixed meter sizes and larger
commercial than 1000 class meters.

Notes in reference to Figure 11

1. The applicant’s houselines must be stubbed out 4 inches to 6 inches from the finished wall at the locations shown.
2. Clearly mark each houseline and meter position when they are hooked into multimeter installations per Item H.

H. Marking Houselines
The Company requires that buildings, dwellings, occupancies, or other facilities or locations be marked to
identify gas lines that are serving locations or supplying equipment. Applicants must ensure that the following
rules for marking houselines are enforced.
(1) The Company requires that lines are marked by attaching an embossed, durable, metal or plastic tag to
each houseline. The Company must approve of the tag.
(2) Markings must be legible and specific.
(3) Marking information must include an authorized apartment or street number and a use or location
designation.
(4) The houseline must be permanently, clearly, and prominently marked at the point of the service connection
(i.e., service delivery point).
NOTE: The Company will not install meters unless the permanent address, the location, or the area being
served (if applicable) is marked at each meter location.
I. Protecting Meter Sets From Vehicular Damage
(1) Meter Sets in Traveled Areas
If any portion of a gas meter set must be located in or adjacent to traveled areas where there is the
probability of vehicular damage, physical protection acceptable to the Company must be provided by the
customer. The Company must determine when such protection is required. If the meter set is being
relocated at Company convenience and the only practical new location requires physical protection, then
the Company must install protection. Physical protection must be provided for any gas meter per Gas
Design Standard J-95, “Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement.”
(2) Returning Damaged Meter Sets to Service
If a meter set is damaged by a vehicle or other equipment and there is a potential for a recurrence,
temporary barricading must be installed before service is restored, and until permanent protection is
installed per Gas Design Standard J-95 or the meter is relocated.

Page 14 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Target Audience
Design, engineering, estimating, field services, M&C crews, gas T&R, general construction

Definitions
NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

AMR: automatic meter reading
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
CPUC: California Public Utilities Commission
Compliance Requirement/ Regulatory Commitment
Customer Meters and Regulators: Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.353
Customer Meters and Regulators: Protection From Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.355
Customer Meters and Regulators: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.357
Service Lines: Valve Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.363
Service Lines: Location of Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192.365
References
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Design Requirements For Company Owned Gas Regulating Systems Serving Customers . . . H-15
Vent Cover for Regulator on Curb Meter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-91
Plastic Vent Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-92
Regulator Vent Lines - Above Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-93
Curb Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-14.1
Gas Meter Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-16
Gas Meter Manifolds (1-1/4” and 2” Sizes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-52.1
Brackets for Gas Meter Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-52.2
Gas Meter Manifolding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-52.3
Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-95
Precast Concrete Pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10
Precast Concrete Vaults & Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10.1
Plastic Valve Box for 3/4” - 4” Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-40
Method of Installing Concrete Curb Boxes in Concrete Sidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-40.1
Precast Boxes 24” x 36”, 30” x 48”, and 30” x 60” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-42
Precast Boxes 13” x 24” and 17” x 30” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-42.1
Single Meter Enclosure for Domestic Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-51
Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-16
Vault Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4446
Gas Service Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Rule 16
CPUC General Order 112-E
Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), Section 2, “Gas Service.”
National Electric Code
Appendices
NA

Attachments
NA

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 15 of 16
 Gas Meter Locations J-15

Rev. #08 09-18-13

Revision Notes
Revision 08 has the following changes:
1. Updated Purpose and Scope.
2. Updated Applicability.
3. Added figures from Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook).
4. Added language requiring meter sets in cabinets to be approved by Field Services Manager.
5. This document is part of Change 66.
Asset Type: Gas Metering
Function: Design and Construction
Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 16 of 16 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 GAS DESIGN STANDARD J-16
GAS METER ROOM

Publication Date: 10-09-13 Rev. #03a

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard describes the requirements for any gas meter room inside any building. Local jurisdictions
may have adopted codes or ordinances relating to customer-owned and maintained facilities that could require
consideration when designing a gas meter room. Compliance with California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC)
requirements is mandatory. For PG&E gas meter locations, the applicable codes and regulations are described in
Gas Design Standard J-15, “Gas Meter Locations.”

General Information
1. A gas meter room is a space within a building that is solely used to house natural gas metering equipment.
2. The preferred gas riser, meter and regulator location is outside and adjacent to the building being served.
On an exception basis, gas meters and regulators may be installed in a specially designed gas meter room.
However, PG&E will not install a gas meter in a gas meter room unless all of the following conditions have been
met:
A. The applicant has specifically applied to install the gas meter in a specially designed room.
B. The applicant’s request is accompanied by an explanation detailing the reasons why the presence of some
condition associated with the property itself makes it impossible to locate the gas riser, regulator and meter
outside the building OR that such location would deny the applicant a substantial benefit of property ownership
enjoyed by other similarly-situated properties and that the approval of this exception would not constitute a
special privilege to this applicant which has been denied to similar applicants in other locations.
C. PG&E must concur that the unique attributes of this property render it impossible to locate the riser, regulator
and meter outside the building and that approval of the proposed meter room is reasonable and safe and does
not constitute a grant of a special privilege or advantage.
D. PG&E and the applicable planning/building department must approve the design in advance of any
construction.
E. The applicant has recorded a covenant substantially in the Covenant Agreement which provides that the
applicant or its successors in interest will maintain the meter room as approved by PG&E in good and
serviceable condition, will provide access to PG&E or its agents at all times, and will not use the meter room
for any other purpose (e.g. storage).
3. A meter room may not be used as a storage area.
4. It is the responsibility of the applicant to design, construct, and furnish the gas meter room and related materials to
meet the gas meter room requirements that are described in this document, and in accordance with the California
Building Code, including means of egress and those provisions to safeguard the health and safety of all personnel.
The minimum room dimensions will be unique for each project based on the meter, regulator, and manifold
requirements necessary to serve each load. Applicant gas service and meter installation arrangements are subject
to PG&E’s review and approval.
5. A covenant must be placed on the deed of property ensuring that successive property owners will adhere to the
requirements in this standard. The covenant will be prepared by the PG&E land department and recorded on the
deed of property prior to the installation of the gas meters. The covenant will state that PG&E has the right to
suspend or terminate gas service if the conditions of this standard are not upheld. In addition, the covenant will
state the owner is responsible for complying with gas tariffs. Any deviation in the form of the Covenant Agreement
must be approved by the PG&E land department prior to installing of the gas meters.
6. The covenant confirms the applicant’s financial responsibility when a relocation of PG&E facilities is required; e.g.
relocating a meter set from a basement under the city sidewalk.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 11
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

7. The covenant will provide that PG&E has the right to terminate service if ever PG&E determines, through regular
inspection, information or otherwise that the terms of this standard have not been upheld. The following list
describes examples of some but not all situations that violate the terms of this standard:
A. The fan is not in constant operation or does not turn on with the lights.
B. The lights are not operational.
C. The combustible gas indicator (CGI) is not signed-off or up-to-date.
D. The room is not vapor-tight.
E. The room is not clear of storage.
8. Gas meter room location and piping must conform to all current federal, state, and local codes including Code of
Federal Regulations 49 (CFR. Part 192), “Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal
Safety Standards,” and the National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54).
9. PG&E requires all applicant installed electrical equipment in the room be classified as Class I, Division 1, Group D
pursuant to NFPA-70, National Electric Code.
10. Do not locate or place any electric devices or electrical connections for services such as cable television or
telecommunications within the gas meter room. Under no circumstances will this requirement be waved.
11. All electrical wiring and conduit that pass through a gas meter room must conform to the National Electric Code
Article 501.
12. The customer must provide lighting for the gas meter room, with a minimum 30 foot-candle illumination.
13. No foreign pipe (i.e., drain lines, domestic water, etc.) or ducts are permitted to be located in or routed through the
gas meter room.
14. Gas meter room(s) must be designed to prevent entrapment of gas. Mechanical ventilation to the outside
atmosphere is required.
15. The requirements of this standard must be met when a customer houseline is added to an existing gas meter
room or gas meter set within a building.
General Service Requirements
1. Service shut-off valves must be installed and comply with the following:
A. Each new service or replacement service must have a readily accessible shut-off valve that is preferably
located outside, above ground on the gas service riser.
B. If it is necessary to locate the riser inside a building, or an existing riser valve is otherwise inaccessible, then a
curb shut-off valve must be installed at the customer’s expense in a readily accessible location in accordance
with Gas Design Standard A-43.2, “Curb Valve Installations, Distribution Systems.”
2. Service Riser Locations
A. Service risers must not be installed inside buildings or meter rooms, except where special circumstances
prevent outside installation. The installation of an inside riser may be justified at the discretion of the local
PG&E senior gas engineer. PG&E must grant prior approval for any gas meter design/location where
settlement or subsidence issues have been identified in any geotechnical report.
B. Examples of situations where inside risers are considered:
(1) A location with insufficient clearance between the building and the property line to safely locate the riser
outside of the building.
(2) A building with the meter room located inside of a basement or half basement, where an outside riser at
ground level would enter the room at an excessive height.
(3) An inner city urban redevelopment building with inadequate space for an outside riser.
(4) A designated historical building where modifications needed to locate the riser outside are not permitted.
(5) Sidewalk Basements - when the service passes through a sidewalk basement to the meter location on
private property. Sidewalk basements are basement spaces built underneath a city sidewalk, in front of the
foundation wall of a building. The PG&E land department must review and verify the applicant has
sufficient rights for PG&E equipment to be in a sidewalk basement prior to the installation of the gas
meters.
C. Existing service risers inside of buildings or meter rooms may be repaired with a plastic insert in accordance
with Gas Design Standard A-90, “Plastic Main and Service Installation.”

Page 2 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Screen
CGI
No more than 6”
from ceiling

Fan Fire sprinklers

(See as required
Note 1)
Explosion proof
All holes lighting, minimum
core drilled 30 foot candle
and sealed illumination
by applicant
Alternate
light switch

ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Exhaust
louvers A A

B
Riser 2 Hour fire Intake Louvers
Regulator rated walls
(See Note 2) & doors
Notes:
1. Fan can be mounted anywhere in the exhaust duct.
2. Regulator vents to be piped outside when regulators are approved to be installed inside room.
Figure 1
Plan View

Window/Opening
to buildings

10’ Min.

Exhaust
louvers

PG&E
approved
required Ceiling must
lock box be min. 7.5’,
10’ preferred.
6’ Min.

Regulator
(See Note 1) Preferred
light switch

Riser Intake louvers

Notes:
1. See Natural Gas Regulator
Requirements 3.A.(1), Page 6.
Figure 2
Front Outside Elevation − A

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 11
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Exhaust ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Exhaust Fan
louver vent
Screen

No Smoking − No Open Flames − Sign − must be

No Sources of Ignition −
This room is for the sole use of posted on at least
PG&E gas meter equipment − two walls in gas
No storage of any kind is allowed. meter room

Regulator

Riser

Figure 3
Cross Section − B

Meter Room Location Requirements

The following is a list of gas meter room locations that will be approved by PG&E for situations where the customer’s
building occupies all of the property that is owned by the customer (i.e., zero lot line) and the construction of an alcove
is not possible. Option 1 is preferred and successive options will only be considered when the previous options are not
possible:
1. A meter room that is accessible from a public right-of-way at all times. The gas meter room is located at an above
grade location designed and constructed with walls, ceiling, and floor that are vapor-tight to prevent the migration
of gas to the building’s interior. The gas meter room has doors that open to the outside of the building.
2. A gas meter room that is located adjacent to an outside building wall inside the customer’s building and
constructed with walls, ceiling, and floor that are vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s
interior. This gas meter room is also located at grade level with a door that opens to the inside of the building.
These doors shall be vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior.
3. A customer’s building’s basement meter room that is adjacent to an outside wall and constructed with walls,
ceiling, and floor that are vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior.
4. A sidewalk basement meter room is not acceptable without a written approval from the municipality and PG&E.

Natural Gas Meter Room Design Requirements

1. Fire rated walls must have a minimum 2-hour fire rating, or as specified in the California Building Code for Group
H, Division 1 occupancies.
2. All entry and exit doors must be rated commensurate with the rating of the wall. Doors that open to the inside of
the building must be vapor-tight to prevent the migration of gas to the building’s interior.
3. The applicant/customer must consult with local PG&E service planning personnel to obtain the required gas meter
room dimensions. Door dimensions and access must be approved by PG&E on a case-by-case basis.
4. No floor drains are permitted within a natural gas meter room.
5. If the applicant/customer’s building is equipped with a fire sprinkler system pursuant to NFPA-13 standard for the
installation of sprinkler system, the applicant/customer must also install fire sprinklers inside of the gas meter
room.
6. Only explosion-proof lighting fixtures are to be installed in a gas meter room and these must meet the
requirements of the NFPA-70: National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.

Page 4 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

7. It is preferred to mount the light switch outside the room next to the entry door. Explosion-proof light switches
must be installed if such switches are to be located inside of the meter room. These switches must meet the
requirements of the NFPA-70: National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.
8. No electrical receptacles (i.e., outlets) are permitted within a gas meter room.
9. The applicant/customer must furnish ladders or platforms inside of the gas meter room as required for a tiered
meter configuration.
10. The floor-to-ceiling height inside of the meter room must be a minimum of 7.5 feet. The preferred height is not
more than 10 feet.
11. Doors into gas meter rooms must be provided with approved signs. The signs must state that the room contains
flammable gas.
12. Signs must be posted on at least two walls within the room stating “No Smoking − No Open Flames − No Sources
of Ignition - This room is for the sole use of PG&E gas meter equipment − No storage of any kind is allowed”.
13. A lock box, acceptable to PG&E, containing a door key to the gas meter room door must be installed by the
applicant/customer and such lock boxes must be located near the gas meter room door.
14. The applicant/customer is responsible for core-drilling, sealing, waterproofing, and maintaining a vapor tight seal
on any wall, ceiling, or floor where:
A. Inlet natural gas piping enters the building and/or the gas meter room.
B. Natural gas regulator relief vents exit the gas meter room and the applicant/customer’s building.
C. Conduits containing wiring for the gas meter (and appurtenances) enter the gas meter room.

Gas Meter Room Ventilation Requirements

Applicant must submit the designs and calculations, stamped and signed by a licensed professional mechanical
engineer, demonstrating that the ventilation for the gas meter room satisfies the following requirements:
1. Ventilation must be provided in accordance with the Mechanical Code and one of the following:
A. Continuous ventilation introducing fresh air at six air exchanges per hour.
OR
B. A combustible gas detection system, interlocked with an automatic ventilation system that will provide fresh air
at six air exchanges per hour upon activation of the detection system. The gas detectors must be set at 20%
Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) (or 1.0% concentration of natural gas in air). The instructions for the combustible
gas detection system are found below in Requirements for Customer-Owned Equipment, Item 5.
S The formula for the gas room air exchange calculation is:
minimum fan air flow rate (cfm) = room volume (cf) x 6 air changes per hour / 60 minutes per hour
(where cfm = cubic feet per minute, cf = cubic feet.)
Pressure drop values (e.g. louver, screen and duct elements) must be included in the
design and calculations.
2. To ensure complete air exchange the low-fresh air intake and the high-exhaust air duct must be at opposite
corners within the room. Exterior louvers must be in a low-fresh air and high-exhaust air configuration as far apart
as practical and ensure no recirculation. The bottom of the high-exhaust air louver will be over the travel way at
least 6’ above the finish outside grade.
3. Mechanical fans and all other electric devices must be explosion proof and meet the requirements of the NFPA-70:
National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.
4. Mechanical fans and detection equipment must be continuously monitored in case of failure. Alarms for trouble
and failure must be installed in accordance with NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 11
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Natural Gas Regulator Requirements

1. Natural Gas Regulators
Typically PG&E will install natural gas service regulators and overpressure protection devices outside of a meter
room. Applicants/customers who want to install gas service regulators and overpressure protection devices inside
of a meter room must provide PG&E with the written justification as part of the application. The preferred gas riser,
meter and regulator location is outside and adjacent to the building being served. On an exception basis, gas
meters and regulators may be installed in a specially designed gas meter room. PG&E must approve all gas meter
and regulator installations and the gas meter room design in advance of any construction. If acceptable to PG&E,
the following additional conditions apply:
A. Each gas service regulator installed within a building must be located as near as practical to the point of the
service line entrance into the meter room, and as specified by PG&E.
B. PG&E will specify materials and designs for any overpressure protection devices needed, as outlined in
Items 2 and 3 below.
2. Regulator Vent Lines
A. Regulators and any additional overpressure protection equipment installed indoors must be vented to the
outdoors. The customer is required to provide holes (penetrations) through walls or ceilings for these vents. In
rare situations where the meter room location is not adjacent to an outside wall, the customer is required to
install the vent piping from the meter room to the outside wall (PG&E will determine pipe size and location).
PG&E will be responsible for connecting the vent piping to the regulator or overpressure protection device.
B. PG&E will position gas regulators to minimize the length of the regulator vent lines and to ensure adequate
venting capacity.
C. PG&E will specify regulator vent lines, in accordance with Gas Design Standard H-93, “Regulator Vent Lines −
Above Ground,” when required.
3. Regulator Vent Locations
A. Service regulator vents must terminate in a safe outside location that complies with the following criteria:
(1) The regulator vent must not terminate near any sources of ignition or openings into the building. The
regulator vent must be 36 inches horizontally from sources of ignition and openings into the building, and
this clearance area will extend 10 feet above and 36 inches below the regulator vent termination.
(2) A minimum lateral distance of 8 feet from a forced air intake. This includes the intake vents for the gas
meter room.
(3) Within any location that is under display platforms or show windows in commercial buildings, including any
permanent, elevated, display floors or platforms associated with the window.
(4) Within any location that is under building overhangs, where the overhang is likely to direct venting gas into
a building opening.
B. Vents for all natural gas regulator and gas monitor diaphragm equipment must terminate above a reasonable
flood level. Regulator vent extensions must be separate lines, terminated so they are protected from the rain
and provided with screened fittings to prevent insects and other debris from entering the vent.
C. Vent locations must have final approval by PG&E.

Page 6 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Requirements for PG&E-Owned Equipment

1. Natural Gas Metering
Electrical grounding or bonding to PG&E’s metering facility piping or equipment or to customer-owned house lines
inside of the meter room is not permitted.
2. Land-Line Cable and Conduit
Customers with an estimated average use of 10,000 therms per month or more are required to install, own, and
maintain a nominal 1” diameter conduit and a telephone cable. PG&E’s requirements for the conduit are described
below.
A. Applicant/customer must extend the conduit and telephone cable from the closest telephone service location (i.e.,
outdoor “general purpose” area) to a location specified by PG&E that will be at or near the gas metering facilities.
The maximum allowable distance from the telephone service location to PG&E’s gas meter is 50 feet.
B. Conduit must terminate within 3 feet of the gas meter location.
C. Applicant must install a conduit seal, inside the gas meter room, within 18 inches of the boundary where the
conduit enters the gas meter room. There must be no conduit fitting between the boundary and the seal.
PG&E will pour the conduit seal.
D. Applicant/customer is responsible for all charges and costs associated with installing the telephone facilities
necessary to provide telephone service for PG&E’s gas metering facilities which are to be used for PG&E’s
purposes.
E. PG&E is responsible for establishing telephone service and for the ongoing telephone service charges for gas
metering purposes.
3. Additional Equipment Needed to Support Gas Meters
Consideration must be given to the design requirements for:
A. Volume pulse output connections.
B. Electronic correctors.
C. Power for gas meters. If AC power is required for PG&E equipment, the applicant must provide an outlet
termination (with a lockable disconnect switch) located in the outdoor “general purpose” area, as noted in
Item 2 above (also see Figure 4).

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 7 of 11
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Non-Classified Area Inside Meter Room, Class 1 Div. 1

Communication Cabinet 14” x 18” x 8”,

See Note 1 Below
Wall

Rigid Conduit, 1”

Conduit Seal
(Installed by customer, poured by PG&E,
See Note 2 below)
Gas Meter
5’ Set Assembly
Note 4

2’
Note 4
Floor

Ground Rod, Clamp, and Wire

(Installed by Customer, See Note 3 Below)
Notes:
1. Cabinet must be large enough for ac outlet, AC/DC converter, EC modem, and customer pulse board.
2. Install conduit seal where conduit exits wall.
3. Ground rod with clamp must be 5/8” in diameter and 8’ long. A #12 AWG insulated green ground wire
connects ground rod to the communication cabinet.
4. Dimensions are for guidance only. Final design must be approved by PG&E.

Figure 4
Gas Meter Room
Electric Enclosure and Conduit Arrangement

4. SmartMeter System
PG&E’s SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system uses radio frequency technology to transmit meter reads
automatically from the gas module. Applicants must make provisions for SmartMeter requirements to ensure that
the SmartMeter Advanced Meter Reading system can operate properly. Consult with PG&E for current
requirements.
Some, but not all, installation limitation requirements for SmartMeter gas module include:
A. Module must be mounted at least 3” away from the wall in case of metal siding or foil insulation.
B. Module must be installed with a spacer on surfaces other than plaster and wood.
C. Module must be located at least 6” away from pipes, conduit, electrical wires, and other metal objects.
D. Module must be located at least 4” vertically and 3” horizontally from other modules.
E. Module must be located at least 2” below plaster or metal grid ceiling.
F. Module, direct mount or remote, is installed above grade level.
G. A remote module must be installed for any gas meter in a basement.

Page 8 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Requirements for Customer-Owned Equipment

1. All customer-installed gas equipment must be installed downstream of the service delivery point. The service
delivery point is defined as the gas supply point where PG&E’s facilities connect to the customer houseline as
follows:
A. For residential and small commercial meter sets, the service delivery point is the point where the male threads
of the applicant’s houseline connect to the female threads of PG&E’s gas service tee fitting.
B. Because some commercial and industrial installations do not have service tees installed, the gas supply
service delivery point is located at the first weld or fitting after the PG&E-installed bypass valve downstream of
the meter.
2. Customer-installed equipment must not connect to utility facilities or obstruct the operation or serviceability of
PG&E’s piping, metering, and pressure regulating equipment. Customers are responsible for maintaining all
customer facilities downstream of the service delivery point.
3. For multiple gas meter installations where the gas meters are supplied by means of a manifold, any installation of
a customer automatic gas shut-off device must be installed downstream of the service delivery point for each
meter.
4. Where customers elect to install an automatic shut-off device, all piping, valves, or other piping components must
be installed downstream of (i.e., after) the gas supply delivery point.
5. When a combustible gas indicator (CGI) device and controller are installed, the following are required:
A. A gas sensor must be installed no more than 6” from the ceiling of the gas meter room.
B. The design and installation of all such detection devices and systems must be done in accordance with and
comply with the NFPA-72, National Fire Alarm Code.
C. The controller must be installed outside of the gas meter room and be located near to the gas meter room
door.
D. All wiring and piping of the transmitter to the controller must meet the requirements of NFPA-70, National
Electric Code for Class I, Division 1, Group D locations.
E. An audible alarm and flashing strobe light must be included as a part of the controller system. This alarm
system must continue to be operational until the condition that has triggered such an alarm has been
determined and is manually reset.
F. The controller must have the capability to display readings of the percentage of the LEL readings from inside
of the gas meter room.
G. The customer must maintain and calibrate the combustible gas indicator device and all related systems per
the manufacturer’s recommendations. An up to date inspection card will be mounted on the wall, just inside
the door, signifying the gas detection device has been calibrated and is working accurately.
H. The light switch will continuously and fully engage the fan when turned on.

Access to Meter Room

Applicant must make provisions to allow PG&E access to the gas meter room for emergency response, meter
reading, system testing, inspection, and maintenance, in accordance with Gas Rule 16, “Gas Service Extensions.”

Records
1. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 9 of 11
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Target Audience
Design, engineering, estimating, field services, M&C crews, gas T&R, general construction

Definitions
NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

AC: alternating current
AWG: American wire gauge
cfh: cubic feet per hour
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
CPUC: California Public Utilities Commission
DC: direct current
EC: electronic corrector
EFV: excess flow valve
G.O.: CPUC General Order
LEL: lower explosive limit
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment
NA
References
Curb Valve Installations, Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43.2
Gas Service and Mains in Plastic Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Plastic Main and Service Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Prefabricated Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Design Requirements for Company-Owned Gas Regulating Systems Serving Customers . . . . . H-15
Regulator Vent Lines − Above Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-93
Gas Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-15
Meter Guard Design and Installation Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-95
Precast Concrete Vaults & Pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-10.1
Precast Boxes 24” x 36”, 30” x 48”, and 30” x 60” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-42
Single Meter Enclosure for Domestic Gas Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-51
Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-16
Vault Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4446
Gas Service Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas Rule 16
Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook), Gas Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 2
Code of Federal Regulations, Transportation of Natural Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192
CPUC General Order 112-E, Latest Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 112-E
California Code of Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title 24 CCR2, 4, 9,
National Fire Protection Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFPA-13, 54, 70, 72, 497
Appendices
NA

Attachments
NA

Page 10 of 11 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Gas Meter Room J-16

Rev. #03a 10-09-13

Revision Notes
Revision 03a has the following changes:
1. Added section “Records.”
Revision 03 has the following changes:
1. Item 15 added to General Information.
2. Added Figures 1, 2, and 3.
3. Item 10 of Natural Gas Meter Room Design Requirements, removed “maximum of 10 feet” high ceiling and
revised to say “the preferred height is not more than 10 feet”.
4. This document is part of Change 66.
Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution
Function: Design
Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 11 of 11
 GAS DESIGN STANDARD J-65.1
VOLUME PULSE OUTPUT CONNECTION FOR GAS METERS

Publication Date: 10-01-13 Rev. #04

Purpose and Scope

This gas design standard describes the typical installation of a volume pulser on a gas meter to provide the customer
with a volume pulse output under the terms of the Electric and Gas Monitoring Meter Pulse Agreement, Form 79-1049,
“Agreement to Install Applicant Requested Common Special Facilities - Gas and Electric Rule 2.” Contact advanced
metering service and support personnel for any volume pulser request and the latest copy of the pulse agreement
form.

General Information
1. Pulsers installed or with connections within a 15’ area of the meter-set flanges, valves, and threaded fittings must
conform to NEC Class I, Division 2, Group D hazardous area requirements. Conduits must be sealed to prevent
gas migration to areas classified as non-hazardous. For the purpose of this document, underground is considered
non-hazardous.
2. All wiring between equipment must be in threaded rigid steel or intermediate steel conduit. Where provisions must
be made for limited flexibility, liquid-tight flexible metal conduit in lengths not exceeding 3’ may be used without
securing or supporting the flexible conduit between termination points.
3. For a volume pulse output from an electronic corrector, see Gas Design Standard J-65.2, “Volume Pulse Output
Connection for Mercury Electronic Correctors.”
PG&E Responsibilities
1. Provide intrinsic safety barrier enclosure to customer (“PG&E Responsibilities,” Item 2). (Note: Customer must
install the enclosure in the non-hazardous area, at least 15’ but no more than 500’ away from the gas meter set).
2. Install intrinsic safety barrier Item 3 for 120 Vac or Item 4 for 24 Vdc.
3. Provide and install pulser (“PG&E Responsibilities,” Item 1).
4. Connect power wires provided by customer.
5. Connect pulser to intrinsic safety barrier.
6. Connect customer pulse output to intrinsic safety barrier.
7. Check for pulse connection.
8. Complete end-to-end test of the system.
9. Pour conduit seal after successful completion of end-to-end test.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 4
 Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters J-65.1

Rev. #04 10-01-13

Customer Responsibilities
1. Install enclosure (Table 1, Item 2) in the non-hazardous area, at least 15’ but no more than 500’ from the gas
meter.
2. Install all conduit and wire (Table 1, Items 5 & 6) from intrinsic safety barrier enclosure to no farther than 3’ from
the gas meter and to customer power source. Leave extra 5’ of wire at meter end and an extra 2’ of wire at
enclosure. (Note: Customer must not make any connections to the intrinsic safety barrier).
3. Install a conduit seal (Table 1, Item 9) on wall or out of ground if conduit is buried as close to the hazardous area
transition zone as practicable.
4. Supply 24 Vdc power for intrinsic safety barrier. Alternatively, customer can supply 120 Vac. Provide PG&E with
information on which type of power (120 Vac or 24 Vdc) must be provided.

Class I Div. 2 Area Non-Hazardous Area

(15’ min. from meter in free air or 2
can be less from wall penetration)
Ch1 1 2 3a
1 7
Ch2 3 4
5 Pulse To
Ch1 5 6 3c Customer
6
Ch2 7 8 6+ 4− 3b 8

9 120 Vac
Pwr 9+ 10− 7 G N L From
Class I Div. 2 Area Customer
OR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
7

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Underground

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Non-Hazardous Area Figure 1
Volume Pulse Output Connection (120 Vac Power)

Class I Div. 2 Area Non-Hazardous Area

(15’ min. from meter in free air or 2
can be less from wall penetration)
Ch1 1 2 4a
1 7
Ch2 3 4
5 To
Ch1 5 6 Customer
6
4b
Ch2 7 8
24 Vdc
9 From Customer
Pwr 9+ 10− 7 8
Class I Div. 2 Area
OR

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Non-Hazardous Area
Underground

Figure 2
Volume Pulse Output Connection (24 Vdc Power)

Page 2 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters J-65.1

Rev. #04 10-01-13

Table 1 Bill of Materials

Quantity Quantity
Item by by Description
Customer PG&E
1 − 1 Pulser Specified in Table 2
Intrinsic Safety Barrier Enclosure - Hoffman QLINE E, Type 4X, Model
2 − 1
Q251815ABE with Mounting kit QEMFK (installed by customer)
Intrinsic Safety Barrier system (120 Vac version) consisting of:
a) Intrinsic Safety Barrier - 2-Chanel, 24 Vdc, Pepperl+Fuchs
3 − 1 KCD2-SR-EX2 or equal
b) Fused Power Disconnect. Phoenix UK 5 - HESI with 3 amp fuse
c) Power Supply - 120Vac/24Vdc, Mean Well DR-4524
Intrinsic Safety Barrier system (24 Vdc version) consisting of:
a) Intrinsic Safety Barrier - 2-Chanel, 24 Vdc, Pepperl+Fuchs
4 − 1
KCD2-SR-EX2 or equal
b) Fused Power Disconnect - Phoenix - UK 5 - HESI with 3 amp fuse.
5 1 − Conduit, 1/2” Rigid, and 1/2” Liquid-Tite Metallic Flex (as required)
Three-Conductor Shielded Cable1, Stranded #22 AWG , Belden 9363, or Equal
6 1 −
(for signal wiring)
7 − 1 Single Conductor #18 AWG for power wiring within enclosure
Single Conductor #12 AWG max for power wiring from customer power source
8 1 − (Note: Wire size used must be based on customer breaker size providing the
power to enclosure)
9 1 − Conduit Seal, EYS 1/2”, Crouse-Hinds
1 NEC Type PLTC per Article 725, which is approved for wiring in Class I Division 2 hazardous areas.

Table 2 Volume Pulsers for Gas Meters

Pulser Make and Model Gas Meter Make Gas Meter Model
AC 175, AC 250, AL 175, AL 310, AL 425,
American Diaphragm Meters
AT 175, AT 210, AT 250
American RVP-FI 1 Rockwell Diaphragm Meters 175, 175S, 250, R275, 310, R315, 415
Schlumberger/Sprague 240, 250, 305, 400, 400A, 675, 1000, 2, 3, 4,
Diaphragm Meters 5, 5A
AC 630, AL 800, AL 1000, AL 1400, AL 2300,
American Diaphragm Meters
AL 5000, 25-B, 35-B, 60-B, 80-B, 250-B, 500-B
American RVP-VI 1
Sensus/Invensis/Equimeter/ 750, 800, 1000, 3000, 5000, 10000, 2, 2-1/2,
or
Rockwell Diaphragm Meters 3, 4, 4-1/2, 5
Mercury 206 Pulse Transmitter 2, 3
Itron/Actaris/Schlumberger/
675A, 800A, 1000A
Sprague Diaphragm Meters
1 One pulse per revolution of the index test hand.
2 One pulse per revolution of the instrument drive.
3 American Meter Mounting Kit Part #20-4187, MS Code 230504 is required to install Mercury 206 Pulse Transmitter
on Rockwell and Sprague meters.

Ordering Instructions
When ordering a volume pulser, specify the make and model of the pulser and the make and model of the gas meter.

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 4
 Volume Pulse Output Connection for Gas Meters J-65.1

Rev. #04 10-01-13

Target Audience
Gas control technicians, gas measurement technicians, gas transmission and regulation (T&R) supervisors, gas
estimators and gas engineers

Definitions
NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Vac: Volt alternating current
AWG: American wire gauge
Vdc: Volt direct current
NEC: National Electric Code
Compliance Requirement/ Regulatory Commitment
NA
References
Volume Pulse Output Connection for Mercury Electronic Correctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-65.2
Agreement to Install Applicant Requested Common Special Facilities - Gas
and Electric Rule 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79-1049
Appendices
NA

Attachments
NA

Revision Notes
Revision 04 has the following changes:
1. Added AC-630 in Table 2.
2. This document is part of Change 66.
Asset Type: Gas Metering
Function: Design and Construction
Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 4 of 4 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2013 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 J: Meters, Gauges, and Instruments

Prepared by: JZB1

METER GUARD J-95

DESIGN AND INSTALLATION ARRANGEMENT

Department: Gas Distribution and Technical Services Section: Gas Engineering and Planning

Approved by: R. L. Thierry Date: 12-01-04

Rev. #02: This document replaces Revision #01. For a description of the changes, see Page 6.

Purpose and Scope

This gas standard provides guidelines and instructions for selecting and installing new and retrofitted gas meter guards
for residential and commercial meters subject to vehicular traffic. These meter guards are designed to protect against
incidental bump damage during typical low-speed maneuvering (i.e., turning, backing, etc.). Post installation shall be
done in accordance with Utility Operations Standard S4412, “Protection of Underground Infrastructure.”

References Gas Standard

Gas Meter Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-15
Electric and Gas Service Requirements, Meter Protection
California Fire Code, Section 1106, Gas Meters and Piping
DOT 49 CFR Section 192.353, Customer Meters and Regulators: Location
American Welding Society, Safety and Health Fact Sheet No. 25: Metal Fume Fever
General Information
Physical protection shall be provided for any gas meter set located in one of the areas described below:
1. Type 1 Locations
Within 3’ of the following:
• A single-family driveway/parking area.
• A roadway, street, alley, or driveway with a curb.
Within 8’ of the following:
• A roadway, street, alley, or driveway without a curb.
• Multi-family driveway/parking area.
2. Type 2 Locations
Within 3’ of the following:
• A commercial refuse container location.
Within 8’ of the following:
• A commercial or industrial driveway/parking area.
• A loading dock/freight handling area.

Selection and Installation

If a risk of vehicular damage exists at a location, the meter should be protected by barrier posts. The following
provides guidelines for the physical protection of gas meter sets. Protect gas meter sets that are at risk in residential
areas using minimum 2” diameter, Schedule 40 steel posts. Protect gas meter sets that are at risk in commercial and
industrial areas using concrete-filled, minimum 4” diameter, Schedule 40 steel posts. Install all utilities before installing
the barrier posts. Barriers should be provided on all sides of the meter set that are exposed to vehicle hazards and
that are not already protected by existing structures. The final arrangement of the barriers should not allow a vehicle
approaching at any angle to damage the meter set. The meter posts should be installed so that they do not obstruct
Dig Safely: Call 1-800-227-2600 before you dig.

Rev. #02: 12-01-04 J-95 Page 1 of 6

J: Meters, Gauges, and Instruments
Meter Guard
Design and Installation Arrangement
vehicular traffic, inconvenience customers, or hamper gas meter maintenance and meter reading. All posts should be
installed to have the same height.
1. Protection for Type 1 Locations
A 2” diameter post should be used to provide protection for meter sets in Type 1 locations. See Figure 1, Figure 2,
Figure 3, and Figure 4 for installation instructions.
2. Protection for Type 2 Locations
A 4” diameter post should be used to provide protection for meter sets in Type 2 locations. See Figure 1, Figure 2,
Figure 3, and Figure 4 for installation instructions.

Note
When field conditions do not permit exact compliance with these requirements, alternatives may be proposed.
Alternative meter guard arrangements must sufficiently protect the meter set and ensure adequate distance for
maintenance and meter reading. A meter guard may be used in conjunction with man-made barriers such as
wing-walls, planters, fences, etc., to provide protection; these barriers may be a 6” or higher curb, large tree,
permanently installed planter, barrier post(s), fence, or other similar permanent structure.

Dig Safely: Call 1-800-227-2600 before you dig.

J-95 Page 2 of 6 Rev. #02: 12-01-04

 J: Meters, Gauges, and Instruments
Meter Guard
Design and Installation Arrangement

Type 1 Type 2

Cap
4” Diameter,
Concrete-Filled,
Visibility Strip Steel Tube
(Typical 2 Places)

36” − 48”
(See note below.)
2” Diameter,
24” − 36” Steel Tube
(See note below.) Visibility Strip
(Typical 3 Places)

Burial Line

Concrete
A .
. ... Concrete
.
. ..
24” − 36”
.. ..

8” Min.

Note: Post should extend 6” above the highest point on the meter set,
but not to exceed maximum height above grade.

Figure 1
Post Installation

Table 1 Dimensions for Concrete Footing

A B
(Inches) (Inches)
12 8
15 8
20 6

Dig Safely: Call 1-800-227-2600 before you dig.

Rev. #02: 12-01-04 J-95 Page 3 of 6

J: Meters, Gauges, and Instruments
Meter Guard
Design and Installation Arrangement

Wall
Regulator

Meter Meter
C
Posts D
C

D D D

Note: The concrete footing should be at least 6” away from any point on the riser. If the post is positioned above
an underground gas service, a minimum distance of 3” should be maintained between the service and the
concrete footing.
Figure 2
Multiple Meters Post Arrangement

Wall Wall

Regulator Regulator

Meter Meter

Post
C Minimum 9” Wall
Post

Figure 3 Figure 4
Single Meter Post Arrangement Single Post Arrangement

Table 2 Dimensions for Post Arrangement

C1 Maximum D 2
(Inches) (Inches)
Space posts to prevent vehicle from contacting meter set but leaving room for meter
Less than 12
access and maintenance.
12 18
15 24
18 30
24 42
1 Distance to meter or regulator.
2 May not be more than 42”.
Dig Safely: Call 1-800-227-2600 before you dig.

J-95 Page 4 of 6 Rev. #02: 12-01-04

 J: Meters, Gauges, and Instruments
Meter Guard
Design and Installation Arrangement
Table 3 Post Materials
Description Length Code
2” Diameter, Schedule 40, Galvanized Pipe 56” 150117
4” Diameter, Schedule 40, Galvanized Pipe 78” 150122
Strip Visibility, Flexible, 2” x 12” − 013163
2” End Cap, Galvanized − 150119

Riser Protection Method

This method may be implemented in cases where only impact perpendicular to the structure is a threat. If there is a
threat of lateral impact, install standard meter posts.
A 4-1/2” Split Steel Pipe With Mounting Flanges
• Use caution when welding flanges onto galvanized steel. Make sure the area is well-ventilated or
wear an approved respirator.
• Bolt pipe directly to the existing structure.
• Use to cover any portion of the riser in danger of vehicular damage.
Caution: do not cover service valve.
• See Figure 5 and Figure 6 for installation instructions.
Note: If the riser is less than 12” in height and 6” from the supporting structure, it does not require protection from
vehicular damage. As per the Department of Transportation’s Bumper Standard (49 CFR Part 581), bumpers must be
between 16” and 20” above the ground, preventing a car from being capable of hitting a riser less than 12” tall.

Custom-Cut
1/4” Steel
Plates for
Mounting

Welds

Figure 5
Riser Protection Method

Dig Safely: Call 1-800-227-2600 before you dig.

Rev. #02: 12-01-04 J-95 Page 5 of 6

J: Meters, Gauges, and Instruments
Meter Guard
Design and Installation Arrangement
Structure

Flange Flange

Riser Riser Guard

Direction of Impact

Figure 6
Riser Protected by Riser Guard

Table 4 Materials for Riser Protection

Description Code
4-1/2” “Half-Rolled” Steel Pipe, Galvanized 150133

Revision Notes
Revision 02 has the following changes:
1. Corrected the accidentaly reversed bullets in Item 1 of the “General Information” section on Page 1.
2. This document is part of Change 55.

Dig Safely: Call 1-800-227-2600 before you dig.

J-95 Page 6 of 6 Rev. #02: 12-01-04

 K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters

Prepared by: JTMZ

SINGLE METER CABINET FOR DOMESTIC GAS METERS K-51

Asset Type: Gas Metering Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: S. A. Robinson Original Signed By Date: 11-18-11

Rev. #01: This document replaces Revision #00. For a description of the changes, see Page 4.

Purpose and Scope

This numbered document provides specifications and ordering information for single, residential gas meter cabinets.

Safety Note
The cabinets shown in this numbered document are intended to be built into the wall of a structure. The fabricated
non-flammable/non-metallic cabinet and door(s) must be sealed at all joints and penetrations from the inside with
caulking or other appropriate sealant and must be vented to the outside to prevent any gas from leaking into the
structure. If constructed from wood, it must be lined with sheet rock or other non-flammable material.
The prefabricated American Gas Products (AGP) ABS plastic cabinet part number J-40 (with solid cover) is an
approved alternate for the fabricated cabinet. Order from American Gas Products (AGP) Inc. P.O. Box 4777, Anaheim,
CA 92803.

General Information

Fabricated Non-Flammable/Non-Metallic Cabinets (see Figure 1)

1. Cabinets and door(s) shall be made from non-flammable wall board, or other suitable material. If constructed from
wood, it must be lined with sheet rock or other non-flammable material. Review local codes to ensure that the
cabinet complies with any fire rating requirements.
2. Cabinets and cabinet doors shall not be fabricated from metal in order to minimize the potential for interference
with SmartMeter radio frequency (RF) signal transmission.
3. Seal all joints and penetrations from the inside with caulking or other appropriate sealant.
4. The box width and height dimensions are the minimum inside dimensions needed for maintenance and operating
activities. These dimensions may be increased to suit local conditions, but should be kept as close as practical to
the specified minimums to discourage customers from using the box for storage purposes.
5. The right side door should be louvered or otherwise vented at the top and bottom as shown. It shall be held closed
with two slide-bolt latches located on the outside. Other types of latches can be used.
6. Lock the solid door closed using two slide-bolt latches located on the inside. Both doors shall open fully to allow
servicing of the meter and regulator.
7. Electrical wiring is permitted in the cabinet only if the wiring is within sealed conduit with no joints, or the wiring
meets the requirements of the National Electric Code for Class I, Division 1 areas. The conduit must not interfere
with the meter, regulator, or piping.
8. Take care not to paint the cabinet vents or the regulator’s internal relief valve (IRV) vent termination fitting
openings and thereby obstruct the flow of air or gas.

Rev. #01: 11-18-11 K-51 Page 1 of 4

K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters
Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters

30” Min. 18” Min.

Slide Bolts (Outside)
(Typical) 36” Max.

Plexiglas Window
for Reading Meter
1” x 3” (6” x 4”)
Face Board
(Typical)
2” x 4” Reinforcing
32” Min.

Wedges (Typical)
1/8” Clearance All (As Required)
Around Between
1/8” Door and Frame
10”

Clearance
1-3/16” Dia.
Holes Vent Openings, Louvered
(Typical)
(3” x 8” Rectangular,
Preferred or 3” Diameter
Minimum Size, Alternate)

6” 6”
Slide Bolts (Inside)
(Typical)

Figure 1
Meter Cabinet

Prefabricated Plastic Cabinets (see Figure 2)

1. The cabinet is designed to fit between studs on 16” centers.
2. Add a second 2”x4” on each side of the cabinet to support the flange.
3. Meter sizes up to AC630 will fit in the cabinet.
4. Align the gas service riser with the “R” marking on the left side of the cabinet and stub out the connection to the
customer’s houseline to align with the “HL” marking on the right side of the cabinet. Do not drill into or penetrate
the back, sides, top, or bottom of the cabinet.
5. Locate the meter to align with the figure outlined on the rear of the cabinet and connect the inlet and outlet piping
as shown in Figure 3 on Page 4.
6. The cabinet cover may be painted to match the building.

K-51 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #01: 11-18-11

 K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters
Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters

39-1/2”

13”

Top View

24”

39-1/2”

16”
24”

Front View Side View

Figure 2
Prefabricated Plastic Meter Cabinet Dimensional Views

Rev. #01: 11-18-11 K-51 Page 3 of 4

K: Pits, Vaults, Boxes, and Shelters
Single Meter Cabinet for Domestic Gas Meters

Figure 3
Prefabricated Plastic Meter Cabinet Piping Installation View

Revision Notes
Revision 01 has the following changes:
1. Added alternate prefabricated plastic cabinet.
2. Changed description to “Cabinet” to agree with Numbered Document J-15.
3. Added non-metallic cabinet door material requirement for SmartMeter RF signal transmission.
4. Added maximum cabinet depth of 36”.
5. This document is part of Change 64.

K-51 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #01: 11-18-11

 L: Markers, Tags, Signs, Barricades and Fences

Prepared by: C1K8

GAS PIPELINE UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE L-16

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution Function: Design & Construction
Issued by: S. van Oosten Original Signed By Date: 05-01-13
Rev. #00: This is a new document. For a description of the changes, see Page 2

Purpose and Scope

This numbered document provides guidelines for purchasing and installing underground warning tape above gas
pipelines. The installation of the warning tape applies to all open trench installation of gas pipelines.

Acronyms

References Document
Design and Construction Requirements Gas Lines and Related Facilities . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Plastic Gas Distribution System Construction and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.1
Joint Trench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S5453
General Information
1. A warning tape is to be installed in open trench installation over gas pipelines in both Transmission and
Distribution facilities. This includes trenches, bell holes, excavations for repair purposes and riser replacements.
The warning tape is intended for excavator digging in the “tolerance zone” to strike the warning tape prior than the
pipeline. When the warning tape is exposed and grabbed with excavating equipment, it stretches without breaking,
thus alerting the excavator of the gas facility below.
2. Install 6” wide warning tape above the gas pipeline at least 12” below grade, and no closer than 12” from the pipe.
Installation should provide the greatest distance between the pipeline and the tape as possible. Install the tape
along the length of the excavation. Ensure that the tape overlaps when two or more pieces of tape are used.
EXCEPTION: When a joint trench design does not allow for installment of warning tape within the “warning tape
installation zone”, install the warning tape a minimum of 6” above the gas pipeline, and below the facility above the
pipe.
3. Warning tape shall be brightly colored yellow and marked “Caution: Gas Line Buried Below” or marked with a
similar notification.
4. Warning tape shall be stored in such a manner that limits Ultraviolet (UV) exposure.

Rev. #00: 05-01-13 L-16 Page 1 of 2

L: Markers, Tags, Signs, Barricades and Fences
Gas Pipeline Underground Warning Tape

Figure 1
Gas Pipeline Underground
Warning Tape

Table 1 Material Specification for Figure 1

Description Dimensions Material Code

1 Roll (Terra Tape) 6” x 1000’ 379947

Finish Grade

Min 12”

Warning Tape Installation Zone

Warning Tape

Gas Pipeline
Min 12”

Figure 2
Gas Pipeline Underground Warning
Tape Installation

Revision Notes
Revision 00 has the following changes:
1. This is a new document.
2. This document is part of Change 66.

L-16 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #00: 05-01-13

 GAS DESIGN STANDARD N-01
PG&E APPROVED GAS MATERIALS MANUFACTURERS

Publication Date: 01-07-15 Effective Date: 01-07-15 Rev. 03

Purpose and Scope

This Gas Design Standard (GDS) provides a list of PG&E approved manufacturers.

General Information
1. This GDS may be updated between book publishings. Contact your local PG&E representative to obtain the latest
version.
2. Each approved manufacturer does not necessarily supply all of the approved variations of each commodity.
3. If no plant location is listed, then material from all manufacturing locations operated by the named manufacturer is
approved for use. If a plant location is named, then only material manufactured at the specifically approved plant is
acceptable.
4. For further information, refer to the SAP Qualified Suppliers List.

Table 1 PG&E Approved Manufacturers

Material Approved Manufacturer (Plant) Document Reference
Garlock
Gaskets Full Face and Flat Ring B-45, B-45.1
PSI Linebacker
Insulating Joints Kerotest-Zunt GPT-PSI (Houston, TX) O-25
Meter Manifolds
Agile-R.W. Lyall J-52.1
(1-1/4” and 2” Sizes)
Meter Swivels and Swivel Nuts Advanced Engineering Corp J-50
A. Y. McDonald
Meter Valves Jomar F-80
Mueller
Plastic (PE) Cast Iron to
Dresser B-91.5
Polyethylene Transition Fittings
Plastic (PE) Electrofusion Innogaz
B-90.3
Fittings & Tapping Tees IPEX-Friatec
Plastic (PE) Excess Flow
Perfection A-93.3
Valves
Chicago Fittings
Plastic (PE) Fittings Mechanical
Continental B-91
Transition
Mueller
Continental “Constab”
Plastic (PE) Mechanical Fittings B-91.1, EMS 4761
Perfection “Permasert”
JM Eagle (Tulsa, OK)
KWH (Huntsville, ON)
KWH (Saskatoon, SK)
Performance Pipe (Fairfield, IA)
Plastic (PE) Pipe & Tubing Performance Pipe (Knoxville, TN) A-93, EMS 2502, EMS 2503
Performance Pipe (Pryor, OK)
Performance Pipe (Reno, NV)
Performance Pipe (Williamstown, KY)
PolyPipe/Dura-line (Gainesville, TX)

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2015 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 6
 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date:01-07-15 Effective Date: 01-07-15 Rev. 03

Table 1 PG&E Approved Manufacturers (continued)

Material Approved Manufacturer, Plant Document Reference
Central Plastics
Continental
B-90.1, EMS 4758,
Plastic (PE) Saddle Fittings Elster-Perfection
EMS 4761
Performance Pipe
US Poly
Central Plastics
Plastic (PE) Socket and Butt Performance Pipe
B-90, EMS 4758
Fusion Fittings RW Lyall
US Poly
Plastic (PE) System Continental
B-90.2
Accessories Performance
Andronaco Poly-Valve
Plastic (PE) Valves F-90
Perfection
Risers Pre-Fabricated Gas Elster-Perfection (Geneva, OH)
A-91, EMS 6421, EMS 7030
Service and Riser Kits RW Lyall (Corona, CA)
Grove/Cameron (Ville Platte, LA & Weifang,
China)
MSA (Ostrava, Czech Republic)
Steel Ball Valves PBV-USA (Stafford, TX) F-20, F-21, F-21.1, F-21.2
Quarter Turn Delta/Valvitalia, (Milan, Italy)
Tested at either Ponca City, OK or Deer
Park, TX
Lamons
Steel Bolting Material B-46
Lonestar
Steel Extension Stopper Fittings Mueller C-16.1, C-16.5
Advance B-10, B-10.1, B-11, B-11.1,
Agile-Lyall B-12, B-12.1, B-12.2, B-12.3,
Steel Fittings Threaded,
Bonney Forge B-12.4, B-13, B-13.1, B-13.2,
including Pipe Nipples
Ward B-13.3, B-13.4, B-14, B-14.1,
Westbrook Manufacturing B-14.2, B-15, B-15.1
Steel Flanges Weldneck and Boltex
B-43
Slip-on Galperti
American ACIPCO (Birmingham, AL)
California Steel Industries (CSI) (Fontana, CA)
Lakeside Steel (Stelpipe), (Welland, Ontario)
Steel HFW (ERW) Pipe Stupp Corp. (Baton Rouge, LA) A-15
Tex-Tube (Houston, TX)
U.S. Steel (McKeesport, PA)
Wheatland Tube (Warren, OH)
Custom Alloy (Highbridge, NJ)
Steel High Yield and Standard Dynamic Products Inc. (Houston, TX)
B-20, B-20.2
Grade Fittings Hackney (Ladish, Russellville, AR & Enid, OK)
Tube Forgings of America (Portland, OR)
Steel One Piece Line Stopper
Mueller, TDW C-16.3, C-16.4, C-64.1
Fittings
Steel Save-A-Valves Mueller C-14

Page 2 of 6 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2015 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date:01-07-15 Effective Date: 01-07-15 Rev. 03

Table 1 PG&E Approved Manufacturers (continued)

Material Approved Manufacturer, Plant Document Reference
Steel SAWH Pipe Berg Steel Pipe Corp. (Mobile, AL) A-15
Berg Steel Pipe Corp. (Panama City, FL)
Steel SAWL Pipe Dura-Bond (Bethlehem Steel) (Steelton, PA) A-15
Nippon Steel (Kimitsu Works, Japan)
IPSCO (Koppel Steel) (Ambridge, PA)
Lakeside Steel (Welland, Ontario)
Tenaris (Dalmine) (Bergamo, Italy)
Tenaris (Siderca) (Campana, Argentina)
Steel Seamless Pipe Tenaris (Tamsa) (Veracruz, Mexico ) A-15
U.S. Steel (Fairfield, AL)
U.S. Steel (Lorain, OH)
Vallourec Star, LP (Youngstown, OH)
Voest-Alpine (Kindberg, Austria)
Continental C-10, C-10.1, C-11, C-13,
Steel Service Tees
Mueller B-91
Steel Sleeves & Dynamic Products (Houston, TX)
A-50, A-52
Re-Inforcing Pads Ryco Steel (Benicia, CA)
Steel Two Piece Line Stopper
Mueller C-15.2, C-15.3, C-15.4
Fittings
Steel Two Piece Line Stopper
Mueller C-16.2
Fittings with Bottom Connection
Steel Two Piece Line Stopper
Fittings with Bottom TDW C-63
or Side Connection
Steel Two Piece Stopple Style Blackhawk
NA
Line Stopper Fitting TDW
Steel Unions Insulated Central Plastics
O-23
Threaded George Fisher

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2015 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 6
 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date:01-07-15 Effective Date: 01-07-15 Rev. 03

Target Audience
Engineering, construction inspection, and incoming supplier inspection personnel

Definitions
NA

Acronyms and Abbreviations

PE Polyethylene
Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment
Subpart B−Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CFR 192
References
Code Numbers for Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Branch Connection Reinforcing Pad for Steel Gas Mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Hot Tap Branch Connection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
Prefabricated Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Polyethylene Pipe Specifications and Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Plastic Excess Flow Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93.3
Standard Pipe Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Standard Pipe Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10.1
Standard Threaded Pipe Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Threaded Reducers (Bell Reducers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11.1
Standard 90 Degree Threaded Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Standard Reducing 90 Degree Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12.1
Standard 90 Degree Threaded Street Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12.2
45° Threaded Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12.3
Reducing Street Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12.4
Standard Threaded Pipe Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Extra Heavy Pipe Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13.1
Threaded One End Pipe Nipples (TOE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13.2
Concentric Reducing Nipple (Swage Nipple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13.3
Branch Nipple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13.4
Standard Threaded Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Standard Threaded Street Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14.1
Reducing Threaded Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14.2
Standard Threaded Unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Threaded Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15.1
Steel Butt-Welding Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
High Yield Butt-Welding Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20.2
Weldneck and Slip-On Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
Full Face and Flat Ring Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
Glass-Epoxy Retainer Gaskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45.1
Bolting Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
Plastic System Socket and Butt Fusion Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
Plastic System Saddle Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.1
Polyethylene (PE) System Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.2
Electrofusion Fittings and Tapping Tees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90.3
Mechanical Transition Fittings for Plastic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91
Polyethylene (PE) System Mechanical Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91.1
Cast Iron to Polyethylene Transition Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91.5

Page 4 of 6 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2015 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date:01-07-15 Effective Date: 01-07-15 Rev. 03

References, continued
Mueller Service Tees Types H-17500 and H-17501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Mueller Flanged Tees Type H-17505 and H-17506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10.1
Mueller Valve, Tee-Type H-17656 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Service Tapping Tee with Coupon Retaining Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Mueller Save-A-Valve Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings H-17055, H-17056, H-17155, and H-17156 . . . . . . . . . C-15.2
Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fittings H-17255, H-17256, and H-17257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15.3
Mueller 6” and 8” Thin Wall Welding Line Stopper Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15.4
Mueller Extension Stopper Fitting for Lateral Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16.1
Mueller Welding Line Stopper Fitting With Bottom Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16.2
Mueller H-17190 Welding Line Stopper Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16.3
Mueller H-17191 Mechanical Joint Line Stopper Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16.4
Mueller Extension Stopper Fitting for Lateral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16.5
T. D. Williamson M-Stopp Fitting (Mueller Compatible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-63
TDW Shortstopp II: 6”-12” Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-64.1
Standard Ball Valve List: 1/4” Through 2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-20
Standard Ball Valve List: Carbon Steel 2” Through 24” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21
Material Specification for Carbon Steel Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21.1
Material Specification for Pressure/Flow Controlling Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-21.2
Meter Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-80
Plastic System Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-90
Meter Swivels and Swivel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-50
Gas Meter Manifolds (1-1/4” and 2” Sizes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-52.1
Insulated Threaded Unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-23
Insulating Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-25
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene Plastic Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 2502
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene Plastic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 2503
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Heat Fusion Fittings for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Gas Piping and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 4758
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Non-Corrodible Mechanical Fittings
for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Gas Piping and Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 4761
Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Pre-Fabricated Metal-Cased
Pastic 3/4” x 5/8” O.D. (1/2” CTS SDR 7) and 3/4” x 1-1/8” O.D.
(1” CTS SDR 11.5) Gas Service Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 6421
Specifications for Furnishings and Delivery of Pre-Fabricated Metal-Cased
Plastic 1-1/4” x 1-1/8” O.D. (1” CTS SDR 11.5) and 1-1/4” x 1.660” O.D.
(1-1/4” IPS SDR 10) Gas Service Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 7030
Appendices
NA

Attachments
NA

Prepared by: AAJ7 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2015 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 6
 PG&E Approved Gas Materials Manufacturers N-01

Publication Date:01-07-15 Effective Date: 01-07-15 Rev. 03

Revision Notes
Revision 03 has the following changes:
1. In Table 1, alphabetized all columns.
2. In Table 1, added the manufacturer, Garlock, to the list of Full Face and Flat Ring Gaskets and Document
Reference GDS B-45.1.
3. In Table 1, relabeled “High Yield Fittings” to “Steel High Yield and Standard Grade Fittings.”
4. In Table 1, added the manufacturer Vallourec Star, LP (Youngstown, OH) to list of Seamless Pipe Manufacturers.
5. In Table 1, added row for Insulating Joint manufacturers.
6. In Table 1, miscellaneous formatting and minor editing were done for clarity.
7. In Table 1, added “Steel Service Tees, Steel Sav-A-Valves, and Line Stopper Manufacturers and References.”
8. In Table 1, added Dynamic as a manufacturer for “Steel Seams and Reinforced Pads.”
9. This GDS is part of Change 67.
Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution
Function: Design
GDS Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

Page 6 of 6 PG&E Internal Information, SL2 ©2015 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All Rights Reserved. Prepared by: AAJ7
 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

CORROSION RESISTANT GROUND RODS AND GROUND ROD 013109

CLAMPS

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Dan Mulkey (DHM3) Date: 06-29-12

Rev. #06: This document replaces PG&E Document 013109, Rev. #05. For a description of the changes, see Page 3.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)

Purpose and Scope

This document describes corrosion resistant ground rods and ground rod clamps.

References Location Document

Methods of Grounding Steel Transmission Poles
and Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 012566
Method of Grounding Fences and Wire Trellises . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020607
Installation of Grounds on Wood Pole Transmission
and Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 021904
Ground Resistance and Resistivity Measurements . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053241

Conventional Ground Rods

Notes
1. Ground rods shall meet the requirements of ANSI Spec. C33.8 (UL 467).
2. Welded-type connections may be used when welding equipment is available on the job.

Dia.
Table 1 Conventional Ground Rods

Dimensions Minimum
Copper Copper Jacket Catalog
Thickness Code Application Mfr.1
Covering Number
Dia. Length (inches)

Steel Nehring NCC 588

Core Normal Grounds for Galvan 6258
Length 5/8” 8’0” 0.010 187013 Pad-Mount and Pole
Grounds Calpico CP588
Eritech 615880
For Substation Grounds or Eritech 613412
Ground Rods Larger Than Galvan 7512
3/4” 12’0” 0.010 010098
8’ 0” and All Subsurface
Primary Enclosures Nehring NCC 3410
1 Ground rods are to be furnished with the length and manufacturer’s identification
Figure 1
Ground Rod permanently marked on each rod.

Rev. #06: 06-29-12 013109 Page 1 of 3

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps

Ground Rod Clamps

Ground Wire

ÇÇÇ Ground Rod Clamp

ÇÇÇ
Setscrew Should Tighten
Against the Ground Rod and
Not Against the Ground Wire

Install the Ground Wire

in the Clamp on the
Side Opposite Setscrew
Figure 2 Figure 3
Standard Clamp Clamp for Large Wire Ground Rod
Detail A
Installation of Ground Rod

Table 2 Utility-Grade Ground Rod Clamps 1

Ground Rod Catalog
Refer to Ground Wire Size − Copper Code Manufacturer
Diameter Number
Hubbell/Anderson GC103-01
Dossert GN-62
Figure 2 5/8” 6 to 1/0 187012 Eritech HDC58H
Eritech SP58
Galvan JAB58HH
2/0 to 4/0 With 5/8” Diameter Hubbell/Anderson GC103-02
5/8”
Rod
or 187017 Dossert GN-75
and
Figure 2 3/4” Galvan JAB34HH
6 to 1/0 With 3/4” Diameter Rod
Hubbell/Anderson GC103-03
3/4” 4/0 and 250 kcmil 187024
Dossert GNS-75
Hubbell/Anderson GC-111-3D
Figure 3 5/8” or 3/4” 300 to 500 kcmil 187020 Burndy GAR6434
Royal 2022(DQ)
1 The setscrew and clamp are to withstand approximately 35-40 foot-lbs. of torque on the setscrew head without
cracking or breaking.

013109 Page 2 of 3 Rev. #06: 06-29-12

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps

Sectional Ground Rods

Notes
1. Remove the driving head and upper coupling from the ground rod to permit installing a ground rod clamp,
(see Table 2 on Page 2), when the ground rod has been driven to its final depth.
2. After driving a second sectional rod, check the rod with a wrench to ensure that the bottom of the second rod
is contacting the top of first rod in the threaded coupling. Repeat this check on each additional rod used.

Table 3 Sectional-Type Ground Rods

Dimensions Catalog
Code Application Manufacturer
Dia. Length Number
Driving For Deep-Driven
See 10' 0” Calpico S5810T
Head Ground Rods
Detail D
5/8” 10’0” 187021 (see Document Eritech 635800
Threaded See 053241) Galvan 6260S
Coupling Detail C
See Note 1 Detail B
Sectional
See Ground Rod
Detail B Table 4 Threaded Bronze Coupling for 5/8” Diameter
Sectional-Type Ground Rods
10' 0” Threaded Catalog
Code Application Mfr.
Coupling Size Number
5/8” Dia. Calpico C158
For Connecting
5/8” 187022 Ground Rods Eritech CR-58
Detail C
(see Table 3) Galvan 60−C
Threaded Threaded Bronze
Coupling Coupling

See
Detail C
10' 0”

Table 5 Driving Head for 5/8” Diameter Sectional-Type

Ground Rods
Driving Head Catalog
Code Application Mfr.
Size Number
Figure 4
Typical Assembly Detail D Calpico D358
Driving Head For Driving Ground
5/8” 187023 Eritech DS58
Rods (see Table 3)
Galvan 60−DS

Revision Notes
Revision 06 has the following changes:
1. Updated Table 2 on Page 2.

Rev. #06: 06-29-12 013109 Page 3 of 3

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

CONNECTORS FOR INSULATED CABLES 015251

UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #06: This document replaces PG&E Document 015251, Rev. #05. For a description of the changes, see Page 39.

Purpose and Scope

This document provides application and ordering information for cable connectors and terminals for use in
underground distribution systems.

General:
This document applies to connectors for copper-to-copper, copper-to-aluminum, and aluminum-to-aluminum
conductors. The use of aluminum conductors and the necessity of splicing aluminum-to-copper presents some
specific problems as follows.
1. All connectors shall meet the requirements of ANSI C119 Class A.
2. Oxide Film
Unlike copper, aluminum is normally covered with a thin, hard film of invisible aluminum oxide. This film is a good
insulator and forms immediately whenever aluminum is exposed to air. Therefore, aluminum connectors must
meet the following requirements.
A. Connectors should exert sufficient pressure on the cable to break through the oxide film.
B. Connectors should exert approximately equal pressures on all strands.
3. Thermal Expansion and Plastic Flow
The difference in the thermal expansion of copper and aluminum must be addressed. Aluminum expands and
contracts approximately 38% more than copper with the same temperature change. Copper connectors and
copper cables expand together as do aluminum connectors and aluminum cables.
If copper connectors are used on aluminum cables, the aluminum cable expands more than the copper connector.
As the temperature rises this causes the aluminum to extrude out of the connector. When the joint cools, the
copper connector cannot shrink to fit the reduced diameter of the aluminum conductor. This cycle, repeated over
time, results in loose connections and high resistance joints. Therefore, it is important to use connectors that have
the same coefficient of expansion as the cable. For example, copper connectors with copper cable and aluminum
connectors with aluminum cable.
Aluminum-to-copper connections must be made with special aluminum connectors designed to run cooler than the
copper comductor and compensates for the difference in the coefficient of expansion. These connectors have a
larger mass than standard aluminum connectors.
4. Corrosion
A. Electrolysis: The third characteristic of aluminum that affects connectors is not peculiar to aluminum alone but
is common to all metals. Aluminum in contact with another metal in the presence of moisture will have an
electrolysis action.
This problem exists in the connection of aluminum-to-copper, and the electrolysis action causes corrosion of
the anode material (aluminum), leaving the cathodic material (copper) undamaged.
B. Chemical: Moisture in the absence of air reacts with aluminum forming aluminum hydroxide, which, in a very
short time, will seriously corrode the aluminum material.
It is of extreme importance that aluminum conductors and connectors installed underground be free of
moisture. Special care must be used to prevent moisture from entering into underground splices by using an
inhibitor, and carefully and correctly taping or sealing splices.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 1 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
5. General Rules for Battery Presses.
A. A 6-ton in-line or pistol grip battery-powered press is equivalent to the older mechanical hand tools used for
pressing connectors - for example, the Burndy MD6-8 tool.
B. A 6-ton tool uses the same dies and the same number of compressions that the mechanical hand tool does.
C. If the connector is stamped with a die designation of HYD, it means a 12-ton tool is necessary with a U die. In
the past only 12-ton presses were hydraulic. Examples:
S A Kearney 303 connector shows “HYD O DIE”. This means a 12-ton tool with a U-O die
(with 1 compression) is required. An O die in a 6-ton tool is not sufficient.
S A Kearney 308 connector shows “HYD D OR D3 DIE”. This means a 12-ton tool with a U-D or
U-D3 die (with 1 compression) is required.
D. If the connector is stamped with a die designation of HAND or MEC, it means a 6-ton tool can be used with a
W die. Example:
S A Kearney 302 connector shows “HYD B – MEC K”. This means a 6-ton tool with a W-KK die
(with 3 compressions) can be used or a 12-ton tool with a U-B die (with 1 compression) can be
used. The 6-ton tool is much lighter than the 12-ton tool and is preferred for ergonomics.
6. For information on multi-tap splices for 600V insulated cable refer to Document 036640
7. All information for field drilling connectors has been removed in this revision (16). Use range taking connectors
(shearbolt) when dealing with non-standard cable sizes.
8. Ground terminal connector has been replaced with a more robust design. See Table 10 on page 14.

Application

1. There are four general types of connectors: solder sweated, bolted, compression, and shear-bolt. The
advantages, disadvantages, and normal application of these four types of connectors are described in Table 1.
2. Compression tap connectors, Pages 15 through 18, are the preferred connectors for residential and light
commercial installations.
Table 1 UG Connector Comparison
Connector Type Application Advantages Disadvantages
S Inexpensive S Special Tool Required
Solder Sweated
For Copper-to-Copper Straight S Excellent Electrical S Must Be Sweated on
Split Tinned
Connections (Page 13) Connection (increasing time and labor)
Copper 1
S Limited to Copper Cables
S Fast and Easy Install
Terminals and Tap Connections S Wide Range of Sizes
Rated Less Than 600 V
Bolted S No Special Tools S More Difficult to Seal
(Pages 14, 28, 30,
32, and 36 - 37) Required
S Low Cost
Straight and Tap Connections for S Preferred Electrical
Compression Copper and Aluminum Cables Connection
S Requires Specific Tools and Dies
(preferred) (Pages 8 - 12, 17 - 27,
S Ease of Installation
33 - 35, and 38)
S Range Taking
S Excellent Electrical
Straight and Y & H Connection
Shearbolt S More Expensive
Cold-Shrink Splices S Ease of Installation
S No Special Tool
Required
1. Use only with paper-insulated lead-covered (PILC) Cable.

015251 Page 2 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
References Location Document
Joints for 15 kV Three-Conductor Paper-Insulated
Lead-Covered Cable for Use on 12 kV Circuits . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022709
Method of Terminating 15 kV Paper Insulated
Lead-Covered Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022820
Splice for Leaded to Non-Leaded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022824
Splice for 5 kV and 15 kV Type RO&N Cable
Single Conductor Shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022827
Method of Terminating 5 kV Single Conductor
Non-Leaded Rubber-Type Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022828A
Method of Terminating 15 kV and 22 kV Single
Conductor XLPE-PVC and EPR-PVC Cables
(compound filled pothead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022829A
Street Light Cable Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022830
Method of Terminating Single Conductor Non-Leaded
Varnished Cambric Insulated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022831A
Splice for Varnished Cambric Insulated Cable
With Flameproof Jacket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022832
Installation of Cable Risers on Wood Poles . . . . . . . . . OH: Risers/UG-1 Terminations . . . . . . . . . 027742
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028114
Distribution Transformer Requirements for
Vault Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRO: UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 030362B
Installation of Single-Phase 12 kV Pad-Mounted
Transformer Underground Residential Areas . . . . . . FRO: UG-1 Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032768A
Joints for 15 kV & 25 kV Single Conductor Paper
Insulated Lead-Covered Cable for Use on
12 kV & 22 kV Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033585
10 Arrangement 12 kV Switch and Bus Cells . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033701
Distribution Transformer Requirements,
Single-Phase and Three-Phase, Overhead-Type . . OH: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 034963
Installation of Single-Phase 7,200 V Pad-Mounted
Transformer Underground Residential Areas . . . . . . FRO: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 034978A
Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313
Installation of Subsurface, Load-Break, and
Dead-Break Primary Junction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035380
Multi-Tap Splice for 600-Volt Insulated Cables . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036640
Installation of 200-Amp, Subsurface Sectionalizing
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039954
Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955
Compression-Type Connectors for Overhead
Distribution and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041010
Splices for 15 kV and 22 kV XLP-PVC and EPR-PVC
Cable Single-Conductor Shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041583
Termination for 15 and 22 kV XLP-PVC, EPR-PVC,
and XLP-CONC-PVC Cables Single Conductor
Shielded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041584
Installation of Live-Front, Low-Profile, Single-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042762
Installation of Low Profile Single-Phase 6.9 kV
Pad Mounted Transformer Underground
Residential Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042765
Installation of Three-Phase, Radial-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043817
Splices for 15 kV and 22 kV Concentric-Type Cable
(PE-CONC, XLP-CONC and XLP-CONC−PVC) . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043901

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 3 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
References (continued) Location Document
Method of Terminating 15 KV and 22KV I/O & Smaller
Concentric Type Cable − XLP-CONC−PVC
& XLP-CONC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043902
Installation of Loop-Style, Three-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291
Installation of Three-Phase, 600-Amp, Subsurface
Sectionalizing Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050859
Straight and Tap Splice for 600 Volt Insulated Cable . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051034
600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051071
Premolded 600-Amp Splices for Primary
Underground Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053732
Pad-Mounted Transformers Installed Indoors . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook/EMWP . 057521
Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex,
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installations . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064308
Cold Shrink 600-Amp Splices for Primary
Underground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066204
Fired Wedge Connectors for Primary and Secondary
Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066194
24 kV 1/0 Cable Joint for Use on 22 kV Circuits,
PILC Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306644
Straight Cold Shrinkt 15 KV Transition Splices . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072152
Cold-Shrinkable Trifurcating 600-Amp 15KV
Transition Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076245
Cold-Shrinkable Straight 600-Amp 15 KV
Transition Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076246
Medium Voltage Y and H Splices for
Manhole Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076261
Grounding of Tape Shield and Flat Strap
Neutral Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076264

015251 Page 4 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Table 2 Connectors − Pictorial Index
Application
Connector Type Page
Cable Document 1

8 to 9 Copper-to-Aluminum 022824
022827
022830
041583
043901
10 & 15 Aluminum-to-Aluminum 051034

Compression
022709
022824
Straight Connectors 022827
022830
11 to 13 Copper-to-Copper 022832
033585
041583
043901
051034
066204
Bi-Metal Copper or 072152
Shearbolt 2
Aluminum 076245
076246
022709
022824
022827
022830
Split Connectors Solder 13 Copper-to-Copper 022832
033585
041583
043901
051034
Copper-to-Copper
Bolted 14 (San Francisco and Oakland
Network only)
Aluminum-to-Aluminum or
Tap Connectors 15 to 20 Aluminum-to-Copper 051034
(for secondary conductors)

Copper-to-Copper
19 to 21
(for secondary conductors)
Compression
032768A
034978A
Aluminum-to-Copper
042762
Terminal Connectors 22 to 27 (for transformer spade
042765
terminals)
043817
045291
1 For a description of the application document, see “References” on Page 3.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 5 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Table 2 Connectors − Pictorial Index (continued)

Application

ÊÊ
Connector Type Page
Cable Document 1
Compression 4 051071
Bi-Metal Copper or
Terminal
Shearbolt 4 Aluminum 076261

Copper 028114
Terminal Connectors Bolted 28 to 31 (for transformer spade 030362B
terminals, non-preferred) 033701

028114
Copper
Terminal Connectors Bolted 32 030362B
(transformer terminals)
033701
Copper 035313
(equipment tank grounds 035380
Ground Terminal Bolted 14
and primary concrete 039954
enclosures) 050859
022828A
32 Copper-to-Copper 022829A
022831A
Bolted
042762
Tap Connectors 32 Copper-to-Aluminum
042765

Aluminum-to-Aluminum
041583
Compression 33 Copper-to-Aluminum
043901
Copper-to-Copper

Slip-Fit Connectors Bolted 36 Aluminum or Copper 064308

Multiple Transformer 043817

Bolted 37 Aluminum or Copper
Terminal 045291

027742
Pin Terminals Compression 38 − 39 Aluminum or Copper 041584
043902
7 Copper Cables
Tool and Die Information Compression −
8 Aluminum Cables
1 For a description of the application document, see “References” on Page 3.

015251 Page 6 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Applications of Straight Connectors Compression-Type (copper-to-aluminum)
Notes
1. Circular dies should be used on all primary and secondary splices. In these small sizes, the indent-type dies
seriously distort the connector.
2. Tool index numbers may be applied to in-line cable-to-cable limiters.
3. For the correct number of crimps, see the appropriate numbered document or the manufacturer’s instructions
on the package. When the information is not available, make as many non-overlapping crimps as possible
without going over the outer end.
4. Pages 8 through 14 and 17 through 22 show compression-type connectors used to connect copper conductors to
aluminum conductors. These connectors may also be used to connect aluminum-to-aluminum conductors.
5. Table 3 on Page 8 and Table 4 on Page 9 show compression splice connectors which accommodate
specific conductor sizes.
6. Use a clean wire brush to remove oxides from the conductors prior to installing the connectors.
7. After the connector has been pressed on, insulating and sealing of pressed connections is accomplished in
the same manner as shown in Document 051034. Special attention must be given to the following:
A. Both ends of the aluminum connector should contain oxide inhibitor. Connectors shown in Table 3 on Page 8
and Table 4 on Page 9 are prefilled with inhibitor. See Document 028852 for approved oxide inhibitors.
B. After the connector has been pressed on the cable, excess oxide inhibitor must be wiped from the
connector and conductor surface.
C. Use special care to ensure a moisture-proof splice.
8. Solder-type connectors must not be used on aluminum conductors. This type of connection is only allowed on
PILC cable.
9. If several insulated aluminum conductors are to be connected to one insulated copper conductor, each
aluminum conductor must first be spliced to a short length of copper conductor so that the multiple connection
can be made with all copper conductors. This multiple connection may be a tee tap (or several tee taps) as
shown in Document 051034.
10. Special care must be used to prevent moisture from entering through the copper strands when connecting a
bare stranded copper conductor to an insulated aluminum conductor (e.g., copper-to-aluminum neutral
connection). See Figure 1 below for these connections.

Pin Terminal Bare Stranded Conductor

Mastic Seal Connector

Insulated PVC Tape (as required)
Conductor

Figure 1
Connection Between Bare and Insulated Conductor

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 7 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (predrilled) Copper-to-Aluminum

L Crimps Made
Between Guide Lines
AA BB

OD

A B
(copper or (aluminum) Knurled Guide Lines
aluminum) Conductor A Conductor B
Figure 2 Figure 3
Overall Dimensions View After Connector Installation
(for Figure 2)

Table 3 Compression-Type Connectors − Predrilled

Conductor Size Connector Dimensions
Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers
− AWG or kcmil (inches) 6-Ton Tool Die # 5 Connector
A1 12-Ton Tool Die # Code
(Cu or B (Al) AA BB L 2 OD Burndy Richards Homac 15-Ton ToolDie #
Al)
4 2 305558 3
See Document 028852 W-BG
2 2 305559 3
1.03 1.03 2.75 0.65 U-BG
2 1 YR1CA2CCAG1 ALCR 8-7 SAC1R2 U-BG 4 305569
2 1/0 See Document 028852 305562 3
2 2/0 YR26A2CCAG1 ALCR 10-7 SAC2/0 R2 305571
2/0 2/0 YS26UG2 ALC 10 SAC2/0 305581
W249
1.56 1.56 4.00 0.91 YR27A26CAG1 ALCR SAC3/0 U249
2/0 3/0 305582
11-10 R2/0 U249 4
ALCR SAC4/0
2/0 4/0 YR28A26CAG1 305585
12-10 R2/0
1 Maximum copper conductor size.
2 These dimensions may vary slightly among the various suppliers.
3 These connectors are overhead-type insulated service sleeves. The insulation on these sleeves does not provide an
adequate seal for underground application. These sleeves must be insulated and sealed as shown in
Document 051034 as if they were bare.
4 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in a 15-Ton press.
5 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press
tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

015251 Page 8 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Straight Connectors Compression-Type (predrilled) Copper-to-Aluminum (continued)

Table 4 Compression-Type Connectors − Predrilled

Conductor
Size − AWG or Dimensions (inches) Manufacturer and Catalog Numbers
kcmil 6-Ton Tool-Die # 4 Connect-
12-Ton Tool Die # or
A1 15-Ton Tool Die # Code
B
(Cu or AA BB L 2 OD Burndy Richards Homac
(Al)
Al)
250 250 YS29UG1 ALC 13 SACB250 − 305586
250 300 1.86 1.86 4.62 1.12 YR30A29CAG1 ALCR 14-13 SAC300R250 U31ART 305602
250 350 YR31A29CA ALCR 15-13 SAC350R250 U31ART 3 305127
ALCR
250 400 YR32A29CAG1 SACL400R250 305604
16−13
500/600 500 YS34APGE ALC 18 SACL500 − 305108
2.55 2.55 6.19 1.62 UI39ART
500 600 YR36A34CA ALCR 20-18 SAC600R500 P39ART 305129
700,
500 YR39A34CA ALCR 25-18 SAC750R500 305107
750
500 800 YR40A34CAG1 ALCR 24-18 SACF800R500 − 305606
1,00 2.91 2.91 7.16 1.84 −
750 YR44AG3 ALCR 28-23 SAC1000R750 P44ART 305023
0
For Circuits Above 5 kV
4 2 YR2CA4CCATG1 OATCR7-5 SAC2R4 W-BG 305607
2 2 1.50 1.50 3.57 0.65 YS2CUTG1 OATC 7 SAC2 U-BG 305608
2 1/0 YR25A2CCATG3 OATCR9-7 SAC1/0R2 U-BG 3 305609
W249
2/0 4/0 2.08 2.08 4.82 0.91 YR28A26CATG2 OATC 12-10 SAC4/0R2/0 U249 305610
U249 3
−
250 350 2.61 2.96 6.66 1.12 YR31A29CAT OATC15-13 SAC350R250 U31ART 305143
U31ART 3
−
700,
500/600 3.75 4.19 9.41 1.62 YR39A34CAT OATC23-18 SAC750R500 U39ART 305403
750
P39ART
−
1,00
750 4.10 4.10 9.09 1.84 YR44ATG1 OATC28-13 SAC1000R750 − 305611
0
P44ART
1 Maximum copper conductor size.
2 These dimensions may vary slightly among the various suppliers.
3 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in a 15-Ton press tool.
4 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press
tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

Notes
1. Connectors shall be pre-filled with an approved oxide inhibitor.
2. All connectors shall have an oil stop.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 9 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (aluminum-to-aluminum)

Crimps Made Between

L Guide Lines
B B

OD
Knurled
Guide Lines
Figure 4
View After Installation
(for Figure 4)

Table 5 Dimensions and Ordering Information − Aluminum-to-Aluminum (Figure 4)

Conductor Dimensions
Manufacturer and Catalog Number 6-Ton Tool Die # 4
Size (inches)
Refer to 12-Ton Toot Die # Code
AWG or
L B OD Burndy Richards Homac 15-Ton Tool Die #
kcmil
2 2.75 1.18 0.65 W-BG 305559 1
See Document 028852 U-BG
1/0 2.75 1.18 0.65 U-BG 3 305563 1
W249
4/0 3.302 1.542 0.91 YS28AG9 ALC12 AC4/0 U249 305616
U249 3
−
Figure 5
350 6.97 3.38 1.12 YS31AY ALC15 AC350 U31ART 305148
On
U31ART 3
Page 11
−
−
700/750 8.28 4.00 1.62 YS39AY ALC23 AC750 305150
U39ART
P39ART
−
1,000 10.81 5.25 1.84 YS44AY ALC28 AC1000 − 305618
P44ART
1 These connectors are overhead-type insulated service sleeves (see Document 028852). The insulation on these
sleeves will not provide an adequate seal for underground application. These sleeves must be insulated and
sealed as shown in Document 051034 as if they were bare.
2 For Burndy & Richards, Dimension L = 2.34”, B = 1.09”.
3 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies with 15-Ton press.
4 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton
press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool

Notes
1. Connectors shall be pre-filled with an oxide inhibitor.
2. Connectors shown in Table 5 above are not suitable substitutes for the compression connectors supplied in the 3M
pre-molded splice kits. The connector ODs supplied in the splice kits are larger than normal to provide a heat sink
and facilitate sliding the pre-molded housing back and forth.
3. These connectors are aluminum unplated finished and must be used only with aluminum cables.

015251 Page 10 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Straight Connectors Compression-Type (copper-to-copper)

OD

Figure 5

Table 6 Straight Connectors − Compression-Type − Copper-to-Copper (Figure 4)

Dimensions
Manufacturer and Catalog Number 6-Ton Tool Die # 4
Conductor Size (inches)
12-Ton Tool Die # Code
AWG or kcmil Length
OD Burndy Richards Homac Dossert 15-Ton Toot Die #
(L)
W4CRT
4 2.38 0.34 YSP4CT OCC5 PC-4 DPCP 4 U4CRT 305164 1
U4CRT 3
W2CRT
22 2.62 0.42 YSP2CT OCC7 PC-2 DPCP 6 U2CRT 305165 1
UWCRT 3
2/0 2.21 0.56 YS26T CC10 TC-2/0 DPC 13-T W26RT 305283
U26RT
2/0 3.13 0.56 YSP26T OCC10 PC-2/0 DPCP 13 U26RT 3 305167 1
W28RT
4/0 2.39 0.69 YS28T CC12 C-4/0 DPC 21-T U28RT 305285
U28RT 3
250 3.38 0.75 YSP29T OCC13 PC-250 DPCP 25 − 305429 1
U29RT
250 3.38 0.75 YS29 CC13 C-250 DPC 25 U29RT 3 305202
500 4.62 1.06 YSP34T OCC18 PC-500 DPCP 50 − 305428 1
U34RT
500 4.63 1.06 YS34 CC18 C-500 DPC 50 U34RT 3 305203
−
750 4.23 1.3 Y39T CC23 TC-750 DPC 75-T U39RT 305488
U39RT 3
−
1,000 6.13 1.50 YS44 CC28 C-1000 DPC 100 − 305480
P44RT
−
1,500 6.5 1.84 YS46 CC30 C-1500 DPC 150 − 305511
P46RT
1 These connectors have oil stops. These are more costly connectors and should only be used for splicing P&L
cable to rubber or polyethylene insulated cables.
2 For #2 Solid, use Burndy 162 die index. Refer to Table 20 on Page 19 for Die ordering information.
3 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies with 15-Ton press.
4 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton
press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 11 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Straight Connectors Compression-Type (copper-to-copper)(continued)

Notes
1. For material and finish information refer to “Specifications for Straight Compression Type Connectors for
Insulated Copper Conductors”.
2. Connectors shown in Figure 5 on Page 11 are to be used to connect cables of up to 35 kV rating or lower, and
can be used on bare cables where such cables will not be subjected to tension.
3. An indentor type compression die (clacker) should not be used on #4 or #2 AWG size connectors because
itexcessively distorts the connector.
4. Round the sector cable with rounder tool.

015251 Page 12 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Straight Connectors Solder-Type (copper-to-copper)
E D
12° " 1°
A B

Radius = 50 mils or
Wall Thickness, C
Figure 6
Whichever Is Less
Table 7 Straight Connectors − Split Tinned-Type − Copper-to-Copper, All Voltages (Figure 6)
Cable Size Nominal Dimensions − Inches Burndy
AWG or Kcmil Standard
A B C D E Part Richards Code
(round or compact Package
ID OD (wall thickness) (slot width) (length) Number
sector)
8 5/32 3/16 1/32 1/32 1-1/2 200 SS8C8C RSS2 305041
6 3/16 1/4 1/32 1/32 1-1/2 200 SS6C6C RSS3 305042
4 7/32 5/16 1/32 1/32 2 100 SS4C4C RSS5 305043
2 9/32 3/8 1/32 1/32 2 100 SS2C2C RSS7 305044
1/0 3/8 1/2 1/16 1/16 2 100 SS2525 RSS9 305045
2/0 13/32 9/16 1/16 1/16 2 100 SS2626 RSS10 305046
3/0 15/32 5/8 1/16 1/16 2 100 SS2727 RSS11 305059
4/0 17/32 23/32 1/16 1/16 2-1/2 50 SS2828 RSS12 305047
250 9/16 25/32 3/32 1/8 2-1/2 50 SS2929 RSS13 305048
350 11/16 29/32 3/32 1/8 2-1/2 20 SS3131 RSS15 305324
400 23/32 31/32 1/8 1/8 3 10 SS3232 RSS16 305049
500 13/16 1-3/32 1/8 1/8 3 10 SS3434 RSS18 305050
600 29/32 1-3/16 1/8 5/32 3-1/2 10 SS3636 RSS20 305051
750 1-1/32 1-11/32 5/32 5/32 3-1/2 10 SS3939 RSS23 305052
1,000 1-5/32 1-9/16 3/16 7/32 4-1/2 1 SS4444 RSS28 305053
1,500 1-7/16 1-29/32 7/32 9/32 5 1 SS4646 RSS30 305054
2,000 1-21/32 2-7/32 1/4 9/32 6 1 SS4848 RSS32 305055
Notes
1. For material and finish refer to “Edison Electric Institute Specification TD 160 “Specifications for Solder-Sweated
Split Tinned Copper Connectors”.
2. When splicing cables of different sizes, cut a sector from one half of the connector.
3. When tinning and sweating the connector onto the conductors:
A. Protect the insulation.
B. Wipe smooth, removing all sharp solder points.
4. Round the sector cable with a rounder tool.
Application
These connectors must be used only to tap splices 5,000 V and above on copper cable in sizes larger than #2
AWG.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 13 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Bolted Connectors for Underground Network Systems

A. These copper alloy connectors are for making copper-to-copper current carrying connections on underground
network secondary systems in San Francisco and Oakland.

Table 8 Split Bolt Connectors For Copper-to-Copper Connections (Figure 7)

Conductor Size Torque
Nut Manufacturer and Catalog Number
D AWG or kcmil Inch-lbs. Code
Size D
Solid Stranded (ft./ lbs) Blackburn Burndy Penn-Union Homac
10 10 7/16” 80 (7) 305026 9H KS90 S-10-S −
8 8 1/2” 80 (7) 305027 8H KS15 S-8-S E-8
6 8 11/16” − 305028 6H KS17 S-6-PGE E-6
4 6 3/4” − 305029 4H KS20 S-4-PGE E-4
2 4 7/8” − 305030 2H KS22 S-3-PGE E-2
1 2 7/8” − 305031 1H KS23 S-2-S −
2/0 1/0 1” − 305032 10H KS25 S-1/0-S E-1/0
Figure 7
3/0 2/0 1-1/18” 385 (32) 305033 20H KS26 S-2/0-S E-2/0
4/0 3/0, 4/0, 250 1-5/16” 650 (54) 305034 40H KS29 S-250-PGE E-250

Table 9 Two Bolt Connectors for Copper-to-Copper Connections (Figure 8)

Conductor Size
Manufacturer and Catalog Number
AWG or kcmil
Code
Min.
Main Run Anderson Blackburn Burndy Penn-Union Dossert Homac
Tap
4/0 6 305431 K-3 2B40 KVS28 VT-2 DSU21 −
250 to 350 1/0 305432 K-4 2B350 KVS31 VT-3 DSU35 TBC 350
400 to 500 2/0 305433 K-5 2B500 KVS34 VT-4 DSU50 TBC 500
600 to 750 4/0 305434 K-6 2B800 KVS40 VT-5 DSU80 TBC 800
800 to 1,000 4/0 305435 K-7 2B1000 KVS44 VT-6 DSU100 TBC 1,800
Figure 8
Notes
1. Connectors shown in Table 8 and Table 9 are for use on unshielded insulated cables rated 600 V or lower.
2. Connectors shown in Table 8 may also be used to connect unshielded streetlighting cable.
3. If necessary, double back on small size tap wires to obtain a tight fit.
4. The connectors described on this page can be used on bare cables where such cables will not be
subjected to tension.
5. These connectors shall not be used in overhead applications.

Ground Terminal
1/2”-13NC Thread 1/2”-13NC Thread
Table 10 Ground Terminal (Figure 9)
Conductor Size Manufacturer and Catalog Number
Code
AWG Hubbell H−J
#4 Str. − 2/0 GC-208 AS1372-002 M301546

Hubbell H−J
Figure 9

015251 Page 14 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Tap Connectors Compression-Type (#6 through 400 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum or
aluminum-to-copper)

Figure 10
H-Type Connector

Table 11 Tap Connectors − Compression-Type − Aluminum-to-Aluminum or Aluminum-to-Copper (Figure 10) 1

Tap

266.8 Str.

336.4 Str.
Conductor Size

1/0 Sol.

2/0 Str.

3/0 Str.
#6 Sol.

#4 Sol.

#2 Sol.

#1 Sol.
#4 Str.

#2 Str.

1/0 Str.

4/0 Str.

397.5
AWG or kcmil

250

350

400
#6 Sol.
#4 Sol. Code
−
#4 Str. 305507
#2 Sol. −
#1 Sol. −
#2 Str. Code −
1/0 Sol. 305509
1/0 Str.
Run Code
2/0 Str. Code 305519
3/0 Str. 305510
Code
Code Code 305831
4/0 Str.
305520 305830
250
−
266.8 Str.
Code Code
336.4 Str.
Code 305833 305834
350
305832
397.5
Code Code Code
Run 400
305832 305833 305834
1 For required number of compressions, Refer to Table 13 on Page 16.

Table 12 Aluminum Compression Connectors for Secondary Connections to Streetlight Conductors

Tap
Conductor Size (AWG)
#10 Sol. #8 Sol.
#2 Str.
1/0 Str. Code 305842
Run 2/0 Str.
3/0 Str.
Code 305843
4/0 Str.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 15 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression-Type (#6 through 400 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum or

aluminum-to-copper) (continued)

Note
The material for these connectors is aluminum alloy.
Application
These connectors are used for straight splice or tap, residential and light commercial.

Table 13 Aluminum H-Type Compression Connectors

Tools and Dies Data
6-Ton Tool 12-Ton Tool
Connector Code
1 Required # of Required # of
Die Die
Compressions Compressions
305507 4
W-O U-O 2
305509 51
305510
305519 51 2
305520 W-D U-D
305830
7 3
305831
305832
2
305833 − − U-N
305834 3
Connectors for Connection to Secondary Streetlight Conductors
305842 W-O 4 U-O 2
305843 W-D 4 − −
1 These connectors are the same tap connectors shown in Document 041010.

Note
1. Do not use the N Die with UT-15 tools
2. Use U-die adapter with U-dies when a 15-ton press tool is utilized.

015251 Page 16 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Tap Connectors Compression-Type for Secondary Conductors
(2/0 through 1000 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum or aluminum-to-copper)
Table 14 Tap Connectors − Compression-Type for Secondary Conductors
Conductor Tap
Size AWG or
kcmil 2/0 3/0 4/0 250 268.8 300 397.5 500 600 636 700 715.5 750 900 1000
397.5 See Table 11 Page 15
Code
500 −
Code 305521 305522
600
636
700
Run
715.5 Code 305524 Code 305526 Code 305537
750
900
Code
1,000 Code 305804 Code 305875 Code 305976
305538

4 1 2 3 1
4 2 3

Marking on Connector for Compression Position of Z Die on

with R Die R Die Compression Markings
Figure 11
Order of Compression Sequence Figure 12
Installation Instructions for Z Die

Table 15 Ordering Data for Z Die for Use in UT-15 Hydraulic Tool
Die Designation Code Manufacturer and Catalog Number
Z 216248 Homac 15 CZ 1
1 T&B equivalent 15620.

Notes
1. The material of these connectors is aluminum alloy.
2. Two dies can be used for compressing the aluminum H-Type connectors listed in above Table 14. These are
the R and Z dies. Some manufacturers refer to both dies while others designate only the R die on their
connectors. Homac, the supplier of the UT-15 hydraulic head, has standardized on the Z die. Since this tool is
standard on the System, the Homac Z die catalog number 15 CZ, has been specified for use in the UT-15
head for compressing all connectors listed in above Table 14. The Z die is slightly wider than the R die and will
overlap the R die guide markings on the connectors.
3. When using the Z die on connectors which require three compressions, make the first compression in the
center. The Z die will overlap the crimp location markings on the connector since these markings are based on
the narrower R die. Then make a compression on each side of the center compression, keeping the die even
with the outside edge of the connector and overlapping the previously made center compression.
When using the Z die on connectors which require four compressions, make the first two compressions in the
center portion of the connector, overlapping the centerline of the connector on each compression as shown in
Figure 12. Then complete a compression on each end, overlapping the previously completed center compression
sufficiently to maintain the outer edge of the die flush with the end of the conductor.

Application

These connectors are used for straight splice or tap, residential and light commercial.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 17 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors Compression-Type for Secondary Conductors (copper-to-copper)

Table 16 YP-C-Tap (Figure-6 Type) (Figure 13) Copper

Connectors
Tap
Conductor Size

1/0 Sol.

2/0 Str.
3/0 Str.
#2 Sol.
#1 Sol.
#4 Str.

#2 Str.

4/0 Str.
#6 Sol.
#4 Sol.

1/0 Str.
AWG or kcmil

#6 Sol.
#4 Sol.
#4 Str.
Code 305844 −
Figure 13 #2 Sol.
Burndy YP-C-Tap Type #1 Sol.
Code
#2 Str.
Run 012086
1/0 Sol.
1/0 Str.
2/0 Str.
− Code 305845
3/0 Str.
4/0 Str.
250 −

Table 17 Die Information for YP-C (Figure-6 Type) Connectors ( Figure 13)
Manufacture and Required
Die 1, 2 Connector
Catalog Numbers Number of
Code
Brundy Dossert Die Compressions
YP2C2 DC6 U-O 305844 1
YP29C26 DC25−13 U-D3 305845 1
YP28C28 − U-D3 012086 1
1 These dies use a 12-ton press tool.
2 Refer to Table 24 on Page 21 for Die ordering information.

015251 Page 18 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Tap Connectors Compression Type for Secondary Conductors (copper-to-copper
(continued)
Table 18 Blackburn, Homac, Kearney and Penn-Union H-Tap
Copper Connectors (Figure 14)
Tap
Conductor Size

1/0 Sol.

2/0 Str.
3/0 Str.
#6 Sol.

#2 Sol.
#1 Sol.
#4 Str.

#2 Str.
#4 Sol.

1/0 Str.

4/0 Str.
AWG or kcmil

#6 Sol. Code
#4 Sol. 305243
−
#4 Str. Code
#2 Sol. 305244
#1 Sol.
Run #2 Str. Code Code
Figure 14 1/0 Sol. 305245 305246
Blackburn, Kearney,
Homac, Penn-Union 1/0 Str.
H-Tap Type 2/0 Str.
Code Code Code
3/0 Str. 1
− 3052147 305249 305846
4/0 Str.
1 Only the Kearney connector is currently approved for use with #6
solid using a U-D die

Table 19 Blackburn, Kearney, and Penn-Union Connectors

6-Ton Tool 12-Ton Tool
Connector Blackburn Kearney Part
Code Part No. No. Die Required Number Die Required Number
of Compressions of Compressions
305243 1 CF-44-1 301-82 W-KB 3 − −
305244 1 CF-22-1 302-82 W-KK 3 − −
305245 CF-102-1 304-82 − − U-O 1
305246 CF-1010-1 303-82 − − U-O 1
305247 1 CF-402-1 309-82 − − U-D 1
305249 CF-4010-1 308-82 − − U-D, D3 1
305846 CF-4040-1 307-82 − − U-D, D3 1
1 Do not use with W-BG die for the connectors under M305243 and M305244 codes.
2 Only the Kearney connector is currently approved for use with #6 solid using a U-D die.

Table 20 Ordering Data for 6-Ton Press Tool

Burndy Catalog Number Die Code 1 Burndy Catalog Number Die Code 2
W-KB 202240 − −
W-KK 202241 − −
W-161 1208088 U-161 2791549
W-162 1208089 U-162 2702336
W-163 1208100 U-163 2755406
1 These dies use 6-ton press tool.
2 These dies use 12-ton press tool.
3 These dies are only available for purchase in SRM. The codes shown on this table are the SRM part number.

Notes
The material for connectors are on Pages 20 and 21 is copper alloy

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 19 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Application
Connectors are on Pages 20 and 21 are used for straight splice or tap.

Connectors for Splicing and Tapping Concentric Wires

Table 21 For Splicing and Tapping of XLP-Conc-PVC Cable Concentric Neutrals 2

Primary Cable Size 2/0 Cu
#4 Cu
AWG or kcmil 1/0 Al 350 Al #2 Al #2 Cu 700 Al 500 Cu 1,000 Al
250 Cu
Document 039955 1 4/0 Al
Conc. Size 8 − #14 9 − #14 10 − #14 11 − #14 17 − #14 18 − #14 13 − #12 16 − #12
2/0 Cu
1/0 Al 8 − #14
4/0 Al Code Code
Code 305244
305245 305247
350 Al 9 − #14
#2 Al 10 − #14
#4 Cu Code 305246
11 − #14 Code 305245
250 Cu
#2 Cu 17 − #14
700 Al 18 − #14
500 Cu 13 − #12
1,000 Al 16 − #12 Code 305247
Code
#2 Str. Cu Code 305245 Code 305246
305249
−
Code
#2 Solid Cu Code 305244
305247
1 For extension or splicing out of concentric neutral wires, see Document 051071.or Document 066204.
2 This cable design is no longer approved for purchase.

Table 22 Connectors for Splicing and Tapping EPR Cable Concentric Neutrals 1
Primary Cable Size AWG or kcmil #2
Document 039955 2 1/0 1,100
(AL) 600
#2 Concentric Size 10-#14 12-#14
1/0
600 10−#14 Code 305244 Code 305255
1,100 12-#14 Code 305245
1 This cable design is our current standard.
2 For extension or splicing out of concentric neutral wires, see Document 051071 or Document 066204

Table 23 Connectors for Splicing and Tapping EPR-Cable Flat Strap Neutral 1
Primary Cable Size AWG or kcmil
350
Document 039955 2 #2 750
500
(Cu)
#2 305244
350 305246 −
−
500
700 − − 305247
1 This cable design is used in special application.
2 For extension or splicing out of concentric neutral wires, see Document 051071.or Document 076264.

015251 Page 20 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Connectors for Splicing and Tapping Concentric Wires (continued)

Table 24 Dies Ordering Data for 12-Ton Press Tool

Kearney Burndy
Die Die Code 1, 2
Catalog Number Catalog Number
U-O − U-O 216083
U-D − U-D 2811758
U-D3 − U-D3 216084
U−N − UN-C 216085
U−BKT 36832 U-KBKTT 216133
1 Code includes one complete set of dies consisting of two half-sections.
2 These dies are only available for purchase in SRM. The codes shown on this table are the SRM part number.

Table 25 Equivalent Conductor Size for Concentric Neutrals 1

Equivalent Size Concentric Size
8 − #14
#4
9 − #14
Approximate
10 − #14
11 − #14
#2
12 − #14
Approximate
17 − #14
18 − #14
1/0
13 − #12
Approximate
16 − #12
1 To connect these concentric conductors to conductors other than #2, use the
equivalent conductor size and select a connector from Table 21 − 25 on Page 20.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 21 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type

(aluminum cable for flat bar or transformer spade terminals)
L L
B B 3”
1-3/4”
C OD C OD 5/8”
0.62” 0.62”
1-3/4” 1/2” Bolt Size 1/2” Bolt Size
1-3/4” 3” 1-3/4”
3” (Min.) 3” (Min.)
Contact 3/4” Thick
T Surface T
Contact
Surface
Figure 17
Figure 16 4-Hole Pad
Figure 15
Straight Terminal Stacking Terminal

Table 26 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Aluminum Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 15 and Figure 16) 7
Cable Size Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Too Dies # 7
AWG or Refer to Approximate Dimensions (inches) Connector 12-Ton Tool Dies #
kcmil B C1 L1 T1 OD Code 15-Ton Tools Dies #
4 1.24 1.25 4.92 0.25 0.65 303829 W-BG
2 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303761 U-BG
1/0 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303760 U-BG
2/0 1.60 1.25 5.43 0.25 0.91 303830 W249
U249
4/0 1.60 1.25 5.75 0.30 0.91 303759 U249
250 Figure 15 1.96 1.25 5.88 0.25 1.12 303831 −
U31ART
350 1.91 1.62 6.84 0.38 1.12 303758 U31ART
500/600 2.62 1.62 6.78 0.38 1.62 303832 −
U39ART
700/750 2 2.65 1.62 8.22 0.62 1.62 303833 P39ART
1,000 2 2.97 1.62 8.88 0.62 1.84 303834 −
−
1,250 3 2.58 2.60 7.53 0.51 1.84 303835 P44ART
1,500 3 Figure 16/ 3.19 3.09 8.59 0.81 2.26 303836 L46ART 6
1,750 3 Figure 17 3.69 3.33 8.38 0.86 2.46 303837 L47ART 6
2,000 3 3.69 3.57 8.50 0.94 2.60 303838 L48ART 6
65 1.50 0.87 5.25 0.21 0.62 303732 −
25 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303731 W-BG
U-BG
1/0 5 1.10 0.91 5.62 0.25 0.65 303730 U-BG
Figure 16 4, 5
(stacking W249
4/0 5 terminals) 1.52 1.17 6.20 0.30 0.91 303729 U249
U249
−
250 1.90 1.62 6.6 0.38 1.0 301283 −
−

015251 Page 22 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Table 26 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Aluminum Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 16 and Figure 17)
(Continued)
Cable Size Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool Dies # 7
AWG or Refer to Approximate Dimensions (inches) Connector 12-Ton Tool Dies #
kcmil B C1 L1 T1 OD Code 15-Ton Tool Dies #
−
350 5 2.25 1.62 6.84 0.38 1.12 303728 U31ART
U31ART
Figure 16 4, 5 −
700/750 2, 5 (stacking 2.65 1.62 8.22 0.62 1.62 303839 U39ART
terminals) P39ART
−
1,000 2, 5 2.97 1.62 8.88 0.62 1.84 303840 −
P44ART
1 These dimensions may vary slightly among the various suppliers.
2 These connectors shall be designed to fit side by side on a standard NEMA spade terminal
(see Figure 24 on Page 29).
3 To order 4-hole terminals larger than 1,000 kcmil, select the Burndy or Homac terminal for the proper cable size
and substitute 4 for 2 in the catalog number. Example: YA45A-4NTN or Homac AL-750-4NTN. See Figure 17
on Page 22.
4 If it is necessary to stack copper conductors, use aluminum stacking connectors.
5 These connectors shall be capable of being stacked on any straight terminal of equal or larger size (up to and
including 1,000 kcmil).
6 These Die require a 60-ton press tool.
7 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton
press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 23 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type

(aluminum cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(continued)
Table 27 Terminal Connectors (aluminum cable-to-flat bar)(continued)
Approved for Purchase
Cable Size AWG or
Manufacturer and Catalog Number
kcmil Connector Code
Homac Burndy
4 SA4NTN YAR4U2NTN 303829
2 SA2NTN YAR2U2NTN 303761
1/0 AL1/0-NTN YAK25A-2GA 303760
2/0 SA2/0-NTN YAR2/0U2NTN 303830
4/0 AL4/0-NTN YA4/0A2NTN 303759
250 SAB4/0-NTN YA250A2NTN 303831
350 AL350-NTN YA350A2NTN 303758
500 SAL500-NTN YA500A2NTN 303832
700/750 1 AL750-NTN YA750A2NTN 303833
1,000 1 AL1000-NMS YA1000A2NTN 303834
1,250 2 AL1250-NTN YA1250A2NTN 303835
1,500 2 AL1500-NTN YA1500A2NTN 303836
1,750 2 AL1750-NTN YA1750A2NTN 303837
2,000 2 AL2000-NTN YA2000A2NTN 303838
Stacking Terminal
6 3, 4 ASL 6-NTN YARSO6U2NTN 303732
2 3, 4 ASL 386-N YARSO2U2NTN 303731
1/0 3, 4 ASL1/0-NTN YARSO1/0U2NTN 303730
4/0 3, 4 ASL4/0-NTN YASO4/0A2NTN 303729
250 ASL250-NTN YASO250A2NTN 301283
350 3, 4 ASL350-NTN YASO350A2NTN 303728
700/750 1, 3, 4 ASL750-NTN YASO750A2NTN 303839
1,000 1, 3, 4 ASL1000-SSNTN YASO1000A2NTN 303840
1 These connectors shall be designed to fit side by side on a standard NEMA spade terminal (see Page 27).
2 To order 4-hole terminals larger than 1,000 kcmil, select the Burndy or Homac terminal for the proper cable size
and substitute 4 for 2 in the catalog number. Example: YA45A-4NTN or Homac AL-750-4NTN.
3 If it is necessary to stack copper conductors, use aluminum stacking connectors.
4 These connectors shall be capable of being stacked on any straight terminal of equal or larger size (up to and
including 1,000 kcmil).
Notes
1. The material for these connectors, is tinned aluminum alloy, tubular.
2. Attach terminal connectors using Everdur bolts and washers shown on page 28. For ordering Everdur Bolts
refer to Table 29 on Page 28.
3. Partially filled with oxide inhibitor and sealed. For ordering Everdur bolts refer to Table 30 0n Page 28.
4. Connections of copper-to-copper, tinned aluminum-to-copper, and tinned aluminum-to-tinned aluminum
require no special precautions other than a clean surface. Any combination involving an untinned aluminum
surface requires the application of oxide inhibitor to the surface. Wire brush the surface through the compound
thoroughly. Brushing through this inhibitor prevents the oxide from reforming. If in doubt as to the materials or
tinning, applying inhibitor will do no harm

015251 Page 24 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Terminal Connectors Compression-Type
(copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)
L (approx.)

1-3/4” N

B
T (approx.)
D

Figure 18

Table 28 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Copper Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 18)
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool 1
Cable Manufacture and Dies #
Size Catalog Number 12-Ton Tool
Dimensions (inches)
AWG or Bolt Connector Dies #
kcmil Size Code 15-Ton Tool
Romac Burndy B C D L N T
Dies #
W4CRT 2
4 L4N YA4C-2N 1-1/8 13/16 3 4-1/2 5/8 1/8 1/2 303916 U4CRT 2
U4CRT 2
W2CRT
22 L2N YA2C-2N 1-1/4 13/16 3 4-23/32 5/8 1/8 1/2 303221 U2CRT
U2CRT
W1CRT
1 L1N YA1C-2N 1-3/8 13/16 3 4-7/8 5/8 1/8 1/2 303804 U1CRT
U1CRT
W26RT
1/0 L1/0N YA25-2N 1-3/8 13/16 3 4-29/32 5/8 1/8 1/2 303209 U26RT
U26RT
W27RT
2/0 L2/0N YA26-2N 1-1/2 13/16 3 4-29/32 5/8 1/8 1/2 303220 U27RT
U27RT
U28RT
3/0 L3/0N YA27-2N 1-1/2 29/32 3 4-15/16 5/8 1/8 1/2 303219 U28RT
U28RT
−
4/0 L4/0N YA28-2N 1-5/8 1 3 5-1/16 5/8 9/64 1/2 303917 U29RT
U29RT
−
250 L250−N YA29-2N 1-5/8 1-3/32 3 5-5/32 5/8 5/32 1/2 303092 U30RT
U30RT
−
300 L300-N YA30-2N 2 1-11/16 3 5-3/4 5/8 5/32 1/2 303451 U31RT
U31RT
−
350 L350-N YA31-2N 2 1-25/32 3 5-11/16 5/8 3/16 1/2 303452 U32RT
U32RT
−
500 L500-N YA34-2N 2-1/4 1-17/32 3 5-15/16 5/8 15/64 1/2 303093 U36RT
U36RT

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 25 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Compression-Type

(copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(preferred)

Table 28 Specifications for Terminal Connectors − Copper Cable-to-Flat Bar (Figure 18 on Page 25)
(Continued)

Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool

Cable Manufacture and Dies # 1
Size Catalog Number 12-Ton Tool
Dimensions (inches)
AWG or Bolt Connector Dies #
kcmil Size Code 15-Ton Tool
Romac Burndy B C D L N T
Dies #
−
600 3, 4 L600-N YA36-2N 2-11/16 1-1/2 3 6-5/8 5/8 17/64 1/2 303454 U37RT
U37RT
−
750 3, 4 L750-N YA39-2NN1 2-7/8 1-3/4 3 6-3/4 5/8 17/64 1/2 303296 −
P44RT
1,000 2 L1000N YA44-2NG10 3 1-3/4 3 6-15/16 5/8 21/64 1/2 303461 1000C
1 Within this column,the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton
press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool
2 For #2 Solid, use Burndy 162 die index. For Die ordering information refer to Table 20 on Page 19
3 Dimension C shall not exceed 1-3/4”.
4 To order 4-hole terminals, select the Homac or Burndy terminal for the proper cable size and substitute 4 for 2 in
the catalog number. For example: YA39-4NNT, for Burndy L750-4N for Homac
Notes
1. Attach using Everdur bolts and washers as shown on Table 30 on Page 28.
2. Connections of copper-to-copper, tinned aluminum-to-copper, and tinned aluminum-to-tinned aluminum pads
require no special precautions other than a clean surface. Any combination involving an untinned aluminum
surface requires the application of oxide inhibitor to the surface. Wire brush the surface through the compound
thoroughly. Brushing through this inhibitor prevents the oxide from reforming. If in doubt as to the materials or
tinning, application of the inhibitor will do no harm.

015251 Page 26 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Applications of Compression-Type Terminal Connectors (preferred)

1/4” 4” Copper Bus Bar 1/4” 4” Copper Bus Bar

See Note 1 See Note 1

Spacer (Same
Thickness as Spade)

Spade
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, as Required Spade
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, as Required
See Table 30 on Page 28 See Table 30 on Page 28

Transformer
Secondary
Bushing

Terminal (See Secondary

Bushing Terminal (See
Pages 27 to 34) Pages 27 to 34)

Insulated Copper or Aluminum Insulated Copper or Aluminum

Cable (See Note 3) Cable (See Note 3)
Figure 19 Figure 20

Notes
1. Where the transformer spade does not provide sufficient space for cables to be connected, it may be
extended with a short length of 1/4” x 4” copper bus bar, 3.86 pounds per foot, Code M156024. The current
carrying capacity of the bus bar, when insulated with tape is as follows:
1,200 amps for one 1/4” x 4” bus bar.
2,200 amps for two 1/4” x 4” bus bars (one on each side of the spade).
The spade itself has capacity sufficient for the rating of the transformer.
2. Where large size or a large number of cables are attached to secondary spade, they should be supported to
prevent excessive strain on the secondary bushings.
3. Installations shown in this document cannot be used for aluminum cables 1,250 kcmil and larger, or copper
cables 750 kcmil and larger, as the flat portion of the connector is wider than the hole spacing provided on the
transformer spade.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 27 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type

(copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(non-preferred)

1-3/4”
1-3/4”

3-3/4”
4”

2-1/4” 3”
3-1/8” 4-1/2”

1-3/4” 1/2”
1/2”
Figure 21 1-3/4”
Figure 22
Table 29 Connectors (copper cable eye bolt-to-flat bar type) 1
Use for Cable Manufacturer and Catalog Number
Range Code
Refer to A.E. Corp. 2 Burndy So. States Royal Dossert
(AWG-kcmil)
2/0-500 Figure 21 TLD-62 QQGF34-G6 UNNS-4656T 12222 T2L-50E 303169
600-1,000 Figure 22 TLDN-86 QQGFL44-G4 UNNS-5666T 19599 T2L-50E 303286
1 Connectors shown in Figure 21 and Figure 22 have two cable clamping elements and require a minimum of
space and taping. The recommended tightening force for the 1/2” eye bolt on these connectors is
25−40 foot-pounds.
2 Formerly Anderson Brass Works.

Note
1. See Pages 24 to 29 for preferred compression connectors for this application.
Table 30 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers (Figure 21 above, Figure 26 on Page 30,
Figure 36 on Page 37) 1, 2, 3
Item Description Code
1 Screw, Cap (bolt) Everdur, Hex. Head 1/2” x 1-1/2” 1, 2 193023
2 Screw, Cap (bolt) Everdur, Hex. Head 1/2” x 2” 1, 2 193025
3 Screw, Cap (bolt) Everdur, Hex. Head 1/2” x 2-1/2” 1, 2 193177
4 Nut, Bolt, Everdur, Hex. 1/2” 1 195013
5 Washer, Round, Everdur, 1/2” 195252
6 Washer, Lock, Everdur, 1/2” 195193
7 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD 1/2” x 1-1/2” 193271
8 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD. 1/2” x 2” 193272
9 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD. 1/2” x 2-1/2” 193273
10 Screw, Cap (bolt), Steel, CDPL, Hex. HD. 1/2” x 3” 193274
11 Nut, Bolt, Steel, CDPL, Hex. 1/2” 195449
12 Washer, Round, Steel, CDPL 1/2” 195450
13 Washer, Lock, Steel, CDPL 1/2” 195451
1 The recommended tightening force for a 1/2” Everdur bolt is 40 foot-pounds.
Normally, the use of an 8” wrench will give this range of torque.
2 Everdur cap screws are low silicon bronze, Spec 651 per ASTM F468 with Class
2A threaded.
3 Use Items 1 − 6 as shown In Figure 23 on Page 29 and Figure 36 on Page 37. Use
Items 7 − 13 as shown in Figure 26 on Page 30.

015251 Page 28 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type
(copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(non-preferred) (continued)

9-16” Holes
W

1 2 3 L

4 1-3/4” H

5
4 6
Figure 23

Table 31 Connectors − Bolted Tongue-to-Copper Cable Type 1 (Figure 23)

Use for Manufacturer and Catalog Number Dimensions (inches) 2 Connector
Cable Range
Burndy Royal Dossert L W H T Code
(kcmil)
400-500 QA34-2N 18726 HL 50-2N 4-11/16 1-3/8 1-15/16 5/16 303188
600-800 QA40-2N 18727 HL 80-2N 4-13/16 1-5/8 2-5/16 3/8 303298
850-1,000 QA44-2N 18728 HL 100-2N 4-15/16 1-7/8 2-1/2 1/2 303189
1 Bolt on these connectors is 40 foot-pounds of applied torque.
2 Dimensions shown are for Burndy connectors; others may vary slightly.

Notes
1. Figure 24 Below shows standard transformer spade terminals per Electronic Edison Institute (EEI) Specification.
9/16” Hole
9/16” Hole

9/16” Hole
7/8” 1-1/8”
5/8” 1-3/4”
4-1/8” 5-3/8”
1-3/4” 1-3/4”
2-3/4” 1-3/4” 1-3/4”
1”

3” 5/8” 1-1/8”
3-1/2” 4”

Spade G 1/4” 3/8”

Spade H 1/2”
Spade J

Figure 24
Standard Transformer Spade Terminals (EEI-NEMA)

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 29 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type

(copper cable-to-flat bar for transformer spade terminals)(non-preferred)(continued)

C C

K L
K L

7 8 9 or 10 7 8 9 or 10
12 12
T H T H

C.T. Terminal

13 11 13 11
Figure 25 Figure 26

Table 32 Connectors − Copper Cable Eyebolt-to-Flat Bar Type (Figure 25 and Figure 26)
Cable Range Manufacturer and Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions
(AWG or kcmil) Figure 26 Figure 26 Figure 25 (inches) 1 Code
Min − Max Burndy Royal Dossert H J L W
2 − 350 QGFL-31B1 12208 QL35 2-3/4 1/2 1-3/4 1-7/16 303165
1/0 − 500 QGFL-34B1 12209 QL50 3-3/16 1/2 2-1/4 1-13/16 303233
750 − 1,000 QGFL-44B1 12212 QL100 3-1/2 1/2 2-1/4 2-3/16 303179
1 The recommended tightning force for the 1/2” eye bolt on these connectors is 40 foot-pounds of applied torque.
2 Dimensions shown are for Burndy connectors; others may vary slightly.

Terminal Connectors Bolted-Type (copper cable-to-flat bar for current transformer

terminals only)

Table 33 Connectors − Cable-to-Flat Bar-to-Copper Cable Type (Figure 25 and Figure 26)
Cable Range Manufacturer and Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions
(AWG or (inches) 1
Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 25 Figure 26 Code
kcmil)
Min − Max A.E. Corp. Burndy Royal Dossert C H K (min.) L W
3/0 − 4/0 ITE024-A QA28-B3 18723 HL 21-1-50 1 1-7/16 9/16 2-1/4 1/4 303297
250 − 350 ITE035-A QA31-B 18724 HL 35-1 1-3/16 1-11/16 17/32 2-11/16 5/16 303182
400 − 500 ITE050-A QA34-B 18725 HL 50-1 1-3/8 2 17/32 3-3/16 5/16 303112
600 − 800 ITE080-A QA40-B 19600 HL 75-1 1-5/8 2-3/8 11/16 3-11/16 3/8 303122
850 − 1,000 ITE100-A QA44-B 19601 HL 100-1 1-7/8 2-1/2 11/16 3-15/16 1/2 303121
1 Dimensions shown are for Burndy connectors; others may vary slightly.

Notes
1. Connectors shown in Table 32 on Page 30 are less costly than those shown in Table 33 and should be used
when connecting one cable to bar-type primary terminal.
2. Use connectors shown in Table 32 on Page 30 to connect two cables to bar-type primary terminal by placing
them back-to-back as shown in Figure 25 and Figure 26.
Where severe corrosive conditions exist, use Everdur cap screws, nuts, and washers shown in Table 30 on Page 28.

015251 Page 30 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Tap Connectors for Cable Termination (copper or aluminum cable) Pad-Mounted Transformers

E Run E Run
B
Tap B Tap

C C

L L

H H

Figure 27 Figure 28 J

Table 34 Tap Connectors − Tee-Type (copper-to-copper, for circuits 5,000 V or lower)

Cable Size 6-Ton Tool
AWG or Approved for Purchase Dies # 1
kcmil 12-Ton Tool
Dimensions (inches) Burndy Dossert Dies #
Refer 15-Ton Tool
Run Tap Catalog Catalog Code
to B C E H J L Dies #
Number Number
W2CRT
6 to VYT262CG UTDK
2 1-11/32 1-5/8 2-17/32 1-13/16 − 3-7/32 305638 U2CRT
2/0 1 13-6
Figure U2CRT
27 W26RT
6 to VYT2626G UTDK
2/0 1-17/32 1-5/8 2-23/32 1-13/16 − 3-13/32 305639 U26RT
2/0 1 13-13
U26RT
1/0 W2CRT
UTSK
to 2 1-11/32 1-3/8 2-3/4 1-27/32 7/16 3-23/32 VYT302C 305640 U2CRT
30-6
300 U2CRT
1/0 W26RT
UTSK
to 2/0 1-17/32 1-3/8 3-1/16 1-27/32 7/16 4 VYT3026 305641 U26RT
30-13
300 Figure U26RT
1/0 28
UTSK U29RT
to 250 1-21/32 1-3/8 3-1/4 1-27/32 7/16 4-7/32 VYT3029 305642
30-25 U29RT
300
1/0
UTSK U34RT
to 500 2-9/32 1-3/8 3-1/16 1-27/32 7/16 5 VYT3034 305643
30-50 U34RT
300
1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press
tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.

Notes
1. If Tee Connectors, shown in Figure 27 and Figure 28 are to be attached to an aluminum overhead conductor
run, use a short length of bare copper conductor between the connector and the aluminum conductor, and
attach it with a fired wedge per Document 066194.
2. If the desired connector size is not shown, special sizes may be acquired by ordering a connector similar to the
connector shown.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 31 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Tap Connectors for Cable Termination (copper or aluminum cable) Pad-Mounted

Transformers (continued)

Transformer Transformer
Terminal Rod Terminal Rod
3”
Pin Terminal

Figure 30
Blackburn Catalog Number PGH3, Code 305997
Figure 29 Application: Tap clamp for live-front loop-style, 3-phase
pad-mounted transformer. Document 045291 and
Document 057521 conductor range #2 AWG to 2/0.

Application

See “Low Profile” Single-Phase 6.9 and 12 kV pad-mounted transformer, Document 042762 and Document 042765.

Table 35 Tap Connectors for Cable Termination in “Low-Profile” Pad-Mounted Transformers (Figure 29)
Manufacturer and Catalog Number 6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
Connector Size Connector
12-TonTool Dies #
AWG or kcmil Kortick Code
15-TonTool Dies #
W4CRT
4 Cu PMT-401 UCRT 305057
UCRT 2
W2CRT
2 Cu PMT-201 U2CRT 305058
U2CRT 2
W2CART
2 Al PMTA-201 U2CART 305153
U2CART 2
−
1/0 Al PMTA-1001 U25ART 305264
U25ART 2
1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton
press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.
2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies in a 15-ton press.

015251 Page 32 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type,5 kV or Above
Aluminum-to-Aluminum, Copper-to-Aluminum, or Copper-to-Copper

T (approx.) T (approx.)
A A A A
OD

Brazed Joints H
Scribed H
Drill Diameter Approximate
Guide Lines Approximate
for Circular AA (see Note 2) AA
Crimps
OD
OD
Figure 32
Figure 31

Table 36 Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type - Aluminum-to-Aluminum or Copper-to-Aluminum

(refer to Figure 31)
Approved for Purchase
Conductor Size AWG Dimension 6-Ton Tool Die #
Manufacturer and Catalog Number
or kcmil (inches) Connector 12-Ton Tool Die #
A Code 15-Ton Tool Die #
Burndy Dossert
Run Tap Burndy Mac
2 2 1-21/32 1-7/8 YST2CU2CUT CVT6-6-S-AA 305266
4 2 1-21/32 1-7/8 YST4CU2CUT CVT4-6-S-AA 305268
1/0 1/0 1-3/4 1-7/8 YST25U25UT CVT10-10-S-AA 305270
1/0 2 1-3/4 1-7/8 YST25U2CUT CVT10-6-S-AA 305271 See
Table 38 on
#2-4/0 #2-4/0 3-3/32 − YST28TG1 CVT6-6-S-AA 305380 Page 35
4/0-250 #2-250 3-5/8 − YST29TG1 CVT21-6-S-AA 305384
350-500 #2-500 4-9/32 − YST34TG1 CVT35-6-S-AA 305386
700-1,000 1 #2-700 1 4-25/32 − YST39TG1 CVT70-6-S-AA 305398
1 Maximum conductor size for aluminum only. Maximum copper size is 750 kcmil for run and 500 kcmil for tap.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 33 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type, 5kV and Above

Aluminum-to-Aluminum, Copper-to-Aluminum, or Copper-to-Copper (continued)
Table 37 Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type - Copper-to-Copper (refer to Table 32 on Page 30)
Conductor Manufacturer and Catalog
Size Dimensions (inches)
Number 6-Ton Tool Die #
AWG or Connector
code 12-Ton Tool Die #
kcmil OD 15-Ton Tool Die #
A AA H T Burndy Homac Dossert
Run Tap Run Tap
2 2 1.23 1.23 2.16 4.31 0.42 0.42 YSTP2C2CT 2T2 CVT6-6 305808 W2CRT
U2CRT
2 4 1.23 1.09 2.04 4.31 0.42 0.34 YSTP2C4CT 2T4 CVT6-4 305809 U2CRT 2
W4CRT
4 4 1.09 1.09 1.84 3.88 0.34 0.34 YSTP4C4CT 4T4 CVT4-4 305810 U2CRT
U2CRT 2
1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton
press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.
2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies in a 15-ton press.

Notes
1. The material of these connectors is aluminum or copper with a tinplated finish.
2. Barrels are factory drilled to accommodate the minimum conductor OD.
3. Connectors shall be filled with oxide inhibitor and sealed

Application
Tap splices for above 5,000 V, see Document 041583 and Document 043901

015251 Page 34 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Primary T-Connectors, Compression-Type,
Aluminum-to-Aluminum, Copper-to-Aluminum or Copper-to-Copper (continued)
Table 38 Tooling from Table 36 on Page 33
6-Ton Tool Dies # 1
Connector 12-Ton Tool Dies #
15-Ton Tool Dies #
Code Run Tap
−
305266 U25ART
U25ART −
U25ART
W2CART U25ART 2
305268 U2CABT
U2CABT
W27ART
305270 U27ART
W27ART U27ART 2
U27ART
U27ART −
305271 U25ART
U25ART 2
− −
305380 U31ART U31ART
U31ART U31ART 2
− −
305384 U39RT U39ART
U39ART U39ART 2
−
305386 U39ART
U39ART −
U39ART
− P39ART
305398 −
P44ART
1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second
entry corresponds to a 12-ton press tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton
press tool.
2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing u-dies in a 15-ton press.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 35 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Slip-Fit Connector Installation, Aluminum or Copper Cable

Two #2-1000
Four #6-4/0
Threaded 1-1/8” Dia. x 1-3/4”
Deep for Slip-Fit Over 1”
Threaded Stud

One
#6-1/0
9-3/8”

Four #2-1000 9-1/2”

2-1/4”
Max. One #6-1/0
Figure 33
Code 031604 9”
Homac ABW 6486
Utilco PTF-6-10004/0JSL
2-1/4”
Max.
Figure 34 Figure 35
Code 300010 Secondary Cover
Homac ABW 4100SL Code 031605
Utilco PTL4-1000JSL Homac SB6486
Scope
This page shows slip-fit connectors for single-phase, dead-front transformer, low voltage, secondary installations
(see Document 064308).
Notes
1. All set screws to be 5/16” Allen head drive.
2. The bar is rated in excess of 1,600 amps, which exceeds the maximum allowable transformer load.
3. Connectors may be used for aluminum or copper conductors.
4. Never combine conductors in one port.
5. Connector is designed to slip onto the stud even though the terminal is threaded.
6. Secondary cover, see Figure 35, is a tool to be used when required to insulate the energized secondary slip-fit
connectors.
Instructions
1. Remove any jam nuts from transformer studs.
2. Slide the connector onto the transformer stud, position the connector to allow a straight, smooth cable entry,
mesh the threads together, and tighten the setscrews to lock the connector in place.
3. To prepare the cable, remove the insulation, wire brush the conductor, and apply inhibitor.
4. Insert the conductor in the port and tighten the setscrew.
5. After completing work on the secondary connectors, make sure all connections are tightened as indicated in
Table 39.
Table 39 Conductor/Torque
Conductor Torque (ft/lbs)
#6 − 350 and Transformer Stud 25
500 − 1,000 40

015251 Page 36 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Multiple Transformer Terminal Aluminum or Copper Cable

1-3/4” Secondary Spade

Support
5/16” Allen Drive Screw
for 1/0 to 1,000 kcmil
Conductors
H

1-3/4”
2 3 5 7
9/16”

L Homac ABK 81000 (8-Way) 8-Way

Homac ABK 41000 (4-Way) Terminal
W
Detail A
Secondary Terminal Installation
Figure 36
8-Way Terminal Illustrated (1,000 kcmil)

Table 40 EZ Keeper Lay-In Terminals for Copper or Aluminum Conductors (600 V or lower)
(refer to Figure 36)
Dimensions − Approximate
Conductor Ampacity Number of (inches) Mounting Hole Diameter Code
Range (minimum) Conductors
L W H
3100 4 7.0 6.25 301281
1/0 − 1,000 1-7/8 9/16”
5100 8 13.75 6.25 301282

Scope
These connectors are for use in connecting service cables from 1/0 to 1,000 kcmil to the spade of three-phase,
pad-mounted transformers (Document 043817 and Document 045291). Cable-to-flat bars are replaced in this
design by set screws and a removable lay-in connection. If needed to terminate a #2 neutral onto one of these
bars, it is necessary to splice a piece of 1/0 tail for insertion into the lay-in port.

Notes
1. Connectors may be used for copper or aluminum conductors.
2. Never put more than one cable in a port.
3. Install the lower (X0 and X2) connectors first, then the higher (X1 and X3). Use as many bolts as there are
holes in the spade.
4. If transformer spades are not supported, install a secondary cable support kit (see Document 045291).
5. To prepare the cable, remove the insulation, wire brush the conductor, and apply inhibitor.
6. Make sure all set screws are tightened as indicated in Table 39 on Page 36. (Torque them to the specified
value, wait 5 minutes, and make the final torque).
7. See Table 30 on Page 28 for bolts, nuts, and washers.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 37 of 39

UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems

Pin Terminals
L
P E

A OD

S. D. Copper Rod End Plug Color

Figure 37 B
Coded Plastic
Table 41 Specifications for Aluminum Pin Terminal 1
Approved for Purchase 6-Ton Tool
Copper/
Manufacturer and Die # 1
Copper
Al. Dimension (inches) 12-Ton Tool
Stud Catalog Number
Cable Code Die #
Equivalent E L
Size 15-Ton Tool
Homac Brundy A B OD P
Approx. Approx. Die #
6 8 SAPT-6-26 YE6R-40 0.250 1.75 0.65 3.25 9.25 6.00 303843 W-BG
2 4 SAPT-2-26 TE2R-40 0.250 1.75 0.65 3.25 9.25 6.00 303844 U-BG
1/0 2 SAPT-1/0-26 YE25R-60 0.250 1.75 0.65 3.25 9.25 6.00 303845 U-BG 2
W249
4/0 2/0 SAPT-4/0-206 YE28R-60 0.375 1.54 0.91 3.50 10.9 6.00 303846 U249
U249 2
−
350 4/0 PTB-350-6 YE31AG3 0.460 2.25 1.12 4.70 10.7 6.00 303554 U31ART
U31ART 2
−
YE34AP-
500/600 500 PTM-500-346 0.750 2.56 1.57 6.30 12.3 6.00 300013 U34ART 3
GE
U34ART 2 3
−
700 500 PTL-750 YE39AGB 0.750 2.56 1.60 6.30 12.3 6.00 303555 U39ART
P39ART
−
1,000 700 PTF-1000-346 YE44AG7 0.750 2.56 1.60 6.30 12.3 6.00 033757 −
P44ART
1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 12-ton press
tool, and the third entry corresponds to a 15-ton press tool.
2 A U-die adapter must be used when utilizing U-dies in 15-ton press tool.
3 Homac equivalent of this die is 106A.

Notes
1. The material for the pin terminals is on Table 41. Copper Rod-Soft Drawn, Tinned, Aluminum Connector EC
Grade, Untinned
2. Connector is supplied pre-filled with inhibitor and sealed.
3. Connector is supplied pre-filled with inhibitor and sealed.
4. Pin terminals connected to copper secondary conductors use a copper connector. Pin terminals connected to
aluminum secondary conductors use a fired wedge or h-tap.
Application
1. To make straight connections of insulated aluminum secondary neutral to bare copper neutral,
see Note 10 Page 7.
2. To connect aluminum primary stress cone termination to terminal tap connector or cutout.
3. To make watertight termination for secondary risers.

015251 Page 38 of 39 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Connectors
Greenbook
Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems
Pin Terminals (continued)

Table 42 Color Coding

Color Coding Requirements for Plastic End Plugs in Pin Terminals
Conductor Size Plug Color
#6 Blue
#2 Red
1/0 Yellow
4/0 Pink
350 Brown
700 Purple

Table 43 Specifications and Ordering Information for Copper Pin Terminal

6-Ton Tool
Manufacturer and Catalog Number Dimensions (inches) Die # 1
Cu Cu
12-Ton
Cable Stud Code
Mac Prod Tool Die #
Size Size Dossert Brundy A B OD E L P
Co. 15-Ton
Tool Die #
W2CRT
2 2 SDP 6-PG CAS2-2 YE2CLH128 0.25 1.25 0.415 2.25 9.00 6.00 U2CRT 303847
U2CRT 2
1 Within this column, the first entry corresponds to a 6-ton press tool, the second entry corresponds to a 15-ton press
tool.
2 A U-die must be used when utilizing u-dies 15-ton press tool.

Notes
1. The material for the pin terminals on Table 43 is copper rod-soft-drawn, tinned.
2. Rod may be bent for installation convenience. It is recommended that bending take place 1/2” beyond the copper
sleeve.

Application

1. To make straight connections of insulated aluminum secondary neutral to bare copper neutral, see Note 10
Page 7.
2. To connect bare copper secondary neutral to aluminum bar connector using Thermofit boot, see
Document 036640.
3. To make watertight termination for secondary risers.

Revision Notes
Revision 06 has the following changes:
1. Major changes throughout the entire document.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 015251 Page 39 of 39

 OH: Services
Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: SXZO

REQUIREMENTS FOR CUSTOMER-OWNED POLES 025055

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Construction

Issued by: D.Jantz (DWJ7) Date: 8/15/17

Rev. #16: This document replaces PG&E Document 025055, Rev. #15. For a description of the changes, see Page 17.
This document is also included in the following manuals:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope
Equipment installed on service poles as shown in this document will also meet the requirements of the California
Building Standards Code - Electrical Regulations. These requirements have been established by the state of California
in the interest of safety to the public and to workers, and are applicable to all customer-owned service poles. PG&E
cannot establish service to poles that do not meet these minimum requirements. The maintenance of customer-owned
service poles in conformity with these requirements is the sole responsibility of the customer.
Local ordinances may include wiring requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local
inspection authorities for these requirements and for city or county permits and inspections that may be required
before service can be connected.
References Location Document
Methods of Attaching Services to Customers
Premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025202
Dead-End and Angle Attachments for Aluminum
Conductors - Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028851
Connectors for Aluminum Conductors on
Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028852
Temporary Underground Electric Service
Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt 200 Amps Maximum . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 036670
Conductors for Overhead Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059626
Overhead and Underground
Panel Board Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH Services/UG-1 Services/Greenbook 065374
Engineering Material Specification #57
“Preservative Treated Wood Poles, Stubs, and
Anchor Logs for Overhead Lines” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS57
Utility Standard TD-2325S, “Wood Pole Inspection,
Testing, and Maintenance” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2325S
Temporary Service Pole Installation

1. The use of temporary service poles must be restricted to installations of a temporary nature, such as building
construction, temporary sales locations, etc., where the period of service is estimated to be 1 year or less.
2. Temporary service poles must be furnished and installed by the customer and may be wooden or metallic.
The minimum length must be 20 feet (set 4 feet in the ground). A longer pole may be necessary to provide
the required clearance from the ground (see Note 9 on Page 4) or to supply the customer’s overhead line
(see Figure 3 on Page 8).
3. A temporary, wood service pole may be rectangular or circular in cross section and must be solid (not
laminated). Rectangular poles must have a minimum cross section of 6” x 6” nominal; circular poles must
meet the requirements for permanent service poles specified in Note 7 on Page 2 except that the minimum
length may be 20 feet providing the required clearances are maintained.

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 1 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

4. The butt of the temporary, wood service pole must at least be painted with creosote or other approved
preservative. However, it is recommended that these poles be full-length treated with a suitable preservative in
order to obtain the maximum useful life of the pole and to provide increased safety to workers and to the
public. The permanent service pole specified in Note 6 below is approved for temporary installations. It will
usually be the more economical pole for repeated use.
5. A metal pole may be used for temporary service provided its strength is at least equivalent to the wood service
poles specified in Note 3 on Page 1 and provided its base or foundation is designed to provide at least an
equivalent resistance to overturning when set at the same depth. The use of 4-inch extra-strong steel pipe
(Schedule 80), set in concrete to obtain equivalent bearing surface, or the use of a 5-inch standard steel pipe
(Schedule 40), set directly in the ground, will meet these requirements.
Permanent Pole Installation
6. A permanent wood or metal service pole must be used when it is estimated that the installation will remain for
a period longer than 1 year. Permanent wood service poles, as specified in Note 7, must be furnished and
installed by the customer. PG&E will, however, furnish and install the pole (wood or metal) exclusive of wiring
and service entrance equipment, at the customer’s expense, if the customer is unable to have the pole
installed by a private contractor.
7. Customer Owned Wood Poles:
A. Customer-owned, permanent wood poles must meet all pertinent requirements of ANSI O5.1.2008, “Wood
Poles − Specifications and Dimensions,” and American Wood Protection Association Standards T1-10 and
U1-10, as modified or described in Engineering Material Specification 57, “Preservative Treated Wood Poles
and Stubs for Overhead Lines.”
B. Approved pole suppliers and treatments are shown in Table 1 and Table 2 of this document.
C. For poles that will have a final height greater than 20 feet above ground level, the Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA) may require the applicant to file a notice a minimum of 45 days prior to the installation of
the pole. The FAA may issue a determination of hazard to air navigation and recommend actions to mitigate
or eliminate that hazard. Please contact your PG&E project coordinator for additional information
D. Before setting the pole(s), the customer/contractor must notify the local PG&E inspector who will look at the
pole(s) to verify that they meet the requirements stated within this note (Note 7).
When planning to install a new customer owned service pole prior to inspection by PG&E personnel see the
section, Verifying Depth of Customer Owned Poles, on Page 6 for an alternate method.
E. Customer-owned, permanent wood poles must be of circular cross section, minimum Class 6, with a minimum
length of 25 feet (4-1/2 feet in the ground). A longer pole may be necessary to obtain the required clearance
from the ground. Consult PG&E before ordering. Exception: minimum length may be 20 feet providing the
required clearances are maintained.
F. The pole brand must remain visible at all times. The customer-owner shall not install the main service switch
meter socket box, or conduit runs over the brand.
G. Used poles may be installed provided they are inspected and accepted by PG&E before installation.
H. Applicants must obtain a certificate of treatment or a letter from a supplier indicating that the pole was treated
in accordance with the American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) and ANSI requirements. PG&E should
receive a copy of this certificate before accepting the pole.
8. A metal pole may be used for permanent service provided its size and strength are at least equivalent to the
wood pole described in Note 7,and provided its base or foundation is designed to provide at least equivalent
resistance to overturning when set at the same depth. The following are some poles that will meet these
requirements:
A. An 11-gauge steel pole with 8-1/2-inch minimum diameter at ground line, set directly in the ground.
B. A 7-gauge steel pole with 7-inch minimum diameter at ground line, set directly in the ground.
C. A 5-inch extra-strong steel pipe (Schedule 80) set in concrete to obtain equivalent bearing surface.
D. A 6-inch standard steel pipe (Schedule 40) set in concrete to obtain equivalent bearing surface.

All steel permanent metal poles must be galvanized.

025055 Page 2 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Table 1 Approved Suppliers for Permanent Wood Poles (Table 5, Item 2 on Page 7) 1
Service Poles 35 Feet and Shorter Distribution Poles Taller than 35 Feet
Koppers
McFarland Cascade
Thunderbolt Wood Treating
Nevada Wood Preserving McFarland Cascade (Tacoma, WA. or Eugene, OR.
Yards only)
1 Service poles are sold to lumberyard/hardware companies.

Table 2 Approved Service Pole Treatments 1

Treatment
Penta-A Pressure Ammoniacal
Species Creosote Chromated
(Oil-Penta) Copper
Copper Arsenate
Zinc Arsenate (C)
(PA) (CCA or SK)
(ACZA or SZ)
Western Red Cedar X X X X
Douglas-Fir X X X −
1 All poles must be full-length treated, except Western Red Cedar may be butt treated with oil
pentachlorophenol.

Table 3 Pole Setting Depths

Setting Depth (feet)\
Pole Length (feet)
Firm Soil Rock
25 4-1/2 3
30 5 3
35 5 3-1/2
40 5-1/2 3-1/2
45 6 4

Table 4 Customer’s Service Attachment Location 1, 2

Weatherhead Distance From Top of Pole (inches) PG&E Service

Panel Rating
Attachment
(amps) Minimum Maximum (type)
t+ 225 16 18 Service Knob
226-400 (1-Phase) 3 32 34 3 Spool Extended Rack 4
226-400 (3-Phase) 3 40 42 4 Spool Extended Rack 4
1 All open wire services require extended rack construction. See Figure 7 on Page 11 and Figure 4 on Page 9.
2 A longer pole may be necessary to obtain the required service clearances from the ground. See note 9D on
Page 4.
3 See Note 26 on Page 6.
4 See Figure 7 on Page 11.

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 3 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Vertical Clearance for Service Poles

9. Conductors to service poles must have a minimum ground clearance as follows:

A. Over the center portion of the street, 18’ 0” minimum. For conductor height over trolleys, railroad tracks,
telephone lines, etc., consult PG&E.
B. At the curb or outer limits of possible vehicular traffic, 16’ 0” minimum.
C. Over private driveways, lanes, or other areas accessible to vehicles used for industrial, commercial, or
agricultural purposes, 16’ 0” minimum.
D. If required clearances cannot be obtained with a minimum-length service pole and the constructions
illustrated on Pages 7 through 9, the required clearances should be obtained by using a longer (taller)
pole. The setting depth for a 25-foot and longer pole must be followed as specified in Table 3 on Page 3.

10’ 0” Minimum (from surface of Company pole, lines, or equipment)

Consult PG&E for Maximum Distance (see Note 21 on Page 5)
Service Drop (see Note 21 on Page 5)
See Note 9C

Power
Company
Pole 18’ 0” Min. 16’ 0” Min. See
(see Note 9A) (see Note 9B) Note 22 on
Page 6
12’ 0” Street or
Min. Road
12’ 0” Sidewalk
Figure 1 Min.
Clearances for Service Poles
Service Entrance Conductors

10. The customer must furnish, install, and maintain the service entrance wiring and service equipment beyond
the point of attachment to PG&E’s service wires. The service entrance wires must be continuous and must be
of a size and type that will provide not less than the minimum standard of safety as specified in local city and
county ordinances or, where there is no local ordinance, as specified in the current issue of the National
Electrical Code (NEC).
11. The neutral conductor of 2-wire, 120 V and 3-wire, 120/240 V (or 120/208 V) services must be securely
connected to the neutral terminal of the meter socket and extended through to the neutral terminal of the
service entrance switch. It must be continuous (without splice) from the service head to the service
entrance switch.
12. At least 18 inches of service entrance conductors must be provided outside the service head.
13. Weatherproof wire is not permitted in conduit.

025055 Page 4 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Service Entrance and Load Side Conduit and Conduit Covering

14. Service entrance and load side conduit and conduit covering requirements must comply with applicable codes
and local requirements. G.O. 95 requires that any conduit installed below the 8-foot level on the pole must be
treated as a riser; in which case, the conduit must be either rigid galvanized steel or 2-inch minimum diameter
Schedule 40 PVC.
Exception: Conduit that enters the top of an enclosure is considered to be “protected” by the enclosure and need
not be treated as a riser unless installed below the 6-foot level. Conduit installed above the 6-foot or 8-foot level
(whichever height applies) must be either: (1) galvanized rigid steel conduit, (2) rigid aluminum conduit,
(3) electrical metallic tubing, (4) IMC, or (5) PVC plastic conduit having a minimum wall thickness of 0.15 inches
(Schedule 40 for 2-inch PVC conduit or larger, Schedule 80 for 1-1/2-inch or smaller). All fittings must be rain-tight.
If PVC plastic conduit is used, it need not be covered. If rigid steel or other approved metallic conduit is used, it
must be enclosed with PVC “U” shaped molding for a minimum distance of 8 feet below the lowest open service
entrance conductor. The covering must be fastened to the pole at intervals not greater than 3 feet (see Page 11).
15. Wood Block:
A. A wood block must be attached directly over the service head in the following situations:
(1) On a service pole where electrical metallic tubing, rigid steel, or IMC is used.
(2) On a wood pole with plastic conduit installation when the service head is metallic and the neutral service
entrance conductor is not insulated.
B. A wood block over the service head is not required in the following instances:
(1) On a service pole with plastic conduit installation except as noted in Note 15, A. above.
(2) On a metallic pole, provided the pole is effectively grounded and provided all metallic conduits are
adequately bonded to the metal pole with approved clamps or connectors.
C. Attach wood blocks as shown on Pages 8 through 10.
16. All conduit and fittings must be rain-tight.
17. Water pipe and fittings are not permitted for use as electrical conduit.
Service Entrance Switch
18. Main switch, receptacles, and other equipment on the load side of the meter must be of weatherproof design
or protected by weatherproof enclosures. Such equipment must comply with local ordinances and must also
comply with the California Building Standards Code - Electrical Regulations.
19. The switch cover must be locked if the enclosure contains exposed live parts.
Grounding
20. The customer must be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed, non-current-carrying metal parts.
Grounding and bonding must be in accordance with NEC and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not
require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit
or armored cladding (see Pages 8 and 10 for additional details).
Pole Location
21. Poles must be located so that the vertical clearances specified in Note 9 and Figure 1 on Page 4 can be
obtained. A service pole must not be located less than 10 feet from the surface of the PG&E pole, or
pole-mounted equipment, or within 10 feet of the vertical plane of a PG&E line.
PG&E must be consulted for maximum span lengths, as they can vary depending on wire type and size, loading
area, clearances, and suitable guying. The maximum span length of PG&E’s service drop to a temporary pole
must not exceed 100 feet, and if 4/0 conductor is necessary, not more than 80 feet. The maximum span length for
a permanent type installation may vary from 80 feet to 150 feet upward depending on the variables mentioned.
The pole must also be positioned so that the pole brand will not be hidden by the main service switch, meter
socket box, or conduit runs.

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 5 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Guying or Bracing
22. Where conductors cross a street or road, the customer’s pole must be guyed or braced against the pull of
conductors as follows:
A. Temporary Poles: Anchor guy as shown in Figure 13 on Page 12, or with wood braces not smaller than 2” x 4”
timber and securely bolted to the pole as per Figure 14 on Page 12. See Figure 2 on Page 8 for the correct
placement of guy or brace.
B. Permanent Service Poles: Anchor guy only as shown in Figure 13 on Page 12. See Figure 5 on Page 10 for
the correct placement of guy.
C. The guy strain insulator is to be located in a zone: 8 feet or more above the ground; and 8 feet or more below
the level of the lowest supply conductor, or 6 feet or more from the surface of the pole and 1 foot or more
below the level of the lowest supply conductor.

Metering Requirements

23. Meters must be furnished by PG&E. See Greenbook sections 5, 6, and 7 for meter panel and additional
metering requirements.
24. For residential installations, meter sockets without test bypass facilities must be furnished, installed, and wired
by the customer as shown on Page 12.
25. For commercial and industrial applications, meter sockets with PG&E-approved test bypass facilities must be
furnished, installed, and wired by the customer.
26. Customer−owned poles for residential use are limited to only one meter panel rated at 320 amps (continuous)
or less. Poles for non−residential applications are limited to only one meter panel rated at 200 amps or less.
Installations with more than one meter panel or a meter panel with a greater ampacity must be installed on
panelboard construction as shown in Document 065374.

Verifying Depth of Customer Owned Poles

Applicants who plan to install a new customer−owned service pole prior to inspection by PG&E personnel can use an
alternate method for PG&E inspectors to verify the setting depth of newly installed poles that have already been set in
the ground. See notes below and Figure 18, “Pole Depth Verification”, on page 17. These installations will be approved
at the discretion of the PG&E Electrical inspector.
27. Install 3/4−inch diameter PVC Schedule 40 conduit from the bottom of the pole to 12 inches above grade level.
28. Place a removable cap on the top of the conduit and a permanent cap on the bottom of the conduit.
29. Attach the conduit to the pole using three heavy duty pipe straps and 10D galvanized nails. Place one pipe strap
towards the top of the conduit below the removable cap. Place the second strap in the middle of the conduit and
the third strap at the bottom of the conduit just above the permanent cap.
30. Install a PG&E approved pole to, at least, the minimum required setting depth. Refer to Table 3 Pole Setting
Depths on page 3.
31. Ensure the PVC conduit is not broken and remains free of soil, equipment, or other obstacles, throughout the
conduit. The conduit will be used to verify the pole setting depth.
32. Backfill and compact the soil around the pole to 90% of maximum density. Determine the maximum density and
the in−place density by the California Test Method No. 216−6, Parts I and II respectively, or by ASTM D−1556
and D−1557 respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E.
33. Call for inspection after the installation of the customer owned pole is complete.

025055 Page 6 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Table 5 Materials to Be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

Item Description
1 Pole, 6” x 6” Timber, Class 6 Round, or Equivalent Metal (length as required, see Note 2 on Page 1)
Pole, Wood, or Equivalent Metal (see Note 6, Note 7, and Note 8 on Page 2). (See Table 1 on Page 3 for
2
approved list of wood pole suppliers.)
3 Meter Socket, Main Service Switch
4 Conduit, Service (see Note 14 on Page 5)
5 Conduit, Load Side (see Note 14 on Page 5)
6 Conduit Fitting, Threaded, With Cover and Gasket
7 1 Covering, PVC Conduit, or PVC Moulding (see Page 9)
8 1 Wood Block (4” x 4” x 6” or two 2” x 4” x 6” nailed together)
9 Service Head
10 Service Knob
11 Wire, Insulated (size as required) (18” minimum extension from service head)
12 Bolt, Machine, 5/8 or 3/4, (as required), Galvanized
13 Washer, Curved, 3” x 3” (for 5/8” Bolt) or 4” x 4” (for 3/4” Bolt), Galvanized
14 Guy Hook or Guy Pole Plate and Thimble Assembly
15 Guy Strand Cable, 7/32” or 1/4“ Minimum Galvanized Steel or Equivalent
16 Insulator, Guy Strain (10,000 lbs. minimum)
17 Guy Grip, Preform, (as required)
18 Anchor Rod, 5/8” x 6’ 0” Minimum, and Fittings (as required)
19 Anchor, 16” Cross Plate, or 8” Expanding
20 Guy Marker
21 Push Brace, 2” x 4” Minimum Timber (securely bolted to pole)
22 Grounding by Customer (see Pages 8 and 10)
1 Omit conduit covering, Item 7, and wood block, Item 8, on a metal pole or on a wood pole with plastic conduit (see
Note 15 on Page 5). Exception: The wood block is required for a wood pole with plastic conduit when the
service head is metallic and the neutral service entrance conductor is uninsulated (see Note 15 on Page 5).

Table 6 Materials to Be Furnished and Installed by PG&E

Items Description Document
23 Rack, Extended 015187
24 Spool and Clevis 022439
25 Meter, Watthour (as required) −
26 Service Wire (as required) 059626
27 Insulator, for Service Wire (as required) 025202
28 Connectors, Service Sleeve (as required) 028852
29 Preformed Grip, Dead-End (as required) 028851

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 7 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Temporary Installations

Notes
1. Locate the guy in line with the service drop. The guy must be maintained taut.
2. Grounding and bonding, by the customer, must be in accordance with NEC and local ordinances, (see Note 20 on
Page 5). The ground rod must be located no less than 12 inches from the pole surface.
3. Customer’s equipment must not be installed in the climbing space or over the pole brand. See Note 20 on
Page 5 for grounding requirements.
4. For customer-owned poles, span lengths are limited to 100 feet. The vertical separation between conductors in
extended rack construction is 8 inches minimum.
5. If the poles are to be set in firm soil, use the setting depths from the “Firm Soil” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If
the poles are to be set in rock, use the setting depths from “Rock” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If the poles are
to be set in soft soil, the poles must be set deeper than the depths shown in Table 3. Consult the PG&E project
coordinator for the other approved methods for soft soil.
See Alternate See Alternate 24 29
23 26
Locations Locations
1 29 26
27 4” min. 10 PG&E
4” min. 8 ” Min. Line
PG&E
8
See Line
See 8
Table 4
9 Table 4
See Figure 15,
Page 13 12 13 14 17 28 9

See Note 22.C 11 12 ” Min. 11 28

on Page 6
Customer’s
Line
See Note 14
15 16 or 20 4 on Page 5
(see Note 2 on Page 1)

7
20’ 0” Minimum

7 See Note 14
5 4 on Page 5
(see Note 2 on Page 1)

3 See Note 3
Figure 13 or
20’ 0” Minimum

Figure 14 on
Page 12 25 25 Meter
Meter 6
75” Max. 3 See Note 3
75” Max.
66” Preferred
66” Preferred
48” Min.
48” Min.
1

17 See Note 2
17 See Note 2

Ground
Ground
Level 48”
Level
48” Min.
Min.

Figure 2 Figure 3
Service Drop Cable to Receptacles Service Drop Cable to Overhead Line

025055 Page 8 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Installations (continued)

PG&E Line

4” Min.

8”

8”
See Table 4
Page 3 8”

12” Min.

Figure 4
Open Wire Construction
(For use when the load requires a larger service drop conductor )

Guy

Service
Drop

Guy

Alternate Locations for

Service Drop and Guy
(see Note 1 on Page 8)

Detail A
See Figure 16 on Page 14

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 9 of 17

 OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Permanent Installations
Notes
1. Locate the guy in line with the service drop. The guy must be maintained taut.
2. Grounding and bonding, by the customer, must be in accordance with NEC and local ordinances (see Note 20 on
Page 5), The ground rod must be located no less than 12 inches from the pole surface.
3. Customer’s equipment must not be installed in the climbing space or over the pole brand. See Note 20 on Page 5
for grounding requirements.
4. For customer-owned poles, span lengths are limited to 150 feet. The vertical separation between conductors in
extended rack construction is 8 inches minimum.
5. If the poles are to be set in firm soil, use the setting depths from the “Firm Soil” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If
the poles are to be set in rock, use the setting depths from “Rock” column of Table 3 on Page 3. If the poles are
to be set in soft soil, the poles must be set deeper than the depths shown in Table 3 on Page 3. Consult the
PG&E project coordinator for the other approved methods for soft soil.
See Alternate
See Alternate 24 23 29 26
26 Locations
Locations 27 29 4” Min.
8” Min. 10
4” Min. PG&E
8 Line PG&E
See Line
Table 4 See 8
9 Table 4 9
Figure 15,
Page 13 28
11 27
12 13 14 17
11
Note 22.C 12” min
on Page 6
15 16 Customer’s
Line
4 See Note 14
on Page 5 7 See Note 14
Figure 13 on 7
Page 12 4 on Page 5
3 See Note 3 5
2
(see Note 7

(see Note 7
25’ 0” Min.

25’ 0” Min.
on Page 2

on Page 2

25 Meter 25 Meter

3 See Note 3
6
6

75” Max. 75” Max.

66” Preferred 66” Preferred
48” Min. 48” Min.

17 See Note 2 17 See Note 2

2
Ground 5 Ground
Level Level

4’ 6” Min. 4’ 6” Min.
(see Table 3 (see Table 3
To on Page 3) on Page 3)
Load
Figure 5 Figure 6
Service Drop Cable to Underground Line Service Drop Cable to Overhead Line

025055 Page 10 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Permanent Installations (continued)

PG&E Line

4” min.
8”
Guy 8”
Note 4
Page 10 8”
Service See Table 4
Guy
Drop Page 3 12”
Alternate
Locations for Guy
Service Drop (see Note 1
and Guy on Page 10)

Detail B Figure 7
See Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 10 Open Wire Construction
(for use when the load requires a larger service drop conductor)

Method of Covering Metal Conduits and Attaching Coverings on Wood Poles

Notes
1. Strap PVC conduit to the pole with 2−hole heavy duty pipe straps or galvanized perforated plumber’s tape
spaced not more than 3 feet apart (see Figure 8).
2. Attach PVC molding to the poles with 1/4” x 2-1/2” galvanized washer-head lag screws.

Figure 8 Figure 9
PVC Conduit PVC Molding
(see Note 1) (see Note 2)

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 11 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Meter Connections
1. For test bypass facilities, see Note 25 on Page 6.
2. All wiring material on the load side of the meter socket must be in accordance with applicable electrical codes,
city and county ordinances, and must comply with the California Building Standards Code − Electrical
Regulations. Unless threaded connections are used, adequate bonding of all sections of the service
equipment must be provided.

Threaded Conduit Hub Threaded

Conduit Hub

4-Terminal
Meter Socket 4-Terminal Meter Socket
8”
(see Note 1) (see Note 1)
Lock Weatherproof Service
Switch. Cover Must Be
Locked if Enclosure Contains
Exposed Live Parts.
Ground Wire Weatherproof Receptacles
(see Note 20 on Page 5) (see Notes 18 and 19 on
Page 5)

Figure 10
120/240 V, 3-Wire Figure 11 Figure 12
With WHM, Service 120/240 V, 4-Wire Delta 120 V, 2-Wire
Switch, and Receptacle in With Weatherproof Service With Weatherproof Service
Weatherproof Cabinet Switch and Receptacles Switch and Receptacles
(see Note 2) (see Note 2) (see Note 2)

Details of Anchors, Guying Materials, and Brace

5/8” Diameter x 72”

Galvanized Steel
Anchor Rod
(minimum size) Bolted to Pole
2” x 4” Min. Wood
Brace 20-Foot
6” Approx. Length Approx. 45°

Service
17 18 19 20 Pole
Steel 4” x 4” Min. Bolted to
Anchor Stake Stake

36” Min.

Figure 14
Wood Brace
Figure 13 (for use with temporary
Steel Anchor pole only)

025055 Page 12 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

13
14

12 17

15

Figure 15
Guying Materials

Temporary Commercial Service to Non-Substantial Portable Structure

Notes
1. Temporary Service Attachment
Temporary services will not be directly attached to any structure considered by PG&E to be of inadequate
strength. The structure must, in all cases, be substantial (see Note 2) and capable of supporting the service
span, as well as the force of the ladder and worker against the service mast.
2. Portable Buildings (Figure 16 on Page 14 and Figure 17 on Page 16)
Portable buildings, such as small sheds, combined office/toilet structures, etc., are not considered to be
substantial structures unless they are staked in place in the manner shown in Figure 17 on Page 16.
Furthermore, periscopes must be installed and adequately braced in accordance with Figure 17 on Page 16 and
the “Electric Service: Overhead” Section of the Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook).
3. Temporary Poles (Figure 16 on Page 14)
Customer-owned temporary poles are required for support of PG&E’s overhead service wires if the temporary
building to be served is considered by PG&E as not substantial.
4. Method of Serving
Non-substantial structures that have been approved for the attachment of metering equipment and service
periscopes may be served in the manner shown on Page 14. However, if desired, the metering equipment may be
removed from the structure and placed on the temporary pole as shown in Figure 2 on Page 8.
5. The distance from the centerline of the periscope service mast to the pole face must not exceed 24 inches.
6. A portable structure must not obstruct the climbing space of a temporary pole.
7. The working space in front of the meter must not be obstructed.
8. The minimum distance from the surface of a PG&E pole to a customer’s pole is 10 feet.
9. The maximum permitted span to a PG&E pole is 100 feet and may be only 80 feet in some cases (see
Note 21 on Page 5).

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 13 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Temporary Commercial Service to Non-Substantial Portable Structure (continued)

10 Feet Minimum (see Note 8 on Page 13)
100 Feet Maximum (see Note 9 on Page 13)
PG&E Pole
Customer’s Pole
(see Note 6 on Page 11) PG&E Line

Customer’s Portable Building

Guy

36” x 36” Working Space

(see Note 7 on Page 11) 24” Maximum
(see Note 5 on Page 13)

Customer’s Temporary Pole

Service Drop
(for details, see Note 1 on 1
Page 8 and Detail A on Page 9) Customer Service Entrance

12 Feet Minimum
Above Ground

PG&E
Meter
15

36” Minimum
75” Maximum

Figure 16
Portable Structure (non-substantial)
(see Note 2 on Page 11)

025055 Page 14 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

Temporary Commercial Service to Substantial Portable Structure

Notes
1. Substantial Building
See Note 2 on Page 13 for an explanation of a “substantial” portable building.
2. Structure Anchoring
To prevent overturning, the structure is required to be securely anchored in place using one of the following methods:
A. Four 2” x 4” minimum wood stakes driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground and attached to the
framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.
B. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the
ground and attached to the framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.
C. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to a 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into
the ground with a cross member of each stake firmly contacting the upper surface of the timber used as a
base or skid for the structure.
Note: Methods 2A and 2B above describe the preferred methods of attaching the stakes to the structure
framework. However, four 16d (8-gauge, 3-1/2-inch) common nails per stake may be used in lieu of the bolts or
lag screws, providing the wood is in good enough condition to permit a secure attachment.
3. Periscope Mast Bracing
Two galvanized steel braces, securely bolted or lagged to the structure’s framework with approximately a 90°
spread, must be installed. Use 3/4-inch galvanized rigid steel pipe or 1-1/4” x 1-1/4” x 1/8” galvanized steel angle
(minimum size).
4. Service Disconnection
When initial service is disconnected, sufficient service drop cable should be left connected to the service entrance
cable to permit the future splicing of service cable from the ground level. This practice will limit the need for
placement of ladders against the periscope mast when the structure is moved to a new location.
5. The working space in front of the meter must not be obstructed.
6. For temporary underground commercial service to substantial portable structures, see Document 036670.

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 15 of 17

OH: Services
Greenbook Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles
EMWP

Temporary Commercial Service to Substantial Portable Structure (continued)

Customer’s Portable Building Braces Securely Bolted or
Lagged to Structure
Framework

Bracing
(see Note 3 on Page 15)

36” x 36” Working Space

(see Note 5 on Page 13)
Customer Service Entrance
Service Drop

18” Max.

1-1/4” Rigid Steel or

2” Aluminum IPS
(minimum)

16’ 0” Minimum

PG&E
Meter

36” Minimum
75” Maximum

24” Approx.

See Note 2 on Page 15

Figure 17
Portable Structure - Substantial
(see Note 2 on Page 13)

025055 Page 16 of 17 Rev. #16: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles EMWP

PG&E Approved Pole

Removable Cap on the Top of the Conduit

Secure the Conduit to the Pole Using Three Heavy Duty Pipe
Straps and 10D Galvanized Nails. One at the Top,
One in the Middle, and One at the Bottom of the Conduit.
12” Above Grade
Grade Level

3/4 − inch Schedule 40

PVC Conduit with Caps

See Table 3 on
Page 3
Pole Setting
Depths
Backfill and Compact to
90% of Maximum Density

Permanent Cap on the

Bottom Bottom of the Conduit
of Pole

Figure 18
Pole Depth Verification

Revision Notes
Revision 16 has the following changes:
1. Updated Reference section.
2. Updated Note 7D. Removed Note 7.I. On Page 2.
3. Updated Table 1 on Page 3.
4. Updated Table 2 on Page 3.
5. Updated Table 4 on Page 3.
6. Edited Note 9.D on Page 4.
7. Edited Note 25 and 26, added Notes 27, 28, 29 30, 31, 32, 33on Page 6.
8. Edited Table 5, and 6 on Page 7.
9. Edited Figure 2 on Page 8, and Figure 5 on Page 10.
10. Edited Figure 13 on Page 12.
11. Added Figure 15 on Page 13.
12. Added Figure 18 on Page 17.

Rev. #16: 8/15/17 025055 Page 17 of 17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

SECONDARY ELECTRIC UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES 028028

Asset Type: Gas and Electric Distribution Function: Construction, Maintenance, and Operation

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #19: This document replaces PG&E Document 028028, Rev. #18. For a description of the changes, see Page 15.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
Purpose and Scope
This document provides specifications, ordering information, illustrations, and application instructions for the various
sizes of non-concrete and precast concrete enclosures used in PG&E electric underground secondary distribution.
General Information
1. The words boxes/enclosures have the same meaning and are used interchangeably.
2. The design loads for these subsurface enclosures are specified in Engineering Material Specification No. 51,
“Non-Concrete Enclosures”, and in Engineering Material Specification No. 53, “Electric Underground Concrete
Enclosures”
3. Requirements for non-concrete, non-deliberate vehicular traffic enclosures and covers:
A. Non-concrete enclosures for incidental loading must meet the requirements of Engineering Material
Specification No. 51, “Non-Concrete Enclosures.”.
B. The cover and exposed portions of a enclosure shall be of a concrete color.
C. Enclosures shall comply with this document concerning marking, security devices, and dimensions.
D. Enclosure covers must have PG&E identification. The enclosure body and cover must be labeled with the
manufacturer’s name, enclosure weight, and have the PG&E code number on inside surfaces.
E. The cover shall be made of polymer concrete and shall have a PG&E-approved high coefficient of friction
(0.65 or better), slip-resistant surface.
F. Non-concrete parts shall be interchangeable.
4. Requirements for concrete enclosures:
A. Concrete enclosures for full-traffic must meet the requirements of the latest ASTM C-857.
B. enclosures shall also comply with this document’s requirements, such as marking, security devices, and
dimensions.
C. Concrete parts shall be interchangeable. Concrete joints shall be interchangeable with those shown in
Figure 10 on Page 10, Figure 12 on Page 12, and Figure 14 on Page 14.
D. Covers shall have a PG&E-approved high coefficient of friction (0.65 or better), slip-resistant surface.
E. Enclosure covers must have PG&E identification. The enclosure body, cover, and extension must be labeled
with the manufacturer’s name, enclosure weight, and have the PG&E code number on inside surfaces.
5. Requirements for pedestals:
A. Pedestals must meet the WUC Guide 3.6 sidewall deflection criteria with 600 pounds per square foot (psf)
applied to the base per the WUC Guide 3.6 test protocol.
B. Pedestal covers must withstand, without damage, 60 foot-pound impact test with a 2-1/2 inch diameter test
tup dropped directly on top of the cover.
C. Pedestals shall comply with this document’s requirements, such as marking, security devices, and
dimensions.
D. The pedestal covers must have PG&E identification. The pedestal body and covers must be labeled with the
manufacturer’s name and shall be Muncell green in color.

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 1 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Application
6. Consider the following when selecting enclosure/pedestal sizes:
A. Secondary non-concrete enclosures are the preferred method of terminating 600 V conductors in residential,
small commercial applications and in areas where heavy, non-deliberate vehicular traffic is expected. In flood
plains and areas that experience snowfall, secondary pedestals should be installed. Do not use secondary
pedestals where wild grassland fires are prevalent. Concrete secondary enclosures should be installed in
areas where full-vehicular traffic is expected.
B. Ultimate predictable conductor size and number.
C. Location of duct entrances, cable layout, and minimum bending radius of cables.
7. The 26” deep enclosures are required for installations of conductors larger than 4/0.
8. When setting concrete enclosures in place, use spacers to adjust the enclosure to grade. Install enclosures as
level as practical, but do not exceed 1/8” per foot slope in any direction. Place grout in and around duct entrances.
Do not pave over the enclosure cover.
9. Secondary enclosures shall not be used for primary cable.
10. Swedge reducers are necessary with conduit smaller than the terminators supplied (see Document 062288).
11. All conduits are to be stubbed a minimum of 2” and 4” maximum from ground level inside the pedestal or 1-1/2”
min. − 2-1/2” max. from ground level inside the subsurface enclosure. See Figure 5 on Page 5 and Figure 8 on
Page 8. End bells are required.
12. For new construction, conduit entry shall be as shown in Figure 4 on Page 5 for pedestals and Figure 8 and
Figure 9 on Page 8 for splice boxes. Group conduits at one end of the box to achieve maximum cable length to
avoid exceeding minimum cable bending radius.
13. For new construction, conduit entry into the #2 and #3 concrete enclosures shall also be as shown in Figure 8 and
Figure 9 on Page 8.
14. When replacing an existing box or installing new conduits into an existing box, the conduits may enter through the
terminals or knockouts. For conduits entering through the knockouts a transitioning to less than 24” of cover at the
entrance of the box is allowed. This note only applies to existing installations.
15. Conduits that do not terminate in a duct terminator or belled end must be fitted with an end bell.
16. Enclosures shall be set on a 6-inch, 3/4” Class 2 Aggregate Base (AB).
17. See Document 066205 for replacement parts for older style installations.

References Location Document

Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground
Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 015251
Multi-Tap Splice for 600-Volt Insulated Cables . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036640
Straight and Tap Splice for 600 Volt Insulated Cable . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051034
Identification Plates for Subsurface Enclosures . . . . . . UG-1: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051768
Primary Electric Underground Equipment Enclosures . UG-1: Enclosures/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 062000
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Enclosure Repair/Replacement Criteria and
Replacement Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066205
PG&E Approved Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066211
Engineering Material Specification No. 51,
“Non-Concrete Enclosures” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS51
Engineering Material Specification No. 53,
“Electric Underground Concrete Enclosures” . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS53

028028 Page 2 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Table 1 Guide for Application of Splice Boxes and Pedestals in New Construction for Underground
Secondary Using Multi-Tap Splices (see Document 036640) 1
Enclosure Size Pedestal Size 2
Description − 11-1/2” 13” x 24” 17” x 30” 24” x 36” 36”x60” 3 10” x 14” 14” x 22”
4 Terminal #6 Str. − 350kcmil x4 − − x −
6 Terminal #6 Str. − 350 kcmil x 4 − − x −
8 Terminal #6 Str. − 350 kcmil − x4 − − x
4 Terminal 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil − x 4, 5 x − x
6 Terminal 4/0 − 1,000 kcmil − x 4, 5 x − x
(4) #6 − 350, (2)
6 Terminal For − x 4, 5 x − x
4/0 − 1,000 kcmil For
Service
(4) #6 − 350, (4) Streetlight
8 Terminal Runs and − x 4, 5 x − x
4/0 − 1,000 kcmil Applications
Non-Bus
Only
8 Terminal Bar
(see Note 2
(one-way Splices
4/0 − 1,000 kcmil on Page 6) − − x − −
configuration (4/0 max)
)
8 Terminal
(two-way
4/0 − 1,000 kcmil − − x − −
configuration
)
8 Terminal
(two-way
4/0 − 1,000 kcmil − − x − −
configuration
)
1 For approved suppliers, see Document 066211.
2 For single-phase applications only.
3 If using splices, 36” x 60” enclosure can accommodate up to 14 runs (7 in and 7 out or combination) of
1,000 kcmil or smaller wires.
4 350 kcmil and larger conductor installations require a 26-inch deep non-concrete enclosure or a 12-inch extension
with a concrete enclosure.
5 The maximum number of runs of 750 kcmil and 1,000 kcmil conductors will be limited to a total of 2 runs (1 in and
1 out); otherwise a 36” x 60” enclosure is needed.

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 3 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Installation of Enclosures in Special-Finish Sidewalks

Notes
1. Frequently the customer or city (or other public entity) installs special-finish sidewalks (brick, tile, terrazzo, etc.).
When required with enclosures through 3’ x 5’, the enclosure and standard cover shall be installed 2-inch
below the final grade, and the customer or city shall furnish and install the special-finish cover as illustrated in
Figure 1 on Page 4
2. The requirements for this cover shall be as follows:
A. No single section of cover shall exceed 125 pounds.
B. Provisions for removal shall be provided.
C. The special-finish cover shall be identified by the letter “E” to indicate the location of the PG&E splice
enclosure.
D. This type of enclosure shall not be installed in locations where vehicular traffic is expected.
E. Caution: PG&E cover design allows for a maximum of 1/2-inch deflection under an 8,000-pound or
12,000-pound design load, depending on the specified cover.

Lifting Eye
Timber Sidewalk Surface
Sidewalk 2”
Special-Finish Cover

Suspend Body
During Pouring to
Make Flush with
PG&E enclosure
Sidewalk
and Cover

Full Radius Bends

Figure 1 Figure 2
Installation of Enclosures in Installation of Non-Concrete Enclosures
Special-Finish Sidewalks in Sidewalks

028028 Page 4 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Secondary Pedestals

Notes
1. See Document 036640 for appropriate sized connector.
2. The 10” x 14” pedestal can be used for conductor combinations through 6-way, 350 kcmil.
3. The 14” x 22” pedestal can be used for conductor combinations through 8-way, #4 Str. − 1,000 kcmil;
#4 Str − 350 kcmil.

Table 2 Dimensions and Codes for Secondary Pedestals

Type A B C D E F G Weight Code
10” x 14” 14-1/2” 10-1/4” 24” 22” 18-5/8” 14-5/8” 2” 20 lbs. 360007
14” x 22” 22-1/2” 14-1/2” 24-1/2” 22” 25” 17-1/2” 2” 30 lbs. 360006

B A

Suggested
Ground
Line
≈ 5”

C
Figure 4
Preferred Location of
Conduits Entering Pedestal
G E
F
Figure 3
Dimensions of Secondary Pedestal Enclosure

1
2
≈ 5” N

Ground Line

≈ 17” Conduit Height in Pedestal:

2” Minimum and
4” Maximum Above Sand

36” Trench Depth (minimum)

Side View

Figure 5
Secondary Pedestal Enclosure Installation

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 5 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Streetlight Enclosure Assembly

Notes
1. In conduit systems, enter the bottom of the box with 90° sweeps.
2. Do not connect more than two streetlights per enclosure.
3. Three is the maximum number of conduits allowed.
4. For streetlight applications only (see Table 1 on Page 3).

Pent-Head Bolt
3/8” SS Bolt for
Cover Bolt-Down
9-3/8”

2”

Table 3 Codes for Streetlight Box Components

“Snap-Lock” Tab Description Code
Cover 032509
10” Body 032510
Dia. Complete Assembly 032511

2-1/4” x 3-1/2”
Conduit or
Cable Opening
10” (two places)

11-1/2”
Diameter

13-1/8”
Diameter

Figure 6
Streetlight
Enclosure

028028 Page 6 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Non-Concrete Enclosure for Incidental Traffic

Note
1. See Table 4 on Page 8 and Table 5 on Page 9 for box dimensions.

Bolt-Down Feature, Pent-Head, Coil Thread,

1/2” x Length as Required, 1/2” Nut, Two Locations
(see Detail A) E
C

G
Drain
Slot
F Square
Nut
D
R
Plan View
Detail A

Concrete Key (1-1/2” x 15”) Thru Holes for Lifting Eye Bolts (two lifting eye bolts on the
(one each side) 13” x 24” box,
A Q 17” x 30” box and four
on the 24” x 36” box)

B V W Single Knockout on
13” x 24” x 26” Box
4-3/4” x 4-3/4”

T
U
Minimum Inside Opening
Minimum Inside Opening
Hole for 1/2” Bolt With L S
Recess for Head
(see Detail A)
1/2”
PG&E J K
4”
M
N

Plan View End View

P
H

I
Side View
Figure 7
Cover

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 7 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Non-Concrete Enclosures for Incidental Traffic (continued)

1-1/2” Min. − Table 4 Codes for Enclosure Components and

2-1/2” Max. Assemblies
Enclosure
Size Depth Description Code
(inches) (inches)
18 Body 040931
18 Assembly 1 040933
26 Body 040920
13 x 24
26 Assembly 1 040935
8,000 lb Cover 043716
− −
#2 Box 18 Body 040928
17” x 30” 18 Assembly 1 040936
26 Body 040929
17 x 30 2 1
Secondary 26 Assembly 040937
8,000 lb Cover 043720
− −
Service Service 18 Body 040930
18 Assembly 1 040940
26 Body 040919
24 x 36 1
Top View 26 Assembly 040942
Figure 8 8,000 lb Cover 043724
Location of Conduits Entering 17” x 30” − −
Splice Box 2-1/2” 192853
Pent-Head Bolt
All Coil Thread 3-1/2” 017488
1/2” x 4-1/2” 017489
1 Includes cover and body.
2 Only six conduits allowed in 17” x 30” boxes.

#3 Box
24” x 36”

Secondary
Service Service

Top View
Figure 9
Location of Conduits Entering 24” x 36”
Splice Box

028028 Page 8 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

Non-Concrete Enclosures for Incidental Traffic (continued)

Table 5 Dimensions of Non-Concrete Enclosures
Enclosure Size Dimensions (inches)
(inches) A B C D E F G H I J
13 x 24 x 18 25-1/4 18 9-7/8 5-1/8 23-1/2 14 1-1/2 − − −
− − − − − − − − − − −
13 x 24 x 26 25-1/4 26 − − 29-1/4 19-3/4 − − − −
13 x 24
− − − − − − − 23-1/4 23 13-3/4
Cover
17 x 30 x 18 32-1/2 18 13-1/4 6-3/4 30-3/4 17-3/4 1-1/2 − − −
− − − − − − − − − − −
17 x 30 x 26 32-1/2 26 − − 30-3/4 17-3/4 − − − −
17 x 30
− − − − − - − 30-1/2 30-1/4 17-1/2
Cover
24 x 36 x 18 37-7/8 18 15-9/16 9-3/4 35-7/8 24-1/4 5-1/8 − − −
− − − − − − − − − − −
24 x 36 x 26 37-7/8 26 15-9/16 9-3/4 35-7/8 24-1/4 5-1/8 − − −
24 x 36
− − − − − − − 35-5/8 35-1/8 24
Cover

Enclosure Size Dimensions (inches)

(inches) K L M N P Q R S T U
13 x 24 x 18 − − − − − 15-3/4 4-5/8 24-7/8 15-3/8
− − − − − − − − − − −
13 x 24 x 26 − − − − − 15-3/4 4-1/2 − 25-3/16 15-5/8
13 x 24
13-1/2 9-7/8 5-1/8 1-3/8 2 − − 8 − −
Cover
17 x 30 x 18 − − − − − 19-1/2 4-5/8 − 32-1/8 19-1/8
− − − − − − − − − − −
17 x 30 x 26 − − − − − 19-1/2 4-1/2 32-3/8 19-3/8
17 x 30
17-1/4 13-1/4 6-3/4 1-3/8 2 − − 9 − −
Cover
24 x 36 x 18 − − − − − 26 6 − 37-1/4 25-5/8
− − − − − − − − − − −
24 x 36 x 26 − − − − − 26 6 − 37-9/16 25-15/16
24 x 36
23-1/2 15-9/16 9-3/4 5 3 − − 11 − −
Cover

Table 6 Knockout Dimensions from Center of Wall of Non-Concrete

Enclosures
Dimensions (inches)
Enclosure Size 1 Number of Knockouts
V W
13” x 24” x 26” 7-1/2 0 6
17” x 30” x 26” 10-1/2 5 8
24” x 36” x 26” 11 5-1/2 8
1 Knockouts in 26” deep enclosures only.

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 9 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

17” x 30” (#2) Concrete Enclosures for Full-Vehicular Traffic

Notes
1. Grade adjustment, when required, shall be made between the box and the extension or top section.
2. A base is not required.
3. All concrete parts shall be permanently identified as to the manufacturer on the inside surface. The weight
shall be stenciled on the outside of all concrete parts.
4. All concrete parts shall be provided with four 7/8-inch diameter, 1-3/4-inch minimum deep inserts with UNC
Class 2A threads.
5. Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail B.
6. Install mastic sealant provided with enclosure assembly for all concrete-to-concrete joints below surface level.
7. The identification plate is to be welded to the frame by the manufacturer (see Document 051768 and Figure 10).
8. For new construction conduits shall enter the enclosure using 90 degree elbows rising into the enclosure.
Refer to Figure 8 and Figure 9 on Page 8.

Width = 10-1/2”
38” Length = 17”
B
30” 4”

1-3/4”
1/4” Fillet Weld 1-1/4”
Both Sides 1” Enclosure
22” 18” 25”
2”
A 9” A 1-1/4”

1-1/2”

B Detail B
35” Bolt-Down Feature Tongue and Groove
7/8” Dia. Plan (see Detail C on Page 11)
Insert, See See Detail B, Install
See Note 7
Note 4 Mastic Sealant
4” L 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 3/16” Bar 1-1/2” x 3/16”

C
6” L

3”
5” 5”
12” 12”
18”
10-1/2” 6-1/2”
3-1/4”

12 - 4” Dia. Plastic Duct

Section A-A
Terminators Cast in Walls
Figure 10 Section B-B
Concrete Enclosure

028028 Page 10 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

17” x 30” (#2) Concrete Boxes for Full-Vehicular Traffic (continued)

34-3/8”
3/4” Dia. 1-1/2”
Blind Lift 2-1/2” x 2” x 1/4”
Hole 9-7/8” 2”
6” Section D-D
18” B/B 21-3/8”
6”
C C Table 7 Codes for Complete 17” x 30” Concrete
D
Box Assemblies
Box
2” 9” 9” D Code 1
Type Depth
1-1/4” Slot Full-Vehicular-Traffic 24” 019588
in Cover Plate With Slip-Resistant Cover 30” 019597
Bar 1-1/4” x 1/4” x 4” Extension 6” 043517
with 9/16” Dia. Hole 1 PG&E assembly code includes body with a 6” or 12”
top section with cast-in frame and a cover. If more
Cover depth is required, order the 6” extension.

7” 7” 7” 7” 7”
Slip-Resistant Steel Plate

3/16” Fillet
Weld Both Bar 2” x 1/4”
Sides L 2” x 2” x 1/4”
3/16” Fillet L 2-1/2” x 2” x 1/4”
Weld One Side

Section C-C

Bolt Head Is Flush With Cover

1/2”-12 NC x 1-3/4” Pent-Head Bolt
Channel, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” x 1-1/2” Long,
Unistrut P-1000 With 1/2” -13 NC Nut

Detail C
Bolt-Down Feature

Figure 11
17” x 30” Cover

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 11 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

24” x 36” (#3) Concrete Boxes for Full-Vehicular Traffic

Notes
1. Grade adjustment, when required, shall be made between the box and the extension or top section.
2. A base is not required.
3. All concrete parts shall be permanently identified as to the manufacturer on the inside surface. The weight
shall be stenciled on the outside of all concrete parts.
4. All concrete parts shall be provided with four 7/8-inch diameter, 1-3/4-inch minimum deep inserts with UNC Class
2A threads.
5. Joint must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail D.
6. Install masitic sealant provided with enclosure assembly for all concrete-to-concrete joints below surface level.
7. The identification plate is to be welded to the frame by the manufacturer (see Document 051768 and Figure 12).
8. For new construction conduits shall enter the enclosure using 90 degree elbows rising into the enclosure.
Refer to Figure 8 and Figure 9 on Page 8.
F
Width = 14”
44” Length = 20”
36”
4”
C
L
1/4” Fillet Weld
1-3/4”
Both Sides
Enclosure
1”
29” 24” 32” 1-1/4”
2”
1-1/4”
E E
12”
1-1/2”

Detail D
41”
Tongue and Groove
Bolt-Down Feature F
(see Detail E on Page 13) See Detail D, Install
Mastic Sealant
Plan
See Note 7 Bar
4” L 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 3/16” 1-1/2” x 3/16”

6” 4”

3”
12 - 4” Dia.
14-1/2” 14-1/2” Plastic Duct
7/8” Dia. Insert, 7-1/2” 7-1/2” Terminators
See Note 4 Cast in Walls
24”
13-1/2”
6-1/2”

3-1/4”
Section E-E Section F-F
Figure 12
24” x 36” Concrete Box

028028 Page 12 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

24” x 36” (#3) Concrete Boxes for Full-Vehicular Traffic (continued)

3/4” Dia. Blind

Lift Hole
40-3/8” 1-1/2”
3” x 2” x 1/4”
Section H-H

Table 8 Codes for Complete 24” x 36”

9” 25” B/B
2” Concrete Box Assemblies
28-3/8” Box
Code 1
G G Type Depth
9”
Full-Vehicular-Traffic With 30” 019598
Slip-Resistant Cover 36” 019599
H Extension 6” 043521
2” H 1 PG&E assembly code includes body, 6” or 12”
12” 12”
top section with cast-in frame and cover. If more
Bar 1-1/4” x 1/4” x 4” depth is required, order a 6” extension.
1-1/4” Slot
With 9/16” Dia. Hole
in Cover Plate
Cover

5-1/2”
15/16” 15/16”
Slip-Resistant Steel Plate

Bar 3” x 1/8” Bar 2” x 1/4”

(two required) 3/16” Fillet
Weld Both Sides L 3” x 2” x 1/4”
3/16” Fillet Weld
One Side
Section G-G

Bolt Head Is Flush With Cover

1/2” x 1-3/4” Pent-Head Bolt

Channel,
1-5/8” x 1-5/8” x 1-1/2”
Long, Unistrut P-1000
With 1/2” -13 NC Spring
Nut

Detail E
Bolt-Down Feature
Figure 13
24” x 36” Steel Cover

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 13 of 15

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

36” x 60” (#5) Incidental, Full-Vehicular Traffic and Heavy Full-Vehicular Traffic Concrete Boxes
Notes
1. Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail F.
2. Install mastic sealant included with the enclosure assembly for all concrete-to-concrete joints below surface level.
3. Pulling irons shall be designed for 20,000 pounds ultimate, with a safety factor of 2 (40,000 pounds).
4. Boxes shall be lifted using pulling irons in the floor.
5. For new construction, a 12” extension is required.
6. Install Full-Vehicular Traffic (FTV) enclosure assembly with quick-release covers in locations not subject to
high-density traffic with speeds exceeding 25 mph. Typical allowable locations are alley, residential driveways
and parking strips.

Tongue and CL CL Enclosure

Groove Width
J 20-1/4”
Length
32-1/4”

6”
14” Dia. Sump, 6” 1-5/8”
3” 4” Deep 1”
5/8”
1” Dia. Holes for Ground
I I 2-1/8”
Rod (two places) (blind)
Flush Pull Irons 1-1/4” 1-1/8”
(four places)
10” 2-1/4”

4-1/2”
Min.
J 30 - 5” Dia. Plastic Detail F
Duct Terminators Tongue and Groove
Plan View
See Detail F, Install Mastic Sealant
4-1/2” 60” 4-1/2” 36”
Required
Extension 10” 30” 12”

6” C
L
9-1/2”
7” 8-1/2”
13-1/2” 9” 9-1/2”
30”
7-1/8”
7-1/8”

14” 11”
7”

69” 45”

Section I-I Section J-J

Figure 14
36” x 60” Concrete Box

028028 Page 14 of 15 Rev. #19: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Secondary Electric Underground Enclosures

36” x 60” (#5) Incidental, Full-Vehicular Traffic and Heavy Full-Vehicular Traffic Concrete
Boxes (continued)

Table 9 Codes for 36” x 60” Concrete Box

Box
Code
Type Depth
Incidental-Traffic Assembly 032506
Full-Traffic Assembly 042019
30”
Heavy Full-Traffic Assembly 032507 1
Body 032508
Extension 12” 043362
1 This code includes a 12” extension to accommodate the heavy full-traffic cover.

Revision Notes
Revision 19 has the following changes:
1. Added additional requirements: EMS 53 to Note 2 on Page 1.
2. Revised Note 11 on Page 3.
3. Added net Note 13 and re-numbered Notes 14 − 17 accordingly.
4. Added EMS 53 on Reference Section.
5. Added Note 8 on Page 10.
6. Added Note 8 on Page 12.
7. Revised title on Page 14 and 15. Added Notes 5 and 6 on Page 14.
8. Added material code for FVT enclosure assembly and for 12” extension in Table 9 on Page 15.

Rev. #19: 08-15-17 028028 Page 15 of 15

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

TEMPORARY UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC 036670

SERVICE SINGLE-PHASE, 120/240 VOLT, 200 AMPS MAXIMUM

Asset Type: Electric Metering Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Quoc Hoang (QxH1) Date: 07-31-15

Rev. #04: This document replaces PG&E Document 036670, Rev. #03. For a description of the changes, see Page 4.
This document is also included in the following manuals:
• Gas and Electric Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope

This document shows minimum requirements for a customer-installed wood post or portable structure for temporary
installation of a single-phase 120/240 V 200-amp maximum underground electric service. PG&E cannot establish
service to posts which do not meet these minimum requirements. The maintenance of customer-owned service posts
in conformity with these requirements is the sole responsibility of the customer.

General Information

1. Local ordinances may include requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection
authorities for these requirements. In areas where local ordinances require permits and inspection, these must be
obtained before PG&E can establish service. Meters will be installed and energized by PG&E after the customer’s
metering equipment has been properly installed and after an inspection clearance has been given to PG&E by the
appropriate electrical inspection authority.
2. Definition of a “temporary service:” Service for enterprises or activities which are limited to one year or less in duration.
3. If temporary overhead wires are to be extended from poles, the poles shall conform to requirements of G.O. 95, as
shown in Document 025055.
4. Customer shall install conduit and cable as required by local codes.
5. The customer must contact the Underground Service Alert (USA) or PG&E to locate and mark underground
facilities in the work area. Failure to do so can result in injury to personnel and/or costly damage to utility facilities.
6. When single-phase service larger than 200-amps or three-phase service is desired, consult PG&E.
7. Service Post Installation (see Page 3)
A The use of temporary service posts shall be restricted to installation of a temporary nature, such as building
construction, temporary sales locations, etc. Temporary service posts shall be furnished and installed by the
customer. If the temporary service is to be established at the permanent meter location, consult PG&E.
B Minimum dimensions of posts shall be 4” x 6” x 7’ 0” long and depth of setting shall be 24 inches minimum.
C Post installations shall be in protected locations, out of the way of vehicular traffic or other hazardous conditions.
8. Service to Substantial Portable Structure (see Page 4)
A Portable buildings, such as small sheds, combined office/toilet structures, etc., are not considered to be
substantial structures unless staked in place in the manner shown in Figure 3 on Page 4.
B Temporary underground service to a portable building will only be connected to a substantial portable
structure. For definition of substantial portable structure and method of installation, see Figure 3 on Page 4,
Note 8A on Page 1, and Note 1 on Page 4.

Rev. #04: 07-31-15 036670 Page 1 of 4

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EMWP Temporary Underground Electric
Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum
9. Grounding
The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts.
Grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local ordinances except that the grounding
wire shall be protected against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored copper ground wire may be
used (minimum #8 AWG copper). For installation, see Figure 1 on Page 3.
10. Service Trench
The minimum conduit depth shown in Figure 1 on Page 3 and Figure 3 on Page 4, may be reduced from
24 inches to 18 inches for the length of the customer’s service trench. However, in the vicinity of PG&E’s splice
box, the conduit depth must be 24 inches to assure proper entry into boxes’ conduit knockout. Splice boxes
without extensions do not require a 24-inch trench depth at the box location. Contact PG&E to determine if the
splice box has an extension.

References Location Document

Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025055
Rules for Overhead Electric Line Construction . . . . . . . . Technical Information Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 95

036670 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #04: 07-31-15

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Temporary Underground Electric EMWP
Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum
Service Post Installation
Notes
1. The customer’s cables will be connected by PG&E. The customer is to contact PG&E when they are ready to
extend the conduit and cable into the splice box. Customer runs adequately insulated unstripped cable into the
splice box Customer’s cables are to extend a minimum of 24 inches into the splice box.
2. PG&E secondary splice box is normally located adjacent to the sidewalk. Consult PG&E for exact location. If a
splice box is not present, PG&E will install an appropriate splice box at the customer’s expense.
3. Conduit is to enter the splice box through knockout positions only.
4. Meter height can be reduced to a minimum of 36” if the meter is enclosed or guarded by a hinged protective hood.

See Note 3
on Page 1 1 2

11 1

3
Street Property Line

PG&E’s Splice Box 4 48” Min.

With Extension 72” Max.
3 4

Sidewalk 48” Min.

See Ground 8 6 Figure 2
Note 1 Line 5 Alternate Metering
(overhead style enclosure)

18” 7
18” Min.
See 24” Min.
Note 3 2
8”

9 2” Max. See Note 4 on Page 1 and

See Note 2
Figure 1 Note 10 on Page 2
Service Post Metering
Preferred Installation

Table 1 Materials to be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

Item Description
1 Service Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket Panel
2 Post, Minimum Dimension 4” x 6” x 7’ 0” Long (see Note 7B on Page 1)
3 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, or Schedule 80 Pvc 1-1/2” Minimum I.D. for #2 or 1/0 Aluminum Service Cable
4 Weatherproof Outlets
5 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, With Pipe Strap (for bare ground wire, omit if armor clad wire used)
6 Hub and Clamp, Grounding, to Suit Item 5
7 Ground Rod (see Note 9 on Page 2)
8 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare or Armor Clad (size in accordance with applicable electrical codes and local requirements)
9 Conduit Bushing or Bell End (as required)
Service Termination Enclosure, 8” x 12” x 4”, Rain-Tight, Circle AW No. R-9007A or Equivalent (see Note 2 on
10
Page 4)
11 Conduit Fitting, Threaded With Cover and Gasket (size to suit Item 3)

Rev. #04: 07-31-15 036670 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EMWP Temporary Underground Electric
Service Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum
Commercial Service to Substantial Portable Structure
Notes
1. Structure Anchoring: To prevent overturning, the structure is required to be securely anchored in place using one of
the following methods:
A. Four 2” x 4” minimum wood stakes driven a minimum of 24 inches into the ground and attached to the
framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.
B. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the
ground and attached to the framework of the structure using 1/4-inch minimum bolts or lag screws.
C. Four steel stakes having strength equivalent to 3/4-inch rigid steel pipe driven a minimum of 24 inches into the
ground with a cross member of each stake firmly contacting the upper surface of the timber used as a base or
skid for the structure.
D. Methods A and B described the preferred methods of attaching the stakes to the structure framework.
However, four 16d (8 gauge 3-1/2”) common nails per stake may be used in lieu of the bolts or lag screws,
providing the wood is in good enough condition to permit a secure attachment.
2. Item 10 may only be used if the service conductor is 1/0 AWG or smaller.

Substantial Portable Structure Conduit

See Note 8A on Page 1 Support
Street A
Property
Line 10 See
48” Conduit 1
Min. Note 2
Support 1

4 4
8 3
3 48” Min. 5 5 36” Min.
72” Max. 75” Max.
5 8 8
6
6 6
Ground Line 3

See 24”
To PG&E’s Splice Box 18” Note 1
7 7
with Extension, See Min. See
Figure 1 on Page 3 6” Max. See
Note 1
Note 1
7
See Note 4 on Section A-A Section A-A
Page 1 and Preferred Installation Alternate Installation
Note10 on Page 2 A
Figure 3
Portable Structure Metering

Revision Notes
Revision 04 has the following changes:
1. Revised 100 Amp to 200 Amp maximum.
2. Revised Note 1 on Page 3 :customer is to contact PG&E when they are ready to extend the conduit and cable into
the splice box.

036670 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #04: 07-31-15

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF 038193

CONDUIT AND INSULATED CABLE

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #11: This document replaces PG&E Document 038193, Rev. #10 For a description of the changes, see Page 16.

Purpose and Scope

This document describes the minimum requirements for the design and installation of conduit and pulling insulated
cables.

References Location Document

Installation of Three-Phase, 600-Amp, Subsurface
Sectionalizing Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050859
600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051071
Utility Procedure TD-2951P−01, “Request for
Variance Distribution Standards” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2951P-01
Duct System Design
There are many variables involved in designing underground duct systems and installing cables that are peculiar to
each installation and cannot be covered in this guide. Some of these variables are listed below:
1. Physical requirements of the installation.
2. Limitations of available cable-pulling and reel-handling equipment.
A. 1,000 pounds maximum for a single grip, 2,000 pounds maximum for two or more grips.
B. 10,000 pounds maximum for reusable mechanical pulling eyes.
3. Number and radius of sweeps.
A. Sidewall bearing pressure (1,000 pounds x radius).
4. Deflections, changes in direction, and obstructions encountered during conduit installation.
5. Coefficient of friction (COF) between cable and conduit surfaces.
6. Maximum allowable pulling tension for the cable size under consideration.
Conduit and Substructure Installation
Conduit and substructure installation must comply with the job design and construction documents. When deviation
from the original design is required due to field conditions, the originating engineering department must be notified and
will determine if the deviation will require additional substructures. Follow the variance request. See Utility Procedure
TD-2951P-01.
It is preferred to install conduit around a bio swale. If is not feasible to go around the bio swale, primary and/or
secondary conduits under the bio swale must be installed following the requirements below:
1. Option #1
A. Install conduits with a minimum cover of 48” between the top of the conduit and the bottom of the bio swale.
B. 6” sand bed below conduit
C. Use Schedule 40 PVC, and install a spare conduit
D. Install conduit 36” past bio swale on each side
E. 6” sand bed on top of conduit

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 1 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

F. Complete trench fill with native dirt

2. Option #2 (if option #1 is not feasible)
A. Install conduits with a minimum cover or 36” between the top of the conduit and the bottom of the bio swale.
B. 6” sand bed below conduit
C. Install Schedule 40 PVC, and install spare conduit
D. Run conduit 3’ past bio swale on each side
E. 6” sand bed on top of conduit
F. 3” Red Slurry Cap
G. Complete trench fill with native dirt
3. Option #3
A. Use horizontal directional drilling (HDD) to install conduits crossing existing bio swales.
B. The minimum depth burial for HDD is 48” from the bottom of existing bio swales.
To minimize the possibility of cable damage during installation, these design parameters should be followed:
1. The total number of factory bends installed in conduit run for primary cable shall not exceed
300 degrees, including the bend at the feed-in location.
2. The total number of factory bends installed in conduit runs for secondary cable and services having a maximum
length of 200 feet shall not exceed 315 degrees, including the bend at the feed in location. If the total length of
conduit run exceeds 200 feet, then the total number of factory bends for secondary and service cable will be
300 degrees.
3. The maximum length of any straight conduit run (no bends) should not exceed 1,200 feet.
4. The calculated pulling tension for the non-preferred (highest) direction shall be used as the limiting pulling tension.
5. When the conduit run includes bends (300 degrees or less), the maximum length of the run shall be limited to
800 feet.
6. For secondary, services, and 200-Amp primary applications, the conduit run should not exceed 600 feet if there is
a 90 degree bend within 10’ of both ends of the conduit run.
7. The first 18 inches of conduits leaving any primary underground enclosure should be straight with no factory
bends.
To avoid potential burn-through of sweeps, use polyester pulling tape (Code 560154) as the “P-Line” to initiate cable
pulling.
For each primary cable run, the construction drawing will contain:
1. The calculated pulling tension.
2. A preferred direction of pulling.
3. The maximum allowable pulling tension.
4. A place to record the actual pulling tension and direction of pull.
Pulling Line Rigging
The tension on the pulling line, as seen on the dynamometer, is dependent on the number of rollers and sheaves used
to rig the pulling line and the angle between the line entering and leaving the device. Multiply the calculated pulling
tension on the cable by 5% for each 90° bend of the rope.
The pulling equipment specified for a job should be capable of twice the calculated pulling tension. This is
recommended due to the following variables:
A. Back tension.
B. Condition of the conduit.
C. Temperature of the conduit, cable, and the ambient air temperature.
D. Increase in friction due to rigging.
E. Static (start/stop) friction.

038193 Page 2 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Combinations of the above could increase the actual pulling tension to twice (or more) of the calculated tension.
Attention should be paid to minimizing these factors.
Cable Design
1. No more than one set of 600-Amp separable in any one enclosure is allowed in any one enclosure. One set
means three 600-amp separable assemblies. Figure 1 below shows one 600-Amp separable assembly.
2. No more than three 600-Amp elbows are allowed in any one 600-Amp separable.
3. No more than one set of 200-Amp taps (piggy-backed) off of a set of 600-Amp separable is allowed a 200-Amp tap
from a 600-Amp separable must be made with a reducing tap plug (RTP) and a 200-Amp elbow receptacle, as
shown in Document 051071, “600-Amp Separable Insulated Connectors”. See Figure 1.

200-Amp
200-Amp Elbow
Receptacle

600-Amp 600-Amp

200-Amp Cable
600-Amp

600-Amp Cable

Figure 1
Allowed 600-Amp Separable Splice Assembly

4. No more than four-ways of cable on a 600-Amp subsurface switch is allowed.

A. It is not allowed to tap off (piggy-back) 600-Amp elbows on top of the other 600-Amp elbows at any time on a
switch bushing. See Note 8 under Cable and Equipment in Document 050859.
B. Subsurface switch bushings that are rated at 600-Amps may be converted to 200-Amps by using a bushing
extension and a 600/200-Amp tap/plug.
C. 200-Amp taps that utilize 600-Amp bushing extensions are not considered piggy-back.
D. SCADA installation on 600-Amp subsurface switch is exempt from requirement 2.4. However, whenever
possible install SCADA on 600-Amp subsurface switches with no 200-Amp tap (piggy-backed).
5. No more than four-ways of cable on a 200-Amp pad-mounted or subsurface junction is allowed.
A. A way is a conduit run from point A to point B. It can be one, two or up to three cables.
6. It is not permissible to use 1/0 cable adapters with 600-Amp separable connectors to make a 200-Amp tap.
See Figure 2 on Page 4. Material code for the 1/0 cable adapters is still active to be used for replacement of
existing facility only.

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 3 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

200-Amp
200-Amp Elbow
Receptacle

600-Amp 1/0 Cable Adapter

600-Amp

200-Amp Cable

200-Amp Cable Installed

Using 1/0 Cable Adapter 600-Amp Cable

Figure 2
Not Permissible 600-Amp Separable Splice Assembly

7. When necessary, use one of the following two options to establish additional 200-Amp tap from existing mainline
cables that already has 600-Amp separable with one existing 200-Amp tap.
A. Install a pad-mounted switch, such as I-9 or equivalent. This installation is preferred. See Figure 3.
B. Replace the 600-Amp separable splices with 600-Amp 3-Way Switch, 2-Way Switched subsurface switch. This
installation will allow for establishing two 200-Amp taps using 200-Amp elbows. One 200-Amp tap will be from
the dedicated 200-Amp switched side and the second 200-Amp tap can be made from the top of the 600-Amp
elbows on one of the two 600-Amp positions. See Figure 6 on Page 5.

P 600-Amp
P P
P 200-Amp P
P 200-Amp
P
P 600-Amp
600-Amp
Figure 3
Pad-Mounted I-9 Interrupter Figure 4
(Switch-Interrupter-Interrupter-Switch) 600-Amp 3-Way Switch, 2-Ways
Switched Subsurface Switch

8. Locate the protection devices as close as possible to the mainline tap when designing 200-Amp taps off the
mainline tap. See examples in Figures 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7.

038193 Page 4 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

3-Way, 2-Way Switched Switch

Protective Device
Protective Device
P P

600-Amp
P
600-Amp

P P 5 P
7 P 5 P 5 P
200-Amp Tap 200-Amp Tap
P
200-Amp protection Equipment is not 200-Amp protection Equipment is not
P as close as possible to Mainline Tap as close as possible to Mainline Tap

Figure 5 Figure 6
Bad Design Better Design

600-Amp

3-Way, 3-Way Switched Switch

Interrupter-Switch P

P 600-Amp
PMI

P 5 P P 5 P
200-Amp 200-Amp
P 600-Amp

P Alternative Option
Preferred Option

600-Amp

Figure 7
Best Design

Cable Installation
1. Cable manufacturers’ warranties require the use of approved pulling practices and equipment.
2. Before starting any cable installation or removal operation, all employees must be thoroughly familiar with the safe
operation of the equipment and methods to be used.
3. Provide a reliable means of communications between feed-in and pull-out locations before and during the entire
operation.
4. Provide an adequate number of employees to safely install or remove the cable.
5. The conduit shall be cleared of dirt, rocks, or other debris before starting the cable installation.
6. The practice of attaching the pulling rope to a vehicle and then driving the vehicle to pull in or remove cable may
damage the cable and is prohibited.
7. All cable shall be lubricated (pre-lubed) before installing (see Table 4 and Table 5 on Page 7).
8. The use of a dynamometer or inline tensiometer to monitor the pulling tension during cable installation is
recommended for cable pulls where the calculated pulling tension is less than 50% of the maximum allowable
pulling tension for the cable being installed.

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 5 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

9. The use of a dynamometer or inline tensiometer to monitor the pulling tension during cable installation is required
for cable pulls where the calculated pulling tension is equal to or greater than 50% of the maximum allowable
pulling tension for the cable being pulled.
10. All locations where the actual pulling tensions exceed the calculated tensions by more than 25% must be reported
to the originating engineering department and analyzed to determine the cause of the difference. The information
will be used to improve the design parameters as well as PG&E’s cable-pulling practices.
11. The minimum radius bend that an insulated cable can be subjected to cannot exceed the results of the OD of the
cable times the multiplier shown in Table 1 on Page 6.
Table 1 Minimum Allowable Cable-Bending Radius Multiplier
Type of Cable Multiplier
P&L or PL&N 10
15 and 22 kV XLP-PVC 12
5−35 kV CONC-PVC, LLDPE Encap, or
8
EPR-CONC-PE
5 (500 kcmil and larger)
600 V XLP and EPR&N
4 (less than 500 kcmil)

12. The recommended amount of cable lubricant depends only on the size and length of the conduit system.
The appropriate quantity for use on any given pull can vary from this recommendation depending on the
complexity of the pull. Consider the following factors:
A. Cable weight and jacket hardness (increase quantity for stiff, heavy cable).
B. Conduit type and condition (increase quantity for old, dirty, or rough conduits).
C. Conduit fill (increase quantity for conduit fills of 50% or greater).
D. Number of bends (increase quantity for pulls with several bends).
E. Pulling environment (increase quantity for high temperatures).
13. Front-end packs are conduit-sized polyethylene bags of lubricant. The packs are attached to the winch line,
ahead of the cable, and are manually opened as they enter the conduit, pre-lubing the conduit. Codes for
front-end packs are in listed Table 2.

Table 2 Pulling Lubricant

Description Code
Front-End Pack 2” and 3” Conduit 500118
Front-End Pack 4”, 5”, and 6” Conduit 500117
Pourable Lubricant, 2.5-Gallon Container 500031
Pourable Lubricant, 5-Gallon Container 500099

14. Cable lubricant LZ type must be used when 500 kcmil and 750 kcmil Cu 15kV EPR flat strap with low smoke
zero halogen (LSZH) jacketed cable is pulled through conduits. For more information regarding LSZH cable
refer to Document 039955.
Note: The use of standard pulling lubricant will have a negative impact on the physical integrity of the cable’s
LSZH jacket.
Table 3 Pulling Lubricant to be Used With LSZH Cable
Description Code 1
Lubricant, Squeezable Quart 500060
1 12 quarts is the minimum order quality.

038193 Page 6 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

15. Table 4 and Table 5 on Page 7 indicate the approximate amount of pulling lubricant for various cable pulls.
Same tables apply for the lubricant LZ type.
Table 4 Pulling Lubricant Needed for 2”, 3”, and 4” Conduit
2” Conduit 3” Conduit 4” Conduit
Pull
Length Gallons Number of Number of Number of
Pourable Gallons Pourable Gallons Pourable
(feet) Front-End Front-End Front-End
Needed (gallons) Needed (gallons) Needed (gallons)
Packs Packs Packs
100 0.25 1 0 0.50 2 0 0.50 1 0
200 0.50 2 0 1.00 2 0.50 1.00 2 0
300 1.00 2 0.50 1.25 2 0.75 2.00 2 1.00
400 1.25 2 0.75 1.75 2 1.25 2.50 2 1.50
500 1.50 2 1.00 2.25 3 1.50 3.00 2 2.00
600 1.75 3 1.00 2.75 3 2.00 3.50 3 2.00
700 2.00 4 1.00 3.25 4 2.25 4.00 4 2.00
800 2.50 4 1.50 3.50 4 2.50 5.00 4 3.00
900 2.75 4 1.75 4.00 4 3.00 5.50 4 3.50
1,000 3.00 4 2.00 4.50 4 3.50 6.00 4 4.00

Table 5 Pulling Lubricant Needed for 5” and 6” Conduit

5” Conduit 6” Conduit
Pull Length Number of Number of
(feet) Gallons Pourable Gallons Pourable
Front-End Front-End
Needed (gallons) Needed (gallons)
Packs Packs
100 1.00 2 0 1.00 2 0
200 1.50 3 0 2.00 2 1.00
300 2.50 2 1.50 2.50 3 1.00
400 3.00 2 2.00 3.50 3 2.00
500 4.00 2 3.00 4.50 3 3.00
600 4.50 3 3.00 5.50 4 3.50
700 5.50 4 3.50 6.50 4 4.50
800 6.00 4 4.00 7.00 4 5.00
900 7.00 4 5.00 8.00 6 5.00
1,000 7.50 5 5.00 9.00 6 6.00

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 7 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Formulas and Parameters

Notes
1. The formulas and parameters used in this document are widely used in the utility industry. The parameters
that must be checked are: Conduit Fill, Cable Configuration, Minimum Bending Radius, Cable Jamming
Potential, Cable Clearance, Maximum Pulling Tension, and Sidewall Bearing Pressure Limits.
2. Cable Jamming
Jamming is a condition that may occur if the sum of the cable diameters is about equal to the inside diameter of
the conduit. It will typically occur at bends when one cable is forced between the other two cables and wedges
them against the inner wall of the conduit. Jam ratios between 2.8 to 3.1 should be avoided to prevent the
possibility of the cables jamming at a sweep. Use the formula given below to calculate jam ratio.
3. Jam Ratio Formula
J = 1.05 D/d Where:
J = Jam ratio
D = Conduit inside diameter (inches)
d = Cable nominal diameter (inches), one cable
Check the probability of jamming using the formula: J = 1.05 D/d
1.05*J = (p) probability of jamming
• If the value J is less than 2.5, jamming is unlikely to occur.
• If the value J is Between 2.6 and 3.1, jamming is very possible.
• If the value J is greater than 3.1, jamming is unlikely to occur.
The 1.05 factor is to account for the oval shape of the bends in the section view.
4. Coefficient of Friction
A coefficient of friction value of 0.30 is recommended for lubricated PVC or PE conduits.
5. Minimum Bending Radius
The multipliers for determining the minimum cable bending radius for commonly used cables are listed in
Table 1 on Page 6.
6. Percent Conduit Fill
Conduit fill is the percentage of area inside the conduit taken up by the cable(s).
A. The recommended maximum percentage of conduit fill is shown in Table 6 on Page 14.
B. The total combined percent conduit fill ratio of PG&E electric supply cable and fiber optic cable (FOC) must
not exceed 75%.
C. For new construction, the conduit is usually sized for the next-larger size of cable.

038193 Page 8 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Formulas and Parameters (continue)

Table 6 Recommended Maximum Conduit Fill
Percent of Total Internal Area of
Number of Cables Example
Conduit to Be Filled by Cable

1 60

2 40

3 55

4 55

Table 7 Percent Fill for Common Cable/Conduit (DB 120) Combinations

Type of Cable 2” 3” 4” 5” 6”
1/0 Triplex 15% 7% − − −
4/0 Triplex 24% 11% − − −
350 kcmil Triplex − 18% 11% − −
750 kcmil Triplex − 32% 1 19% 13% 9%
1,000 kcmil Triplex − − 25% 17% −
600 V
1/0 Quadruplex 20% 9% − − −
4/0 Quadruplex − 15% 9% − −
350 kcmil Quadruplex − 24% 15% 10% −
750 kcmil Quadruplex − − 27% 18% 13%
1,000 kcmil Quadruplex − − 35% 24% 16%
3-#2 AWG, Cu-EPR − 21% 13% − −
3-350 kcmil, Cu-EPR − − 26% 17% 12%
15 kV
3-500 kcmil, Cu-EPR − − 31% 20% 14%
3-750 kcmil, Cu-EPR − − 42% 28% 19%
1-1/0, Al-EPR 32% − − − −
3-1/0, Al-EPR − − 27% − −
25 kV
3-600 kcmil, Al-EPR − − − 38% 26%
3-1,100 kcmil, Al-EPR − − − − 34%
1 Although percent fill is less than 55%, it is difficult to pull 750 kcmil triplex in 3” conduit. It is acceptable to
pull 750 kcmil triplex in existing 3” conduit . New construction should use 4” conduit.

7. Sidewall Bearing Pressure (SBP)

Sidewall pressure is exerted on a cable as it is pulled around a bend. The following limits are recommended:
A. SBP = 500 pounds/foot for one solid dielectric cable (XLPE or EPR insulation).
B. SBP = 1,000 pounds/foot for two or more solid dielectric cables (XLPE or EPR insulation).
C. SBP = 300 pounds/foot for PILC (lead) cables.

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 9 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Formulas and Parameters (continued)

8. Weight Correction Factor
This is an important factor to calculate because when you pull two or more cables in a conduit, the sum of the
forces developed between the cables and the conduit is always greater than the sum of the individual cable
weights. When you have three single cables of equal diameter and weight, you can expect a higher weight factor
for the cradled position than the triangular position. Assume that the cables will sit in the cradled position (unless
you are pulling triplexed cables from a single reel), because this will yield a higher and therefore more
conservative pulling tension calculation.
For one or two cables

wsingle = 1

For three cables in a cradled configuration

Where 3 > J > 2.5
wcradled = 1 + 4/3 (d/D − d) 2

For three cables in a triangular configuration

Where J < 2.5
wtriangular = 1  1 − (d/D − d ) 2

For four cables (quadruplex) in a diamond configuration

Where J < 3.0
wdiamond = 1 + 2 [d  (D − d) 2]
9. Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension
The maximum allowable pulling tension is the lesser of the allowable tension on the pulling device and the
maximum pulling tension that can be applied to the conductors.
Definition of symbols:
w = Weight Correction Factor
f = Coefficient of Friction
W = Cable Weight, pounds per foot
L = Length of conduit run, in feet
10. Equations to calculate pulling tension formulas
A. Tension, Horizontal Straight Section
T out = wfWL+T in
B. Tension, Natural or Factory Bend Section (except for “D” below)

T out = T incosh (wf) + sinh (wf) x T in 2 + (WR) 2

Where: sinh (wf) = (e wfq − e −wfq ) / 2

cosh (wf) = (e wfq + e −wfq ) / 2
And  = Angle of bend, in radians
R = Sweep radius
e = 2.718

C. Tension, inclined and Vertical Straight Section

(1) Pulling up a Straight Section
T out = WL (sin () + wfcos () ) + T in
Where:  = Angle of incline
(2) Pulling down a Straight Section (utilize equation for horizontal straight section)
T out wfWL + T in

038193 Page 10 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Formulas and Parameters (continued)

D. Tension, Convex Bend at Top of Incline, Upward Pull
T out = T in e wfq + (WR / (1 + (wf) 2)) [2wfe wfq sin  + (1 − w 2 f 2) (1 − e wfq cos )]
Where:  = Angle of bend (same as angle of slope)
R = Sweep radius
e = 2.718
11. When cable is pulled through a conduit bend or around a sheave, sidewall bearing pressure (SBP) develops
between the cable wall and the bend or sheave. This pressure has a dramatic effect on the sizing of the conduit
system, because it relates directly to the radii of bends, pulling tension and cable’s weight.
For single cable:
SBP = T  R
For 3 cables in cradled configuration:
SBP = [(3wcradled - 2) T] B 3R
For 3 cables in triangular configuration:
SBP = (wtriangularT)  2R
For 4 cables in diamond configuration:
SBP = (wdiamond-1) (T  R)
12. It is necessary to have adequate clearance between the uppermost cable and the top of the conduit to ensure a
safe and easy pull. For straight pulls, a clearance of 1/4” is safe. For pulls that include bends, a clearance of 1/2”
to 1” is needed. Use the outside diameters of the circumscribing circle listed on Document 039955 to determine
cable clearances.

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 11 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Determining Pulling Tension for Sections Containing Sweeps

Example
Given:
• Conduit layout as shown in Figure 8.
• Conduit size 6 inch, 6.11”.
• Size of cables: three 1/C 1,100 kcmil Al. EPR-CONC-Encap PE, 25 kV.
• Weight of cable = 3 x 2.36 lbs. = 7.08 pounds/foot.
• Coefficient of Friction = 0.30
Find:
• If cable can be pulled without damage.
• Best direction of pull.
• What type of pulling attachment can be used.
1. The first step is to calculate conduit fill in percent:
d = 2.05” from Document 039955.
D = 6.11” From Table 10-3 of the Electric Design Manual.
r = d/2 = 1.025”
Cable Area = 3 (d/2) 2 or Cable Area = 3r 2
Cable Area = 9.902 in 2
Conduit Area =  (D/2) 2
Conduit Area = 29.321 in 2
Conduit Fill = (Cable Area/Conduit Area)*100%
Conduit Fill = 33.771%
This is less than the 55% percent conduit fill allowed.

R = 5 feet
A 90°
200 feet C
B
R = 5 feet
D
90°

200 feet

90°
E
R = 5 feet
375 feet
F
G
Figure 8
Typical Duct Layout

038193 Page 12 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Determining Pulling Tension for Sections Containing Sweeps (continued)

2. The next step is to calculate the jam ratio to determine the cable configuration and the probabilities of cable
jamming.
J = D/d = 2.98
Since this ratio is larger than 2.5 but less than 3, it is assumed that the cables are going to be in the cradled
configuration. Cable clearance does not need to be checked.
Check the probability of jamming by using the following formula:
J = 1.05 D/d
J = 1.05*2.98 = 3.13
In this case the probability of jamming is greater than 3.1; therefore, jamming is not expected to happen.
3. The next step is to calculate the weight correction factor for this cable:
wcradled = 1 + (4/3)*(d/D-d) 2 = 1.339
4. We can now proceed to calculate the pulling tensions:
Tin = 0 Tension at A!
Tension at B is calculated using the formula for horizontal bend section:
W = 7.08 lbs/ft RAB = 5 ft f = 0.2  = p/2
TAB = Tincosh(w cradledf) + sinh(wcradledf) Tin 2 + (WRAB) 2
TAB = 0 + (0.674) 0 + (35.4) 2
TAB = 23.85 lbs

Tension at C is calculated using the horizontal straight section formula:

LAB = 200 ft TBC = wcradledfWL AB + TAB TBC = 568.81 + 23.85 = 593 lbs

Tension at D is calculated using the formula for horizontal bend section:

RCD = 5 ft
TCD = TBCcosh(w cradledf) + sinh(wcradledf) TBC 2 + (WRCD) 2
TCD = 715.02 + 400.22 = 1,115 lbs
Tension at E is calculated using the pulling down straight section formula.
LDE = 200 ft TDE = wfWLDE + TcD TDE = 568.81 + 1,115 = 1,684 lbs.
TEF = 3,165 lbs
TFG = 4,232 lbs

Since this tension exceeds the maximum allowable tension of 2,000 lbs. on pulling grips (see Table 8 on Page 15),
pulling eyes are needed for this pull (10,000 lbs. limit). Also, the maximum tension on the conductor can be
calculated as follows:
AC = Area in cmil cmil = mil 2 Nc = Number of Conductors
Sc = 0.008 lbs/cmil Maximum Stress on Al or Cu conductors!
The area of 1,100 kcmil is: Ac = 1,100,000 cmil and Nc = 3
Tconductor = NcScAc = 26,400 lbs

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 13 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Determining Pulling Tension for Sections Containing Sweeps (continued)

The maximum allowable tension on these cables is the lesser value of the calculated tension on the conductor(s)
and the maximum tension on the pulling device. In this case, the 10,000 lbs limit on the pulling eye is the
maximum allowable tension. Refer to Table 8 on Page 15 through Table 10 on Page 16 for the maximum allowable
tension on PG&E’s cables.
Reverse Direction Calculations
Tension at F is calculated as follows:
LFG = 375 ft. Tin = 0
TGF = wcradledfWL FG + 0 = 1,067 lbs
TFE = 2,006 lbs
TED = 3,422 lbs
TDC = 6,432 lbs
TCB = 7,001 lbs
TBA = 13,158 lbs
Since the pulling tension from G to A is greater (13,158 lbs.) than the pulling tension from A to G (4,232 lbs.), and
pulling tension from G to A exceeds the 10,000 lbs maximum allowable tension on the puling eye, cable must be
pulled in the direction from A to G.
5. Finally, the sidewall bearing pressure limits need to be checked at the bends.
The pulling tensions at B and D are not very significant, but the tension at F may be a concern in terms of sidewall
bearing pressure.
SBP = [(3wcradled − 2)TEF]/3REF = [(3*1.339 − 2)*3,165]/15
SBP = 426 lbs/ft
As we can see, the limit of 1,000 lbs/ft for two or more solid dielectric cables is not exceeded at the bend between
points E and F.
However, if any of the limits are exceeded, consider one or more of the following options:
• Increase bend radii.
• Decrease conduit fill.
• Reduce the number of bends.
• Try reverse pull.
• Pull in stages.
• Decrease length of pull.

038193 Page 14 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for Various Cable Rating, Sizes, and Configurations
Table 8 Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for 1/C Aluminum or Copper XLP or EPR Insulated Cables
Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.)
Cable Size
Cable Rating 1/C per Duct 2/C per Duct 3/C per Duct
AWG or kcmil
Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye
#4 334 334 668 668 668 668
#2 531 531 1,062 1,062 1,062 1,062
1/0 844 844 1,688 1,688 1,688 1,688
2/0 1,000 1,065 2,000 2,130 2,000 2,130
4/0 1,000 1,693 2,000 3,386 2,000 3,386
600 V 250 1,000 2,000 2,000 4,000 2,000 4,000
Through
35 kV 350 1,000 2,800 2,000 5,600 2,000 5,600
500/600 1,000 4,000 2,000 8,000 2,000 8,000
700 1,000 5,600 2,000 10,0002 2,000 10,0002
750 1,000 6,000 2,000 10,0002 2,000 10,0002
1,000/1,100 1,000 8,000 2,000 10,000 2 2,000 10,0002
1,500 1,000 10,0002 − − − −
2 Limited by cable pulling and reel handling equipment.

Table 9 Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for 1/C Copper P&L and PL&N Cables
Cable Size Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.)
Cable Rating AWG or 1/C per Duct 2/C per Duct 3/C per Duct
kcmil Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye Grip Pulling Eye
1/0 − − − − 475 1,265
250 − − − − 677 3,000
500 458 3,000 − − 916 6,000
1 kV
750 571 4,500 − − 1,141 9,000
1,000 674 6,000 − − 1,349 12,000
1,500 897 9,000 − − − −
#4 − − 415 501 415 501
#2 − − 460 796 460 796
2/0 − − 597 1,600 597 1,600
5 kV
250 − − 725 3,000 725 3,000
500 512 3,000 − − 1,025 6,000
750 631 4,500 − − 1,262 9,000
#4 − − 653 653 653 653
#2 − − 693 796 693 796
2/0 − − 733 1,600 733 1,600
250 − − 916 3,000 916 3,000
15 kV 500 622 3,000 − − 1,244 6,000
750 750 4,500 − − 1,498 9,000
1,000 700 6,000 − − 1,400 10,0001
1,500 857 9,000 − − − −
2,000 1,008 10,0001 − − − −
#2 − − − − 800 1,060
25 kV 250 − − − − 928 3,000
500 − − − − 1,181 10,0001
1 Limited by cable pulling and reel handling equipment.

Rev. #10: 08-15-17 038193 Page 15 of 16

UG-1: Cable
Greenbook
Minimum Requirements for the Design and Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable

Table 10 Maximum Allowable Pulling Tensions for 3/C Copper PL&N Cables, 1/C per
DuctRevised
Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension (lbs.)
Cable Rating Cable Size AWG or kcmil
Grip Pulling Eye
#2 464 1,194
2/0 510 2,400
5 kV
250 657 4,500
500 875 9,000
#2 708 1,195
2/0 840 2,400
15 kV 250 866 4,500
500 1,150 9,000
750 1,434 10,0001
1 Limited by cable-pulling and reel-handling equipment.

Revision Notes
Revision 10 has the following changes:
1. Corrected Note 2A on Page 1. 1000 was changed to 2000.
2. Delete typo on Note 3B on Page 2.
3. Added Note 6B and re-numbered 6B to 6C on Page 8

038193 Page 16 of 16 Rev. #10: 08-15-17

 UG-2: Transformers
Green Book-15

SERVICE ENTRANCE FROM UNDERGROUND 041352

VAULT USING BUS BARS

Dept: Distribution Section: Electric

Approved by: D. H. Mulkey Date: 11-30-95

Rev. #01: This document replaces Document 041352, Rev. #00. For a description of changes, see Page 3.

Purpose and Scope:

The purpose of this document is to illustrate the preferred method of installing a service entrance from an underground
vault using bus bars.

General Information:

1. Customer shall drill bus bars to fit connectors furnished by PG&E.

2. If the above configuration or dimensions illustrated in this document are impracticable because of physical or
other limitations, consult PG&E.
3. For customer-owned underground vaults, consult PG&E.
4. All exposed grounded metal bolts within 10” of bus bars shall be suitably insulated.
5. For bus rated at less than 3,000 Amps, bus bars may extend less than 12” from bus support and smokeproof
barrier. Consult PG&E.
6. Barrier not needed if firestop supports the bus and is smokeproof.

See Paragraph 4.

Customer’s
Bus Bar Support
Service Entrance
and Smokeproof Barrier
Bus Bars
(Furnished
Vault C To Customer’s
by Customer)
Ceiling ..... Switchgear
.....

A Customer’s Service 12”

Entrance Bus Bars Wall Between
(See Paragraph 1. and Vault and
A Figure 2 on Page 2) Customer’s
Building
A 60”
Min. See
Paragraph 5.

A B A

Vault Floor
Sidewall Plan
Figure 1
Service Entrance Section A-A

Rev. #01: 11-30-95 041352 Page 1 of 3

UG-2: Transformers
Green Book-15
Service Entrance From Underground Vault Using Bus Bars

Bus Support and Smokeproof Barrier

12”
See Paragraph 6. on Page 1
1-1/8” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2-7/8”

7/8” Window
1-3/4” C
L Varies C
L Opening

9/16” Dia. Holes

Connector

B Caulking Face of Vault Wall

Figure 2
Connection to Customers Bus Bar

A Varies A
Customer’s Service
Entrance Bus Bars

Connector May be Placed

Back-to-Back Where Bus Connector
Spacing Permits

Section B-B

Table 1 Minimum Dimension in Inches

Dimensions
Circuit Voltage (Inches – Minimum)
A B C
120/208
8 10 10
277/408

This document is also seen in Section 15 of the Electric and Gas Service Requirements (“Green Book”) and
in Section 13 of the Electric Meterman’s Manual.

041352 Page 2 of 3 Rev. #01: 11-30-95

 UG-2: Transformers
Green Book-15
Service Entrance From Underground Vault Using Bus Bars

Revision Notes:
Revision 01 has the following changes:
1. Minor changes have been made to bring this document up to current publishing specifications.

Rev. #01: 11-30-95 041352 Page 3 of 3

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

CONCRETE PAD FOR THREE-PHASE, LOOP-STYLE, 045292

PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design

Issued by: Connie Pascua (CZP1) Date: 04−15−09

Rev. #12: This document replaces PG&E Document 045292, Rev. #11. For a description of the changes, see Page 8.

This document is also included in the following manual:

• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
Purpose and Scope
This document shows construction details for concrete pads for three-phase, loop-style, pad-mounted transformers. Refer
to Document 043817 for installation details of three-phase, radial-style, pad-mounted transformers. See Document 045290
and Document 045291 for fabrication and installation details of three-phase, loop-style, pad-mounted transformers.
General Information
1. When a pad is installed by the customer, that customer shall provide all materials. In areas of known unusually
soft soil conditions, PG&E will require special treatment as specified in Notes 12, 13, and 14. Before pouring or
setting the pad, the customer or contractor will request an inspection by PG&E to approve the installation.
PG&E shall determine the acceptability of each pad installation.
2. The installation of the pad includes the two ground rods and the interconnecting ground wire.
Application
3. If a pad-mounted transformer cannot be located away from vehicular traffic, the customer shall provide
suitable barriers for the protection of the transformer. PG&E shall determine the protection requirements
according to Document 051122.
4. If the customer is to use bus duct, the secondary opening is not needed. Grout in the window of precast pads.
5. The pad sizes are based on maximum dimensions, including cooling radiators, of the various manufacturers’
transformers.
6. The Style IIE transformers will fit on Style IIB/IIC/llF pads. The 75 kVA, Style IIE transformer will fit on the
largest Style IIE pad. The 300 kVA, Style IIE transformer will fit on the small Style IIE pad. The 2,500 kVA,
Style IIE transformer will sit on the old 80” x 106” pad, but the radiators will overhang the pad. (Note: Some
1989 and 1999 Style IIE transformers have radiators that will overhang the pad.)
7. The Style IIG will fit on the largest IIE pad.
8. The Style IIH will fit on the largest IIC/IIF pad.
Construction Notes
9. In general, all equipment pads should be installed as level as practical. Pads supporting oil-filled equipment
must be leveled to within 1 inch in 8 feet in all directions.
10. The transformer pad shall be placed on firm, compacted native material or on engineered fill which has been
compacted at least to the requirements of Note 13.
11. The area under the pad shall be excavated to the required grade, or to a depth necessary to reach firm,
undisturbed material, whichever is deeper. The material can be considered firm if it cannot be penetrated by
thumb except with moderate effort.
12. If firm material has not been reached within a depth of 3 feet, excavate 3 feet beyond the perimeter of the pad
and backfill the entire excavated area to the required grade and to the requirements of Note 13.
13. In case it has been necessary to excavate deeper than the required grade to reach firm material, backfill to the
required grade in one of the following ways:

Rev. #12: 04−15−09 045292 Page 1 of 8

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers
A. Backfill with clean, non-expansive soil compacted to 90% of maximum density. Soil shall be placed in layers
not more than 8 inches thick before compaction. Maximum density and in-place density is to be determined by
California Test Method No. 216-G, Part I and II respectively, or by ASTM D-1556 and ASTM D-1557
respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E.
B. Backfill with soil-cement slurry consisting of one sack of Portland cement per cubic yard and clean native soil or
sand. When slurry is used as a backfill material, the customer will not be required to use a poured-in-place pad.
14. In areas of known soft soil conditions, trenches within the pad excavation area for the installation of conduits
shall be backfilled in one of the ways specified in Note 13 on Page 1.
15. In addition to the above, precast pads shall be placed on a 3-inch layer of slurry backfill or sand screeded level
to provide uniform bearing.
16. Conduit windows shall be grouted with non-shrink grout (asphalt or blacktop is not approved for grouting).
17. Concrete shall be designed to attain a strength of 2,500 pounds per square inch (psi) at 28 days. Slump for
concrete placement shall not exceed 3 inches. Reinforcing steel shall be per ASTM A615, Grade 40 minimum.
18. A minimum distance of 6 feet shall be maintained between ground rods.
19. Wood-float or light broom finish the top of the slab. Finish all exposed edges with a finishing tool. Vertical
edges shall have a 3/4-inch chamfer. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces slightly for drainage. Moist-cure
concrete for at least 7 days after pouring. Do not install transformer until 14 days after pouring concrete. See
Note 20 for exceptions to this requirement.
20. The transformer may be installed earlier than the 14 days specified above, provided the concrete has attained
a compressive strength of at least 1,500 psi obtained as follows (this procedure is permitted only for urgent
cases where earlier pouring of pad is not practical):
A. For a six-sack mix using normal Portland cement, the transformer may be installed after 7 days; or for a
six-sack mix using high early-strength cement, the transformer may be installed after 72 hours.
B. All concrete must be moist-cured to the minimum period specified above before installing the transformer.
C. Verify the required strength by either concrete cylinder test or Schmidt hammer test.
21. Belled ends of conduits should be placed approximately 1 inch above the concrete pad surface. If belled ends are
removed, install end bell fittings. Temporarily plug or cap all conduits.
22. Only PG&E-approved utility electric-service-related equipment and structures may be installed in the area
beneath the transformer pad. The area 6 feet deep and 12 inches horizontally around the pad shall be free of
all foreign substructures.
Construction Notes for Precast Pads
23. Concrete shall be designed to attain a strength of 2,500 psi in 28 days.
24. Inserts and securing of inserts shall be of sufficient strength to lift the pad. A minimum of three inserts with 7/8-inch
diameter, UNC thread and 2-1/4 inch inside depth, steel, galvanized with temporary plugs shall be provided.
25. Inserts shall be installed flush with the surface of the pad.
26. Reinforcing bars shall be as per ASTM A615, Grade 40 minimum.
27. All exposed edges shall have a 3/4-inch chamfer or radius.
28. Surface shall have a light broom or wood-float finish.
29. The surface of the pad shall be level and flat.
30. Precast pads shall be permanently identified with manufacturer’s name (for location see Figure 4 and Figure 5
on Pages 7 and 8) and have the weight stenciled on top of the pad.

045292 Page 2 of 8 Rev. #12: 04−15−09

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers
References Location Document
Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground
Rod Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 013109
Installation of Three-Phase, Radial-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043817
Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290
Installation of Loop-Style, Three-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1:Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291
Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection
Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288

Rev. #12: 04−15−09 045292 Page 3 of 8

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers

Table 1 Bill of Materials for Concrete Transformer Pads

Item Quantity Description Code Document
1 1 Pad, Concrete, Reinforced (see Page 5) − −
2 As Required Wire, #2 AWG, Solid, Soft Drawn, Bare Copper 1 290074 −
3 2 Ground Rod, 5/8” x 8’, Copperclad 187013
013109
4 2 Clamp, Ground Rod, for Item 3 187012
5 As Required Conduit, Type and Size (as required) − 062288
6 As Required Reinforcing Steel, Number 4 2 − −
7 As Required Compacted Backfill − −
Bolt, Eye, 7/8” Diameter x 1-1/2” Long, 1-1/2” Inside Diameter,
8 Tool Shoulder-Type 190013 −
1 When pad is installed for PG&E by others, the use of solid or stranded wire is acceptable.
2 Number 3 rebar at 12-inch maximum separation with 4x4 6-6 wire mesh over the entire surface may be
substituted for the use of Number 4 rebar.

1-1/2” 8
Inside Diameter

1-1/2”

7/8” Diameter (UNC thread)

Detail A
Lifting Eye for Pad and Boxes

045292 Page 4 of 8 Rev. #12: 04−15−09

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers
Pad Arrangements for Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and IIH Transformers
Notes
1. Primary conduits must be centered in the window.
2. Secondary conduits shall be grouped towards the front of the pad.
3. Precast pads do not have cut off walls.
4. A 6-foot minimum separation shall be maintained between ground rods.
5. The ground wire must be a continuous wire that runs from the outside ground rod, under the pad, to the
primary window, then above the pad from the primary window, through the secondary window, to the
secondary ground rod as shown below.

3 Inside Edge
4 of Cut Off Wall
See
Note 4 2 Primary Secondary

A A
2” Max.

3 4
Front
5 See Note 10 on Page 1
Plan View

Grout in Around Primary

and Secondary Conduits 3 4
1” Approx.
1 6”
8” 2” ± 1”
Min.

4 2 See Note 10
7
3 on Page 1
Primary 3” Secondary
Above Pad
Section A-A

Figure 1
Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and IIH Pad Arrangement,
Poured-in-Place Pad Shown

Rev. #12: 04−15−09 045292 Page 5 of 8

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers

Pad Arrangements for Style IID, IIE, and IIG Transformers

Notes
1. Install primary conduits as shown. Keep single primary conduit installation to the left as indicated to reduce
strain on elbow terminators.
2. Secondary conduits shall be grouped towards the front of the pad.
3. Precast pads do not have cut off walls.
4. A 6-foot minimum separation shall be maintained between ground rods.
5. The ground wire must be a continuous wire that runs from the outside ground rod, under the pad, to the
primary window, then above the pad from the primary window, through the secondary window, to the
secondary ground rod as shown below.

3 3
4 Secondary 4 Secondary
2 Primary 2 Primary
See See
4.5”
Note 4 9” Note 4
4” 4”

B B C C
C
L

5 Front 3 4 5 Front 3 4

Plan View Plan View

Grout in Around Primary Grout in Around Primary

and Secondary Conduits and Secondary Conduits
1” Approx. 3 4 1” Approx. 3 4
(see Note 21 (see Note 21
on Page 2) on Page 2)
2” ± 1” 6” 2” ± 1” 6”
Finished Finished
Grade Level Grade Level
8” Min. 2 8” Min.
4 4 2
3” 7 3”
Above Pad 7
3 3 Above Pad
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary
Section B-B Section C-C

Figure 2 Figure 3
Loop Installation of Style IID, IIE, and IIGPad Radial Installation of Style IID, IIE, and IIG Pad
Arrangement, Poured-in-Place Pad Shown Arrangement, Poured-in-Place Pad Shown

045292 Page 6 of 8 Rev. #12: 04−15−09

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers
Concrete Pad Details for Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and llH Transformers

Location of #4 at 12” Maximum Each

6
Manufacturer’s Way
Name, (see Note 30 7/8” Insert, 12”
on Page 2) Galvanized Min.
6” 3”
(see Notes 24
10”
#4 Corner
and 25 on 6 4” All Around Min.
Page 2) Poured‐in‐Place Pad
Bars 6 L
6”
G 2” Min. H
Typ.
C C
K F Precast Pad
Front
A B C D E Section C‐C
W
Figure 4
Construction Details of Style II A/B/C/F/H Pad
(see Figure 1 on Page 5 for pad arrangement)

Table 2 Dimensions and Codes for Style IIA, IIB, IIC, IIF, and llH Transformer Pads 1
Transformer Pad Dimensions (inches)
Approximate Code
Style kVA Size A B C D E F G H K L W
Maximum Weight (lbs)
75 3,200
(112.5) 2 3,200
IIA 150 3,500 21 8 14 16 13 15 16 16 15 72 72 043436
(225) 2 4,000
300 4,500
(225) 2 4,500
23 13 78 80 043538
300 5,000
IIB
and (500) 2 6,000 29 8 19 17 23 15 16 19 15 100 96 040242
IIF 750 9,000 32 22 112 98 040243
1,000 11,000 36 26 117 106 040244
IIC 1,500 13,000
and
IIF (2,000) 2 15,000
IIC
and 2,500 16,000 31 8 23 17 26 15 16 19 15 120 105 040245
IIF
2955/
IIH 22,000
3325
1 See Document 066211 for approved suppliers.
2 ( ) = Indicates a kVA size that is no longer purchased.

Rev. #12: 04−15−09 045292 Page 7 of 8

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers

Concrete Pad Details for Style IID, IIE, and IIG Transformers

7/8” Insert, Galvanized (see Notes 24 and 25 on Page 2)

Location of Mfr.
6 #4 at 12” Maximum Each Way
Name, (see Note
30 on Page 2)
12” 6” 3”
Min.
6 4” All 10”
L 6 #4 Corner Bars Min.
Around
Poured-in-Place Pad

6”
2” Min.
G H
D Typ. D
K F Precast Pad

Front A B C D E
W
Section D-D
Figure 5
Construction Details of Style IID, IIE, IIG Pad
(see Figure 2 on Page 6 for pad arrangement)

Table 3 Dimensions and Codes for Style IID, IIE, and IIG Transformer Pads 1
Transformer Pad Dimensions (inches)
Approximate Code
Style kVA Size Maximum Weight A B C D E F G H K L W
(lbs)
75 4,600
IID
(112.5) 2 4,800
and 17 16 15 19 13 10 6 17 14 61 80 040291
150 5,000
IIE
(225) 2 5,500
300 5,800
(500) 2 6,100
IIE 750 9,000 22 16 15 20 17 20 6 19 25 106 90 040292
1,000 11,000
1,500 13,000
IIE 2,500 16,000
22 16 15 20 17 20 6 19 25 106 90 040292
IIG 2955/3325 22,000
1 See Document 066211 for approved suppliers.
2 ( ) = Indicates a kVA size that is no longer purchased.

Revision Notes
Revision 12 has the following changes:
1. Added Notes 7 and 8 to Application notes on Page 1.
2. Added Transformer IIH to Pad Arrangements on Page 5.
3. Added Transformer IIG to Pad Arrangements on Page 6.
4. Added Transformer IIH to Concrete Pad Details and revised Table 2 on Page 7.
5. Added Transformer IIG to Concrete Pad Details and revised Table 3 on Page 8.

045292 Page 8 of 8 Rev. #12: 04−15−09

 UG-1: General
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

CLEARANCES AND LOCATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 051122

ENCLOSURES, PADS, AND UNDERGROUND EQUIPMENT

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design

Issued by: Carlos Araquistain (CJA8) Date: 07-31-15

Rev. #21: This document replaces PG&E Document 051122, Rev. #20 For a description of the changes, see Page 28.

This document is also included in the following manual:

• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
Purpose and Scope
This document contains information relating to the placement of electric underground equipment and enclosures. This
includes pad-mount, subsurface, and vault installations with or without equipment.

References Location Document

Marking, Numbering, and Identification
of Line Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022168
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 045292
Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Switches and Fuses . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053318
Pad-Mounted Transformers Installed Indoors . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 057521
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . UG-1Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . 063422
Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 064309
Pad-Mount Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066197
PG&E Approved Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066211
Installation of Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Junction . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066212
General Order (G.O.) 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 128
California Administrative Code:
Title 8 − Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Sub-Chapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders
Title 24 − State Building Standards, Part 3 − California Code of Regulations, California Electric Code

1. Clearances
Clearances are divided into the following sections:
• Building clearances.
• Clearances to foreign substructure.
• Horizontal work space clearances.
• Hazardous locations.
Underground equipment, pads and enclosures shall be located so that they meet or exceed the required clearances in
each of the clearances sections and in each of their subsections.

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 1 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
2. Building Clearances
A. Clearances from building surfaces (see Figure 1): Oil filled pad-mount equipment shall have the following
clearances (based on G.O. 128, Rule 34.3 [D]):
a) 3-foot minimum from combustible building surfaces to the edge of the pad.
b) 2-foot minimum from non-combustible building surfaces to the edge of the pad. Non-combustible materials
include brick, clay, concrete, steel, stone, and stucco.
B. Doorway clearance (see Figure 1): Pad-mounted equipment shall not be placed where it impedes the flow of
traffic through a doorway. In general, 4 feet of doorway clearance is sufficient (based on the Uniform Building
Code).

3’ if Combustible Wall and

2’ if Non-Combustible Wall
4’

Prohibited Area

Figure 1
Building and Doorway Clearances
(see Notes 2.A and 2.B)

051122 Page 2 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
2. Building Clearances (continued)
C. Vertical clearance from overhangs (see Figure 2): To provide space for hoisting equipment so that equipment
can be replaced, the following vertical clearances from the top of the pad for pad-mounted equipment or top of
the enclosure for subsurface equipment are required (based on G.O. 128, Rules 17.3 and 34.2).
a) 20-foot minimum for:
S 1∅ pad-mount equipment.
S Subsurface equipment.
S Style MTP 3∅ transformer.
b) 30-foot minimum for:
S 3∅ pad-mount equipment except style MTP transformers.
c) When required for installations such as in dry vaults (Document 057521), the vertical clearance outside the
doorway may be reduced to 10 feet from ground level. This reduced clearance will greatly expand the
replacement time, since the equipment must be jacked and rolled out to a position where the clearance is
adequate to hoist it.

Overhang

Vertical
Clearance
Wall

Figure 2
Clearances for Pad-Mounted
or Subsurface Equipment
(see Note 2.C)

D. Railroad or streetcar track clearance: 6-foot minimum clearance is required from the rail to the nearest edge of
any manhole, enclosure, or secondary box (G.O. 128, Rule 31.5 [D]).

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 3 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
3. Clearances to Foreign Substructures
A. Pad-Mounted Equipment:
The area 1 foot around and 6 feet below the pad or pedestal shall be kept free of foreign substructures.
B. Subsurface Equipment or Enclosures:
The area 1 foot around and 6 feet below the enclosure shall be kept free of foreign substructures.
4. Work Space Requirements
Maintain work space requirements as indicated on all new installations. Exercise judgement on existing installations
where encroachment has occurred. For example, a fire hydrant located within the work space that does not adversely
affect operations is not a concern. Clear and level work areas are required around underground equipment and
enclosures to provide an adequate safe working space for operation or maintenance. Obstructions and elevation
changes, other than a standard city/county street curb, are not allowed in the work space.
(Based on G.O. 128, Rule 17.3 and 34.2) .

A. Primary enclosures (see Table 1 below and Figure 3 on Page 5): Sufficient clearance to remove covers, operate
with hot sticks, replace equipment and cable, etc., is required. Field conditions and the specific equipment may
allow some of the clearances to be reduced.

Table 1 Primary Enclosure Clearances

Primary Enclosures Required Clearances
Round or Square
3’ x 5’ (interior dimensions) 3’ From Outside Edges

3’ From the Outside Edge of the Long Side /

4’ x 6’ 6” (interior dimensions)
4’ From the Outside Edge of the Short Side
3’ From the Outside Edge of the Long Side /
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (interior dimensions)
5’ From the Outside Edge of the Short Side
3’ on short sides, 2’ on long side adjacent to the
junction bars (the non-operable side), 5’ on the
J-Box in 3’ x 5’
long side opposite the junction bars
(the operable side)
4’ on short sides, 2’ on long side adjacent to the
junction bars (the non-operable side), 5’ on the
J-Box in 4’ x 6’ 6”
long side opposite the junction bars
(the operable side)
5’ on short sides, 2’ on long side adjacent to the
junction bars (the non-operable side), 5’ on the
J-Box in 4’ 6” x 8’ 6”
long side opposite the junction bars
(the operable side)

B. Pad-Mounted Equipment (see Figure 4 and Figure 5 on Page 6).

a) 8-foot minimum (measured from the edge of the pad) in front of all equipment doors to provide room to
operate with hot sticks and to replace the equipment. Note: Some equipment types have operable doors in
both the front and the rear, and both require 8 feet of operating room.
b) 3-foot minimum from non-operable sides.
Exceptions:
(1) Landscaping obstructions (decorative walls, planters, rocks, etc.) that are up to about 1 foot wide and
2 feet tall may be placed next to the pad on non-operable sides (refer to Document 063422).
(2) One of the 3-foot dimensions may be reduced to 2 feet where Note 2.A.b on Page 2 applies, except for
pad-mount switchgear.

051122 Page 4 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
C. Secondary Enclosures − Minimum Work Space Required:
a) Pedestal: 3 feet in front, 2 feet to the side, and 1 foot to the back.
4. Work Space Requirements (continued)
1’

2’ 2’

3’

Front
b) Secondary Splice Box − 24” x 36” or smaller: 3 feet on short sides, 2 feet on one long side.

3’ 3’
2’

c) Secondary Splice Box − 3’ x 5’ or larger: Same as Table 2.

Subsurface X Edge of Slope

Equipment 3' 3' 3’ 3’
or
Enclosures
X

Retaining Walls Subsurface

(see Figure 8 and Equipment
Figure 9 on Page 9)
Profile
Plan View
X = 3’ for Round or Square
X = 3’ for 3’ x 5’
X = 5’ for 4’ 6” x 8’ 6”
Figure 3
Example of Subsurface Equipment or Enclosures Installed on
Sloped Terrain
(see Note 4.A on Page 4)

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 5 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
4. Work Space Requirements (continued)

Edge of Slope
Pad-Mounted
Equipment Retaining Walls
(see Figure 8 and
3' Figure 9 on Page 9)
3' 8'
3' 8'

3'

Retaining Wall
Pad-Mounted
Equipment
@@@@

Plan Profile

Figure 4
Example of Pad-Mounted Equipment (with front doors only) Installed on Sloped Terrain
(see Note 4.B on Page 4)

Pad-Mount With Front and Rear Doors

3'

8' 8'

3'

Figure 5
Work Space for Pad-Mounted Equipment
(with front and rear doors including most switches and capacitors)
(see Note 4.B on Page 4) @@@@

5. Hazardous Locations
Use the following guide when installing pad-mounted and subsurface equipment in areas where hazardous liquids
and gases are dispensed or stored in sealed containers.
A. Liquified flammable gases: Do not install pad-mounted or subsurface equipment within 20 feet of a gas dispenser
without conforming to the regulations concerning installation of electrical equipment in hazardous areas (refer to
Articles E500-1, E500-2, E500-3, E514-1, and E514-2 of Title 24, Part 3, State Building Standards).
Examples: Gas station fuel pump, convenience store propane pump.
B. Any container which stores flammable liquid or gas: These containers will be considered equivalent to
“combustible walls”. Therefore, the required clearances are the same as established in Note 2.A.a on Page 2 of
this document. Examples: Emergency generator, propane tank at a house.

051122 Page 6 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
6. Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) and Oil Containment
It is the customer’s responsibility to comply with spill prevention and containment requirements for oil-filled
electrical equipment in accordance with applicable laws, regulations, and ordinances. The Spill Prevention
Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) regulations and the Uniform Fire Code (UFC) require the installation of
containment structures to prevent spills and leaks of oil from reaching a waterway. SPCC requirements are
found in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 112 and apply to facilities having a total quantity of oil
exceeding 1,320 gallons. The requirements of UFC Articles 79 and 80 may also apply to containers and
equipment holding more than 55 gallons of oil. These regulations include information on the type and size of
the containment needed. Additional containment requirements may be mandated in local hazardous materials
ordinances.
7. Future Construction
Consideration should be given not only to conditions existing at the time of installation but also to possible future
structures and equipment that could interfere with required clearances or accessibility. On those installations
where there is a high probability of a future obstruction, install a clearance requirement sign
(Code 373998) on the equipment.
8. Noise Control
Transformer noise level increases with the kVA size. Avoid placing transformers alongside bedrooms and other
places where noise may be objectionable.
9. Retaining Walls
A. Retaining walls are required when PG&E determines that it is necessary to protect equipment or enclosures
against landslides, drainage wash, drifting sands, etc. The applicant is responsible for the installation and
maintenance of the retaining walls and any associated safety rail. The retaining wall will be designed to provide a
barrier of sufficient strength and suitable construction to provide adequate protection and working space around
the enclosure or equipment. Typical examples of retaining wall placement are shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 on
Page 6 of this document.
B. Pre-approved retaining wall designs and materials are shown on Pages 8 and 9 of this document.
C. For retaining walls in excess of the dimensions shown on Page 8:
a) The wall will be constructed of precast concrete, concrete poured in place, or concrete block.
b) A safety rail of corrosion resistant material is required at the top of all retaining walls when wall height
exceeds 4 feet (refer to Utility Standard SAFE-1012S for more information).
c) The applicant will provide PG&E with a set of design drawings and structural calculations certified by a
licensed civil engineer.
D. Treated redwood or pressure-treated Douglas fir posts (nominal 4” x 4” minimum) and planks (nominal 2 inches or
thicker) may be used for short (1 foot or less) retaining walls. Posts should be 24 inches or less in length and
extend at least 12 inches below ground and not more than 12 inches above ground (see Page 9).
E. The working area within the retaining wall shall be level.
a) For pad-mounted equipment, it is to be slightly below the pad level (see the appropriate pad document for
specific information).
b) For subsurface enclosures, it is to be level with the enclosure.
F. The working area shall be kept weed free and covered with a locally acceptable decorative covering.

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 7 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
10. Precast Retaining Walls
Note
1. For drainage requirements, see Figure 9 on Page 9.

A A B B

15’ 0” 11’ 0” 11’ 0”

L 15’ 0”
or or L or
or
19’ 0” 15’ 0” 15’ 0”
19’ 0”

4’ 6” 4’ 6”
Plan Plan
Figure 6 Figure 7
Concrete Poured in Place or Precast Concrete Retaining Wall
Concrete Block Retaining Wall (see Table 2 on Page 8)

4” 2 Angles 2‐1/2”
#3 Rebar @ 12” 3” x 3” x 1/2” x 4”
Each Way Galvanized Each Corner

H 3’ 6” H 3’ 6”
4”

6”
4” Corner Fasteners
6”
24” Non-Corrosive
2’ 0” Material
Section A-A Section B-B
Table 2 Codes for Precast Retaining Walls
Dimension
Code 1
L H
11’ 0” 024881
L 3’ 6”
15’ 0” 024882
1 See Document 066211 for approved suppliers.

051122 Page 8 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
11. Wooden Retaining Walls and Drainage Details for All Retaining Walls

4’ 6”
As Required

Nut and Washer

5’ 0” for 1/2” Bolt
Maximum

Carriage Bolt, Galvanized

1/2” x Length as Required 15’ 0” to 19’ 0” 11’ 0”
See Figure 3 and to
Inner Lining (if required) Figure 4 on Page 6 15’ 0”
for Clearances

Post, 4” x 4” Minimum

3” Perforated
Plastic Pipe,
Mirafy Cloth
Around Granular
Plan View Plan View
Material and Then
Backfilled
Plank, 2” x 10” x Length as Required
Gravel Plank, 2” x 6” x Length as Required
Draining Pipe
12” Maximum Should Be Sloped
to Drain
12” Minimum
4” Min.
Side View
Concrete
Side View

Figure 8 Figure 9
Wooden Retaining Wall Drainage for All Types of Retaining Walls

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 9 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
12. Barrier Posts
A. Physical protection from vehicular traffic shall be provided in accordance with the level of vehicular exposure.
Barrier posts, etc., are intended to provide reasonable warning from accidental vehicular contact, rather than to
prevent all possible contact. When PG&E determines it necessary, the applicant will provide acceptable physical
protection.
B. In general, pad-mounted equipment having the following setbacks do not require the customer to provide any
other physical protection.
a) Single-family, duplex, and other low density residential areas: 3-foot minimum from the edge of the
thoroughfare pavement due to low vehicular traffic (see G.O. 128, Rule 23.6 for definition of thoroughfare).
b) Commercial, apartment, condominium, and other high density areas: 9 feet from the edge of the thoroughfare
pavement due to high vehicular traffic and frequent truck-backing.
The design of the particular layout may, of course, call for an increase or decrease in these dimensions. For
example, a 3-foot setback is often adequate for parts of commercial parking lots where traffic flow is
constrained and backing perpendicular to the curb is unlikely.
C. The posts shown in this document are the standard means for providing such physical protection. Suitable
alternatives to these protective posts may be proposed by the applicant for PG&E’s approval.
D. All barrier posts at the same installation site will be the same height.
E. A building wall can be considered as physical protection provided it is located at a point where a post would be
normally required.
F. Maintain 36” minimum clearance between barrier posts and the edge of the pad in front of the equipment doors
so that they do not interfere with opening the doors.
G. Certain types of pad-mounted equipment have doors in both front and back and require 36” minimum clearance to the
pad on both sides.
H. Use removable posts when:
a) Posts are installed less than 8 feet in front of the equipment’s doors, or
b) Where fixed posts would obstruct access for installation or replacement of equipment.
I. Preferred barrier post arrangements for specific equipment are provided in Figure 11 on Page 12 to Figure 23 on
Page 24. These may be modified as needed, to meet specific layouts, but must conform to the requirements in
Figure 10 on Page 11.
J. Barrier post details are shown in Figure 24 on Page 25 to Figure 30 on Page 27.

051122 Page 10 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
12. Barrier Posts (continued)

B2

Protected Device A2

B3

B1

A3
A1

A = Distance Between Posts in Inches

B = Shortest Distance Between the Protected Device and the Line Between Barrier Posts

Figure 10
Generic Barrier Post Placement

Table 3 Common A and B Pairs

Requirements
“A” “B”
1. “A” must be less than or equal to 42 inches. (inches) (inches)
2. “B” must be greater than or equal to 12 inches 18 12
on non-operable sides.
3. “B” must be greater than or equal to 36 inches 24 15
on operable sides. 30 18
4. Bn must be greater than or equal to (An/2)+3. 42 24
42 36

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 11 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers

21” 42” 21”

F F

20” 24” 20”

F F

36”

34” 34”
24” 24”

52”

F
F

34” 34”

Front

F F
36”
24” 24”

R R

21” 42” 21”

Figure 11
Style DF-LB Box Pad
36” x 52”
F = Fixed (Document 064309)
R = Removable

051122 Page 12 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers (continued)

28” 42” 28”

F F

20” 20”
24”

F F
50”

34” 34”

24” 52” 24”

F F

34”
34”
Front

F
36” F

24” 24”

R R

28” 42” 28”

Figure 12
Style DF-LB Box Pad
50” x 52”
F = Fixed (Document 064309)
R = Removable

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 13 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers (continued)

24” 40” 40” 24”

F F F
15” 15”
24”

F F

40”
40”

24” 24”

61”
F F

40” 40”

80”

Front

F F
36”
26” 26”

R R R

24” 40” 40” 24”

Figure 13
Style IIE-LB Pad
80” x 61”
(Document 045292)
F = Fixed
R = Removable

051122 Page 14 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
13. Preferred Barrier Post Arrangement for Transformers (continued)
27” 42” 42” 27”

F F F

16” 24” 16”

F F

90”

42” 42”

F F

106”

42” 42”

F F

24” 24”
42” 42”

Front

F F
36”
24” 24”

R R R

27” 42” 42” 27”

Figure 14
Style IIE-LB Pad
F = Fixed 90” x 106”
R = Removable (Document 045292)

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 15 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
14. Barrier Posts for Capacitors

23” 42” 42” 23”

R R R

30”
30”
36”

F
F

82”

42”
42”

72”
F
F

24” 24”
42”
42”

Front
F
F

30” 36”
30”

R R R

23” 42” 42” 23”

Figure 15
Pad-Mount Capacitor
82” x 72”
(Document 066197)
F = Fixed
R = Removable

051122 Page 16 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
15. Barrier Posts for J-Boxes

27” 42” 27”

8” F F 8”

F F
24”

40” 40”

36”
24” 24”

F F
48”

Front
40”
40”

36”

8” F F 8”
R R

27” 42” 27”

Figure 16
1-Wire, Pad-Mounted Junction
48” x 36”
(Document 066212)
F = Fixed
R = Removable

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 17 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
15. Barrier Posts for J-Boxes (continued)

40” 40” 40”

F F F F

24”

41”
41”

36”
F F
24” 24”

72”
41”
Front 41”

36”

F F
15” 15”
R R

39” 42” 39”

Figure 17
2- or 3-Wire Pad-Mounted Junction
72” x 36”
F = Fixed (Document 066212)
R = Removable

051122 Page 18 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch

23-7/16” 42” 23-7/16”

R R
14-3/4” 14-3/4”

F 36”
F

42”
42”

41-1/2”
F F
24” 24”

40-7/8”

42” 42”
Front

36”

F
F
14-3/4”
14-3/4”
R R

23-7/16” 42” 23-7/16”

Figure 18
PMH Switchgear
40-7/8” x 41-1/2”
(Document 053318)
F = Fixed
R = Removable

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 19 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

23-7/8” 42” 23-7/8”

R R

21-3/4” 21-3/4”

36”

F F

42” 42”

55-1/2”
F F
24” 24”

42” 42”
40-7/8”

Front

F F
36”
21-3/4”
21-3/4”

R R

23-7/16” 42” 23-7/16”

Figure 19
PMH Switchgear
40-7/8” x 55-1/2”
F = Fixed (Document 053318)
R = Removable

051122 Page 20 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

18-1/2” 42” 42” 18-1/2”

R R R

26-1/4” 26-1/4”
36”

F F

42” 42”

24” 24”
64-1/2”
F F

42”
42”

73”

Front

F F
36”
26-1/4”
26-1/4”

R R R

18-1/2” 42” 42” 18-1/2”

Figure 20
PMH Switchgear Pad
73” x 64-1/2”
F = Fixed (Document 053318)
R = Removable

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 21 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

27-1/2” 42” 27-1/2”

R R

24-1/4” 24-1/4”
36”

F F

42” 42”

60-1/2”
F F

24” 24”

42” 42”
49”

Front

F 36” F

24-1/4” 24-1/4”

R R

27-1/2” 42” 27-1/2”

Figure 21
PMH Switchgear Pad
49” x 60-1/2”
(Document 053318)
F = Fixed
R = Removable

051122 Page 22 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

27-1/2” 42” 27-1/2”

R R

19-1/2” 19-1/2”

36”
F F

30”
30”

F F

69”
24” 42”
42” 24”

F F
49”

30” 30”
Front

36”
F F

19-1/2” 19-1/2”

R R

27-1/2” 42” 27-1/2”

F = Fixed
R = Removable Figure 22
PMH Switchgear Pad
49” x 69”
(Document 053318)

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 23 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
16. Barrier Posts for PMH Switch (continued)

26” 42” 42” 26”

R R R

24” 24”

36”

F F

35”
35”

F
F

34-1/2” 80-1/2” 34-1/2”

24” 24”

F F

35” 88” 35”

Front

F F
36”
24” 24”

R R R

26” 42” 42” 26”

Figure 23
PMH Switchgear Pad
88” x 80-1/2”
(Document 053318)

051122 Page 24 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
17. Placement of Metal Barrier Posts and Details
Safety Lock
End Cap (Code 170116) Weld, Typical, Will
9/16” Be Painted Over
With a Zinc Primer

Visibility Eye Bolt,

Strips Regular 80” Post 1/2” x 6”, Steel
48” Min. − 50” Max. Galvanized
(to be installed parallel
Post Low Profile 67” Post: 3” to edge of pad)
35” Min. − 37” Max.

Cut From 1/2” x 6” Eye Bolt, Steel Galvanized

Figure 24
Steel Barrier Post Detail A
(see Table 4) (see Figure 26)
See Detail A
Sleeve
(see Table 3 on Page 11)

Concrete 30” Min. - 52” Max.

32” Min. - 33” Max.
±3”
Concrete

12” 3” Minimum
Min. 12” 3” Minimum
Min.
Figure 25 Figure 26
Footing for Fixed Steel Post Detail Footing for Removable Steel Post Detail
(see Table 4) (see Table 4)

Table 4 Description and Codes for Steel Barrier Posts 1

Length
Description Code Doc
(inches)
80 155107 −
Galvanized Fixed Post, 4”, Steel Pipe, Standard, Schedule 40
67 2 155108 −
Removable Post, 4”, Galvanized Steel Pipe, Standard, Schedule 40 With 5” 80 155105 −
Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeve, 36” Long, Standard, Schedule 40 67 2 155106 −
Replacement 4” Removable Barrier Post Galvanized Steel Pipe With Cap Less 67 150265 −
Sleeve and Eye Bolt 80 150266 −
End Cap, 4”, Galvanized Malleable Iron, May Be Screwed − 021882 −
Strip, Visibility Reflective Yellow Adhesive Sheet, 2” X 12”, Pacific Utilities #PEM212F,
− 013163 022168
Almetek #DL-RY2X12-A
Safety Lock − 170116 −
1 Posts fabricated from 20-foot lengths of galvanized steel pipe, Code 011794.
2 67” post length is for single-phase transformer.

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 25 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
17. Placement of Metal Barrier Posts and Details (continued)

See Detail B

3” Barrier

ÉÉÉ
Post Pentahead
Located at

Security
Cover
ÉÉÉ Back

Figure 27 Detail B
Security Cover for Removable Post Lock See Figure 27
Material Code 150271
Installation of Security Cover:
1. Remove Top Cap.
2. Slide Collar Down Over the Eyebolts Locked Together.
3. Drill Hole for Bolt.
4. Insert and Engage Pentahead Bolt.

051122 Page 26 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
18. Residential and Light Commercial Non-Metallic Barrier Post
3” Barrier
Post
ÉÉ
A
ÉÉ 4” OD x 35” Sleeve

Visibility Strips 4-1/2” OD x 5” Long

35” Min. - 37” Max. Galvanized Steel
3” Locking Device
3” OD x 67”
A
Long Post

2”

Figure 28
Non-Metallic Barrier Post
(see Table 5)
Detail C
See Figure 30

Penta-Head Bolt

Protective
Penta-Head
Shield

Section A-A
Lock Post
(see Detail C)

Poly-Sleeve 30” Min. - 32” Max.

30” Min. - 32” Max.
Concrete
±3”
Concrete

12” 3” Minimum
Min 3” Minimum
12”
. Min
Figure 29 .
Footing for Fixed Non-Metallic Post Figure 30
Footing for Removable Non-Metallic Post Kit
(see Table 5)

Table 5 Description and Codes for Non-Metallic Barrier Posts

Description Allwire Code
Fixed Post: 3” OD x 67” Long, 1-3/4” Fiberglass Core With 5/8” Polyethylene Cover FGP674 150553
Removable Post Kit: 4” OD x 35” Long Polethylene Sleeve, 4-1/2” OD x 5” Long Galvanized
RPK001 150554
Steel Locking Device and 1/2” x 1-1/4” Penta-Head Bolt
Security Cover for Removable Post Lock − 150271

Rev. #21: 07-31-15 051122 Page 27 of 28

 UG-1: General
Greenbook
Clearances and Location Requirements for
Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment
Revision Notes
Revision 21 has the following changes:
1. Revised Table 1 on Page 4.

051122 Page 28 of 28 Rev. #21: 07-31-15

 Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS FOR MOBILE HOME 052521

DEVELOPMENTS

Asset Type: Electric Metering Function: Construction

Issued by: Quoc Hoang (QxH1) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #06: This document replaces PG&E Document 052521, Rev. #05. For a description of the changes, see Page 9.
This document is also included in the following manuals:
w Electric Meter Work Practices

Purpose and Scope

This document shows methods of supplying underground electric service to meter equipment (pedestal) serving
mobile homes in accordance with Electric Rule 15 and Electric Rule 16 for a park that qualifies as a mobile home
development as defined by PG&E. Additionally refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements manual
(Greenbook) for additional requirements that may not be listed in this document.
Note: In accordance with Title 25, Article 7, Sections 1322, 1333, and 1333.5, mobile homes installed on foundation
systems in locations other than mobile home parks, may be served by PG&E from overhead or underground service to
the customer’s equipment (service entrance conductors if overhead), which is attached directly to the mobile home.
Refer to PG&E Document 063927 for underground service requirements and Documents 025202 and 022169 for
overhead service requirements.

Instructions
1. The developer or his contractor shall provide all necessary trenching, secondary and service conduit (when
required), and shall be responsible for the location and final grade of the utility islands
2. The required location for the meter equipment is at the front of the mobile home (see Figure 1 on Page 4).
Alternate locations for the meter pedestal are indicated by the shaded areas in Figure 1 on Page 4.
3. PG&E shall install the secondary and service lateral cables in accordance with current engineering standards and
construction methods.
4. Maintain a 36-inch (minimum) work space clearance from the meter face and from any access panel to PG&E
facilities on the enclosure. Maintain a 36-inch (minimum) clearance from the meter equipment to other utility
equipment such as gas, water or sewer. Refer to the National Electrical Code and the Authority Having Jurisdiction
for the allowed working space requirements and if the 36-inch (minimum) clearance shown in Figure 3 and
Figure 4 on Page 5 may be reduced to 12 inches for pedestal designs which have the meter and all access
panels (both PG&E’s and customer’s) located on the same side of the pedestal.
5. Before PG&E has installed the cable, the developer or his contractor shall then:
A. Install the electric meter pedestal in place over the conduit. Position the pedestal so the meter socket faces
toward the street as shown on Page 5 or away from mobile home. Maintain the work space and clearances
as described in Note 4.
B. Install and connect a copper grounding conductor from the pedestal grounding lug to an N.E.C. approved
ground electrode system. The grounding connection shall not be made to a gas piping system. The customer
shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts in accordance
with the applicable electric codes and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding
electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding.
Refer to the NEC for any required clearance distance of the ground rod away from the pedestal.
C. Bond the service neutral termination lug to the meter pedestal by means of a bonding screw, or by continuing
the grounding conductor between the grounding lug and the neutral lug.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 052521 Page 1 of 9

Greenbook
EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

D. Backfill around the pedestal to provide good support, plumb and level the pedestal, and pour the concrete base
support or island. The concrete surface should be no more than 1 - inch above grade and ± 4 inches below the
removable pull-section panel of the meter pedestal.
E. Backfill all trenches, and furnish any imported backfill material required.
6. PG&E shall connect the service lateral conductors to the termination lugs in the meter pedestal, install and seal
the pull section panel, and blank off and seal the meter socket.
7. PG&E shall set the meter upon request for service, after required permits and inspections have been obtained
from city or county inspection authorities.
8. See Figure 1 on Page 4 for a typical electric distribution system layout for a mobile home development.
9. PG&E shall design its facilities so that the short-circuit duty at the electric service entrance will not exceed 10,000
amps.
10. Mobile home pedestal shall have a minimum rating of 100 amps. The socket and enclosure shall be designed in
accordance with PG&E Document 051001 and the following:
A. The minimum meter height shall be 36 inches when the meter is enclosed, or 48 inches if the meter is
exposed.
B. When the meter is enclosed, the enclosing cover shall be hinged for ready access and shall have a
shatter-proof reading window. When the meter is enclosed or recessed, the clearance from the meter
centerline to any fixed side obstruction shall be a minimum of 6 inches.
C. The service cable pull and terminating section shall be covered with a sealable removable panel (or panels),
extending from a fixed panel 4 inches ± 2 inches above concrete. The removable panel shall allow full access to
the service terminating lugs. Access to the service terminating lugs may be from either front or rear of the
pedestal.
D. Service terminating lugs shall be aluminum bodied and of the type specified on Page 7 for a pedestal and
Page 8.
E. Lugs for terminating the user’s neutral conductors shall be located outside the sealable section and shall be
designed to readily permit his neutral system to be isolated, when necessary, from PG&E’s neutral.
F. The pedestal at grade line shall have the minimum dimensions as specified on Page 9. A fixed panel for the
final grade and concrete pour shall extend 2 inches (minimum) and 6 inches (maximum) above grade, and a
minimum of 18 inches below grade.
G. The minimum depth of the pedestal in the ground shall be 24 inches.
H. Adequate ventilation shall be provided to prevent moisture condensation inside the pedestal, as required by
UL414.
I. Any unmetered bus going through the breaker section shall be completely covered by steel or approved
plastic conduit.
11. Installation of PG&E distribution system facilities including service and metering equipment installations shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements. Refer to the
applicable sections in the Greenbook manual for additional requirements that may not be listed in this document.
12. Physical protection from vehicular traffic shall be provided in accordance with the level of vehicular exposure.
Barrier posts are intended to provide reasonable warning from accidental vehicular contact, rather than to prevent
all possible contact. The applicant will provide acceptable physical protection. Refer to Document 051122,
Clearances and Location Requirements for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment.

052521 Page 2 of 9 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
EMWP
Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

References Location Document

Connectors for Insulated Cables
Underground Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG−1: Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 015251
Clearances for Supply Service Drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022169
Methods of Attaching Services to Customer Premises . OH: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025202
Temporary Underground Electric Service Single-Phase,
120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036670
Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955
Clearances and Location Requirements
for Enclosures, Pads, and Underground Equipment . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122
Terminating Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 Volts
in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Residential Underground Electric Services 0 − 600
to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG−1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 052521 Page 3 of 9

Greenbook
EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Property
Line
Fence
Mobile Mobile Mobile
Home Home Home

Driveway

Driveway
Driveway
Secondary

SB SB
Street
Splice Box

Driveway

Driveway
Driveway

Required
Meter
Location

Mobile Mobile Mobile

Home Home Home

Property
Line

Figure 1 Typical Electric Distribution System for a Mobile Home

Development

Property Line

Gas Riser Mobile Home

Gas Meter
GM R
Driveway
36” 36”

See Greenbook Figure 5.2 36” 12” Min

For Electric and Gas Meter
Separation Dimensions and
Clearances 30” Trailer Hitch
36”

Preferred Meter
Street Location
Detail A
Meter Clearance

052521 Page 4 of 9 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
EMWP
Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Location of Electric Meter Pedestal

Notes
1. Position pedestal so that electric meter is faced toward the street or right of way.
2. See Figure 5 and Detail B.
3. Position pedestal so that electric meter is facing away from mobile home, towards right of way.
4. Alternate location for pedestal. Position pedestal so that electric meter is facing away from mobile home.
5. Trench depth shall be 30 inches (minimum) with or without gas service, and greater if joint with a gas main.
Street
36” Min Mobile Home
(see Note 4 Being Served
on Page 1)

See Note 3
Secondary Distribution Trench Secondary Distribution Trench

Secondary Distribution Trench

Figure 2 Pedestal 36” Min.,

See Note 4
(preferred location) on Page 1
See
Note 4

Mobile Home Mobile Home Street

Being Served Being Served

Figure 3 Pedestal Figure 4 Pedestal

Toward (preferred location) (alternate location)
Right-of-Way

1” Max 18”
Above Approximate
Grade Trench
Cap (Figure 2
or Figure 3)
10” 4” Min.
Grade Cable
Min. Cable
Top of Trench

10” Min. Pedestal

24”
Spare Conduit With Cap Trench Depth 10” 10”
(see Note 3 on Page 1) See Note 5 Min. Min. Utility
Island Pad
Detail B
Tamp Earth for Plan
Temporary pedestal Figure 5 Pedestal
Support

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 052521 Page 5 of 9

Greenbook
EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Material
Notes
1. It is recommended that the main circuit breakers used in pedestals have a 10,000-amp short-circuit current rating
to insure compliance with state and local codes. These codes require that the main breaker of service equipment
be rated at the available short-circuit current. PG&E shall design its facilities to supply all new mobile home
customers so that the short circuit duty at the pedestal will not exceed 10,000 amps.
2. See Table 3 on Page 7 for a list of approved meter pedestal manufacturers and catalog numbers.
3. Pedestals are allowed to have rear connection kit.

Table 1 List of Material for Supplying Electric Service to Mobile Home Developments
Item Description
Material to Be Supplied by Applicant
1 Meter Pedestal (as required, see Table 3 on Page 7 for the approved list)
2 Compression Connector, Straight Lug (see Table 2 on Page 7)
3 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, with Pipe Strap (for bare ground wire, omit if armor clad wire is used)
4 Hub and Clamp, Grounding (to suit Item 3)
5 Conduit Fitting, Threaded, With Cover and Gasket (size to suit Item 3)
6 Ground Rod (see Instruction 5B on Page 1)
Ground Wire, Copper, Bare, or Armor Clad (size in accordance with applicable electrical codes and local
7
requirements)
8 Conduit and Cap (as required)
Material to Be Furnished by PG&E
9 Compression Connector, Stacking Lug (see Table 2 on Page 7)
10 Cable, XLP, 600-V (as required), see Document 039955 (see Table 2)

052521 Page 6 of 9 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
EMWP
Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Material (continued)

9
1-3/4”
3” Max.

2
1/2” Captive
Mounting Studs
Detail C
Compression-Type Terminals

Table 2 Data and Codes for Approved Compression-Type Material (see Detail C)
Cond. Manufacturer and Catalog Number Tool
Type of Size
Item Code Index
Terminal AWG or
kcmil ESP 1 Mac Homac Burndy No.

Straight 350 − AHL-350-BN-TP MLB 350-N AL 350-NTN YA31A3 350A

Lug 4/0 − AHL-4/0-BN-TP MLB 4/0-N SA 4/0-NTN YA28A5 4/0A
(furnished 2
1/0 − AHL-1/0-BN-TP MLB 1/0-N SA 1/0-NTN YA25A7 1/0A
by user)
#2 − AHL-2-BN-TP MLB 2-N SA 2-NTN YAK2CA-2G1 1/0A
350 303728 350A
Stacking 4/0 303729 4/0A
Lug
1/0 9 303730 See Document 015251 for Approved Supplier 1/0A
(furnished
by PG&E) #2 303731 1/0A
#6 303732 1/0A
1 Electric Specialty Products Company

Table 3 Approved Meter Pedestals 3

Rating Mobile Home Electric Metering Pedestals

(amps) Manufacturer Catalog Number
Myers Elec. Prod. MES-M100SE
0 − 125
MILBANK MPRV Series
Myers Elec. Prod. MES-M200SE
0 − 200 MILBANK MPAP Series
MILBANK U6276 Series
1 See Notes on Page 6.
2 Pedestals can have rear connection kits.
3 Other meter pedestal that meet EUSERC 307 and PG&E
requirements may be allowed.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 052521 Page 7 of 9

Greenbook
EMWP Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Service and Meter Pedestal

Notes
1. The meter pedestal shown on Page 9 may be used for a single service only.
2. Termination lugs for a pedestal shall be twin #6 to 350 kcmil range, aluminum bodied pressure type for connecting
a single-service lateral and a single streetlight service when needed. Lug height, measured to the bottom of the
terminating lug from grade line, shall be 18 inches minimum and 36 inches maximum. The space between
terminating lugs, from lugs to sides of pedestal, from lugs to any grounded surface, or from lugs to panel above
shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum. Rigid insulating barriers are required and shall project 1/4-inch minimum beyond any
energized parts when this space is reduced. Terminating lugs may be positioned either in-line or staggered, and
access shall be unobstructed when all service conductors are in place.
3. Meter height may be reduced to 36 inches if it is enclosed or guarded by a hinged protective hood (see Note 10B on
Page 2).
4. The pedestal shown on Page 9 may also be used for an underground service to an individual mobile home not in a
park.
5. The pedestal shown in Figure 6 on Page 9 is limited by its pull-section size to a maximum of 350 kcmil
conductors.

052521 Page 8 of 9 Rev. #06: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
EMWP
Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile Home Developments

Service and Meter Pedestal (continued)

A
Breaker and 8” Min. 1-1/2” Minimum Radial
Receptacle Clearance Unless
Panel, as Barriered (see Note 2
Required. C
L on Page 8)
(may be Grounded
located Neutral
at front of Bus
pedestal) 1-1/2” Minimum Unless
5 Barriered (see Note 2 on
5 Page 8)
7
48” Min.
1 72” Max.
3 Bond to Meter Pedestal
350 kcmil Using Bonding Screw or
Sealable Maximum See Note 2 Strap
Wireway for Conductor on Page 8
Line Conductor Size See Detail D
Bottom of Utility Cap
4” Min. Section Opening 18”
2” Min. Min.
3” Max. Above 3” Max. Above 4 6” Max.
Finish Ground Level Cap Ground Level
Grade Pad
Line 1” Max
Above
Fixed Grade Grade
and Poured
Concrete Pad 18” See
6 Min. Page 5
24” for
10 8 Min. Trench
Depth

A
8 Spare Conduit
(see Note 3 on Page 1)
Figure 6
Service and Meter Pedestal Section A-A
PG&E Service Conduit
(see Note 3 on Page 1)

Detail D
Cable and Conduit Arrangement

Revision Notes
Revision 06 has the following changes:
1. Revised bottom of utility section opening depth from 24” max to 3” max above ground level in Figure 6 on Page 9.

Rev. #06: 08-15-17 052521 Page 9 of 9

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

AGRICULTURAL UNDERGROUND SERVICE 500 HP OR LESS 054619

Asset Type: Electric Metering Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 07-31-15

Rev. #10: This document replaces PG&E Document 054619, Rev. #09. For a description of the changes, see Page 7.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope
This document establishes and illustrates the preferred methods of providing underground agricultural service of 500 hp
or less.
The requirements shown on this document shall apply to agricultural underground service installations, from
PG&E’s overhead lines, for connected loads of 500 hp or less. This document applies where there is a suitable
service post, building, or structure as approved by PG&E for attaching the service conduit and metering equipment.
For requirements applicable to agricultural service poles (overhead service only) refer to PG&E’s Document 058087. The
customer should contact the local PG&E office for installations larger than 500 hp or other underground installations from
underground systems as these installations may require different facilities.
General Information
1. PG&E shall furnish and install transformers, service conductors (in accordance with PG&E’s Electric Rule 16),
meters, and metering current transformers. Unless otherwise stated, all other materials shall be furnished,
installed, and maintained by the customer and shall comply with the requirements of PG&E. It shall be the
responsibility of the customer to ascertain and comply with the requirements of governmental authorities having
jurisdiction. In areas where no provision is made for inspection by local authorities, the applicable state regulations
shall apply. Local ordinances may include wiring requirements in addition to those shown in this document or in the
National Electrical Code. Consult inspection authorities for requirements, city or county permits, and inspections
which may be required before service can be connected.
2. The customer should apply for service and verify the available service voltage with PG&E as far in advance of
construction as possible. The customer should then notify his pump company of the available PG&E voltage.
3. Available Service Voltage: Non-residential single-phase loads to a maximum of 7-1/2 hp shall be served at
120/240 V, single-phase, 3-wire. Three-phase motors of 5 hp, but less than 30 hp, will normally be served at
120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, but may be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V at the customer’s option and if
capacity is available from existing facilities. Single or grouped three-phase motors of 30 hp to 50 hp can be served
at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, if the customer has a combination of single and three-phase loads, otherwise
they must be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire. Single or grouped three-phase motors from
60 hp to 125 hp shall be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire. Three-phase motors larger than
125 hp shall be served at 277/480 V, 4-wire.
4. If one or more service posts are used to support the service conduit and metering equipment, or a panel board on
which the service and metering equipment are mounted, they shall meet the minimum requirements outlined in
Document 054712 for service posts and Document 065374 for panel board construction. Service posts can be
installed for applications from 0 to 200 amps, otherwise, panel board construction is needed.

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 1 of 7

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less
EMWP

5. Service Conduit and Termination

A. Service termination shall be in a PG&E-approved service termination facility. Refer to Figure 5 on Page 6
through Figure 8 on Page 7 for typical installations.
B. In accordance with PG&E’s Electric Rule 16, PG&E shall install the service riser and conduit sweep at PG&E’s
pole, and shall pull and connect the service lateral to the customer’s termination facilities. The customer shall
provide and install all conduits and other substructures as necessary and shall trench from the base of
PG&E’s pole or customer’s property line to the service termination point.
C. The minimum conduit size is based on the maximum continuous ampacity of the metering equipment. Refer to
Document 063928 to select the appropriate size and number of conduits.
D. Underground conduit (Item 5) is restricted to the following types:
(1) Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel.
(2) PVC, Schedule 40 or 80, UL approved 90°C.
(3) PVC marked ASTM F-512, DB120 or better, with prior local PG&E approval. Riser conduit (Item 7) is
restricted to galvanized rigid steel.
E. When the conduit enters an enclosure for service termination, end bells should be installed, unless the conduit
has been installed in an enclosure equipped with duct terminators. Cable protectors should be installed on
reconstruction projects only, when end bells cannot be installed. Refer to Document 062288 for more
information about conduit fittings.
F. The minimum depth of the customer’s underground conduit shall be 24 inches for secondary or 30 inches for
primary. If the underground service is in a location subject to erosion, sub-soiling, or ripping, conduit should be
buried at a depth sufficient to avoid possible damage, but not less than 24 inches.
G. PG&E will determine the point-of-service termination to avoid unsuitable routing of underground service
installations.
6. If a pad-mounted transformer is used, the customer shall provide the transformer concrete pad. Dimensional details
and additional trenching requirements will be provided by the local PG&E office.
7. The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current carrying metal parts.
Grounding shall be in accordance with National Electric Code, local ordinances, and PG&E requirements. Do not
install a bonding jumper or ground wire inside of any PG&E sealed section. Bonding jumper or ground wire
attachments to the outside of the meter cabinet are allowed.
8. Metering Requirements
A. The meter sequence shall be meter-switch-fuse for all installations.
B. The customer shall provide and install a self-contained meter socket or current-transformer metering
enclosure, approved by PG&E, for the available service voltage, in accordance with Table 1 on Page 4 and
the illustrations on Page 5.
C. For agricultural services, the rating of the service supplied will be determined by the ampacity rating of the
metering equipment or enclosure (typically, whichever is greater) where the service conductors terminate.
9. Customer’s Control Equipment
A. Customer’s switch and motor control equipment may be installed on the same post or panel board as the
underground service terminating and metering equipment.
B. Customer’s switch and motor control equipment shall be of proper horsepower and voltage rating and shall be
weatherproof. This equipment shall include three overcurrent units, one in each phase, for protection of each
three-phase motor or as otherwise specified in Article 430 of the National Electric Code.
C. Customer’s switch and motor control cover shall be effectively locked or sealed if the enclosure contains
accessible electrically energized parts.

054619 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #10: 07-31-15

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

10. Service to Three-Phase Pumps

A. When three-phase service is established to a pump, PG&E’s crew will assist in checking for satisfactory pump
motor performance if the customer or his representative is present. The construction crew should take
“clamp-on” ammeter readings at the service head, or the customer or his representative can take the readings
at the motor control box. If the reading on the “high” phase is more than 10% higher than the reading on the
“low” phase, then the phases should be rolled to get the readings as close as possible (see Figure 1 below).
The set of readings that gives the lowest difference is the connection to be retained. It is possible that none of
the other readings will be any better. Record all readings.
B. Starting and stopping of the pump should be done only by the customer or his representative. Connections
can be changed at the transformer pole or service pole by PG&E’s crew or at the motor control box by the
customer or his representative.
C. On 240 V 3-wire services where one phase conductor is grounded, all rolling of leads must be done on the
customer’s motor leads (at the motor control box), not on PG&E’s service leads.

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Roll Service
Roll Service Leads to
Leads to the the Right
Right
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Once Again L1 L2 L3
Original Readings 2nd Set of Readings 3rd Set of Readings

Figure 1
Figure 2
Rolling Leads
Interchanging Leads
(maintains same rotation)
Reverses Rotation
(for information only)

Example: Once water was flowing satisfactorily from the pump, the following ammeter readings were taken:
Amps
L1 L2 L3
A. Original Readings 60 61 67
B. Second Set of Readings 60 62 63
C. Third Set of Readings 59 62 66

Conclusion: Connection “B” should be used.

11. A voltage stabilizer shall be installed in all 480 V three-phase, 3-wire ungrounded service. See Document 052497.

References Location Document

Installation of Meter Protective Device on
480 V Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033286
Voltage Stabilizer for 480 Volt Three-Phase, 3-Wire,
Ungrounded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052497
Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground
Electric Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 054712
Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less . . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058087
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services
0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facillities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928
Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction OH/UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 065374

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 3 of 7

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less
EMWP

Typical Underground Service

Table 1 Customer’s Metering Equipment Requirements 1
Metering Equipment’s
Maximum Horsepower 3 Type Meter Equipment
Service Voltage 2 Current Rating Refer to
Single or Grouped Motors Required
(maximum amps shown) 6
120/240 Volt
Single-Phase, Self-Contained, 4-Jaw Bused Figure 5,
7 1/2 hp Single 100
Non-Residential, Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 6
3-Wire
240 Volt Delta 30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained, 5-Jaw Bused Figure 6,
3-Phase, 3-Wire 4 Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 6
60 hp Single or Grouped 200
240/120 Volt Delta 30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused Figure 7,
3-Phase, 4-Wire 50 hp Single or Grouped 200 Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 6
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bused Figure 6,
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 6
480 Volt Delta Combination Meter, Current-
3-Phase, 3-Wire 5 Transformer, and Service Figure 8,
300 hp Single or Grouped 400 Termination Cabinet with 8-Jaw Page 7
Socket and CT Mounting Base
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused Figure 7,
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 6
Combination Meter,
277/480 Volt Wye Current-Transformer and
Figure 8,
3-Phase, 4-Wire 300 hp Single or Grouped 400 Service Termination Cabinet
Page 7
with 13-Jaw Socket and CT
Mounting Base
Pad-Mounted (free standing) Greenbook
500 hp Single or Grouped 600
Switchboard Section 10
1 For meter equipment illustration, see Pages 6 and 7.
2 See Note 3 on Page 1 for available service voltages.
3 Maximum horsepower for single and grouped motors is based on nameplate ratings. Ratings shown are the
recommended values for motors running at full load.
4 Limited availability, consult PG&E.
5 480 Volt Delta is not available to new services.
6 Customers may choose a greater current rating for their metering equipment.

054619 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #10: 07-31-15

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

Typical Underground Service (continued)

Note
1. Voltage stabilizer shall be furnished and installed by PG&E. Refer to Document 052497.

4 1
6 6
4

2 3
Plan View Plan View
4 1
3
4
48” Min.
2 See
66” Preferred
Note 1
75” Max. See 7
7 9 Note 1
Alternate 9 9 See Note 5F
Alternate Location 10 on Page 2
4” Min. 10
Location

See Note 5F
10
on Page 2
8
8 5
5 8
Front View Side View
Front View Side View
Figure 4
Meter and CT Cabinet
Figure 3 With Free-Standing
Safety Socket Box and Pad-Mounted Service
Service Equipment Equipment Enclosure
Enclosure

Table 2 List of Materials to Be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

Item Description
1 Underground Pull Box (see Figure 8 on Page 7)
2 Self-Contained Bused Safety Socket Box (see Figure 5, Figure 6, and Figure 7 on Page 6)
3 Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet
4 Main Switch or Service Equipment Enclosure
5 Service Conduit (see Note 5D on Page 2)
6 Post (see Note 4 on Page 1)
7 Conduit, Riser, Galvanized (see Note 5D on Page 2)
8 Ground Rod (see Note 7 on Page 2)
9 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare, or Armor Clad (see Note 7 on Page 2)
10 Ground Clamp, as Required, for Item 9

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 5 of 7

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less
EMWP

Safety Socket Meter Boxes

Notes
1. Applicable to maximum of 125 hp motor(s) (self-contained).
2. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) for dimensional and specification
details.
3. A voltage stabilizer, required on 480 V ungrounded services, shall be furnished and installed by PG&E. See
Document 052497.
4. 240 V, three-phase, 3-wire service is available only when PG&E’s transformers are of the overhead type, the
load is limited to three-phase motors (small 240 V, single-phase loads may be permissible in some locations),
and in the future other customers are not likely to be served from the transformer bank.

See Note 2 See Note 2

Grounded Phase
Customer’s Conductor on
Service 240 V Service
Point of PG&E Entrance Point of PG&E
Service Lateral Conductors Service Lateral
Termination Termination Customer’s
Service Entrance
Conductors
Neutral
PG&E Service See Note 3
See Note 3
Figure 5 PG&E Service
0 − 200 Amp Safety Socket Meter Box Figure 6
120/240 V, Single-Phase, Self-Contained 0 − 200 Amp Safety Socket Meter Box
4-Jaw Bused 240 V and 480 V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire, Self-Contained
5-Jaw Bused (see Notes 1 and 2)

See Note 2 Power Leg

Conductor on
4-Wire Delta

Point of PG&E Customer’s

Service Lateral Service
Termination Entrance
Conductors
Neutral
PG&E Service
Figure 7
0 − 200 Amp, Safety Socket Meter Box
240/120 V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Delta
or 480/277 V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire, Wye Self-Contained
7-Jaw Bused (see Note 1)

054619 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #10: 07-31-15

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Underground Service 500 hp or Less EMWP

Transformer-Rated Enclosures and Metering

See Note 2
on Page 6

Current-Transformer Removable
Mounting Base (Furnished Test Switch
and Installed by Customer) Perch

22” Min.
UG Service Termination
Pull Section

PG&E Service
Figure 8
400-Amp Service Terminating Pull Box and Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinet
240 V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire or 480 V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire Delta
240/120 V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire Delta or 480/277 V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Wye
Three-Phase, 3-Wire Service Equipment is Shown (see Note 4 on Page 6)
Notes
1. Applicable to maximum of 300 hp motor(s).
2. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) for dimensional and specification details.
3. A voltage stabilizer, required on 480 V ungrounded services, shall be furnished and installed by PG&E. See
Document 052497.
4. 240 V, three-phase, 3-wire service is available only when PG&E’s transformers are of the overhead type, the load
is limited to three-phase motors (small 240 V, single-phase loads may be permissible in some locations), and in
the future other customers are not likely to be served from the transformer bank.
5. Figure 8 is applicable to wall-mounted, termination enclosures with a maximum rating of 400 amps. Larger
termination equipment (600 amps, three-phase) must be pad-mounted.

Revision Notes
Revision 10 has the following changes:
1. Corrected available service voltage for three-phase motors of 5 hp but less than 30 hp shown on Note 3 on
Page 1.
2. Clarified 3 rd column of Table 1 on Page 4.
3. Revised Table 1 Footnotes 3 and 6 on Page 4.

Rev. #10: 07-31-15 054619 Page 7 of 7

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EMWF

Prepared by: ABB1

PERMANENT WOOD POST INSTALLATION UNDERGROUND 054712

ELECTRIC SERVICE

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Construction and Design

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #09: This document replaces PG&E Document 054712, Rev. #08. For a description of the changes, see Page 5.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope
This document shows the minimum requirements for a customer-installed wood post for permanent installation of
underground electric service. The service installations shown on this document are intended to serve individual
customers (not mobile home parks) where PG&E-approved manufactured pedestals are not readily available.
Manufactured pedestals are preferred because they provide easier service installations and better protection of
conduit, ground wire and customer’s connection facilities.
Refer to Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook), Section 6 and Section 9.

General Information
1. The customer shall install service conduit in accordance with this document. The customer shall install load
side conduit and suitable conductors as required by local or state codes.
2. Local ordinances may include requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection
authorities for these requirements. In areas where local ordinances require permits and inspection, these must be
obtained before PG&E can establish service. Meters will be installed and energized by PG&E after the customer’s
metering equipment has been properly installed and after an inspection clearance has been given to PG&E by the
appropriate electrical inspection authority.
3. When a service larger than 225 amps is desired, panel board construction is required. Refer to Document 065374.
4. Service Post Installation
A. A permanent service installation is one which will remain for a period longer than one year, as estimated by
PG&E (for temporary installations, refer to Document 036670).
B. Wood posts used for permanent service shall be pressure-treated for the full length. Any other process which
will provide equivalent penetration and retention must be approved by PG&E. Acceptable wood preservatives
are water-borne salts and pentachlorophenol. Brush application of wood preservative is ineffective for
permanent posts and therefore unacceptable. Minimum dimensions of square posts shall be 6” x 6” x 8’-0”
long. Minimum dimensions of cylindrical post shall be 6“ diameter x 8’-0” long. Depth of setting shall be
3’ 0” minimum. A 4-inch-thick concrete pad shall be poured around the post as shown in Figure 1 on Page 3
and Figure 3 on Page 4.
C. Post installations shall be in protected locations, out of the way of vehicular traffic or other hazardous conditions.
5. Service Conduit and Termination
A. PG&E will install the underground service in accordance with PG&E’s Electric Rule 16. The underground
service lateral will be installed, owned, and maintained by PG&E from PG&E’s distribution line to the
termination facility, which is normally the meter enclosure.
B. The customer shall provide trenching and backfill in accordance with PG&E specifications and pay any costs
provided for in PG&E’s Electric Rule 16.
C. Residential service will normally be installed in conduit as shown in Figure 1 on Page 3.
D. Non-residential service will normally be installed in conduit furnished and installed by the customer as shown
in Figure 3 on Page 4.

Rev. #09: 08-15-17 054712 Page 1 of 5

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service
EMWF

6. Grounding
The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying metal parts. Grounding
shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code and local ordinances except that the grounding wire shall be
protected against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit, or armored copper ground wire may be used.
7. Metering Requirements
A. Meters will be furnished by PG&E.
B. For residential installations, a PG&E-approved combination service termination and meter socket panel
without circuit closing devices as shown on Page 3, shall be furnished, installed, and wired by the customer.
C. For non-residential applications, a PG&E-approved combination service termination and bused-safety-socket
meter box with test bypass facilities and service main disconnect, as shown on Page 4, shall be furnished,
installed, and wired by the customer.

References Location Document

Temporary Underground Electric Service
Single-Phase, 120/240 Volt, 200 Amps Maximum . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 036670
Minimum Requirements for the Design and
Installation of Conduit and Insulated Cable . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 038193
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817
Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential
Underground Electric Services 0−600 V
to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services
0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG−1: Services/Greenbook/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928
Overhead and Underground
Panel Board Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services/UG−1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . 065374

Table 1 List of Materials to be Furnished and Installed by the Customer

(see Figure 1 on Page 3 and Figure 3 on Page 4)
Item Description
Service Termination Enclosure, Combination Meter Socket Panel
1
(see Figure 2 on Page 3 or Figure 4 on Page 4 for details)
Square Post, 6” x 6” x 8’-0” Long, Cylindrical Post, 6” in Diameter x 8’-0” Long, Fully Treated
2
(see Note 4 on Page 1)
Conduit (load side), Size and Material as Required by Building Code
3
(typically rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC plastic)
4 Conduit, Service Riser, Rigid Steel, Galvanized or Schedule 80 PVC Plastic, (see Note 5 on Page 3)
5 Conduit, Rigid Steel, Galvanized, With Pipe Strap (for bare ground wire, omit if armor clad wire is used)
6 Hub and Clamp, Grounding, to Suit Item 5
7 Ground Rod (see Note 6)
Ground Wire, Copper, Bare or Armor Clad
8
(size in accordance with applicable electrical codes and local requirements)
Conduit, Plastic or Rigid Steel, for Underground Service (size as shown in Document 063927
9
and Document 063928)

054712 Page 2 of 5 Rev. #09: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service EMWF

Residential Service Only, 0−225 Amp

Notes
1. Poured concrete pad shall be approximately 4 inches thick. Provide 1/2-inch slope away from post to allow for
drainage.
2. Install bend in direction of service trench. To facilitate cable installation, only one 90° bend is permitted in the
service riser installation. If trench is shared with gas or other utilities, consult PG&E for required increased
trench depth.
3. Meter socket enclosures for residential service (Figure 2) shall not be equipped with any circuit closing device.
4. Approved meter socket enclosures for non-residential service (Figure 4 on Page 4) shall be equipped with
test bypass facilities.
5. Whenever it is necessary to install a service longer than 75 feet, the applicant must contact PG&E before
ordering the service riser, conduit or, termination facilities. If the service riser and conduit called for in Table 2
on Page 4 will not accept the cable required to meet the voltage and/or flicker drop requirements, or will
cause cable pulling problems, the next larger PG&E standard conduit size must be installed. (Refer to
Document 041543 for flicker and voltage drop requirements and Document 038193 for cable pulling
limitations.)

2
1 1

48” Min. N Customer’s

66” Preferred Distribution
4 5 8 75” Max. Section
Conduit Support 8” Min.
for 0−125 Amp.
11” Min.
Poured Concrete Pad 6 Finish for 126−225 Amp.
(See Note 1) Grade

12” 7 Sealable Cover

See R=24”
Document Min. Min.
063927 (See Figure 2
Typical Residential Combination Service
Note 2)
36” Min. Termination Enclosure and Meter
Socket Panel, 225 Amp Max., 120/240 V
4
3

Figure 1
Residential Service

Rev. #09: 08-15-17 054712 Page 3 of 5

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service
EMWF

Residential and Non-Residential Service 0−225 Amp Installed in Conduit

2
1
1
Main
Disconnect
Concrete Pad Compartment
(See Note 1 4 5 8 Barrier
on Page 3) 48” Min.
66” Preferred
12”
75” Max.
24” Min. Radius Bend Min. Conduit
(See Note 2 on Page 3) Support
6
Finish Grade Typical Test
Bypass
7 Facilities
See Document 063928

36” Min.
4 3 Incoming UG
9 Service Cable
To Load
Figure 4
Typical Service Termination Enclosure
for Non-Residential 3-Wire or 4-Wire Service
0−225 Amp Maximum 0−600 V
Figure 3 (see Note 5 on Page 3)
Non-Residential Service (see Figure 2 on Page 3 for typical
residential enclosure)

Table 2 Cable and Conduit Requirements

Conduit Number and Size Aluminum Cable Number and
Main Service Switch (see Note 5 on Page 3) Size AWG or kcmil
Rating − Amps
3-Wire 4-Wire Per Phase Neutral
0−125 See Footnote 1 1−3” 1−1/0 #2
126−225 1−3” 1−3” 1−4/0 1−1/0
1 1- 2” for residential. 1- 3” for non-residential.

054712 Page 4 of 5 Rev. #09: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Permanent Wood Post Installation Underground Electric Service EMWF

Revision Notes
Revision 09 has the following changes:
1. Corrected Reference Location Document 036670 100 Amps to 200 Amps Maximum.

Rev. #09: 08-15-17 054712 Page 5 of 5

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook

Prepared by: NIB1/EOB1

PLANNING GUIDE FOR SINGLE CUSTOMER SUBSTATIONS SERVED 055103

FROM TRANSMISSION LINES

Department: Electric T&D Section: T&D Engineering and Technical Support

Approved by: G.O. Duru (GOD1) Date: 01-30-06

Rev. #01: This document replaces PG&E Document 055103, Rev. #00. For a description of the changes, see Page 7.
This document is also included in the following manuals:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (“Greenbook”)
• Electric Planning Manual
Purpose and Scope
1. This document specifies the requirements and preferred method of serving single customer substations from
transmission lines.
2. This substation planning guide is only applicable to single customer (PG&E owned) substations where the service
delivery voltage is over 2,000 volts and the magnitude of the applicant’s load is such that PG&E has elected, for its
operating convenience and necessity, to supply the load from transmission sources. This will require the
installation of a substation on the applicant’s premises under the provisions of Section D of PG&E’s Electric Rule
No. 2 and Section C of PG&E’s Electric Rule No. 16.
3. The applicant’s service may be either overhead or underground. A typical overhead service is shown in Figure 1 on
Page 5, and a typical underground service is shown in Figure 2 on Page 6. The illustrations on Pages 5 and 6 of
this document are general and are intended for preliminary planning purposes only.
General Information
4. The applicant shall, at his or her expense, obtain all land use, environmental impact, and necessary building
permits.
5. It is the applicant’s responsibility to install and maintain all related substation site improvements in accordance with
the requirements of PG&E and those of federal, state, and local agencies.
6. The applicant shall, at his or her expense, furnish, construct, and maintain the following site improvements:
A. Fences and gates.
B. Paving and grading.
C. Paved access road.
D. Foundations, including embedded stubs and anchor bolts.
E. Conduits and pull boxes.
F. Grounding systems.
G. Landscaping required.
H. Oil retention facilities if required (as determined by PG&E or the applicant).
Foundations, underground conduits, and grounds are to be installed as specified by PG&E. The applicant shall
arrange to have PG&E inspect them during installation, while they are exposed. Foundation forms and anchor
bolt settings are to be approved before concrete is poured.
Landscaping or oil retention facilities may be required by local, state, or federal agencies.
7. If an enlargement of an existing customer substation is to be made that will require construction to be done within the
fence of the existing energized station, it may be necessary to either relocate the fence or have the actual construction
work performed by PG&E at the applicant’s expense. Ties to an existing ground grid are to be made by PG&E.
8. The applicant’s design for grading, access road, and oil retention facility must be approved by PG&E prior to the start
of construction.

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 1 of 7

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook
Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines
9. The applicant’s service point is the terminal pad of a disconnect switch in the substation. The applicant shall terminate
his or her electric service conductors with PG&E-approved flexible connectors to PG&E’s copper switch pads. The
connectors and tinned Everdur bolts (or equal) shall be furnished by the applicant and installed by PG&E. The
applicant’s equipment, except overhead service take-off lines, shall not be mounted on PG&E structures.
Underground cable potheads shall be supported on a separate structure provided by the applicant.
10. Substation lighting poles and lighting fixtures will be furnished and installed by PG&E, including wiring. The applicant
shall provide the required foundation and conduits for lighting poles as described in Note 6 on Page 1. If practical,
lighting fixtures may be installed on substation structures.
11. Revenue metering transformers and meters will be provided and installed by PG&E. No other circuits or equipment
shall be connected to the metering transformers, except with special written approval granted for unusual
circumstances.
Where the applicant takes delivery at the secondary voltage level of the transformer, the applicant shall provide a
cubicle which is dedicated for the installation of revenue metering transformers and meters. This metering cubicle
shall be located in the applicant’s switchgear, outside the fenced substation enclosure. The cubicle shall be
designed to comply with PG&E’s service requirement standards, and drawings shall be submitted to PG&E for
approval prior to the manufacturer’s fabrication.
Where the applicant takes delivery at the transmission voltage level and owns or leases the substation, metering
shall normally be at the transmission voltage with the applicant providing the structures, foundation, and by-pass
and disconnect switches for mounting and connecting the metering transformers. Meters shall be located in a
building or cubicle provided by the applicant and accessible without entry into the fenced substation enclosure.
12. Services will normally be supplied from a grounded wye transformer. Services of voltages other than those shown on
Table 1, are generally not available. Special consideration is necessary if 230 kV transmission voltage is required.

Table 1 Three-Phase MVA Ratings 1

Available Substation Secondary Voltage

Nominal
Transmission 4160Y/2400 V 12470Y/7200 V 21600Y/12470 V
Voltage Three-Phase MVA Ratings (maximum)
60 kV 10.5 12.5 12.5
70 kV 5.2 12.5 12.5
115 kV 10.5 45.0 45.0
1 These ratings indicate the MVA size of emergency replacement
transformers. Service to loads in excess of the values indicated
requires special consideration.

13. The applicant shall install, adjacent to the substation, a power circuit breaker or a three-phase recloser on his or her
main service conductor, or on each circuit supplied from the main service. The term “adjacent” means that only the
substation fence separates the applicant’s switchgear from the substation. If the applicant cannot locate his or her
switchgear adjacent to the substation, the applicant shall provide a metering cubicle, and a power circuit breaker or a
three-phase recloser, for his or her main service adjacent to the substation.
14. The applicant shall provide ground fault protection if:
A. Power circuit breakers or three-phase reclosers (specified in Note 13 above) serve overhead lines.
B. Ground fault limiting resistors or reactors are installed.
Ground fault protection is also recommended for underground cables.
The applicant’s protective devices shall coordinate with PG&E’s protective devices, and they shall clear every fault
on the applicant’s system.
15. Any underground conduits or piping extending outside of the fenced area of the substation yard shall be
non-metallic to a distance of at least 8 feet.
16. On 3-wire services using metallically shielded underground high voltage cables to connect the substation to the
applicant’s equipment, the cable shield should be grounded only at PG&E’s end and shall be insulated at the
applicant’s end. Shielded cable shall be installed in non-metallic conduit extending to a distance of at least 8 feet
outside the substation fence.

055103 Page 2 of 7 Rev. #01: 01-30-06

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook
Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines
17. Where the applicant requests a ground fault limiting resistor in the transformer neutral located outside of the
substation fenced area, the elevated neutral conductor shall be insulated for the operating voltage supplied. If the
applicant requires a ground fault limiting resistor in the substation, the resistor and a resistor bypass switch will be
installed by PG&E at applicant’s expense.
18. If the applicant’s equipment fence ground is bonded to his or her equipment ground grid, the fence must be
separated from the substation fence by 8 feet. Use non-metallic 8-foot sections to cover the separations. If the
applicant’s equipment fence ground is not bonded to his or her equipment ground grid, the equipment fence must
be separated from the substation fence by 6 inches.
19. The substation ground grid shall not be connected to the fence grounds or anything outside the substation. For
details of ground grid installation and separation requirements of fence grounds, see Document 067910 and
Document 020607.
20. The applicant shall be responsible for keeping the substation free of weeds and other debris.
21. The following data is to be supplied by the applicant to PG&E:
A. Prior to design completion:
(1) The applicant’s service requirements, such as expected demand (MW), proposed service voltage, power
factor, and ultimate growth requirements.
(2) Plot plan showing the proposed substation location and proposed access road.
(3) Grading plan of the proposed substation, access road, and adjacent areas.
(4) Soil report or suitable information for foundation design.
(5) The electrical rating of the ground fault limiting resistor, the resistor by-pass switch, current transformer,
and any other associated equipment, if required by the applicant.
(6) Location, length, and description (overhead or underground) of the service connection to the applicant’s
facilities.
(7) Final disposition of yard drainage to determine if a special oil retention facility will be required.
(8) Landscaping plans, if required.
(9) Electrical plans, such as single-line, meter, and relay drawings, general arrangement of conduits and
grounds, and elementary diagrams of the applicant’s facility. These drawings shall include all high voltage
fuse and/or breaker ratings, capabilities of interrupting devices, current transformer and potential
transformer ratios and connections, and protective relay types, ranges, and settings.
B. Prior to operation:
(1) Documentation of permits the applicant has obtained for the substation and a written inspection clearance
notice from the inspection authority having jurisdiction (city, county, or state agency, etc.).
(2) Signed reports for the following tests:
(a) Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground megger test performed on the applicant’s side of the open
disconnect switch to the service point, including high voltage cable runs with all customer’s primary
breakers and fuses racked open.
(b) Individual megger tests on all major equipment, such as primary breakers, potential transformers,
station service and auxiliary transformers.
(c) Ratio test of auxiliary transformers.
(3) Test report showing that the primary breaker relay settings conform with the protection requirements
provided by PG&E.
22. The following data is to be furnished to the applicant by PG&E:
A. Substation equipment layout.
B. Arrangement and requirements for foundations, embedded stubs, and anchor bolts.
C. Arrangement of conduits, if required, and grounds.
D. Electrical data, such as short-circuit duty, transformer impedance, etc.
E. Outline of PG&E’s transformer bank differential current transformers to be located in the applicant’s
switchgear, if required.

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 3 of 7

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook
Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines
F. Engineering standards for substation fence and fence grounding.
G. Requirements for revenue metering equipment.
H. Space requirements and details of substation capacitors, if required.
I. Provision for a mobile transformer, if required.
J. Specification for an oil retention facility, if required.
K. Relay coordination and other protection requirements.
L. PG&E will prepare design drawing of the access road and fencing at the applicant’s expense if the applicant
so requests.

References Document
General Notes for Grading and Paving for Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041838
Grounding Requirements for Outdoor Electrical Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 067910
High Pressure Sodium Outdoor Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459076
Method of Grounding Fences and Wire Trellises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 020607
Property Fence and Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059659
Termination and Structure for 12 kV and 21 kV Underground Feeders Low Profile
Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 050861

Table 2 List of Material for Serving Single Customer

Substations From Transmission Lines
Description
Item
Material Furnished by PG&E
1 Structures 1

2 Control Building
3 Transformer
4 Control Wiring
5 Lighting Fixture
6 Air Switch
7 High Voltage Fuses
8 Disconnect Switch
9 Station Service
10 Potential Transformer
Material Furnished by Customer
11 Fence and Gates 2
12 Foundation
13 Grounding System
14 Conduits, ABS Type DB
15 Take-Off Equipment
16 Stubs and Anchor Bolts
17 Access Roads
18 Pothead and Support Structure
1 Latticed steel or aluminum structures may be used instead of the
tubular structures shown in Figure 1 on Page 5 and Figure 2 on
Page 6.
2 Gate location, roadway and inside substation arrangement may vary,
depending on the direction of entry for the access road.

055103 Page 4 of 7 Rev. #01: 01-30-06

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook
Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines
60 or 70 kV Station for Overhead Service

11
60’ 0” Approx.

13 Ground
Rod

10

To Customer’s
Low Voltage From PG&E’s
Power Equipment High Voltage Line

A 17 A
Control 70’ 0” Approx.
9
Bldg.

14

8’ 0” 11’ 0”
Min. Min.
Figure 1
Typical 60 or 70 kV Station for Overhead Service
Plan View

Low Voltage
Structure Transformer High Voltage Switch
and Fuse Structure
To Customer’s 6
Low Voltage 15 From PG&E’s
Power Equipment High Voltage Line
3 7

8 1
1 5 12 16

Section A-A

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 5 of 7

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook
Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines
115 kV Station for Underground Service

80’ 0” Approx.
Ground
13 9 Rod

To Customer’s
Low Voltage From PG&E’s
Power Equipment High Voltage Line

B B
10
75’ 0” Approx.
11
14

Control
Bldg. 17
11’ 0”
Min. 2

8’ 0”
Min.
Figure 2
Typical 115 kV Station for Underground Service
Plan View

Switch Structure
Fuse Structure
6
Transformer
From PG&E’s
Low Voltage Structure High Voltage Line
7
Pothead Structure 3
8
1
18
1 5
12 16

To Customer’s 1
Low Voltage
9
Power Equipment Section B−B

055103 Page 6 of 7 Rev. #01: 01-30-06

 Engineering Standard
Electric Planning Manual
Greenbook
Planning Guide for Single Customer Substations Served From Transmission Lines

Revision Notes
Revision 01 has the following changes:
1. Updated the “References” section on Page 4.

Rev. #01: 01-30-06 055103 Page 7 of 7

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: ABB1

PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER INSTALLED INDOORS 057521

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: M. L. Thibault (MLTC) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #11: This document replaces PG&E Document 057521, Rev. #11. For a description of the changes, see Page 21.

This document is also included in the following manuals:

S Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
S Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope
This document provides a guide for determining space requirements and illustrates recommended layouts to accommodate
three-phase, loop, or radial circuit, pad-mounted transformers installed in a dry room located inside or adjacent to a
customer’s building. The room is usually provided by the customer.

General Information
1. A dry room is one which:
A. Is located at/or above ground level, or
B. Is located below ground level, and
(1) Is completely contained within the building’s foundation.
(2) Is so designed that flood water entry is prevented.
(3) Has sufficient gravity drainage to prevent water retention.
2. It is best that the doorway of the room opens to the street. However, the doors may open to a parking area or
driveway provided that access is maintained from the street to the doors. The access path must be at least
11 feet wide.
3. The room must be large enough to accommodate a transformer capable of supplying 100% of the main switch
capacity. Enlarging a transformer room is very costly and sometimes entirely impractical.
4. Eight feet of clear level space must be provided in front of the transformer cabinet, in order that the fuses and
cables can be safely operated with live-line tools.
5. Ventilation design must conform to the requirements in Document 054163. The location of the vent shafts may
be adjusted to meet local conditions. Cross ventilation must always be maintained.
6. The room itself must conform to all applicable state and local codes. The applicant is responsible for installing
and maintaining any items such as sprinklers, smoke alarms, etc. that may be required by local authorities.
7. It is preferable to have access to a room via an outside entrance which would be accessible to authorized
Company employees at all times (i.e., from parking lot, loading ramp, street, etc.). However, should it become
necessary to accept access through the customer’s premises, arrangements should be made to ensure that
complete access for both equipment and authorized Company employees is available whenever required.
Inadequate access will result in prolonged outages.
8. The room shall be designed with adequate security to permit entrance only to authorized personnel.
9. Cable troughs rather than conduits are required to allow the cables to be pulled out of the way of jacking and
rolling the transformer out of the room.

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 1 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

10. The applicant will own and construct the transformer room and any associated substructures on its property. This
provision is in accordance with the rates filed with and approved by the CPUC. The room must meet all city,
county, and state codes and regulations, as well as PG&E’s requirements for the safe installation, removal, and
operation of its equipment.
11. PG&E must review and approve a not-for-construction drawing prior to the construction of the vault. Once
approved, PG&E will forward it and the associated specification sheets to the applicant for his/her use and
distribution to the general contractor. It is the responsibility of the applicant to notify PG&E of any design or
construction changes. PG&E must review and approve these changes before proceeding with the design or
construction of the vault.
12. It is the applicant’s responsibility to contact PG&E’s inspection department prior to the construction of the
transformer room. PG&E will inspect the transformer room as it is being built to assure the proper installation
and placement of various items required to ensure a safe working environment. PG&E equipment will not be
installed until the room has been completed and the work area is clear of any debris. PG&E’s inspection
department must accept and sign off the room before energizing the new service. To schedule a room
inspection appointment, please call____________.
13. No foreign objects shall pass through or terminate in the transformer room. The use of surface-mounted rigid
electrical conduits and outlet boxes is allowed provided they are waterproof and approved by the local
authorities.
14. Provide 3-hour fire rated concrete reinforced structure, including cable troughs, room walls, floor, and ceiling.
Cover all exposed structural steel with 3-hour fire rated flameproof material. Seal off all openings to the interior
of the building with approved caulking material. Intake and exhaust vents must be constructed with 3-hour fire
dampers.
15. The doors must:
A. Be 3-hour fire rated.
B. Be capable of being secured while in the open position.
C. Open sufficiently so that within 2’ of the 8’ 6” doorway the path for the transformer installation and removal
must open up to at least 11’ wide.
D. Open sufficiently so as not to impede the sidewalk.
16. Provide a minimum of two lights with a minimum 30 foot-candle illumination. Provide convenient GFI duplex
receptacles. Maintain 60 inches above the finish floor for receptacles and switches. Provide power for all
equipment from the applicant’s emergency power supply. Also see Document 054438.
17. Provide pulling eyes (Code 36-2029) with a working load of 10,000 lbs. times a safety factor of two. Install the
pulling eyes 36” above the finished floor with 4 inches of clear space between the steel and wall surface.
Center them directly across from the door opening and the end of each cable trough. Submit an engineered
wet stamped drawing to PG&E for its approval for any pulling eye deviations. Also see Document 09219.
18. The room floor must support the total weight of PG&E equipment plus 2,000 lbs. and maintain a minimum of
10 feet ceiling height for moving the equipment.
Secondary Configuration
19. The secondary configuration depends on the main switch size and whether or not there is an associated fire
pump main.
A. For main service of up to 7 sets of cables per Greenbook Document 063928 without a separate fire pump
service, or where the combined mains of the service and fire pump do not require more than 8 cables, the
secondary are cables in an open trench to conduits stubbed through the right-side or rear vault wall
(see Figure 1 on Page 5). Alternately, the cables may terminate on a wall-mounted bus stub.
B. For main service of up to 7 sets of cables per Greenbook Document 063928 with a separate fire pump
service, the secondary is made of cables in an open trench to wall-mounted bus stubs that feed adjacent
stubs to the fire pump (see Figure 4 on Page 8).
C. For bus duct main service per Greenbook Document 063928 without a separate fire pump service, the
applicant provides a bus duct termination through the vault wall (see Figure 7 on Page 11).
D. For bus duct main service per Greenbook Document 063928 with a separate fire pump service, the
secondary is made of cables in an applicant-installed cable tray from the side of the transformer to
wall-mounted bus stubs that then also feed an adjacent bus stub to the fire pump (see Figure 9 on Page 13).

057521 Page 2 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

E. The fire pump main must be dedicated to emergency equipment and must not exceed 2,000 A. With combined
services, running the emergency equipment will require curtailing regular load. There shall be a permanent
sign on or near the fire pump controls indicating that regular load must be curtailed when running the fire
pumps.
20. Provide a ______CFM forced air ventilation system from outside air via direct-drive, AMCA Type A or B spark
resistant, fan with an explosion proof motor (intake) and high exhaust vent opening. Install 1/2-inch mesh
screen on both sides of the fan assembly
(see Document 054163). Install a remote thermostat sensor at the exhaust opening and a separate thermostat
control 60 inches above finished floor. Set thermostat between 85°F and 90°F . All vent openings shall have a
minimum of 576 square inches of opening.
21. Provide two 3/4” X 12” ground rods with 12” exposed above finished floor, as shown in the plan view. Ground
rods are not to be altered in any way and must maintain a minimum of 6 feet of separation between them.
Install #2 Solid CU ground wire in a loop as indicated between the ground rods. PG&E will inspect all ground
rods prior to covering. Provide tests and documentation for deviations to this procedure to substantiate the
resistivity of the ground rods (see Document 060462).
22. Provide a 6-inch removable sill across all entrances for oil containment after transformer(s) are installed. Caulk
all gaps leading to the interior of the building. Provide a Corbin lock set with tumbler (CL3357-N2D-626 or
CK4257-GRC-626) for the vault door(s). PG&E will key the tumblers. Provide provisions to lock the door in the
open position for emergency purposes.
23. All exposed metal in the vault must be grounded.
24. Room to be designed and built as a Class 1, Zone 1, reference California Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety
Orders, Article 59, hazardous (classified) locations.

References Location Document

Draw Bolt for Electric Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09219
Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground
Rod Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 013109
Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground
Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 015251
Cable Support for Underground Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1 Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028077
Tags for Identifying Underground Cables and
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033582
Premolded 200-Amp Terminations for Primary
Underground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035314
Cables for Underground Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039955
Service Entrance from Underground Vault
Using Bus Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 041352
Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . 045290
Installation of Loop-Style, Three-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 045292
Ventilation of Vaults and Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Design Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 054163
Installation of Wiring for Lighting and Auxiliary
Equipment in Vaults and Manholes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 054438
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . UG-1 Services/Greenbook/EMWP . . . . . 058817
Grounding of Underground Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060462
Fault Indicators for Underground Application . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 061683
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services
0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 3 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

References (continued) Location Document

Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination
Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063929
Corporation Padlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068200

Table 1 Bill of Materials for Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformer

Item Description Code Document
1 Transformer, Pad-Mounted, Three-Phase (as required) − 045290
2 Cable, Insulated, Single-Conductor, Primary, 1/0 Minimum − 039955
3 Cable, Insulated, Single-Conductor, 600 V (size as required) − 039955
4 Conduit (size as required) (by applicant) − 062288
5 Ventilating Fan (as required) (by applicant) − 054163
6 Lighting (as required) (by applicant) − 054438
7 Wire, Ground, Number 2 AWG Solid, Bare Copper (by applicant) 290074 −
8 Terminal Connector, Compression-Type −
015251
9 Connector, Ground Terminal 303214
10 Clamp, Ground Rod, 3/4” 187017 013109
11 Anchor Bolt, 3-1/2” x 1/2” 190445 −
12 Padlock, Corporation (for exterior locking) 016583 068200
13 Cable Sectionalizing Tag −
14 Phase Description Tag −
033582
15 High Voltage/Maintain 8’ Clearance Label 621599
16 Transformer Number Decal −
17 Ground Rod, 3/4” x 12’ (by applicant) 010098 013109
18 Grating, Steel, Removable, Non-Skid (see Detail D on Page 19) (by applicant) − −
19 Duct Spacers (see Detail C on Page 19) (by applicant) − −
20 Insulated Bushing Well Plug 300486 035314
21 Spare Concentric Wire − −
22 Connector, Ground Terminal 302314 −
23 200-Amp Primary Termination: Load-Break or Dead-Break Elbow Receptacles −
035314
24 200-Amp Bushing Insert: Load-Break (300481) or Dead-Break (303920) −

057521 Page 4 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Up to 7 Service Cables

Alternate Secondary
Pulling Eye Conduits up to 8−5”

Ground Wire
#2 CU Solid Alternate 10 17 42” Min
(see Detail B Secondary
on Page 18) 12’ Ground Rod
Trough With 12” Exposed
Imaginary Line
for Transformer
Pad GFI Duplex
Ground Wires Receptacle
as Required per
(see Note 16
Document on Page 2)
Ground Wire in 15” 060462
Pulling Eye Primary Trough Secondary
E Conduits
D 18” 106”
up to 8-5”
21” (see Note 19
Primary on Page 2)
2-4” D 36”Min
20” 17” E
10 17 19”
22” 16” Pulling Eye
12’ Ground 42” 42”
Min 90”
Rod With 12”A Min A
Exposed No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
6” High Removable 96” Min
Sill (see Note 22
Primary on Page 3)
2-4” S
(alternate)
S

16 15
LEGEND
S
Temperature Sensor (cooling-type)
T Thermostat Control (60” above finished floor)
Figure 1
Dry Vault − Plan View S Fan Cutoff Switch (60’ above finished floor)
For Up to 8 Sets of Service Cables GFI Duplex Receptacles (60” above finished floor)
(see Note 19 on Page 2)
S Light Switch (60” above finished floor)
3/4” x 12” Ground Rod
Light Fixtures

Pulling Eye (see Note 17 on Page 2)

Note
1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer
to the back wall underneath the transformer.

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 5 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Layout for Up to 7 Service Cables (continued)

Style IIE Bayonet Secondary Neutral Grounding

Load-Break Oil Fuse (see Document 060462)

Liquid Level
Indicator 8

1
23 24 21
OFF
ON
Removable 12 18 Removable Steel Grating
Steel Grating 3
(see Detail D on Page 19)
13 14
21 22
20 19 Duct Spacers
2 9 Every 18”
7 (see Detail C on Page 19)

4
4

See Detail H on Page 21 Ground

Wires
Section A−A
Figure 2
Transformer Installed
Front View
For Up to 8 Sets of Service Cables
(radial primary installation shown)

057521 Page 6 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Up to 7 Service Cables (continued)

Insulated Bus Support

Duct Spacer

Figure 3
Alternate Secondary Cable Trench End for Bus Duct Termination
Side View
(see Details D, E, F on Page 20)

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 7 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Layout for up to 8 Service Cables with Separate Fire Pump

Fire Pump Bus Termination
(see Figure 5 on Page 9
and Figure 3 on Page 7)

Ground Wire 10 17 12’ Ground Rod

Pulling Eye With 12” Exposed
#2 CU Solid
(see Detail B 42” Min
Imaginary Line
on Page 18) for Transformer
Pad
GFI Duplex
Receptacle
(see Note 16
on Page 2)
Ground Wire in 15”
Pulling Eye Primary Trough 106”
E Main Service
D 18” Bus Termination
21” (see Figure 5 on Page 9
and Figure 3 on Page 7)
D 36”Min
Primary 17” E
2-4” 19” 20”
22” 16” Pulling Eye
10 17
12’ Ground 42” 90” 42”
Rod With 12” Min Min
Exposed No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
96” Min
6” High Removable
Sill (see Note 22
Primary on Page 3)
2-4”
(alternate) S
S

16 15 LEGEND
S
Temperature Sensor (cooling-type)
T Thermostat Control (60” above finished floor)
Figure 4
Dry Vault − Plan View S Fan Cutoff Switch (60’ above finished floor)
For Main Service of Up to 7 Sets of
Cables With Separate Fire Pump Service GFI Duplex Receptacles (60” above finished floor)
(see Note 19 on Page 2) S Light Switch (60” above finished floor)
3/4” x 12” Ground Rod
Light Fixtures

Pulling Eye (see Note 17 on Page 2)

Notes
1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer
to the back wall underneath the transformer.
2. All exposed grounded metal bolts within 10” of bus bars shall be suitably insulated.
3. Barrier is not needed if firestop supports the bus and is smoke proof.

057521 Page 8 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for up to 8 Service Cables with Separate Fire Pump (continued)

36” Min.
72” Max.

8”

8” To Fire Pump
Switchgear
8”

36” Min.
72” Max.
Bus Bar Support
and Smokeproof Barrier
(furnished by customer)

8”

8” To Main
Switchgear
8”

36” Min.
72” Max.

Vault Wall
Figure 5
Service Connection − Top View
(see Details D, E, F on Page 20)

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 9 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Layout for up to 8 Service Cables with Separate Fire Pump (continued)

To Customer’s Fire
Pump Switchgear To Customer’s
Main Switchgear

4-Sets 4-Sets
2-Deep 8-Deep

Duct Spacers

Floor

2-Sets
4-Deep Cables Supported
by Duct Spacers
Illustrated: 8 sets of cables to main switch with
2 sets of cables to fire pump.
Number of required cables will vary.

Figure 6
Cable Service With Fire Pump − Side View

To Transformer

057521 Page 10 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Bus Duct with no Separate Fire Pump

Pulling Eye

10 17
Ground Wire 12’ Ground Rod
#2 CU Solid With 12” Exposed 42” Min
(see Detail B Imaginary Line for
on Page 18) Transformer Pad
Ground Wires as GFI Duplex
Required per Receptacle
Document 060462 (see Note 16
on Page 2)
Ground Wire in 15”
Pulling Eye Primary Trough
18” E Pulling Eye
D
21” 106”

Primary D 36”Min
2-4” 17” E
19”
10 17 22” 16” 20” 23”−24” Customer Bus Duct
12’ Ground
Rod With 12” 42” 90” 48”
Exposed B Min Min
B
No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area
96” Min
6” High Removable
Sill (see Note 22
Primary on Page 3)
2-4”
(alternate) S
S

16 15
LEGEND
S
Temperature Sensor (cooling-type)
Figure 7 T Thermostat Control (60” above finished floor)
Dry Vault − Plan View
S Fan Cutoff Switch (60’ above finished floor)
Bus Duct Main Service
GFI Duplex Receptacles (60” above finished floor
S Light Switch (60” above finished floor)
3/4” x 12” Ground Rod
Light Fixtures

Pulling Eye (see Note 17 on Page 2)

Note
1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer
to the back wall underneath the transformer.

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 11 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Layout for Bus Duct with no Separate Fire Pump (continued)

Bus Duct
Termination Box Customer Feeder
X0 X1 X2 X3 Code 019645 Bus Duct

No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
B B
No. 7

Secondary 48”
Compartment

Detail A
Top View − Bus Termination

See Document 045291

Style IIE Bayonet
Load-Break Oil Fuse Bus Bar Support Brackets
(see Document 063929)

Liquid Level Bus Duct Termination End

Indicator Flange and Flange Plate
1,000 kcmil, 600 V Copper Conductor
8 Extra Flexible, 127 D Stranding Code 294490
Removable 23 24 OFF Cable Spacer
21
Steel Grating ON (see Document 063929)
12
13 14 Phase X3
Phase X2
Phase X1
2 20 21 22 Phase X0

7 22-3/8”
9

23”−24” 24”
11
Min.
to any bend
Ground Wires or obstruction

Section B−B Edge of Transformer Pad Area

See Detail H
on Page 21 Figure 8 Note: See Document 063929
Bus Duct Termination for bus duct termination
box details

057521 Page 12 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Layout for Cable Tray Service with a Separate Fire Pump

Fire Pump Bus Termination 10 17 12’ Ground Rod

(see Figure 5 on Page 9 With 12” Exposed
and Figure 3 on Page 7)

Ground Wire Pulling Eye

#2 CU Solid 42” Min
(see Detail B
on Page 18) Imaginary Line for
Transformer Pad
Secondary Ground Terminal GFI Duplex
Connections Required in Receptacle
Document 060462 (see Note 16 on
Ground Wire in Page 2)
Pulling Eye Primary Trough
D 18” 106”

D 36”Min
Primary
2-4” 19” Cable Tray
22” 16” Pulling Eye
10 17
12’ Ground 42”
Rod With Min. 90”
C C
12” Exposed No Cable Troughs in
Front of the Pad Area

6” High Removable Sill 96” Min

(see Note 22 on Page 3)
Primary
2-4” S
(alternate)
S

16 15 LEGEND
S
Temperature Sensor (cooling-type)
T Thermostat Control (60” above finished floor)
Figure 9
Dry Vault − Plan View S Fan Cutoff Switch (60’ above finished floor)
Bus Duct Main Service
With Fire Pump GFI Duplex Receptacles (60” above finished floor)
S Light Switch (60” above finished floor)
3/4” x 12” Ground Rod
Light Fixtures

Pulling Eye (see Note 17 on Page 2)

Note
1. Primary may also be routed to back wall of vault. Primary may not be routed from primary section of transformer
to the back wall underneath the transformer.

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 13 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Layout for Cable Tray Service with a Separate Fire Pump (continued)

9 Sets of 1,000 kcmil,

600 V Copper Conduct
Extra Flexible, 127 D
Stranding Code 294490
Secondary Neutral Grounding
(see Document 060462)
Style IIE Bayonet Bus Stub
(see Detail E
Load-Break Oil Fuse on Page 20)
Liquid Level
Indicator 8

Removable 23 24
Steel Grating OFF
ON Cable Tray
by Applicant 84”
13 14 Min

20 23 24
2
9
7 Support as Required
by Applicant

11
Ground Wires

See Detail H
on Page 21
Section C−C

Note: Cable tray shall be vented, with rollers, minimum of 36” wide and 3-1/2” deep.

Figure 10
3,000 A − 4,000 A Pad-Mounted Service Cable Enclosure
With Fire Pump

057521 Page 14 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Forced Air Details

T
S

Exhaust
Duct

Air
Flow

CFM Air Flow

(see Note 20 on Page 3)
S

Intake
Fan

Fire Damper Fire Damper

(see Note 14 on Page 2) (see Note 14 on Page 2)

Figure 11
Plan View − Detail of Forced Air Ventilation

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 15 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Forced Air Details (continued)

Exhaust
Duct
T

84” Min
60” 60”

Figure 12
Section A−A

6 ft.
Min

12” Low Intake

Vent
16 Opening

High
Exhaust 10 ft.
Vent Min.
Opening 8 ft.
Min.
6” High 15
Removable Sill
(see Note 21
on Page 3)
6”
12”

Figure 13
Front View − Ventilation and Entrance Details
When Only Personnel Access is Required

057521 Page 16 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Forced Air Details (continued)

8.5 ft.
Min

12”

16
9.5 ft.
High Min.
Exhaust
Vent 10 ft.
Opening Low Intake Min.
Vent
6” High 15 Opening
Removable Sill
(see Note 21
on Page 3)
6”
12”

Figure 14
Front View − Ventilation and Entrance Details

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 17 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Cable Trough Details

18 Non-Skid
18 Non-Skid Removable Grating
Removable Grating

20”
Min 8 Sets of Four

19
17”
Min

Section D−D
20”
Figure 15
Primary Cable Trough Section E−E
Note: 3-hour fire rated Figure 16
(see Note 14 on Page 2)
Secondary Cable Trough for
400 A − 2,500 A Mains

Note: Size as required to fit duct spacers.

Dimensions shown are for Formex four
way spacer for 2” conduit with 2”
separation (see Detail C on Page 19).

Cable Block and Pin

(see Document 028077
Figure 1 on Page 1)

30”

Detail B
Mounting Ground Ring Bus
to Vault Wall

057521 Page 18 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Cable Trough Details (continued)

19-3/8”
4 9/16” 4 9/16” 4 9/16”

1-3/4”

4-9/16”

4-1/4”

Detail C
Formex Four-Way Duct Spacer 2” Duct With 2” Separation

1. Place one duct spacer every 18” from secondary window edge.
2. Functional equivalent may be used.
3. Use one 4-hole spacer with 2” holes for each set of 1000MCM cables, for example:
− for five sets of cables each spacer set is 4 holes wide by 5 layers deep.
− for seven sets of cables each spacer set is 4 holes wide by 7 layers deep.

Detail D
Typical Non-Skid Grating
1. Size and numbers as required.
2. Maximum weight of each piece shall not exceed 50 lbs.
3. Open area must be at least 45%.

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 19 of 21

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors
EMWP

Bus Bar Termination Details

1. All exposed grounded metal bolts within 10” of bus bars shall be suitably insulated.
2. Barrier is not needed if firestop supports the bus and is smokeproof.

Bus Support and Smokeproof Barrier

1-1/8” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2” 2-7/8”

7/8”
1-3/4” Varies C Window
L Opening

9/16” Dia. Holes

Connector
8

Caulking Face of Vault Wall

Y
Detail E
Connection to Customer’s Bus Bar See Note 2
Customer’s Service
Entrance Bus Bars
10”
Vault Min. To Customer’s
Ceiling ..... Switchgear
.....
Customer’s Service
Entrance Bus Bars
8 Connector

102”
Min.

Service Cable Fire Pump Cable

Vault Floor

Detail F
Section Y−Y
Detail G

057521 Page 20 of 21 Rev. #11: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installed Indoors EMWP

Primary Cable Support Details (continued)

Z
Cut to Suit Table 2 Primary Cable Termination Support
33 31 28 Item Quantity Description
25 − Bolt, Machine 1/2” x 4”, Square Head, Galvanized
32
26 − Bolt, Machine, 1/2” x 1-1/4” Hexagonal, Head, Galvanized
30
27 − Bolt, Machine, 3/8” x 1” Hexagonal, Head, Galvanized
29 Z
28 2 Channel, 1-1/4”, Unistrut A-1000
Detail H 29 2 90_ Angle Fitting, 3/16”, Unistrut A-1326
Cable Termination Support
30 4 Spring Nut, 3/8”, Unistrut A-1008
31 12 Spring Nut, 1/4”, Unistrut A-1006-1420
32 4 Capscrew, Hexagonal Head 3/8” x 1” Galvanized
33 12 Capscrew, Hexagonal Head 1/4” x 1” Galvanized

29
25 28

27 26

Section Z−Z Alternate Section Z−Z

Support Mounted Above Floor Surfaces Support Mounted Below Floor Surface
(all mounting holes, drill to suit)

Revision Notes
Revision 11 has the following changes:
1. Removed Figure 15 and Notes 1, 2 and 3 on Page on18.

Rev. #11: 08-15-17 057521 Page 21 of 21

 OH: Services
Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: SXZO

AGRICULTURAL OVERHEAD SERVICE 300 HP OR LESS 058087

Asset Type: Electric Metering Function: Design and construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 8/15/17

Rev. #14: This document replaces PG&E Document 058087, Rev. #13. For a description of the changes, see Page 12.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope
This document establishes and illustrates the required methods of providing overhead agricultural service of
300 horsepower (hp) or less.

General Information
1. This document applies to agricultural loads rated 5 through 300 hp, provided both of the following conditions are met.
A. The service is overhead.
B. The load current does not exceed the ampere limitation of the service entrance equipment or PG&E facilities.
2. Service Request: The customer should make application for service and verify the available service voltage with
PG&E as far in advance of construction as possible. The customer should then notify his pump company of the
available PG&E service voltage.
3. Available Service Voltage:
A. Non-residential single-phase loads to a maximum of 7-1/2 hp shall be served at 120/240 V, single-phase,
3-wire.
B. Three-phase motors of 5 hp, or bigger up to 30 hp, will normally be served at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire,
but may be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V at the customer’s option and if capacity is available from
existing facilities.
C. Single or grouped three-phase motors of 30 hp up to 50 hp can be served from an open-delta transformer
producing service voltage at 120/240 V, three-phase, 4-wire, if the customer has a combination of single and
three-phase loads, otherwise they must be served at 120/208 or 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire.
D. Single or grouped three-phase motors from 60 hp through 125 hp shall be served at 120/208 V or 277/480 V,
three-phase, 4-wire.
E. Single or grouped motors of 150 hp through 300 hp shall be served at 277/480 V, three-phase, 4-wire.
4. General Requirements: PG&E shall furnish and install the overhead service drop, meters and metering current
transformers. Unless otherwise stated, all other materials shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the
customer and shall comply with the requirements of PG&E. It shall be the responsibility of the customer to
ascertain and comply with the requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction. In areas where no
provision is made for inspection by local authorities, the applicable state regulations shall apply. Local ordinances
may include wiring requirements in addition to those shown in this document or in the National Electrical Code
(NEC). Consult inspection authorities for requirements, city or county permits, and inspections that may be
required before service can be connected.
5. Clearances: All overhead conductors may not be in a vertical plane any closer than 10 feet from any wellhead.
The vertical plane is the plane created between the overhead conductors and the ground. Refer to Figure 1 on
Document 025055.

Rev. #14: 8/15/17 058087 Page 1 of 12

OH: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
EMWP

6. Service Pole: When a service pole is required, it shall have a minimum length of 25 feet (set 4-1/2 feet in the
ground) unless a longer pole is needed for required ground clearance or to accommodate additional PG&E
equipment. The pole will be located at least 10 feet from the motor or load and in such a position that the
overhead conductors and any required guy will not interfere with work done at the motor or load. A PG&E pole
with high-voltage conductors (over 600 V) shall not be used as a service pole. Refer to Document 025055 for
further information on the requirements for customer-owned poles.
7. Service Entrance Conductor:
A. The conductors shall be sized and installed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the NEC.
B. A minimum of 18 inches of conductor shall be provided outside of the service head to make connection with
PG&E’s service drop.
C. When the meter enclosures shown in Figure 9 through Figure 11 on Page 10 are used, the customer shall
furnish and connect all line and load-side service entrance conductors.
D. When metering equipment requiring a current transformer (Figure 12 on Page 11 through Figure 15 on
Page 11) is used, the customer shall furnish lugs and connect conductors to the line and load sides of the
current-transformer mounting base. The unmetered conductor may be cable, but shall be continuous and
unspliced in the current-transformer cabinet and shall be located so as to not interfere with the
current-transformer installation.
8. Service Entrance Conductor Covering for Service Poles:
A. All wires between the service head and the meter shall be enclosed in any of the following:
(1) galvanized rigid steel conduit
(2) rigid aluminum conduit
(3) electrical metallic tubing
(4) intermediate metallic conduit
(5) PVC plastic conduit having a minimum wall thickness of 0.15 inches (Schedule 40 for 2” PVC conduit
or larger, Schedule 80 for 1-1/2” PVC conduit or smaller)
All fittings shall be raintight.
B. If PVC plastic conduit is used, it need not be covered. If rigid steel or other approved metallic conduit is used,
it shall be enclosed with either 1/4-inch thick fiber conduit,1-1/2-inch thick wood covering or PVC “U” shaped
moulding for a minimum distance of 8 feet below the lowest open service entrance conductor. The covering
shall be strapped to the pole at intervals not greater than 3 feet (see Pages 7 and 8).
9. Grounding: The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed, non-current-carrying
metal parts. Bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and local ordinances. PG&E prefers,
but does not require, the grounding electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid
steel conduit or armored cladding.
10. Metering Requirements:
A. The arrangement of service equipment shall place the meter and current-transformer cabinet (if required) on
the source side of the customer’s service switch or breaker.
B. 125 hp or less: The customer shall provide and install a self-contained, meter socket enclosure, approved by
PG&E, for the available service voltage, in accordance with Table 1 on Page 5 and Figure 9 through Figure 11 on
Page 10.
C. 130 hp through 300 hp: The customer shall provide and install a PG&E-approved combination meter and
current-transformer cabinet in accordance with Table 1 on Page 5 and as shown in Figure 12 and Figure 13 on
Page 11, or, as an option, the current-transformer cabinet and separate transformer-rated meter safety-socket box
as shown in Figure 14 and Figure 15 on Page 11.
D. Non-residential (agricultural) customer-owned poles are limited to only one meter panel rated less than or
equal to 200 amps. Two or more meter panels or a meter panel rated greater than 200 amps must be installed
on a panel board construction as shown in Document 065374.

058087 Page 2 of 12 Rev. #14: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

11. Customer’s Control Equipment:

A. Customer’s switch and motor control equipment shall be of proper horsepower and voltage rating and, when
exposed to weather, shall be weatherproof.
B. The customer’s control equipment shall be selected in accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 430
and local ordinances. Consideration should also be given to installing open-phase and reverse-phase protection.
C. Customer’s switch and motor control cover shall be effectively locked or sealed if the enclosure contains
accessible electrically energized parts.
D. When a service pole without an adjacent panel board is used, the customer’s switch and motor control equipment
may be installed as shown on Pages 7 and 8. One side of the pole must be kept clear for climbing.
12. Services to Three-Phase Pumps:
A. When three-phase service is established to a pump, PG&E’s crew will assist in checking for satisfactory pump
motor performance if the customer or his representative is present. The construction crew should take
“Clamp-on” ammeter readings at the service head, or the customer or his representative can take them at the
motor control box. If the reading on the “high” phase is more than 10% higher the reading on the “low” phase,
then the phases should be rolled to get the readings as close as possible (see Figure 1 below). The set of
readings that gives the lowest difference is the connection that should be retained. It is possible that none of
the other readings will be any better. Use the “Motor Data Sheet, to record all readings.
(1) Starting and stopping of the pump should be done only by the customer or his representative.
Connections can be changed at the transformer pole or service pole by PG&E’s crew or at the motor
control box by the customer or his representative.
(2) On 240 V, 3-wire services where one phase conductor is grounded, all rolling of leads must be done
on the customer’s motor leads (at the motor control box), not on PG&E’s service leads.
(3) Example
Once water was flowing satisfactorily from the pump, the following ammeter readings were taken:

Connection Amperes
L1 L2 L3
A = Original Readings 60 61 67
B = Second Set of Readings 60 62 63
C = Third Set of Readings 59 62 66

Conclusion: Connection B should be used.

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

Roll Service
Roll Service
Leads to the
Leads to
Right Once
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 the Right L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Again
Connection A Connection B Connection C

Figure 2
Figure 1
Interchanging Leads
Rolling Leads
Reverses Rotation
(maintains same rotation)
(for information only)

13. Voltage stabilizer will be furnished and installed by PG&E. Voltage stabilizer is required on 480V, 3-phase,
3-wire ungrounded installations. Refer to Document 052497.

Rev. #14: 8/15/17 058087 Page 3 of 12

OH: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
EMWP

References Location Document

Dead-End Attachments for Service and Streetlight
Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 015009
Spool and Clevis-Type Insulators−Distribution Lines . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022439
Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025055
Dead-End and Angle Attachments for Aluminum
Conductors - Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028851
Voltage Stabilizer for 480 Volt, Three-Phase, 3-Wire
Ungrounded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052497
Agricultural Underground Service 500 HP or Less . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 054619
Cable and Accessories for Secondary Aerial Cable
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 057876
Miscellaneous Hardware for Overhead Line
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058778
Conductors for Overhead Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 059626
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Overhead and Underground Panel Board
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH-Services/UG-1: Services . . . . . . . . . . 065374
Fired Wedge Connectors for Primary and Secondary
Distribution Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066194

058087 Page 4 of 12 Rev. #14: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Table 1 Customer’s Metering Equipment Requirements 1

Metering
Equipment’s
Maximum hp 3 Type Meter Equipment
Service Voltage 2 Current Rating Refer to
Single or Grouped Motors Required
(Continuous/Max.
Amps Shown) 8
120/240 V
Single-Phase, Self-Contained 4-Jaw Bussed Figure 9
7-1/2 hp Single Phase 100
Non-Residential, Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 10
3-Wire
240 V Delta 30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bussed Figure 10
Three-Phase, Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 10
3-Wire 4 60 hp Single or Grouped 200
240/120 V Delta 30 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused Figure 11
Three-Phase, Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 10
4-Wire 5 50 hp Single or Grouped 200
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 5-Jaw Bussed Figure 10
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 10
Combination Meter,
Current-Transformer and Service Figure 12
480 V Delta
Termination Cabinet With 8-Jaw Page 11
Three-Phase,
Socket and CT Mounting Base
3-Wire 6 300 hp Single or Grouped 400 7
Figure 14
Separate Current-Transformer
and
Cabinet and Transformer-Rated
Figure 15
Meter Box
Page 11
60 hp Single or Grouped 100 Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bussed Figure 11
125 hp Single or Grouped 200 Safety-Socket Meter Box Page 10
Combination Meter,
Current-Transformer and Service Figure 13
277/480 V Wye
Termination Cabinet With 13-Jaw Page 11
Three-Phase,
Socket and CT Mounting Base
4-Wire 300 hp Single or Grouped 400 7
Figure 14
Separate Current-Transformer
and
Cabinet and Transformer-Rated
Figure 15
Meter Box
Page 11
1 For meter equipment illustration, see Pages 10 through 11.
2 See Note 3 on Page 1 for available service voltages.
3 Maximum horsepower for single and grouped motors is based on nameplate rating. Ratings shown are the
recommended values for motors running at full load.
4 Limited availability, consult PG&E.
5 See Note 3.C on Page 1.
6 480 V Delta is not available for new services.
7 Customer metering equipment rated higher than 400 amps, three-phase, must be pad-mounted and supplied by
an underground service.
8 The metering equipment ratings shown must not be exceeded with motors running at full load. Customer may
choose metering equipment with a greater ampacity rating.

Rev. #14: 8/15/17 058087 Page 5 of 12

OH: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
EMWP

Pole Construction

Notes: (For additional information on the requirements for customer-owned poles refer to Document 025055)
1. Omit wood block (see Table 3, Item 1 on Page 7) and conduit covering (see Table 3, Item 5 on Page 7) when
PVC service conduit is used. Exception: Wood block is required when service weatherhead is metallic and the
neutral service entrance conductor is uninsulated.
2. When the service conduit (see Table 3, Item 6 on Page 7), is metallic or minimum 2-1/2 inch diameter PVC
Schedule 80, the enclosure height may be reduced as permitted by G.O. 95 to allow 48 inches minimum
meter height from a level standing surface to the center line of the meter.
3. The customer shall extend the service weatherhead to within 18 inches of the pole top unless otherwise
instructed by PG&E (see Note 7A on Page 2).
4. For notes and details pertaining to metering equipment, see Note 10 on Page 2.
5. For notes and details pertaining to customer’s service disconnect and motor control equipment, see Note 11
on Page 3.
6. Customer’s conductors installed in conduit must be in rigid steel conduit, or 2-1/2 inch minimum diameter
Schedule 80 PVC plastic on surface of pole.
7. Alternate location for the ground rod to reduce exposure to agricultural equipment is shown in Figure 3 on
Page 7.

Table 2 Customer’s Service Attachment Location 1, 2

Metering Equipment’s Weatherhead Distance From Top of Pole

(inches) PG&E Service Attachment
Current Rating (Continuous/ Type
Max. Amps Shown) 4 Minimum Maximum
t+200 16 18 Weatherhead
400 (1 ∅) 3 32 34 3 Spool Extended Rack
400 (3 ∅) 3 40 42 4 Spool Extended rack
1 All open wire services require extended rack construction. See Figure 7, Page 8.
2 A longer pole may be necessary to obtain the required service clearances from the ground. See Document 025055
Requirements for customer-owned poles.
3 See note 10.D on page 2.
4 The metering equipment ratings shown must not be exceeded with motors running at full load. Customer may
choose metering equipment with a greater ampacity rating for their metering equipment.

058087 Page 6 of 12 Rev. #14: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Pole Construction (continued)

31 See Figure 5, Figure 6,

and Figure 7 on Page 8 Table 3 Material to be Furnished and Installed
1
and Table 4 on Page 9 by Customer
8 for Pole-Top Construction
12” 21 Item Description
See Note 3 on Page 6
Wood Block 4” x 4” x 6” Long Securely Nailed
9 See Table 4 on 1 to Pole (may be two 2” x 4” x 6” wood blocks
Page 9 for Application nailed together) (see Note 1 on Page 6)
3
2 Conduit Entrance Cap or Service Weatherhead
Service Entrance Conductors
3
2 (see Note 7A on Page 2)
4 Pipe Strap, Heavy Duty, Galvanized
Covering, Wood, Fiber Conduit or PVC
96” See Note 8B on 5 “U”-Shaped Moulding (see Note 8B on Page 2
Page 2, Entrance and Note 1 on Page 6)
Conductor Covering
4 for Service Poles 6 Service Conduit (see Note 7 on Page 2)
Meter Socket or Current-Transformer Enclosure
7
36” (see Pages 10 through 11)
Max. 8 Wood Pole, as Required (25 ft. minimum)
Guy Material, as Required. (See footnotes for
5 9
Table 4 on Page 9)
4
6
7

See Note 10 on Page 2

Fiber
Conduit Pipe Strap
See Note 13 on Page 3
Pole Pole Pole Pole
8” Min. See Note 11 on Page 3
75” Max. Fiber Wood Wood PVC
66” Preferred See Note 9 on Page 2 Conduit Boxing Molding U-Shaped
See Note 2 on 4
Molding
Page 6
See Note 6 36” Max. Figure 4
on Page 6 Methods Of Covering Metallic Conduits
See Note 9 on Page 2 (see Note 8B on Page 2)

18”
Standing Approx. See Note 7 on Page 6
Surface
Figure 3
Pole Construction for Agricultural Overhead
Service 300 hp or Less

Rev. #14: 8/15/17 058087 Page 7 of 12

OH: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
EMWP

Pole-Top Construction

Notes
1. See Table 4 on Page 9 for down guy requirements.
2. When a neutral conductor is required inside the molding, replace the bare neutral with the required length of
insulated conductor.
3. For customer-owned poles, span lengths are limited to 150’. The vertical separation between conductors in
extended rack construction is 8” minimum.
4. Figure 6, Page 8 installation is not allowed for new construction.

13 16 10 11 12 Maintain 1-1/2” 14 18 4” Min.

4” Min. 19
Minimum
Hardware
12” Clearance 12” 12 20

9 See Note 1 above 9

21 See Note 1 above
21

Figure 5 Figure 6
Service Drop Cable Installation Aerial Cable Installation
See Note 4 above

21
Neutral, See Note 2 above
11 23
22 17 4” Min.
See Note 3 above

24”
8”
4” See Table 2,
4” 8” Page 6
8” 480 V Capacitor Installation
Riser Installation
12” See Figure 3 on Page (see Document 028424A)
7 (contact PG&E for
location of weatherhead)
21
2” PVC Schedule 40
9 U-shaped Molding
(see Document 021924)
See Note1 above
Figure 8
Pole-Top Construction for Installation of 480 V
Figure 7 Capacitor Bank or Other PG&E Equipment
Open Wire Cable Installation

058087 Page 8 of 12 Rev. #14: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Pole-Top Construction (continued)

Table 4 Conductor Application for Customer-Owned Service Poles

Cable Data 1 Construction
Metering Equipment’s Current Rating Span 4 Down Guy Pole-Top
Slack Span 3
(Continuous/Max. Amps shown) (feet) Requirement Construction
2 Figure 5
10-150 1/0 Service Drop
Page 8
< = 200
2 Figure 5
10-80 4/0 Service Drop
Page 8
2 Figure 5
10-80 4/0 Service Drop
Above 200 Page 8
to 400 Figure 7
10-80 397.5 WP Al Open Wire 2
Page 8
1 Larger cable may be required if voltage drop requirements are not met.
2 A down guy is required if construction crosses the street or thoroughfare, or if the pole is not in reasonably firm soil.
3 Full Tension Span are allowed for existing installations and like for like replacements, but not new construction.
4 Span length limitations are based on light loading districts. See Document 059690 for service drop limitations in other
loading districs.

Table 5 Material to be Furnished and Installed by PG&E

Item Description Document
10 Insulator, Spool and Clevis-Type 022439
11 Bolt, Machine, 5/8” x Length (as required)
058778
12 Washer, 2-1/4”, Square, 5/8” Bolt Size
13 Cable, Service Drop, 1/0 or 4/0 (as required) 059626
14 Cable, Aerial, 1/0 or 4/0 (as required) 057876
15 Watt-Hour Meter, Current Transformer, Test Block, Test Switch (see Note 9 on Page 2) −
16 Preformed Grip, Service Cable 028851
17 Preformed Grip, WP Aluminum 028851
18 Insulator, Suspension, Clevis-Type
057876
19 Dead End, Automatic, Clevis-Type
20 Eyebolt, 5/8” Diameter x Length (as required) 058778
21 Connector, Fired Wedge (size as required) 066194
22 Cable, 397.5 kcmil WP Aluminum (as required) 059626
23 Extended Rack 015187

Rev. #14: 8/15/17 058087 Page 9 of 12

OH: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
EMWP

Safety-Socket Meter Box

Notes
1. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements book for dimension and specification details.
2. Figure 10 and 11 are applicable to maximum of 125 hp pump (self-contained) at 480 V or 277/480 V.
3. 240 V, three-phase, 3-wire service is limited and available only when PG&E’s transformers are of the overhead
type, the load is limited to three-phase motors (small 240 V, single-phase loads may be permissible in some
locations), and in the future, other customers are not likely to be served from the transformer bank.
4. Figure 9 below shows a meter socket with test bypass facilities used for non-residential single-phase service,
120/240 V maximum of 7-1/2 hp. All three-phase services require bypass facilities.
5. Voltage stabilizer, required on 480 V, 3-phase, 3- wire ungrounded services, will be furnished and installed by
PG&E. Refer to Document 052497.
Optional Top Entry

Ground Phase
Conductor on
240 V Service

Customer’s
Load-Side Line-Side
Customer’s Line-Side Conductors
Service Entrance Service
Connection Entrance
Connection
Load-Side
Neutral Conductors

(alternate location) See Note 5

Figure 9 Figure 10
120/240-V, Single-Phase, Self-Contained, 4-Jaw 240-V and 480-V, Three-Phase, 3-Wire,
Bused 0−200 Amp Safety-Socket Meter Box Self-Contained, 5-Jaw Bused 0−200 Amp
See Note 4 above Safety-Socket Meter Box
See Note 3 above and Footnote 6 on Page 5

Power-Leg Conductor
on 4-Wire Delta

Customer’s Line-Side Load-Side

Service Entrance Conductors
Connection

Figure 11
240/120-V, Three-Phase 4-Wire Delta or 480/277-V, Three-Phase, 4-Wire Wye
Self-Contained 7-Jaw Bused 0-200 Amp Safety-Socket Meter Box
See Note 2 above

058087 Page 10 of 12 Rev. #14: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
Greenbook
Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less EMWP

Transformer-Rated Metering and Enclosure

Notes
1. Refer to PG&E’s Electric and Gas Service Requirements book for dimension and specification details.
2. Figures 12 through 15 are applicable to a maximum of 300 hp motors.
3. Figures 12 through 15 are applicable to wall-mounted service termination enclosures with maximum ratings of
400 amps, three-phase. Termination equipment that require ratings higher than 400 amps must be
pad-mounted and supplied by an underground service.

Line Threaded Line Threaded

Conduit Hub Conduit Hub

Ring-Type Ring-Type
Meter Meter
Socket Socket
Sealable
Covers Current-Transformer
Line Side Mounting Base Line Side
Removable Furnished and Removable
Test Switch Lifting Installed by Test Switch
Bracket Handles Customer Bracket
Load Side Load Side
Alternate Alternate
Position Position
Figure 13
Combination Meter and
Front View Side View Current-Transformer Cabinets
Figure 12 0-400 Amp Rating
Combination Meter and Current-Transformer Cabinets For 277/480 V, 3∅, 4-Wire Wye
0-400 Amp Rating (See Table 1, Footnote 6 on Page 5)
For 480 V, 3∅, 3-Wire
(See Table 1, Footnote 6 on Page 5)
Mounting Base Furnished and Installed by
Customer (base for 3-wire service shown)

Sealable
Cover
Lifting
Sealable Handles
Covers
Flanged
Cabinet
Front View Side View Front View Side View
Figure 14 Figure 15
Meter Box for Transformer-Rated Metering Current-Transformer Cabinet
0-400 Amp Rating

Rev. #14: 8/15/17 058087 Page 11 of 12

OH: Services
Greenbook Agricultural Overhead Service 300 HP or Less
EMWP

Revision Notes
Revision 14 has the following changes:
1. Revised Notes 3A through 3E on Page 1.
2. Deleted Note 6 on Page 6.
3. Updated Table 2 on Page 6.

058087 Page 12 of 12 Rev. #14: 8/15/17

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

TERMINATING UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES 058817

0−600 VOLTS IN CUSTOMER-OWNED FACILITIES

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Alexander P. Yan (APY1) Date: 06-29-12

Rev. #07: This document replaces PG&E Document 058817, Rev. #06. For a description of the changes, see Page 10.
This document is also included in the following manual:
S Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
Purpose and Scope
This document shows methods and requirements for terminating PG&E-owned underground service conductors in
customer-owned service terminating facilities.
General Information
1. Underground service conductors will normally be run in a joint trench with gas and communications service
facilities. Where possible, a single service trench will be used to serve two adjacent premises. In order that the
most satisfactory meter location may be determined, PG&E should be consulted while the building is in the
planning stage.
2. Residential Service Termination Enclosures
The customer may provide any of the following as a service termination enclosure for residential service.
A. Single Family
(1) Combination service pull termination and meter socket, 0 through 200 amp (see Figure 1 on Page 3), or
201 through 320 amp (see Figure 2 on Page 4).
(2) Combination service pull section, meter, and CT mounting enclosure, 201 through 400 amp, for
single-phase service (see Figure 6 on Page 7).
(3) Wall-mounted underground service pull and termination box, 401 through 600 amp, single-phase
(see Figure 7 on Page 7).
(4) Floor-standing underground service pull and termination box, 601 and above, single-phase, 401 and
above, three-phase (see Figure 10 on Page 9).
(5) Meter post, for a typical underground service to a mobile home, 0 through 200 amp
(see Document 052521).
B. Multi-Family
(1) Wall-mounted underground service pull section and termination box for service 0 through 600 amp
(see Figure 9 on Page 8), or combination service termination enclosure and meter socket panel,
0 through 600 amp (see Figure 8 on Page 8).
(2) Underground service pull and termination section of a floor-standing switchboard
(see Document 063929 to determine when bus duct termination equipment is required).
3. Non-Residential Service Termination Enclosures
The customer may provide any of the following as a service termination enclosure for non-residential service.
A. Single Customer
(1) Typical safety socket meter panel, 0 through 200 amp (see Figure 3 on Page 5).
(2) Combination service pull, meter, and CT mounting enclosure, 201 through 400 amp, for single or
three-phase service (see Figure 5 on Page 6).
(3) Underground service pull and termination box (see Figure 10 on Page 9).
(4) Underground service pull and termination section of a floor-standing switchboard
(see Document 063929 to determine when bus duct termination equipment is required).

Rev. #07: 06-29-12 058817 Page 1 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities
B. Multiple Customers
(1) Underground service pull and termination box (see Figure 10 on Page 9).
(2) Underground service pull and termination section of a floor-standing switchboard.
4. Service Termination, Bus Stubs, and Connectors
Termination bus stubs and connectors shall be furnished and installed in the termination enclosure as follows.
A. Enclosures Rated 0 − 200 Amps
(1) The customer shall provide approved range-taking connectors suitable for aluminum conductors.
(2) One-bolt bus attachment connectors are acceptable for 0 − 200 amp services provided they are
anchored to prevent twisting of the connector assembly.
B. Enclosures Rated 201 Amps and Larger
(1) Aluminum termination bus stubs with NEMA standard mounting bolts (see Paragraphs 4B(3) and
4B(4)) shall be provided for the connection of service lateral conductors in customer’s service
equipment where the main disconnect (or service equipment rating, if there is no main disconnect) is
rated more than 200 amps. PG&E will furnish and install the termination connectors.
(2) The standard provisions for terminating either phase or neutral conductors shall consist of one pair of
1/2-inch bolts on 1-3/4 inch vertical centers for equipment rated 201 − 400 amp panels. An additional
pair of 1/2-inch bolts (on 1-3/4 inch vertical centers) shall be provided on 2-inch horizontal center for
each additional 400 amp increments, or multiples thereof, of service capacity up to 2,500-amp panels
(e.g., 1 pair for 400 amps, 2 pairs for 600 and 800 amps, 3 pairs for 1,000 and 1,200 amps, etc.) See
Figure 4 on Page 5.
(3) Cable termination mounting bolts shall be 1/2-inch cadmium-plated steel or equivalent and shall
extend a minimum of 2 inches from the mounting surface. They shall be supplied with nuts, flat
washers, and a pressure maintaining spring washer and shall be secured in place in such a manner
that a termination connector can be positioned and connected with the washers and nuts, using one
tool only from the front. Bolts shall have a head behind the termination pad and be of a recognized
captive or swedge restrainer design.
(4) A radial clearance of 1-1/2 inch is required between any termination facility (including bolts) and any other
termination facility, bus, or grounded surface in the terminal mounting area except (1) the minimum
clearance to the back of the pull section or to the front pull section cover may be 1 inch and (2) the neutral
termination facility may have a minimum clearance of 1 inch from any grounded surface.
5. Metering Requirements
A. Meters will be furnished by PG&E.
B. When a multi-unit residential meter panel services either a three-phase or a larger than 200-amp single-phase
house (utility) load, it shall be equipped with approved test-bypass facilities (see Figure 9 on Page 8).

References Location Document

Electrical Service Requirements for Mobile
Home Developments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 052521
Electric Revenue Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062208
Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential
Underground Electric Services 0 - 600 V
to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services
0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination
Unit for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063929
Engineering Material Specification 99, “Underground
Electric Duct System (installed by applicant)” . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS99
EUSERC Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL

058817 Page 2 of 10 Rev. #07: 06-29-12

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities
Residential Services

N N
Customer
Distr.
Section
UG
X (Optional) N
Svc. Term.
See See
Z
Table 1 Table 1

Service Y
Conduit See Table 1
W

Figure 1
Typical UG Service Termination Enclosure
Combination Meter Socket Panel
(residential 0 − 225 amp)

Table 1 Capacity and Dimensions (see Figure 1 above)

Maximum W X Y Z
Capacity Minimum Dimension (Inches)
125 Amp 7 8 4 6
225 Amp 7 11 5-1/2 8-1/2

Rev. #07: 06-29-12 058817 Page 3 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities

Residential Services (continued)

8-1/2” Meter Socket

Min. (Notes 2 & 4)
Manual Bypass
Studs (Note 3)

4-1/4” Min. 1-1/2” 1-1/8” Min.

Hex Screw Lug

3/4” 1-1/2” Min.
1-1/2”
3/8” 1” Min.
See Note 6
1-1/2” 4” Min.
15-1/2” Neutral Bonded
Provisions for up Min. To Enclosure
to and Including

ÎÎÎ
.250 6” Min.
4” Conduit in the

ÎÎÎ
Center Position 8-1/2”

Sealing
Provisions

Front View Side View

Figure 2
Typical Service Termination Enclosure
Combination Meter Socket Panel for Class 320 Meter
(residential 120/240 V, 201 − 320 amp service)

Notes
1. This service equipment shall be marked with continuous amp rating of 320 amps. Alternatively, it may be marked
“400 amp” (320 amps continuous).
2. Ring-type socket only is acceptable per EUSERC Drawing 300.
3. 12-24 bypass studs, 1/2 inches in height with 1/2-inch hex nut (measured across the flat) shall be provided on
each phase bus section. The studs shall have a horizontal spacing of 1-1/2 inch (measured from centers) between
the line and load bus sections and shall be offset from the line side termination lugs to permit cable entry from the
top without interference with the utility-provided manual bypass links.
4. The socket meter panel shall be provided with a sealing ring and shall not be removable with meter in place.
5. The bypass/cable termination compartment cover panel shall be independent of the meter panel, and removable
with the meter in place.
6. Terminations for service conductors shall be aluminum-bodied mechanical lugs with a range-taking ability of
#1 AWG through 600 kcmil. The lugs shall be secured to assure vertical alignment and line side lugs shall be
offset from the face of the bus to permit cable entry from the top. The line and load positions shall be identified in
3/4” high block letters.

058817 Page 4 of 10 Rev. #07: 06-29-12

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities
Non-Residential Services

Note
1. PG&E will furnish connectors and terminate its service conductors to the line terminals of the current
transformer mounting base.

Main Disconnect
Compartment
(optional)

Test-Bypass
Facilities Barrier

Figure 3
Typical Service Termination Enclosure
Combination Meter Socket Panel
Non-Residential

Customer’s Sealable Gutter

Service
Entrance
Conductors Main
(cable or bus) Disc.
Switch

T.B.F. T.B.F. T.B.F.

See Figure 10 UG
Service Customer Distribution Test-Bypass
on Page 9 Facilities
Termination Section
for Details
Section
Barrier

Figure 4
Typical Service Termination Enclosure
Main Disconnect, Meter Socket Assembly
for Multi-Unit Non-Residential Use

Rev. #07: 06-29-12 058817 Page 5 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities

Non-Residential Services (continued)

Sealable Transformer Mounting

Studs Base Furnished and
(4 Places) Installed by Customer

10”
ID
1/8”

2”
3”

3”
52”
Min.
3”

3”

UG Service 11” Min. 22” Min.

Termination 15”
15”
Section
3-1/2” Max.

W 3-1/2” Max.
Figure 5
Combination Meter and Current Transformer Cabinet Single-Phase or
Three-Phase Service 201 to 400 Amp
(see Note 1 on Page 5)

Table 2 Minimum Box Dimensions

W
Minimum (Inches)
3Ø 4-Wire Y or Δ 1Ø or 3Ø 3-Wire
36 24

058817 Page 6 of 10 Rev. #07: 06-29-12

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities
Single-Family Residential Service (201 − 600 amps)

Note
1. Remote metering only, with prior PG&E approval.

Transformer Mounting
Sealable Studs Base Furnished and
(4 Places) Installed by Customer

22” UG Service
Min. Termination
Section

Figure 6
Combination Meter, Current Transformer,
and UG Service Termination Cabinet (single-phase
service 120/240 V, 201 to 400 amp)

10” Min.
50’ Max.
See Note 1

See Figure 10
on Page 9 UG
for Details Service Safety
Termination Socket
Section Bussed Current Meter
Transformer Box
Cabinet
Conduit 1-1/4” Minimum
PG&E Service
Conduit to Service Switch or Breaker
Figure 7
Typical Underground Separate Bussed Current Transformer Cabinet
and Safety Socket Meter Box Assembly, 120/240 V, 401 to 600 Amp Service

Rev. #07: 06-29-12 058817 Page 7 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities

Residential Multi-Unit Service

Note
1. When a multi-unit residential meter socket panel will have either a three-phase, or a larger than 200-amp
single-phase house (utility) meter, the socket for this meter shall be equipped with test-bypass facilities
(see Figure 9).
W Customer’s Service Entrance
(See Table 3
on Page 10) Conductors (cable or bus)

UG Service
See Figure 10 Termination
on Page 9 Section
for Details

Circuit Breaker Barrier

Figure 8
Typical Combination UG Service Termination Enclosure
Meter Socket Panels for Multi-Residential Use (2 to 6 units) 0 − 600 Amp
Customer’s Service Entrance
Conductors (cable or bus)

Main
Disconnect
Switch
House
Meter
UG Service
T. B. F.
See Figure 10 Termination
on Page 9 Section Test-Bypass
for Details Facilities
(house meter only)
Barrier
See Note 1

Figure 9
Typical UG Service Termination Enclosure, Main Disconnect, and
Multi-Unit Metering Assembly Residential Use 0 − 1200 Amp

058817 Page 8 of 10 Rev. #07: 06-29-12

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities
Underground Service Termination Pull Box
Notes
1. Pull box covers shall be removable, sealable, provided with two lifting handles, and limited to a maximum size
of 9 square feet. Sealing provisions shall consist of two drilled stud and wingnut assemblies on opposite sides
of the panel. All security screws shall be captive.
2. Clear working space shall be maintained. When return flanges are necessary, they shall not intrude into
service conductor space designated by shaded area.
3. The 6” minimum height requirement from grade to panel does not apply for floor-standing switchboard.
4. Main service switch rated 2,501 amps and above shall require bus duct configuration.

3/4” Min. 3/4” Min.

W Y
Customer Service
Entrance Conductors
Exit Above Bus
Stubs

Bus Stubs Anchored

to Prevent Turning
As
Req’d. Load
Side 4” Min.

1/2” Bolts

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Shaded Space is 1” Min.
for Service

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
See Table 3 Connectors Over 200 Amp
and Table 4 Supply
1” Furnished by PG&E
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ on Page 10 Conductors Only
Min. See Notes 4A(1) and (2)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
for minimum
X pull box and 4B(1) on Page 2
75”
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ dimensions
2-1/2” Min.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Max. See Note 2

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
6”
Min.
3” Max.

Service Conduit Must Be

(see note 3) Staggered to Facilitate
Lateral Conduits
Service Cable
Grade Installation
Level
Figure 10
Typical Underground Service Termination Pull Box
(wall-mounted or floor-standing)

Rev. #07: 06-29-12 058817 Page 9 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities

Underground Service Termination Pull Box (continued)

Table 3 Minimum, Wall-Mounted, Pull-Box Dimensions: 80% Rated Service, Residential, Single-Phase
and 100% Rated Service, Commercial/Industrial, Single-Phase 1 or Three-Phase 2
Minimum Access
X Y
Opening “W”
Service Rating Bottom Side/Rear Bottom
(Amperes) 3-Wire 4-Wire Rear Entry
Entry Entry Entry
All Measurements in Inches
0−200 10-1/2 14 11 36 6 15
201−400 10-1/2 14 22 42 6 24
401−600 3 16-1/2 − 26 48 11 24
Over 600 See Table 4 below for Over 600-Ampere, Single-Phase Services Rated at 100%.
1 See “Notes” for Table 3 below.
2 Maximum of 400 amperes.
3 For single-phase only.

Table 4 Minimum Switchboard (floor-standing) Pull-Section Dimensions: Over 600 Amperes, Single-Phase
Service, 100% Rated and Commercial/Industrial, Three-Phase Service

Minimum Access
Opening “W” Termination Height “X”
Service Rating
(Amperes) 3-Wire 4-Wire
All Measurements in Inches
321−400 24 24
401−800 24 24
42 Min.−72 Max.
801−1,200 24 30
1,201−2,000 30 35
2,001−2,500 — 42 60 Min.−72 Max.

Notes in reference to Figure 10 on Page 9, to Table 3 above, and to Table 4 above.

1. If termination bus-landing stubs are installed perpendicular to the back of the board, a wider enclosure dimension
will be required to accommodate the installation of PG&E’s cables.
2. Maintain a clear working space. When return flanges are necessary, ensure they do not intrude into
service-conductor space.
3. Dimension W is the minimum width of the pull section access opening.

Revision Notes
Revision 07 has the following changes:
1. Revised Table 3.

058817 Page 10 of 10 Rev. #07: 06-29-12

 Greenbook

Prepared by: SXZO

DISCONNECT SWITCH REQUIREMENTS FOR DISTRIBUTED 060559

GENERATION CUSTOMERS

Department: Electric Distribution Section: Design and Construction

Approved by: D.Jantz (DWJ7) Date: 8/15/17

Rev. #04: This document replaces PG&E Document 060559, Rev. #03. For a description of the changes, see Page 6.

Note: This document also is included in PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook.

Purpose and Scope
This document describes the requirements for low-voltage (0–600 V), isolating, disconnect switches on customer
generation systems interconnected to a PG&E overhead or underground service. This document also describes
PG&E’s minimum functional and location requirements for switches. A disconnect switch device provides a visible
open clearance point when it is necessary to isolate the customer’s generator from the PG&E system.
General Information
1. Provide a disconnect device to electrically isolate the customer’s generator from the PG&E system in order to
establish a clearance point for maintenance and repair work in accordance with PG&E safety rules and
practices. The isolating disconnect device does not have to be rated for load break and therefore must not be
used to make or break parallels between the PG&E system and the generator(s).
2. Only use alternating current (ac) disconnect switches specifically approved by PG&E for this purpose. PG&E
employees must inspect and approve the installation before operation of the customer’s generation system will
be permitted.
3. The disconnect device must be installed between the PG&E meter and all generation sources.
4. The device must be physically located for ease of access and visible to PG&E employees within
10 feet of the meter. The device must be located in close proximity, or within line of sight, of the meter.
5. General or light duty disconnect switches typically are installed when the voltage is 240 V or less and the
ampere rating 600 amps or less. Use heavy-duty disconnect switches for all applications above 240 V and 600
amps.
6. The ampacity rating of a disconnect switch must be equal to or greater than the ampere rating of the
generator.
7. The neutral conductor shall not be switched.
8. Three−pole switches may be used in single−phase applications.
9. Disconnect switches with an interlock are allowed provided they meet all of the functional requirements. An
interlock system allows the switch to be opened (off) by the producer, but cannot be closed (on) until reset by
PG&E.
10. All disconnect devices must have locking provisions that accept a PG&E padlock with a 5/16-inch lock shaft.
Keyed locks are not allowed. If the disconnect device is operable without opening the enclosure, the operating
handle must be lockable. If the enclosure must be opened to operate the disconnect device, the enclosure
must be lockable.
11. Molded case circuit breakers, pull-out type disconnects, or any other similar device are not acceptable as an
approved disconnect switch.
12. For applications not described, contact the PG&E Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) department.
13. Interconnections in any PG&E sealable compartment are NOT allowed without written authorization from the
Electric Meter Engineering or Electric Distribution Standards departments. For any questions, contact PG&E’s
EGI department.

Rev. #04: 8/15/17 060559 Page 1 of 6

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Disconnect Switch Requirements

Basic

As specified and in Electric Rule 21, “Generating Facility Interconnections,” the generating facility must have an ac
disconnect switch. The device must meet all of the PG&E requirements, as specified in this document.

All disconnect switches must conform to nationally recognized standards and meet all applicable certification
requirements. These include, but are not limited to: NFPA 70−National Electrical Code (NEC), California Electrical
Code (CEC), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

PG&E-approved disconnect switch models currently listed in both the Eaton and Siemens Safety Switch
Cross-Reference Guides, meet all of the functional requirements described below. These guides can be found on
PG&E’s Distribution Interconnection Handbook website at http://www.pge.com/dih/.

Functional

• Manually operated: Operated by a person and not operated electronically.

• Gang-operated: One switch handle opens and closes all phases simultaneously.
• Includes marking or signage on the switch that clearly indicates the open (off) and closed (on) positions.
• Lockable in the open (off) position using a PG&E padlock.
• Allows visible verification that an air-gap of separation has occurred between the blades and contact points.
• A fusible ac disconnect switch is required for generators that do not have over-current protection
(i.e., breakers, fuses) at the point of interconnection with the utility.
• Adequately sized to handle fault and overcurrent conditions.

Location

• Easily accessible by PG&E, when requested.

• Located 10 feet or less, in line of sight, from PG&E’s electric meter at the point of common coupling
or interconnection and is seen easily from the meter panel. Installed in the electric meter room with
PG&E’s electric meter or if the meter is outdoors at the same grade level. The disconnect switch is
not allowed at a floor level above grade.
• When wall−mounted or floor standing (pad−mounted), installed at a vertical height of between 48
inches (minimum) and 75 inches (maximum), as measured from the ground to the top of the
disconnect switch enclosure.
• Clearly marked on the submitted single-line diagram indicating the manufacturer, model type,
voltage rating, current rating, and location.
• If the device is not adjacent to the PG&E’s electric revenue meter(s), a clear map and signs
indicating of the location of the disconnect switch are required. If the disconnect switch is not
accessible outside the locked premises, include signs with contact information and a distribution
provider-approved locking device for the premises.
• Installed in a safe and acceptable location that meets the same working space requirements as a
meter panel. See Greenbook section 4.4.4 Working Space.

060559 Page 2 of 6 Rev. #04: 8/15/17

 Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Exemption to the Disconnect Switch installation Requirement

Applicants with inverter-based generating systems that are supplied by PG&E single phase services up to 240 volts
may be exempted from installing a disconnect switch, as determined by PG&E, if the meter panel that is
interconnected with the generation source(s) meets all of the following conditions:
• Self-contained (not transformer-rated).
• Accepts form ”S” socket-based (e.g., FM2S) meters (not bolt-on meters).
• Rated for 320 amps (CL 320) or less of “continuous” current.
• Single-phase, 120/240 volt or 120/208 volt.
Any generation system that does not meet these conditions must install a disconnect switch, as required by PG&E.

Typical Socket−Based Meter Label

Definitions:

Back Feed: The energizing of a utility’s distribution system from a non-utility generation source.

Disconnect Switch: A disconnect device that the customer is required to install and maintain in accordance with the
requirements described in this document. It will completely isolate the customer’s generating facility from the electric
utility’s distribution grid. The device includes a visible open, as defined below.

Distributed Generation: Any type of customer-owned electric generator, static inverter, or generating facility that has
the capability of being operated in parallel with an electric utility’s distribution system.

Distribution System: The infrastructure constructed, maintained, and operated by a utility to deliver electric service to
retail customers at primary and secondary distribution voltages.

Generating Facility: All or part of the customer’s electrical generator(s) or inverter(s) together with all protective,
safety, and associated equipment necessary to produce electric power at the customer’s facility.

Onsite Generation System: A facility or energy system for generating of electricity that:
A. Uses renewable energy to generate electricity.
B. Is isolated from the distribution system at the customer’s premise when the utility grid is de-energized.
C. Operates in parallel with the utility’s distribution facilities.
D. Is intended primarily to offset part or all of the customer’s requirements for electricity.

Open Position: The disconnect blades are separated from the contacts for each phase, preventing the flow of
electricity between them.

Visible Open: An air gap must be visible at the trailing edge of the moveable disconnect blades when the switch is in
the open position.

Rev. #04: 8/15/17 060559 Page 3 of 6

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Customer Installed Disconnect Switches and Wiring Diagrams

Detail A See Detail A

Blades

Line Side

2
ON

5
1

4
OFF

8 3 Load Side
6

Figure 1
Typical AC Disconnect Switch

Table 1 List of Items Required for the AC Disconnect Switch

Item Description
AC Disconnect Switch Enclosure – General or heavy-duty, indoor or outdoor, fused or unfused,
1
UL/NRTL certified. As required.
2 Visible ON/OFF label.
3 Switch Handle – Manual, single pole for gang operation.
Provision For Locking in the Off (Open) Position – Accommodates a PG&E padlock with
4
5/16-inch lock shaft.
Device Label – Includes relevant information (device ratings, UL certification, etc.) about the
5
device.
6 Operable Door – Allows visible verification of blade position. Viewing window is optional.
7 Blades – Solid or Fused. Allows visible verification that separation from contacts has occurred.
Label stating “Utility Disconnect Switch” – Placed on the outside in the front of the disconnect
8
switch.

060559 Page 4 of 6 Rev. #04: 8/15/17

 Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Customer Installed Disconnect Switches and Wiring Diagrams

Primary Voltage

Service Transformer
PG&E Service
Bi−Directional (Net) Meter M

Barrier from PG&E Metering Section

Generator Lead Wires
Main Disconnecting Device Disconnect Switch
(See Note 3, Page 5)
Customer Load G Generator Facility

Figure 2
Typical Disconnect Switch Wiring Diagram

Primary Voltage

Service Transformer

PG&E Service
Bi−Directional (Net) Meter M

Barrier from PG&E Metering Section Fused Disconnect Switch

Line Side Interconnection Before the Main
Disconnecting Means (See Notes 1 & 2 below) Alternate NGOM Interconnection Method
(See Notes 1 & 2 below)
Main Disconnecting Device M Net Generation Output
Meter (NGOM)

Customer Load M G Generator Facility

Net Generation Output Meter (NGOM) Disconnect Switch

(See Note 3, Page 5)
Figure 3
NGOM Disconnect Switch Interconnection

Notes for Figure 2 and Figure 3:

1. An interconnection placed before the main disconnecting device requires approval. Submit a variance request to
the PG&E’s Electric Generation Interconnection (EGI) Department. Customer cables and equipment are not
allowed in any PG&E-sealed section.
2. If a line (Supply) side interconnection is approved, install a fused disconnect switch before the NGOM, as shown
in Figure 3, above.
3. The disconnect switch may qualify for the exemption if all the requirements on Page 3 are met.

Rev. #04: 8/15/17 060559 Page 5 of 6

Greenbook

Disconnect Switch Requirements for Distributed Generation Customers

Revision Notes
Revision 04 has the following changes:
1. Revised Note 4 on Page 1.
2. Revised “Location” section on Page 2.
3. Revised “Exemption to the Disconnect Switch installation Requirement” section on Page 3.

060559 Page 6 of 6 Rev. #04: 8/15/17

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

RESIDENTIAL AND SMALL COMMERCIAL OVERHEAD TO 061032

UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE CONVERSION

Asset Type: Electric Metering Function: Construction

Issued by: Quoc Hoang (QxH1) Date: 04-15-11

Rev. #04: This document replaces PG&E Document 061032, Rev. #03. For a description of the changes, see Page 4.
This document is also included in the following manuals:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices
Purpose and Scope
This document shows methods acceptable by PG&E, to be used by residential and non-residential (200-amp or less
main service switch) customers when converting existing 2-wire or 3-wire overhead services to underground.

General Information
1. A typical overhead service conversion is illustrated in Figure 1 on Page 3. PG&E will install cable in a conduit
system provided by the applicant. Various surface mount and semi-flush meter socket installations (illustrated in
Figure 2 on Page 3 through Figure 7 on Page 4) are used with services converted to underground. The
conversion option selected by the customer shall comply with all local building codes and ordinances. The
customer shall furnish, install, own, and maintain termination facilities on or within the building to be served.
2. Local ordinances may include requirements in addition to those shown in this document. Consult local inspection
authorities for these requirements. In areas where local ordinances require permits and inspection, these must be
obtained before PG&E can establish service. PG&E will install meter(s) after an inspection clearance has been
given by the appropriate electrical inspection authority.
3. When a service larger than 200 amps is desired, the customer shall consult with the local PG&E representative.
4. Service Conduit and Termination
A. PG&E will install the underground service cable and make the connections at the service termination point in
accordance with PG&E’s Electric Rule 16. The underground service lateral conductors will be installed, owned, and
maintained by PG&E from PG&E’s distribution system to the termination facility as indicated in Figure 2 through
Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4.
B. The customer shall provide trenching, conduit and backfill on his property in accordance with PG&E
specifications and pay any costs required by PG&E’s Electric Rule 16.
C. Service conductors will be installed in conduit as shown in Figure 1 on Page 3. For conduit size, refer to
PG&E Document 063927 for residential service or Document 063928 for commercial service.
D. The customer shall contact the local PG&E office to discuss service arrangements and agree upon the
“Electric Service Location” before trenching or wiring.
E. The customer shall provide and install, in addition to termination facilities, all equipment needed to modify the
service entrance when changing from overhead to underground service.
F. For conduit type on or within the applicant’s building, refer to PG&E Document 063927 or Document 063928.
Also consult local code authority.
G. Install bend in direction of service trench. To facilitate cable installation, only one 90° bend is permitted in the riser.
If a deeper trench is required, a minimum radius bend, per PG&E Document 063927 or Document 063928, shall
be installed to the same depth as the trench.

Rev. #04: 04-15-11 061032 Page 1 of 4

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion

H. If the trench is used jointly with other facilities (telephone, cable TV, etc.), increased cable depth may be
required. Refer to PG&E’s electrical and gas service requirements Electric and Gas Service Requirements
Manual (Greenbook) Appendix B, Electric and Gas Service Documents: Joint Trench Configurations and
Occupancy Guide.
I. Size and type of cable, conduit, and other facilities on the load side of the service termination point are subject
to local code requirements.
J. To avoid cable insulation damage, the ends of all risers shall be provided with a suitable termination fitting
such as bushing, nipple, hub or end bell, etc.
K. Pull termination box as specified in Table 1 on below. Item 6 is for service up to 250 kcmil cable. For larger
conductor, size box as required. See PG&E Document 058817.
L. The point where PG&E’s service conductors connect to the customer’s conductors, as shown in Figure 2 on
Page 3 through Figure 7 on Page 4, is identified as the “PG&E Service Termination Point.”
M. Item 3 in Figure 4 on Page 4 and Figure 5 on Page 4, may be used only if the service conductor is 1/0 AWG
or smaller, and can be pulled from the PG&E end of the service.
N. Customer may install short-radius conduit fitting (i.e. service elbows that prevent water from penetrating the
fitting at termination to meter panel). Short radius conduit fittings should not contain splices or taps. The cover
also must be sealable by PG&E personnel.
5. Grounding: The customer shall be responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed non-current-carrying
metal parts. Grounding shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC) and local ordinances,
except that the grounding wire shall be protected against mechanical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored
copper ground wire.
6. Metering Requirements: Meter will be furnished and installed by PG&E.

References Location Document

Trench and Installation Requirements for URD Cable . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 040686
Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volt
in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817
Methods and Requirement for Installing Residential
Underground Electric Services 0−600 V
to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927
Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial
Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts
to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

Table 1 Description of Items to be Furnished and Installed by Customer

Item Description
Option 1: Meter Adapter, Cooper B-Line Cat. No. MARR20L45GRSD
1 (160A) Use with Customer’s Panel Rated at 160A Continuous 1, 2
Option 2: Meter Adapter, Ekstrom Industries No. 722B (175A). Specify Left, Right, or Bottom Hub
2 Combination Service Meter and Breaker Panel (rating as required)
Pull Termination Box, 8” x 12” x 4”, Rain-Tight, Circle A-W (Cooper B-Line) No. R-9007A or Equivalent (see Note
3
4M on Page 2)
4 Conduit, See Notes 4C and 4G on Page 1
5 Hub to Be Closed and Made Tamper Proof
Pull Termination Box, 12” x 26” x 6”, Rain-Tight, Circle A-W Catalog Number R-90008, or Equivalent
6
(see Note 4K on Page 2)
1 Fifth jaw accessory, use Cooper B-Line Cat. No. 50365.
2 Reducer hub and gasket accessories for 2” conduit, use Cooper B-Line Cat. No. AW200 and 12750A.

061032 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #04: 04-15-11

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion

Optional Removable by Customer

To Be Removed
by PG&E
Meter Socket (see Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4)
For Riser and Pull Box Detail (see Figure 2 through Figure 7 on Pages 3 through 4)

For Gas and Water Sealing Requirements,

see Documents 063927 and Document 063928

48” Min.
72” Max.
Customer Shall Dig and Backfill Trench
(see Note 4B on Page 1)

Min. Bend Depth

To PG&E Distribution System

As required by
Document 063927 and Document 063928
Figure 1
Typical Service Conversion
PG&E Service Termination Point
(see Note 4L on Page 2)
5
5

See Note 4K on Page 2

See 1
6
Note 4M
on Page 2 PG&E Service Existing Surface
Termination Point Mount Meter Socket
(see Note 4L
To Grounding
on Page 2)
Electrode
Existing Customer’s
Meter Socket 4
Conduit Support
6” Min.
4 To Grounding Ground Line
Electrode
Conduit Support
Ground Line

Figure 3
Surface Mount Meter Socket
Figure 2
Cooper B-Line Meter Adapter

Rev. #04: 04-15-11 061032 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Residential and Small Commercial Overhead to Underground Electric Service Conversion

PG&E Service Termination Point

See Note 4M (see Note 4L on Page 2)
on Page 2 1 5
A
PG&E Service 5
Termination Point, 3
See 3
(see Note 4L
on Page 2) Note 4M
on Page 2
A
Existing Surface Mount
Section A-A
Meter Socket
4 To Grounding Electrode Existing Semi-Flush
Meter Socket
Conduit Support
Ground Line 4 To Grounding
Electrode
Conduit Support
Ground Line

Figure 4
Surface Mount Meter Socket
Figure 5
Semi-Flush Meter Socket
5 Existing Meter
5 5
B Socket or A-
1 Base Meter
PG&E Service 2
See Note 4K Termination Point Existing
on Page 2 (see Note 4L Service
6
on Page 2) Switch
B
PG&E Service Section B-B 4
Termination Point See Note 4L on Page
(see Note 4L on 2
Existing Semi-Flush To Grounding
Page 2)
4 Meter Socket Electrode
To Grounding
6” Min. Electrode Conduit Support
Conduit Support
Ground Line
Ground Line

Figure 6
Semi‐Flush Meter Socket Figure 7
2-Wire or A-Base Meter Connection
Revision Notes
Revision 04 has the following changes:
1. Revised Note 4G on Page 1.
2. Revised Table 1 and Note 4H, and added Note 4N on Page 2.
3. Revised minimum depth and radius bend in Figure 1 on Page 3.
4. Added Figure 2 on Page 3 with new B-Line meter adapter.

061032 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #04: 04-15-11

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

PRIMARY ELECTRIC UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES 062000

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #21: This document replaces PG&E Document 062000, Rev. #20 For a description of the changes, see Page 27.

Purpose and Scope

This document provides dimensions, illustrations, and ordering information for surface-operable, primary, electric
underground equipment and splice enclosures including frame and cover assemblies. The primary enclosures shown
in this document are the preferred enclosures. Precast and poured-in-place manholes should be used only when
space for surface-operable enclosures cannot be obtained.
General Information
1. Monolithically poured concrete enclosures may be provided by the supplier, for any depth combination of body and
extension, if the enclosure is delivered “in-hole” by the supplier and the enclosure accommodates the approved
frame and cover assembly by matching the dimensional requirements herein. Precast and poured-in-place
enclosures shall meet the requirements herein.
2. Size all enclosures to accommodate the largest size cable or piece of equipment that may ultimately be installed
for 600-Amp and 200-Amp distribution circuits.
3. The greatest cost savings is achieved by taking delivery of the enclosure at the jobsite and using supplier’s
equipment to install the enclosure into the prepared excavation.
4. Design, design loads, concrete, and reinforcing steel materials, concrete mixes, frame and cover assemblies and
materials, and construction of enclosures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C858, ASTM C857, and
ASTM C1802, as modified herein, in the Engineering Material Specification No. 53.
5. It is the responsibility of the installing party to check and prepare the jobsite as follows:
A. Make space available for the supplier’s equipment and/or a crane.
B. Arrange for the removal of any overhead facilities that might prohibit the use of the supplier’s equipment
and/or crane (if necessary).
C. Provide the excavation in the proper location and of the correct size, depth, and alignment, dewatered as
needed.
D. Prepare the excavation with 6 inches of compacted, 3/4 inch Class 2 Aggregate Base (AB). Provide
backfilling, compaction, and resurfacing.
E. Provide for waterproofing and protection board where required by Document 072149.
F. Provide the necessary manpower to assist in the installation of the enclosure.
6. Mastic sealant is to be provided by the supplier for all concrete-to-concrete joints. Mastic sealant must be installed
for all concrete-to-concrete joints.
7. The frame shall be ocntinuously grouted to the enclosure. When grade-adjustment bolts are used, the adjustment
bolts are to be completely removed from the frame after grouting. Install enclosures as level as practical, but do
not exceed 1/8” per foot slope.
8. Do not break out the bottom of the sump hole. The compacted (AB) is for leveling the enclosure, not for drainage.
9. The enclosures in this document are equipped with conduit terminators. When entering these enclosures with conduit
of a different diameter than the terminator, use a swedge reducer (Document 062288). New enclosure design no

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 1 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

longer has a knockout window. If working with existing enclosures, and need to enter through a knockout, use an
end bell and grout.
10. Core drilling the enclosure for installation of additional conduits is not allowed.
11. Pulling Irons
Pulling irons shall be designed for 20,000 pounds ultimate, with a safety factor of two (40,000 pounds).
12. Lifting
A. All extensions and heavy full traffic covers shall be provided with four 7/8-inch diameter, 2-1/4-inch minimum
deep inserts with unified coarse thread, Class 2A threads.
B. Boxes shall be lifted using pulling irons in the floor.
13. Marking
A. All covers shall be marked with one “High Voltage” and three blank number ID plates in accordance with
Document 051768.
B. All covers shall be permanently marked on the underside with the manufacturer’s name and the date of the
manufacturer in this format: mm/yy.
C. All concrete parts shall be permanently identified with the manufacturer’s name on the inside and outside
surfaces.
D. All concrete parts shall have the weight stenciled on the outside surface.
14. All bodies and extensions shall conform to the dimensional specifications so as to be fully interchangeable with the
bodies and extensions of all other manufacturers.
15. All covers shall have a PG&E-approved, high coefficient of friction (0.65 or better), slip-resistant surface.
16. The following parts of the frame and cover assembly shall conform to the dimensional specifications and the
applicable PG&E standards so as to be compatible with the frame and cover assemeblies of any approved
manufacturer.
A. Viewport (Refer to Document 066205)
B. Identification Plates (Refer to Document 051768)
C. Replacement Bolt Down Assembly (M040586). This assembly is part of the cover release locking mechanism.
17. Each approved manufacturer of frame and cover assemblies shall maintain dimensional consistency between all
the parts of the frame and cover assembly such that replacement parts will be compatible with that manufacturer’s
existing assemblies in use in the field.
18. Grounding is required for all new primary concrete enclosures. Grounding is highly recommended to existing
primary enclosures. For grounding requirements of the enclosure refer to Document 060462.

062000 Page 2 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Application

19. General: Selection of the correct type of enclosure involves judgment, taking into account the present and future
intended traffic for the area where the enclosure will be located, and future cable or equipment changes.
20. Incidental-vehicular-traffic (ASTM C-857, Rating H-10-44, light traffic): For use in sidewalks, paved and unpaved
pedestrian areas, parkway strips adjacent to curbs, and any other area subject to occasional vehicular traffic up to
10 tons gross vehicle weight (GVW) and/or 10 mph speed limits.
21. Full-vehicular-traffic (ASTM C-857, Rating HS-20-44, full traffic): Quick-release covers designed for H-20 vehicular
wheel load but not subject to high-density traffic with speed higher than 25 mph; locations such as alleys,
driveways, parking strips, etc.
22. Heavy full-vehicular-traffic (ASTM C-857, Rating HS-20-44, heavy traffic): For use in streets and all other areas
subject to vehicular traffic in excess of 10 tons GVW, but not to exceed 20 tons GVW. Entrance into this type of
enclosure shall not be made through an opened gate.
23. Heavy full-vehicular-traffic enclosures are not to be used to install sectionalizing equipment or transformers,
except on projects where a location for an incidental-vehicular-traffic box is not available.

References Location Document

Cable Support for Underground Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 028077
Identification Plates for Subsurface Enclosures . . . . . . UG-1: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051768
Duplex-Type, Three-Phase, Subsurface Transformer . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051776
Grounding of Underground Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060462
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Requirements for Allowing Installation of
Subsurface Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG−1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 072149
Design Requirements for Primary Electric Distribution
Underground Concrete Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 53

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 3 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Table 1 Enclosure and Excavation Sizes for New Installations of Subsurface Equipment
Location Excavation Size 1
Incident
Application Heavy Enclosure Size 4
al Incidental and Heavy
Full
and Full Full Traffic Full-Traffic
Traffic
Traffic
200-Amp Cable and
Yes 3’ x 5’ x 3 ’ 6” 5’ x 7’ x 5’ 5’ x 7’ x 6’
Non-Lead Splices 5
200-Amp
No 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” −
Junctions
200-Amp
Yes 2 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” 6’ x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6”
Sectionalizing Switches
200-Amp Subsurface
No 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” −
Fused Switches
200-Amp
No 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” −
Automatic Interrupter
1Ø Horizontal
Transformers Yes 2 4’ x 6’ 6” x 5’ 6’ x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6” 6’ x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6”
600-Amp
Yes Yes 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 7’ 6” 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 8’ 6”
Cable, Non-Lead Splices
600-Amp
Separable Connectors No 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6 ”x 7’ 6” −
600-Amp
Sectionalizing Switch Yes 2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 7’ 6”
600-Amp
Scada Switch No 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 9’ −
600-Amp
Automatic Interrupter No 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6 ”x 7’ 6” −
3Ø Duplex
Transformer 3 Yes 2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 7’ 6” 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 8’ 6”
3Ø UCD
(112.5 through1,000 kVA) Yes 2 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 9’ 6’ 6” x 10’ 6” x 10’
1 Depth allows for 6” of a compacted, 3/4” Class 2 Aggregate Base (AB).
2 Installing this equipment in heavy full-traffic enclosures is the least desirable option, and should only be considered on
reconstruction projects where suitable locations for incidental and full vehicle traffic boxes are not available. Refer to
Item 23 in the Application section of this document.
3 See Document 051776.
4 The 12” extension that is included in the heavy full-traffic assembly is not listed in this column.
5 Installation of a 3’x5’x3’6” enclosure for straight splices is only allowed if no future expansion is expected that would
require a transformer, junction, or switch to be installed in that enclosure.
Notes
1. Existing 3’ x 5’ (#5) enclosure will continue to be allowed when replacing existing 200-Amp slice, junction,
equipment.
2. When intercepting existing 200-Amp primary cable to install 200-Amp equipment, the installation of a 3’ x 5’ (#5)
enclosure will only be allowed if there is no physical space for the installation of a 4’ x 6’ 6” (#6) enclosure and all
other design alternatives have been exhausted. However, installation of 167 kVA single phase transformers
requires a 4’ x 6’ 6” (#6) enclosure.
3. The installation of 200-Amp junction and equipment is not allowed in 3’ x 5’ (#5) primary enclosure for new PG&E
job estimates or Applicant Design (AD) estimates.

062000 Page 4 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (incidental transformer cover shown)

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Figure 1
Isometric View of 3’ x 5’ Enclosure Assembly
(not to scale)

Table 2 Complete Enclosure Assembly (for 200-Amp distribution)

Application Enclosure Size Type of Traffic Loading Type of Cover Code 1
Quick-Release
3’ x 5’ x 3’ 6” Incidental 025601
Aluminum
Quick-Release
3’ x 5’ x 3’ 6” Full-Traffic 041668
Steel
3’ x 5’ x 4’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041612
Splice Box
Quick-Release
3’ x 5’ x 4’ 6” Incidental 040334
Steel
Quick-Release
3’ x 5’ x 4’ 6” Full-Traffic 041669
Steel
3’ x 5’ x 5’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 040327
1 Code includes body, frame, and cover assembly. The heavy full-traffic assembly also includes a 12” extension.
When extra depth is required, order additional extension from Table 4 on Page 7.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 5 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (continued)

Table 3 Complete Frame and Cover Assembly

Type of Enclosure Type of Traffic Loading Type of Cover Code
Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 025604
Splice Box Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 041052
Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041616
1 For application guide, see Note 21 on Page 3.

2-1/4”
11-1/4”

B Not Required C
L
Tongue and Groove C
L 20-1/4”
Width
6” 32-1/4” Enclosure
1” ∅ Holes for Length
6”
Ground Rod, 1-5/8”
A Two Places (blind) A
12” ∅ Sump, 5/8”
4” Deep 1”
2-1/4” 2-1/8”
(see Note 8 on
Page 1) 16 − 4” ∅ Duct
11-1/4” Terminators 1-1/8”
1-1/4”
2-1/4”
B Plan Not Required 4-1/2”
Minimum
Flush Pull Irons, Four Places
Detail A
(see Note 11 on Page 2)
4-1/2” Tongue and Groove
Mastic Sealant Included
5’ 0” With Enclosure Assembly for
30” All Concrete-to-Concrete
Joints Below Surface Level
Not Required 4-1/2” 3’ 0”

1-1/4” x 1-1/2”
10” 12” 1-1/4” x 1-1/2” Hole
Hole
4 − 4” ∅ 12” 7” 7” 7” 12” 8”
Duct Terminators
9-1/2” 9-1/2” 3 − 3” ∅
Duct Terminators
42” 15-1/2” 7” 7” 15-1/2” 5-1/2”
C
L
C
L 2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass 9-1/2”
Insert with Rod At- 18-1/2”
6-1/8” tached to Rebar
Cage 6-1/8”
14”
9-1/2” 10”
7”
5’ 9” 3’ 9”
2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert Section A-A Section B-B
with Rod Attached to Figure 2
Rebar Cage 3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Body Enclosure and Extensions

062000 Page 6 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (continued)

Table 4 Codes for Enclosure (Figure 2 on Page 6)

Description Code Weight - Approximate (lbs.)
Body, 42” Depth 043361 5,940
Body, 54” Depth 043588 7,060
Extension, 6” Depth 1 043197 560
Extension,12” Depth 1 043362 1,130
Extension, 24” Depth 1 043531 2,250
1 Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail A on Page 6 and approved by PG&E electric distribution
personnel.

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Aluminum Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

70-1/2” 7-1/2”
33 1/4”
33-1/4” 3-7/16”

See Note 13
on Page 2

40-7/8” 35”
Skirt

See Detail C and Detail D

8-3/4” on Page 25 for Grade End View
Adjustment Feature 1-3/4”
Plan
Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

3-3/4”

7-3/4”

58-7/8”

Side View
Figure 3
3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Quick Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 7 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5) Aluminum Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Incidental Traffic (continued)

7-3/4”
70-1/2”

35”
40-7/8” Skirt

Plan
Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly End View

3-3/4”

7-3/4”

58-7/8”
Side View

Figure 4
3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Incidental Traffic

062000 Page 8 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5 )Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

70-1/2” 70-1/2”

40-7/8” 40-7/8”

Plan Plan
Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly Transformer Frame and Cover Assembly

3-3/4”

7-3/4”

Equipment Cover
Side View

Figure 5
3’ 0’ x 5’ 0” Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Full Traffic

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 9 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

3’ 0” x 5’ 0” (#5 ) Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

3’ 8-1/2”
5’ 8-1/2”

4.5” Grated Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

Heavy Full-Traffic Cover

Solid Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

3’ 10” OD
5’ 10” OD

5”

Heavy Full-Traffic Frame

Baffle

Figure 6
3’ 0” x 5’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

Table 5 Component Parts

Description Weight Code
3’ x 5’ HFVT, Concrete Cover Without Inserts 1,160 lbs. 040338
3’ x 5’ HFVT, 5’ x 5’ x 1/2” Steel Frame With Adjustment Feature 290 lbs. 040339
Cast Iron Grate Inserts for Transformer Enclosures 120 lbs. 040346
Cast Iron Solid Inserts for Splice/Equipment Enclosures 180 lbs. 040343
Baffle 25 lbs. 360036

062000 Page 10 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (incidental transformer shown)

Figure 7
Isometric View of 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Enclosure Assembly
(not to scale)
Table 6 Complete Enclosure Assembly (for 200-amp distribution)
Application Enclosure Size Type of Traffic Type of Cover Code 1
Quick-Release
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Incidental 041492
Aluminum
1∅ Horizontal
Quick-Release
Transformers 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Full-Traffic 041493
Steel
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 6’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041494
Quick-Release
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Incidental 041495
Aluminum
Equipment/Splice Box Quick-Release
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 5’ 0” Full-Traffic 041496
Steel
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” x 6’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041521
1 Code includes body, frame, and cover assembly. The heavy full-traffic assembly also includes a 12” extension. When
extra depth is required, order additional extension fromTable 8 on Page13.

Table 7 Complete Frame and Cover Assembly

Type of Enclosure Type of Traffic Type of cover Code
Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 041092
1∅ Horizontal
Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 360148
Transformers
Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041541
Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 041093
Equipment/Splice Box Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 360149
Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041557
1 For application guide, see Note 21 on Page 3.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 11 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Enclosure and Extensions

7’ 6” Tongue and Groove

6” 6” Width = 27” CL C
L
6’ 6”
C Length = 42”
L
2’ 11” 2’ 11”

Enclosure
6”
1-3/4” 1-3/8”
1-1/4” 2”

4 − 2” ∅ 1-1/2”
Knock-Out Rods
1’ 2”

1-1/2”
5’ 0”

C
L
4’ 0”

1’ 2”
12” ∅ Sump 4”
4” Deep 6” Min.
Plan
Detail A
Tongue and Groove
6” 16 − 4” ∅
Duct Terminators
C Plan C
2 − 1” ∅ Holes for
Flush Pull Irons, 4 Places Ground Rods 2 Places
(blind)

4-13/16” C
L

2’ 9“ 2’ 9“

Mastic Sealant Included With Enclosure

Assembly for all Concrete-to-Concrete
3’ 11”
5’ 11-13/16”

Joints Below Surface Level

2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert
with Rod Attached to
Rebar Cage

6”
7”
7”

Section C-C
Figure 8
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Body Enclosure

062000 Page 12 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Enclosure and Extensions (continued)

7’ 6”
6’ 6”
D CL E
6”

4’ 0”

5’ 0”
’

Plan
16 − 4” ∅ Duct
Terminators
6”
C
L
D E
C
L Plan 1’ 8”
1’ 8” 7” 7” 7”
3 − 3” ∅ Duct 2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert
1’ 6” 1’ 6” Terminators for 3 1/2”
7” 7” with Rod Attached to
SCADA use only
Rebar Cage

1’ 8”
2’ 9” 2’ 6”
5 1/2”
7” 7”

4 − 4” ∅ Duct
1’ 6” 2’ 10 1/2” Terminators
2’ 6”
3 − 3” ∅ Duct
Terminators for
6” SCADA use only
3”
6”
2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert Section D-D Section E-E
Figure 9
with Rod Attached
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Body Enclosure
to Rebar Cage

Table 8 Parts for Enclosure Replacement (Figure 8 on Page 12)

Item Description Code Weight - Approximate (lbs.)
1 Body, 60” Depth 041567 11,750
2 Extension, 6” Depth 1 041569 800
3 Extension, 12” Depth 1 041570 1,600
4 Extension, 18” Depth 1 041574 2,400
1 Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail A on Page 12 and approved by PG&E electric distribution
personnel.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 13 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6”(#6) Aluminum Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

8-5/8”
2-1/2”
86-3/4”
4-5/8”
F

52-7/8” 47-1/8”
Skirt
57-7/8”

G
G Plan F Section F-F
2-1/2” Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly
86-3/4”

52-7/8”

57-7/8”

Plan
Transformer and Cover Assembly
Section F-F

4-5/8”

8-5/8” 75-3/4”
Section G-G

Figure 10
4’ 6” x 6’ 6” Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Incidental Traffic

062000 Page 14 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

8-5/8”
86-3/4”
2-1/2”

47-1/8”
Skirt
52-7/8”

I I Section H-H
Plan H
2-1/2”
Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

4-5/8”

8-5/8”

75-3/4”
Side View (open)
Section I-I

Figure 11
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 15 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic (continued)

86-3/4”
2-1/2” J

52-7/8” 47-1/8”
Skirt

J Section J-J
2-1/2”
K K

4-5/8”

8-5/8”

75-3/4”

Side View (open)

Section K-K

Figure 12
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

062000 Page 16 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

4’ 9-1/2”

7’ 3-1/2”
Grated Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

4.5”

Heavy Full-Traffic Cover

Solid Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert
4’ 11” OD

7’ 5” OD

5”
6-1/2”

Heavy Full-Traffic Frame Baffle

Figure 13
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assembly

Table 9 Component Parts

Description Weight Code
4’ 0” x 6’ 6”, HFVT Concrete Cover Without Inserts 3,835 lbs. 041926
4’ 0” x 6’ 6”, HFVT 5’ x 5’ x 1/2” Steel Frame With Adjustment Feature 339 lbs. 041927
Cast Iron Grate Inserts for Transformer Enclosures 120 lbs. 040346
Cast Iron Solid Inserts for Splice Equipment Enclosures 180 lbs. 040343
Baffle 25 lbs. 360036

Table 10 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” Cable Tail Lengths for Estimating 1

4’ 0” x 6’ 6” 28’
Horizontal TX Enclosure (Sec. Entrance Side) 26’ Primary/ 7’ Secondary
Horizontal TX Enclosure (Opp. Sec. Entrance Side) 15’ Primary/ 15’ Secondary
1 Cable tail length for 3’ 0” x 5” 0” and 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” enclosures are found on the Electric Design Manual under the
Underground 10.10 Section, Table 10 − 4.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 17 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Complete Enclosure Assemblies

Notes
1. Swedge reducers are necessary with conduit smaller than 6 inches (see Document 062288).

Figure 14
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Enclosure Assembly
(not to scale)

Table 11 Complete Enclosure Assembly (for 600-amp distribution)

Application Enclosure Size Type of Traffic Type of Cover Code 1
Quick-Release
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Incidental 043371
Aluminum
3∅ Duplex Transformer 2
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Full-Traffic Quick-Release Steel 041649
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041439
Quick-Release
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Incidental 043411
Aluminum
Equipment 3
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0” Full-Traffic Quick-Release Steel 041666
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 0” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041441
Quick-Release
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” Incidental 040325
Aluminum
UCD Transformer 4
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 7’ 6” Full-Traffic Quick-Release Steel 041662
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 8’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 040324
1 Code includes body, extension (as appropriate), frame, and cover assembly. When extra depth is required, order
additional extension from Table 13 on Page 20.
2 See Document 051776.
3 600-amp non-lead splices, 600-amp switches, 600-amp separable connectors.
4 112.5 through 500 kVA UCD transformers with 4-hole secondary spades will fit into existing 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” x 6’ 0”
enclosures.

062000 Page 18 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Complete Enclosure Assemblies (continued)

Table 12 Complete Frame and Cover Assembly
Type of Enclosure Type of Traffic Type of cover Code
Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 031830
Transformer Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 041055
Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041442
Incidental Quick-Release Aluminum 040642
Equipment Full-Traffic1 Quick-Release Steel 041054
Heavy Full-Traffic Concrete 041443
1 For application guide, see Note 21 on Page 3.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 19 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Enclosure and Extensions

Notes
1. Do not break out sump.
2. Joints must be interchangeable with those shown in Detail B and approved by PG&E electric distribution
personnel.

4-1/4” 1-1/4” x 1-1/2” Hole

M Not Required Enclosure
Tongue and Groove
C
L C
L
L 6” L Width = 30”
1” ∅ Hole for 14” ∅ Sump
Length = 54”
Ground Rod Two 4” Deep Reqd. 6”
(see Note 8 on
15”

Places (blind)
Page 1)

2-1/4” 1-3/8”
Flush Pull Iron
Five Places 1-1/2” 2-3/4”
4-1/4”
15” 1-3/4”
16-6” ∅
Duct Terminators 2-1/4” 3”
1-1/4” x 2” Hole 6” Min.
M
Not Required
Plan Detail B
Tongue and Groove
9’ 6”
5’ 6”
8’ 6” 6” 6”
4’ 6”

10”
11” 23” 9” 9” 9” 19−1/2”
7-1/2”
Not Required 6’ 0”
Seven-5” ∅
11” Duct
2 − 1/2” ∅ Brass Insert Terminators 9” 9” 24”
with Rod Attached to 7”
11”
Rebar Cage

9”
9”
30”
22” 19”
7” 11”

Section L-L Section M-M

Figure 15
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Enclosure and Extensions

Table 13 Parts for Enclosure Replacement (Figure 15)

Item Description Code Weight - Approximate (lbs.)
1 Body, 72” Depth 043376 17,520
2 Extension, 6” Depth 041094 1,070
3 Extension, 12” Depth 043415 2,140
4 Extension, 18” Depth 043377 3,210

062000 Page 20 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Aluminum Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Incidental Traffic

110-3/4” 8-1/4”

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
53-1/4” 4-9/16”

See Note 13
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
on Page 2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ 58-7/8” 53”

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
See Detail C and Detail D 1-3/4”
on Page 25 for Grade End View
11-1/8” Adjustment Feature
Plan
Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly

110-3/4”

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
53-1/4”

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
58-7/8”

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
See Detail C and Detail D on Page 25 1-3/4”
for Grade Adjustment Feature

Plan
Transformer Frame and Cover Assembly

99-5/8”
110-3/4”

Side View (Closed) Side View (open)

Figure 16
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Quick-Release Cover Assembly - Incidental Traffic

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 21 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6”(#7) Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly− Full Traffic

110-13/16” 110-13/16”
34-1/8” 38-5/16” 34-1/8” 34-1/8” 38-5/16” 34-1/8”

58-7/8” 58-7/8”

Plan Plan
Equipment Frame and Cover Assembly Transformer Frame and Cover Assembly

Isometric View

4-5/8”

8-5/8”
99-15/16”

Side View
Figure 17
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Steel Quick-Release Cover Assembly − Full Traffic

062000 Page 22 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assemblies

5’ 2-1/2”

9’ 2-1/2”
Grated Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

9” 4-1/2”

Heavy Full-Traffic Cover

Solid Heavy Full-Traffic Cast Iron Insert

5’ 4” OD

9’ 4” OD

5”
6-1/2”

Heavy Full-Traffic Frame Baffle

Figure 18
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” Heavy Full-Traffic Cover Assembly

Table 14 Component Parts

Description Weight Code
4’ 6” x 8’ 6”, HFVT Concrete Cover Without Inserts 3,840 lbs. 040340
4’ 6” x 8’ 6”, HFVT 5’ x 5’ x 1/2” Steel Frame With Adjustment Feature 450 lbs. 040341
Cast Iron Grate Inserts for Transformer Enclosures 120 lbs. 040346
Cast Iron Solid Inserts for Splice Equipment Enclosures 180 lbs. 040343
Baffle 25 lbs. 360036

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 23 of 27

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Transformer Laser Cut Cover Assembly (Incidental Traffic Shown)

70-1/2”
33-1/4” 33-1/4” 1/2”

1 5/16”
1/2” 5 1/4” 5 1/4”

7/16”
1/2”
5 1/4”
4 1/16”

5 1/4” 5 1/4” 5 1/4”

6 1/8” 16 1/8” 16 1/8” 6 1/8”
25 Ea. Slots @ 1 5/16” O.C.

Typical Vent Slot Spacing

31 1/8”
40 7/8”

5 1/4”
7/16”
R 7/8”
Typ

Typical Vent Slot Area = 2.26 in 2

Total Open Area per
Assembly = 225.6 in 2

PLAN
4 1/16”

Figure 19
3’ x 5’ (#5) Transformer Assembly − Vent Slot Detail
85”
1/2” 1/2”
4 1/2” 1/2” 1/2” 4 1/2”
7 1/2” 18 1/2” 18 1/2” 7 1/2”
4 1/2” 4 1/2” 1/2”
1/2”
10 7/8”

4 1/2” 4 1/2”
1 5/16”
26 Ea. Slots @ 1 5/16” O.C.

Ttyp
54 5/8”
32 13/16”

7/16”

Typical Vent Slot Spacing

4 1/2”
7/16”
R 7/8”
10 7/8”

Typ
Typical Vent Slot Area = 1.93 in 2
PLAN Total Open Area per
Assembly = 300.7 in 2
Figure 20
4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) Transformer Assembly − Vent Slot Detail
Note:
Although the 4’ 0” x 6’ 6” (#6) cover has slightly different dimensions than the cover shown on Figure 10 on
Page 14, this cover fits on the #6 body enclosure just as well as the cover shown on Figure 10 on Page 14.

062000 Page 24 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Transformer Laser Cut Cover Assembly (continued)

110 3/4”
53 1/4” 53 1/4”
1/2” 1/2” 6 1/4”
6 1/4” 33 3/8” 33 3/8”
6 7/8” 6 1/4” 6 1/4” 6 7/8”
1/2”

7/16”
6 1/4” 6 1/4”
38 Ea. Slots @ 1 5/16” O.C.
48 9/16” 5 1/8”
58 7/8”

7/16”
Typ.
Typical Vent Slot Spacing

6 1/4”
7/16”
R 7/32”
Typ
Typical Vent Slot Area = 2.70 in 2
5 1/8”

Plan Total Open Area per

Assembly = 409.4 in 2
Figure 21
4’ 6” x 8’ 6” (#7) Transformer Assembly − Vent Slot Detail

Notes
1. Laser cut transformer quick-release cover assembly is an approved design for incidental and full-traffic cover
assemblies.
2. Material codes for ordering laser cut cover assemblies are the same as the fiberglass grate insert cover
assemblies. Therefore, either type of transformer quick-release cover assembly will be shipped.
3. Design complies with th Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Section 30.2.

Details for Frame Assemblies

2”
2-1/2” 6”

2-1/2”
Weld Nut 3-1/2”
to Frame
Grout
12-Gauge Metal
1” Radius
10° ±
2-1/2”

Detail C Detail E
Grade Adjusting Bolt See Detail E Adjustment Bolt Support Bracket
Use M041601 Code to Order
Detail D
Grade Adjusting Feature

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 25 of 27

UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Cement Grouting Instructions for All Enclosure Frame

Frame

Grade Adjusting Bolt

(see Detail C on Page 25)

Grout 1

Female Keyway
Enclosure Body
or Extension
Adjustment Bolt
Support Bracket
Figure 22
Grouting Incidental Enclosure Frame

Table 15 Grouting Material (structural - Figure 22)

Item Quantity Description Code
1 1 Sack - 55 lbs. Grout, Zero Shrink, High-Early Strength 121016
1 One sack of grout is required for approximately each 1/2” of space between the
enclosure and the frame on a 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” enclosure.

Instructions
Step 1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of the enclosure that the grout will contact. Use clean water to remove dust
from surfaces.
Step 2. Remove sufficient soil from around the enclosure to preclude accidentally mixing dirt with the grout. Install the
enclosure frame and adjust it to grade.
Step 3. Saturate all grout-contact surfaces of the enclosure with water for as long as possible before grouting using
wet rags laid in and around the keyway. The recommended minimum saturation time is 24 hours.
Re-saturate the keyways with water before leaving the job. Remove excess water from the female keyway
just prior to grouting.
Step 4. Mix grout in a wheelbarrow with clean water. Do not mix more grout than can be easily used within
15 minutes. The consistency of the grout should allow it to flow under pressure.
Step 5. Install the grout directly from a shovel onto the enclosure using hands with gloves. After an adequate amount
of grout has been applied, use a trowel to apply additional pressure to the grout so that all voids are filled and
the grout is completely consolidated. This is necessary to ensure a full bearing surface for the frame.
Step 6. After wiping off any excess grout and making sure that all voids are filled with grout, cover the grout surface
with water-saturated rags. While on the job, moisten the rags often. Re-saturate the rags with water before
leaving the job. The water-saturated rags are required to cure the grout properly.
Step 7. Keep wet rags on and traffic off the enclosure for 24 hours to allow the grout to set up properly.
Step 8. Do not backfill and tamp around the enclosure until the set-up period has concluded.
Step 9. Remove the rags before backfilling around the enclosure.
Step 10. Repair any damaged grout by repeating the above procedure.
Step 11. Ready-mix concrete (5-sack mix) is an acceptable alternate.

062000 Page 26 of 27 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Enclosures
Greenbook
Primary Electric Underground Enclosures

Revision Notes
Revision 21 has the following changes:
1. Revised Notes 1, 4, 5D − 5G on Page 1.
2. Revised Notes 12B − 12D on Page 2.
3. Added Note 15 and re-numbered Notes 16 − 21 on Page 2.
4. Revised table footnote 1 for Table 1 on Page 3.
5. Revised Note 2 on Page 3. Deleted 100 kVA transformer size

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 062000 Page 27 of 27

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
EDM

Prepared by: ABB1

APPLICATION OF UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 062111

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Construction

Issued by: D. H. Mulkey (DHM3) Date: 07-01-14

Rev. #24: This document replaces PG&E Document 062111, Rev. #23. For a description of the changes, see Page 26.
Purpose and Scope
This document provides a convenient reference for the types of transformers that are purchasable and used for
underground distribution. The available voltages and kVA ratings are indicated along with the applicable codes to
facilitate ordering.
General Information
1. To conserve space and avoid overlap with other documents, the description of transformers shown has been
shortened. Individual characteristics of these transformers such as dimensions, accessories, and protection
can be determined by making reference to the application documents.
2. Application
A. Single-Phase: The standard transformer for single-phase service is the Style DF-LB, single-phase, pad-mounted
transformer (see Table 1 through Table 3 on Page 5). The 25 kVA through 100 kVA sizes are used for new
construction. The 167 kVA size is reserved for replacement use, to solve loading or voltage problems. Where their
use is required, several other types may be available with the required voltage and kVA ratings.
(1) Chester area pad-mount transformer (see Table 4 on Page 5).
(2) Subsurface horizontal transformer (see Table 5 and Table 6 on Page 6).
(3) Subway-LB transformer (see Table 8 on Page 7).
B. Three-Phase: The standard transformer for three-phase service is Style MTP, Style IIE-LB, or Style IIG
pad-mount transformer (see Table 12 through Table 19 on Pages 8 through 10). Where their use is required,
several other types may be available with the required voltage and kVA ratings.
(1) Duplex-LB pad-mount transformer (see Table 9 on Page 7).
(2) Duplex subsurface transformers (see Table 21 on Page 10).
(3) Radial dead-front transformer (see Table 18 on Page 10).
(4) Style IIC transformer (see Table 20 on Page 10).
(5) Style IIH transformer (see Table 41 on Page 16).
(6) UCD-LB transformer (see Table 22 on Page 11).
C. “-LB” designation means that the transformer has the following characteristics:
(1) Uses bayonet fuses.
(2) Has backup current-limiting (CL) fuses.
(3) Has a load-break switch between bayonet and CL fuses.
(4) Will accommodate load-break elbows.
3. For replacement options of older style transformers, see Document 068195 for recommendations.
4. See Document 072149 for when to use pad-mount, subsurface, or vault-type transformers.
5. Each transformer code has been assigned a footnote indicating the desired use of the transformer as
defined below:
A. “1 − Current Standard Design and May Be Purchased” - these are transformers with the most current type,
size, and voltage rating and are regularly purchased and used.
B. “4 − Use for Replacement Only and May Be Purchased” - may be purchased as required for replacements.
They should not be used for new construction.

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 1 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

C. Transformers coded with an “E” are included in emergency stock.

D. Transformers coded as 1 are available for use on new business jobs.
E. Transformers coded as 4 are to be used only when required to replace an existing installation.
6. Transformers indicated as “stainless steel” have all exterior metal parts (unless otherwise noted in the referenced
documents) fabricated out of stainless steel or other material of equal or superior corrosion resistance. These units
shall be used whenever a transformer is to be installed in the severe or moderate corrosion areas of
Document 032911. Stainless steel units should also be used whenever local experience has determined that
transformers experience accelerated corrosion leading to early replacement.

062111 Page 2 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Table of Contents
Table/Figure Page No.
Types Suitable for New Construction
Single-Phase:
• Pad-Mount Style DF-LB Table 1 − Table 3
• Pad-Mount Chester Area Table 4 5
• Subsurface, Horizontal Table 5 − Table 6 6
• Subsurface, Round Table 7 6
• Subsurface, Subway-LB Table 8 7
Three-Phase, Pad-Mount:
• Duplex-DF Table 9 7
• Style MTP Table 10 − Table 11 7
• Style IIE-LB Table 12 − Table 17 8−9
• Radial Dead-Front Table 18 10
• Style IIG Table 19 10
• Style IIC Table 20 10
Three-Phase, Subsurface:
• Duplex Table 21 10
• UCD-LB Table 22 11
Specialty Transformers
Three-Phase, Subsurface :
• Network Table 23 − Table 25 11
Three-Phase, Dry Type:
• Network Table 26 − Table 27 12
Three-Phase, Pad-Mount:
• Network Table 28 12
• System Tie Table 29 − Table 30 12
• Grounding Bank Table 31 13
• Zigzag-Radial Dead-Front Table 32 13
Types for Replacements Only
Single-Phase:
• Pad-Mount Live-Front, Clam Shell Table 33 −Table 34 13−14
• Subsurface, Round Table 35 − Table 37 14−15
Three-Phase, Pad-Mount:
• Style IIC Table 38 15
• Style IIF Table 39 − Table 40 15−16
• Style IIH Table 41 16
• Radial, Dead-Front Table 42 16
• Radial, Live-Front Table 43 − Table 44 17
Three-Phase, Subsurface Vault Table 45 17
Transformer Winding Designations Table 46 − Table 47 18−19
Transformer Insulating Fluid Table 48 19
System Primary Voltages Table 49 20
Pictorial Index Figure 1 − Figure 6 21−26

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 3 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

References Location Document

Cabinet and Transformer for Single-Phase 12 kV
Pad-Mounted Transformer Installation
Underground Residential Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032732
Corrosion Area-Overhead Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: General/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032911
Requirements for Conventional Three-Phase
Small Power Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 033705
Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313
Underground Commercial Distribution, Three-Phase,
Subsurface Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039830
Live-Front, Low-Profile, Single-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042761
Cabinet and Transformer for Low-Profile, Single-Phase,
6.9 kV Pad-Mounted Transformer Installation
Underground Residential Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042764
Radial, Three-Phase, Pad−Mounted Transformers . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043816
Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290
Pad-Mounted Network Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045774
Open Wye to Zigzag Wye Transformation
Equipment and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045786
Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Autotransformer . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/EPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051119
Duplex-Type, Three-Phase, Subsurface Transformer . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051776
Horizontal, Single-Phase, Subsurface Transformers . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060578
Pad-Mounted Ground Fault Sensing for Cogeneration UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062264
Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex, Pad-Mounted
Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307
4 kV Circuit Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068184
Distribution Transformer Replacement Options . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 068195
Three-Phase Subsurface Network Transformers . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072137
Three-Phase Subsurface Vault Transformers . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072138
Single-Phase Subway Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-2: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072139
Pad-Mount Transformers-Style IIG and Style IIH . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072146
Selection of the Type of Underground Equipment . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 072149
Engineering Material Specification #86, “Single-Phase,
and Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Distribution
Transformers” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 86
Engineering Material Specification 91,
“Single-Phase and Three-Phase Subsurface
Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 91

062111 Page 4 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction

Table 1 Codes for Style DF-LB, 1-Wire (2-Bushing) No Loop Switches With Transformer Switch With 2 Primary
Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 064307 and
Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
20,780GRDY/12,000
kVA 240/120 V
Mild Steel Stainless Steel
25 261501 1 262890 1
50 261502 1 262891 1
100 261503 1 262892 1
167 261504 4, E 262893 4, E

Table 2 Codes for Style DF-LB, 2-Wire, (4-Bushing) No Loop Switches With Transformer Switch With
4 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference
Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
12,000/20,780GrdY 17,200 20,780
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel
25 261507 1 261519 1 261511 1 261515 1
50 261508 1 261520 1 261512 1 261516 1
100 261509 1 261521 1 261513 1 261517 1
167 261510 4 261522 4, E 261514 4, E 261518 4, E

Table 3 Codes for Style DF-LB, 3-Wire, (6-Bushing) No Loop Switches With Transformer Switch and With
6 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference
Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
2,400/ 12,000/
4,160GrdY 4,160 x 12,000 17,200 20,780
20,780GrdY
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 480/240 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
Mild Mild
Mild Steel Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Stainless

25 − − − 261531 1 261543 1 262721 1, E 261535 1 261539 1 262894 1

50 − − − 261532 1 261544 1 − 261536 1 261540 1 262895 1
100 262043 1, E 261785 1 261988 1, E 261533 1 261545 1 − 261537 1 261541 1 262896 1
167 − − − 261534 4 261546 4, E − 261538 4, E 261542 4, E 262897 4, E

Table 4 Codes for Chester Style Specialty Transformers - Single-Phase, Pad-Mount, Load-Break,
Dead-Front With Single-Phase Cabinet for Use in the Chester, CA Area. With 2 Primary
Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (see ANSI/IEEE Type 2(a)
per IEEE C57.12.25) − Self-Protected
12,470GrdY/7,200 − 240/120 V
kVA
Mild Steel
50 017414 1, E
100 −
1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 5 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Single-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction

Table 5 Codes for Subsurface Horizontal, Single-Phase With 4 Primary Bushings With 2 (25-50 kVA) or
4 (75-167 kVA) Hot Secondary Leads. Neutral Lead May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference
Document 060578 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel
12,000/20,780GrdY 17,200 20,780
240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V

kVA With
Single-
No Switch Phase No Switch No Switch With Single-Phase Switch
Switch
25 262389 1 − 262395 1 262436 1 −
50 262391 1 − 262396 1 262437 1, E −
100 262393 1, E 013884 1, E 262397 1 262438 1, E 262439 1, E
167 262394 4, E 262181 4, E 262398, 4, E 263050 4 E −

Table 6 Codes for Subsurface Horizontal, Single-Phase With 6 Primary Bushings With 2 (25-50 kVA) or
4 (75−167 kVA) Hot Secondary Leads. Neutral Lead May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference
Document 060578 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel
12,000/20,780GrdY
240/120 V 17,200 − 240/120 V 20,780 − 240/120 V
kVA With With With
No Switch Three-Phase No Switch Three-Phase No Switch Three-Phase
Switch Switch Switch
25 260328 1 027264 1, E 261106 1 − 261102 1 −
50 260668 1, E − 261107 1, E − 261103 1, E −
100 260882 1, E 027266 1, E 261108 1 027269 1, E 261104 1, E 027267 1, E
167 261000 4, E − 261109 4, E − 261105 4, E −

Table 7 Codes for Subsurface Round, Single-Phase With 3 Secondary Bushings, Neutral May be
Permanently Grounded. Use to Supply Single-Phase Load.
(reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

4160/7200Y 4,160GrdY/2,400
240/120 V 240/120 V
kVA 4 Primary Bushings 2 Primary Bushings
No Switch No Switch With Single-Phase Switch
100 262371 1, E 262120 1, E 262143 1, E

(See Table 36 on Page 14 for other single-phase round transformers.)

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

062111 Page 6 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction (continued)

Table 8 Codes for Subsurface Subway-LB, Single-Phase, (reference Document 072139 and Spec. 91) −
Self-Protected, Stainless Steel

2,400/4,160Y-120/240 12,000/20,780Y − 120/240

kVA 3 Primary Bushings 2 Primary Bushings 3 Primary Bushings
4 Secondary Bushings 4 Secondary Bushings 4 Secondary Bushings
50 261388 1, E 261384 1 261391 1
100 261389 1 261385 1, E 261392 1, E
167 261390 1, E 261386 1 261393 1
250 − 261387 1, E 261394 1, E

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction

Table 9 Codes for Duplex-Style DF, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, No Loop Switch, With Transformer Switch With
6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference
Document 064307 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200 20,780
kVA 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Mild Steel
25/10 261547 1 − 261551 1 −
50/10 261548 1, E 262047 1, E 261552 1, E 261914 1, E
100/25 261549 1 − 261553 1 −
100/50 261550 1, E 262049 1, E 261554 1, E 261915 1, E

Table 10 Codes for Style MTP, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y120 V 480Y277 V
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel
45 261897 1 261909 1 261898 1 261910 1 261905 1 261906 1
150 261899 1 261911 1, E 261900 1 261912 1, E 261907 1, E 261908 1, E

Table 11 Codes for Style MTP, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
4,160 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel
45 − − 261901 1 261902 1
150 262782 1, E 262783 1, E 261903 1, E 261904 1, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 7 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction (continued)

Table 12 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With
6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated
Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
4,160 x 12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 261397 1 261401 1
150 261398 1 261402 1
300 261399 1, E 261403 1, E
750 261400 1, E 261404 1, E
Table 13 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary Bushings
and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and
Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 12,000/20,780Y12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 2,400/4,160Y/2,400 V 240/120 Delta
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
75 261405 1 261443 1 261410 1 261446 1 − − − −
150 261406 1 − 261411 1 − − − 261421 1 −
300 261407 1 261444 1, E 261412 1 261447 1, E − − 261422 1 262645 1, E
750 261408 1 − 261413 1 − 261417 1 − − −
1,000 261409 1 261445 1, E 261414 1 261448 1, E 261418 1 261450 1 − −
1,500 − − 261415 1 − 261419 1 − − −
2,500 − − 261416 1 261449 1, E 261420 1 261451 1, E − −

Table 14 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary
Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference
Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected
17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 2,400/4,160Y/2,400 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 261423 1 261428 1 −
150 261424 1, E 261429 1, E −
300 261425 1 261430 1 −
750 261426 1, E 261431 1, E 261435 1, E
1,000 261427 1, E 261432 1 −
1,500 − 261433 1, E −
2,500 − 261434 1, E 261436 1, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

062111 Page 8 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction (continued)

Table 15 Codes for Style IIE-LB, No Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With 6 Primary
Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference
Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected
20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
75 261437 1 261452 1 261440 1 261454 1
150 261438 1 − 261441 1 −
300 261439 1 261453 1, E 261442 1 261455 1, E

Table 16 Codes for Style IIE-LB, With Three-Phase Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch
With 6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral
(reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
75 261456 1 − 261459 1 −
300 261457 1, E − 261460 1, E −
1,000 261458 1 261472 1, E 261461 1 261473 1, E
1,500 − − 261893 1 −
2,500 − − 261894 1 261895 1, E

Table 17 Codes for Style IIE-LB, With Three-Phase Loop Switches, With Transformer Switch With
6 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral
(reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected
17,200 20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 261462 1 261465 1 261468 1 261470 1
300 261463 1, E 261466 1, E 261469 1, E 261471 1, E
1,000 261464 1, E 261467 1, E − −
2,500 − 261896 1, E − −

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 9 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for New Construction (continued)

Table 18 Codes for Radial Dead-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and
4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and
Spec. 86) − Conventional
20,780
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Stainless Mild Steel Stainless
750 − − 263031 1, E −
1,000 263029 1 261523 1, E − 261524 1
1,500 − − 263033 1 −
2,500 − − 263035 1 261525 1, E
(See Table 42 on Page 16 for other three-phase radial DF.)
Table 19 Codes for Style IIG, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With Vacuum Fault Interrupter, With 6 Primary Bushings,
4 Secondary Bushings Including Insulated Neutral With Stainless Steel Cabinet and FR3 Insulating Fluid
(reference Document 072146 and Spec. 86)
12,000/20,780Grd/12,000 12,000/20,780Grd/12,000 17,200 20,780
kVA 2,400/4160Y/
480Y/277 2,400/4160Y/2,400 480Y/277 2,400 480Y/277

With 2 Loop
kVA No Loop Switch No Switch No Loop Switch
Switches
2955/3325 262702 1, E 262703 1, E 262704 1, E 262705 1, E 262706 1, E 262707 1, E
Table 20 Codes for Style IIC, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
4,160 x 12,000
kVA
208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
1,500
Mild Steel Mild Steel
1,500 − 260789 1
2,500 − 260791 1, E
(See Table 38 on Page 15 for other Style IIC.)

Three-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction

Table 21 Codes for Subsurface Duplex, Three-Phase With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Hot Secondary
Leads or Insulated Spades. The Neutral is a Welded Spade. (reference Document 051776 and
Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 − 240/120 V 17,200 − 240/120 V
kVA
No Switch With Three-Phase Switch No Switch With Three-Phase Switch
25/10 262122 1 262131 1 262349 1 262348 1
50/10 262128 1, E 262132 1, E 262350 1, E 262354 1
75/15 − 262133 1 − 262355 1
100/25 262130 1 262134 1 262352 1 262356 1, E
100/50 262363 1, E 262318 1, E 262353 1, E 262357 1, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

062111 Page 10 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Subsurface, for New Construction (continued)

Table 22 Codes for Subsurface UCD-LB, Three-Phase With Two, Three-Phase Loop Switches and With
Transformer Switches With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Hot Secondary Bushings. The Neutral
May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 039830 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected,
Stainless Steel
4,160 x 12,000 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200
kVA
208Y/120 V 480Y/277 208Y/120 480Y/277 208Y/120 480Y/277
150 261798 1 261800 1 261802 1 261806 1 261810 1 261813 1
300 261799 1, E 261801 1, E 261803 1, E 261807 1, E 261811 1 261814 1
750 262327 1, E 262332 1, E 261804 1 261808 1 261812 1, E 261815 1, E
1,000 − − 261805 1, E 261809 1, E − −

Specialty Transformers
Table 23 Codes for Subsurface Network, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary
Bushings With No Ground Switch, No Termination Chamber (reference Document 072137 and
Spec. 91) − Conventional, Plate Steel
12,000X34,500GrdY/19920 34,500GrdY/19,920
kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V
480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
300 262664 1 − − −
500 262665 1 − − −
750 262666 1 262667 1, T 262673 1 262671 1
1,000 − 262668 1, T 262674 1 262662 1
1,500 − 262669 1, T 262675 1 262672 1
2,000 − 262670 1, T 262676 1 262663 1
Table 24 Codes for Subsurface Network, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary
Bushings With Ground Switch and Termination Chamber (reference Document 072137 and
Spec. 91) − Conventional, Plate Steel
12,000X34,500GrdY/19920 34,500GrdY/19,920
kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V
480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
300 262407 4 − − −
500 262408 4 262410 4, T − −
750 262409 4, E 262411 4, T 262419 4 262415 4
1,000 − 262412 4, E, T 262420 4 262416 4
1,500 − 262413 4, T 262421 4 262417 4
2,000 − 262414 4, T 262422 4, E 262418 4

Table 25 Codes for Subsurface Vault, Three-Phase with 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary 600A ESNA
Bushings (Spec. 91).
kVA 12,000 x 34,500GrdY/19,920 − 4,160Y/2400 V
2,000 262889 1

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 T With high voltage taps.

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 11 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Specialty Transformers (continued)

Table 26 Codes for Dry-Type Network. Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and
3 Secondary Bushings − Conventional, 65/115 Rise Cast Coil, Rotated Layout
34,500GrdY/19,920
kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V
480Y/277 V
500 262777 1, T − −
750 262778 1, T 262773 1, T 262779 1, T
1,000 − 262774 1, T 262780 1, T
1,500 − 262775 1, T −
2,000 − 262776 1, T 262781 1, T

Table 27 Codes for Dry-Type Network. Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and
3 Secondary Bushings − Conventional, 65/115 Rise Cast Coil, In-Line Layout
34,500GrdY/19,920
kVA 12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000 − 480Y/277 V
480Y/277 V
500 − − −
750 − − 262816 1, T
1,000 − 262813 1, T 262817 1, T
1,500 − 262814 1, T −
2,000 − 262815 1, T 262818 1, T

Table 28 Codes for Pad-Mount Network, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings
(reference Document 045774 and Spec. 86) − Conventional, Mild Steel
kVA 12,000 - 480Y/277 V 34,500GrdY/19,920 - 480Y/277 V
750 260666 1 260655 1
1,000 260667 1 260656 1
1,500 260684 1 260657 1
2,000 260699 1 260658 1

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 T With high voltage taps

062111 Page 12 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Specialty Transformers (continued)

Table 29 Codes for System Tie, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary
Bushings (reference Document 068184 and Spec. 86) − Conventional, Mild Steel
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 - 20780 -
4,160GrdY/2,400 V 12,000 6,930/12,000Y - 4,160Y/2,400 V 4,160GrdY/2,400 V
kVA 0° Phase Shift @ 21 kV −4,800 0° Phase Shift @ 12 kV 30° Phase Shift
30° Phase Shift @ 12 kV @ 21 kV
With One Recloser on Secondary Side
2,500 261381 1, E − 262578 1, E 262579 1, E
3,000 − 262696 1, E −
Table 30 Codes for System Tie, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary
Bushings (reference Document 051119 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Conventional, Mild Steel
20,780Y/12,000 17,200 V Delta
12,000Y/6,930 V 17,200 V Delta 12,000Y/6930 V
kVA
30° Lead to 30° Lag Switch 30° Lead to 30° Lag Switch
Without Recloser With 2 Reclosers With Recloser on 21 kV Side Without Recloser
3,600 264134 1 262661 1, E 261151 1, E, T
7,500 261943 1 262473 1, E 262573 1, E, T
Table 31 Codes for Pad-Mount, Grounding Bank, Three-Phase, (for cogeneration fault sensing with
Hο bushing, 2.5% impedance) With 6 Primary Bushings and 3 Secondary Bushings (reference
Document 062264 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected, Mild Steel
kVA 20,780GrdY/12,000 - 480 V Delta
225 017072 1

Table 32 Codes for Zigzag - Radial Dead-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 2 Primary Bushings and
4 Secondary Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045786 and
Spec. 86) − Conventional, Mild Steel
20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA
208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
300 263073 1, E 263076 1, E

Single-Phase, Pad Mount, for Replacements Only

Table 33 Codes for Live-Front, Clam Shell, Single-Phase, Pad-Mount With 2 Primary Bushings and 2 Hot
Secondary Bushings. Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 042761 and
Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
With Single-Phase Cabinet
kVA 12,000GrdY/6,930 - 240/120 V 12,000/20,780 GrdY - 240/120 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel
50 − 263002 4 263037 4
100 261274 4, E 263004 4, E 263038 4, E
167 261275 4, E 263016 4, E 263039 4

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 T With high voltage taps

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 13 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Single-Phase, Pad Mount, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 34 Codes for Live-Front, Clam Shell, Single-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 2 Hot
Secondary Bushings. Neutral May Be Permanently Grounded. (reference Document 042761 and
Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected
With Three-Phase Cabinet
12,000GrdY/6,930 4,160X12,000 12,000/20,780 GrdY − 17,200 20,780
kVA 240/120 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
50 − 263014 4, E 263006 4, E 263040 4, E 263010 4, E 263044 4
100 261276 4, E 263015 4, E 263008 4, E 263041 4, E 263012 4, E 263045 4, E
167 261277 4, E 263019 4, E 263017 4, E 263042 4 263018 4, E 263046 4, E

Single-Phase, Subsurface Round, for Replacements Only

Table 35 Codes for Subsurface Round, Single-Phase, 3 Secondary Bushings With Insulated Neutral. Use as
the Power Transformer in the Bank. (reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected,
Stainless Steel
12,000/20,780GrdY
4,160/7,200Y − 240/120 V 4,160GrdY/2,400 − 240/120 V 17,200 − 240/120 V
240/120 V
4 Primary Bushings 2 Primary Bushings 4 Primary Bushings
4 Primary Bushings
kVA
With With
No Switch Single-Phase No Switch Single-Phase No Switch No Switch
Switch Switch
25 262362 4 E 262316 4 − − − −

50 − − − − − 262314 4
75 − − 262328 4 − − −
100 − − − − 262283 4, E −
167 − − − − 262284 4, E −
Table 36 Codes for Subsurface Round Single-Phase With 3 Secondary Bushings, Neutral May Be Permanently
Grounded. Use to Supply Single-Phase Load or as the Lighting Transformer in a Bank.
(reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel
4,160/7,200Y
240/120 V 4,160GrdY/2,400 12,000/20,780GrdY 12,000/20,780GrdY
240/120 V 240/120 V 480/240 V
4 Primary
2 Primary Bushings 4 Primary Bushings 4 Primary Bushings
kVA Bushings
With With
No Switch No Switch Single-Phase No Switch Single-Phase No Switch
Switch Switch
25 − − − − − 262307 1, E
50 − − − 262058 4, E 262096 4, E −
75 − − − − − 262324 4, E
100 (see Table 7 on Page 6) 262060 4, E 262098 4, E −
167 262372 4, E 262121 4, E 262144 4 262062 4, E 262099 4, E −

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

062111 Page 14 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Single-Phase, Subsurface Round, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 37 Codes for Subsurface Round, Single-Phase With 3 Secondary Bushings, Neutral May Be Permanently
Grounded. Use to Supply Single-Phase Load or as the Lighting Transformer in a Bank.
(reference Document 035313 and Spec. 91) (continued) − Self-Protected, Stainless Steel
12,000GrdY/6,930 17,200 20,780GrdY/12,000 20,780GrdY/12,000
240/120 V 240/120 V 240/120 V 480/240 V
2 Primary Bushings 4 Primary Bushings 2 Primary Bushings 2 Primary Bushings
kVA With With
With Single- Single-
No Switch Single-Phase No Switch No Switch No Switch
Phase Phase
Switch
Switch Switch
25 − − − − − 262321 1, E 262303 1, E
50 262054 4, E 262090 4, E 262186 4, E 262147 4, E 262153 4, E − −
100 262056 4, E 262092 4, E 262188 4, E 262149 4, E 262155 4, E − −
167 262086 4, E 262093 4, E 262189 4, E 262150 4, E 262156 4, E − −

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for Replacements Only

Table 38 Codes for Style IIC*, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
4,160X12,000
kVA 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel
1,500 260789 1
2,500 260791 1, E
(Style IIC and Style llF transformers are completely interchangeable except for the primary fuses.)
*See Table 20 on Page 10 for others of this type.
Table 39 Codes for Style IIF, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) − Self-Protected
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000
2,400/
kVA 208Y/120 480Y/277
4,160Y/2,400
Mild Steel Stainless Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel Mild Steel Stainless Steel
300 261284 4, E − 261288 4 262115 4, E − −
750 261285 4 − 261289 4 − − −
1,000 261286 4, E 262114 4 261290 4 262116 4, E 261292 4 −
1,500 − − 261291 4 − 261293 4 −
2,500 − − 261328 4 262177 4, E 261329 4 262179 4, E
0

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3 5

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 15 of 26

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 40 Codes for Style IIF, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 045290 and Spec. 86) (continued) − Self-Protected
4,160X12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 480Y/277 208Y/120 480Y/277
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
300 261281 4 261283 4 − 261296 4
750 261287 4, E 261282 4, E 261294 4 261297 4
1,000 − − 261295 4, E 261298 4, E
1,500 − − − 261299 4
2,500 − − − 261330 4, E

Table 41 Codes for Style IIH, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, Live-Front With Vacuum Fault Interrupter, with 3 Primary
Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings With Insulated Neutral With Stainless Steel Cabinet and FR3
Insulating Fluid (reference Document 072146 and Spec. 86)
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200
kVA 480Y/277 2,400/4160Y/2,400 480Y/277
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
2955/3325 262708 4, E 262709 4, E 262710 4, E

Table 42 Codes for Radial, Dead-Front*, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary
Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) (continued) −
Conventional
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 260315 4 260314 4 −
150 260732 4 260317 4 −
300 260682 4 260326 4 −
750 260080 4, E 260039 4, E 260880 4, E
1,000 260107 4, E 260041 4 260181 4
1,500 − 260002 4 260883 4, E
2,500 − 260042 4, E −
* See Table 18 on Page 10 for others of this type.

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3

062111 Page 16 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Three-Phase, Pad-Mount, for Replacements Only (continued)

Table 43 Codes for Radial, Live-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary
Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) − Conventional
4,160X12,000 17,200
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 260695 4 − 260309 4 260613 4
150 − − − 260615 4
300 − − 260289 4 260617 4
750 260921 4 − − −
Table 44 Codes for Radial, Live-Front, Three-Phase, Pad-Mount With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary
Bushings Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 043816 and Spec. 86) (continued) −
Conventional
12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000
kVA 208Y/120 V 480Y/277 V
Mild Steel Mild Steel
75 260710 4 260764 4
150 260755 4 260766 4
300 260757 4 260768 4
750 260759 4 260770 4, E
1,000 260760 4, E −
1,500 − 260677 4
2,500 − 260773 4, E
Table 45 Codes for Subsurface Vault, Three-Phase With 3 Primary Bushings and 4 Secondary Bushings
Including the Insulated Neutral (reference Document 072138 and Spec. 91) − Conventional,
Plate Steel
kVA 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 − 208Y/120 V 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 − 480Y/277 V
300 262428 4 −
750 262430 4 262432 4
1,000 262107 4, E 262433 4, E
1,500 − 262434 4
2,500 − 015641 4, E

1 Current standard design and may be purchased. 4 Use for replacement only and may be purchased.
2 E Included in Emergency Stock
3

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 17 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings - Single-Phase Transformers

Table 46 Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings − Single-Phase Transformers

Typical Voltage Typical Winding
Item Designation Description
Rating Diagram

Indicates a winding of E volts which is suitable

1 E 12,000
for delta connection on an E volt system.

Indicates a winding of E volts which is suitable

2 E/E1Y 1 2,400/4,160Y for delta connection on an E volt system or for
wye connection on an E1 volt system.
Indicates a winding of E volts having insulation
12,000/20,780 Grd. Y
1 suitable for delta connection on an E volt system
3 E/E1Grd.Y or
or for wye connection on an E1 volt effectively
2,400/4,160 Grd.Y
grounded system.
Indicates a winding of E volts which has one
20,780 Grd. Y/12,000 end of the winding grounded internally. Windings
4 E1Grd.Y/E 1 or with one end grounded internally are suitable for
12,000 Grd. Y/6,930 single-phase or wye operation on a three-phase
E1 volt effectively grounded system.
Indicates a winding, the sections of which can
be connected in parallel for operation at E volts,
connected in series for operation at 2E volts, or
120/240
connected in series with a center terminal for
5 E/2E or
3-wire operation at 2E volts between the
240/480
extreme terminals and E volts between the
center terminal and each of the extreme
terminals.
Indicates a winding having a mid-tap and
suitable for 3-wire operation at 2E volts between
6 2E/E 240/120 extreme terminals and at E volts between the
mid-tap and each of the extreme terminals
(not reconnectable).
1 E 1 + Ǹ3 E

062111 Page 18 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings − Three-Phase Transformers

Table 47 Designation of Voltage Ratings of Windings − Three-Phase Transformers

Typical Voltage Typical Winding
Item Designation Description
Rating Diagram
Indicates a winding that is permanently
7 E 12,000 delta connected for operation on an
E volt system.
20,780 Indicates a winding that is permanently
Grd.Y/12,000 wye connected with neutral grounded to
8 E1Grd.Y/E 1 or the tank for operation on an E1 volt
34,500 effectively grounded system with E volts
Grd.Y/19,920 available from line to neutral.
Indicates a winding which may be delta
connected for operation on an E volt
12,000/20,780
9 E/E1Grd.Y/E 1 system or may be wye connected for
Grd.Y/12,000
operation on an E1 volt grounded system
with E volts available from line to neutral.
Indicates a permanently delta connected
10 4,160 x 12,000
winding for multiple or series operation.
Indicates a winding which may be delta
V x V1 connected for operation on a 12 kV
12,000 x 34,500
11 system or wye connected for operation on
Grd. Y/19,920
a 34.5 kV effectively grounded wye
system.
1 E 1 + Ǹ3 E

Table 48 Transformer Insulating Fluid Material Codes

BioTemp
FR3 High-Fire Point Silicone
High-Fire Point Mineral Oil
Natural Ester High-Fire Point
Natural Ester
National Standard ASTM D6871 ASTM D6871 ASTM D3487 ASTM D4652
5 Gallon Pail M507033
55 Gallon Drum M500046 M507034 M500043
Bulk M507017

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 19 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Primary Voltages

Table 49 System Primary Voltages 1

Phase Primary Voltages System

Single-Phase 2,400/4,160Y For 2.4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 2,400 x 4,800 For 2.4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 4,160/7,200Y For 4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 4,160GrdY/2,400 For 4 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 4,160 x 12,000 For 4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 4,160 x 7,200 For 4 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 7,200/12,470Y For 12 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000 For 12 kV L-L or 21 kV L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000/20,780 GrdY For 12 kV L-L or 21 kV L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000/20,780Y For 12 kV L-L or 21 kV L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,000GrdY/6,930 For 12 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 12,470GrdY/7,200 For Use in Chester
Single-Phase 17,200 For 17 kV L-L Connection
Single-Phase 20,780 For 21 kV L-L Connection
Single-Phase 20,780GrdY/12,000 For 21 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Single-Phase 24,940GrdY/14,400 For Use in Chester
Single-Phase 44,000 For 44 kV - L-L Connection
Single-Phase 44,000/25,400 For 44 kV - L-L Connection
Three-Phase 4,160 For 4 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 4,160GrdY/2,400 For 4 kV - 4-Wire L-G Connection
Three-Phase 4,160 x 12,000 For 4 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 4,160 x 12,480 For 4 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 12,000 For 12 kV - Delta Connection
Three-Phase 12,000/20,780GrdY/12,000 For 12 kV Delta or 21 kV GrdY Connection
Three-Phase 12,000 x 20,780 For 12 kV Delta or 21 kV Delta Connection
Three-Phase 12,000 x 34,500GrdY/19,920 For 12 kV or 34.5 kV Networks
Three-Phase 17,200 For 17 kV Delta Connection
Three-Phase 20,780 For 21 kV Delta Connection
Three-Phase 20,780GrdY/12,000 For 21 kV GrdY Connection
Three-Phase 20,780Y/12,000 For 21 kV Y Connection
Three-Phase 34,500GrdY/19,920 For 34.5 kV Networks
1 Table 49 is intended to be a reference between the transformer’s primary voltage and the type of primary system that
it can be used on in the PG&E system.

062111 Page 20 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index
1

Front View Front View

(doors removed) (hinged top open)

Box Style Clam Shell Three-Phase Cabinet

1-Wire Cabinet 2-Wire Cabinet

Front View
(hinged top open) 3-Wire Cabinet

Clam Shell Single-Phase Cabinet Front Views (hinged tops open)

Single-Phase - Style Dead-Front

Style MTP and Duplex Style DF

Figure 1
Single-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 21 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

CL Fuses Interlocked
With Switch

Front View
(doors removed) Front View
(doors removed)

Style IIA Style IID 75 − 300 kVA

Bayonet Fuses

Front View
Front View (doors removed)
(doors removed)

Style IIB 225 − 1,000 kVA Style IIE 75 − 2,500 kVA

Bayonet Fuses

Front View
(doors removed)
Style IIC 1,500 − 2,500 kVA Style IIF 300 − 2,500 kVA

Figure 2
Three-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

062111 Page 22 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Vacuum Fault Interrupter

Operating Handle

Front View
(doors removed)
Style IIG 2955/3325 kVA

Vacuum Fault Interrupter

Operating Handle

Style IIH 2955/3325 kVA

Figure 3
Three-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 23 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Front View Front View

(doors removed) (doors removed)

Dead-Front Radial Live-Front Radial

Front View
(doors removed)

Open Wye to Zigzag Wye Fence Enclosed

Front View Front View

(doors removed) (doors removed)

12 − 21 kV Tie Autotransformer Pad-Mounted Network Transformer

Figure 4
Three-Phase, Pad-Mount Transformers for Radial Application

062111 Page 24 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Neutral Spade Insulated Neutral

Front View

Three-Phase, Subsurface, Duplex Horizontal Single-Phase, Subsurface Horizontal - 6-Bushing

Single-Phase, Subsurface Horizontal - 4-Bushing Single-Phase, Subsurface Round-Type

Submersible
Bayonet Fuses

Three-Phase UCD Transformer Three-Phase UCD−LB Transformer

Figure 5
Subsurface Transformers for Loop or Radial Application

Rev. #24: 07-01-14 062111 Page 25 of 26

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Application of Underground Distribution Transformers
EDM

Pictorial Index (continued)

Subway−LB Single-Phase Subsurface Subway

Three-Phase Network Transformer With Protector

Three-Phase Subsurface Vault

Figure 6
Subsurface Transformers for Radial Application

Revision Notes

Revision 24 has the following changes:

1. Corrected Stainless Steel column in Table 1 on Page 5 from “261892 1” to “262892 1”.
2. Corrected column two header in Table 7 on page 6 from “2400/4160GrdY” to “4160/7200Y”.
3. Revised reference document correction for Table 44 on Page 17.
4. Added Table 48 on Page 19 “Transformer Insulating Fluid Material Codes”.

062111 Page 26 of 26 Rev. #24: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

UNDERGROUND CONDUITS 062288

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #17: This document replaces PG&E Document 062288, Rev. #16 For a description of the changes, see Page 25.

Purpose and Scope

This document covers steel and plastic conduit for electric underground installations, with or without concrete encasement.

General Information
1. Applications for underground conduit are as follows:
A. Residential: All residential installations requiring conduit should be made without concrete encasement.
B. Light Commercial, Industrial, and Underground Residential Distribution (URD) Feeder: Installation of circuits of
this type, which are three-way or less, should normally be made without concrete encasement. In densely
populated urban areas, conduit banks involving more than three primary conduits will normally require
concrete encasement.
C. Severe exposure to “dig-ins” and other hazards may require concrete encasement of conduit lines.
D. For any rail road crossings, single wall or co-extended cellular core wall PVC Schedule 40, UL 651 conduit is
required.
2. When conduit, including service conduit, is to be installed for PG&E by others, the following are acceptable
alternatives to the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) F512 (DB-120) conduits listed in this
document:
A. Single wall and co-extruded cellular core wall PVC Schedule 40 or 80 UL 651 conduit that is so marked.
B. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Specification C80.1.
It is the installer’s responsibility to use the proper fitting to join conduits. This transition may involve changes in
both conduit type and size. If equal diameter conduits of different wall thicknesses are joined, the inside edge
of the spigot end must be chamfered.
3. The current carrying capacity of an insulated cable is reduced if it is surrounded by other loaded cables. For
this reason, conduit banks should be arranged so that each conduit is in an outside position.
4. Every effort should be made to obtain a straight, watertight conduit line.
5. In commercial distribution systems, consideration should be given to providing one or more spare conduits in
the original construction for future load growth requirements. The addition of such conduits at a later time is
much more costly.
6. A mandrel shall be used to prove that all conduits are free and clear of dirt, rocks, and other debris. For
further information refer to Greenbook 3.4.1.
7. A pulling tape with sequential footage markings (Code M560154) shall be installed in all conduits and attached
to an end cap. The tape shall be proven free and not glued or caught on joints.
8. All conduits shall be capped. All conduits not terminating in a subsurface enclosure, pedestal, or vault are to
be capped with unglued rigid caps (see Table 12 on Page 8). Conduits terminating in a subsurface enclosure,
pedestal, or vault shall be capped with temporary plugs (see Table 12 on Page 8).
9. When the intrusion of water into buildings can be reasonably expected through lateral service ducts, PG&E is
responsible for sealing both ends of the conduit (refer to Document 063927 and Document 063928). The

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 1 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit sealing system can be ordered for this purpose. RDSS must be
used when waterproofing a subsurface transformer enclosure is required. Refer to Document 072149.
10. For the design requirements of conduits installed on bridges see Document TD-2310P-10.

Material Specifications

11. Plastic conduits and fittings shall comply with the latest revision of ASTM Standard F512 for PVC, and shall
also meet the following specific requirements:
A. Single wall conduit cell classification of 12164-B or 12264-B, tensile modulus of 500,000 psi.
B. Co-extruded cellular core wall conduit cell classification of 12254-B, minimum average tensile modulus of
445,000 psi.
C. Fittings cell classification of 12234-B.
D. Marking shall conform to ASTM Standard F512 requirements.
E. The inside edge of conduit ends (spigot-end only in the case of belled-end conduit) shall be beveled to
eliminate sharp edges and minimize the possibility of cable damage.
F. PVC conduit and fittings will be gray in color.

Application

12. Plastic conduit may be cut with a hacksaw or a fine-toothed wood saw. Clean off burrs. Bevel the inside to
eliminate sharp edges.
13. Apply a thin, uniform coat of cement to both surfaces to be glued. Avoid excessive use of cement to prevent the
formation of a bead of cement on the interior shoulder of the joint since, when hardened, the bead can cause
cable damage during installation. Immediately after applying the coat of cement to the conduit, insert the conduit
into the fitting socket until it bottoms at the fitting shoulder. Turn the conduit 1/4 turn during insertion to distribute
the cement evenly. Hold the conduit in place for about 1 minute to prevent backing out in case of tight interference
fit joints. Wipe any excess cement away from the outside of the joint. Weather conditions may vary the curing
time. When using cement in confined areas, adequate ventilation must be provided.
Table 1 Cement for Use With Plastic Conduits
Manufacturer and Part Number
Application Quantity Material Code
Oatey Weld-on Duit 413
1 Quart 30886 12089 490157
PVC to PVC
1 Pint 30885 12090 490151

14. Backfill containing large rock, paving material, cinders, large amounts of sharply angular substance, or
corrosive material shall not be placed in excavations where such material may damage conduits, prevent
adequate compaction of the fill, or contribute to corrosion of the conduits.
15. End bells are to be used to terminate all conduits, unless the conduit has been terminated in an enclosure
equipped with duct terminators. Cable protectors are to be used on reconstruction projects only, when end
bells cannot be installed.
16. In applications where a conduit dead-ends, cap the end of the conduit and place a marker ball
(material code M374947) at the location. Refer to M-60 for more information.
17. Conduits shown in Table 10 (HDPE) and Table 11 (Bore-Gard) on Page 7 are for directional boring
applications only.
18. Caution: When pulling conduits in boring applications, be certain to cut the conduits allowing sufficient extra length
for the conduit to relax. It may take as long as 72 hours for an excessively stretched conduit to fully relax.
19. Caution: Snap-N-Stac Combo Spacers should be used in concrete encased application.
20. Conduit shown on Table 20 through Table 27 (flexible conduit) on Page 11 through Page 16 are for use in
areas with minor soil settlement issues, and for large radius sweeps or re-routes.
21. Single wall conduit PVC DB-120 is not allowed for 2” conduit size.

062288 Page 2 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

References Location Document

Underground Duct Lines Concrete Encased . . . . . . . . FRO: UG Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 031792A
Underground Conduit Without Concrete Encasement FRO: UG Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 031793A
Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential
Underground Electric Services 0−600 V
to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063927
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services
0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928
Selection of the Type of Underground Equipment . . . . UG−1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 072149
Engineering Material Specification 64, “Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC), Conduits, and Fittings” . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS64
Engineering Material Specification 99, “Underground
Electric Duct System (installed by applicant)” . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS99
Engineering Material Specification 4123, “Backfill
Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS4123
Electric Distribution Conduits Installed on Bridges . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TD-2310P-10
Approved “Mark and Locate” Instruments, Equipment,
Accessories, and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-60

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 3 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings

Length = 10’ 0” Table 2 Codes for Rigid Steel Conduit

Conduit Size Dimensions (inches) Weight
Code
ID (inches) OD ID T (lbs.)1
OD
2 2.4 2.06 0.154 33 362103
3 3.5 3.06 0.216 69 362092
4 4.5 4.02 0.237 98 362093
T Standard
Coupling 5 5.6 5.04 0.258 134 362104
Figure 1
Steel Conduit 6 6.6 6.06 0.280 177 362141
1 Weight for one 10-foot length, including one standard
coupling furnished with each length.

Table 3 Codes for Standard Steel Coupling

L Conduit Size Dimensions (inches)
Code
(inches) P L
P 2 2.73 2.18 362105
3 4.00 3.25 362094
Figure 2 4 5.00 3.50 362095
Steel Coupling 5 6.29 3.75 362106
6 7.39 4.00 362142

Table 4 Codes for Galvanized Steel Split Coupling

L
Conduit Size Dimensions (inches)
Code
(inches) A L
7/16” Dia.
Holes 2 2.5 9 362019
A
3 3.5 9 362021
4 4.5 9 362023
Figure 3 5 1 5.5 9 362107
Split Coupling 1
6 6.5 9 362143
1 These sizes are made of zinc-plated malleable iron. Can
be installed on rigid steel conduits.

062288 Page 4 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Table 5 Codes for 90° Steel Conduit Sweeps, TBE

Conduit Size Radius
Code
(inches) (inches)
90° 2 24 360081
R 3 36 362091
36 362090
4
60 360812
5 36 362109
Figure 4
Conduit Sweep 36 362144
Threaded Both Ends 6 48 362145
60 360813

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 5 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Plastic Conduit and Fittings

Notes
1. The depth of all couplings, adapters, swedge reducers, and bell ends shall conform to the requirements listed
in Table 2 of ASTM Standard F512.
Table 6 Data and Codes for Rigid Plastic Conduit DB-120 1
Conduit Dimensions (inches)
Size Outside Minimum Wall Thickness Code
(inches) Diameter ID Minimum Maximum
22 2.375 2.189 0.083 0.113 360153
3 3.500 3.204 0.118 0.148 016471
4 4.500 4.132 0.154 0.184 016472
5 5.563 5.121 0.191 0.221 016473
6 6.625 6.111 0.227 0.257 016474
1 See Note 11 on Page 2 for material specifications.
2 Co-extruded cellular core DB-120.

Table 7 Codes for Standard Couplings

Standard Coupling
Conduit Size Minimum
Code
(inches) Socket Depth
2 360321 1.75
3 360322 2.875
Figure 5
Standard Coupling 4 360323 3.375
5 360401 4.0
6 360482 5.0

Table 8 Codes for Plastic-to-Steel Adapters

Conduit Size
Code
(inches)
2 360324
3 360325
4 360326
Figure 6 5 360402
Plastic-to-Steel Adapter 6 360489

Table 9 Data and Codes for Swedge Reducers 1, 2

A Reducer Dimensions (inches)
B
Size Minimum Length Typical Belled End ID Code
(inches) A B C D
C D 3x2 2.875 1.750 3.515 2.393 018585
4x3 3.375 2.875 4.515 3.515 018584
5x4 4.000 3.375 5.593 4.515 360777
Figure 7 6x5 5.000 4.000 6.658 5.593 360778
Swedge Reducer with Belled Ends 1 Both belled ends must be chamferred 0.3 inches (min) by 45°.
2 Reducers are made of PVC Schedule 40 .

062288 Page 6 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Plastic Conduit and Fittings (continue)

Table 10 High Density Polyethlene (HDPE) Conduit Directional Boring Conduit 1

Conduit Mechanical Couplings 2, 3

Size Length Description Code Size Code
(feet) (inches)
2” Sch 80 500 Coil 4 360511
2 360690
2” Sch 80 40 Stick 360017
3” Sch 80 500 Coil 4 360644
3 360691
3” Sch 80 40 Stick 360018
4” Sch 80 625 Coil 4 360687
4” Sch 80 625 Coil 5 360014 4 360692
4” Sch 80 40 Stick 360015
5” SDR 13.5 450 Coil 4 360688
5” SDR 13.5 450 Coil 5 360012 5 360694
5” SDR 13.5 40 Stick 360013
6” SDR 13.5 450 Coil 4 360689
6” SDR 13.5 450 Coil 5 360010 6 360695
6” SDR 13.5 40 Stick 360011
1 Color shall be black with at least 3 red longitudinal strips.
2 May be used to connect PE conduit to PVC conduit (except in directional drilling apps.)
3 Mechanical couplings are not designed for directional drilling. Fusion joints are required.
4 No reel.
5 With reel.

Table 11 PVC (Bore-Gard) Directional Boring Conduit

Size
Description Code
(inches)
3 Conduit 10’, Schedule 40 360055
3 Conduit 20’, Schedule 40 360056
4 Conduit 10’, Schedule 40 360026
4 Conduit 20’, Schedule 40 360025
4 Replacement Locking Straps 1 360031
4 Replacement Seal Gaskets 1 360029
6 Conduit 10’, Schedule 40 360027
Figure 8 6 Conduit 20’, Schedule 40 360028
HDPE Coupling 1
6 Replacement Locking Straps 360032
6 Replacement Seal Gaskets 1 360030
1 Package of 10.

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 7 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Plastic Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Hole for Attaching Table 12 Codes for Rigid Conduit Caps and Cap Plugs
Pulling Line Codes
Conduit Size (inches)
Rigid Cap Cap Plug
2 360425 360440
3 360426 360441
Rigid Cap Cap Plug 4 360428 360443
Figure 9 5 360429 360444
Plastic Conduit Caps 6 360488 360494

Table 13 Codes for End Bells

Conduit Size (inches) Code
2 360420
3 360421
4 360423
Figure 10 5 360424
End Bell
6 360487

Table 14 Codes for Cable Protectors 1

6” Conduit Size (inches) Code
2 382034
3
4
382045
5
Figure 11 6
Cable Protector 1 Not for new installations; for replacement only.

Table 15 Codes for Snap-N-Stack Combo Spacers 1

A B Conduit Duct OD Horizontal Dimensions (inches) Material
Size Duct
(inches) A B C D E Codes
(inches) Positions
3 3.5 2 2 5.5 3.63 5.38 11 360459
D 4 4.5 2 2 6.5 3.88 6.06 13 360460
C
5 5.5 2 2 7.56 4.38 7.25 15.12 360461
6 6.625 2 2 8.62 4.13 7.38 17.25 360491
1 Cable spacers allow only for 2” separation between conduits. Cable spacers
A are used only where is required to route around existing obstructions. Thus,
B locations where cable spacers are needed are exempt from the requirement of
maintaining 3” separation between 600 A distribution circuits.
E
Figure 12
Snap-N-Stac Combo Spacers

062288 Page 8 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Plastic Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Table 16 Codes for DB-120 PVC Conduit Bends (sweeps)
Sweep
Conduit Size
(inches) Radius 2 Code
Degree
(inches)
24 360155
11-1/4
36 360156
24 360157
22-1/2
22-1/2 36 360158
R 2 1, 3
24 360159
45
36 360160
24 360161
90
36 360162
Figure 13
11-1/4 36 360801
22-1/2 PVC Conduit Bend
22-1/2 36 360800
3 45 36 360403
24 360405
90
36 360328
Standard 36 360804
Coupling 11-1/4
60 360805
36 360760
R 45 22-1/2
60 360761
4
36 360412
45
60 360413
36 360414
Figure 14 90
60 360415
45 PVC Conduit Bend
36 360808
11-1/4
60 360809
36 360806
22-1/2
60 360763
5
36 360416
45
60 360417
36 360418
Standard 90
90 60 360419
R Coupling
11-1/4 60 360811
22-1/2 60 360765
36 360485
6 45
60 360486
Figure 15 36 360483
90 PVC Conduit Bend 90
60 360484
1 Co-extruded cellular core wall DB-120.
2 For each conduit bend; first is row minimum vertical radius, second row is
minimum horizontal radius.
3 For 2” primary conduits, it is preferred to use 36” vertical radius if field
conditions allowed it.

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 9 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Plastic Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Notes
1. A 36” may be allowed as the minimum horizontal radius when using 4”PVC conduits bends greater than 5° if field
conditions make it not feasible to install 60” radius and if such field conditions are validated by PG&E inspectors.
2. Note 1 above does not apply to secondary service conduits installations. For secondary service conduits
installations, 36” is the minimum horizontal radius for 4” conduit. See Document 063927 and Document 063928.

Large Radius Sweeps

Table 17 Length of Rigid PVC Conduit Segments

Radius of Bend (R) Approximate Length of Rigid
Radius of Bend Conduit Segments
Angle of Bend  (R) (feet)
11’ 6” 1
17’ 3” 1.5
Straight Run 23’ 0” 2
28’ 9” 2.5
34’ 6” 3
2-1/2 40’ 3” 3.5
46’ 0” 4
51’ 9” 4.5
90 5 Couplings 57’ 6” 5
(see Figure 17) 69’ 0” 6
Rigid Conduit Segments 80’ 6” 7
(see Table 17 for lengths) 92’ 0” 8
Straight Run
Figure 16
Typical Application of 5 Couplings
Table 18 Number of Couplings and Conduit
Example Segments Required
Radius Bend (R) = 60 Feet Number of Couplings and
Angle of Bend () = 45 Angle of Bend Outside Diameter Conduit
() Segments Required
From Table 17 The nearest value to 60-foot radius is 57’ 6”.
The length of conduit segments = 5 feet. Coupling Conduit
15 3 2
From Table 18 For a 45 angle bend:
The number of 5 couplings required = 9. 30 6 5
The number of conduit segments required = 8. 45 9 8
60 12 11
75 15 14
90 18 17

Table 19 Codes for DB-120 PVC 5 Degree Coupling

Coupling Size
Code
(inches)
21 360154
3 360399
4 360400
Figure 17 5 360407
5 Coupling
6 360495
1 Co-extended cellular core wall DB-120

062288 Page 10 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings

Table 20 Data and Codes for Corrugated Core Flex Conduit

With Couplers (250’ coil) 1, 2, 3
Conduit Dimension (inches)
Size Code
Outside Inside Wall
(inches)
Diameter Diameter Thickness
2 2.375 2.050 .163 360095
OD 3 3.500 2.950 .275 360096
ID
4 4.750 3.975 .387 360097
1 Conduit can be used in areas minor soil settlement issues or for
re-routes.
Wall Thickness 2 Inside wall is corrugated.
3 Minimum bending radius is 24 inches for all sizes.
Figure 18
Corrugated Core Flex Conduit

Smooth Inner Wall Table 21 Data and Codes for Key-LockCouplers 1

Lower Coefficient
O-Ring Gasket Conduit Insertion Lengths (inches)
Air and Wartertight Size Code
Key-Lock Strip (inches)
No Glue 2 2.725 360102
3 3.125 360103
42 2.875 360105
1 Kit has coupler, two locks and two gaskets.
2 Coupler to connect corrugated core flex to corrugated core flex.
Corrugsted Outer Wall
High Crush Strength

Key-Lock Coupling
Quick, field Assembly

Figure 19
Key-Lock Couplers

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 11 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Install the Key-Lock Coupler Following the Procedure Below

1. Make certain the elastomeric gasket is seated in the second corrugation on 4” conduit and the first corrugation on
6” conduit. Be sure the gasket is positioned as shown on Figure 20.

Figure 20
Key-Lock Couplers Gasket Position

2. Use only a water-based lubricant. Apply the lubricant to the outside surface of the gasket. A light coating of
lubricant should also be applied to the chamfered leading edge of the coupler as shown on Figure 21.

Figure 21
Key-Lock Couplers Lubricant Application

3. Insert the gasketed end of the Smooth-Cor conduit into the coupler. Note the black home-mark, which is used
to identify proper coupling as shown on Figure 22.

Figure 22
Key-Lock Couplers Insertion

062288 Page 12 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Install the Key-Lock Coupler Following the Procedure Below (continued)

4. Use a mallet and wood block to seat the coupler until the home-mark is covered. Note that the small lock ring on
the inside surface of the coupler snaps into a matching corrugation as shown on Figure 23.

Figure 23
Key-Lock Couplers Locked in Place

5. Insert the Key-Lock strip following the directional arrow into the pre-drilled hole in the coupler. Apply a small
amount of lubricant to aid in the insertion. Push the Key-Lock strip (in the direction of the arrow on the label)
around the entire circumference, locking the grooves in the conduit and coupler securely together. Trim the
excess Key-Lock strip material from the coupler (optional). See Figure 24 below.

Figure 24
Key-Lock Couplers Strip Insertion

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 13 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Install the Key-Lock Coupler Following the Procedure Below (continued)

Note: When cutting the Smooth-Cor® conduit in the field to a custom length, it necessary to follow the steps
below:
1. Cut the conduit at the selected corrugation valley.
2. Place the gasket over the newly cut and cleaned end, making certain to seat the gasket on the second
corrugation for 4” conduit and on the fourth corrugation for 6” conduit. The higher ridge of the elastomeric seal is
positioned toward the body of the conduit and the lower ridge toward the end of the conduit. Using a felt marker,
place a home-mark on the conduit to achieve proper coupling. When using 4” conduit, place the home-mark on
the seventh corrugation; for the 6” conduit, place the home-mark on the fourth corrugation. Repeat steps 2-5 as
shown on Page 12 and 13 to complete coupling. See Figure 25 below.

Home-Mark Home-Mark
Elastomeric
Gasket Elastomeric
Gasket

Seating Surfaces
Seating Surfaces

4” Smooth-Cor® 6” Smooth-Cor®

Figure 25
Key-Lock Couplers Cut at Customized Length

062288 Page 14 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Table 22 Data and Codes for Shurlock/Key-Lock

Smooth-Core (Adapter Smooth-Core-Shur-Lock Kit 1)
Dimension
Conduit Size (inches) Code
Adapter (inches)
Length
2 6.7 360106
3 6.63 360107
42 8.0 360108
1 Kit has adapter, one lock, and one gasket.
2 Adapter works connecting SC conduit to PVC and
SC conduit to threaded steel conduit.

Conduit

Table 23 Required Rigid PVC stub out length

Conduit Size PVC Stub Out
(inches) (inches)
2 14.8
3 14.5
4 15
6 17.5
1 Stub out length needed to provide enough space for
the adapter to connect rigid PVC to flexible conduit.

Length

Figure 26
Key-Lock Adapter
Table 24 Data and Codes for Key-Lock Bell
End Adapters Smooth-Core Bell 1
Dimension
Conduit Size (inches) Code
(inches)
Length
2 7.38 360109
3 7.25 360110
4 1 7.5 360111
1 Bell end adapter for smooth-core conduits.

Length

Figure 27
Key-Lock Bell End Adapter

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 15 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Flexible (HDPE) Conduit and Fittings (continued)

Table 25 Codes for Tapered Plugs

Tapered Plug
Code
(inches)
2 360112
3 360113
4 360114

Figure 28
Tapered Plugs
Table 26 Codes for Key-Lockt Strip Replacement 1

Key-Lock Strip Length Bell Diameter

Color Code
(inches) (inches) (inches)
2 Lime 12 2.75 360121
3 Lavender 16.5 4.37 360122
4 Gray 19.5 4.82 360123
1 See Figure 19 on Page 11 for Key-Lock picture.

Table 27 Codes for O-Ring Gasket Seals 1

Tapered Plug
Code
(inches)
2 360125
3 360126
4 360135
1 See Figure 19 on Page 11 O-Ring Gasket
Picture.

062288 Page 16 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Trench Requirements

Notes
1. Field conditions may require a minimum depth greater than shown.
2. Maintain minimum of 3-inch separation between:
 Primary to primary conduits
 Primary to secondary, service,and streetlight conduits.
3. Maintain minimum of 1.5-inch separation between:
 Secondary to secondary, service, and streetlight conduits
 Service to service, and streetlight conduits
4. Clearances in Note 2 and Note 3 may be reduced when conduits are entering enclosures, panels, pads,
vaults, or structures. Allowance must be made for the installation of the conduit end bells.
5. Sharp turns, bends, or other irregularities in the conduit must be avoided.
6. If the bottom of a trench which will contain plastic conduit is rocky, use backfill material conforming to the
requirements of Engineering Material Specification 4123. Before tamping in the area of plastic conduit, apply
at least 6 inches of backfill over the top of the conduit to avoid breakage. Final backfill may then be placed in
the trench and tamping employed to finish grade. In order to reduce costs, the soil originally removed from the
trench should be used as backfill wherever possible (see Note 14 on Page 2).
7. Do not use salt-water sand backfill with steel conduit.
8. Other utility practices may require a greater minimum conduit separation.
9. Refer to state of California, Department of Industrial Relations; Trench Construction Safety Orders for trench
construction requirements. These orders are issued by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health.
10. When crossing obstructions, such as shown in Figure 32 and Figure 33 on Page 18, maintain 6-inch minimum
separation.

ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
24”
Min. ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Backfill
(see Note 6) ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
3’ 0”

ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ
Minimum

ÎÎÎÎÎ
Secondary or
Streetlight
12” min.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 29
Primary
ÎÎÎÎÎ 3”

Secondary/Service
or Streetlight See Note 3
Trench 18” min.

Figure 30
Primary Trench

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 17 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Conduit Construction, Built-up Method

3” 2” 3”
Concrete
A Envelope
8” 8”
3” 4’ 0” to 6’ 0” 4’ 0” to 6’ 0”

1”

1”
Spacer Bottom of
3” (see Table 15 on Page 8) Trench A
Plastic Conduit
(see Table 6 on Page 6) Figure 31
Typical Straight Run Installation
Section A-A (5” conduit, 6-way shown)
Spacer
(see Table 15 on Page 8)
Obstruction

Coupling
(see Table 7 on Page 6)
Reinforcing Steel Rods

This spacer is to be used only where it is

Bottom of required to route around existing obstructions
Trench (see Table 15 on Page Page 8)
Spacer
(see Table 15 on Page Page 8)

Figure 32
Typical Perspective View of
Installation Around Obstruction

Coupling
(see Table 7 on Page 6)

Obstruction

Spacer Bottom of Trench

(see Table 15 on Page 8)

Figure 33
Typical Perspective View of
Installation Under Obstruction

062288 Page 18 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Construction and Termination of Conduit Line

Notes
1. Slope the conduit sufficiently to provide adequate drainage. On level ground, slope the duct line from the
center to each manhole.
2. Local city ordinances may require a minimum cover greater than PG&E’s requirements of 24” for conduits
containing circuits energized at 750 volts or less, and 36” for conduits containing circuits energized in excess
of 750 volts. Depth may be reduced in either case if adequate mechanical protection − as defined in
Section 3.3.6 of the Greenbook− is provided. .
3. Where required, the depth of the conduit window may be increased. Where this is necessary, tie the conduit
envelope concrete into the manhole reinforcing steel.
4. Vertical staggering of conduits at entrance shown in Detail A will assist in arranging for cable crossover if required.

B B
Manhole Cover Plan View Manhole Cover
Level Street Surface
C 3’ 0” Min. (see Note 2)

C Slope
Slope
Figure 34
See Note 1 Sectional Elevation
C Level Grade

Steep Street Surface

C
3’ 0” Minimum
(see Note 2)
Figure 35
Sectional Elevation
Steep Grade

Roof of Roof of Manhole Roof of Manhole

8” 24” 24”
Manhole Approx. 3” Approx. 3”
Duct
4” Approx. 3” Terminator
(see Note 3) or End Bell
6” 6”
Plastic Conduit 6”
(see Table 6 Plastic
on Page 6) 6” Conduit
3”
Duct Terminator or 3” Approx. Approx.
End Bell 3”
3”
3” Approx. Approx.
Section C-C Detail A
Inside of Section B-B Conduit Window
Manhole Wall Staggered Window
(6-way conduit formation shown) (see Note 4)

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 19 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Conduit Configuration Tables

Notes
1. For conduit lines two-way and larger, install #4 reinforcing bars in all four corners of the conduit envelope.
Overlap bars 15 inches and install a minimum of 3 inches from the top or bottom and 1 inch from the side
of the envelope.
2. Where the width of the trench is greater than the required width of the envelope, the horizontal spacing
between conduits may be increased as long as 3-inch spacing between the conduit and the outside edge of
the envelope is maintained.
3. Concrete: Normal Weight
Aggregate, ASM, C33 Uniformly Graded
Maximum Aggregate Size 3/4 inch type
Minimum Comprehensive Strength: f’c = 3000 pound-force per square inch (psi).

Table 28 Dimensions for Single Conduit Configurations

W 3” Conduit Envelope Dim. Concrete Reqd.
Cubic Yards
Description Size W H per 100 ft. 1
H
2” 8-1/2” 8-1/2” 1.9
3” 3” 3” 9-1/2” 9-1/2” 2.3
3”
Figure 36 Single 4” 10-1/2” 10-1/2” 2.8
Single Conduit Configuration 5” 11-1/2” 11-1/2” 3.4
6” 12-1/2” 12-1/2” 4.0
1 Quantities may vary due to variations encountered in
construction.

3”
W Table 29 Dimensions for Multiple Conduit Configurations
H Conduit Envelope Dim. Concrete Reqd.
Cubic Yards
3” Description Size W H per 100 ft. 1
3”
3” 16” 9-1/2” 3.9
3” 4” 18” 10-1/2” 4.9
W 2-way
5” 20” 11-1/2” 5.9
H 6” 22-1/2” 12-1/2” 7.2
4” 18” 18” 8.3
3” 4-way 5” 20” 20” 10.3
3” 3”
6” 22-1/2” 22-1/2” 13.0
3”
3” 4” 18” 25-1/2” 11.8
W 6-way 5” 20” 29” 15.0
6” 22-1/2” 32” 18.5
H 4” 18” 33” 15.3
8-way 5” 20” 37-1/2” 19.0
3” 6” 22-1/2” 41-1/2” 24.0
3” 3” 1 Quantities may vary due to variations encountered in
construction.
Figure 37
Two, Four, and Six-Way Conduit Configuration

062288 Page 20 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using Foam

Notes
1. Within minutes, polyurethane foam expands to form a water and gas barrier that can be easily removed in
the future.
2. Consult the manufacturer’s instructions included in each kit.
6” Min. Duct Terminator
Front Dam (packing) Back Dam
Chamber

Cables
Conduit Polyurethane Sealant
Figure 38
Details of a Polyurethane Seal
Step 1 Wipe off loose dirt and grime from cables.
Step 2 Install front dam (packing). Wind a strip of packing around each cable. Push the dam approximately 6 inches
to 8 inches into the conduit. Install the back dam in the same manner as the front dam, and push it into the
conduit until the dam is flush with the duct terminator.

Back Dam Flush With Duct Terminator

Figure 39
Front Dam Installation

Step 3 Insert the nozzle into the chamber between the dams and inject polyurethane.

6”

Polyurethane Sealant
Figure 40
Nozzle Application

Table 30 Codes for Polyurethane Conduit Seal Kits 1

Conduit Size Code Manufacturer Catalog Number
019178 Dura-Line (Arnco) S-60-C6P
2” Through 6” Hydro Seal
490813 Polywater FST-250KIT-PGE
1 Kits have a 12 month shelf-life.

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 21 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using Foam (continued)

Termination Enclosure Riser Seal Method

Step 1 Place the residential riser seal on the cable and slowly push it into the mouth of the riser conduit. Turn the
Allen screw until the neoprene gasket expands to form a tight seal.
Step 2 This riser seal is to be used to seal the riser conduit at the customer’s service termination enclosure only. The top
of the service riser is the preferred location. Belowground use is approved if an alternative to foam is needed.

3/16”
Allen Screw
Table 31 Codes for Termination Enclosure Riser Seals
Neoprene
Conduit Manufacturer and Catalog No.
Gasket Cable Size Code
Size Environmental Solutions Cat.
1/0 Triplex 019179 ESC − 103
2”
4/0 Triplex 019180 ESC − 403

Figure 41
Termination Enclosure Riser Seal

062288 Page 22 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using RDSS

Notes
1. Consult the manufacturer’s instructions included in each kit.
2. Installation tool IT-16 is needed to install RDSS. This tool uses CO2 cartridges. Both of these materials need to be
ordered separately. See Figure 44 on Page 24 .
3. Select the appropriate RDSS size per Table 34.
4. When sealing three or more cables, the RDSS sealing clip listed on Table 34 must be used with the DRSS duct
deal. One clip seals up to four cables.
5. Order RDSS as indicated on Table 35.
6. For additional reference, the attached link provides an installation video. This video was developed by the
manufacturer and may not reflect the use of the company required PPE. When performing this work, please be
sure to use the appropriate PPE (i.e. long sleeves, hard hat, etc.) as required by PG&E.
https://www.knowledgekeeper.com/libraries/video/4c9bdcb11d19e4c5c4. After signing into Knowledge Keeper:
a.) click on the library b.) Scroll down c.) Click on field : Equipment Underground d.) Scroll down until finding
RDSS Video.
Table 32 Codes for Termination Enclosure Riser Seals
Normal Duct RDSS-45 RDSS-60 RDSS-75 RDSS-100 RDSS-125 RDSS-150
(Conduit) Cable/Cable Cable/Cable Cable/Cable Cable/Cable Cable/Cable Cable/Cable
Size (Inches) Bundle Dia- Bundle Dia- Bundle Dia- Bundle Dia- Bundle Dia- Bundle Dia-
meter (Inches) meter (Inches) meter (Inches) meter (Inches) meter (Inches) meter (Inches)
1-1/2 0-1.25
2 0-1.50 0-1.00
3 0-2.00
4 0-3.25 0-2.75
52 0-2.75-4.5 2.50-4.24
6 2 2.50-5.50
RDSS Clip
N/A 75 75 100 125 150
Size
1 One RDSS clip per RDSS seal is included in the kit.
2 For 5” and 6” ducts with cable bundle diameters less than listed on this table or empty; an RDSS-AT/AP-150 device
must be used along with RDSS. RDSS-AT/AP-150 must be ordered separately. See Figure 44.

Figure 42
RDSS Seal and Clip

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 23 of 25

UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using RDSS (continued)

Figure 43
AT/AP-150 Device

Figure 44
IT-16 Installation Tool and CO2 Cartridges

Figure 45
RDSS Installed

062288 Page 24 of 25 Rev. #17: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Conduits
Greenbook
Underground Conduits

Instructions for Sealing Conduit Using RDSS (continued)

Table 33 Material Codes for RDSS Kits and Installation Tool
Item Material Description Code
1 RDSS-45-PG&E 360213
2 RDSS-60-PG&E 360214
3 RDSS-75-PG&E 360215
4 RDSS-100-PG&E 360216
5 RDSS-125-PG&E 360217
6 RDSS-150-PG&E 360218
7 RDSS-AT/AP-150 Device 360219
8 RDSS-IT-16 Tool 360220
9 Compressed CO2 Gas Cylinders 360221
1 Installation tool re-usable. Unless damaged, only need to order once.
2 Only these types of cylinders are compatible with this tool.

Revision Notes
Revision 17 has the following changes:
1. Revised Table 1 on Page 2. Added second vendor information.
2. Revised typo in Table 16 on Page 9 for 36” conduit vertical radius.
3. Added table footnote 3 to Table 16 on Page 9.
4. Added Notes 1 and 2 on Page 10.
5. Added Note 4 on Page 17.

Rev. #17: 08-15-17 062288 Page 25 of 25

 Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

LANDSCAPE SCREEN FOR PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 063422

Asset: Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued By: M. L. Thabault (MLTC) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #04: This document replaces PG&E Document 063422, Rev. #03. For a description of the changes, see Page 12.

Purpose and Scope

This document provides a variety of landscape design ideas that may be used by the applicant to screen pad-mounted
transformers.
Pad-mounted transformers are much less costly to install and maintain than subsurface transformers. While any
landscaping, retaining walls, decorative walls, etc. may be installed or maintained by the applicant, landscape
screening is encouraged as it helps improve the overall appearance and acceptance of pad-mounted transformers.

General Information
1. This document is intended to illustrate a variety of design concepts. They may be modified to fit a particular
need or site condition.
2. The figures in this document are illustrative designs and are not intended to be construction or working
drawings. Materials, quantities, and construction methods will have to be determined by the installer to meet
the requirements of the particular site.
3. The addition of suitable plants to these basic designs will enhance the overall screening effect.
4. The designs illustrate screening single-phase transformers, but the same concepts may also be applied to
screening three-phase, pad-mounted transformers.
5. The decorative walls, fences, etc., depicted in this document are not substitutes for any required barrier posts,
fire walls, etc., that may be required by Document 051122.
6. The applicant may not paint the exterior of the transformer a different color.

Plant Matrices

7. See Pages 7 through 12 for a plant matrix that identifies plant species suitable for screening transformers
within the different climatic areas of each division.

Clearances

8. 8-foot minimum (measured from the edge of the pad) in front of all equipment doors to provide room to
operate with hot sticks and to replace the equipment.
9. A clearance of 2 feet is required from the transformer pad to walls, fences, etc., as depicted in this document.
The clearance may be reduced to 1 foot if the height of the wall does not exceed 2 feet and if the wall
thickness does not exceed 1 foot (i.e., planter box). See Document 051122 for the clearances to building
walls.
10. Gates and doors may be placed with minimal clearance in front of the transformers if the required 8-foot
clearance is available with the doors or gates open.

References Location Document

Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection
Details for Pad-Mounted and
Subsurface Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 1 of 12

Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Landscape Screen
Low Evergreen
‘‘Field Stone” Shrubs (typical)
12” H x 12” W x 24” L
‘‘Field Stone”
24” H x 24” W x 36” L

Concrete Apron 2’-0”

Transformer
2’-0” Pad 2’-0”
(front)
‘‘Field Stone”
12” H x 12” W x 24” L

8 Foot Level Clear Space

‘‘Field Stone” (see Note 8 on page 1)
18” H X 18” W X 24” L

Typical Plan View Low Growing Evergreen

Shrubs with Flowers

Transformer ‘‘Field Stone”

‘‘Field Stone”

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 1
Landscape Screen

Table 1 List of Material for Landscape Screen

Quantity Description
4 “Sonoma Field Stones”
10-12 Low Evergreen Shrubs (5 gallon size)
1/2 Cubic Yard Concrete (4” deep, broom finish) 1
1/2 Cubic Yard Gravel Sub Base (4” deep) 1
1 Excluding transformer pad.

063422 Page 2 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Planter Wall Screen

Low, Spreading
Evergreen Shrubs

Transformer
Pad)
4” x 4” Post
(typical) (Front)
2” x 6” Cap
(2) 2” x 12” Redwood
Wood Gate
2” x 12” Rough Redwood
Concrete Apron W/ 2” x 4” Frame
With 8’ Level Clear Space
(see Note 8 on Page 1)
Plan View

2” x 6” Redwood Cap
(continuous)

2’-0”
2’-0”

(2) 2” x 12” Rough Redwood

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 2
Planter Wall Screen

Table 2 List of Materials for Planter Wall Screen

Quantity Description
6 2” x 12” Rough Redwood (12 feet long)
4 2” x 12” Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
3 2” x 6“ Rough Redwood (12 feet long)
5 4” x 4” Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
1/2 Cubic Yard Concrete (broom finish) 1
1/2 Cubic Yard Gravel Sub Base (4” deep)1
10 Low Evergreen Shrubs ( 5 gallon size)
4 2” x 4” Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
1 2” x 6“ Rough Redwood (8 feet long)
1 Excluding transformer pad.

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 3 of 12

Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Wall for Screening

Concrete Apron

Row of Used Brick Rebar Typical

Concrete
Block Wall
Transformer
Pad

(front)

8 Foot Level Clear Space

(see Note 8 on Page 1)

Plan View

Used Brick
2 5/8” H X 3 5/8” W X 8” L

± 2’-0” Concrete Block

8” H x 8” W x 16” L with
Tan Color and
‘‘Combed” Finish

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 3
Wall for Screening

Table 3 List of Materials for Wall for Screening

Quantity Description
80 Used Bricks
− Mortar
52 Concrete Blocks (8” W x 8” H x 16” L)
1/2 Cubic Yard Concrete (4” deep, broom finish) 1
1/2 Cubic Yard Gravel Sub Base (4” deep) 1
− 1/2” x 2’ Rebar for Cells at Block Corners and Edges (minimum of 8 pieces)
− Grout Fill for Block Corners and Edges
1 Excluding transformer pad.

063422 Page 4 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Retaining Wall

Evergreen Shrubs
12”-18” High

Concrete Apron

Slope Slope
Transformer
Pad

(front)
Precast ‘‘Polymer”
Concrete Wall
8 Foot Level
Clear Space

Plan View

Refer to Document 051122

for Retaining Wall Construction Details
Polymer
Concrete Wall

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 4
Retaining Wall

Table 4 List of Materials for Retaining Wall

Quantity Description
12-14 Low, Evergreen Shrubs (5 gallon size)
19 LF 2’ Polymer Concrete Wall
1/2 Cubic Yard Concrete (4” deep, broom finish) 1
1/2 Cubic Yard Gravel Sub Base (4” deep) 1
1 Excluding transformer pad.

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 5 of 12

Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Pole and Landscape Screen

Low, Evergreen
Shrubs with Thorns
or Barbs Lodgepoles or Pine Bark
Pole, 10”-12” Diameter

Lodgepole
Transformer
Pad 12”

(front) 24”
4” Concrete
Min.
8 Foot Level Clear Concrete Apron
Space
(see Note 8 on Page 1) 18”

Plan View 6”

Section

Lodgepoles
10” Diameter
Low Shrubs

Perspective − Resident’s View

Figure 5
Pole and Landscape Screen

Table 5 List of Materials

Quantity Description
7 10” Diameter Lodgepoles (3’-6” long)
3 10” Diameter Lodgepoles (3’-10” long)
12-14 Low Evergreen Shrubs (5 gallon size)
1/2 Cubic Yard Concrete (4” deep, broom finish) 1
1/2 Cubic Yard Gravel Sub Base (4” deep) 1
1 Excluding transformer pad

063422 Page 6 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for Stockton, Yosemite, Fresno, and Kern Divisions

Notes
1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.
2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.
3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Climatic Zones
Zone 1 Zone 7 Zone 8 Zone 9 Zone 14
Warm Climate, Hot Climate,
Cold Climate, Warm Climate, Warm Climate,
Plants Cold-Air Basins In Within Thermal
High Elevation, Hot Summer, Low Elevation,
(shrubs) Winter, Belt,
Snow All Year, Mild Winters, Hot and Dry
Low Elevations, Warmer and Higher
Frost All Year, Low Summers,
Hot, Dry Elevations than
High Mountain, Elevations, Mainly Inland
Summers, Zone 8,
Area Foothill Area Valley Areas
Cool Winter Foothill Areas
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
− X − − X
(Monterey Manzanita)
Arctostaphylos “Emerald
− X − − X
Carpet” (Manzanita)
Arctostaphylos “Uva
− X − − X
Ursi” (Bearberry)
Caenothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Point − X − − X
Ceanothus)
Nandina Domestica
− X X X X
(Heavenly Bamboo)
Agapanthus Orientalis
− X X X X
(Lily-of-the-Nile)
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus X X X X X
(Lavender Cotton)
Cistus Hybridus
− X X X −
(White Rockrose)
Cistus Purpureus
− X X X −
(Purple Rockrose)
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson” − − X X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Raphiolepis I.
“Enchantress” − − X X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Eriophyllum
Confertiflorum X X X X X
(Yellow Yarrow)
Juniperus Conferta
X X X X X
(Shore Juniper)
Rosemarinus Officinalus
− − X X X
(Creeping Rosemary)

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 7 of 12

Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for San Francisco, Peninsula, and DeAnza Divisions

Notes
1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.
2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.
3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Climatic Zones
Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Warm Climate,
Mild Climate,
Plants Low Elevation, Mild Climate, Coastal Climate,
Coastal Influence,
(shrubs) Hot and Dry Coastal Influence, Cool Winters and Hot
Within the Thermal
Summers, Cool-Air Basins in Summers,
Belt,
Mainly Inland Coast Mountain Coastal Plain and Bay
Coastal Mountain
Valley Areas Areas Shoreline
Areas

Senecio Cineraria
X X X X
(Dusty Miller)
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
X X X X
(Monterey Manzanita)
Caenothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Point X X X X
Ceanothus)
Cistus Hybridus
− − X X
(White Rockrose)
Cistus Purpureus
− − X X
(Purple Rockrose)
Santolina Chamaecyparissus
X X X X
(Lavender Cotton)
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
X X X X
Crimson” (Indian Hawthorn)
Raphiolepis I. “Enchantress”
X X X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Pinus Mugo Mughos
X X X X
(Dwarf Forms)
Eriophyllum Confertiflorum
X X X X
(Yellow Yarrow)
Juniperus Conferta
X X X X
(Shore Juniper)
Rosemarinus Officinalus
X X X X
(Creeping Rosemary)
Cotoneaster Horizontalis
X X X X
(Rock Cotoneaster)
Nandina Domestica
X X X X
(Heavenly Bamboo)
Agapanthus Orientalis
X X X X
(Lily-of-the-Nile)

063422 Page 8 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for San Jose, Central Coast, and Los Padres Divisions
Notes
1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.
2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.
3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Climatic Zones
Zone 7 Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Coastal Climate,
Plants Warm Climate, Mild Climate,
Warm Climate, Mild Climate, Cool Winters
(shrubs) Low Elevation, Coastal Influence
Hot Summer, Coastal Influence, and Hot
Hot and Dry Within the Thermal
Mild Winters, Cool-Air Basins in Summers,
Summers, Belt,
Low Elevations, Coastal Mountain Coastal Plain
Mainly Inland Coastal Mountain
Foothill Area Areas and Bay
Valley Areas Areas
Shoreline
Senecio Cineraria
X X X X X
(Dusty Miller)
Arctostaphylos “Uva
X X X X X
Ursi” (Bearberry)
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
X X X X X
(Monterey Manzanita)
Arctostaphylos “Emerald
X X X X X
Carpet” (Manzanita)
Cistus Hybridus
X − − X X
(White Rockrose)
Cistus Purpureus
X − − X X
(Purple Rockrose)
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus X X X X X
(Lavender Cotton)
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson” − − − X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Pinus Mugo Mughos
X X X X X
(Dwarf Forms)
Eriophyllum
Confertiflorum X X X X X
(Yellow Yarrow)
Juniperus Conferta
X X X X X
(Shore Juniper)
Rosemarinus Officinalus
X X X X X
(Creeping Rosemary)
Cotoneaster Horizontalis
X X X X X
(Rock Cotoneaster)
Nandina Domestica
X X X X X
(Heavenly Bamboo)
Agapanthus Orientalis
X X X X −
(Lily-of-the-Nile)

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 9 of 12

Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for North Valley, Sierra, and Sacramento Divisions

Notes
1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.
2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.
3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Climatic Zones
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 7 Zone 8 Zone 9 Zone 14
Cold Climate,
High Hot Climate
Warm Warm Climate,
Elevation, Cold Climate, Within the Warm Climate,
Plants Climate, Cold Air Basins
Snow All Snow and Thermal Belt, Low Elevation,
(shrubs) Hot Summer, in Winter,
Year, Frost 50% of Warmer and Hot and Dry
Mild Winters, Low Elevations,
Frost All the Year, Higher Summers,
Low Hot, Dry
Year, Mountain Elevations than Mainly Inland
Elevations, Summers,
High Areas Zone 8, Valley Areas
Foothill Area Cool Winter
Mountain Foothill Areas
Area
Senecio Cineraria
− − X − − X
(Dusty Miller)
Arctostaphylos
“Hookeri”
− − X − − X
(Monterey
Manzanita)
Arctostaphylos
“Emerald Carpet” − − X − − X
(Manzanita)
Euryoes
Pectinatus − − − − − X
(Desert Daisy)
Juniperus Conferta
X X X X X X
(Shore Juniper)
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus X X X X X X
(Lavender Cotton)
Cistus Hybridus
− − X − X X
(White Rockrose)
Cistus Purpureus
− − X − X X
(Purple Rockrose)
Eriophyllum
Confertiflorum X X X X X X
(Yellow Yarrow)
Agapanthus
Orientalia − − X X X X
(Lily-of-the-Nile)

063422 Page 10 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for Diablo, Mission, and East Bay Divisions

Notes
1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.
2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.
3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Climatic Zones
Zone 7 Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Warm Climate, Warm Climate, Mild Climate,
Plants Mild Climate, Coastal Climate,
Hot Summer, Low Elevation, Coastal Influence
(shrubs) Coastal Influence, Cool Winters and
Mild Winters, Hot and Dry Within the Thermal
Cool-Air Basins in Hot Summers,
Low Summers, Belt,
Coastal Mountain Coastal Plain and
Elevations, Mainly Inland Coastal Mountain
Areas Bay Shoreline
Foothill Area Valley Areas Areas
Senecio Cineraria
− X X X X
(Dusty Miller)
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
X X X X X
(Monterey Manzanita)
Euryops Pectinatus
− X X X X
(Desert Daisy)
Cistus Hybridus
X − − X X
(White Rockrose)
Cistus Purpureus
X − − X X
(Purple Rockrose)
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus X X X X X
(Lavender Cotton)
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson” − X X X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Raphiolepis I.
“Enchantress” − X X X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Pinus Mugo Mughos
X X X X X
(Dwarf Forms)
Ceanothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Point X X X X X
Ceanothus)
Juniperus Conferta
X X X X X
(Shore Juniper)
Cotoneaster Horizontalis
X X X X X
(Rock Cotoneaster)
Nandina Domestica
X X X X X
(Heavenly Bamboo)
Agapanthus Orientalis
X X X X X
(Lily-of-the-Nile)

Rev. #04: 08-15-17 063422 Page 11 of 12

Greenbook
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers

Plant Matrix for North Coast, and North Bay Divisions

Notes
1. All shrubs are evergreen plants not over 5 feet at maturity.
2. All shrubs should be planted at a minimum 5 gallon size.
3. Refer to the climate zone map in the Sunset New Western Garden Book for the climate zone in your area.

Climatic Zones
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 7 Zone 14 Zone 15 Zone 16 Zone 17
Warm
Cold Warm Mild Coastal
Climate, Mild
Climate, Climate, Climate, Climate,
Cold Low Climate,
High Elev. Hot Coastal Cool
Plants Climate, Elevation, Coastal
and Summers, Influence Winters
(shrubs) Snow and Hot and Influence,
Snow All Mild Within the and Hot
Frost 50% Dry Cool-air
Year, Frost Winters, Thermal Summers,
of the Year, Summers, Basins in
All Year, Low Belt, Coastal
Mountain Mainly Coast
High Elevations, Coastal Plain and
Areas Inland Mountain
Mountain Foothill Mountain Bay
Valley Areas
Areas Areas Areas Shoreline
Areas
Senecio Cineraria
− − X X X X X
(Dusty Miller)
Arctostaphylos “Hookeri”
− − X X X X X
(Monterey Manzanita)
Arctostaphylos “Emerald
− − X X X X X
Carpet” (Manzanita)
Ceanothus G.H. “Yankee
Point” (Yankee Pt. − − X X X X X
Ceanothus)
Euryops Pectinatus
− − − X X X X
(Desert Daisy)
Juniperus Conferta
X X X X X X X
(Shore Juniper)
Santolina
Chamaecyparissus X X X X X X X
(Lavender Cotton)
Cistus Hybridus
− − X − − X X
(White Rockrose)
Cistus Purpureus
− − X − − X X
(Purple Rockrose)
Mahona Aquifolium
“Compacta” X X X X X X X
(Oregon Grape)
Raphiolepis I. “Coates
Crimson” − − X X X X X
(Indian Hawthorn)
Pinus Mugo Mughos
X X X X X X X
(Dwarf Forms)

Revision Notes
Revision 04 has the following changes:
1. Revised Note 6 and Note 8 on Page 1.

063422 Page 12 of 12 Rev. #04: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EDM

Prepared by: ABB1

METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLING RESIDENTIAL

UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES 0 − 600 V 063927
TO CUSTOMER-OWNED FACILITIES
Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #21: This document replaces PG&E Document 063927, Rev. #20. For a description of the changes, see Page 4.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Electric Design Manual
Purpose and Scope
This document shows the methods and requirements for installing PG&E-owned, underground service cables in
customer-owned, residential, terminating facilities. See Document 058817 for terminating underground services.
General Information
1. Underground electric service laterals will normally be installed in a joint trench with natural gas and
communication service facilities.
2. To determine the most satisfactory meter location, PG&E should be contacted for requirements while the
building is in the planning stage.
3. When it is necessary to install a service 75 feet or longer, the applicant must contact PG&E before ordering
the service riser, conduit, or termination enclosure. If the service riser and/or conduit specified in Table 2 on
Page 3 of this document will not accept the cable required to meet flicker and/or voltage drop requirements, a
larger conduit must be installed. This could require the installation of a larger termination enclosure.
4. The installation of a splice box may be required whenever cable pulling tensions may be exceeded or a
change in cable size or conduit is required. The applicant must contact the local PG&E office to determine the
requirements.
Residential Services Information
5. A ‘‘residential service’’ is a service supplying a single- or multi-metered residential building. This document
addresses services through 800 amp, single-phase. For three-phase residential services or services larger than
800 amps, see Document 063928.
A. Standard voltage for single metered residential building is 120/240 V.
B. All single-phase, 120/208 V services require full-sized neutral.
6. Residential includes mobile homes installed on California state-approved foundation systems in locations other
than mobile home parks.
7. Conduit is required for residential services, including multi-metered residential buildings.
8. The applicant shall provide the trench, conduit, and backfill in accordance with Electric Rule 16 and PG&E
requirements. PG&E will furnish and install the service cables and make the connection at the point of service
delivery in the applicant’s service termination enclosure.
Qualification of material for use as backfill is the responsibility of the job foreman or, in the case of contract work, the
inspector or their designee. A visual inspection of the material is sufficient for evaluation of the material. The source of
the backfill, native or import, is immaterial to the suitability of the backfill for use in the trench. In new construction
areas, the developer may have a soils report available, which will assist in determining if import backfill is necessary.
9. The conduit type for PG&E’s service conductors, on or under the foundation up to 10’ past the outside wall of
the applicant’s building, shall be UL PVC Schedule 40 or 80. Schedule 40 shall not be used in locations where
it would be subject to physical damage. To avoid cable insulation damage, the ends of conduits shall be
provided with a suitable fitting, such as a bushing, nipple, hub, cable protector, or end bell.
Note: Conduits shall not pass under or through one building to supply adjacent buildings.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 063927 Page 1 of 4

UG-1: Services Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential
Greenbook Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V
EDM to Customer-Owned Facilities
10. When an applicant’s main service panel is installed in an electric meter and service termination room, the room
must be built with one wall and a door that leads to the outside of the applicant’s building. See (Greenbook)
section 5.3.4. Electric Meter Rooms.
11. Potential water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities.
A. Water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities may occur if the source side of the
service facilities (e.g., secondary splice box) is at an elevation greater than the meter termination facilities.
B. CPUC General Order 128, Rule 31.6 requires “Lateral ducts for services to buildings, through which water
may enter buildings, shall be plugged or sealed.”
C. When the intrusion of water can reasonably be expected, as identified above, the following actions are required:
(1) PG&E is responsible for sealing the conduit at the meter termination facilities as shown in Document 062288.
If the meter termination facilities are significantly lower than the source side facilities, then the conduit should
be sealed at both ends. The Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit sealing system can be ordered
for this purpose. Document 062288.
(2) The applicant is responsible for providing a means to prevent the accumulation of excess water or water
pressure in the service conduit system. This is accomplished by installing a splice box at the base of the
riser to the meter panel, or at a maximum of 6 feet away from the meter panel along the service run.
12. Prior to cable installation, all conduits shall be proven free and clear by means of a mandrel or other methods
acceptable to PG&E. A polyester flat pulling tape, white with sequential footage markings every foot,
2,500 minimum tensile strength, and approved by PG&E (Code 560154), shall be installed in all conduits and
attached to an end cap (see Document 063928).
Upgraded Panel
13. For upgraded panels where the new specified size of service conductor will fit in the existing conduit, it is not
necessary to upgrade the conduit to the currently specified size for the new panel if both of the following are met:
A. The maximum fill ratio is not exceeded.
B. The calculated cable pulling tensions along the conduit route is within limits of the new cable.
14. If the new panel is able to accommodate it, the existing service conductor may be reused provided it meets the load,
voltage drop, and flicker requirements of the new load. If the service conductor size must be upgraded, the existing
conduit must be proofed with a mandrel.
15. Notes 13 and 14 do not apply to the following conditions:
A. Direct buried or Cable-In-Conduit (CIC) service cables. Direct buried and CIC service cables need to be
replaced with approved service cable and installed in approved service conduit.
B. Upgraded electric meter panels that are within 36 inches of the gas service riser. The clearance requirements
in Greenbook Section 5.4.3., “Meter Set Clearance Requirements” must be met for upgraded and relocated
meter panels.
Cover
16. A minimum of 24 inches of cover for secondary (0 - 750 V) electric service, or 36 inches minimum cover for
primary (over 750 V) is required. Cover is the distance from the outer surface of an underground facility to the
top of the final grade. The actual trench depth will be greater (approximately 30 inches or 42 inches minimum
respectively) to accommodate the underground facility, bedding, enclosures, riser sweeps, and joint trench
installations with other utilities.
Temporary Service
17. The policy of using permanent service panels to supply temporary power is expanding. Schedule 40 or 80
PVC riser conduit may be damaged by staples and nails, and this has resulted in damage to service cables.
Therefore, for those locations where cable will be installed or that will be energized prior to completion of the
wall, the conduit shall be Schedule 40, rigid steel conduit, to protect the service cables from damage caused
by siding nails, etc. Refer to Greenbook Section 5.9.1., “Temporary Service Using Permanent Service Panels”.
References Location Document
Terminating Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Underground Electric Services
0−600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

063927 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential UG-1: Services
Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V Greenbook
EDM
to Customer-Owned Facilities

Table 1 Service Conduit Types Approved for Underground Application

Specification 1
Type
(must be marked on conduit)
PVC, DB 120 2 ASTM F512, DB 120, Cell Class 12164B or 12264B
Co-extruded Cellular Core PVC, DB 120 ASTM F512, DB 120, Cell Class 12254B
Hot-Dip, Galvanized, Rigid Steel ANSI Spec. C80.1
PVC, Co-extruded Cellular Core PVC, Schedule 40 or 80 UL 651
1 The entire “conduit system” shall meet the specifications listed above. The conduit system includes conduits, conduit
bends, conduit fittings or couplings and all related components (e.g., end bells and cable protectors) that are needed
to install PG&E cables and conductors.
2 This type of conduit is not approved for 2” conduit.

Table 2 Cable and Conduit Requirements for Residential Services

Aluminum Cable Required
Service Equipment Conduit Size Minimum Minimum to Serve Maximum Load
Rating (amps) 1 and Number 2 Vertical Horizontal AWG or kcmil
Radius Radius
(Per Phase) Neutral
100−125 1−2” 24” 36” 1−1/0 1−#2
126−225 1−3” 24” 36” 1−4/0 1−1/0
320 3 1−3” 24” 36” 1−350 1−4/0
400 4 1−4” 36” 36” 1−750 1−4/0
600 4 2−3” 24” 36” 2−350 2−4/0
800 4 2−4” 36” 36” 2−750 2−4/0
1 Service rating shall be the termination section, pullcan, service section, or main service switch continuous current
rating, whichever is greater.
2 See Note 3 on Page 1 for size and distance limitations, Note 9 on Page 1 for conduit type allowed on or within
buildings, and Table 1 above for conduit type allowed underground.
3 Require manual bypass facilities.
4 Require transformer rated meter.
5 Continuous current rating.

Rev. #21: 08-15-17 063927 Page 3 of 4

UG-1: Services Methods and Requirements for Installing Residential
Greenbook Underground Electric Services 0 − 600 V
EDM to Customer-Owned Facilities
Service Installation

Note
1. A 90° manufactured sweep is required to be installed to meet trench grade. The conduit end must extend at least
12 inches beyond the foundation. Install the sweep in the direction of the service trench. If a deeper trench is
required, the sweep must extend to the same depth as the conduit in the trench. A minimum of 24 inches of cover
must be maintained.

To Customer’s
Indoor Termination 48” Min. 48” Min.
66” Preferred Outer 66” Preferred
Enclosure
75” Max. Building Wall 75” Max.
Outer
Building Wall Conduit Support
Final Grade Building Final Grade
Building Foundation
Foundation
24” Min.
24” Min.

Alternate for
Apartment
Installations Only
Figure 1 Figure 2
Recessed-Mounted Service Termination Enclosure Surface-Mounted Service Termination Enclosure

Revision Notes
Revision 21 has the following changes:
1. Clarified Note 5B on Page 1.
2. Revised Note 9 on Page 1
3. Added Note 10 on Page 1. Re-numbered remaining notes.
4. Revised first entry for service equipment rating in Table 2 on Page 3.

063927 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #21: 08-15-17

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EDM

Prepared by: ABB1

METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLING COMMERCIAL

UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES 063928
0 − 600 VOLTS TO CUSTOMER-OWNED FACILITIES

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #23: This document replaces PG&E Document 063928, Rev. #22. For a description of the changes, see Page 5.

This document is also included in the following manuals:

• Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook)
• Electric Design Manual
Purpose and Scope
This document shows the methods and requirements for installing PG&E-owned underground conductors in
commercial buildings and three-phase multi-residential buildings.
General Information
1. This document is also included in the Electric and Gas Service Requirements (Greenbook) and in
Electric Design Manual. See Document 058817 for terminating service conductors.
2. Single-phase main service switches shall not exceed 225 amps for 120/208 V services or 600 amps for
120/240 V services. All single-phase, 120/208 V services require full-sized neutrals.
Customer Requirements
3. The applicant shall provide trench and backfill as specified by PG&E, service conduit in accordance with
Table 1, Table 2, and Table 4 on Pages 3 and 4 and a service termination enclosure.
4. Conduit type for PG&E service conductors on or under the foundation up to 10’ past the outside wall of the
applicant’s building shall be as indicated below:
A. Galvanized rigid steel or PVC coated rigid steel.
B. UL approved Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. Schedule 40 PVC shall not be used if the conduit is located so that it is
subject to physical damage. To avoid cable insulation damage, the end of the conduit shall be provided with a
suitable termination fitting such as a bushing, nipple, end bell, or cable protector, etc
Note: Conduits shall not pass under or through one building to supply adjacent buildings.
5. When an applicant’s main service panel is installed in an electric meter and service termination room, the room
must be built with one wall and a door that leads to the outside of the applicant’s building. See (Greenbook)
section 5.3.4. Electric Meter Rooms.
6. State or local building codes require special conduit seals in certain locations, such as gasoline and hydrogen
filling stations. If the underground service conduit runs within a 20’ horizontal radius of a gas pump (from any
edge of the dispenser enclosure), or within a 10’ horizontal radius of an underground gas tank, the applicant
shall be responsible for the requirements listed on A−C below. Similarly, if the underground service conduit
runs within a 5’ horizontal radius of a hydrogen cooling block, dispenser, or storage, or within 15’ horizontal
radius of a hydrogen compressor, the applicant shall be responsible for the requirements listed on A−C below:
A. The type of conduit required from the meter termination point to the connection point with PG&E.
B. The installation and maintenance of special fittings (explosion−proof) and sealing compounds at both ends.
C. The type of cable required from the meter termination point to the connection point with PG&E.
7. Prior to cable installation, prove all conduits free and clear by means of a mandrel PG&E approved. A
PG&E-approved polyester, flat pulling tape, white with sequential footage markings every foot, and 2,500-pound
minimum tensile strength (Code 560154), shall be installed in all conduits and attached to an end cap.

Rev. #23: 08-15-17 063928 Page 1 of 5

UG-1: Services Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial
Greenbook
EDM
Underground Electric Services
0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities
8. The installation of a splice box may be required whenever cable pulling tensions may be exceeded, or a
change in cable or conduit size is required. The applicant must contact the local PG&E office to determine
these requirements.
9. Test bypass facilities are required for both single phase and three phase installations regardless of the panel
ampacity.
PG&E Requirements
10. If PG&E service conductors are to be run in a multiple conduit system, all phases and the neutral shall be
installed in each conduit that is used.
11. PG&E will furnish and install the underground service conductors and make connections in the applicant’s
service termination enclosure.
12. Potential water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities
A. Water intrusion into service conduits and meter termination facilities may occur if the source side of the
service facilities (e.g., secondary splice box) is at an elevation greater than the meter termination facilities.
B. CPUC General Order 128, Rule 31.6 requires “Lateral ducts for services to buildings, through which water
may enter buildings, shall be plugged or sealed.”
C. When the intrusion of water can reasonably be expected, the following actions are required:
(1) PG&E is responsible for sealing the conduit at the meter termination facilities as shown in
Document 062288. If the meter termination facilities are significantly lower than the source side facilities,
then the conduit should be sealed at both ends. The Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit
sealing system can be ordered for this purpose. See Document 062288.
(2) The applicant is responsible for providing a means to prevent the accumulation of excess water or water
pressure in the service conduit system. This is accomplished by installing a splice box at the base of the
riser to the meter panel, or at a maximum of 6 feet away to the meter panel along the service run.
13. Minimum service requirements
A. Install the number and size of conduits as shown in Table 2 and Table 3 on Pages 3 and 4, based on the
main service panel rating. No more than seven 5-inch service conduits will be supplied from any one
transformer.
B. Install the number and size of conductors, as shown in Table 2 on Page 3, to meet the individual initial demand
load. Take load characteristics and growth into consideration.
C. It is permissible to install a smaller transformer and fewer conductors to serve a long term initial load with the
intent of installing a larger transformer and additional conductors should future load increase occur.
D. Always size the transformer pad to accommodate the largest transformer size necessary to serve the
combined ampacity of all services. Never exceed more than seven sets of conductors per transformer.
E. Vacant ducts, if any, will be used to serve future load increases.
14. Single main service panels fed by single transformer
Example 1
480 V, 4-wire, 1,600-amp rated main switch, initial demand load is 300 kVA. Install five 5-inch ducts, service
size is 1,000 kcmil for phase and 350 kcmil for neutral. Only two sets of service conductors are required to
meet initial loading. The remaining three ducts should be capped for future use.
15. Multiple main service panels fed by single transformer
Example 2
1,000-amp, 600-amp, and 400-amp mains to be served. The number of sets of conduits required are three,
two, and one, respectively. A total of six conduits are needed to serve the three main switches. The three
services can be served from one transformer.
16. Multiple main service panels fed by multiple transformers
Example 3
2,000-amp and 1,000-amp mains to be served. The number of sets of conduits required are seven and three
respectively. A total of ten conduits are needed to serve the two main switches. The two services cannot be
served from one transformer; they must be served from individual transformers.
Upgraded Panel
17. For upgraded panels where the new specified size of service conductor will fit in the existing conduit, it is not
necessary to upgrade the conduit to the currently specified size for the new panel if both of the following are met:

063928 Page 2 of 5 Rev. #23: 08-15-17

 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial UG-1: Services
Underground Electric Services Greenbook
0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities EDM

A. The maximum fill ratio is not exceeded.

B. The calculated cable pulling tensions along the conduit route is within limits of the new cable.
18. If the new panel is able to accommodate it, the existing service conductor may be reused provided it meets the
load, voltage drop, and flicker requirements of the new load. If the service conductor size must be upgraded, the
existing conduit must be proofed with a mandrel.
19. Notes 17 and 18 on Page 2 do not apply to the following to the following conditions:
A. Direct buried or Cable-In-Conduit (CIC) service cables. Direct buried and CIC service cables need to be
replaced
B. Upgraded electric meter panels that are within 36 inches of the gas service riser. The clearance requirements
in Greenbook Section 5.4.3., “Meter Set Clearance Requirements,” must be met for upgraded and relocated
meter panels.
Temporary Service
20. The policy of using permanent service panels to supply temporary power is expanding. Schedule 40 or 80
PVC riser conduit may be damaged by staples and nails, and this has resulted in damage to service cables.
Therefore, for those locations where cable will be installed or that will be energized prior to completion of the
wall, the conduit shall be Schedule 40, rigid steel conduit, to protect the service cables from damage caused
by siding nails, etc. Refer to Greenbook Section 5.9.1., “Temporary Service Using Permanent Service
Panels”.

References Location Document

Terminating Underground Electric Services
0-600 Volts in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288

Table 1 Service Conduit Types Approved for Underground Applications With Prior PG&E Approval
Specification 1
Type
(must be marked on conduit)
PVC, DB 120 2 ASTM F512, DB 120, Cell Class 12164B or 12264B
Co-extruded Cellular Core PVC, DB 120 ASTM F512, DB 120, Cell Class 12254B
Hot-Dip, Galvanized, Rigid Steel ANSI C80.1
PVC, Co-extruded Cellular Core PVC Schedule 40 or 80 UL 651
1 The entire “conduit system” shall meet the specifications listed above. The conduit system includes conduits,
conduit bends, conduit fittings or couplings and all related components (e.g., end bells and cable protectors) that
are needed to install PG&E cables and conductors.
2 This type of conduit is not approved for 2” conduit.

Table 2 Cable and Conduit Requirements for Single-Phase Commercial Services

Cables Required to Serve Maximum Load
Main Service Panel Conduit Size
1 Aluminum Copper
Rating (amps) and Number
Per Phase Neutral Per Phase Neutral
100 1−3” 1−1/0 1−#2 NA NA
200 1−3” 1−4/0 1−1/0 NA NA
400 2 1−4” 1−750 1−4/0 NA NA
600 2 2−4” 2−750 2−4/0 NA NA
1 Service rating shall be the termination section, pullcan, service section, or main service switch continuous current
rating, whichever is greater. See Note 2 on Page 1 for 100-600 amp 1∅ services.
2 Require transformer rated meter.

Rev. #23: 08-15-17 063928 Page 3 of 5

UG-1: Services Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial
Greenbook
EDM
Underground Electric Services
0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities

Table 3 Cable and Conduit Requirements for Three-Phase Commercial Services 1

Cables Required to Serve Maximum Load

Main Service Panel Conduit Size
Aluminum Copper
Rating (amps) 2 and Number
Per Phase Neutral Per Phase Neutral
100 1−3” 1−1/0 #2 NA NA
200 1−3” 1−4/0 1−1/0 NA NA
400 1−5” 1−750 1−4/0 NA NA
600 2−5” 2−750 2−4/0 NA NA
800 2−5” 2−750 2−4/0 NA NA
1,000 3−5” 3−1,000 3−350 NA NA
1,200 3 4−5” 4−1,000 4−350 NA NA
1,600 3 5−5” 5−1,000 5−350 NA NA
2,000 3 7−5” 7−1,000 7−350 NA NA
2,500 3, 4 7−5” NA NA 7−1,000 7−250
3,000 Bus Duct NA NA NA NA
3,500 5 Bus Duct NA NA NA NA
4,000 5 Bus Duct NA NA NA NA
1 3,000−, 3,500−, and 4,000−amp service rated panels require using a bus duct.
2 Service rating shall be the termination section, pullcan, service section, or main service switch continuous current
rating, whichever is greater.
3 Requires termination provisions (i.e., longer bolts) that allow connectors to be stacked when needed.
4 Limited to 50 feet between the transformer secondary spades and the customer’s gear connection point. For
greater distances, a bus duct is to be used.
5 Panels rated over 3000 amps cannot be served at 120/208 V.

Table 4 Minimum Bend Radius for New Construction

Conduit Diameter Vertical Radius Horizontal Radius
2” 24” 36”
3” 24” 36”
4” 36” 36”
5” 36” 60”

063928 Page 4 of 5 Rev. #23: 08-15-17

 Methods and Requirements for Installing Commercial UG-1: Services
Underground Electric Services Greenbook
0 − 600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities EDM

Service Installation

Outer Building Wall

To Outer Building Wall
Customer’s To Customer’s See Note 6
Indoor Indoor on Page 1
Termination Termination
Enclosure Enclosure
48” Min.
See Note 6 on Page 1 66” Preferred
75” Max.
Conduit Conduit
Support 6” Min. Support
Final Grade Final Grade

24” Min. 24” Min.

Alternate Alternate
Building Building
Foundation Foundation

Figure 1 Figure 2
Surface-Mounted Service Termination Enclosure Surface-Mounted Combination Meter Socket Panel

Revision Notes
Revision 23 has the following changes:
1. Updated Purpose and Scope section on Page 1. Clarified Note 2 on Page 1.
2. Revised Note 4 on Page 1.
3. Revised column 1 on Table 2 on Page 3.
4. Added Table footnote 5 to Table 3 on Page 4.

Rev. #23: 08-15-17 063928 Page 5 of 5

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

REQUIREMENTS FOR BUS DUCT ENTRANCE TERMINATION UNIT 063929

FOR USE WITH PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued By: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 07-01-14

Rev. #10: This document replaces PG&E Document 063929, Rev. #09. For a description of the changes, see Page 10.
This document is also included in the following manual:
• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
Purpose and Scope
This document provides the tools, ordering instructions, and the necessary manufacturing specifications and details for
the fabrication and assembly of bus duct entrance terminations.
The function of the entrance box is to:
• Provide a means for connecting the customer’s bus duct to a pad-mounted transformer.
• Permit a future, larger transformer to be installed without disturbing the existing bus duct installation.
• Reduce the shutdown time for transformer replacement. The entrance box is furnished with two removable sections
to permit access to the bus duct extension connections. PG&E will supply and install the entrance box.

General Information
1. The “Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit” is used to provide transition from a customer-provided service entrance
bus duct to the low-voltage service compartment of a PG&E, pad-mounted transformer, for services of 3,000 to
4,000 amps.
2. Construction
A. The unit’s construction design shown in this document shall comply with the Western Underground
Committee’s Guide 2.13, latest revision, for tamper-resistant, pad-mounted, equipment enclosures.
B. Each top and side cover shall latch and securely self-lock at a minimum of three points, when the unit is
assembled. All sharp external corners, edges, and joints shall be smoothed to prevent injury or damage to
clothing.
C. The edges, seams, and joints shall be made and formed to provide a close-fitting mating surface. Exposed
welding on the outside surface of the unit(s) shall be a continuous bead, machined and ground flush.
D. All metal work shall be cleaned free of dirt, oils, and rust, and immediately painted, both inside and outside,
with one coat of suitable, rust-inhibiting primer, approximately 1.5 mils thick when dry.
E. The interior and exterior of the housing shall be finished with one or more coats of Green Munsel, No. 5.5gy,
2.76/2.1 (PG&E No. 610 Green) paint. The total dry film thickness shall not be less than 2 mils (the total paint
thickness, including primer, not less than 3.5 mils when dry).
F. Approximately a half pint of ‘‘touch-up’’ paint (preferably in an aerosol spray can) shall be included and
shipped with each unit (attached inside the unit to the cable support block).
3. Methods of Serving Large Commercial Customers
A. Main Service Rating 201 Through 2,500 Amps: The approved method is by underground cable in
customer-installed conduit (refer to Document 063928 for details).
B. Main Service Rating 3,000 Through 4,000 Amps: The approved method is a PG&E-owned and installed bus
duct entrance box attaching to customer-owned and installed bus duct that is a minimum of 30” long.
4. Note: Bus ducts shall only be connected to pad-mounted transformers with a minimum 30-inch deep cabinet and a
secondary terminal height of 46 inches from the bottom of the cabinet (Style IIE-LB and IIF, 300 kVA and larger).

Rev. #10: 07-01-14 063929 Page 1 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers
5. It is recommended to install pad-mounted transformer, bus duct entrance termination box, and customer bus duct
entrance box on the same monolithic pad to avoid soil settlement issues. See Document 043818 or
Document 045292 for transformer pad dimensions.
6. Service Connection
The customer shall provide a minimum of 30 inches of bus duct, including flanged ends, elbows, and straight sections
from the bus duct entrance terminating end at the side of the pad-mounted transformer (top entry is not permitted).
The customer shall also supply tie straps for collecting like phases, all necessary bus extensions, and bracing for bus
extensions, as required. The bus duct shall enter the transformer entrance box in a ‘‘horizontal’’ configuration. PG&E
will make the connections from the bus extensions to the transformer secondary terminals, using insulated, flexible,
copper conductor provided by PG&E.
7. To provide a water tight transition between the components, the bus duct (flanged ends provided by the
customer) must match the dimensions of the transition box assembly and flange plate (Detail A on Page 8).
8. Transformer Bus Duct Cover Plate
A cover used to close off the bus duct entrance hole left in a transformer when it is removed or replaced. This plate
bolts into the same bolt holes used for the bus duct entrance termination box and can be installed locally so that the
transformer can be reused without sending it to Emeryville to have the opening covered (Code 180203).

References Location Document

Connectors for Insulated Cables Underground
Distribution Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Connectors/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 015251
Concrete Pads for Radial-Style, Three-Phase
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043818
Installation of Loop-Style, Three-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045291
Concrete Pad for Three-Phase, Loop-Style,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 045292
Terminating Underground Electric Services 0−600 Volts
in Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 058817
Methods and Requirements for Installing
Commercial Undergroung Electric Services
0-600 Volts to Customer-Owned Facilities . . . . . . . . UG−1: Sevices/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 063928

Installation
Notes
1. Method of installation (see Figure 1 on Page 4) - The location of the edge of the pad must first be established by
consultation between PG&E and the building architect or contractor. The bus duct termination end flange and
flange plate shall be located such as to permit its connection to the bus duct entrance termination box at a point
23 inches to 24 inches from the edge of the pad. The vertical centerline of the bus duct entrance termination box
shall be located 23 inches from the front edge of the transformer pad (see Figure 1, Section A-A and Figure 2,
Section B-B on Page 4). Additionally, there must be a minimum of 54 inches straight length between the edge of
the pad and any obstruction (joint, bend, support, apparatus, wall or building, etc) in the bus duct to accommodate
the 48” long bus duct entrance termination box provided by PG&E.
These dimensions will accommodate all style IIB, IIC, IIE, IIF, IIG, and IIH transformers used in bus applications.
2. Bus duct flange plate (see Detail A on Page 8) - A removable bus duct end flange plate shall be provided by the
customer at the transformer end of the bus duct. This plate shall not be drilled. PG&E will locate and drill 1/2-inch
diameter holes in the flange plate to match the square holes in the adjustable end flange of the entrance box.
3. Transformer cabinet bus duct cutout - The horizontal centerline of the bus duct termination box in the side of
the transformer shall be approximately 24 inches above the top of the pad. The cutout dimensions and drilling
for bolt holes must match the dimensions and drilling of the entrance box, as determined in the field. A
template is provided in the kit to help in positioning the flanged end and locating the mounting holes.
4. Bus duct connections in transformer (see Figure 3 on Page 5)
A. For two and three bars per phase, the customer shall provide tie straps bolted across like phases where they
enter the transformer entrance box.

063929 Page 2 of 10 Rev. #10: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Installation (continued)
B. PG&E will provide the flexible copper conductor and spade connectors necessary to make the connection
between the secondary spades of the transformer and the customer’s bus duct.
C. The customer shall furnish the tie bars (Section F-F on Page 8) and spacers (Detail D on Page 8) with the
bus duct. The bus duct must be in a horizontal configuration when entering the entrance box.
D. PG&E will provide the necessary spade supports (see Document 045291) for the protection of the transformer
(supports are not part of a kit).
5. Feeder bus duct and entrance box supports - Feeder bus duct supports (where necessary) are required to be
installed by the customer. The entrance box shall not be used as a bus duct support. PG&E will provide and install
a support (supports are not part of a kit) for the bus duct entrance termination box, as shown in Figure 1 and
Figure 2 on Page 4, and Detail F on Page 9.

Rev. #10: 07-01-14 063929 Page 3 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Installation (continued)
Bus Duct Termination Bus Duct Entrance
Transformer Transformer
End Flange Termination Box
Provided A
by PG&E and Flange Plate Provided by PG&E
HV Feeder Bus Duct
Customer Supplied Bus Duct
Compartment 48” C Entrance
Door L
Termination
Obstruction Box
Box CL CL Bus
LV Box C
L Duct
Compartment 24” 22-3/8”
Door See
Detail F
on Page 9 23”
Pad Customer
A 23”-24” PG&E Supplied Section A-A
See Page 6 and 7 for Supplied
Termination Dimensions 54” Min.
Unobstructed Straight Length of
Feeder Bus Duct See Note 1 on Page 2

Figure 1
Typical Bus Duct Assembly for Largest Pad-Mounted Transformer

Transformer Bus Duct Entrance

Provided Bus Duct Termination Termination Box
by PG&E End Flange Provided by PG&E
and Flange Plate
HV
Compartment B
Transformer
Door Feeder Bus Duct
Customer Supplied
48” C
L
Obstruction Bus Duct
Entrance
Termination
LV Box C
L Box
Compartment Bus
Door Box C
L CL Duct
See
Detail F 24” 22-3/8”
Pad on Page 9
23”−24”
B
23”
See Page 6 and 7 for Customer
Termination Dimensions PG&E Supplied
Supplied Section B-B
54” Min.
Unobstructed Straight Length of
Feeder Bus Duct See Note 1 on Page 2
Figure 2
Typical Bus Assembly for Smallest Pad-Mounted Transformer
Note: Dimensions in all Figures are not to scale.

063929 Page 4 of 10 Rev. #10: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box Assembly
Bus Duct Entrance
Termination Box Top Locking
Section Provision
Upper Section

Transformer
End Flange

Carriage Bolt
W/Nut and Washer
Cable
Spacer Block Cotter Pins

Cable Spacer
Block Bracket

Bus Duct Entrance

Terminating End
Flange
Air Vent

Bus Duct Entrance 23-3/4”

Termination Box
Bottom Section 2” Min.
Locking Provision
Lower Section

Figure 3 25-3/4”25-3/4”
Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box
(Code 019645)

Table 1 List of Material for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box Kit
Quantity Description
1 Stainless Steel Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box
1 Spade Support Kit (Document 045291)
4 Copper Bus Bar Extensions (see Detail E on Page 9)
24 1” x 3/8” Carriage Bolts With Nuts and Washers
2 3/8” x 3-1/2” Bolt, With Nut and 3/16” Diameter Hole for Safety Lock
2 Safety Locks, Utilco Catalog Number PEL-1, Code 170115
10-Foot Length Weather Stripping
1 Template

Table 2 Recommended Tools for Assembly and Installation of Bus Duct Entrance Termination Box
Description Code
Sawzall, Heavy Duty, Milwaukee #6511-W/Case 210075
Blades, Sawzall, Milwaukee #48-00-1171 − Package of 10 207674
Drill, Skil #6550, 1/2” Variable Speed Reversible 210026
Drill Bit Set, 1/16” to 1/2”, W/Case 203026
Punch, Center, 3/8” 201305

Rev. #10: 07-01-14 063929 Page 5 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Fully Extended

See Detail E on Page 9 Customer Feeder

X0 X1 X2 X3 Termination Box Bus Duct

No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
30”
No. 4
Min.
No. 5
No. 6
C C
No. 7

30” Min. 48”

Secondary Compartment
Plan View

Figure 4
Typical Outdoor Bus Termination
Fully Extended

See Document 045291

Bus Bar Support

Brackets
1,000 kcmil, 600-V Copper Conductor
Extra Flexible, 127 D Stranding
Code 294490
Cable Spacer
Bus Duct
Phase X3 Termination
End Flange and
Phase X2 Flange Plate

Phase X1
Phase X0

22-3/8”
30” Min.
Pad
23”-24”
See Note 1 on
Page 2
Section C-C
Fully Extended

063929 Page 6 of 10 Rev. #10: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Fully Compressed

See Detail E on Page 9 Customer Feeder

X0 X1 X2 X3 Termination Box Bus Duct

No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
30”
No. 4
Min.
No. 5
No. 6
C C
No. 7

30” Min. 48”

Secondary Compartment
Plan View
Figure 5
Typical Outdoor Bus Termination
Fully Compressed

See Document 045291

Bus Bar Support Brackets

1,000 kcmil, 600-V Copper Conductor

Extra Flexible, 127 D Stranding
Code 294490

48”
Cable Spacer Bus Duct
Termination
End Flange
Phase X3 and Range Plate
Phase X2
Phase X1
Phase X0

22-3/8”
30” Min.
Pad

23” − 24”
See Note 1
on Page 2
Section D-D
Fully Compressed

Rev. #10: 07-01-14 063929 Page 7 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers

Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Details

Bus Duct Termination 3/8” - 16 x 5/8” Long Nelson Stud 24-3/4”

End Flange Plate Complete With 1 Flat, 1 Spring 11-3/8” 11-3/8”
(see Detail A) Washer, and Hexagonal Nut 1”
D
1”
Only Cables and Connectors C
Are Furnished by PG&E
D W = 22” Max.
Bus 23-1/4”
CL Duct

10” 1”
C

#12 AWG 1”
Cold-Rolled Steel
The Bottom Bus Is Detail A
Always to Be End Flange Plate
Designated the (customer supplied)
Neutral Bus Phase Bus,
(see Detail B) Obstruction
(see Detail C)
3/4” (building, apparatus
Figure 6
Termination Detail With 2” wall, support, or bend)
Bus Duct End and Tie Bars 2”
Top Bus Duct
Insulation on Bus Bar Termination End
Phase Flange Plate
1 Tie Bars, Two Per Phase 5”
2-1/2” Phase
CL
2-1/2”
Spacer Thickness Phase
5” Straight Length of
to Match the Thickness Bottom
2 3 4 5 Feeder Bus Duct
of Manufacturer’s Bus Bar Neutral
Detail B
Typical Phase Bus Termination Assembly 8”
Section E-E
Bus Bar
1 Tie Bar (Section F-F) (customer supplied)
See Page 6
20” Min. − 22” Max.
1” Min. 1” Min.
2 3 4 5 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3”
Insulation on Bus Bar 1-3/4”
Detail C
Typical Neutral Bus Termination Assembly 6”
5/8”
11”
Drill 14 ea. 8”
1” Min. 1” Min.
9/16” Dia.
5/8” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3” Holes 32”

3” CL of Bus
Bar
Drill 14 ea. 22” Max. Wall
1-3/4”
20” Min. − 22” Max.
9/16” Dia.
Detail D Holes Section F-F
Spacer 3” x 20” Long Copper Tie Bar Connection 1/4” x 6” x 20” Long Copper
(thickness to suit) (two per phase and one per neutral required)
(customer supplied) (customer supplied)

063929 Page 8 of 10 Rev. #10: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Bus Duct Termination Assembly − Details (continued)
C
L Angle 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 3/16”
of Transformer’s Galvanized
Low-Voltage
1-1/8” Compartment As Reqd. As Reqd.
3/4”
1-3/4” 3/4” Weld All Height
1-3/4” Around as Reqd.
1-3/4” 2” Steel
Height Pipe,
C
L as Reqd.
8” Schedule 40,
Galv.
3” 3” 3” 3” 3” 3”
1” 6”
5/8” 1-1/2” Steel Flange
20-1/2” Existing for 2” Pipe
1-3/4” Concrete Footing
3” Min. Air Clearance From End Concrete Pad (weld-on type)
12” Dia. x 12” H Code 025391
of Bus to Door or Metal For Unpaved Areas For Paved Areas
Detail E Detail F
Copper Bus Bar Extension Termination Unit Supports
(see Table 1 on Page 5) (PG&E supplies one under the bus duct
termination box. Customer supplies remainder as required.)

Table 3 Copper Conductor Requirements 1

Number of Conductors Number of Approximate Footage

Main Switch Rating
Per Phase Neutral Cables of Conductor
2,500 4 2 140
3,000 5 3 180
3,500 6 3 210
4,000 7 4 250
1 Use only 1,000 kcmil copper cable (Code 294490).

Table 4 List of Materials for Bus Termination Assemblies (see Detail B and Detail C on Page 8)
Item Description Code Document
1 Terminal Connector, Compression-Type, Cable-to-Flat, for 1,000 kcmil Cable 303461 015251
2 Screw, Cap (bolt), Hex. Head, 1/2” x 2-1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent 193177 −
3 Nut, Bolt, Hex., 1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent 195013 −
4 Washer, Round, 1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent 195252 −
5 Washer, Lock, 1/2”, Everdur or Equivalent 195193 −

Rev. #10: 07-01-14 063929 Page 9 of 10

UG-1: Services
Greenbook
Requirements for Bus Duct Entrance Termination Unit
for Use With Pad-Mounted Transformers
Revision Notes
Revision 10 has the following changes:
1. Revised General Information Note 3B on Page 1.
2. Added Note 5 under General Information on Page 2. re-numbered Notes 6 - 8 on Page 2.
3. Added two new references on Page 2.
4. Revised Installation Section Note 1 on Page 2.
5. Revised Figure 1 and added Figure 2 on Page 3. Re−numbered Figures 3 − 6 on Pages 5 - 8.
6. Revised Item 1 description in Table 1 on Page 4.

063929 Page 10 of 10 Rev. #10: 07-01-14

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook

Prepared by: EOB1

BOX-PAD FOR PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS 064309

Department: Electric T&D Section: T&D Engineering and Technical Support

Approved by: R. D. Kauzer (RDK6) Date: 10-28-05

Rev. #09: This document replaces PG&E Document 064309, Rev. #08. For a description of the changes, see Page 6.
This document is also included in the following manual:
S Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
Purpose and Scope
This document shows the requirements for the box-pad used with single-phase Style DF (see Document 064307),
duplex, and three-phase Style MTP (see Document 045290) transformers. This document applies to both radial
and looped primary circuit arrangements.

Applicant Notes

1. Prior to setting a pad, the applicant will request an inspection by PG&E. PG&E shall determine the acceptability of
each pad installation. The pad installation includes two ground rods and the interconnecting ground wire.
2. If required, the applicant shall provide suitable barriers for the protection of the transformer (refer to Document 051122).
3. The pads must be made by a PG&E-approved supplier. The approved suppliers are listed in Document 066211.

Fabrication Requirements

4. Box-pads are designed to fully encompass the transformer, including any radiators. Each pad shall hold the
full kVA range of the indicated style. The pad dimensions are based on the allowed transformer dimensions
shown in Document 064307.
5. The pads shall be permanently identified with manufacturer’s name, month and year of fabrication, nominal
weight, and PG&E code number in the area indicated in Figure 1 on Page 3.
6. The pads shall conform to Engineering Material Specification 21, “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads”.
7. The pads shall be designed to support transformers weighing 3,000 pounds.
8. Two 1/2”-13 UNC inserts for securing the transformer cabinet shall be provided as indicated. One 5/8”-11 UNC
insert shall be provided at the center of gravity for lifting the pad.
9. The inserts shall be installed flush with the surface of the pad.
10. The edges shall be rounded. Refer to Engineering Material Specification 21, “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads”.
11. The corners may be rounded. Refer to Engineering Material Specification 21, “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads”.

Installation Requirements

12. The transformer pad shall be placed on a firm 10-inch rock base, on top of native or engineered fill material, which
has been compacted to at least the requirements of Note 15 on Page 2.
13. The area under the pad shall be excavated to the required grade, or to a depth necessary to reach firm,
undisturbed material, whichever is deeper. The material may be considered firm if it cannot be penetrated by
thumb except with moderate effort.
14. If firm material has not been reached within a depth of 3 feet, excavate 3 feet beyond the perimeter of the pad,
and backfill the entire excavated area to the required grade and to the requirements of Note 15 on Page 2.

Rev. #09: 10-28-05 064309 Page 1 of 6

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

15. In case it is necessary to excavate deeper than the required grade to reach firm material, backfill to the required
grade in one of the following ways:
A. Backfill with clean, non-expansive soil compacted to 90% of maximum density. The soil shall be placed in
layers not more than 8 inches thick before compaction. Determine the maximum density and the in-place
density by the California Test Method No. 216-6, Parts I and II respectively, or by ASTM D-1556 and D-1557
respectively. A copy of the test results may be required by PG&E.
B. Backfill with soil or cement slurry consisting of one sack of Portland cement per cubic yard and clean native
soil or sand.
16. In areas of known soft soil conditions, trenches within the pad excavation area for the installation of conduits shall
be backfilled in one of the ways specified in Note 15.
17. In addition to the above requirements, the pads shall be placed on a 10-inch level rock base to provide uniform
bearing.
18. A minimum distance of 6 feet shall be maintained between the ground rods.
19. In general, all equipment pads should be installed as level as practicable. Pads supporting oil-filled equipment
must be leveled to within 1 inch in 8 feet in all directions.
Installation Procedure
Step 1. Excavate as required.
Step 2. Install the exterior ground rod and run the ground wire to the pad excavation.
Step 3. Place the primary conduit bends into the pad excavation.
Step 4. Place the secondary and the service conduit into the pad excavation.
Step 5. Compact and install the rock base. See “Installation Requirements”, Notes 15, 16, and 17.
Step 6. The exposed ends of the conduit bends should be about 1 inch above the gravel base.
Step 7. Install end bell fittings.
Step 8. Temporarily cap or plug all the conduits.
Step 9. Route the ground wire through the pad opening.
Step 10. Place the box-pad and backfill to the appropriate level for the pad.
Step 11. Install the interior ground rod.
Table 1 Bill of Materials
Item Quantity Description Code
1 1 Box-Pad, (as required − see Table 2 on Page 3) −
2 As Reqd. Wire, #2 AWG, Solid Bare Copper 290074
3 2 Ground Rod, 5/8” x 8’-0”, Copperclad (see Document 013109) 187013
4 2 Clamp, Ground Rod, (see Document 013109) 187012
5 As Reqd. Compacted Backfill −
6 As Reqd. Rock Base (compact 3/4” minus the rock base) −

References Document
Corrosion Resistant Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 013109
Engineering Material Specification No. 21, “Box-Pad Style Transformer Pads” . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS21
Engineering Material Specification No. 86, “Single-Phase and Three-Phase Pad-Mounted
Distribution Transformers” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS86
Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122
Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290
PG&E Approved Manufacturers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066211
Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex, Pad-Mounted Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307
Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex, Pad-Mounted Transformer Installations . . . . . . . . . . . 064308

064309 Page 2 of 6 Rev. #09: 10-28-05

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

Box-pads

Table 2 Dimensions for Pad−Box

Pad Code Dimension in Inches
Transformer
Number A B C D E I W
1-Wire, 2-Bushing Style DF-LB 360001 25 15 5.5 4 46 28 36
2-Wire, 4-Bushing Style DF-LB 360002 28 15 11 4 60 31 50
3-Wire, 6-Bushing Style DF-LB, Duplex and Style MTP 360003 37 15 6.5 4 60 40 50

See Note 5 on Page 1

5/8”-11 UNC Insert at Center of Gravity

C B
D

A
1/2”−13 UNC
C Insert 18”
I
52”
W

± 62”
± E

Figure 1
Box-Pad

Rev. #09: 10-28-05 064309 Page 3 of 6

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

Typical Box-Pad Installation

3 4 Group All Secondary and

1
Service Conduits Together
Near the Back of the Window

Secondary
Primary Conduit Section Conduit Section
2 C
L of Pad

See Detail A CL
of
Opening
±10”
±7” 2

3 4

Detail A
Placement of Conduits

Figure 2
Pad Top View
(50” x 52” x 18” box-pad shown)

Services

Group Phase
Sets Together
P/L

B P P
P P

Gas ±7”
±4”
Detail B
Placement of Single Cable Conduits
R/W
Primary Primary
Secondary Joint Trench Secondary
A A
Services Sweep Plastic Duct
(40-foot radius minimum)
B

Figure 3
Facilities Plan View

064309 Page 4 of 6 Rev. #09: 10-28-05

 UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook
Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

Typical Box-Pad Installation (continued)

4” 3” 3 4 Box-Pad
6” Grade

18”
1”
3 4 5
10”

2 6
Services
90° Bend
90° Bend w/36” Radius w/24” Radius
Sweeping Back into Trench, Primary
Primary and Secondary
Secondary
Secondary Primary

6’ Minimum
Section A-A
Pad Front View

3’ Minimum to Face of
Curb
R/W
Box-Pad
3” Above Pad See
2 3 4 Trench
Grade 4” Composite Grade

5 Joint Trench
Configuration
(see composite
3 4 6 for size and
10”
requirements)
6
2 Services
90° Bend
w/24” Radius

Service

90° Bend w/36” Radius

Sweeping Back into Trench,
Primary and Secondary
6’ Minimum

Section B-B
Pad Side View

Rev. #09: 10-28-05 064309 Page 5 of 6

UG-1: Transformers
Greenbook Box-Pad For Pad-Mounted Transformers

This document is also found in the Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook). This
document has been split. See Document 064309A in the “Transformers” section of the For Reference Only
Manual (FRO) for its remainder.

Revision Notes
Revision 09 has the following changes:
1. Revised Step 6 on Page 2 in the “Installation Procedure” section.

064309 Page 6 of 6 Rev. #09: 10-28-05

 OH: Services
UG-1: Services
Greenbook
EMWP

Prepared by: SXZO

OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND PANEL BOARD CONSTRUCTION 065374

Asset Type: Electric Metering Function: Design

Issued by: Dan Jantz (DWJ7) Date: 8/15/17

Rev. #12: This document replaces PG&E Document 065374, Rev. #11. For a description of the changes, see Page 6.

This document also is included in the following manuals:

• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (Greenbook)
• Electric Meter Work Practices (EMWP)
Purpose and Scope
This document illustrates the requirements applicable to residential, commercial, and agricultural overhead or
underground service installations served from PG&E’s lines. This document is applicable where panel-type structures
are used to mount customer-owned and installed equipment.
General Information
1. Construction Materials and Requirements
Ensure that all posts and panels on which the service and metering equipment are mounted meet the following
minimum requirements. Equipment can be mounted to a panel, boards, or struts. See Note 5 on Page 2 for the
maximum rating of service termination equipment.
A. Material Treatment and Specifications
(1) Ensure that the surface areas on all wood posts, boards, and solid panels are pressure treated, including
the sides. Any other treating process that provides an equivalent penetration and retention must be
approved by PG&E. Acceptable wood preservatives are water-borne salts and pentachlorophenol. Brush
application of wood preservatives is ineffective and therefore unacceptable.
(2) Pipe posts must be galvanized rigid steel.
(3) All metal boards or solid metal panels must be rigid steel and have a rust inhibitor applied to all surface
areas.
(4) Strut channels, fittings, and associated hardware must be stainless steel or galvanized steel.
B. Material Dimensions
(1) Structure: All structures must be a minimum length of 48 inches. For structures up to 72 inches long, the
minimum combined height of the boards, panel, or struts must be 36 inches. For structures up to 96
inches long, the minimum combined height of the boards, panel, or struts must be 42 inches. For
structures with lengths greater than 96 inches, use additional posts. The top of the structure must not
exceed 84 inches high from the ground. There must be a minimum of 6 inches of clearance between the
ground and all equipment, panels, boards, or struts.
(2) Boards: Place side by side.
(a) Wood: Minimum 2 inches thick by 12 inches wide (nominal).
(b) Metal: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 12 inches wide.
(3) Panel: One solid sheet.
(a) Wood: 1 inch thick.
(b) Metal: 1/4 inch thick.
(4) Struts: At a minimum, two struts are needed to support each piece of service and metering equipment. It
is recommended that one strut be attached towards the top and one strut be attached towards the bottom
of the equipment. Add struts for additional equipment with different length dimensions. Use struts with or
without boards or panels.
(a) Strut channel dimensions must be a minimum 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch. See Figure 9 on Page 6.

Rev. #12: 8/15/17 065374 Page 1 of 6

 OH: Services
UG-1: Services
Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction
EMWP

(5) Posts: Use minimum of two posts to support panel-type construction. Add more posts if the construction
exceeds the structural dimensions listed in Note 1B(1) on Page 1. If applicable, a PG&E-approved,
customer-owned pole can be used as one of the posts. The customer-owned pole must be installed in
accordance with Document 025055 and the panel board must be attached to the poles as shown in
Figures 8 on Page 5 and Figure 9 on Page 6.
(a) Wood: A cross section 6 inches x 6 inches or 8 inches in diameter.
(b) Metal: 3 inches in diameter.
C. Footing and Support
(1) Place all posts in the center of a 12 inches minimum diameter concrete footing. Extend the footing a
minimum of 36 inches into the ground (excluding gravel bedding), a minimum of 4 inches above ground
level, and have a 1/2 inch slope away from the post to allow for drainage.
D. Fasteners
(1) For wood posts, use minimum 3/8 inch x 5 inches lag screws.
(2) For metal posts, use 3/8 inch minimum through bolts with nuts and washers.
(3) For unistrut, use approved fasteners and hardware made for the strut channels.
E. Screw Holes or Openings
(1) All unused or exposed screw holes and openings must be tightly secured by plugging or filling the entire
hole with screws, bolts, or other type of metal fasteners. Sealants can be used along with the screws,
bolts, and other metal fasteners.
F. Clearances and Barrier Posts (see Document 051122)
(1) A minimum 36 inches of clear and level working space must be maintained in front of the panel board
structure at all times.
(2) If any part of the panel board structure is located within 36 inches of a thoroughfare or road, then install
barrier posts. If the thoroughfare or road has high vehicular traffic and the panel board structure is less
than 108 inches (9 feet) away, then install barrier posts.
(3) The panel board and customer owned pole (if installed) must not be located less than 10 feet from the
surface of the PG&E pole or within 10 feet of the vertical plane of a PG&E line.
2. Grounding: The customer is responsible for bonding and grounding all exposed, non-current-carrying metal
parts including all metal strut channels and posts, when used. Ground and bond in accordance with the
National Electrical Code (NEC) and local ordinances. PG&E prefers, but does not require, the grounding
electrode conductor wire to be protected against physical damage by rigid steel conduit or armored cladding.
3. A voltage stabilizer for 3-wire service will be furnished and installed by PG&E (see Document 052497).
4. Properly identify and mark meters as described in Section 5.5.1 on Page 5-10 of the Electric and Gas Service
Requirements Manual (Greenbook).
5. Termination or metering equipment with an ampacity rating greater than 400 amps, 3-phase or 600 amps,
1-phase must be pad-mounted (free standing). Refer to Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual
(Greenbook), Section 9.10.
6. The minimum meter height for electric panels with current transformers (CT’s) is 60 inches as measured from
final grade to the center of the meter. The maximum meter height is 75 inches.

References Location Document

Requirements for Customer-Owned Poles . . . . . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 025055
Location, Clearances, and Mechanical Protection
Details for Pad-Mounted and Subsurface Equipment UG-1: General/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 051122
Voltage Stabilizer for 480 Volt, Three-Phase, 3-Wire
Ungrounded Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Meters/EMWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 052497
Agricultural Underground Service, 500 hp or Less . . . . UG-1: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . 054619
Agricultural Overhead Service, 300 hp or Less . . . . . . OH: Services/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . 058087

065374 Page 2 of 6 Rev. #12: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
UG-1: Services
Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction Greenbook
EMWP

Typical Panel Board Construction

Notes
1. See Table 1 on Page 6 for the material list.
2. Item 2 may be replaced by Items 1 and 3.
See Note 1D on Page 2 for Fasteners

36”
Min.
Height 42”
Min.
Height
84” 48” - 72” Length
Max. 84”
Height Max.
3” Min. Galv. Rigid Steel Pipe
Height 48” − 96” Length
4” or 6” x 6” or 8” Dia. Wood Post
(see 1.B.(5) on Page 2) See 1.B.(1) on Page 1
Min.
6” Min. Ground
Clearance to
1/2” Slope Equipment or Panels
36” 4” Min.
Min. Concrete
Footing 1/2” Slope
36” Min.
6” Min. Ground Clearance
12” Min. to Equipment or Panels

Figure 1 Figure 2
Panel Board Construction With Struts Large Panel Board Construction With Struts

See Note 1D on Page 2 for Fasteners

Panels, Boards,
36” or Struts
Min. 42”
Panels, Boards,
Height Min.
or Struts
Height
84” 48” - 72” Length
Max. See 1.B.(1) 84”
Height on Page 1 Max.
4” 48” - 96” Length
Height
Min. 1/2” Slope 3” Min. Galv. Rigid 6” Min. Ground
Steel Pipe or 6” x 6” Clearance to
or 8” Dia. Wood Post Equipment or Panels
36” 4” Min. 1/2” Slope
Min.
Concrete
Footing
36”
36”Min.
Min.
6” Min. Ground Clearance
12” Min. to Equipment or Panels

Figure 3 Figure 4
Panel Board Construction Large Panel Board Construction

Rev. #12: 8/15/17 065374 Page 3 of 6

 OH: Services
UG-1: Services
Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction
EMWP

Typical Underground Panel Board Construction

14 13 Note: This type of configuration
is acceptable for
mounting multiple meters.

6 14

19

11
8
9 12

10
As Required
See Document 063927 6” Min.
1 or Document 063928

See Table 1 20
Footnote on 5 9 Increase Trench Depth to
Page 6 6’ Min. Accommodate for the Vertical
Figure 5 Radial Bend
Underground Service With Second Meter Panel

2 3 4

Control
Equipment

6
See Note 6 Voltage Stabilizer
on page 2
Voltage Stabilizer See Note 3
Alternate Location on Page 2
11
8 9
12

As Required 10
See Document 063927 6” Min.
1 or Document 063928
To
See Table 1 Load
Footnote on 5 20 9 Increase Trench Depth to
Page 6 6’ Min. Accommodate for the Vertical
Figure 6 Radial Bend
Underground Service Using Panel Board Construction

065374 Page 4 of 6 Rev. #12: 8/15/17

 OH: Services
UG-1: Services
Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction Greenbook
EMWP

Typical Overhead Panel Board Construction

17
Note: This type of configuration is
18
16 acceptable for mounting
multiple meters.
15

Do Not Offset Conduit More

Than 12 Inches
3 13 14 2
2
7

See Note 6 on page 2 Voltage Stabilizer

Alternate 11
Location
See Note 3 12
on Page 2 10

Figure 7
Overhead Service With Second Meter Panel

18 17
16
Control
Equipment
15
7
4

See Note 6 on page 2

11

12
10

Figure 8
Overhead Service Using Panel Board Construction

Rev. #12: 8/15/17 065374 Page 5 of 6

 OH: Services
UG-1: Services
Greenbook Overhead and Underground Panel Board Construction
EMWP

1-1/2” Min. 1-1/2” Min.

1-1/2” Min. 1-1/2” Min.

Figure 9
Typical Strut Channels Used for Panel Board Construction

Table 1 List of Material To Be Furnished and Installed by Customer

Item Description
1 Underground Pull Box, Required 1
2 Self-Contained, Bused Safety Socket Box
3 Combination Meter and Current Transformer Cabinet
(See Note 6 on Page 2)
4 Main Switch of Service Equipment Enclosure
5 Service Conduit, As Required
6 UG Panel Board Construction (See Figures 5 − 6)
7 OH Panel Board Construction (See Figures 7 − 8)
8 Post (See Note 1 on Page 1)
9 Conduit, Riser, Galvanized Rigid Steel, Continuous without Couplings
10 Ground Rod (See Note 2 on Page 2)
11 Ground Wire, Copper, Bare
12 Ground Clamp (As Required) for Item 10
13 Sealable Gutter
14 Metal Myers Hub With Close Nipple
15 Heavy Duty 2-Hole Pipe Strap Every 36”
16 PVC Schedule 40, minimum
17 Weatherhead
18 PG&E-Approved, Customer-Owned Pole
19 Termination Enclosure
20 Plastic−to−Steel Adapter/Coupling
1 The pull box is required to be installed but may be exempt at the discretion of the
PG&E inspector.

Revision Notes
Revision 12 has the following changes:
1. Revised Figure 5 and Figure 6 on Page 4.
2. Revised Figure 7 on Page 5.
3. Revised Table 1 on Page 6.

065374 Page 6 of 6 Rev. #12: 8/15/17

 Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

PG&E-APPROVED ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 066211

MANUFACTURERS

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design

Issued by: M.L. Thibault (MLTC) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #22: This document replaces PG&E Document 066211, Rev. #21 For a description of the changes, see Page 4.

Purpose and Scope

This document provides a list of PG&E-approved manufacturers of major materials for use in PG&E’s Electric
Distribution System.
Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers
Responsible
Material Engineer Approved Manufacturer
Arresters Sam Chang Joslyn, Ohio Brass, Tyco
Barrier Posts M.L. Thibault Allwire
Aluma-Form, Chance, Joslyn, Kortick,
Brackets, Overhead Eduardo Sanchez MacLean
Cable, Primary Lisseth Villareal Okonite, Prysmian
Cable, Secondary Lisseth Villareal General Cable (Alcan), Southwire
Capacitor Controls Eduardo Sanchez HD Electric, S&C (Energyline)
Capacitor, Overhead Eduardo Sanchez ABB, Cooper
Capacitor, Pad-Mounted Eduardo Sanchez Scott Engineering
Conduit, HDPE for Boring Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (AD Technologies)
Conduit, Smooth Core Flex Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (AD Technologies)
Prime Conduits (Carlon Bore-Gard),
Conduit, PVC for Boring Lisseth Villareal Certainteed CertaCom
Conduit, PVC, ASTM F512 DB120, Ridgeline Pipe Heritage, Prime (conduit),
Schedule 40 and 80, UL 90°C, DB120 Lisseth Villareal JM Eagle
Conduit,PVC, DB120 and Schedule 40,
Cellular Core Lisseth Villareal Rocky Mountain
Conduit, Steel Lisseth Villareal Allied, Western Tube
Conduit Fittings, Steel Lisseth Villareal Picoma, Shamrock
Conductor, Overhead Richard Kauzer General Cable (Alcan), Southwire
Connectors, Overhead, Automatic Splice Richard Kauzer Blackburn, Fargo, MacLean
Alcoa, Blackburn, Burndy, Homac,
Connectors, Overhead, Compression Richard Kauzer Hubbell, Nicopress
Connectors, Overhead, Dead-Ends Eduardo Sanchez EMC, Hubbell
Connectors, Overhead, Tap Clamp Richard Kauzer Hubbell, Maclean
Connectors, Overhead, Wedge Tap Richard Kauzer TE Connectivity (AMP)
Blackburn, Burndy, Homac, Hubbell,
Connectors, Underground, Compression Lisseth Villareal Kearney, Penn Union
Connectors, Underground, Pin Terminal Lisseth Villareal Homac
Connectors, Underground, Secondary Multi-Tap Bars Lisseth Villareal Blackburn, Homac
Connectors, Underground, Slip-Fit Transformer
Secondary Bars Lisseth Villareal Homac, Utilco

Rev. #22: 08-15-17 066211 Page 1 of 4

Greenbook
PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers (continued)

Responsible
Material Engineer Approved Manufacturer
Connectors, Underground, Shearbolt Lisseth Villareal TE-Connectivity
Connectors, Underground, Spade Terminals Lisseth Villareal Burndy, Dossert, Homac
Connectors, Underground, Split-Bolt Lisseth Villareal Blackburn, Burndy, Penn Union
Cutouts Sam Chang MacLean, Cooper, Hubbell
Disconnect Sam Chang Cooper, S&C
Elbows, 200 Amp Lisseth Villareal Cooper, Elastimold
Elbows, 600 Amp, Epoxy CP, and RTP Lisseth Villareal Elastimold, Richards, Cooper
EPDM CP and RTP Lisseth Villareal Elastimold, Richards
Madruga Iron Works, Jensen Precast,
Enclosure, Frames and Covers Lisseth Villareal Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast
Enclosure, Primary – Box, Concrete Lisseth Villareal (Utility Vault), Mid-State Concrete
Enclosure, Primary – Sectional Box, Concrete Lisseth Villareal Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Enclosure, Primary – Sectional Box, Non-Concrete Lisseth Villareal Hubbell (Strongwell/Quazite)
Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast
Enclosure, Secondary – Box, Concrete Lisseth Villareal (Utility Vault)
Hubbell (Strongwell/Quazite), Armorcast,
Enclosure, Secondary – Box, Polymer-Concrete Lisseth Villareal New Basis
Enclosure, Secondary – Pedestal Lisseth Villareal Armorcast, New Basis
Horstman/Power Delivery Products, SEL
Fault Indicator – Overhead Sam Chang (Schwertzer)
Fault Indicator – Underground Sam Chang Horstman/Power Delivery Products
Chance, Combined-Tech, Cooper,
Fuses Sam Chang Hi-Tech, Kearny, S&C
Ground Rods M.L. Thibault Calpico, Eritech, Galvan, Nehring
K−Line, MacLean, Salisbury, Advanced
Insulators, Dead-End, Silicon Eduardo Sanchez Rubber
Lapp, NGK, Porcelain Products, Victor,
Insulators, Line Eduardo Sanchez Hendrix, Preformed
Insulators, Standoff Sam Chang S&C
Interrupter – Pad-Mounted Ryan Kowdley Madruga, Thomas & Betts
Interrupter – Subsurface, 200 Amp Ryan Kowdley Trayer, Thomas & Betts
Interrupter – Subsurface, 600 Amp Ryan Kowdley Trayer
Interrupter – Vault-Mounted Ryan Kowdley Thomas & Betts, G&W
Madruga, Maysteel, Patton & Cooke,
Junctions, Primary – Pad-Mounted Lisseth Villareal Scott
Junctions, Primary – Subsurface Lisseth Villareal Elastimold, Inertia
Jensen Precast, Teichart Brooks,
Pad, Capacitor Eduardo Sanchez Oldcastle Precast (Utility Vault)
Pad, Junction, Primary – Pad-Mounted Lisseth Villareal Hubbell
Pad, Switch, Box Ryan Kowdley New Basis, Hubbell/Quazite
Jensen Precast, Mid-State Concrete,
Pad, Switch, Concrete Ryan Kowdley StructureCast, Teichart Brooks, Oldcastle
Precast (Utility Vault)
Armorcast, CDR, New Basis,
Pad, Transformer, Box M.L. Thibault Strongwell/Quazite

066211 Page 2 of 4 Rev. #22: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Table 1 PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers (continued)

Responsible
Material Engineer Approved Manufacturer
Jensen Precast, Mid-State Concrete,
Pad, Transformer, Concrete M.L. Thibault Structure Cast, Teichart Brooks, Oldcastle
Precast (Utility Vault)
Photocontrol, Streetlight 1 Richard Kauzer ALR, DTL, Fisher Pierce, Sun-Tech
Poles, Wood, Distribution (taller than 35 feet) Richard Kauzer McFarland Cascade
Koppers, McFarland Cascade, Nevada
Poles, Wood, Service Richard Kauzer Wood Preserving, Thunderbolt Wood
Treating
Pulling Lubricant Lisseth Villareal Dura-Line (Arnco), Polywater
Dura-Line (Arnco), Herculine, Nepco,
Pulling Tape Lisseth Villareal Wellington
Recloser Sam Chang Cooper
Recloser Controller Sam Chang Cooper
Regulator, Voltage Eduardo Sanchez Cooper, Howard Industries
Jensen Precast, Oldcastle Precast (Utility
Retaining Wall Lisseth Villareal Vault)
Sectionalizer Sam Chang Cooper
Elastimold, 3M, TE Connectivity
Splices, UG Insulated, Primary Lisseth Villareal (Raychem)
Cold-shrink Y and H Splices, UG Insulated Primary Lisseth Villareal Richards, TE Connectivity
Splices, UG Insulated, Secondary Lisseth Villareal 3M
Switches, Controllers, Overhead, SCADA Marlon Viduya S&C
Switches, Controllers, Subsurface, SCADA Marlon Viduya S&C, Trayer
Switches, Fused – Pad-Mounted Ryan Kowdley S&C
Switches, Fused – Subsurface Ryan Kowdley ABB, Trayer
Switches, Overhead, Manual Sam Chang Cooper, Inertia, S&C
Switches, Pad-Mounted Ryan Kowdley S&C, Thomas & Betts
Switches, Subsurface 200 Amp, Manual Ryan Kowdley ABB, Trayer, ISSI
Switches, Subsurface 600 Amp, Manual Ryan Kowdley Trayer
Termination, Silicone Cold Shrink Lisseth Villareal 3M, TE Connectivity (Raychem)
Transformer, Potential, Dry-Type, Outdoor Overhead M.L. Thibault ABB,GE
Transformer, Potential, Dry-Type, Submersible M.L. Thibault ABB
Transformer, Potential, Liquid-Filled,
Outdoor Overhead M.L. Thibault ABB, Mid Central
Howard Industries, Power Partners,
Transformers, Single-Phase Overhead M.L. Thibault Cooper
Transformers, Single-Phase Pad-Mounted M.L. Thibault ABB, Cooper, Howard Industries
Transformers, Single-Phase Subsurface M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries, Power Partners
Transformers, Single-Phase Subway M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries
Transformers, Three-Phase Network, Dry-Type M.L. Thibault ABB
Transformers, Three-Phase Network, Liquid Filled M.L. Thibault ABB, GE
Transformers, Three-Phase Overhead M.L. Thibault Howard Industries, Power Partners
Transformers, Three-Phase Pad-Mounted M.L. Thibault ABB, Cooper, Howard Industries,
Transformers, Three-Phase Subsurface M.L. Thibault ABB, Howard Industries
1 Fully electronic, utility grade, meeting ANSI C136.10 requirements, turn on at 1.0 ± 0.2 foot candle (fc),
turn off at 1.5 ± 0.3 fc.

Rev. #22: 08-15-17 066211 Page 3 of 4

Greenbook
PG&E-Approved Electric Distribution Materials Manufacturers

Notes
1. This document may be updated between book publishings. Contact your local PG&E representative to obtain the
latest version.
2. Each approved manufacturer does not necessarily supply all of the approved variations in each commodity.
3. New Basis is the parent company of Associated Plastic Products and Associated Concrete International.

Revision Notes
Revision 22 has the following changes:
1. Updated Table 1 Pages 1 through 3 to current status.

066211 Page 4 of 4 Rev. #22: 08-15-17

 Greenbook
Electric Design Manual

Prepared by: SXZO

SERVICE TO CELLULAR ON TRANSMISSION TOWER 068179

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design

Issued by: D. H. Mulkey (DHM3) Date: 07−01−14

Rev. #08: This document replaces PG&E Document 068179, Rev. #07. For a description of the changes, see Page 2.
Purpose and Scope
This document establishes safety policy, tariff interpretation, and electric service installation guidelines when providing
service to wireless carriers with antennas located on high-voltage transmission towers and poles (60 kV and above).
General Information
1. When cellular antennas are located on high-voltage transmission towers and poles, take special safety
precautions when providing normal 120 V/240 V service to their base-station equipment. The base-station
equipment normally is located on a pad (typically a concrete pad) directly under the tower (see Figure 1) or
adjacent to the transmission-line tower (see Figure 2). There is a direct metallic path from the antenna to the
base-station equipment ground bus, which also is connected to the service neutral and ground from the incoming
power service. Should a fault occur on the transmission tower, fault current and voltage could transfer into the
service neutral and meter. Normal construction practices for meter installations
do not always provide adequate protection for personnel touching the meter and standing on the ground from
experiencing “touch voltages” in excess of the allowable limits.

Ground Grid Conductors

Buried 18” Below Earth
Surface Immediately
Around Tower Footprint

Tower Footprint
3’ 0” 3’ 0”
30 Ft.
3’ 0” Tower Min.
Footprint
Equipment
3’ 0” Shelter
3’ 0” 3’ 0”

Equipment Pad
3’ 0” 3’ 0”
Ground Grid Conductors
Buried 18” Below Earth
Surface Around Tower
Tower Foundation Footprint and 3’ Outside
Figure 1 (typical)
Base Station Under Tower Equipment Pad

Figure 2
Base Station Not Under Tower

Rev. #08: 07−01−14 068179 Page 1 of 2

Greenbook
Electric Design Manual Service to Cellular on Transmission Tower

Guidelines
2. The applicant must determine the predicted RMS ground potential rise, GPRRMS. . The GPRRMS may be shown
at http://wwwt2/Weather/ATS/Grounding/Substation.asp.
3. If the primary distribution system from which the cell site will be served is a uni-ground system
(i.e.,12 kV, 17 kV, 3-wire 21 kV, or a primary neutral), and the predicted GPR is above 12,470 V symmetrical, then
a dedicated transformer is required. On 3-wire primary systems, a transmission-line ground fault at the cell-site
tower may create a very high ground-potential rise and become a safety concern. The PG&E transformer must be
a dedicated transformer, serving only the cell site (now and forever), and the meter pedestal must be installed
within the cell-site ground grid with a switch platform in front (see Note 8 below) to ensure that personnel will be
standing on the equipment pad when they touch the meter. To ensure that no other customers share the 120
V/240 V neutral connection with these cell sites, these customers must have a dedicated service transformer that
feeds only the cell sites.
4. If the GPR is 12,470 V symmetrical or less, or if the primary distribution system from which the cell site will be
served is a multi-grounded system (i.e., 4-wire, 21 kV common neutral), the site is treated as a normal Rule 16
service except the meter pedestal must be installed within the cell-site ground grid with a switch platform in front
(see Note 8 below) to ensure that personnel will be standing on the equipment pad when they touch the meter.
PG&E is responsible for planning, designing, and engineering its service extension using PG&E’s standards for
design, materials, and construction (Rule 16 A.1).

Requirements
5. Electric Rule 2 special facility charges apply to any additional costs if the application requires a dedicated
transformer.
6. If cell sites are on the same tower, they can share the ground grid and transformer. If the cell sites are on two
adjacent towers and the towers are on the same transmission circuit, they can share the ground grid and
transformer.
7. Cell sites on towers of different transmission circuits may not share the same transformer.
8. The applicant must install a 3’ x 3’ operating switch platform, Material Code M155036 (Document 034851),
centered 6” in front of the meter pedestal and interconnect the platform with the cell-site ground grid using
a 250 Cu conductor.
9. Any deviation from these guidelines requires a specific engineering analysis and design to develop sufficient
compensatory design to provide touch and step protection to personnel working on the meter or cell-site
equipment. Please contact applied technology services engineering personnel for assistance.
10. Installations with meters that are not within the cell-site ground grid require an isolation transformer for protection.
When performing work is at such a location without an isolation transformer, correct the meter installation by
either installing an isolation transformer or by extending the cell-site ground grid to encompass the meter.
Inspections
11. Distribution employees are responsible for inspecting work on the PG&E side of the meter.

Revision Notes
Revision 08 has the following changes:
1. Revised Note 2 above to indicate that the GPR to be used is the symmetrical value.
2. Revised Note 3 above to “uni-ground” instead of “not solidly grounded.”
3. Revised Notes 6 and 7 above to refer to “transformer” rather than “service.”

068179 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #08: 07−01−14

 UG-1 General
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

REQUIREMENTS FOR ALLOWING INSTALLATION OF SUBSURFACE 072149

TRANSFORMERS

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: Lisseth Villareal (LDV2) Date: 07-31-15

Rev. #05: This document replaces Document 072149, Rev. #04. For a description of the changes, see Page 3.

Purpose and Scope

This document provides special requirements for allowing the installation of a subsurface transformer. Refer to
Engineering Standard Document 076255, Underground Transformer Selection, for determination of the preferred
transformer locations.

General Information

Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformer:

Where PG&E has suitable equivalent standard subsurface transformers and the applicant pays the special facilities
charges, subsurface transformers may be installed in lieu of pad-mount, however:

1. Subsurface transformers may not be installed:

A. Where heavy erosion occurs which may fill the enclosure with soil.
B. Where heavy snowfall occurs (generally above 3,000 foot elevation).
C. In areas not graded to prevent surface water from readily flowing into enclosure.
D. In areas routinely sprayed for mosquitoes.
E. Within a flood hazard area (any zone as delineated Flood Insurance Rate Map for the site).
F. In areas where design ground water level is within 3 feet below grade.
G. In a drainage, a swale, or percolated area, etc.

2. The subsurface enclosure must be designed in accordance with the requirements of Document 062000, and
Engineering Material Specification 53 as modified by the provisions herein.
A. Low Design Groundwater Level is the condition where the design groundwater level is at or below the
excavation depth of the enclosure as noted in Document 062000 (examples: 6’ 6” below grade for the
incidental 4’ x 6’ 6” transformer enclosure and 9’ below grade for the incidental 4’ 6” x 8’ 6” UCD transformer
enclosure).
B. High Design Groundwater Level is the condition where the design groundwater level is above the excavation
depth of the enclosure as noted in Document 062000.

3. All requests to use subsurface transformers require soil chloride testing, and determination of design ground
water level to determine the suitability of soil conditions if not already disallowed for the reasons in 1.
A. Soil chloride testing and design groundwater level determination is the responsibility of the applicant. PG&E
does not reimburse the applicant for the cost.

4. Soil chloride testing may be omitted if the applicant elects to provide exterior waterproofing of the subsurface
enclosure, or where waterproofing (see Note 8 on Page 2) of the exterior surface is otherwise required such as
in high design groundwater table.
A. Soil chloride testing must be performed under the supervision of a state licensed professional corrosion or
geotechnical engineer.

Rev. #05: 07-31-15 072149 Page 1 of 3

UG-1 General
Greenbook Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformers

B. Soil chloride tests shall be taken in the vicinity of the proposed subsurface transformer in a location chosen to
be adequately representative of all soil strata that could impact the structure of the enclosure or the equipment
in the enclosure, as determined and stated on the report submitted by the state licensed professional engineer
in responsible charge.
C. The soil must be tested for chloride by one of the following applicable standards:
Chloride content per ASTM D4327, ASTM D512, CTM 422, or AASHTO T−291
If Chloride content is greater than 5,000 parts per million (ppm), enclosure requires waterproofing.

5. Groundwater level determination shall be performed by a state licensed professional geotechnical engineer and
shall be based on site−specific borings and other information as deemed suitable by the state licensed
geotechnical engineer in responsible charge.

6. Enclosures in low design groundwater level areas and where chloride content is greater than 5,000 ppm require
waterproofing. If chloride content is less than 5,000 ppm, install the enclosure per Document 062000.

7. Enclosures in high design groundwater level areas require waterproofing.

8. Waterproofing includes the following:

A. Sealing of all conduits (terminators) entering the enclosure.
B. Application of waterproofing membrane on all exterior surfaces including the bottom of the bottom slab.
Waterproofing may be applied by the supplier or it may be applied in the field. Where extensions are added in
the field, seal the joint with the required sealant prior to installation of the extension, then apply the
waterproofing over the joint. Note: ground rods shall be installed before backfilling and while temporary control
of groundwater is in place. Seal ground rod holes with wet-use epoxy.
C. Application of protection boards on all exterior surfaces including the bottom of the bottom slab to prevent
membrane damage during backfill operations.
D. Sealing of joints between enclosure sections or extensions.
E. Sealing of ground rod holes.
F. Do no break out the four knockouts located on the bottom slab of the enclosure.

Materials used for Waterproofing the Enclodosure

1. Waterproofing Membrane: Tremco’s TREMproof 250 GC fluid applied elastomeric waterproofing Membrane,
minimum 215 mils wet thickness; Carlisle’s CCW Miradri 860/861 self−adhering sheet membrane, with
manufacturer’ recommended adhesive primer; or approved equal

2. Protection Board: Tremco’s HPDP−60 protection sheet: Carlisle’s CCW 200V Protection Fabric, or approved
equal.

3. Rayflate Duct Sealing System (RDSS) conduit seal. Refer to Document 062288.

072149 Page 2 of 3 Rev. #05: 07-31-15

 UG-1 General
Greenbook
Requirements for Allowing Installation of Subsurface Transformers

References Location Document

Single-Phase, Subsurface, Round Transformers . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035313
Underground Commercial Distribution, Three-Phase,
Subsurface Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 039830
Live-Front, Low-Profile, Single-Phase,
Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 042761
Radial, Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 043816
Loop-Style, Three-Phase, Pad Mounted Transformers UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045290
Duplex-Type, Three-Phase, Subsurface Transformer . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 051776
Horizontal, Single-Phase, Subsurface Transformers . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 060578
Primary Electric Underground Equipment Enclosures . UG-1: Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062000
Application of Underground Distribution Transformers UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 062111
Underground Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 062288
Single-Phase, Dead-Front, and Duplex, Pad-Mounted
Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 064307
Pad-Mount Transformers, Style IIG and IIH . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 072146
Underground Transformer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 076255
Design Requirements for Primary Electric
Distribution Concrete Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 53

Revision Notes
Revision 05 has the following changes:
1. Revised entire document. Portions were moved to new Document 076255 Underground Transformer Selection.

Rev. #05: 07-31-15 072149 Page 3 of 3

 UG:1: General
Greenbook

Prepared by: ABB1

PAINTING OF PG&E ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION PAD-MOUNTED 076268

AND SUBSURFACE EQUIPMENT

Asset Type: Electric Distribution Function: Design and Construction

Issued by: M.L. Thibault (MLTC) Date: 08-15-17

Rev. #00: This is a new document.

Purpose and Scope

This document specifies the requirements necessary and background information available for supporting denial of
requests from those other than PG&E concerning modification of exterior coatings for Distribution Pad−Mounted
Equipment.

General Information

This document is also included in the following manuals:

• Electric and Gas Service Requirements Manual (“Greenbook”)

References Location Document

General Order (G.O.) 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.O. 128
Marking, Numbering, and Identification
of Line Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OH: Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 022168
Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Switches and Fuses . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 053318
Installation of Three-Phase, Pad-Mounted
Transformer, Ground Level or Dry Vaults . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . . 057521
Landscape Screen for Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . Greenbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 063422
Box-Pad for Pad-Mounted Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: Transformers/Greenbook . . . . . . . . 064309
Pad-Mount Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG-1: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066197
Installation of Pad-Mounted, Load-Break Junction . . . . . UG-1: Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 066212
Engineering Material Specification 86, “Single-Phase,
and Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Distribution
Transformers” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS 86
Engineering Material Specification 91,
“Single-Phase and Three-Phase Subsurface
Distribution Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMS91
Background

1. Pacific Gas and Electric Utility (PG&E) receives requests from many Groups such as Service Organizations,
Cities, and Counties requesting approvals for painting or placing murals on PG&E distribution line assets
(Pad-mount Transformer, Switches, Capacitors, etc.) for many well-meaning reasons and causes. PG&E
distribution assets are prohibited from being painted by any other than those in the employ or contracted by
PG&E.

2. Existing Assets which may have previously been painted by those other than PG&E prior to the issuance of this
document will not be allowed to “freshen up” or repaint existing assets post issuance of this document.

3. California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) General Order (G.O.) 128, Rule 17.8 requires that subsurface and
pad-mounted equipment be clearly marked as to ownership. To comply with this rule, PG&E requires
standardized signage on these devices which identifies them as PG&E utility assets. these requirements are
contained within the corresponding Engineering Material Specifications (EMS).

Rev. #00: 08-15-17 076268 Page 1 of 2

UG:1: General
Greenbook Painting of PG&E Electric Distribution Pad-Mounted
and Subsurface Equipment
A Signage identifies these devices by their operating number making it quick and easy for PG&E Employees to
locate and identify these devices in the event of emergencies or for the purposes of required maintenance and
inspection.
B Uniformity and consistency of the exterior color and pattern assist in locating and identifying these devices.
Non-Uniformity of color as well covering of signage on these devices could prolong restoration efforts and
desensitize the general public from the dangers of tampering and/or not maintaining clearances from these
Assets.

4. California and Federal Law have cases which guide how PG&E would have to perform were this altering of
Assets allowed. Current procedures and processes disallow PG&E from implementing these requirements when
overlaid on Operational Procedures.

5. Allowing cities and their citizens to paint on public utility assets creates two possibly significant legal issues
concerning ownership of the painting and a third party s right to express their views on our equipment.
A California law protects “fine art” including murals painted on someone else’s (i.e., Utility s) property.
(Cal. Civ. Code § 987(a).) The code provides that once a mural is painted on the surface (transformer housing,
for example), only the artist or his or her heirs (until 50 years after the artist’s death), may authorize “any
physical defacement, mutilation, alteration, or destruction of a work of fine art.” (Cal. Civ. Code § 987(c)(1).)
B In Pacific Gas and Electric. Co. v. Public Util. Comm. (1985) 475 U.S. 1 the United States Supreme Court
ruled that PG&E had a right to control access to its property for expressive purposes so long as we did not
open that property as a forum for public expression. The court contrasted PG&E’s right with other property
owners who had allowed their private property to be used for some types of public expression; the court held
that that property had become a public forum and the owners could not thereafter exclude other speakers and
other messages from their property.

Examples of Painted Assets

Figure 1
Examples of Enclosures in Violation of Note 2 (above)

Revision Notes
Revision 00 has the following changes:
1. This is a new document.

076268 Page 2 of 2 Rev. #00: 08-15-17